The United Nations Development Program – UNDP
Bidding Documents for Procurement of:
Contract No. NCB AH-CW01
Issued on: July 2008
NCB No: NCB AH-CW01
Employer: The United Nations Development Program- UNDP
VOLUME II: Technical Specifications
The United Nations Development Program – UNDP
Bidding Documents for Procurement of:
Contract No. NCB AH-CW01
Issued on: July 2008
NCB No: NCB AH-CW01
Employer: The United Nations Development Program- UNDP
VOLUME II: Technical Specifications
Part A
ARCHITECTURAL & CIVIL
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME II / Part A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Item
Title
Page
From
ARCHITECTURAL AND CIVIL WORKS:
Thru
To
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
02100-03
02110-01
02210-01
02211-01
02219-05
02221-04
02229-01
02260-01
02480-01
02483-06
02513-03
02521-02
02577-02
SCOPE OF WORK
DIVISION - 01: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Not Applicable
DIVISION - 02: EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING AND SITE WORK
02100
02110
02210
02211
02219
02221
02229
02260
02480
02483
02513
02521
02577
02100-01
02110-01
02210-01
02211-01
02219-01
02221-01
02229-01
02260-01
02480-01
02483-01
02513-01
02521-01
02577-01
Excavations and Earthworks
Site Clearing
Site Grading
Rock Removal
Structure Excavation and Backfill
Trenching
Rock Removal
Finish Grading
Landscape Development
Landscape Planting
Asphaltic Concrete Paving
Pre-Cast Concrete Units
Pavement Marking
DIVISION - 03: CONCRETE WORK
3
03100
03200
03215
Concrete Formwork
Concrete Reinforcement
Doweling for Concrete
03100-01
03200-01
03215-01
thru
thru
thru
03100-03
03200-02
03215-03
03251
03300
03346
Expansion, Contracting and Control Joints
Cast-In-Place Concrete
Concrete Floor Finishing
Concrete Curing
Grout
03251-01
03300-01
03346-01
thru
thru
thru
03251-04
03300-09
03346-02
03370-01
03600-01
thru
thru
03370-01
03600-03
04100-01
04220-01
04450-01
04455-01
thru
thru
thru
thru
04100-01
04220-03
04450-06
04455-05
05500-01
05520-01
thru
thru
05500-04
05520-02
06200-01
thru
06200-02
03370
03600
DIVISION - 04: MASONRY WORKS
04100
04220
04450
04455
Mortar
Concrete Masonry Unit
Natural Stone Work
Natural Marble
DIVISION - 05: METALS
05500
05520
Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications
Handrails and Railings
DIVISION - 06: WOOD AND PLASTIC
06200
Finish Carpentry
-A-
Volume II (A) ToC/ Yr. 2008
DIVISION - 07: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07111
07120
07181
07212
07535
07600
07900
Bituminous Membrane Waterproofing Underground Works
Fluid Applied Waterproofing
Elastomeric Waterproofing System
Rockwool Insulation
Modified Bitumen Roofing Membrane
Flashing and Sheet Metal
Sealants
07111-01
07120-01
07181-01
07212-01
07535-01
07600-01
07900-01
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
07111-02
07120-02
07181-02
07212-01
07535-05
07600-02
07900-02
08110-01
08111-01
08210-01
08305-01
08520-01
08700-01
08800-01
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
08110-01
08111-01
08210-02
08305-02
08520-02
08700-01
08800-02
DIVISION - 08: DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110
08111
08210
08305
08520
08700
08800
Steel Doors
Standard Steel Frames
Wood door and frames
Access Doors
Aluminium Windows and Doors
Hardware
Glazing
Item
Title
Page
From
Thru
To
09220-01
09260-01
09310-01
09410-01
09510-01
09513-01
09610-01
09695-01
09900-01
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
09220-04
09260-02
09310-02
09410-03
09510-02
09513-02
09610-05
09695-02
09900-06
DIVISION - 09: FINISHES
09220
09260
09310
09410
09510
09513
09610
09695
09900
Potrland Cement Plaster
Gypsum Board Systems
Ceramic Tiles
Portland Cement Terrazzo
Acoustical Ceiling
Metal Tiles False Ceiling System
Stone Flooring
Carpeting with Underlay
Painting
DIVISION - 10: SPECIALTIES
Not Applicable
DIVISION - 11: EQUIPMENT
Not Applicable
DIVISION - 12: FURNISHING
Not Applicable
DIVISION - 13: SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Not Applicable
DIVISION - 14: CONVEYING SYSTEMS
Not Applicable
-B-
Volume II (A) ToC/ Yr. 2008
SCOPE OF WORK
ARCHITECTURAL WORKS, STRUCTURAL WORKS, MECHANICAL WORKS, ELECTRICAL
WORKS, EXTERNAL WORKS AND SUNDRY ITEMS OF THE CONSTRUCTION OF:
Construction of Ramallah Central Veterinary Laboratory –
Ramallah District
BACKGROUND
The United Nations Development Programme with funds from the World Bank is
assisting the Palestinian Authority in increasing its level of preparedness to prevent
and control potential Avian Influenza threats in the West Bank and Gaza Strip.
The grant design includes a number of activities in the fields of policy and planning,
disease surveillance, and capacity development grouped under two main
components: the Animal Health and Human Health components.
Building the Palestinian national response to prevent and control AI infections in
humans is considered an item of utmost importance to the Palestinian National
Committee for AI control, the Palestinian Ministry of Health, the UN community, and
the Word Bank.
In accordance with the objectives of the above grant, UNDP seeks to assist the
Veterinary Department in the Palestinian Authority increase its level of preparedness
for AI and other zoonotic diseases prevention and control. One of the major tools to
achieve that is to establish a Veterinary Laboratory according to the International Bio
safety Standards (levels1, 2, and 3), such laboratory when becomes functional will
act as a diagnostic facility that will give the first warning to decision makers in the
MOA to act and to start their prevention and control measures when AI outbreak
happens.
The work under this contract comprises the construction, completion and
maintenance of:
Part one: Veterinary laboratory building of one floor of around (685) m2 and a roof
of around (60) m2.
The first floor comprises the below departments:
1- Entrance, offices, archive, small kitchenette and toilets.
2- Four laboratory zones of bio-safety one two and three (food hygiene lab,
parasitological lab, bacteriological lab and the virological lab).
The roof will encompass the electromechanical room.
The construction will be made for the whole building (ground and first floor) with total
space area (685m2) and (60ms) respectively as reflected in the BOQ (volume I-A) and
the technical drawings (volume III).
The finishing and the electromechanical works will be furnished only for part of the
building with a total area around (380 m2) as reflected in the BOQ (Volume I-A) and the
technical drawings (Volume III).
Part two: Small Guard Room with area around 35 m2
The work will include the construction and finishing work for this small building as
reflected in the BOQ (volume I-A) and the technical drawings (volume III).
Part three: External works
The external works work conclude environmentally friendly landscape comprising
gravity walls with fencing as boundary walls surrounding the project site, pathways,
sidewalks, plantation, and other sundry items as reflected in the BOQ (volume I-A) and
the technical drawings (volume III).
SECTION 02100
EXCAVATIONS AND EARTHWORKS
PART 1
GENERAL
This Section shall be read in conjunction with Sections 02110, 02210 and 02219. In case of
discrepancy between this specification and the above sections, this specification shall take
precedence.
1.01
Scope Of Work
The Contractor shall provide all requisite equipment, labor and materials, necessary for
executing the excavation works, in a manner that will meet the Project Manager’s acceptance
and approval.
The work to be carried out by the Contractor, shall include, not by way of limitation, but in
amplification to what is shown on the drawings and /or, the existing site conditions and/or the
structural Project Managering requirements, or all, for the full and proper execution of the
proposed Project, the following :
Removal of all vegetation including the grubbing out of roots, within the site area.
Excavations to reduce level within the Site area.
Grading to required levels and sub - grade preparations.
Stock piling of the suitable excavated soil for back-filling under the Project Manager’s
supervision.
Loading and carting away of surplus and /or unsuitable excavated material, and the disposal of
same to an approved dumping area.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.02
Weather Limitations
Material excavated during inclement weather shall not be used as fill or backfill until after
material drains and dries sufficiently for proper compaction.
1.03
A.
Inspection Of The Site Documents
The Report on Geotechnical Investigations for the Project Site (Which includes the results of
the field and laboratory investigation, geotechnical analysis and interpretation of the findings,
and conclusions and recommendations to aid the design and construction of foundations) may
be inspected at the Project Manager’s office. This inspection shall be for the Contractor's
information and guidance only, but without guarantee of accuracy, and therefore does not form
part of the Contract Documents.
No claim for extra compensation or extension of time will be allowed on account of subsurface
conditions inconsistent with the data given in the Report on "Geotechnical Investigations" or for
want of knowledge of the Site or the nature of the sub-soil.
The contractor shall visit the Site and make all investigation which he deems necessary to
ascertain the nature of the existing ground and the sub-soil to be excavated, and shall if he
wishes to do so, drill as much boreholes as he deems necessary to satisfy himself as to the
form and nature of the sub soil, and the existing site conditions in general.
The plans, surveys, measurements, and dimensions under which the work is to be performed
are believed to be correct, but the contractor shall have examined them for himself during the
bidding period, as no additional compensation will be made for errors or inaccuracies that may
be found therein.
B.
C.
D.
1.04
Profiles
The Contractor shall provide and erect profiles, templates, sight rails and the like and properly
set out the proposed works from the base lines, levels, coordinates or datum given by the
Project Manager’s, and/or indicated on the drawings, or both.
1.05
Bench Marks
Establish permanent bench marks determined by an approved land surveyor or professional
civil Project Manager. Maintain all established bounds and bench marks and replace as
directed those which are destroyed or disturbed due to the excavation operations, at no cost to
the Employer.
02100 - 1
Excavations & Earthworks
1.06
A.
B.
PART 2
Site Survey
As soon as the Site is handed over to the Contractor, and before commencing any excavation
works, the contractor shall at his own expense, carry out a check on the Site survey submitted
by the Employer for the whole project Site; prepare and submit for the Project Manager
approval a grid plan; the grid sides shall be 5 meters with levels taken at the corners, and all
levels shall be referred to the approved bench mark; verify all levels and dimensions and notify
the Project Manager in writing of any discrepancies. Do not proceed with excavation works until
discrepancies have been corrected and are acceptable to the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall also be responsible for the accurate setting out of excavations and for
keeping all reference axes and bench marks reasonably clear, and far from the working area.
PREPARATION
2.01
Site Clearance
The Contractor shall carry out Site clearance which shall include clearing out the whole site
area of all kinds of vegetation, debris, rubbish, etc., including the grubbing out of roots,
including loading and carting away to an approved dumping area prior to any site preparation
and /or setting - out is begun.
2.02
A.
Preparation And Setting - Out
Before any particular excavation is begun, the Contractor shall submit for the Project Manager
approval his proposals for marking the area to be excavated and for controlling the depth and
profile of the excavation to the dimensions and levels shown on the drawings. The Contractor
shall give the Project Manager not less than 24 hours notice in writing of his intention to set out
the works to enable the Project Manager to make arrangements for checking. The check by
the Project Manager shall in no way absolve the Contractor from his responsibility for settingout the Works correctly.
Establish extent of excavation by area and elevation; designate and identify datum elevation.
Set required lines and levels.
Maintain bench marks, and other reference points.
B.
C.
D.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
EXECUTION
Excavations Generally
Excavation works shall be carried out in any type of soil met with during the course of
excavation, whether earth, clay, gravel, sand, conglomerates, boulders, solid rock or any other
material to any depth, as shown on the drawings or as directed and instructed by the Project
Manager.
Where excavation works are carried out by power excavating equipment such as bulldozers,
power shovels and back-hoes, power drills, or any other equipment which the contractor may
propose to use, sufficient depth shall be left unexcavated to enable the exact depth required to
be obtained by hand excavation.
Excavations shall be to the lines, levels and dimensions indicated on the drawings, or instructed
by the Project Manager’s.
All foundations shall be placed on undisturbed soil.
Should any excavation be made below the levels shown on the drawings, or those required by
the Project Manager’s, the excess depth of excavation shall be filled with rubber or mass
concrete of 20 Mpa characteristic compressive strength, at the contractor's own expense.
The use of explosives on site is strictly forbidden, and in no case shall the contractor or his
employees revert to the use of explosives of whatever type or size.
The Contractor shall keep the area around excavations clear for a distance of one meter in all
directions until concrete is placed and has set.
The bottom of footings and foundation excavations shall be cut true to level and kept clean of
loose material and debris at all times. Bottoms of excavations will be inspected and approved
by the Project Manager’s before foundations or pipes are laid.
The Contractor will be held responsible for upholding the sides of excavations, and no claim for
additional excavations, concrete, or other material will be considered in this respect, not
withstanding the methods the Contractor elects to adopt for upholding the sides of excavation.
02100 - 2
Excavations & Earthworks
3.02
A.
B.
C.
3.03
A.
B.
C.
3.04
A.
B.
3.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
Excavation's Safety
All excavation works shall be carried out in a safe manner to the lines and levels shown on the
drawings or to such lines and levels as the Project Manager may direct as the work proceeds,
depending on the nature of the ground exposed. The Contractor shall provide timbering, or
use other approved methods to support the sides of excavations in such a way as to minimize
ground movement.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all safety measures needed to support the sides of the
excavations for the safety of workers in particular, and the works in general.
The from time-to-time directions by the Project Manager’s shall not relieve the Contractor of
his Contractual obligations to maintain the sides of excavation's safety and to ensure safety of
the workers and the works.
Reducing Levels
All excavations for reducing levels shall be carried out to the lines and levels shown on the
drawings or to such lines and levels as ordered by the , Project Manager’s.
If, from any cause whatsoever, excavations are carried out beyond their true line and level
other than that ordered by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall, at his own cost , make
good to the required lines and levels with mass concrete as instructed by the Project Manager
All Excavations shall be performed so that the works are continually and effectively drained.
Inspection
All excavation shall be inspected and approved by the Project Manager’s as the work proceeds
and/or upon completion.
The Contractor shall advise the Project Manager’s within adequate time when the excavation,
or part thereof, is ready for such inspection. The Contractor must not proceed with other
phasing until it has been inspected and/or authorized by the Project Manager’s.
Dewatering
Prior to commencing excavation works, all dewatering proposals shall be submitted to the
Project Manager’s for his written approval.
The Contractor shall provide, maintain, alter and/or improve, and clear away on completion all
dewatering equipment, temporary drains and the like.
The Contractor shall use all necessary measures to keep the excavation free from surface
water, storm water, percolating water and subsoil water by the use of pumping or any other
means approved by the Project Manager’s.
Where deemed necessary by the Project Manager’s, protective filter shall be used at pumping
location to prevent the removal of the fine materials from the surrounding ground.
3.06
Haulage And Transportation Of Excavated Materials
The Contractor shall regulate the loading and carting away of excavated materials, debris,
rubbish, etc. day by day , to an approved dumping area, as the excavation works proceed.
3.07
Surplus Excavated Material
All surplus excavated material not used in backfilling or leveling shall be loaded and removed
from the site and disposed-off at the Contractor's expense to a dump to be selected by the
Contractor and approved by the Municipality or local authorities.
END OF SECTION
02100 - 3
Excavations & Earthworks
SECTION 02110
SITE CLEARING
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
C.
Work Included
Clear site of trees, shrubs, plant life and grass.
Remove root system of trees and shrubs 75 mm and over in diameter at base.
Remove rocks, boulders and other debris.
1.02
A.
B.
Related Work
Section 02100; Excavation & Earthwork
Section 02210; Site Grading
1.03
A.
Protection
Protect bench marks and existing structures, roads, sidewalks, paving and curbs against
damage from vehicular or foot traffic.
Maintain designated temporary roadways, walkways and detours, for vehicular and pedestrian
traffic.
B.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
Preparation
Maintain bench marks, monuments and other reference points. Re-establish if disturbed or
destroyed, at no cost to Employer.
3.02
A.
B.
Clearing
Clear areas as required for access to site excavation and performance of Work.
Cut down trees and shrubs within marked areas. Grub out stumps, roots, embedded rocks,
boulders and abandoned concrete.
Clear out undergrowth and deadwood, without disturbing sub-soil.
C.
3.03
A.
B.
Removal Of Debris
Promptly remove cleared debris from site. Burning of debris on site is not permitted, unless
permission is obtained from applicable regulatory authority.
Obtain permission from applicable regulatory authority for disposal of debris to waste disposal
site.
END OF SECTION
02110 - 1
Clearing
SECTION 02210
SITE GRADING
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
Work Included
Remove any topsoil and stockpile on site for later use.
Upon The Project Manager’s instruction’s and recommendations load and cartaway.
Excavate sub-soil and reform to grades, contours and levels.
Excavate for roadways, walks, curbs, parking areas and landscaped areas.
1.02
A.
B.
Related Work
Section 02110: Clearing
Section 02211: Rock Removal
1.03
Existing Conditions
Known underground, surface and aerial utility lines, and buried objects are indicated on the
Drawings.
1.04
A.
Protection
Protect bench marks, and existing structures, fences, roads, sidewalks, paving and curbs
against damage from equipment and vehicular traffic.
Protect aerial, surface, or underground utility lines or appurtenances which are to remain.
Repair damage.
B.
C.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not applicable
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.03
EXECUTION
Preparation
Establish and identify required lines, levels, contours and datum.
Maintain bench marks, monuments, and other reference points. Re-establish if disturbed or
destroyed, at no cost to Employer.
Before start of grading, establish the location and extent of utilities in the work areas. Notify
utility Authorities and arrange to remove and relocate lines which are in the way of construction.
Maintain, protect, reroute or extend as required existing utilities to remain which pass through
the work area.
All vegetation, such as roots, brush, heavy sods, heavy growth of grass, and all decayed
vegetable matter, rubbish and other unsatisfactory material within the areas upon which fill is to
be placed shall be stripped or otherwise removed before the fill is placed; in no case will
unsatisfactory material remain in or under the fill area.
Grading
Grade site to required levels, profiles, contours and elevations as shown on the drawings.
All unsatisfactory material including any soil which is disturbed by the contractor's operations or
softened due to exposure to the elements and water, and surplus material shall be removed
from site.
In the event that it is necessary to remove unsatisfactory material to a depth greater than
specified, the Project Manager shall be notified.
Excavation shall be performed in a manner and sequence that will provide drainage at all
times, thus ensuring that excavations are kept free from water.
Surplus Material
Remove part of the surplus materials from site as per the Project Manager’s instructions..
END OF SECTION
02210 - 1
Site Grading
SECTION 02219
STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
PART 1
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
GENERAL
Definitions
Relative Compaction:
1.
Ratio, in percent, of as-compacted field dry density to laboratory maximum dry density as
determined in accordance with ASTM D1557.
2.
Apply corrections for oversize material to either as-compacted field dry density or
maximum dry density, as determined by PROJECT MANAGER.
Optimum Moisture Content:
1.
Determined in accordance with ASTM Standard specified determine maximum dry
density for relative compaction.
2.
Determine field moisture content on basis of fraction passing 22 mm (3/4-inch) sieve.
Relative Density: Calculated in accordance with ASTM D4254 based on maximum index
density determined in accordance with ASTM D4253 and minimum index density determined in
accordance with ASTM D4254.
Prepared Ground Surface: Ground surface after completion of required demolition, clearing
and grubbing, scalping of sod, stripping of topsoil, excavation to grade, and subgrade
preparation.
Completed Course: A course of layer that is ready for next layer or next phase of work.
Lift: Loose (uncompacted) layer of material.
Well Graded:
1.
A mixture of particle sizes with no specific concentration or lack thereof of one or more
sizes.
2.
Does not define numerical value that must be placed on coefficient of uniformity,
coefficient of curvature, or other specific grain size distribution parameters.
3.
Used to define material type that, when compacted, produces a strong and relatively
incompressible soil mass free from detrimental voids.
Influence Area: Area within planes sloped downward and outward at 60-degree angle from
horizontal measured from:
1.
300 mm outside outermost edge at base of foundations or slabs.
2.
300 mm outside outermost edge at surface of roadways or shoulder.
3.
150 mm outside exterior at spring line of pipes or culverts.
Borrow Material: Material from required excavations or from designated borrow areas on or nor
site.
Select (or Selected) Backfill Material: Materials available onsite that PROJECT MANAGER
determines to be suitable for specific use.
Imported Material: Material obtained by CONTRACTOR from sources offsite, suitable for
specified use.
Structural Fill: Fill materials as required under structures, pavements, and other facilities.
Embankment Material: Fill materials required to raise existing grade in areas other than under
structures.
Base Rock: Undisturbed, intact rock beneath excavation.
Bedding or Bedding Material: Imported granular pipe bedding material installed under and
around the pipes from trench Base Rock to 300 mm, or as shown in the drawings which ever in
greater, above top of installed pipes and ducts.
Trench Backfill: Includes full trench width and extends from top of bedding material to ground
surface (less pavement components). May include select backfill material or graded
aggregate.
Common Fill or Common Backfill: Shall be material similar to that found at surface level in the
immediate vicinity.
Reinstatement: Reinstatement of surface (surface restoration) as specified or as indicated on
the Drawings.
Standard Specifications: When referenced in this section, shall mean latest edition of ASTM
Standards unless indicated otherwise.
Work Included
Excavate for isolated column bases and strip footings and stockpile the suitable excavated
material for backfilling and remove the unsuitable materials from the site to an approved
dumping area from site under the supervision of the Project Manager.
Cap off and seal discontinued utility services and remove portions of lines within excavated
areas.
Dewater excavations.
02219 - 1
Structure Excavation & Backfill
D.
E.
Backfilling around foundations and walls to the levels as required.
The Contractor shall be responsible for remove the Cave In Material which occurs in the sides
of the excavations and on the contractor's own expense.
1.03
Related Work
Section 02110: Clearing
1.04
A.
B.
Site Compaction And Testing
Testing of compacted fill materials shall be performed by an approved Testing Laboratory.
Compaction shall be accomplished by approved equipment well suited to the soil being
compacted.
Laboratory tests shall be performed for each type of fill material used, to obtain the maximum
density according to Project Manager’s Instructions.
All compaction requirements stated relate to the laboratory maximum density.
The moisture content of the fill materials and subgrade at the time of compaction shall be
uniform and as close as possible to the optimum moisture content as determined by laboratory
testing.
All test results shall be submitted to the Project Manager within 3 days of placing fill.
If, during progress of the work, test results indicate that compacted materials do not meet
specified requirements, all defective work shall be removed (or replaced) and recompacted
and retested at the Contractor's expense.
Ensure compacted fills are tested and passed before proceeding with placement of surface
materials.
The frequency and type of testing shall be as follows:
One test shall be made for every 50 cubic metres of fill material placed. A minimum of four
tests shall be allowed for at areas to be chosen by the Project Manager.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.05
A.
B.
C.
1.06
A.
B.
C.
1.07
A.
B.
C.
D.
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
Submittals
Submit minimum, samples of each type of excavated and imported fill material to be used
taken at source. Forward samples to appointed testing laboratory, packed tightly in containers
to prevent contamination.
If recent test results are available for fill materials to be used, disregard samples submission.
Such test results are to clearly indicate types of materials and composition, hardness,
compactability and suitability for proposed usage.
Quality Control Submittals:
1.
Catalog and manufacturer’s data sheets for compaction equipment.
2.
Certified test results from independent testing agency.
Protection
Protect bench marks and against damage from equipment and vehicular or foot traffic.
Notify the Project Manager of unexpected sub- surface conditions and discontinue work in area
until the Project Manager provides notification to resume work.
Protect bottom of excavations and soil around and beneath foundations from flooding.
Sequencing and Scheduling
Complete applicable work specified in Sections 2100 site clearing, 2110 site grading; and
2100, EXCAVATION and earthwork, prior to placing fill or backfill.
Backfill against concrete structures only after concrete has attained 70 percent of design
strength. Obtain PROJECT MANAGER’s acceptance of concrete work and attained strength
prior to placing backfill.
Backfill around water-holding structures only after completion of satisfactory leakage tests as
specified in Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
Do not place granular base, subbase, or surfacing until after subgrade has been prepared.
PRODUCTS
Source Quality Control
Gradation Tests:
1.
As necessary to locate acceptable sources of imported material.
2.
During production of imported material, test once per every 20 cubic meters of placed
material.
Samples: Collected in accordance with ASTM D75:
1.
During production of imported material, provide samples once per every 100 cubic
meters of placed material.
02219 - 2
Structure Excavation & Backfill
2.02
Fill Materials
A.
Granular Fill and Base Course:
1. Aggregate for use as granular fill shall be crushed stone. Aggregate may be washed, if
directed, to remove excessive quantities of clay, silty clay or salts.
2. Crushed stone and crushed gravel shall consist of hard, durable and sound particles of
fragments of stone, free from other deleterious substances not mentioned below, other
requirements are gypsum, or flakey particle. Other requirements:
a.
Gypsum content (expressed as SO3)
20% max.
b.
Clay Lumps and friable particles
8% max.
c.
Elongated and flakey particles for crushed rock (Determined in accordance with
BS812 Part 1: 1975)
d.
Granite & Basalt
40% max. each
e.
Lime Stone
35% max. each
f.
Maximum Dry density (g/cm3)
2.1 min.
3. Chert content (determined as percentage by weight insoluble in hydrochloric acid to be specified
in specified in special technical specification.
4. Methods used in production of crushed rock shall ensure that the finished product will be as
uniform as practicable. Crushing shall result in a product such that, for particles retained on
4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve at least 80 % by weight shall have at least two fractured faces.
5. Any material passing 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve and produced in the crushing process shall be
incorporated in the base material up to the gradation limits of aggregate.
6. Crushed aggregate for base course delivered to road site shall meet the requirements of
gradations as shown in table below, when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 27 after dry
mixing and just before spreading and prior to compacting. The actual gradation shall, in all
cases, be continuous and smooth within the actual limits. Gap graded aggregate will not be
accepted. If graduation is tested after compaction a tolerance of 3% is allowed in upper limit for
percentage of material passing sieve 200.
Gradation of granular fill:
%Passing
Sieve Size
50 mm
100
25 mm
95
20 mm
95 to 100
16 mm
75 to 100
10 mm
55 to 85
No. 4
35 to 60
No. 16
15 to 35
No. 40
10 to 25
No. 200
5 to 10
B.
Sand: Clean natural river or bank sand; free from silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials,
and organic matter; graded within the following limits:
Sieve Size %Passing
No. 4
100
No. 14
10 to 100
No. 48
5 to 90
No. 100
4 to 30
No. 200
0
C.
Sub-soil: Free from roots, rock larger than 75 mm in size and building debris.
D.
Unsatisfactory materials include PT, CH, MH, OL, OH and gypsiferous soils: also rock, manmade fills, refuse or backfills from previous construction
02219 - 3
Structure Excavation & Backfill
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
EXECUTION
General
Keep placement surface free of water, debris, and foreign material during placement and
compaction of fill and backfill materials.
Place and spread fill and backfill materials is horizontal lift or uniform thickness, in a manner
that avoids segregation, and compact each lift to specified densities prior to placing succeeding
lifts. Slope lifts only where necessary to conform to final grades or as necessary to keep
placement surfaces drained of water.
During filling and backfilling, keep level of fill and backfill around each structure even.
Do not place or backfill, keep level of fill and backfill around each structure even.
If pipe, conduit, duct bank, or cable is to be laid within fill or backfill:
1.
Fill or backfill to an elevation 600mm above top to item to be laid.
2.
Excavation trench for installation of item.
3.
Install bedding, if applicable, as specified in Section 02225, TRENCHING.
4.
Install item.
5.
Backfill envelop zone and remaining trench, as specified in Section 02225, TRENCHING,
before resuming filling or backfilling specified in this section.
Tolerance:
1.
Final Lines and Grades: Within a tolerance of 30mm unless dimensions or grades are
shown or specified otherwise.
2.
Grade to establish and maintain slopes and drainage as shown. Reverse slopes are not
permitted.
Settlement: Correct and repair any subsequent damage to structures, pavements, curbs, slabs,
piping, and other facilities, caused by settlement or fill or backfill material.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
Preparation And Layout
Establish extent of excavation by area and elevation; designate and identify datum elevation.
Set required lines and levels.
Maintain bench marks, monuments and other reference points.
3.03
A.
Utilities
Before starting excavation, establish location and extent of underground utilities occurring in
work area.
Notify utility Authorities to remove and relocate lines which are in the way of excavation.
Maintain, re-route or extend as required, existing utility lines to remain which pass through work
area.
Pay costs for this work, except those covered by utility Authorities.
Protect utility services uncovered by excavation.
Remove abandoned utility service lines from areas of excavation; cap, plug or seal such lines
and identify at grade.
Accurately locate and record abandoned and active utility lines routed or extended, on Project
Record Documents.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Excavation
Excavate sub-soil in accordance with lines and levels required for construction of the work,
including space for forms, bracing and shoring, applying dampproofing, waterproofing and to
permit inspection.
Do additional excavation only by written authorization of the Project Manager.
Hand trim excavations and leave free from loose or organic matter.
When complete, verify soil bearing capacities, depths and, dimensions.
Correct unauthorized excavation as directed, at no cost to Employer.
Fill over-excavated areas under structure bearing surfaces with concrete as specified for
foundations.
Excavations are not to interfere with normal 45 degree bearing splay of any foundation.
Stockpile excavated sub-soil for reuse where directed. Remove excess or unsuitable
excavated sub-soil from site.
Excavations shall be performed so that the works are continually and effectively drained.
02219 - 4
Structure Excavation & Backfill
3.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Backfilling
The Contractor shall stockpile fill materials at his own responsibility in area(s) that do not affect
the progress of works, provided the Project Manager's approval is obtained prior to proceeding
with the works.
Do not start backfilling operations until all associated works have been inspected and
approved.
Ensure areas to be backfilled are free from debris, ice and water, and that ground surfaces are
not in a frozen condition.
Do not backfill over existing sub-grade surface which are porous, wet or spongy.
Compact existing sub-grade surfaces if densities are not equal to that required for backfill
materials.
Cut out soft areas of existing sub-grade. Backfill with suitable fill material and compact to
required density.
Backfill areas to grades, contours, levels and elevations.
Backfill systematically and as early as possible to allow maximum time for natural settlement
and compaction.
Place and compact fill materials in continuous layers not exceeding 200 mm loose depth. Use
a method so as not to disturb or damage other works.
Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compacting density.
Backfill simultaneously on each side of foundation walls to equalize soil pressures. Do not
backfill against foundation walls until the main floor is in place.
Where temporary unbalanced pressures are liable to develop on walls before floor slabs are
placed, erect necessary shoring to counteract imbalance. Leave in place until their removal is
approved by the Project Manager.
3.06
A.
B.
Compaction
Compaction shall be achieved using suitable compaction equipment.
Each layer shall not exceed 200 mm thick, dewarted and compacted to not less than the
percentage of 95 %.
3.07
A.
B.
Surplus Materials
Remove surplus backfill materials from site.
Leave stockpile areas completely free of all excess fill materials.
END OF SECTION
02219 - 5
Structure Excavation & Backfill
SECTION 02221
TRENCHING
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
C.
Work Included
Excavate trenches for utilities.
Compacted bed and compacted fill over utilities.
Compaction requirements.
1.02
A.
Related Work
Section 02211
1.03
A.
B.
C.
Reference Standards
ANSI/ASTM C136
Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
ANSI/ASTM D1556
Density of Soil in Place by Sand-Cone Method.
ANSI/ASTM D1557
Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixture Using
10 lb (4.54kg) Rammer and 18 inch (457mm) Drop.
Samples
Submit 5 Kg. Sample of each type of fill to testing laboratory, in air-tight containers.
1.04
A.
1.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
C.
Rock Removal.
Protection
Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning or other methods required to
prevent cave-in or loose soil from falling into excavation.
Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavation work, including service
utilities and pipe chases.
Notify the Project Manager’s of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue work in
affected area until notification to resume work.
Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundations from frost.
Grade excavation top perimeter to prevent surface water run-off into excavation.
PRODUCTS
Select Bed And Fill Materials
Type A-Coarse Stone: Gravel: (Pit run, Angular, Crushed, or natural stone): free of shale, clay,
friable materials and debris; graded in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C136 within the following
limits:
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
50 mm
25 mm
19 mm
16 mm
9 mm
No. 4(4.75 mm)
No. 16(1.18 mm)
100
95
95 to 100
75 to 100
55 to 85
35] to 60
15 to 35
10 to 25
Type B - Pea Gravel: Natural stone, free of clay, shale, organic matter; 6 mm minimum to 16
mm maximum size graded in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C136.
Type C - Sand: Natural wadi or bank sand; free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials
and organic matter; graded in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C136 within the following limits:
02221 - 1
Trenching
2.01
2.02
PART 3
Select Bed And Fill Materials (cont’d)
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
No. 4(4.75 mm)
No. 14 (1.40 mm)
No. 50 (300 micro m)
No. 100 (150 micro m)
No. 200 (75 micro m)
100
10 to 100
5 to 90
4 to 30
0
Common Fill Materials
Subsoil: Reused; Imported; free of gravel larger than 75 mm size, and debris.
EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
C.
Inspection
Verify stockpiled fill to be reused as approved.
Verify foundation perimeter drainage installation when shown on plans has been inspected.
Verify areas to be backfilled are free of debris or water.
3.02
A.
B.
Preparation
Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum.
When necessary, compact subgrade surfaces to density requirements for backfill material.
3.03
A.
Trench Excavation
Excavate subsoil required for sanitary sewer, water piping; also for power and
telecommunication cables.
Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation of utilities and allow inspection.
Hand trim excavation and leave free of loose matter. Hand trim for bell and spigot pipe joints.
Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 0.25 cu\m, measured by volume. Remove
larger material under Section 02211.
Excavation shall not interfere with normal 45 degrees bearing splay of foundations.
Correct unauthorized excavation at no cost to Employer.
Fill over-excavated areas under pipe bearing surfaces in accordance with direction by the
Project Manager.
Stockpile excavated material in area designated on site and remove excess subsoil not being
reused, from site.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.04
A.
B.
3.05
A.
B.
3.06
A.
Trench Preparation
Water Control
1.
Promptly remove and dispose of water entering trench as necessary to grade trench
bottom and to -compact backfill and install manholes, pipe, conduit, direct-buried cable, or
duct bank. Do not place concrete. lay pipe, conduit, direct-buried cable, or duct bank in
water.
2.
Remove water in a manner that minimizes soil erosion from trench sides and bottom.
3.
Provide continuous water control until trench backfill is complete.
Remove foreign material and backfill contaminated with foreign material that falls into trench.
Trench Bottom
Firm Subgrade: Grade with hand tools, remove loose, and disturbed material, and trim off high
areas. Allow space for bedding material.
Soft Subgrade: If subgrade is encountered that may require removal to prevent pipe
settlement, notify PROJECT MANAGER. PROJECT MANAGER will determine depth of over
excavation, if any required.
Geotextile Installation
Install where shown or required to prevent migration of bedding and backfill materials as
follows:
1.
Extend geotextile for full width of trench bottom and up the trench wall to the top of the
pipe zone, or base material for manholes and miscellaneous structures.
2.
Anchor geotextile trench walls prior to placing trench stabilization 'or bedding material.
02221 - 2
Trenching
3.
3.07
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Provide 600mm minimum overlap at joints.
Bedding Material
Furnish imported bedding material.
Place over the full width of the prepared trench bottom in two equal lifts when the required
depth exceeds 200mm.
Hand grade and compact each lift to provide a firm, unyielding surface.
1.
Minimum thickness beneath pipes 150 mm.
Check grade and correct irregularities in bedding material. Loosen top 50mm of compacted
bedding material with a rake or by other means to provide a cushion before laying each section
of pipe, conduit, direct-buried cable, or duct bank.
Install to form continuous and uniform support except at bell holes, if applicable, or minor
disturbances resulting from removal of lifting tackle.
Bell or Coupling Holes: Excavate in bedding at each joint to permit proper assembly and
inspection of joint and to provide uniform bearing along barrel of pipe or conduit.
1. Upper limit of Bedding Material shall not be less than 300mm over top of pipe
Restrain pipe, conduit, cables, and duct banks as necessary to prevent their movement during
backfill operations.
Place material simultaneously in lifts on both sides of pipe and, if applicable, between pipes,
conduit, cables, and duct banks installed in same trench.
1. Pipes 250mm and Smaller Diameter: First lift less than or equal to 1/2 pipe-diameter.
2. Pipes Over 250mm Diameter: Maximum 150mm lifts.
Thoroughly tamp each lift, including area under haunches, with handheld tamping bars
supplemented by "walking in" and slicing material under haunches with a shovel to ensure that
voids are completely filled before placing each succeeding lift.
After the full depth of the backfill material has been placed, compact the material by a
minimum of three passes with a vibratory plate compactor only over the area between the sides
of the pipe and the trench walls.
3.08
A.
Marking Tape Installation
Continuously install marking tape along centerline of all buried piping. Coordinate with piping
installation drawings.
1. Metallic Marking Tape: Install with nonmetallic piping and non- metallic water pipelines.
2. Plastic Marking Tape: Install with metallic piping and metallic water pipelines.
3.09
A.
Concrete Encasement
Concrete encasement shall be carried out in accordance with SECTION; 3300, CAST-INPLACE CONCRETE.
3.10
A.
B.
Backfill Above Bedding Material
To include Common fill, Selected Backfill, and Base Course
General:
1.
Process excavated material to meet specified gradation requirements or import suitable
material as appropriate.
2.
Adjust moisture content as necessary to obtain' specified compaction.
3.
Do not allow backfill to free fall into the trench or allow heavy, sharp pieces of material to
he placed as backfill until after at least 600mm of backfill has been provided over the top
of pipe.
4.
Place and compact in layers not exceeding 200mm.
5.
Backfill to grade with proper allowances for topsoil, crushed rock surfacing, and
pavement thicknesses, wherever applicable.
6.
Backfill around structures with same class backfill as specified for adjacent trench unless
otherwise shown or specified.
7.
Mechanically compact each lift prior to placing succeeding lifts. Compact each lift to
minimum 95 percent relative compaction as determined in accordance with ASTM
D1557.
8.
Determine proper type of compaction equipment, method to use, and amount of
compaction necessary to prevent settlement and to achieve required compaction degree.
Controlled Low Strength Concrete Fill:
1.
Discharge from truck mounted drum type mixer into trench.
2.
Place in lifts as necessary to prevent uplift (flotation) of new and existing facilities.
3.
In traveled areas fill entire trench section to pavement finish grade for a temporary driving
C.
02221 - 3
Trenching
surface, and screed off excess and finish with a float.
3.11
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Maintenance of Trench Backfill
After each section of trench is backfilled, maintain the surface of the backfilled trench even with
the adjacent ground surface until final surface restoration is completed.
Gravel Surfacing Rock: Add gravel surfacing rock where applicable and as necessary to keep
the surface of the backfilled trench even with the adjacent ground surface, and grade and
compact as necessary to keep the surface of backfilled trenches smooth, free from ruts and
potholes, and suitable for normal traffic flow.
Topsoil: Add topsoil where applicable and as necessary to maintain the surface of the
backfilled trench level with the adjacent ground surface.
Asphaltic Pavement: Replace settled areas or fill with asphalt as specified in Section 02575,
PAVEMENT REPAIR AND RESURFACING (REINSTATEMENT).
Other Areas: Add excavated material where applicable and keep the surface of the backfilled
trench level with the adjacent ground surface.
3.12
A.
Settlement of Backfill
Settlement of trench backfill, or of fill or facilities constructed over trench backfill will be
considered a result of defective compaction of trench backfill. CONTRACTOR shall, at his
cost, promptly repair defective compaction to the satisfaction of PROJECT MANAGER.
3.13
A.
Tolerances
Top Surface of Back filling: Plus or minus 12.5 mm.
3.14
A.
Compaction Testing
Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D1557.
END OF SECTION
02221 - 4
Trenching
SECTION 02229
ROCK REMOVAL
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
Work Included
Removal of rock materials from site.
Security measures to prevent unauthorized persons from entering work area.
1.02
A.
B.
Related Work
Section 02110: Clearing.
Section 02210: Site Grading.
1.03
References
Not used.
1.04
Definitions
Rock: this material all of which cannot be removed with a 0.60 cubic meter capacity power
shovel without drilling or blasting. Rock is also interpreted as solid boulders with a volume of
more than 0.25 cubic meter. Blasting will not be permitted on this Contract.
1.05
Seismic Survey
Not used.
1.06
Soils Report
Location of test bore holes is indicated in Soil Investigation Data.
1.07
A.
B.
Existing Conditions
Visit site and note characteristics and irregularities affecting work of this section.
Proceeding with work means, acceptance of conditions, and failure to comply with site visit
requirements will in no sense form basis for any claims.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
EXECUTION
Rock Removal
Perform rock removal by experienced personnel in accordance with the Construction Project
Manager's and approval.
In utility trenches, excavate 150 mm below invert elevation of pipe and 600 mm wider than pipe
diameter or as shown on drawings.
Remove rock to provide sound and unsheltered base for footings and foundations.
Remove excavated material from site.
END OF SECTION
02229 - 1
Rock Removal
SECTION 02260
FINISH GRADING
PART 1
1.01
A.
B.
GENERAL
Work Included
Finish grade sub-soil in areas where paving or structures do not occur.
Place, finish grade and compact top soil.
1.02
Related Work
Section 02210 : Site Grading.
1.03
Protection
Prevent damage to existing trees, landscaping, natural features, bench marks, pavement, utility
lines and other works. Correct damage at no cost to the Employer.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
Materials
Topsoil: friable loam free from subsoil, roots, grass, excessive amount of weeds, stones and
foreign matter; acidity range (pH) of 5.5 to 7.5; containing a minimum of 4% and a maximum of
25% organic matter.
PART 3
3.01
A.
EXECUTION
Sub Soil Preparation
Rough grade sub-soil systematically to allow for a maximum amount of natural settlement and
compaction. Eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones,
etc. in excess of 75 mm in size. Remove sub-soil which has been contaminated with petroleum
products.
Cut out areas, to sub-grade elevation, which are to receive stabilizing base for paving and are
to be used for construction of buildings.
Bring sub-soil to required levels, profiles and contours. Make changes in grade gradual. Blend
slopes into level areas.
Slope grade away from building minimum 50 mm in 3 m unless indicated otherwise on
drawings.
Cultivate sub-grade to a depth of 75 mm where topsoil is to be placed. Repeat cultivation in
areas where equipment, used for hauling and spreading topsoil, has compacted sub-soil.
Compact sub-soil to the following:
1)
90% maximum density for cohesive materials, and 95% for cohesionless materials, where
topsoil is to be placed.
2)
95% maximum density for cohesive materials, and 100% for cohesionless materials,
under tiled areas.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.03
A.
B.
Placing Topsoil
Place topsoil in areas where seeding, sodding or planting is to be performed. Place to the
following minimum depths, up to finished grade elevations:
1.
150 mm for seeded areas.
2.
115 mm for sodded areas.
3.
600 mm for shrub beds.
4.
460 mm for flower beds.
Use topsoil in relatively dry state. Place during dry weather.
Fine grade topsoil eliminating rough and low areas to ensure positive drainage. Maintain levels,
profiles and contours of sub-grades.
Remove stone, roots, grass, weeds, debris and other foreign material while spreading.
Manually spread topsoil around trees, plants, and other obstructions to prevent damage which
may be caused by raiding equipment.
Lightly compact placed topsoil.
Surplus Material
Remove surplus sub-soil and topsoil from site.
Leave stockpile areas and entire job site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping.
02260 - 1
Finish Grading
END OF SECTION
02260 - 2
Finish Grading
SECTION 02480
LANDSCAPE DEVELOPMENT
PART 1
GENERAL
This Section pertains to structures, street furniture, site amenities and special paving related to
Landscape Development.
1.01
A.
B.
1.02
1.03
A.
B.
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
PART 3
Work Included
Provide labor and materials to construct landscape structures, including planters, edging, divider
strips, steps, other constructs as indicated on the Landscape Plans.
Provide and install pre-cast concrete pavers, interlocking tiles concrete tiles, stone flooring, as
indicated on the landscape plans.
Related Work
Section 02483
Section 02521
Section 02513
Section 02517
Section 02577
Section 02482
Landscape Planting.
Pre cast Concrete Units
Asphalt Paving.
Interlocking Concrete Tiles
Pavement Marking
Landscape Planting
Submittals
Shop Drawings:
Upon instructions by the Project Manager provide shop drawings for any of the items listed
under this section for verification and approval.
Samples:
1)
Concrete Paver.
2)
Interlocking Tiles Pavers
3)
Stone Flooring
PRODUCTS
Materials
Cast - In - Place concrete: Where applicable for walls, planter boxes, steps, edging and other
items as indicated on the Landscape Development Plans shall conform to the requirements of
Section 03300 Cast - In - Place Concrete.
Pre - Cast concrete: Where applicable products shall conform to the requirements of Section
02521 Pre cast Concrete Units.
EXECUTION
All work performed under this Section shall be of the highest quality, and performed by
experienced craftsmen, and performed in a timely manner, coordinated with other trades and
crafts.
END OF SECTION
02480 - 1
Landscape Development
SECTION 02483
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
PART 1
GENERAL
This section concerns the furnishing and installation of trees, shrubs, climbers and ground
cover plants together with accessories and appurtenances:
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
Work Included
Preparation of Planting Soil Mix.
Excavation for Planting.
Planting Procedures.
Maintenance and Guarantee.
1.02
Related Work
Section 02480
Landscape Development.
1.03
A.
Reference Standards
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications:
· ANSI Z60.1 - 80 Nursery Stock.
(Available from American Association of Nurserymen, Washington D.C.)
B.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:
C.
136-81 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate
D.
405-77a
Corrugated Polyethylene Tubing
E.
US Department of Agriculture (USDA) Publications:
Soil Survey Investigation Report No. 1,
Soil Survey Laboratory Methods and
Procedures for Collecting Soil Samples,
1.04
A.
B.
Quality Assurance:
All plants shall conform to classification No. 1 as described in ANSI Z60.1-80.
Soil tests shall be performed on site utilizing a complete combination soil testing kit containing
reagents and apparatus for all tests required herein, provided by the Contractor.
1.05
A.
Qualified Supervision
Supervision of Work covered in this section shall be performed by a graduate of a fully
accredited four year course in Ornamental Horticulture Landscape Gardening.
Verify authenticity of supervisors credentials by corresponding with Registrar of Institution
(grantor of diploma) and submit institution certified evidence of satisfactory course completion
to Project Manager.
Supervisor shall also exhibit evidence of at least 5 (five) years field experience. Verify and
submit as in Para. B.
Duties of qualified supervisor may be shared between work of this and other sections requiring
horticultural expertise. However, supervisor must execute his duties and responsibilities on a
full-time on-site basis.
B.
C.
D.
1.06
A.
B.
C.
D.
Delivery, Storage And Handling:
Notify Project Manager of time and mode of shipping, date and time of arrival of all materials
originating off-island. Furnish copies of all required customs documents to Project Manager 14
days before scheduled delivery.
Freight Containers: Shall be carefully packed to provide protection from environmental and
physical injury and adequately ventilated. All plant material shipments shall be promptly
delivered to site in enclosed refrigerated trucks and inspection and transportation certificates
must accompany each consignment.
Storage on Site: Plants delivered to site more than 24 hours before planting shall be stored in a
temporary wind shelter/shade house constructed by the Contractor in an approved location and
removed (or retained) at completion of Plant Establishment Period, as directed by Project
Manager. Roots, root balls or containers shall be protected by planting mix and watered daily
until planted.
Handling: No plant shall be handled or lifted by the stem or foliage. Roots of plants shall be
protected from drying at all times. Containers shall be removed before planting.
02483 - 1
Landscape Planting
1.06
E.
F.
G.
H.
Delivery, Storage And Handling: (cont’d)
Anti-desiccant shall be applied to all trees and shrubs, according to manufacturers directions
before transporting to the site. Provide adequate film coverage on trunks, branches, stems,
twigs and leaves.
Packaged organic and inorganic soil additive shall be delivered in original. Waterproof
containers showing composition, weight, chemical analysis and name and address of
manufacturer/supplier.
Materials furnished in bulk shall be delivered in covered vehicles or freight containers,
accompanied by invoices stating composition, age of material and suppliers name and
address.
Submit copies of all invoices to Project Manager.
1.07
Planting Season:
The planting season shall be as defined by the manufacturer's written recommendations. No
planting operations will be allowed before or after the approved defined season.
1.08
A.
Existing Conditions:
Verify finished grade, elevations, underground utilities and conditions under which work of this
section will be performed.
Verify irrigation system before beginning planting operations perform complete and thorough
inspection and testing of the irrigation system to ensure that adequate quality and quantity of
water is available for establishment and maintenance.
Report any defects or deficiencies to Project Manager before beginning planting operations
execution.
B.
1.09
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
Submittals:
Submit plans for plant shelter shade house and adjacent soil mixing and storage area for
Project Manager.
Top-soil proposed for use in planting soil mixture shall be inspected by Project Manager before
stripping. Contractor shall furnish transportation.
Organic Amendment, Fertilizers and other Soil Mix Additives shall be inspected by the Project
Manager at the Contractors storage area on project site.
Submit certified reports or soil tests performed by Contractor. Where necessary, Contractor
shall provide custom designed soil mix for specific plant varieties and submit soil reports for
same.
Each species and variety of plant materials shall be inspected by Project Manager within five
days after they are received at the Contractors storage area on the site. Transportation for said
inspections to be furnished by Contractor.
Planting Accessories: Submit one sample of each product for Project Manager approval.
Samples shall be retained until project completion.
PRODUCTS
Planting Soil Mix Materials:
Top soil shall be natural domestic dune sweet sand suitable for the production of agricultural
crops, shall have a maximum 0.02% total dissolved salts and shall conform to the following
mechanical requirements:
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
No. 4 Mesh 4.7 mm
100
No. 50 Mesh
20-80
No. 200 Mesh
0-5
Top soil shall be free of spilled fuels, chemical contaminants, stones, weeds, roots, debris and
other deleterious substances, but may contain up to 25% marl (maximum particle size:
100mm) if thoroughly dispersed.
Organic Amendments - Plant Sources:
1.
Ground Tree Bark shall be from pine, fir or other coniferous trees removed during normal
lumbering operations, and mechanically ground or pulverized to pass a 6mm (1/4 inch)
screen. Tree bark shall be clean and free from insect infestation or eggs and shall not
contain more than five percent wood fibre. Tree bark shall not contain harmful bacteria or
other plant pathogens, or weed seeds, may be supplied in bulk.
02483 - 2
Landscape Planting
2.
2.01
C.
D.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.03
A.
B.
Shredded Coconut Husks shall be provided from normal copra harvesting operations,
shall be mechanically chopped or shredded to pass a 25mm (one inch) screen.
Shredded husks shall be free of insect infestation or eggs bacteria or other plant
pathogens or weed seeds, and may be supplied in bulk.
Planting Soil Mix Materials: (cont’d)
Organic Soil Amendments - Animal Sources:
1.
Racing Stable Waste - equine source, shall be well rotted and dry at least one year and
forced to pass a 25mm (one inch) screen. Equine waste shall be provided from domestic
sources and may be delivered in bulk.
2.
Dairy or Feedlot Waste - Bovine source, shall be well rotted and dry, at least one year old
and forced to pass a 25mm (one inch) screen. Bovine waste shall be provided from
domestic sources and may be delivered in bulk.
3.
Fish, blood and bone meal shall contain minimum 6.5% Nitrogen (N), 6.0% Phosphorous
(P) and 5.0% Potassium (K). Meal shall not contain porcine by-products and shall be
delivered in original bags. (See para. 1.06-F).
Compound Fertilizers and Trade Elements:
1.
General purpose fertilizer shall have minimum chemical composition of: 7% Nitrogen, 7%
Phosphorous, 7% Potassium (K), shall be dry and free flowing, furnished in original
containers. Fertilizer shall contain no porcine by-products. (See para. 1.06-F).
2.
Sequestered trade elements shall consist of Boron, Copper, Iron, Manganese,
Molybdenum and Zinc. Trace elements shall be soluble in water, furnished in original
containers. (See para. 1.06-F).
Plant Materials:
Each plant or group of planting shall have a "key" symbol indicated on the plans and on the
Plant Materials Schedule. Furnish plants grown under climatic conditions similar to those in the
locality of project, if possible. Spray plants with an anti-desiccant before digging. All plant of
the same specified size shall be of uniform size and character of growth.
Trees and shrubs: Symmetrically developed and of uniform habit of growth, with straight boles
or stems, and free from objectionable disfigurement. Well branch, well formed, sound,
vigorous, healthy planting stock free from disease, sun scald, windburn, abrasion and harmful
insects or insect eggs and having healthy, normal and unbroken root systems.
Ground Covers: Number and length of runners and clump sizes indicated, and of the proper
age for the grade of plants indicated, furnished in removable containers, integral containers, or
formed homogeneous soil section.
Size: Minimum sizes measured after pruning and with branches in normal position, shall
conform to the measurements indicated. Plants larger in size than specified may be used with
the approval of the Project Manager. If larger plants are used, increase the ball of earth or
spread of roots in accordance with ANSI Z60.1.
Balled and Burlapped (B&B) and Balled and Potted (B&P) Plants: Ball size and ratios
conforming to ANSI Z60.1. Ball plants with firm, natural balls of soil. Wrap B&B plants firmly
with burlap (hessian) or strong cloth. and tie securely.
Balled and Plat formed (BP) Plants: Wrap and ball in the same manner as B&B plants and
fasten securely to strong platforms as approved.
Bare-root Plant: (Not allowed except in shelter belt and windbreaks). Wrap Roots in hessian
(burlap) and keep moist.
Accessories
Granular Fill for Planter and Plant Bed Drainage: Uniformly graded stone, gravel, or stone
screenings free from an excess of soft or unsound particles or other objectionable material.
When tested in accordance with ASTM C136, material shall conform to the following gradation
limits:
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
3/8 inch
100
No. 4
85-100
No. 16
45-80
No. 50
0-30
Roll Type Fiberglass Mats: 100 percent lime borosilicate glass fibers with an average fiber
diameter of 8 to 12 microns and 2 to 4 inch strands of fiber bonded with phenol formaldehyde
02483 - 3
Landscape Planting
C.
D.
E.
2.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
resin, water permeable, having a minimum of 1/4 inch and a maximum of 1/2 inch thickness
with a density of not less than 3/4 pound per cubic foot.
Drainage Pipe for Plant Pits and Beds: Plastic polyvinyl chloride pipe, 75mm (3 inches) in
diameter, perforated, conforming to ASTM D 2729, and corrugated plastic drainage tubing,
75mm (3 inches) in diameter, perforated, conforming to ASTM F 405.
Trunk Wrapping Material: Two thickness crinkled paper cemented together with bituminous
material, minimum 4 inch width, with stretch factor o4 33-1/3 percent.
Tying Material: 3 ply, lightly tarred medium or coarse sisal yarn twine.
Stacking And Guying Materials
Support Stakes for trees Planted in Concrete Tree Rings shall be 50mm (2 inches) diameter
steel pipe 1.5m(5feet) long. Provide one stake per tree (except palms) regardless of size of
tree at time of planting. Drilled holes shall be provided as detailed. Pipe tree stakes shall be
painted dark brown.
Support stakes for trees not planted in concrete tree rings (except Shelter Belt and Windbreak
trees) shall be rough sawn hardwood, free of knots, rot, cross grain, bark, long silvers or other
defects that impair strength. Stakes shall be 50mm (2 inches) square or 64mm (2-1/2 inches)
diameter by 1.5m(5feet) long, painted at one end. Drilled holes shall be provided as detailed.
Paint or stain wood stakes dark brown.
Anchoring Stakes for wood support stakes shall be same material, 50mm (2 inches) square by
610mm (24 inches) long, pointed at one end.
Guying Wire: 12 gauge annealed galvanized steel.
Hose Chafing Guards: New or used, 2 ply, 3/4 inch diameter, reinforced rubber or plastic hose,
black or dark green, all of the same color.
Flags: White surveyor's plastic tape, 6 inch long, fastened to guying wires.
Turnbuckles: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel with minimum 100mm (4 inches) long
openings fitted with screw eyes.
Eye Bolts: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel with 25mm (1 inch) diameter eyes and of
adequate length to pass through tree rings, provided with flat washers and nut fasteners of
same material.
2.05
Anti desiccant:
Sprayable, water insoluble vinyl- vinledine complex which produces moisture retarding barrier
not removable by rain. Film shall form at temperature commonly encountered out of doors
during planting season and have a moisture vapor transmission (MVT) rate of the resultant film
of maximum 10 grams per 24 hours at 70 percent humidity.
2.06
Tree Wound Dressing:
Black asphalt base antiseptic paint or black paint consisting of zinc oxide, raw linseed oil, and
lamp black.
2.07
Water:
Suitable quality for irrigation of ornamental horticulture.
2.08
Climbers Support Wires:
3mm (1/8 inch) diameter annealed bare copper - (for climbers supports at walls and for trellis
tops).
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
3.02
EXECUTION:
Priorities And Scheduling
Primary Shelter Belt is excluded from the planting season requirements, and shall be the
Contractors first priority. Coordinate with other trades and crafts to ensure earliest possible
establishment of these structural landscape elements to minimize blown sand and dust during
construction process and to optimize growing conditions for ornamentals.
Soil Stabilization: All areas where soil has been disturbed during project grading operations
shall receive soil stabilization treatment consisting of either Aggregate Surface Course or
Sand/Soil Liquid Stabilizer. Treat graded areas as early as possible after inspection by Project
Manager.
Submit a schedule of planting operations to the Project Manager illustrating how and when
each priority will be achieved.
Preparing Soil Mixture
02483 - 4
Landscape Planting
A.
B.
3.02
C.
D.
3.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.04
A.
B.
C.
3.05
A.
B.
Location: Excepting only grass lawns and seeded perennials, soil mix shall be prepared at the
Contractor's lay down area which shall include a suitable well drained paved area of sufficient
size to accommodate stockpiles of soil mix ingredients, bins for storage of the prepared soil mix
and space for mixing and loading operations. This facility is to be adjacent to the shelter/shade
house (para. 1.06-C).
Composition: Planting Soil Mixture shall consist of the following materials and ratios:
Top soil (Sweet Sand)
5 parts
Organic Amendment (Plant Source)
12 parts
Organic Amendment (Animal Source)
1 part
General purpose compound fertilizer
100 grams per cubic meter.
and
Sequestered Trace Elements: As determined by soil test of the above mixed ingredients.
Preparing Soil Mixture (cont’d)
Method: Submit written description of proposed mechanical method of preparing, mixing,
storing and transporting planting soil mix for approval by Project Manager.
Application: Material excavated from tree pits, and from shrub, ground cover, vine and bulb
beds shall be disposed of as directed by the Project Manager. Tree pits, planting beds and
concrete planters shall be back filled with prepared planting soil mix before and/or during
planting operations. Planting soil mix shall be transported to areas of planting operations daily.
Preparation For Ornamentals
Layout: Stake out approved plant material locations and bed outlines on the project site before
digging plant pits or beds. Adjustment of plant material locations to meet filed conditions, or for
any other reason, will only be permitted if a written description of the proposed changes,
(accompanied by marked up prints and proposed irrigation revisions) is approved in writing by
the Project Manager.
Excavation for Planting: Verify the location of underground utilities. Protect existing adjacent
plantings before excavation are made. (Concrete bed edging shall have been poured and
cured before excavating plant beds).
Plant Beds: Excavate existing soil in plant beds to a minimum depth of 500mm (20 inches) and
replace with 400mm planting soil mixture over 100mm granular fill and one layer of roll type
fiberglass mat. Bring plant beds to smooth and even surfaces conforming to established
grades.
Subsoil Drainage for Plant Pits and Beds: Provide in all concrete planters, and beds adjacent to
walls. Lay perforated drain pipe with perforations down.
Planting Ornamentals
Handling: Handle plants only by supporting the ball container, or root mass. Set plants on
hand compacted layer of planting soil and hold in position until soil is 50mm below surrounding
grade and so that they are at the depth at which they were grown.
Balled and Burlapped Stock: Backfill with (planting soil mixture) to approximately half the depth
of ball and then tamp and water. Carefully remove or fold back excess burlap and tying
materials. Tamp and complete backfill and water.
Ground Covers and Vines: Do not remove from flats or containers until immediately before
planting. Space at the intervals indicated, and plant sufficiently deep to cover all roots.
Immediately sprinkle with water until entire areas is soaked. Smooth planting areas after
planting to provide even smooth finish.
Finishing
Wrapping: Tie trunk wrapping material to trunks of all trees except conifers and palms, with
specified material the same working day of planting. Project Manager will inspect the trunks of
deciduous trees for physical damage, insect infestation or disease, determine required
treatment or rejection prior to wrapping operation. Being wrapping at base and extend to first
branches. Overlap the wrapping half the width of underlying wrap and securely tie at top,
bottom and 45mm (18 inches) maximum intervals with twine.
Staking and Guying:
1.
Stake, guy and place tree rings for planting as indicated.
2.
Hold trees firmly vertical with double-strand of 12 gauge guying wire. Use hose shafting
guards, as specified, where wire will contact the plant. Provide and tighten turnbuckles,
as indicated.
Provide wires and hose shafting guards at 50cm intervals for the entire height of the
support stake for future use.
02483 - 5
Landscape Planting
3.
4.
C.
D.
3.06
A.
B.
C.
3.07
A.
B.
Drive support stakes vertically into ground as indicated. Do not injure ball or roots.
Drive ground stakes into firm ground outside of tree pit with top of the stake flush with
ground.
5.
Securely fasten flags on each guy wire approximately two thirds of the distance up from
ground level.
Hedge Protection: Provide stake and wire hedge protection as detailed in the drawings.
Uning: Remove dead and broken branches. Prune deciduous trees and shrubs to reduce total
amount of branching structure by maximum one third. Retain typical growth habit of individual
plants with as much height and spread as in practicable. Make cuts with sharp instruments
flush with trunk or adjacent branch to ensure elimination of stubs. Take care not to damage
central-leaders of columnar trees (Lombardy Poplars).
Apply tree wound dressing to cuts 13mm (1/2 inch) in diameter and larger immediately after
pruning.
Maintenance
Commencement: Begin maintenance immediately after each plant is planted and continue
until end of plant Establishment Period.
Inspection: Inspect plants at least once a week during installation period and perform needed
maintenance promptly.
Application of Pesticides:
1.
Equip hydraulic equipment for liquid application of chemicals with leakproof tanks and
positive agitation method. Calibrate and meter equipment so that application of
chemicals in specified amounts can be determined. Equip equipment with gauges and
valves capable of maintaining constant application pressure.
2.
Apply so damage will not result to personnel or property from either direct spray or drifting
of chemicals both on and off project site.
Plant Establishment Period
Commencement: Will begin on the date that inspection by the Project Manager shows that all
new plants furnished under this contract have been satisfactorily installed, and continue for one
Julian Calendar year.
Maintenance During Plant Establishment Period:
1.
Water, prune, mulch, re-guy, rewrap, spray, remove weeds and perform other operations
necessary to promote healthy growth. Take necessary action to prevent infestation by
insects or rodents, and for the prevention of plant diseases.
2.
Fertilize plants at least once during the plant establishment period between 90 to 120
days after planting. Fertilize by top dressing at 1 kilo per 10 square meters of plant pit or
bed area or by tablet or packet form with controlled release fertilizer.
3. Plants not in healthy growing condition, as determined by the Project Manager will be
noted and as soon as seasonal conditions permit shall be removed and replaced with
plants of the same species and sizes to match plants in the same group. Make
replacements in same manner as specified for original planting.
3.08
Restoration
Restore pavement, concrete other planted areas and structures damaged or soiled during
execution of work in this section.
3.09
Maintenance Schedule
Provide a maintenance schedule of day by day maintenance activities covering one Julian
Calendar year. Schedule shall include mowing, spraying, pruning, etc. Provide three copies
each in Arabic and English.
3.10
A.
Final Inspection And Acceptance
Final Inspection: At completion of the plant establishment period, final inspection will be made
upon written request at least 10 days prior to the anticipated date. Prior to final inspection,
fertilize all plants by top dressing at 1 kilo per 10 square meters of plant pit or bed by area or by
tablet or packet form with controlled release fertilizer.
Final Acceptance: Based on compliance with the following:
1.
Plants have been accepted and required number of replacements are in place.
2.
Plants beds, and tree rings, are free of weeds and are properly mulched.
3.
Stakes and guys are in good condition.
B.
02483 - 6
Landscape Planting
4.
5.
Remedial measures directed by Project Manager to ensure plant survival have been
carried out.
Plant materials have been fertilized as required.
END OF SECTION
02483 - 7
Landscape Planting
SECTION 02513
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
C.
Work Included
Prepare sub-grade to receive base course.
Place stabilizing base course, work and compact.
Prime base course, place asphalt pavement.
1.02
Related Work
A.
B.
1.03
A.
B.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
PART 2
Section 02210: Site Grading.
Section 02577: Pavement Markings.
Reference Standards
ATSM D1557 Tests for Moisture - Density Relationship of Soils using 10 lb. (4.5 kg)
Rammer in 18 inch (457 mm) Drop.
Asphalt Institute Manuals.
Testing And Inspection
Testing and inspection of asphalt pavement mix(es) and testing of placed stabilizing base
course and asphalt pavement will be performed by independent testing laboratory appointed
and paid for by Contractor. Testing and inspection will be performed so as to minimize
disruption to Work.
Allow testing laboratory access to the mixing plant for verification of weights or proportions,
character of materials used and determination of temperatures used in the preparation of
asphalt concrete mix.
When and if required, the testing laboratory will perform laboratory tests on proposed asphalt
pavement mix to determine conformity with requirements.
The testing laboratory will perform two (2) series of compaction tests for stabilizing base course
and for each asphalt pavement. Pay for costs of additional testing as required due to improper
performance of work.
When stabilizing base course or portion thereof has been placed and compacted in
accordance with requirements, notify the testing laboratory to perform density tests. Do not
place asphalt pavement until results have been verified and base course installation approved.
If compaction tests indicate that stabilizing base course or asphalt paving do not meet specified
requirements, remove defective work, replace and retest at own expense.
PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
Stabilizing Base Course Materials
Granular Base:
Angular crushed natural stone; free from shale, organic matter and
debris; graded within following limits:
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
22 mm
100
19 mm
80 to 100
16 mm
75 to 100
13 mm
70 to 90
No. 4 (5 mm)
40 to 70
No. 10 (2 mm)
25 to 50
No. 14 (1.40 mm)
15 to 35
No. 40 (425 micrometers)
15 to 30
No. 200( 75 micrometers)
3 to 8
B.
Primer:
Homogeneous medium curing liquid asphalt; of type recommended for asphaltic
paving; of grade to suit job conditions (according to Asphalt Institute recommendations).
02513 - 1
Asphaltic Concrete Paving
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
Asphalt Pavement Materials
Coarse Aggregate(s): Crushed rock, slag or gravel, or a combination thereof; free of clay, silt
or other deleterious materials; graded within the following limits.
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
(Surface Course)
1/2 inch (13 mm)
100
3/8 inch (10 mm)
50 to 73
No. 4 ( 4.75 mm)
0 to 10
Fine Aggregate(s):
Clean, hard, durable natural sand, manufactured sand or screenings
resulting from the crushing of rock, stone or gravel; free of clay, silt or other objectionable
material; graded within the following limits:
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
(Surface Course)
No. 4 (5 mm)
100
No. 8 (2 mm)
80 to 100
NO. 16 (1 mm)
55 to 90
No. 30 (600 micrometers)
35 to 70
No. 50 (300 micrometers)
15 to 40
No. 100(150 micrometers)
5 to 18
No. 200( 75 micrometers
0 to 8
Asphalt Cement:
Homogeneous; free of water; will not foam when heated to 177
degrees C; 60/70, 85/100 or 150/200 penetration grade.
Mineral Filler:
Finely ground particles of limestone, hydrated lime or other mineral
dust acceptable to Project Manager; free of clay, silt or other deleterious matter; graded within
following limits:
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
No. 30 (600 micrometers)
100
No.200 ( 75 micrometers)
80
Asphalt Pavement Mix
Combine mineral constituents in proportions to produce a mixture conforming to following
gradation requirements:
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
13 mm
100
10 mm
72 to 88
No. 4 (4.75 mm)
45 to 65
No. 8 (2 mm)
36 to 65
No. 30 (600 micrometers)
16 to 45
No. 50 (300 micrometers)
7 to 26
No. 100(150 micrometers)
2 to 10
No. 200( 75 micrometers
0 to 5
Percentage by weight of asphalt cement in mixture; 5.0% to 7.0% for surface course.
Maintain thorough and uniform mixture.
Bring asphalt cement and mineral constituents to required temperatures before mixing. Ensure
aggregates are sufficiently dry so as to cause foaming in mixture.
Job mix formula:
The Contractor shall prepare all asphaltic concrete for use on the
project in accordance with the following criteria (unless an alternative specification is agreed
with Project Manager).
Stability
820 kg (min.)
Flow, units
2 mm min. 4 mm max.
% Air Voids 3 min., 5 max.
Density
(in situ) 98% - 100% laboratory density.
EXECUTION
Preparation
Ensure grading of sub-grade to required elevation.
Scarify sub-grade, where asphalt pavement is to be placed, to a depth of minimum 300 mm.
Window loosened soil to one side. Recompact in two layers to 100% density as measured by
ASTM 1557 150 mm. Rework the wind rowed soil to as finely a divided condition as possible,
02513 - 2
Asphaltic Concrete Paving
C.
3.01
D.
E.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
3.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
spreading over compacted surfaces and compact to densities mentioned above.
Where existing gravel has been wind rowed and retained for sub-grade, incorporate such into
the top 150 mm by mixing and blading. Compact as specified in the preceeding paragraph.
Preparation (cont’d)
Water and thoroughly mix sub-grade until optimum moisture content is obtained when
deficiency of moisture content exists. When excess of moisture exists, rework and aerate subgrade until optimum moisture content is obtained.
Before final rolling, shape entire section, add additional sub-soil as required and compact subgrade to provide grades, elevation and cross-section indicated. Points of finished sub-grade
surface shall be within 12.5 mm of elevations indicated.
Placement Of Stabilizing Base Course
Add water during compaction to bring granular material to optimum moisture content.
Spread base course materials over prepared granular sub-base to a compacted depth as
shown on the drawings. Compact to 100% density. Ensure top surface of base course is true to
lines and grades indicated, with all points within 12.5 mm of elevations indicated.
Add water during compaction to bring stabilizing base course materials to optimum moisture
content. When an excess moisture exists, rework stabilizing base course materials until
optimum moisture content is obtained.
Priming Prepared Stabilized Base Course
Ensure stabilized base course is dry and free of loose or foreign material before priming.
Apply primer over prepared stabilizing base course at a uniform rate as recommended by
Manufacturer and approved by Project Manager, 2.25 liters per square meter. Ensure primer is
at recommended temperature. Use clean natural sand to blot excess primer.
Similarly prime surfaces of curbs and catchpits which will be in contact with asphalt pavement.
Coat surfaces of manholes, catch basins which are to remain free of asphalt with oil to prevent
asphalt adhesion.
Placement Of Asphalt Pavement
Place asphalt pavement within 24 hours of priming stabilizing base course.
Place asphalt pavement to compacted depth indicated.
Do not place asphalt pavement when surface temperature is 4 degrees C or lower. Ensure
asphalt pavement is minimum 118 degrees C immediately after placing and prior to initial
rolling.
Compact asphalt paving to required density, with approved rolling equipment. Start compaction
as soon as pavement will bear equipment without checking or undue displacement.
Carry out compaction in three operations in pass sequence. Ensure each pass of roller
overlaps previous passes to ensure smooth surface free of roller marks. Keep roller wheels
sufficiently moist so as not to pick up material.
Perform hand tamping in areas not accessible to rolling equipment.
Ensure joints made during paving operations are straight, clean, vertical and free of broken or
loose material. Prime vertical surfaces of joints to ensure tight bond.
Ensure surface of completed asphalt pavement is true to lines, profiles and elevations
indicated, and is free from depressions exceeding 3 mm when measured with a 3 meter
straight-edge.
Do not allow vehicular traffic on newly paved areas until surface has cooled to atmospheric
temperature.
In areas where pavements are to be used for playing courts, apply a seal coat in accordance
with Asphalt Institute Manual No. 13 (MS-13).
END OF SECTION
02513 - 3
Asphaltic Concrete Paving
SECTION 02521
PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
Work Included
Precast concrete curb stones and laying.
Precast concrete tiles with plain surface finish and laying.
1.02
A.
B.
Related Work
Section 02210: Site Grading.
All sections relevant to concreting operations, contained within these specifications.
1.03
A.
B.
C.
References
BS 340
BS 1197
BS 8110
1.04
Storage
All precast units shall be stored on site away from traffic areas; avoid excessive handling and protect
from accidental damage.
1.05
Submittals
Sample tiles and curbs shall be submitted together with details of design for approval by the Project
Manager’s; the approved samples shall be used as the standard for the works.
Concrete Curbs
Concrete Tiles
C-BS 8110 - Concrete Work Generally.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Materials
Precast concrete curbs shall be as shown on the Drawings or of such size and shape as approved
by the Project Manager’s on site.
Precast concrete tiles; shall have a surface finish with an approved colour of a single source.
Mixes
All Mixes are to be approved by the Project Manager’s on site.
The crushing strength of the precast concrete units shall be 30 MPa at 28 days.
The concrete slump in the slump test shall not exceed 75mm.
The colour of the top surface of all the units shall be uniform throughout. The use of colour additive is
not permitted without the approval of the Project Manager’s
The requirements of other sections relating to concrete in this specification shall also apply.
Fabrication.
Concrete shall be mixed and handled as specified in other sections in this specification.
Moulds shall be metal high density plywood or plastic; they shall be watertight and of sufficient
rigidity to produce the required shape, size and surface texture.
The required surface finish shall be determined by the Project Manager’s.
The edges of all tiles and curbs shall be uniformly chamfered or straight as required and perfectly at
right angles, the surfaces shall be free from weariness, chipped arrises and other defects.
Patching up and making good of any defective units is not permitted.
All units shall be cured by totally immersing them in water for at least 24 hours after the initial set
has taken place, and allowed to mature for a period of 28 days before transport and laying.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
C.
Inspection and Preparation
Ensure that all surfaces to receive the precast concrete units are free from any loose material, dry,
and uniformly graded and compacted as required and approved by the Project Manager’s.
Ensure that the surface to receive the precast concrete curbs is of sufficient width and depth to have
a concrete bedding placed as required therein to receive the curb.
Do not commence work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
02521 - 1
Precast Concrete Units
3.01
D.
E.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
3.03
A.
B.
C.
Inspection and Preparation (cont’d)
Paving tiles and curbs shall not be laid until the major work in the vicinity of the area has been
completed. When laid, they shall be protected and kept free of any oils, paints, etc. liable to cause
damage or stains.
Verify that substrate is level and to the correct gradient; smooth, capable of supporting pavers and
imposed loads and ready to receive work of this section.
Installation Of Curbs, Paving Tiles, Covers
The plan layout, showing lines and levels of the curbs shall be adhered to.
The curbs shall be set as shown on the drawings. The mix of the concrete shall be approved by the
Project Manager’s
All joints between the curb and the paving tiles, and between the curb sections themselves shall be
filled with a sand cement mortar, as for the paving tiles.
Paving tiles shall be laid on an approved sand bed underlay of an appropriate thickness, and a
mortar bed.
Coordinate installation of pre-cast concrete units.
Spread sand evenly over prepared substrate surface to the required thickness.
Dampen and compact sand to a level and even surface.
Screed and scarify top 12mm of sand-bed underlay.
Lay mortar bed to the required thickness.
Lay paver units from straight reference edge.
Place special shaped units at edge and interruptions.
Maintain evenly spaced joints.
Grout with an approved cementetious grout.
Protection and Cleaning
Surfaces of all precast units shall be carefully cleaned on completion, taking care to avoid any
damage.
Adequate protection shall be given to all the completed work, to avoid damage from any subsequent
activities.
Any damage caused to completed work shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense.
END OF SECTION
02521 - 2
Precast Concrete Units
SECTION 02577
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
Work Included
Pavement markings.
1.02
Reference Standards
Federal Specification TT-P-115E Paint Traffic, Highway, White, Yellow.
1.03
A.
Submittals
The Manufacturer's specifications and application recommendations shall be submitted to the
Project Manager’s.
Samples and details of the paint shall be submitted (about 60 days before application), for
approval.
B.
1.04
Storage
The paint shall be stored in sealed containers which clearly show the designated name,
formula or specification number, batch number, colour, date of manufacture, manufacturers
name and directions for use.
1.05
A.
B.
Job Conditions
Air and pavement temperatures shall be above 4 degrees C during application of the paint.
All markings shall be adequately protected to prevent damage.
PART 2
2.01
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
PRODUCTS
Materials
The paint shall be homogenous, and shall show no objectionable characteristics during the
storage period prior to usage.
The paint shall conform to Federal Specification TT-P-115E, colour as
selected.
EXECUTION
Preparation And Inspection
New pavement surfaces shall be allowed to cure for a period of time of not less than 30 days
before application of marking materials.
All surfaces to be marked shall be thoroughly cleaned before application of the paint.
All pavement cleaning operations shall be performed only after approval by the Project
Manager.
Mechanical preparation and/or priming as may be required shall be in accordance with the
material Manufacturer's Instructions and as applicable to the types of pavement and material
involved.
Layouts And Tolerance
The Contractor shall provide the work necessary to layout the marking work in conformance
with the requirements of the MOC standards for Road Safety Features and with the typical
details shown on the Contract Drawings and within the specified tolerances. Layout marks shall
be removed following completion of marking materials application.
Any variation in the alignment of stripes or broken lines shall not exceed 25 mm in 25 meters,
and the width or stripes or broken lines shall not vary more than plus or minus 10 mm from
the width shown.
Any line required to be curved shall have uniform curvature throughout the arc length, and shall
be accurately aligned and free from offsets at tangent point intersections with lines at straight
roadway sections.
All markings shall be in positions as shown on the Contract Drawings and with an accuracy of
50 mm transversely with respect to the roadway centerline, and longitudinally within 100 mm
with respect to survey stations.
Broken lines shall be uniform in length and spacing and shall not vary from the dimensions
indicated more than plus or minus 50 mm.
02577-1
Pavement Markings
F.
Parallel strips and/or broken lines shall be uniformly spaced apart as shown and any variation
in spacing between them shall not exceed plus or minus 10 mm.
3.03
A.
Application
Marking material shall be applied at a rate of 4 litre per sq. metre or in accordance with the
Manufacturer's Instructions as approved.
Paint shall be applied pneumatically.
Application shall not be made in conditions of blowing sand and dust, nor when the pavement
surface is wet or damp, nor when the ambient and/or surface temperatures exceed the
extremes permitted by the Manufacturer nor otherwise when weather conditions would
adversely affect the finished work.
Adjacent surfaces shall be maintained or otherwise cleaned free from marking materials not
required to be applied.
When complete, the installed marking material shall be uniform in colour, level and smooth,
and free from inclusions of sand or other deleterious substances, stains, discolouration or other
irregularities. Edges of the work shall be neat, straight and free from raggedness or other
unevenness; and corners shall be neatly cut off square or true and sharp to the angle required.
Any markings applied outside the tolerances specified in Article 3.02 shall be completely
removed and re-applied correctly.
Each colour required shall be uniform in hue and reflectance throughout the work.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.04
A.
B.
Safety And Protection Of Work
The Contractor shall provide and use sufficient safety devices and methods to protect all
personnel on site.
Markings shall be protected until they are sufficiently cured to be driven across without
damage. The Contractor shall plan his operations for working only in hours of daylight.
END OF SECTION
02577-2
Pavement Markings
SECTION 03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
GENERAL
Work Includes
Plain and fair face formwork of wood, Steel and Fibrous glass reinforced plastic formwork, for
cast-in place concrete, complete with shoring, bracing and anchorage.
Form openings for mechanical and electrical work.
Coordinate installation of items supplied by other sections of work.
Pre-formed construction joints
Forming of expansion joints.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Related Work
Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement
Section 03251: Expansion and Contraction Joints
Section 03300: Cast-in-Place Concrete
Section 04220: Concrete Masonry Unit
Supports, Anchors and Seals for Mechanical Installations.
Supporting Devices for Electrical Installations.
1.03
Quality Assurance
Construct and erect concrete formwork in accordance with The Project Manager’s Instructions.
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
C.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
PRODUCTS
Wood Form Materials
Plywood: Douglas Fir or Spruce species; sheathing grade; sound undamaged sheets with
clean true edges.
Lumber: spruce species; sheathing grade; with grade stamp clearly visible.
Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required; of sufficient strength
and character to maintain formwork in place while pouring concrete.
Formwork Accessories
Form Ties: Removable or Snap-off metal type of fixed or adjustable length; form ties should be
free of defects and should not leave a hole larger than 25 mm in the concrete surface.
Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil which will not stain concrete or impair natural
bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete.
Fillets for Chamfered corners: Rigid foam plastic type; of required size; maximum possible
lengths.
2.03
Acceptable Manufacturers
Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of 3 manufacturers and their
products which will be acceptable under this section. Approval of the manufacturer or product
must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
2.04
Concrete Accessories
Impregnated fiberboard in the form of permanent formwork, to be used as an expansion joint
filler.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
EXECUTION
Formwork Erection
Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions
agree with drawings.
Construct formwork, shoring and bracing to meet design and code requirements, so that
resultant finished concrete conforms to required shapes, lines and dimensions.
Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping, so that concrete is not
damaged during its removal.
03100 - 1
Concrete Formwork
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
D.
3.03
A.
B.
C.
3.04
A.
B.
3.04
Align joints and make watertight, to prevent leakage of mortar and disfigure appearance of
concrete. Keep form joints to minimum.
Obtain the Project Manager's review for use of earth forms. When using earth forms, handtrim sides and bottoms, and remove loose dirt prior to placing concrete.
Arrange forms to allow stripping without removal of principal shores, where and when these are
required to remain in place.
Obtain the Project Manager's review before framing openings in structural members, which are
no drawings.
Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Prop or strengthen previously constructed
formwork liable to be over stressed by construction loads.
Provide chamfer strips on external corners of members only where shown on drawings.
Construct formwork to provide completed concrete surfaces after removal of forms and prior to
patching and finishing of cast-in-place formed surfaces.
Form expansion joints in the positions shown on the drawings and finish-off as follows:
–
Joint filled with polystyrene filler boards in the form of permanent formwork.
Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Apply prior to placing reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.
Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or
applied coverings which are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with
clean water. Keep surfaces wet prior to placing concrete.
Inserts, Embedded Parts, And Openings
Provide formed openings where required for pipes, conduits, sleeves, and other work to be
embedded in and passing through concrete members.
Locate and set in place items which will be cast directly into concrete.
Coordinate work of other sections and cooperate with trade involved in forming and setting
openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts. Do not perform
work unless specifically indicated on drawings or reviewed prior to installation.
Install concrete accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; straight,
level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate
cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow
flushing water to drain. Close temporary ports or openings with tight fitting
panels, flush with inside face of forms, neatly fitted so that joints will not be
apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.
Field Quality Control
Inspect and check completed formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in
accordance with formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and parts are
secure.
Inform the Project Manager when formwork is complete and has been cleaned, to allow for
inspection. Obtain review prior to placing concrete.
Allow the Project Manager to inspect each section of formwork prior to reuse.
Finishes
Plain Finish:
Formwork generally and to concrete surfaces to be plastered may be sawn formwork.
Fair Faced Finish :
1.
Concrete surface which are described as fair face finished shall be finished free from
honeycombing and excessive air holes, fines and projections arising from defective
mixing, placing of formwork, and shall, if necessary, be filled with mortar and rubbed with
fine carborundum stone The finish shall be integral with the body of the concrete and
shall not be obtained by means of an applied rendering.
2.
The quality of the surface of concrete exposed to view shall be consistent throughout the
project and the following methods shall be adopted to obtain the required fancy. The
Contractor may submit alternative proposals for the approval of the Project Manager if he
so desires.
Finishes (cont’d)
a.
Formwork for fair faced concrete shall be either of steel, fibrous glass reinforced
plastic or exterior grade plywood not less than 16mm thick properly detailed to the
satisfaction of the Project Manager whose approval is required in writing before
order the formwork. The Formwork boards shall not be used more than (4) times.
03100 - 2
Concrete Formwork
b.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.05
A.
B.
3.06
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
In addition to the above forms of linings, the forms shall be coated before placing
the reinforcement with an approved colourless mineral oil free of kerosene, and
shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
c.
All surplus oil on form surface and any oil on reinforcing steel shall be removed.
Approval by the Project Manager to Fair Faced Finishes:
The Contractor shall submit for approval of the Project Manager a sample panel not less
than 60cm x 120cm to demonstrate the quality of the exposed concrete to be produced
by forms, at his own expense.
The quality of the finished work shall be measured against the quality of the approved
sample panel and the work of inferior quality shall be repaired or replaced as directed by
the Project Manager without any additional cost.
The quality of the finished surfaces shall be of uniform colour and consistency throughout
the project. Should there by any inconsistency in colour or texture in any of the finished
surfaces the Project Manager may order the repair or the demolition of a portion of
concrete work and its reconstruction at the contractor's own expense.
Construction joints, in special cases of weather conditions and if approved by the Project
Manager, shall be studied in detail ahead of time and the joints shall be grooved in a
predetermined pattern approval by the Project Manager.
Cleaning
Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign
Matter: Remove cuttings, shavings, and debris from within forms. Flush with water or use
compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to
exterior through clean-outs ports.
During cold weather, remove ice from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts. Do not use
water to clean out completed forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within
heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter.
Form Removal
Notify Project Manager prior to removing formwork.
Do not remove forms, shores and bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry
its own weight, and construction and design load which are liable to be imposed upon it. Verify
strength of concrete by compressive test results.
Remove formwork progressively and in accordance with code requirements and so that no
shock loads or unbalanced loads are imposed on structure.
Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against concrete surfaces.
Leave forms loosely in place, against vertical surfaces, for protection until complete removal is
approved by the Project Manager.
Store removed forms, for exposed architectural concrete, in manner that surfaces to be in
contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged. Marked or scored forms will be rejected.
Reshore structural members where required due to design requirements or construction
conditions and as required to permit progressive construction. Remove load supporting forms
only when concrete has attained 75 percent of required 28 day compressive strength, provided
construction is reshored.
Remove forms not directly supporting weight of concrete as soon as stripping operations will
not damage concrete.
END OF SECTION
03100 - 3
Concrete Formwork
SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
Work Included
Reinforcing steel bars, and punching shear cages for cast-in-place concrete, complete with tie
wire.
Support chairs, bars supports, spacers for reinforcing.
1.02
Related Work
Section 03300: Cast-in-place concrete.
1.03
Quality Assurance
Perform concrete reinforcing work in accordance with the Project Manager’s Instructions.
1.04
A.
Source Quality Control
Submit 3 certified copies of mill test report of supplied concrete reinforcing, indicating physical
and chemical analysis.
Provide the Project Manager with access to fabrication plant to facilitate inspection of
reinforcement. Notify of commencement and duration of shop fabrication, in sufficient time to
allow for proper inspection.
B.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
Reinforcing
Grade
High Yield Steel
Mild Steel
Reinforcing Steel:
Minimum Yield Strength
420 MPa
300 MPa
High yield deformed weldable steel bars, BS 4449, BS 4461 or BS 4483.
2.02
Quality Requirements
Steel reinforcement shall be hot rolled high strength high bond.
2.03
A.
B.
Fabrication
Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with BS 4449, BS 4461 or BS 4483.
Locate reinforcing splices, not indicated on drawings, at points of minimum stress. Location of
splices: to be reviewed by the Project Manager.
2.04
A.
Accessory Materials
Tie Wire: Minimum 1.5mm gauge annealed type, or patented system accepted by Project
Manager.
Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of
reinforcing during construction conditions.
Special Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers where adjacent to architectural concrete
surfaces: Plastic coated type; sized and shaped as required.
B.
C.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
EXECUTION
Placement And Fixing Of Reinforcement
Place reinforcing supported and secured against displacement. Do not deviate from true
alignment.
Before placing concrete, ensure reinforcing is clean, free of loose scale, dirt, or other foreign
coatings which would reduce bond to concrete.
All reinforcement shall be fixed rigidly in position. At intersections the bars shall be bound
together with tying wire and the loose ends of the wire shall be turned towards the inside of the
member.
Reinforcement shall only be spliced or welded where shown on the drawings. All welding
procedures shall be subject to approval.
03200 - 1
Concrete Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be fixed in the positions shown on the drawings within a tolerance of 5mm
of 5% of the lowest dimension of the cross-section of the member, whichever is greater.
3.01
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
3.02
A.
Placement And Fixing Of Reinforcement (cont’d)
The concrete cover to the reinforcement shall be carefully maintained utilizing approved
spacers where necessary. The minimum concrete cover to all steel shall be:
50mm for concrete below grade.
30 mm for exposed fair faced concrete surfaces.
25mm for internal concrete faces above grade.
Where concrete spacer blocks are used they shall not exceed 50mm square in section and
shall be precast from concrete of similar mix proportions and strength as the adjacent
concrete, except that the largest size of aggregate shall be 10mm.
Spacer blocks shall not be used where the concrete face will be visible in the finished work,
without the approval of the Project Manager.
Each concrete spacer block shall be securely fixed to the reinforcement with wire or a clip. The
wire or clip shall be embedded in the center of the blocks so that it does not subsequently
cause rust marks on the concrete surface.
Supports and other subsidiary bars necessary to maintain the reinforcement in position shall be
provided at approved intervals with concrete cover not less than that of the adjacent
reinforcement.
Fabric reinforcement shall be used in standard sheets where possible. Adjoining sheets shall
overlap by at least on rectangle or 60 diameters of the bar at the lap, whichever is the greater.
Scaffold boards shall be provided to ensure that the reinforcement is not displaced by being
walked upon during concreting or other operations .
During concreting operations a competent steel fixer shall be in attendance to ensure that the
reinforcement is maintained in the position as pouring and compaction proceeds.
Measurements and Rates
Rates
Calculation of Steel reinforcement bars, weight to be calculated as follows:
Diameter (mm)
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
25
26
30
32
B.
Weight (Kg/mm)
0.222
0.395
0.617
0.888
1.210
1.580
2.000
2.460
2.980
3.550
3.850
4.170
5.550
6.318
Unit rate shall include all labor, reinforcing, tie wires and all necessary materials needed (chair,
spacers ...etc.) for the completion of the work as specified.
END OF SECTION
03200 - 2
Concrete Reinforcement
SECTION 03215
DOWELING FOR CONCRETE
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
References
The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
2.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. A193, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for
High-Temperature Service.
b. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile
Strength.
c. C881, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete.
d. C882, Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with
Concrete by Slant Shear.
e. D648, Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural
Load.
f. D695, Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics.
3.
International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO): Uniform Building Code (UBC).
1.02
A.
B.
Definitions
ICBO Reports: Published by ICBO for concrete anchor manufacturers.
Special Inspection: As governed by the ICBO UBC.
1.03
A.
Submittals
Shop Drawings: Technical data for adhesive, grouts, and bonding agents.
1.
Mixed Adhesive: Current test data indicating cured adhesive meets or exceeds design loads
required.
Samples: two random samples of each batch of products delivered to site, for independent testing.
Quality Control Submittals:
1.
Manufacturer’s specific instructions for preparation, placement, drilling of holes, installation of
anchors and adhesive, and handling of cartridges, nozzles, and equipment.
2.
Manufacturer’s qualifications, to include client name, address, contact person, phone
number, project location, and description of work.
3.
Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.
4.
Manufacturer’s written letter of certification identifying installer’s qualifications to install
products.
5.
Doweling system manufacturer’s ICBO Reports.
6.
Provide detailed step-by-step instructions for the Special Inspection procedure in accordance
with ICBO Reports and UBC.
7.
Copy of manufacturer’s operation and repair manuals for each type of equipment delivered
to site.
B.
C.
1.04
A.
B.
1.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
1.
Manufacturer: At least three similar projects with same products within the last 3 years.
2.
Installer: Trained and certified by manufacturer.
Regulatory Requirements: Adhesive and grouts shall be acceptable to EPA and health agencies
for use in potable water structures.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Store epoxy/ adhesive components on pallets or shelving in a covered storage area.
Control temperature above 15 degrees C and dispose of product if shelf life has expired.
Dispose of product if stored at other than manufacturer’s instructions.
Container Markings: Include manufacturer’s name, product name, batch number, mix ratio by
volume, product expiration date, ANSI hazard classification, and appropriate ANSI handling
precautions.
03215 - 1
Doweling for Concrete
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
PRODUCTS
Materials
Two-component, insensitive to moisture, designed o be installed in adverse freeze/ thaw
environments.
Cure Temperature, Pot Life, and Workability: Compatible for intended use and anticipated
environmental conditions.
Mixed Adhesive: Nonsag light paste consistency with ability to remain in a 25 mm diameter
overhead drilled hole without runout.
Manufacturers and Products:
1. ITW Ramset/ Red Head, Paris, KY 40361; Epcon Ceramic 6 Epoxy Anchor System.
2. Covert Operations, Long Beach, CA or Chester, NJ; CIA Epoxy Anchors with viscosity to suit
application.
3. The Rawlplug Co., Inc., New Rochelle, NY; Foil Fast Epoxy Injection Gel System.
4. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; HIT Doweling Anchor System (HIT C-100).
5. Or equal approved.
2.02
A.
Anchor Rods
Threaded Steel Rods: Sized by adhesive manufacturer for design loads required and adhesive
system used:
1.
ASTM A307, Grade A.
2.
ASTM A 193 (B7), high strength.
3.
ASTM A 193 (B8), Type 304, stainless steel.
B. Reinforcing Bars: As specified in Section 03210, REINFROCING STEEL.
C. Smooth Epoxy-Coated Plain Reinforcing Bars: As specified in Section 03210, REINFROCING STEEL
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
General
A. Dispensing, Metering, or Mixing Adhesive Components: Use portable, automatic metering and
mixing device or machine capable of maintaining prescribed mix ratio within deviation of 5 percent
or less, by volume.
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s specific instructions.
C. Dispense components through specially designed static mixing nozzle that thoroughly mixes
components and places mixed adhesive at base of predrilled hole.
D. Mixing Nozzles:
1. Disposable, manufactured in several sizes to accommodate size or reinforcing dowels.
2. Nonremovable internal static mixer required to ensure proper blending of components.
E. Where large meter and mixing pumps are impractical, provide adhesive packaged as follows:
1. Disposable, self-contained cartridge system capable of dispensing both components in the
proper mixing ratio, and fit into a manually or pneumatically operated caulking gun.
2. Dispense components through a mixing nozzle that thoroughly mixes components and places
adhesive at base of predrilled hole.
3. Mixing Nozzles:
a. Disposable, manufactured in several sizes to accommodate sizes of reinforcing dowels.
b. Nonremovable internal static mixer required to ensure proper blending of components.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
Testing of Automatic Metering and Mixing Devices
Tests for Proper Ratio:
1. Retain small amount of dispensed adhesive for inspection after each time the pump is refilled.
2. Check these samples for color change.
3. Should change in color occur, follow manufacturer’s service instructions to obtain proper
operation.
Frequency of Tests: Make full ratio check after each 100 gallons of adhesive is dispensed or if color
of mixed adhesive becomes noticeably darker or lighter.
Ratio Check Procedure:
1. Disconnect dispensing head behind ON/OFF valve.
03215 - 2
Doweling for Concrete
3.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
2. Place volume containers of the required proportions under the “B” and “A” component hose
end.
3. Actuate the pump.
4. Both cups should fill in an equal time to the proper volume, thereby verifying the proportion ratio
by volume.
Dowel Sizing and Installation
Follow adhesive manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
Drilling Equipment:
1. Drilling Hammers for Dowel Holes: Electric or pneumatic rotary type with medium or light
impact.
2. Hollow drills with flushing air systems are preferred.
3. Where edge distances are less than 2 inches, use lighter impact equipment to prevent
microcracking and concrete spalling during drilling process.
Hole Diameter:
1. As small as possible to allow dowel to be embedded to required depth.
2. Use drill bit diameter meeting ICBO Report requirement and as recommended by the
manufacturer.
Obstructions in Drill Path:
1. When existing reinforcing steel is encountered during drilling and when approved by the
PROJECT MANAGER, enlarge the hole by 4 mm, core through the existing reinforcing steel at
the larger diameter, and resume drilling at original hole diameter; or redrill hole 25 mm from
original location, beginning in the same line at the surface, redirecting the drill to miss reinforcing
steel.
2. Place dowels in both the misdrilled hole and the new one.
3. When using epoxy anchors, dowels may be prebend prior to installation to 15 degrees to align
with other bars. Do not heat dowels to bend.
4. If bars have fused epoxy coating and coating is damaged, recoat damaged area with epoxy.
5. Bent Bar Dowels: Where edge distances are critical, and striking reinforcing steel is likely, drill
hole at 10-degree angle or less and use prebent reinforcing bars.
END OF SECTION
03215 - 3
Doweling for Concrete
SECTION 03251
EXPANSION, CONTRACTING, CONSTRUCTION, AND CONTROL JOINTS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1
A.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
References
The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1)
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A36, Standard Specification for Structural Steel.
A525, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheets,
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.
A767/767M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement.
D226, Standard Specification for Asphalt-Standard Organic Felt Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing.
D227, Standard Specification for Coal-Tar-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing.
D994, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete (Bituminous Type) (AASHTO M33).
D1056, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge for
Expanded Rubber.
D1751, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient
Bituminous Types).
2)
Corps of Engineer (COE): CRD-C-572, Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinylchloride
Waterstop.
3)
American National Standards Institute (ANSI): ANSI/NSF 61, Drinking Water System
Components, and Health Effects.
1.2
A.
Submittals
Shop Drawings:
1)
Plastic Type Water Stops: Details of splices to be used and method of securing water stop in
the forms and supporting water stop so as to maintain proper orientation and location during
concrete placement.
2)
Construction Joints: Layout and location indicating type to be used.
3)
Joint fillers for horizontal and sloped joints.
4)
Preformed control joints.
5)
Water stop.
B.
Samples: Splice, joint, and fabricated cross of each size, shape, and fitting
of water stop(s) proposed for use.
C.
Quality Control Submittals:
1) Joint Filler for Potable Water Structures: Copy of applicable NSF listing.
2) Water stop manufacturer’s written instructions for product shipment, storage, handling,
installation fields splices, and repair.
3) Joint Filler and Primer: Manufacturer’s written instructions for product shipment, storage,
handling, application, and repair.
4) Preformed Control Joint: Manufacturer’s written instructions for product shipment, storage,
handling, application, and repair.
1.3
A.
Quality Assurance
Regulatory Requirements: Acceptance of pourable joint filler for potable water structures by federal
EPM or by a state health agency.
1) Pourable Joint Filler: Certified as meeting NSF 61.
B.
Qualifications: Water stop manufacturer shall demonstrate 5 years,
minimum, continuous successful experience in production of PVC water stops.
1.4
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Acceptance at Site: Verify that water stops delivered are in accordance
with cross-section dimensions as shown and manufacturer’s product data prior to
unloading and storing onsite.
B.
Storage: Store water stops under tarps to protect from oil, dirt, and
sunlight.
A.
03251 - 1
Expansion, Contracting, Construction and Control Joints
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Plastic Water Stop
Extruded form an elastomeric plastic compound of which the basic resin
shall be prime virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC). Compound shall not contain any
scrapped material, reclaimed material, or pigment.
Specific Gravity: Approximately 1.37.
Shore Durometer Type A Hardness: Approximately 80.
Performance Requirements: Corps of Project Managers’ Specification
CRD-C-572.
Type: Center bulb with a number of parallel ribs or protrusions on each
side of strip center.
Corrugated or tapered type water stops are not acceptable.
Thickness: Constant from bulb edge to the outside stop edge.
Minimum Weight per Meter of Water Stop:
1. 2.4 kg for 10 mm by 150 mm.
Factory Fabrications: Use only factory fabrications for intersections,
transitions, and changes of direction.
2.2 Wire Looped Plastic Water Stop
A.
Furnish as an alternative to plastic water stops.
B.
Same material and geometry as plastic water stops.
C.
Furnish with continuos galvanized wire looping at edge for convenience in
positioning and securing stop in place in the forms.
2.3Bond Breaker
A. Tape for Joints: Adhesive-backed glazed butyl or polyethylene tape, same width as the joint,
that will adhere to the premolded joint material or concrete surface.
B. Use either bond breaker tape or a bond prevention material as specified in Section 03300,
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE, expect where a tape is specifically called for.
2.4Premolded Joint Filler
A. Bituminous Type: ASTM D994 or D1751.
B. Sponge Rubber: Neoprene, closed-cell, expanded; ASTM D1056, Type 2C5, with a
compression deflection, 25 percent deflection (limits), 119 to 168 kPa (17 to 24 psi) minimum.
2.5Premolded Control Filler
A.
One-Piece, Flexible, Polyvinyl Chloride Joint Former.
B.
One-Piece Steel Strip with Preformed Groove.
C.
Furnish in full-length, unspliced pieces.
2.6Pourable Joint Fillers
A.
Filler for Water Structures:
1) Meet requirements of ANSI/NSF 61.
2) Multicomponent sealant, self-leveling or nonsag as required for level, sloping, or vertical joints.
3) Color: White.
4) Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Sika Chemical Co., Lyndhurst, NJ; Sikaflex-2C or Sikaflex-1A.
b.
Or equal approved.
B.
Urethane or Polyurethane Filler for Aeration or Oxygenation Basins: Twocomponent, pourable, immersible, and compatible with a high purity oxygen environment;
of self-leveling or nonsag consistency.
1) Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Sika Chemical Co.
b.
Or equal approved.
2) Primer: As recommended by the manufacturer.
03251 - 2
Expansion, Contracting, Construction and Control Joints
2.7 Steel Expansion Joint Dowels
Dowels: ASTM A36 round smooth steel bars.
2.8Accessories
A.
Nonshrink Grout:
1) As specified in Section 03600, GROUT.
2) Compatible with joint sealant.
B.
Roofing Felt: ASTM D226, Type II, 30-pound asphalt-saturated or equal
weight of ASTM D227 coal-tar saturated felt.
C.
Reinforcing Steel: As specified in Section 03210, REINFORCING STEEL.
D.
Nails: As required for securing bituminous type premolded joint filler.
E.
F.
G.
Masking Tape: As required to temporarily adhere to concrete at each side of joint to receive filler.
Galvanized Rebar at Control Joints: ASTM A767/767/M and A615 Grade 60 prior to galvanized.
Ties for PVC Water Stop: “Hog Rings” or grommets for each edge at 12-inch maximum spacing.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
General
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Construct straight joints; make vertical or horizontal, except where walls
intersect sloping floors.
Commence concrete placement after the joint preparation is complete.
Time Between Concrete Pours: As specified in Section 03300, CAST-INPLACE CONCRETE.
Reservoir Walls:
1) Horizontal construction joints are not permitted.
2) Vertical joints in addition to those shown may be used; meet design requirements for joints in
walls.
Surface Preparation
Construction Joints: Prior to placement of abutting concrete, clean contact
surface:
1) Remove Laitance and spillage from reinforcing steel and dowels.
2) Roughen surface to a minimum of 1/4-inch amplitude:
a.
Sandblast after the concrete has fully cure.
b.
Water blast after the concrete has partially cured.
c.
Green cut fresh concrete with high pressure water and hand tools.
3) Perform cleaning so as not to damage water stop, if one is present.
Expansion Joint with Pourable Filler:
1) Use motorized wire brush or other motorized device to mechanically roughen and thoroughly
clean concrete surfaces on each side of joint from plastic water stop to the top of the joint.
2) Use clean and dry high pressure air to remove dust and foreign material, and dry joint.
3) Prime surfaces before placing joint filler.
4) Avoid damage to water stop.
Contraction Joint with Pourable Filler:
1) Coat concrete surfaces above and below plastic water stop with bon breaker.
2) Do not damage water stop.
Control Joint:
1) Coat concrete surfaces above and below plastic water stop with bond breaker.
2) Do not damage water stop.
3) Furnish correct type and size of reinforcing and dowels.
4) Construction Joint with Hydrophilic Water Stop:
a.
Follow manufacturer’s written instructions.
b.
Clean all debris, dirt, dust, and foreign material from concrete surface.
c.
Concrete surface must be smooth, clean, and dry.
Installation of Water Stops
A.
General:
Join water stops at intersections to provide continuous seal.
Center water stop on joint.
Secure water stop in correct position to avoid displacement during concrete
placement by tying to rebar above and below using grommets, “Hog Rings”, or
rebar tiewire at maximum spacing of 12 inches.
Repair or replace damaged water stop.
Place concrete and vibrate to obtain impervious concrete in the vicinity of all joints.
03251 - 3
Expansion, Contracting, Construction and Control Joints
6)
3.3
Joints in Footing and Slabs:
a.
Ensure that space beneath plastic water stop is completely filled with
concrete.
b.
During concrete placement, make a visual inspection of the entire water stop
area.
c.
Limit concrete placement to elevation of water stop in first pass, vibrate the
concrete under the water stop, lift the water stop to confirm full consolidation
without voids, then place remaining concrete to full height of slab.
d.
Apply procedure to full length of plastic water stops.
Installation of Water Stops (cont’d)
Plastic Water Stop:
Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
Splice in accordance with the water stop manufacturer’s written
instructions using a teflon coated thermostatically controlled heating iron
at approximately 250 degrees C.
a.
Allow at least 10 minutes before the new splice is pulled or strained in any
way.
b.
Finished splices shall provide a cross-section that is dense and free of porosity
with tensile strength of not less than 80 percent of the unspliced materials.
c.
Use only factory made water stop fabrications for all intersections, changes of
directions and transitions.
d.
Field splice permitted only for straight butt welds.
3)
Wire looped plastic water stop may be substituted for plastic water stop.
B.
1)
2)
3.4
Expansion Joint Installation
General:
1) Premold Joint Filler:
a.
Sufficient in width to completely fill the joint space where shown.
b.
If a water stop is in the joint, cut premold joint filler to butt tightly against the
water stop and the side forms.
2) Precut premold joint filler to the required depth at locations where joint
filler or sealant is to be applied.
3) Form cavities for joint filler with either precut, premolded joint filler, or
smooth removable accurately shaped material. Entire joint above water stop, in slabs, shall be
formed and removed so that entire space down to water stop can be filled with the pourable joint
filler.
A.
4)
Vibrate concrete thoroughly along the joint form to produced a dense, smooth
surface.
B.
Bituminous Type Premolded Joint Filler:
1)
Drive nails approximately 450 mm on center through the filler, prior to
installing, to provide anchorage embedment into the concrete during concrete
placement.
2)
Secure premolded joint filler in forms before concrete is placed.
3)
Install in walkways, at changes in direction, at intersections, at each side
of driveway entrances, and at 15 m intervals, maximum.
C.
Pourable Joint Filler:
1)
General: Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions,
except as specified below:
a.
Apply primer prior to pouring joint filler.
b.
Fill entire joint above the water stop with joint filler as shown.
c.
Use masking tape on top of slabs at sides of joints; clean spillage. Remove
masking tape afterwards.
2)
Multicomponent Type for Water Structures: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s
written instructions.
3.5
A.
1)
2)
Contracting Joint Installation
General:
Place bond breaker above and below stop.
Vibrate concrete thoroughly along the joint form to produce a dense, smooth surface.
A.
B.
C.
Control Joint Installation
Locate galvanized reinforcing as shown.
Install PVC water stop.
Concrete surfaces shall be dense and smooth.
3.6
03251 - 4
Expansion, Contracting, Construction and Control Joints
D.
3.7
Install bond breaker to concrete surfaces above and below water stop.
Performed Control Joints
Use only where specifically shown; do not use in water-holding basins.
Locate flush, or slightly below the top of slab.
Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions in straight,
full-length unspliced pieces.
D.
Steel Strip Type with Preformed Groove: Brace to withstand pressure of
concrete during and after placement.
A.
B.
C.
END OF SECTION
03251 - 5
Expansion, Contracting, Construction and Control Joints
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
Work Included
Poured-in-place concrete foundations, walls and floors for external works.
Prepare concrete base slabs to receive toppings.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
Related Work
Section 03100: Formwork for Concrete.
Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement.
Section 03370: Concrete Curing.
1.03
Quality Assurance
Perform cast-in-place concrete work in accordance with the Project Manager’s Instructions.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.05
A.
B.
1.06
Testing Agency
Provide free access to work and cooperate with the appointed firm.
Submit proposed mix design to inspection and the testing firm for review prior to commencement
of work.
Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with requirements
stated herein.
Six (6) concrete standard test cubes will be taken for every 60 or less cubic meters
of concrete placed.
Six (6) additional test cubes will be taken during either hot or cold weather concreting, and be
cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents.
One (1) slump test will be taken for each set of test Cube taken.
Certifying The Batching Plant
The Contractor shall seek the Project Manager's approval on the batching plant used for
concrete production. Contractor shall provide an access to the plant for the Project Manager's
personnel and shall assist them to check the batching plant prior to granting the Project
Manager's approval thereon and regularly thereafter as required by the Project Manager's.
Checking shall include without limitations :
1.
The integrity of the mixing blade and its compatibility with the profile of the mixing bowl.
2.
The weighing accuracy :
Weighing devices shall be examined and its accuracy shall fall within the following
tolerances
Cement +
2% of the weight of the cement in the batch.
Aggregate +
2% of the weight of each aggregate in the Batch.
Water +
2% of the weight of water added to the batch.
Admixtures +
5% of the amount to be added to the batch.
3.
Calibration of weighing equipment:
Sufficient test weighing shall be kept available on site for checking the accuracy of all
scales. The scales shall be checked at the commencement of preliminary concrete
tests and checks shall be carried out at intervals as directed by the Project Manager
but in any case not greater than 2-weeks. The results of these checks shall be recorded
and submitted to the Project Manager.
All scales shall be inspected and tested over their complete range by a specialist and at
least every three months, the results being record and submitted to the Project Manager.
With admixture dispensers, a calibrated container shall be provided to check the accuracy
of measurement at least once each month.
Warranty/Guarantee
All warranties/guarantees to be issued by the Supplier, manufacturers and sub-contractors shall
be counter-signed by Main Contractor and both of them will be liable for repair/replace the
items/works, etc., during the warrantee/guarantee period.
03300 - 1
Cast-In-Place Concrete
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
PRODUCTS
Concrete Materials
Cement: Furnish from one source.
Cement: Ordinary Portland Cement.
Cement shall comply with the relevant standards.
Cement shall be Portland Type, originating from approved manufacturers, obtained in sealed
and labeled bags, each 50 kg net capacity, name and brand of the manufacturer shall plainly be
identified thereon and delivered to Site in good condition. Cement delivered in bulk shall be
accepted only if a central mixing plant is used. The quality of cement shall conform to the
Standard Specification for Portland CEMENT of ASTM Designation: C150 -74 Type I- for use in
general concrete construction.
All cement shall be stored in suitable waterproof and approved storage sheds, which will protect
the cement from dampness. These storage sheds shall be erected in locations approved by the
Supervisor. Provisions for storage shall be ample, and the consignment of cement as received
shall be separately stored in such a manner as to provide easy access for the identification and
inspection of each consignment. Cement shall be used in the order of its delivery to site; new
deliveries shall not be used unless the cement from earlier deliveries has been completely used.
Stored cement shall meet the test requirements at any time after storage whenever asked at the
Contractor’s expense.
The Contractor shall keep accurate records of the deliveries of cement and of its use in the work.
Copies of these records shall be supplied to the Supervisor in such form as may be required.
The total alkali content shall not be in excess of 0.60 percent by weight of cement when tested in
accordance with "Standard Method of Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement ASTM C114-69".
The expansion due to sulphate exposure in fourteen (14) days shall be less than 0.045 percent
when tested in accordance with "Standard Method of Test for Potential Expansion of Portland
Cement Mortars exposed to Sulphate ASTM C452-68".
The heat of hydration shall not exceed 70 calories per gram and 80 calories per gram at seven
(7) days and twenty-eight (28) days respectively when tested in accordance with "Standard
Method of Test for Heat Hydration of Portland Cement ASTM C186-68".
The autoclave expansion shall not exceed 0.80 percent, in accordance with "Standard Method of
Test for Autoclave Expansion of Portland Cement ASTM C151-68".
The Contractor shall notify the Supervisor of dates of delivery so that there will be sufficient time
for sampling the cement, either at the mill or upon delivery.
The provisional acceptance of the cement at the mill shall not deprive the Supervisor of the right
to reject on a retest of soundness at the time of delivery of the cement to the Site. Packages of
cement varying by 5 percent or more from the specified weight shall be rejected and if the
average weight of packages in any consignment, as shown by weighing 50 packages taken at
random, is less than that specified, the entire consignment shall be rejected and the Contractor
shall remove it forthwith from the Site at his own expense and replace it with cement of
satisfactory quality.
Stale cement or cement reclaimed from cleaning bags shall not be used and cement, which for
any reason has become partially set, or contains lumps or caked cement, shall be rejected.
Aggregate from one source.
1.
Fine Aggregate
All fine aggregate for concrete shall conform to Standard Specification for Concrete
Aggregates of ASTM Designation: C-33 and also to the detailed requirements given in the
following table. It shall not contain harmful materials such as iron pyrites, coal, mica, shale,
alkali coated grains, or similar laminated materials such as soft and flaky particles, or any
material which may attack the reinforcement, in such a form and in sufficient quantity to affect
adversely the strength and durability of the concrete. Fine aggregate passing sieve No. 4 shall
not contain any voided shells.
Fine aggregates shall be washed thoroughly with demineralized water to ensure compliance
with the appropriate requirements and limitations of Specifications. The Contractor shall
provide and maintain for that purpose approved sand-washing plant.
Fine aggregates shall be delivered and stored separately on Site in such a manner as to
prevent segregation and contamination or the admixture of foreign materials. Aggregate which
has become segregated or contaminated with foreign matter during storage or handling will be
rejected and shall be removed and replaced with material of acceptable quality at the
Contractor’s expense. Aggregates of quality and colour selected shall be stored in sufficient
quantity to avoid interruption of concerning work at any time.
03300 - 2
Cast-In-Place Concrete
2.01
Concrete Materials (Cont’d)
GRADING SIEVE
3/8
No. 4
No. 8
No. 16
No. 30
No. 50
No. 100
No. 200
|Fineness modulus
Organic impurities
Chlorides soluble in
dilute Nitric Acid
Total acid soluble
sulphates
Silt
Mortar strength
Soundness
2.
REQUIREMENTS OF FINE AGGREGATES
PERCENT PASSING
100
95 - 100
80 – 100
50 - 85
25 - 60
10 - 30
2 - 10
0- 3
2.50 - 2.15
The colour shall have an intensity not darker than two-thirds the intensity
of the standard colour solution. (Not darker than Plate 2 as determined
by the Standard Method of Test for Organic Impurities in Sands for
Concrete of ASTM Designation: C-40.
Not more than 0.10 percent by weight when expressed as sodium
chloride (CaCl).
Not more than 0.50 percent by weight when expressed as sulphur
trioxide (S03).
Not more than 2 percent
Compression ratio not less than 95%.
Weighted average loss when subjected to 5 cycles of the soundness test
using magnesium sulphate, not more than 10%.
Coarse Aggregates
All coarse aggregates for concrete shall conform to Standard Specifications for Concrete
Aggregates of ASTM Designation: C-33. Coarse aggregate shall consist of gravel, crushed
gravel, or crushed stone, having hard, strong durable pieces, free from adherents. It shall not
contain harmful materials such as iron pyrites, coal, mica, alkali, laminated materials, or any
material which may attack the reinforcement, in such a form or in sufficient quantity to affect
adversely the strength and durability of the Concrete.
Coarse aggregates shall be delivered and stored separately on Site in such a manner as to
prevent segregation and contamination or the admixture of foreign materials. Aggregate which
has become segregated or contaminated with foreign matter during storage or handling will be
rejected and shall be removed and replaced with material of acceptable quality at the
Contractor’s expense. Aggregates of the quality and color selected shall be stored in sufficient
quantity to avoid interruption of concerning work at any time.
The amount of deleterious substances in coarse aggregates shall not exceed the following
limits:
Soft fragments
Coal and lignite
Clay lumps
Materials passing the No. 200 sieve
Thin or elongated pieces (length greater than 5 times
average thickness)
Other local deleterious substances
Chlorides soluble in dilute Nitric acid when expressed as
sodium Chloride (NaCl)
Total acid soluble sulphates when expressed as sulphur
trioxide (SO3)
Maximum Permissible Limit
Percent by Weight
2.0
0.5
0.25
1.0
4.0
0.0
0.05
0.5
The percentage of wear, in coarse aggregate shall not be more than 30 in accordance with Los
Angeles test.
03300 - 3
Cast-In-Place Concrete
When the coarse aggregate is subjected to five alternations of the sodium sulphate soundness
test, the weighted loss shall not exceed 10 (ten) percent. In the event of failing to obtain a
satisfactorily result it shall be subjected to an alternate freezing thawing test.
Coarse aggregate, when tested according to the requirements of ASTM, shall meet the following
gradation and shall be uniformly graded within stated limits at following table:
2.01
Concrete Materials (Cont’d)
ASTM
2½ inch
2 inch
1½ inch
1 inch
¾ inch
½ inch
3\8 inch
No. 4
No. 8
No. 200
C.
D.
GRADING OF COARSE AGGREGATE
PERCENTAGE BY WEIGHT PASSING
GRADING
GRADING
GRADING
(¾” - NO. 4)
(1”-NO.4)
(2” - NO. 4)
100
95-100
100
100
95-100
35-70
95-100
25-60
10-30
20-55
0-10
0-10
0-5
0-5
0-5
0-1
0-1
0-1
Approved fine and coarse aggregate in each batch of concrete shall be combined in proportions
as approved by the Supervisor, according to test results giving the required compressive
concrete stress as specified per type of concrete.
The combined aggregate gradation using the 3/4-inch to No. 4 gradation shall be used for
concrete members with reinforcement too close to permit proper placement and consolidation of
the concrete. Changes from one gradation to another shall not be made during the progress of
the work unless approved by the Supervisor. Such changes are admitted only after being
proved by test results.
3.
Aggregate for Mortar
Aggregate for mortar shall conform to the Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry
Mortar of ASTM Designation: C-144 and shall consist of hard, strong, durable uncoated mineral
or rock particles, free from injurious amounts of organic or other deleterious substances.
Fine aggregate for mortar when subjected to the calorimetric test for organic impurities and
producing colour darker than the standard colour shall be rejected.
4.
Water
Water for mixing of concrete shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, or
any other deleterious mineral and/or organic matter. It shall not contain chlorides such as
sodium chloride in excess of 700 PPM, or sulphates such as sodium sulphate in excess of 500
PPM. It shall not contain any impurities in amount sufficient to cause a change in the time of
setting of Portland Cement of more than 10 percent, nor a reduction in compressive strength of
mortar of more than 5 percent compared to results obtained with distilled water.
The pH of the water for mixing and curing of concrete shall not be less than pH 4.5 or more than
pH 8.5.
When required by the Supervisor the quality of the mixing water shall be determined by the
Standard Method of Test for Quality of Water to be used in Concrete, as specified in BS 3148:
1959 Tests for Water for Making Concrete.
In sampling water for testing, care shall be taken to ensure that containers are clean and that
samples are representative.
Water: Clean and potable containing less than 50 ppm of chlorides.
Admixtures: Furnish from one source. The use of admixtures shall be required to provide the
mix with workability , impermeability, resistance to shrinkage cracks, etc., as the concrete
grade and use may dictate. Comply with Project Manager’s Instructions.
Other than those prescribed in these specifications, no other admixture will be permitted unless:
1.
It has been proven by testing the trial mixes that its addition enhances the concrete
strength and durability properties.
2.
It has been proven by chemical analysis that it contains no chloride or sulphate
compounds.
3.
It has been expressly approved by the Project Manager.
03300 - 4
Cast-In-Place Concrete
Following are the basic admixtures required for concrete mixes. Contractor shall include the cost
of these admixtures in the price of concrete:
a.
Feb flow LD 10 : Plasticiser for concrete.
b.
Feb proof : Integral liquid waterproof.
Amount per cubic meter of finished concrete shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's
recommendations and instructions, and the Project Manager's approval. (FEB products or
approved equal)
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.03
A.
B.
2.04
Water-Tight Concrete Construction
General: Concrete described as "Water-tight" shall be constructed in accordance with the
General Specifications except where modified by the following provisions. The Contractor shall
give the necessary care and attention to the work at all stages to obtain a water-tight construction.
Concrete which does not satisfy this requirement shall be made water-tight at the Contractor's
expense.
Aggregates: Aggregates shall have a low drying shrinkage and shall have an absorption not
greater than 3 percent, measured in accordance with Project Manager’s Instructions.
Workability: The workability of the concrete shall be carefully chosen to ensure that the concrete
can be fully compacted in the formwork and around the reinforcement without a water cement
ratio, such as will result in a porous concrete. The Contractor shall continuously monitor the
workability of the concrete being placed and shall reject anywhere where the deviation from the
chosen slump exceeds plus or minus 25 mm. All concrete shall be mechanically vibrated.
Formwork: Formwork ties which pass through any part of the structure shall not be used unless
effective precautions are taken to ensure water-tightness after removal. All ties cavities are to be
filled with an approved non-shrink cement mortar.
Curing: The concrete shall be cured in accordance with Project Manager’s Instructions but for
not less than 4 days. The Contractor shall also take measures to limit the fluctuations in surface
temperature of the concrete.
Joints: Concrete shall be placed continuously between and up to predetermined joints. The
surface of the concrete during placing shall be kept reasonably level between vertical joints. In
the event of an unavoidable stoppage in positions not predetermined, the concrete shall be
terminated on horizontal planes and against vertical surfaces, and the Contractor shall take any
additional action required to make a water-tight joint at his own expense.
The locations and details of predetermined joints shall be as shown on the drawings and shall
comply with the following :
Kickers are to be cast monolithically with the concrete on which they stand (not less than 150mm
high).
Particular care shall be taken to ensure that wall formwork fits tightly on the kicker or lower lift of
concrete to prevent loss of grout which could cause porosity of the joint.
Testing: As soon as possible after the structure has been completed and the concrete has
achieved its 28 days strength, it shall be tested for water-tightness by filling it with water.
Light Weight Aggregates
General
All light weight aggregate for concrete shall conform to BS 3797 Part 2 "light weight Aggregates
for Concrete".
Grading
Light weight aggregate shall be well and uniformly graded and shall be approved by the
Supervising Project Manager.
Combined Aggregates
Approved fine and coarse aggregate in each batch of concrete shall be combined in proportion
as approved by the Supervising Project Manager according to test results giving the required
compressive concrete stress as specified per type of concrete.
Special combined aggregate gradation shall be used for concrete members with reinforcement
to close to permit proper gradation to another, this shall not be made during the progress fo the
work unless approved by the Supervising Project Manager. Such changes will be admitted only
after satisfactory test results.
Acceptable Suppliers
List of Approved Sub-Contractors/Suppliers:
03300 - 5
Cast-In-Place Concrete
Out of the Work of sub-contractors and suppliers of material needed for concrete works, the
Contractor shall limit his selection to the Sub-Contractors/Suppliers approved by the Project
Manager.
2.05
Accessories
Non-shrink Grout: premixed compound consisting of non- metallic aggregate, cement, water
reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of
17MPa in 2 days and 48 MPa in 28 days.
2.06
A.
Concrete Mixes
Mix Concrete in accordance with the Project Manager’s Instructions
Concrete mixing shall be made in conformity to the requirements outlined in the foregoing
sections for concrete material, on the other sections pertaining to controlling temperature, and on
the mixes properties outlined in the following tables.
The following table gives general guidelines on the constituents of different mixes to be
produced:
Trial mixes to be made by the Contractor, to establish mix design for all the concrete types.
B.
Concrete Minimum Maximum Maximum
Grade Cement Size of
Free
Content Aggregate Water
(Kg/M3)
s
Cement
(MM)
Ratio
Characteristic
Cube Strength
MPA
At 7days
C15
C.
D.
PART 3
3.01
A.
200
20
0.70
10
Slump Used in the following:
(MM)
At
28days
15
100-150
As shown on
drawings
C20
250
20
0.65
13
20
100-150 Concrete Backing for
stone walls
C25
300
20
0.60
17
25
80-120
As shown on
drawings
C30
350
20
0.55
20
35
80-120
As shown on
drawings
Under all circumstances, the use of accelerating admixtures will not be allowed.
Trial Mixes:
1.
Immediately upon award of Contract, the Contractor, shall make trial mixes in adequate
number of specimens as per the relevant standards and in accordance with the Project
Manager’s Instructions.
2.
From the results of tests made on the Specimens, Contractor shall propose the mix design
of the concrete grade listed in the tabulation referred to in sub article 2.05-B.
3.
Additionally, the Contractor shall perform the trial mixes incorporating the additive.
EXECUTION
Placing Concrete
Preparation: Place concrete in accordance with Project Manager’s Instructions.
1. General
Prior to pouring concrete in any structure, the Contractor shall secure a written order to
commence from the Supervisor.
In preparation for the placing of concrete all sawdust, chips, and other construction debris and
extraneous matters shall be removed from the interior of forms, struts, stays and braces, serving
temporarily to hold the forms in correct shape and alignment, pending the placing of concrete at
their locations, shall be removed when the concrete placing has reached an elevation rendering
their service unnecessary. These temporary members shall be entirely removed from the forms
and not buried in the concrete.
Concrete shall be placed so as to avoid segregation of the materials and the displacement of
the reinforcement. The use of long troughs, chutes and pipes for conveying concrete from the
mixer to the forms shall not be permitted unless the authorisation in writing of the Supervisor is
03300 - 6
Cast-In-Place Concrete
obtained. In case an inferior quality of concrete is produced by the use of such conveyors, the
Supervisor may order discontinuance of their use and the substitution of a satisfactory method of
placing.
Open troughs and chutes shall be of metal lined and shall be of rounded cross section to avoid
the accumulation of concrete in corners. The chutes shall be equipped with baffles or be in
short lengths that reverse the direction of movement. The slope shall be steep enough (1
vertical to 2 1/2 horizontal) to permit flow without requiring a slump greater than that specified or
required for placement.
All chutes troughs and pipes shall be kept clean and free from coatings of hardened concrete by
thoroughly flushing with water after each run. Water used for flushing shall be discharged clear
of the structure.
When placing operations would involve dropping the concrete more than 1.50 meter, it shall be
deposited through sheet metal or other approved pipes. As far as practicable the pipes shall be
kept full of concrete during placing and their lower ends shall be kept buried in the newly placed
concrete. After initial setting of concrete, the forms shall not be jarred and no strain shall be
placed on the ends of reinforcement bars that project.
3.01
Placing Concrete (Cont’d)
2. Hot Weather Concreting
The temperature of concrete when placed shall not exceed 27 degree centigrade when the
relative humidity is 50 percent or less and shall not exceed 32 degree centigrade when the
relative humidity exceed 70 percent. For values of relative humidity between 50 percent and 70
percent, the maximum temperature of concrete shall be found by interpolation.
In lieu of above, the temperature of concrete when placed shall not exceed 32 degree
centigrade, regardless of the relative humidity.
The Contractor shall comply with the above requirements by the following procedures:
a.
Cooling the mixing water and/or replacing 50% of the mixing water by crushed ice.
Where crushed ice is used it shall be stored at a temperature that will prevent formation
of lumps. The ice shall be completely melted by the time mixing is completed.
b.
Shading aggregate stockpiles and/or keeping moist by sprinkling them with water.
c.
Cement shall not be used if its temperature exceeds 27 degree centigrade.
d.
Painting the mixer drum white and spraying it with cool water or shading the mixer from
direct sunrays.
e.
Maintaining the mixing time and the delivery time to the minimum acceptable.
f.
Sprinkling of forms sub-grade and reinforcement with cool water prior to placement of
concrete.
Water reducing and retarding admixture shall be used in all concrete work when the
temperature of concrete exceeds 27 degree centigrade.
The water cement ratio inclusive of free surface moisture on aggregates and any
admixtures shall be kept to a minimum.
3. Vibrating Concrete
Concrete, during and immediately after depositing, shall be thoroughly compacted. The
compaction shall be done by mechanical vibration subject to the following provisions:
a.
The vibration shall be internal unless special authorisation of other methods is given by
the Supervisor or as provided herein.
b.
The Supervisor shall of a type and design approve vibrators. They shall be capable of
transmitting vibration to the concrete at frequencies of not less than 4500 impulses per
minute.
c.
The intensity of vibration shall be such as to visibly affect a mass of concrete of 25-mm
slump over a radius of at least 500-mm.
d.
The Contractor shall provide a sufficient number of vibrators to properly compact each
batch immediately after it is placed in the forms.
e.
Vibrators shall be manipulated so as to thoroughly work the concrete around the
reinforcement and imbedded fixtures, and into the corners and angles of the forms.
f.
Only experienced operators under close supervision, at the point of deposit and in the
area of freshly deposited concrete shall apply vibration. The vibrators shall be inserted
and withdrawn out of the concrete slowly. The vibration shall be of sufficient duration
and intensity to thoroughly compact the concrete, but shall not be continued so as to
cause segregation. Vibration shall not be continued at any point to the extent that
localized areas of grout are formed.
g.
Application of vibration shall be at points uniformly spaced and not farther apart than
twice the radius over which the vibration is visibly effective.
h.
Vibration shall not be applied directly or through the reinforcement to sections or layers
of concrete which have hardened to the degree that the concrete ceases to be plastic
03300 - 7
Cast-In-Place Concrete
i.
j.
k.
l.
3.01
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
under vibration. It shall not be used to make concrete flow in the forms over distances
so great as to cause segregation, and vibrators shall not be used to transport concrete
in the forms.
Vibrator shall be supplemented by such spading as is necessary to insure smooth
surface and dense concrete along form surfaces and in corners and locations
impossible to reach with the vibrators.
The use of implements such as compressors that are likely to disturb or disarrange
reinforcement or formwork shall not be permitted.
Concrete shall be placed in horizontal layers not more than 300 mm thick except as
hereinafter provided, when less than a complete layer is placed in one operation, it shall
be terminated in a vertical bulkhead. Each layer shall be placed and compacted before
the preceding batch has taken initial set to prevent injury to green concrete and avoid
surfaces of separation between the batches. Each layer shall be compacted so as to
avoid the formation of a construction joint with preceding layer that has taken initial set.
When the placing of concrete is temporarily discontinued, the concrete, after becoming
firm enough to retain its form, shall be cleaned of Latinate and other objectionable
material to a sufficient depth to expose sound concrete. To avoid visible points as far as
possible upon exposed faces, the top surface of the concrete adjacent to the forms
shall be smoothed with a trowel.
Placing Concrete (Cont’d)
m. Immediately following an approved discontinuance of placing concrete all
accumulations of mortar splashed upon the reinforcement bars and the surfaces of
forms shall be removed. Dried mortar chips and dust shall not be puddled into the
unset concrete. If the accumulations are removed prior to the concrete becoming set,
care shall be exercised not to injure or break the concrete-steel bond at and near the
surface of the concrete, while cleaning the reinforcement bars.
Maintain records of poured concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air
temperature, and test samples taken.
Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed expansion and contraction joints, are not
disturbed during concrete placement.
Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush.
Pour concrete continuously between predetermined construction and control joints.
Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Project
Manager upon discovery.
Maintain concrete cover to reinforcement as noted on structural drawings.
Maximum size of concrete placements: Where expansion joints, contraction joints, or control
joints are not shown or where expansion joints or control joints are spaced at more than 18
metres, or where wall expansion or control joints are spaced more than 6 metres from wall
corners or intersections, provide intermediate construction joint at maximum spacing of 12
metres with a maximum distance from a wall corner of 6 metres.
Minimum time between adjacent placements:
1. Construction Joints: 14 days (7 days wet cure and 7 days dry cure).
2. Control Joints: 6 days.
3. Expansion Joints: 1 day.
4. At least 2 hours shall elapse after depositing concrete in long columns and walls thicker than
200 mm before depositing concrete in beams, girders, or slabs supported thereon.
5. For columns and walls, 3 metres in heights or less, wait at least 45 minutes prior to
depositing concrete in beams, girders, brackets, column capitals, or slabs supported thereon.
Concrete Bonding: To old Concrete:
1. Mechanically roughen existing concrete surfaces to a clean, rough surface to remove existing
concrete surface, and provide a minimum roughness profile of 6 mm.
2. Saturate surface with water for 24 hours prior to adding new.
3.02
Construction Joints
As specified in Section 03251, EXPANSION, CONTRACTION, CONSTRUCTION AND
CONTROL JOINTS.
3.03
Blinding Concrete
Thickness shall be as shown on the drawings. Blinding concrete shall be used under all
structural ground floor slabs, grade beams and reinforced concrete footings.
3.04
Patching
Allow the Project Manager to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms.
Patch imperfections as directed.
03300 - 8
Cast-In-Place Concrete
3.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
Repairing Concrete
General:
1. Prior to starting the repairing work, obtain quantities of repair material and manufacturer’s
detailed instructions for use to provide a repair with finish to match adjacent surface or apply
sufficient repair material adjacent to repair to blend finish appearance.
2. Develop repair techniques with material manufacturer on mockup panels prior to starting
actual repair work, and show how finish color will blend with adjacent surfaces, obtain
approval form PROJECT MANAGER.
3. Repair of concrete shall provide a structurally sound surface finish, uniform in appearance or
upgrade finish by other means until acceptable to PROJECT MANAGER.
Defective Concrete (Areas): Surface defects that include honycomb, rock pockets, indetations,
cracks 0.125 mm wide and larger, and cracks that leak in water-holding basins, spalls, chips, air
bubbles, pinholes, bug holes, embedded debris, lift lines, sand lines, bleed lines, leakage from
form joints, fins and other projections, form popouts, texture irregularities, and stains and other
color variations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
Modify or replace concrete not conforming to required lines, details and elevations.
Repair or replace concrete not properly placed resulting in excessive honeycombing and other
defects. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed architectural concrete except
upon express direction of Project Manager for each individual area.
3.05
E.
Repairing Concrete (Cont’d)
Remove:
1. Remove defective concrete to a depth of sound concrete.
2. Small shallow holes caused by air entrapment at surface of forms shall not be considered
defective unless amount is so great as to be considered not the standard of the industry.
3. If chipping is required, make edges perpendicular to surface with minimum of 12 mm in
depth. Do not feather edges. Obtain PROJECT MANAGER’s approval of chipping work.
4. Patch defective area to match appearance of adjacent concrete surfaces after cracks are fill.
3.06
Concrete Finishing
Provide concrete surfaces to be left exposed as directed and in accordance with the Project
Manager’s Instructions.
3.07
Curing And Protection
Beginning immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot
or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at
relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of
concrete. As specified in Section 03370, CONCRETE CURING.
END OF SECTION
03300 - 9
Cast-In-Place Concrete
SECTION 03346
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
Section Includes
Finishing to concrete floor slabs with cement screed.
1.02
Submittals
Product Data Provide data on cold rolled wire mesh..
1.03
Maintenance Data
Maintenance Data Provide data on maintenance operations.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
Quality Assurance
Perform Work in accordance with the Project Manager’s instructions and recommendations.
Maintain 2 copies of each document on Site.
Floor Finishers
Bonded concrete screed with cold rolled continuous wire mesh reinforcement (where
required).
1.05
A.
B.
Mockup
Provide mockup of floor finish as instructed by the Project Manager’s.
Construct mockup area under conditions similar to those which will exist during actual placing,
not more than (5 m x 5 m) with coatings applied.
Mockup may remain as part of the Work.
C.
1.06
A
B
1.07
PART 2
Delivery, Storage, And Handling
Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's
written instructions.
Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging including application instructions.
Environmental Requirements
Temporary lighting, heating and ventilation shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.
EXECUTION
2.01
Examination
Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this section.
2.02
A.
B.
Preparation
Clean sub-floor down to a hard base with a rotating wire brush to remove concrete laitance.
Remove thicker patches of crumbling concrete by means of a hammer and cold chisel, or with
a suitable motor equipment.
Completely remove from site loosened materials, debris etc. by sweeping and vacuum cleaner.
Wash the Concrete sub-floor by hosing the floor with liberal amounts of water, to provide a
reliable key for the screed topping.
C.
D.
2.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
Mixing
The mortar is generally made up in accordance with the following formulations, the Project
Manager’s instructions and recommendations should be strictly adhered to:10
parts by weight ordinary Portland cement.
20
parts by weight basalt sand 0 - 3 mm grain size.
40
parts by weight chippings of basalt quartz or some other hard stone or gravel 5 - 7 mm
grain size.
0-1
part by weight water, depending on the moisture in the sand.
Minimum cement content shall be 300 kg/m3 and the compressive strength shall be 25MPa
after 28 days.
Contractor shall use super plasticizer as approved by the Project Manager’s.
The Mortar shall be mixed on site.
03346 - 1
Concrete Floor Finishing
2.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Laying
Prepare adequate forms to meet the Project Manager’s approval and in accordance with the
Project Manager’s recommendations and instructions.
Prime the cleaned sub-floor with a mixture of bonding agent and water in the ratio of 1:4 apply
with a brush type (S.B.R.)
Set the forms to the required thickness of 50mm, taking into consideration slopes, falls and
crossfalls.
Lay cold rolled continuos wire mesh, covered with 25 mm of cement screed.
Observe expansion joint 6/10mm and follow through into the screed the joints shall filled with
the polysulphide material as instructed by the Project Manager’s.
Lay the concrete screed between the forms alternately and spread with a rake, and draw-off
surplus mortar.
Lay an approved aluminum tamper across the forms at an oblique angle, not at right angle.
Remove surplus mortar by moving the tamper to and for with a sawing action. While this is
being done, a ridge of mortar about 3cm thick should be maintained along the front edge of the
tamper in the customary manner. Wood tampers are not allowed.
All mixtures should be used up within one hour. Mixtures aging more than one hour should be
discarded, and a fresh mixture used to finish the Job.
Spread the quartz material over the surface before the screed dry type (master top 100) as
manufactured by FEB or approved equal color as selected by the Project Manager’s, then
trowell the screed mechanically.
Ramp areas top surfaces shall have rough texture epoxy finish as approved by the Project
Manager’s, the other areas shall have trowel smooth top surface with a machine.
Sprinkle over the surface water with a brush. The mixture has to be stirred carefully whilst being
made up and then at frequent intervals when being applied in order to prevent spotting, which
occurs if water is sprinkled over the mortar.
If the smoothing is carried out by hand, knee boards must be used. Should the smoothing be
carried out with a machine, boards or sheets of hardboard should be employed in order to
prevent foot marks.
2.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Curing
Avoid draughts and direct sun light.
Cover the screed with overlapping 20 millimicron thick polyethylene film and spray with water.
Leave the polyethylene film in position for 8 days.
Avoid water to come in contact with the freshly laid screed.
Foot traffic over the laid screed is possible after only 3 days , but the floor should not be
subjected to maximum loads for one week. These periods should be appropriately extended if
temperatures are low and/or humidity is high.
2.06
A.
B.
Tolerances
Maximum Variation of surfaces flatness for the screened areas 3mm in 3 meters.
Correct defects in the floor by grinding or removal and replacement of the defective work.
2.07
A.
B.
Warranty
provide written warranties in the name of the Employer.
Warranty shall provide for making good within a period of five (5) years, at no cost to the
Employer; repair and make good screening and pay for repair or replace all affected or
damaged surfaces at no cost to the Employer.
END OF SECTION
03346 - 2
Concrete Floor Finishing
SECTION 03370
CONCRETE CURING
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
Work Included
Initial and final curing.
Curing materials.
1.02
A.
B.
Related Work
Section 03100: Form work.
Section 03300: Cast-in-Place Concrete.
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
PART 3
PRODUCTS
Materials
Water: Potable
Absorptive Mats Burlap: cloth made of JUTE or KENAF minimum weight 0.29 Kg/m2.
Membrane Curing Compound: acrylic or chlorinated rubber type, pigmented.
Polyethylene Film: 0.1-mm thick, clear color.
EXECUTION
3.01
Curing water should be of a temperature compatible with concrete temperature and not more than
11 degree C cooler than concrete surface.
3.02
A.
Curing of Concrete
Use one of the following methods as approved by PROJECT MANAGER:
1.
Walls:
a.
General: Where walls are to receive coatings, painting, cementitious material, or other
similar finishes, or where solvent-based coatings are not permitted, use only water curing
procedures.
b.
Method (1): Leave concrete forms in place and keep entire surfaces of forms and
concrete wet for 7 days.
c.
Method (2): Apply curing compound, where allowed, immediately after removal of forms.
d.
Method (3): Continuously sprinkle with water 100 percent of exposed surfaces for 7 days
starting immediately after removal of forms.
2.
Slabs and Curbs:
a.
Method (1): Pounding
Maintain 100% coverage of water over slabs continuously for 7 days, starting
immediately after removal of forms.
b.
Method (2): Spraying
Spray water over slabs and maintain wet for 7 days.
c.
Method (3): Absorptive Mat
Saturate burlap and place over exposed areas, lapping ends and sides minimum 50%
over lap, and maintain in place saturated for 7 days.
d.
Method (4): Membrane Curing Compound
Apply curing compound in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
e.
Other agreed upon method that will keep moisture present and uniform at all times on
surface of slabs. Do not use curing compounds.
f.
Where water curing for slabs during cold weather is not possible, use and PROJECT
MANAGER-approved curing compound at manufacturer’s recommended coverage per
gallon.
g.
Where curing compound cannot be used, special methods using moisture shall be
agreed upon prior to placing the concrete slabs.
h.
Protect slabs during cold weather with plastic sheets or other material inside required
heated enclosure if foot traffic is permitted on slabs.
3.03
Manufacturer’s Services
Provide manufacturer’s representative at site for installation assistance, inspections, and
certification of proper installation for products specified.
03370 - 1
Concrete Curing
END OF SECTION
03370 - 2
Concrete Curing
SECTION 03600
GROUT
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
References
The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
C230, Standard Specification for Flow Table for Use in Tests of
Hydraulic Cement.
C1018, Standard Test Method for Flexural Toughness and FirstCrack Strength of Fiber-Reinforced Concrete (Using Beam with Third-Point Loading) .
C1107, Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic
Cement Grout (Nonshrink).
C1116, Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete and
Shotcrete.
D4580, Measuring Delaminations in Concrete Bridge Decks by
Sounding, Practice for.
Corps of Project Manager (COE):
a.
CRD-C611, Flow of Grout for Preplaced Aggregate Concrete.
b.
CRD-C621, Specification for Nonshrink Grout.
1.02
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Submittals
Shop Drawings:
Product data of grouts.
Proposed method for keeping existing concrete surfaces wet prior to
placing grout.
Forming method for fluid grout placements.
Curing method for grout.
Quality Control Submittals:
1. Manufacturer’s Written Instructions:
a.
Adding fiber reinforcing to batching.
b.
Cement-water ratio of grout topping.
c.
Mixing of grout.
2. Manufacturer’s proposed training schedule for grout work.
3. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance.
a.
Grout free from chlorides and other corrosion-causing chemicals.
b.
Nonshrink grout properties of Categories II and III, verifying expansion at 3 or
14 days will not exceed the 28 day expansion and nonshrink properties are
not based on gas or gypsum expansion.
4. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.
5. Statements of Qualification: grout manufacturer’s representative.
6. Test Reports:
a.
Test report for 24-hour evaluation of nonshrink grout. Independent testing
laboratory to certify that testing was conducted within the past 18 months.
b.
Test results and service report from the demonstration and training session,
and from field tests.
c.
Field test reports and laboratory test results for field-drawn samples.
1.03
A.
Qualifications
Nonshrink Grout Manufacturer’s Representative: Authorized and trained representative of grout
manufacturer. Minimum of 1 year experience that has resulted in successful installation of grouts
similar to those for this Project.
1.04
A.
B.
Guarantee
Manufacturer’s guarantee shall not contain disclaimer on the product data sheet, grout
bag, or container limiting responsibility to only the purchase price of products and materials
furnished.
Manufacturer guarantees participation with CONTRACTOR in replacing or repairing
grout found defective due to faulty materials, as determined by industry standard test methods.
03600 - 1
Grout
PART 2
2.01
A.
PRODUCTS
Nonshrink Grout Schedule
Furnish nonshrink grout for applications in grout category in the following schedule:
Application
Filling tie holes
Blockouts for gate guides
Precast joints
Column baseplates single-story
Machine bases 25 hp or less
Bases for precast wall sections
Baseplates for columns over one story
Precast base joints higher than one story
Through-bolt openings
Patching concrete walls
Machine bases 26 hp and up
Baseplates and/ or soleplates with vibration,
thermal movements, etc.
Temperature Range
5 to 38 deg C
I
I or II
I or II
I or II
II
II
II
II
II
II
III
III
Max. Placing Time
20 min.
Greater than 20 min
I
I
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
III
III
III
III
2.02
A.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
Nonshrink Grout
Category I:
1.
Nonmetallic and nongas-liberating flowable fluid.
2.
Prepackaged natural aggregate grout requiring only the addition of water.
3.
Test in accordance with ASTM C1107:
a.
Flowable consistency 140 percent, five drops in 30 seconds, in accordance
with ASTM C230.
b.
Flowable for 15 minutes.
4.
Grout shall not bleed at maximum allowed water.
5.
Minimum strength of grout, 20 Mpa at 3 days, 35 Mpa at 7 days, and 48
Mpa at 28 days.
6.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Master Builders Co., Cleveland, OH; SET GROUT.
b.
Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; NS Grout.
c.
Dayton Superior Corp., Miamisburg, OH; Sure-Grip Hight Performance Grout.
Category II:
Nonmetallic, nongas-liberating flowable fluid.
Prepackaged natural aggregate grout requiring only the addition of water.
Aggregate shall show no segregation or settlement at fluid consistency at
specified times or temperatures.
Test in accordance with COE CRD-C621 and ASTM C1107, Grade B:
a.
Fluid consistency 20 to 30 seconds in accordance with COE CRD-C611.
b.
Temparatures of 5,27, and 38 degrees C.
1 hour after mixing, pass fluid grout through flow cone with continuous flow.
Minimum strength of grout, 17 Kpa at 1 day, 31 Kpa at 3 days, and 48 Kpa
at 28 days.
Maintain fluid consistency when mixed in 1 to 6 metre loads in ready-mix
truck.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Master Builders Co., Clevenland, OH; Master Flow 928.
b.
Five Star Products Inc., Fairfield, CT; Five Star 100.
c.
Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Hi Flow Grout.
Category III:
03600 - 2
Grout
2.02
PART 3
1. Metallic and nongas-liberating flowable fluid.
2. Prepackaged aggregate grout requiring only the addition of water.
Nonshrink Grout (Cont'd)
3. Aggregate shall show no segregation or settlement at fluid consistency at specified times
or temperatures.
4. Test in accordance with COE CRD-C621 and ASTM C1007, Grade B:
a.
Fluid consistency 20 to 30 seconds in accordance with COE CRD-C611.
b.
Temapratures of 5 and 38 degrees C.
5. 1 hour after mixing, pass fluid grout through flow cone with continuous flow.
6. Minimum strength of grout, 28 Kpa at 1 day, 35 Kpa at 3 days, and 62 Kpa at 28 days.
7. Maintain fluid consistency when mixed in 1 to meter loads in ready-mix truck.
8. Manufacturers and products: Master Builders Co., Cleveland, OH; EMBECO 885.
EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
C.
Nonshrink Grout
General: Mix, place, and cure nonshrink grout in accordance with grout manufacturer’s
representative training instructions.
Form Tie or Through-Bolt Holes: Provide nonshrink grout, Catergory I and II, fill space
with dry pack dense grout hammered in with steel tool and hammer. Through-bolt holes,
coordinate dry pack dense grout application with vinyl plug in Section 03100, CONCRETE
FORMWORK and bonding agent in Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
Grouting Machinery Foundations:
1. Block out original concrete or finish off at distance shown below bottom of machinery base
with grout. Prepare concrete surface by sandblasting, chipping, or by mechanical means to
remove any soft material.
2. Set machinery in position and wedge to elevation with steel wedges, or use cast-in leveling
bolts.
3. Form with watertight forms at least 50 mm higher than bottom of plate.
4. Fill space between bottom of machinery base and original concrete in accordance with
manufacturer’s representative training instructions.
3.02
Field Quality Control
Evaluation and Acceptance of Nonshrink Crout:
1.
Provide a flow cone and cube molds with restraining plates onsite. Continue
tests during Project as demonstrated by grout manufacturer’s
representative.
2.
Perform flow cone and bleed tests, and make three 50mm by 50mm cubes
for each 25 cubic feet of each type of nonshrink grout used. Restraining
caps for cube molds in accordance with COE CRD-C621.
3.
For large grout applications make three more cubes, one more flow cone
test, including bleed test for each additional 0.75 cubic meters of nonshrink
grout placed.
4.
Consistency: As specified in Article NONSHRINK GROUTS. Reject grout
with consistencies outside range requirements.
5.
Segregration: As specified in Article NONSHRINK GROUTS. Reject grout
when aggregate separates.
6.
Nonshrink grout cubes shall test equal to or greater than minimum
strength.
7.
Strength Test Failures: Reject nonshrink grout work failing strength tests,
remove and replace grout.
8.
Perform bleeding test to demonstrate grout will not bleed.
9.
Store cubes at 70 degrees C.
10. Independent testing laboratory shall prepare, store, cure, and test cubes in
accordance with COE CRD-C621.
3.03
Manufacturer’s Services
General:
1. Coordinate demonstrations, training sessions, and applicable site visits with grout
manufacturer’s representative.
A.
A.
03600 - 3
Grout
2. Provide and conduct onsite, demonstration and training sessions for bleed tests, mixing,
flow cone measurement,, cube testing, application, and curing for each category and type
of nonshrink grout.
3. Coordinate necessary equipment and materials are available for demonstration.
END OF SECTION
03600 - 4
Grout
SECTION 04100
MORTAR
PART 1
1.01
A.
B.
C.
GENERAL
Work Included
Mortar for concrete masonry units.
Mortar for natural stone floor tiling.
Mortar for natural marble works and tiling.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
Related Work
Section 04220
Section 04450
Section 04455
1.03
Quality Assurance
Perform work in accordance with requirements of Project Manager’s instructions.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Reference Standards
BS 12
BS 5224 BS 890
BS 882
BS 4551 BS 4721 -
1.05
A.
Testing
Testing of mortar mix(es) will be performed by a firm appointed and paid for by the Contractor,
in accordance with Section 01410.
Provide free access to all portions of work and cooperate with appointed
firm.
Submit proposed mortar mix design to testing firm for approval prior to commencement of
work.
Tests of mortar mix(es) will be performed to ensure conformance with requirements stated
herein and to ensure mortar will not produce efflorescence.
If mortar mix(es) do not conform with requirements stated herein, re-establish and re-submit for
further testing. Pay costs for required re-testing.
B.
C.
D.
E.
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
Concrete Masonry Unit.
Natural Stone.
Natural Marble.
Ordinary Portland Cement.
Masonry Cement.
Building limes.
Aggregates from natural sources for concrete.
Methods of testing mortars.
Specification for ready-mixed building mortars.
PRODUCTS
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and
their products which will be acceptable under this section. Approval of the manufacturer or
product must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
Substitutions Items of same function and performance are acceptable in conformance with the
Project Manager’s Instructions.
Mortar Materials
Portland Cement BS12 Ordinary Portland Cement; gray color.
Masonry Cement BS 5224 for general use.
Aggregates standard masonry type, BS 882, clean, dry and protected against dampness,
freezing and foreign matter.
Water clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic matter or other deleterious
material.
2.03
Admixtures
Plasticizer water reducing type which reduces porosity and absorption to increase bond
strength; as approved by the Project Manager.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
EXECUTION
Mixing Mortar
Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients, in quantities needed for immediate use.
Add mortar color and admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Ensure uniformity of mix and coloration.
Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar.
Use mortar within two hours of mixing at temperatures over (26 deg. C), and two and one half
hours at temperatures under 10 degrees C.
If necessary, re-temper mortar within two hours of mixing to replace water lost by evaporation.
Do not re-temper mortar after two hours of mixing.
END OF SECTION
C.
D.
E.
04100-1
Mortar
SECTION 04220
CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT
PART 1
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
GENERAL
Work Included
Concrete masonry unit walls; back-up for cavity walls, and interior partitions, complete with
reinforcement and anchorage’s.
Concrete Lintels.
Form control joints.
Build-in items supplied by other Sections.
Cut and fit for other sections of work.
1.02
Related Work
Section 04100: Mortar
1.03
A.
B.
Quality Assurance
Perform concrete masonry unit work in accordance with Project Manager’s Instructions.
When requested by the Project Manager, provide evidence and test data confirming that
concrete masonry units conform to standards stated herein.
1.04
A.
Environmental Requirements
Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum (10 deg. C) prior to, during and
48 hours after completion of masonry work.
During freezing or near freezing weather, provide adequate equipment or cover to maintain a
minimum temperature of (10 deg. C) and to protect masonry work completed or in progress
B.
1.05
A.
B.
C.
PART 2
Protection
Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by
construction activities. Provide such protection without damaging completed work.
Keep expansion joint voids clear of mortar.
Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work. Maintain in place until
building structure provides permanent bracing.
PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and
their products which will be acceptable under this section. Approval of the manufacturer or
product must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
2.02
A.
Masonry Units
Concrete blocks shall be hard, sound, durable, sharp, rectangular shape, clean with well
define arises free from racks and flaws or other defects.
Concrete blocks shall be obtained form an approved local factory. Proportion of mix for a solid
block is (1:3:6) and for hollow blocks is (1:2.5:5).
Aggregate shall be so sized, graded, proportioned and thoroughly mixed in a batch mixer with
such proportions of cement and water as to produce homogeneous concrete mixture.
However, in no case shall the proportion of cement in the mixture be less than five (5) standard
bags (each weighing 50 kgs) per cubic meter of concrete.
Concrete Block: modular size(s) complete with corners, bases, bond beams, lintels and fillers
to match and compliment block units, standard weight.
Hollow concrete blocks shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Compressive Strength at Twenty-Eight (28) Days Over Cross-Sectional Area: a.
Load-Bearing Walls
2
70 kgs/cm average of 12 blocks
2
60 kgs/cm minimum for any block
b.
Non-Load-Bearing Walls and Slabs
2
35 kgs/cm average of 12 blocks
30 kgs/cm 2 minimum for any block
2. Water Absorption 20% or less of dry weight
B.
C.
D.
E.
04220 - 1
Concrete Masonry Unit
2.02
F.
2.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
Masonry Units (Cont’d)
3.
The design of cavities and webs of the hollow concrete blocks shall be submitted to the
Supervisor prior to manufacture. The thickness of the face shell and of the membrane of
solid portions shall be nowhere less than forty (40 mm). The combined thickness of the
solid portions shall be not less than one fourth (1/4) of the width and length of the block.
Testing
1.
Blocks shall be tested for density and compressive strength whenever required by the
Supervisor. For each test the Supervisor shall select 10 blocks. The blocks selected shall
be immersed in water for 24 hours before compressive testing and shall not absorb more
than 15% of their own weight of water during this period.
2.
Should a test not meet these requirements the batch of blocks from which the samples
were taken shall not be used in the Works and shall be removed from the site.
Reinforcement And Anchorage’s
Reinforcing Steel for Bond Beams Lintels and piers type as indicated by the
Project Manager and as specified.
Cavity Wall Horizontal Reinforcing: ladder type without moisture drip;galvanized steel
construction;(5mm) side rods with 5mm cross ties at 400 mm centers as approved the Project
Manager.
Anchors: Contractor to submit details for approval before start working.
Wall Ties: Contractor to submit details for approval before start working.
2.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
Concrete
Bond Beams Lintels and Piers 25 MPa concrete at 28 days, 100mm slump.
Cement: Ordinary Portland cement gray color.
Coarse Aggregate: maximum (10 mm) size; 25% percent by volume.
Fine Aggregate: minimum .02mm size; 75% percent by volume.
2.05
A.
B.
Accessories
Control Joints: preformed neoprene material; as approved by the Project Manager.
Joint Filler: closed cell polyethylene oversized 50%; self
expanding; (25mm) wide x
maximum lengths; as approved by the Project Manager.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
EXECUTION
Preparation
Supply metals anchors for placement. Provide in sufficient quantity, and direct their
correct placement.
Ensure items built-in by other trades for this work is properly located and sized.
Establish all lines, levels and coursing. Protect from disturbance.
Workmanship And Installation
Place concrete blocks in accordance with lines and levels indicated on drawings.
Fully bond external and internal corners and intersections.
Buttering corners of joints, deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.
Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be
made, remove mortar and replace.
Perform job site cutting with proper power tools to provide straight and true, unshipped
edges.
Where non-bearing partitions extend to underside of floor, roof deck or structural system,
stop masonry short 10 mm to 13 mm to allow for live load deflection. Fill gap with joint
filler. Provide structural anchorage in accordance with General Specifications
Ensure masonry courses are of uniform height. Make vertical and horizontal joints equal
and of uniform thickness.
All blocks shall be well buttered with mortar before being laid and properly jointed with other
work. All joints shall be in uniform manner and shall not be less than 6 mm and shall not
exceed 15mm, no one portion being raised more than 1.00 m above another at one time, and
wall of partition necessarily left at different levels, must be racked back.
Remove excess mortar and projections. Take care to prevent breaking block corners.
Lay concrete unit masonry in common bond. Course one(1) block unit and one (1) mortar joint
to equal 200 mm.
Form concave mortar joints.
Cut mortar joints flush where damp proofing and waterproofing is scheduled.
04220 - 2
Concrete Masonry Unit
M.
All walls and partitions shall be properly cured by sprinkling water for a period not less than
three (3) days after completion of laying the course.
3.03
A.
B.
Tolerances
Maximum variation from masonry unit to adjacent masonry unit to be (1 mm).
Maintain flush face on interior masonry surfaces.
3.04
A.
Reinforcement And Anchorage’s
Place masonry reinforcing and anchorage’s for concrete unit masonry as follows:
1. Provide cavity walls with horizontal masonry reinforcing in every second
block joint.
2. Place horizontal masonry reinforcing in first and second joints above
and below openings. Place continuous in first and second joint below top
of walls.
3. Fully reinforce corners and intersections.
4. Lap masonry reinforcing splices minimum 150mm. Extend minimum
400 mm each side of openings.
3.05
A.
B.
Lintels
Provide reinforced masonry lintels over openings, where steel lintels are not scheduled.
Construct lintels, using concrete and reinforcement specified. Maintain minimum 200 mm
bearing on each side of opening. Contractor to submit details for approval.
Use reinforcing bars of full lengths only.
Place and consolidate concrete without disturbing reinforcement.
Allow lintels to reach maximum strength before removing temporary supports.
Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, the lintels shall be reinforced as follows:
2 Nos. 14mm diameter bottom bars.
2 Nos. 10mm diameter top bars.
Stirrups, 6mm diameter at 200mm spacing.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.06
A.
B.
Bond Beams
Reinforce with 2 Nos. 12mm diameter top and bottom bars, and stirrups, 8mm diameter at
200mm spacing Lap splices 55 bars diameters.
Place and consolidate concrete without disturbing reinforcement.
3.07
Control Joints
Do not continue horizontal masonry reinforcing across control joints.
3.08
A.
Built-in Work
As work progresses, build-in nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates, and other items supplied by
other trades.
Build-in items plumb and true.
Bed anchors of timber and metal door frames in mortar joints. Fill masonry cores with grout
minimum 300 mm from framed openings.
Do not build-in organic materials which will be subjected to rot or deterioration.
B.
C.
D.
3.09
A.
B.
3.10
A.
B.
C.
D.
Cutting And Fitting
Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit sleeves and grounding. Cooperate fully with other
sections of work to ensure correct size, shape and location.
Obtain the Project Manager's approval prior to cutting or fitting any area which is not indicated
on drawings, or which may impair appearance or strength of masonry work.
Cleaning
Remove excess mortar and smears upon completion of masonry work.
Point or replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
Clean soiled surfaces using a non-acidic solution, which will not harm masonry or adjacent
materials. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
Leave surfaces designated to receive plaster, clean and ready to receive plaster work.
END OF SECTION
04220 - 3
Concrete Masonry Unit
SECTION 04450
NATURAL STONE WORK
PART 1
1.01
A.
B.
C.
GENERAL
Work Included
Natural stone for exterior and interior walls.
Mortar and joint grouting.
Joint sealant.
1.02
Related Work
Section 03300 Cast-in-place concrete.
1.03
References
ASTM A36 Structural Steel.
1.04
Standards
Applicable provisions of the following standard publications shall apply throughout the work:
A.
American Welding Society (AWS): AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code.
B.
Industrial Fasteners Institute (IFI): Handbook of Bolt, Nut and Rivet Standards.
1.05
References
National standards referenced herein are included to establish recognized quality only.
Equivalent quality and testing standards will be acceptable subject to their timely submission,
review and acceptance by the Project Manager.
1.06
A.
Qualifications
Supplier/Fabricator: A firm having an adequate supply of the specified type of stone and an
annual rated production capacity to deliver the stone to the project site on schedule within a
time limit established by the Project Manager, as required, to assure no delay in the progress
and completion of the Work.
Installer: A qualified stone layer with a minimum of five years successful experience in the
erection of stone work.
B.
1.07
Design Criteria
The method of erecting, installing and anchoring of all stone work shown on the Drawings is
diagrammatic only, and is not to be used for the purpose of bidding or construction. It shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor to design and guarantee and the watertight sealing of all
stone work. The installation shall be designed to allow for expansion, contraction and
differential deflection of supporting floors of the building structure.
1.08
A.
Delivery, Storage & Handling
PACKING AND LOADING: Finished stone shall be carefully packed and loaded for shipment
using all reasonable and customary precautions against damage in transit. No material which
may cause staining or discolouration shall be used for blocking or packing.
SITE STORAGE: Upon receipt at the building site or storage yard, the stone shall be stacked
on timber or platforms at least 100mm above the ground, and extreme care shall be taken to
prevent staining during storage. If storage is to be for a prolonged period, polyethylene or other
suitable plastic film shall be placed between any wood and finished surfaces, and shall be
used also as an overall protective covering. Salt shall not be used for melting of ice formed on
pieces, or for any purpose involving its contact with the stone.
DEFECTIVE STONE: Any piece of stone showing flaws, cracks, or imperfections such as
vents, sand and clay holes, Shelly bars, shakes, mottle, seams or starts upon receipt at the
storage yard, or at the building site, shall be discarded and removed from the work site, and at
the contractor's own expense.
B.
C.
1.09
Environmental Requirements
The following environmental requirements are applicable to stone set in mortar,
and when caulking stone joints with sealant.
A.
During freezing or near freezing weather provide equipment and cover
to maintain a minimum of 4 degrees C and to protect stone work
completed or in progress.
B.
At end of working day, or during rainy weather, cover stone work
exposed to weather with waterproof coverings, securely anchored.
04450 - 1
Natural Stone Work
C.
PART 2
2.01
A.
2.01
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Maintain materials and surrounding air to a minimum 10 degrees C prior
to, during and 48 hours after completion of work.
PRODUCTS
Stone Materials and Fabrication
General:
1.
Stone shall be of good quality (Grade A Stone), sound, free from cracks and defects,
seams or starts which may impair its structural integrity, durability, appearance or function.
Colour, texture and finish shall be within the range of samples approved by the Project
Manager.
2.
Stone Materials and Fabrication (Cont’d)
2.
All stone shall be obtained from quarries having adequate capacity and facility to meet
the specified requirements. Cutting and finishing shall be performed by using approved
equipment to process the material promptly on order and in strict accordance with the
specifications. Evidence to this effect shall be provided by the contractor's.
3.
Stone rejected for noncompliance with the submitted samples or the requirements of this
Specification shall be replaced with material acceptable to the Project Manager.
Replacement shall be prompt and at the Contractor's own expense. Inspection of stone
by the Project Manager shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities to perform
all work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Stone Schedule:
Refer to the Drawings for locations, sizes and thickness of the various types of stone specified
herein. All stone work shall be carried out and executed in accordance with the classifications of
Class "Special" refer to clause 1.06, item A/1.Stone_Type Application/Thickness/Finish
1. First quality (local type) - Application: Exterior (cladding) with
stainless steel anchors, brackets, anchors, bolts, shelves, angles
and all needed fixing materials.
Thickness:
As shown on drawings
Height of courses:
As shown on drawings.
Finish:
As shown on drawings.
2. First quality (local type) - Application: Exterior (composite) with all
necessary concrete backing.
Thickness:
As noted on the relevant details/drawings.
Height of courses:
As shown on drawings.
Finish:
As shown on drawings
Finish:
1.
The finish, of exposed to view surfaces of stone, shall be as specified above. The
concealed from view surfaces of all stone types shall be sawn, hacked and/or roughened
to allow key for the backing mortar/concrete, all as more particularly instructed by the
Project Manager.
2.
End match the texture in the face of stone elements that abut one another to assure
continuity in surface appearance.
Stone Fabrication - General:
1.
Fabrication of stone shall be in strict accordance with approved shop drawings for
fabrication, and with this specification.
2.
To the maximum extent possible, fabrication and assembly of stone shall be executed in
the shop. Work that is not shop assembled shall be shop fitted.
3.
All work shall be of the highest quality, in accordance with the best trade practices, and
performed by skilled workmen. All materials and workmanship shall conform to the
highest industry standards, including the BSI Recommended Practices for the Use of
Natural Stone in Building Construction.
4.
Use no materials, equipment, or practices that may adversely affect the functioning,
appearance, or durability of the stone work or work of other trades.
Dimensions:
1.
Cut all stone work accurately to shape and dimensions shown on the final approved shop
drawings. Exposed plane surfaces shall be true. Bed and joint surfaces shall be dressed
straight and at right angles to the faces, unless otherwise shown. Exposed arris lines shall
be sharp and true. Patching of stone will not be permitted.
2.
Do all necessary cutting for anchors, support plates, shelf angles, and dowels, etc.
Beds and Joints:
04450 - 2
Natural Stone Work
G.
H.
I.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
Stone beds and joints surfaces shall be cut square from the face for the entire thickness of
stones. Stone shall be bedded and jointed including the various expansion joints dimensions as
shown on the approved shop drawings.
Backs Of Pieces:
Backs of all pieces of stone receiving reinforced concrete backing, shall be roughered.
Exterior Special Shapes:
All specially shaped pieces of stones shall be constant in profile throughout their length, in
strict conformity with details shown on approved shop drawings.
Incidental Cutting & Drilling:
1.
Provide holes, grooves, sinkages and recesses, etc., as applicable, for inserts, etc. other
cutting and drilling shall be provided only when specifically shown on the approved shop
drawings.
2.
Lewis holes for lifting will not be permitted on any stone element with a thickness of
51mm or less.
3.
No cutting or drilling will be permitted on exposed surfaces.
Mortar Materials and Accessories
Cement:
1.
Cement for Setting Mortar: Non-staining Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C150,
Type I, except containing not more than 0.03% water soluble alkali.
2.
Cement for Pointing Mortar: Non-staining white Portland Cement conforming to ASTM
C150. Grey nonstaining cement may be used for pointing mortar if the colour of pointing
mortar, as selected by the Project Manager, does not require White Portland Cement.
Water : Water shall be potable, clean and fresh from public water system.
Sand:- Well graded non-staining masonry sand conforming to ASTM C144. Use white Silica
sand for pointing mortar. No other sand shall be permitted for mortar or grout unless otherwise
tested and approved by the Project Manager.
Lime:- Approved brand of plastic hydrated, such as New England 4X, conforming to ASTM
C207, Type "S".
Integral Waterproofing:- "FEBPROOF" Integral liquid wataerproofer for concrete and mortar,
manufactured by Feb Construction Chemicals, or approved equal.
Integral Color:- "FEBTONE' Super permanent, manufactured by Feb Construction Chemicals,
or approved equal.
Mortar Plasticiser:- "FEBMIX ADMIX" as manufactured by Feb Construction Chemicals, OR
CEBEX 112 or approved equal.
EXECUTION
Conditions At Site
The Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with the stone installation, examine all surfaces and
parts of the structure to receive stone work, and notify the Project Manager in writing of any
conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with
installation until such conditions have been corrected and are acceptable to the Project
Manager.
Verify all measurements and dimensions, coordinate the installation of inserts for this work and
coordinate and schedule this work with the work of other trades. Give particular attention to the
location and size of cutouts required to accommodate mechanical, electrical, and other work or
adjoining construction, in accordance with the reviewed shop drawings for such trade.
Stone Installation
Preparation For Stone Installation: Clean stone prior to setting, leaving
edges and surfaces free from dirt and foreign material. Do not use wire
brushes or implements which mark or damage exposed surfaces, unless
otherwise approved by the Project Manager.
Mortar and Grout Proportioning - By Volume:1.
General: Mortar and Grout proportioning shall be prepared and tested by the Contractor,
all in accordance with Section 04100, and in addition the Contractor shall allow for
preparing and testing the mortar and grout mixes included within this section to meet the
Project Manager’s satisfaction and approval.
2.
Setting Mortar for Stone:
a.
Portland Cement - 1 part
b.
Hydrated Lime - 0-0.25 part
c.
Sand - 4 parts
04450 - 3
Natural Stone Work
3.
4.
5.
3.02
C.
D.
d.
Plasticiser
e.
Integral water proofer
Pointing Mortar:
a.
White Portland Cement - 1 part
b.
Sand - 1-1/2 parts
c.
Add color additive to acquire the color of mortar approved by the Project Manager.
d.
Add water proofer
NOTE: Add integral waterproofing admixture to setting and pointing mortar in the quantity
and manner recommended by the manufacturer.
Generally, Febmix Admix or Cebex 112 or approved equal, mortar plasticiser shall be
used in all mortars, unless otherwise instructed by the Project Manager.
Wall Grout
a.
Fine grout shall be mixed in the following proportions by volume all in accordance
with ASTM C476:
1)
Portland Cement - 1 part
2)
Hydrated Lime - 0.1 part
3)
Sand - 2.25-3 parts
Stone Installation (Cont’d)
b.
Coarse grout, where required, shall be mixed in the following proportions by volume,
all in accordance with ASTM C476:
1)
Portland Cement - 1 part
2)
Hydrated Lime - 0.1 part
3)
Fine Aggregate - 2.25 parts
4)
Coarse Aggregate - 1-2 parts
Use sufficient water to produce a fluid, pourable consistency.
Mortar and Grout Mixing:1.
Mortar and grout shall be machine mixed. Cement and hydrated lime may be batched by
the bag. Sand preferably shall be batched by weight, but subject to the approval of the
Project Manager may on certain small operations be batched by volume in suitably
calibrated containers, provided proper allowance is made for weight per cubic foot,
contained moisture, bulking and consolidation. Shovel measurement shall not be used.
2.
Workability or consistency of mortar on the board shall be sufficiently wet to be worked
under the trowel. Water for tempering shall be available on the scaffold at all times.
Mortar and grout which has begun to "set" shall be discarded. Mortar and grout which has
stiffened due to evaporation shall be retempered to restore its workability. Retempering of
mortar and grout at the mixer shall not be permitted.
Setting Of Exterior Wall Stone:
1.
All setting shall be done in accordance with the approved shop drawings. All work shall
be set in a rigid and substantial manner, straight and plumb, with all horizontal lines level
and all vertical lines plumb, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Similar abutting
profiles shall accurately intersect and be in true
alignment. All joints shall be uniform and shall be of the size and detail shown on the
approved Shop Drawings.
2.
All exterior stone joints shall be 5mm wide unless otherwise indicated. Refer to the
approved Shop Drawings for stone joint dimensions.
3.
As setting progresses, the work shall be fastened securely to take care of all dead loads,
wind loads and forces, and erection stresses. All units of stones shall have suitable
temporary braces, shores, and stays to hold them in position until permanently secured.
4.
The definitions of all terms herein related to welds, welding, and oxygen cutting shall be
interpreted in accordance with the "Standard Definitions, Welding, and Cutting", of the
current edition of the American Welding Society.
5.
Cavities behind facing stones shall be filled with fine and /or course grout, as specifically
shown on the approved shop drawings and as specified herein.
6.
Stone elements indicated to be set with mortar joints shall be set with two cushions per
stone in every horizontal joint. Stone shall be set in full horizontal mortar beds and joints
raked out to a depth of 19 mm before mortar has set. The face surfaces shall not be
smeared with the mortar forced out of joints or that used in pointing. No hammering,
rolling or turning of stones will be allowed on the wall. Precautions shall be taken to
prevent seepage of moisture, through or from the beds and joints, which may cause
discoloration of the exposed surfaces.
7.
Allow stone units to set overnight and then completely fill joints with pointing mortar. Joints
shall be tooled flush. During the tooling of the joints, enlarge any voids or holes and
04450 - 4
Natural Stone Work
completely fill with mortar. Surfaces of stone shall be cleaned using sponge and water to
remove mortar spills from face of stone.
8. The setting of patched, chipped, cracked, broken, stained or defective stones shall not be
permitted.
3.03
Protection
Stone shall at all times be protected from drippings, welding spatter and damage by other
trades during construction. Where necessary or directed, substantial non-staining wooden or
other approved covering shall be placed to protect the work. Heavy polyethylene film shall be
used between stone and wood. Maintain all protection until removed to permit final cleaning of
stone work.
3.04
A.
Cleaning
Clean soiled surfaces using non-acidic solution of type which will not harm stone, mortar joint
materials, or adjacent surfaces.
Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
B.
3.05
A.
B.
Final Inspection
Finished surfaces shall show no objectionable visual distinction in jointing, bedding, plane,
colour, texture, pattern, and finish. All stones which in the opinion of the Project Manager do not
provide the required uniformity shall be relocated, or removed and replaced with new stone
units to the satisfaction of the Project Manager and at the Contractor's own expense.
All defective stone shall be replaced with new stone units, except that minor damages may be
repaired when approved by the Project Manager. Repairs, when approved, shall be completed
to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. When the repairs to stone are unsatisfactory to the
Project Manager, the stone shall be replaced with new stone. All repairs and all replacements
of defective and unsatisfactorily repaired stone shall be performed at the Contractor's own
expense.
END OF SECTION
04450 - 5
Natural Stone Work
SECTION 04455
NATURAL MARBLE
PART 1
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
GENERAL
Work Included
Marble for floors, using both, standard and cut to size tiles.
Skirting, Sills.
Treads and Risers.
Threshold.
Metal anchors.
Vanity units.
Mortar and Joint Grouting.
Joint Sealant.
1.02
Related Work
Sealant for control and expansion joints, including back-up materials in conjunction with interior
and marble works.
1.03
Submittal
A.
B.
C.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
Shop Drawings and Product Data
1)
Submit shop drawings and product data
2)
Indicate Pertinent dimensioning, layout, anchorages, construction details, method of
installation and adjacent construction.
3)
Indicate all units of marble configuration and size, materials and types of anchorage items
and their locations.
4)
Submit marble supplier's installation instructions, and field erection drawings.
5) Submit manufacturer's instructions for use of pointing colour and admixtures.
Design Calculations
Submit two copies of marble anchorage assemblies as specified.
Samples
1)
Submit two sets of each type of marble including thresholds, paving slabs, sills, skirtings,
treads and risers, etc. of sizes and thicknesses as indicated on the drawings, to the
project site, in sufficient number to indicate the full range of specified marble colours, and
the type of finish. One of each of the duplicate samples approved by the Project Manager
will be retained by him at the project site, the other being returned to the marble supplier
for his guidance.
2)
The material type and colour of the marble items shall be as selected and approved by
the Employer or his representative.
3)
The following physical data on all proposed marble shall be submitted by the marble
supplier
a.
Analysis of mineral composition.
b.
Analysis of chemical composition.
c.
Thermal coefficient of expansion.
d.
Permeability.
e.
Methods of cleaning.
f.
History of colour change.
g.
Abrasion resistance.
4)
Anchors Two of each type to be incorporated in the work.
5)
Manufacturer's recommended marble cleaning agent and application procedure.
6)
Submit samples of colour mortar, indicating varying shades of colour closely matching
the colour of each type of marble.
7)
Submit samples of other materials specified herein upon request by the Project Manager.
Guarantee/Warranty
Attention is directed to the provisions of the Conditions of Contract regarding guarantees/
warranties for the Work.
Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this Section. However,
such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which the
manufacturer and Contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract
Documents.
All warranties/guarantees to be issued by the Supplier, Manufacturers and Sub contractors
shall be counter-signed by Main Contractor and both of them will be liable for repair/replace
the items/works, etc. during the warrantee guarantee period.
04455-1
Natural Marble
1.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
Standards
Applicable provisions of the following standard publication shall apply throughout the work:
Building Stone Institute "Recommended Practices for the Use of Natural Stones in Building
Construction".
Marble Institute of America ( MIA) incorporated American Standards Specifications for Interior
and Exterior Marble, latest revision.
American Welding Society (AWS) AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code.
Industrial Fasteners Institute (IFI) Handbook of Bolt, Nut and Rivet Standards.
1.06
A.
References
National standards referenced herein are included to establish recognized quality only.
Equivalent quality and testing standards will be acceptable subject to their timely submission,
review and acceptance by the Project Manager.
1.07
A.
Qualifications
Fabricator A firm having an adequate supply of the specified types of marble and an annual
rated production capacity to deliver the marble to the project site on schedule, within a time limit
established by the Project Manager as required to assure no delay to the progress or
completion of the Work.
Installer A Firm with a minimum of five years successful experience in the erection and laying
of marble works.
B.
1.08
A.
B.
C.
1.09
A.
B.
C.
1.10
A.
B.
C.
D.
Design Criteria
The method of installation of all marble work shown on the Drawings is diagrammatic only and
is not to be used for the purpose of bidding or construction. It shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to design and guarantee the structural support and the permanent water-tight
sealing of all marble work. The installation shall be designed to allow for expansion,
contraction and differential deflection of supporting floors of the building structure. All
fastenings into marble such as plates, bolts, anchors, shelf angles, inserts, etc. are to be
stainless steel.
Design and calculations for marble anchor system design shall be based on a minimum safety
factor of five for aspects related to marble strength and anchor strength in masonry or
concrete.
Allowable stresses in stainless steel anchor elements shall not exceed the following
1.
Tension, bending
0.6 Fy
2.
Shear
0.4 Fy
3.
Compression
Follow AISC Spec Requirements
Delivery, Storage & Handling
Packing and Loading: Finished marble shall be carefully packed and loaded for
shipment using all reasonable and customary precautions against
damage in transit. No material which may cause staining or discoloration
shall be used for blocking or packing.
Site Storage: Upon receipt at the building site or storage yard, the marble shall be stacked on
timber or platforms at least 100 mm. above the ground, and extreme care shall be taken to
prevent staining during storage. If storage is to be for a prolonged period, polyethylene or other
suitable plastic film shall be placed between any wood and finished surfaces, and shall be
used also as an overall protective covering. Salt shall not be used for melting of ice formed on
pieces, or for any purpose involving its contact with the marble.
Defective Marble: Any piece of marble showing flaws, cracks, or imperfections such as vents,
Shelly bars, shakes and starts upon receipt at the storage yard, or at the building site, shall be
discarded and removed from the work site, and at the supplier's own expense.
Environmental Requirements
The following environmental requirements are applicable to marble set in mortar, and when
caulking marble joints with sealant.
During freezing or near freezing weather, provide equipment and cover to maintain a minimum
of 4 degrees Co and to protect marble work completed or in progress.
At the end of working day, or during rainy weather, cover marble work exposed to weather with
waterproof coverings, securely anchored.
Maintain materials and surrounding air to a minimum 10 degrees Co prior to, during and 48
hours after completion of work.
04455-2
Natural Marble
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
PRODUCTS
Marble Materials And Fabrication
General
1)
All marble slabs shall be sound, free from cracks, earth veins, objectionable
discolouration, structural weaknesses and other defects that would impair their strength,
durability, and appearance. The texture grain and colour variations shall be established
by approved samples by the Project Manager.
2)
Marble shall be of the thickness and dimensions shown on the approved Shop Drawings.
All marble slabs shall be obtained from approved quarries having adequate capacity and
facilities to meet the specified requirements.
3)
Cutting and finishing shall be performed by a firm equipped to process the material
promptly on order and in strict accordance with the specifications. Evidence to this effect
shall be provided by the Marble Supplier.
4)
The fabricator must pay attention during the process of cutting to insure that the marble
block orientation will yield finished material with visual characteristics complying with the
approved samples.
5)
Marble rejected for non-compliance with the submitted samples or the requirements of
this Specification shall be replaced with material acceptable to the Project Manager.
Replacement shall be prompt and at the Supplier's own cost. Inspection of marble by the
Project Manager shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform all work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
Marble Schedule
Refer to the Drawings for locations, sizes and thickness of the various types of marble specified
herein
Application
Thickness
Vanity Counter
Floors
Skirtings
Sills
Treads
Risers
Threshold
The material type and
and shall be
C.
D.
Polished Textured
30mm
*
30mm
*
10mm
*
30mm
*
30mm
*
20mm
*
30mm
*
colour of the marble items shall be approved by the Project Manager,
Local Marble
Floors
Treads
Risers
Skirting
Threshold
Sills
Imported Marble
Vanity Counters
Marble Finish
1)
Generally, marble utilized for paving shall be polished with high gloss finish on all
exposed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein.
2)
Sanded or gritted finish may be used, obtained by light sand blasting to obtain a nonslip finish where required by the Project Manager.
3)
All exposed surfaces shall be free from scratches, chipping or hollows and other
defects.
Marble Fabrication
1)
Fabrication of marble shall be in strict accordance with approved shop drawings for
manufacture, and with this specification.
2)
The Contractor shall be responsible for all measurements at the job site that may be
required for the fabrication.
04455-3
Natural Marble
3)
All work shall be of the highest quality, in accordance with the best trade practices, and
performed by skilled workmen. All materials and workmanship shall conform to the
highest industrial standards.
2.01
Marble Materials And Fabrication (cont’d)
4)
Use no materials, equipment, or practices that may adversely affect the functioning, or
durability of marble work, or work of other trades.
5)
Marble tile paving, marble facing, marble skirtings, treads and risers etc. shall be of the
shapes, sizes and thicknesses shown on the approved shop drawings, and no variation
shall be permitted. All tread nosings shall be slightly rounded; riser heads shall be as
shown on the detailed drawings and approved by the Project Manager.
6)
Arrises in all marble work shall be cut perfectly true, even and sharp, and of the full
thickness, with exposed edges slightly rounded to prevent snipping.
7)
The dimension of all marble individuals shall be worked to within plus or minus 1mm from
those shown on the drawings and/or the approved Shop Drawings.
8)
All bed and joint surfaces shall be straight and at right angles to the faces, unless
otherwise shown.
9)
All cuttings to marble items shall be performed properly to form close joints. The marble
setter shall cooperate fully with other trades to do all cutting, drilling and fitting to
accommodate work of others.
10) All drilling, cutting including cut outs to receive anchors, etc. shall be carefully drilled or
cut to avoid stunning or fracture of the material adjacent to the hole or mortice. The
cutting and drilling work shall be done at the plant.
11) All marble works shall be based on requirements established under the American
Standards Specifications for Interior and Exterior Marble, of the Marble Institute of
America Incorporated (MIA) latest revision.
2.02
A.
Mortar Materials and Accessories
Cement
1)
Cement for Setting Mortar Non staining Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C150, (BS
12) Type I, except containing not more than 0.03% water soluble alkali.
2) Cement for Pointing Mortar Non staining white Portland Cement
conforming to ASTM C150 (BS 12). NOTE Grey non staining
cement may be used for pointing mortar if the colour of pointing
mortar, as selected by the Project Manager, does not require White
Portland Cement.
Water Shall be potable, clean and fresh from Public Water System.
Sand Well graded non staining masonry sand conforming to ASTM C144 (BS 882). Use white
Silica sand for pointing mortar. Other sand shall be approved by the Project Manager.
Lime Approved brand of plastic hydrated, such as New England 4X, conforming to ASTM
C207, Type "S", or BS 890.
Integral Waterproofing "FEBPROOF" or approved equal integral liquid waterproofer, as
manufactured by Feb Ltd., UK.
Integral Color "FEBTONE", as manufactured by Feb Ltd., UK or approved equal.
Grout for Marble Pagers "FEBTILE RAINBOW GROUT" as manufactured by Feb Ltd.;, UK.
and or FEBTILE LP GROUT, all as approved by the Project Manager, or any others equal and
approved.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.03
PART 3
3.01
Marble Anchorage Materials - Generally
Anchors, dowels, cramps, relieving angles and the like, as shown on the approved Shop
Drawings, or as may be required at special conditions for fastening standing marble work shall
be fabricated from type 302 or 304 stainless steel.
The type, location and number of anchors shall be determined by calculations, applicable
codes, and recommended practices of the BSI and the MIA for placement of anchors.
EXECUTION
Conditions at Site
04455-4
Natural Marble
A.
B.
C.
3.02
A.
B.
3.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.04
Examine all surfaces and parts of the structure to receive marble work and notify the Project
Manager in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the
work. Do not proceed with installation until such conditions have been corrected and are
acceptable to the Project Manager.
Verify all measurements and dimensions, coordinate the installation of this work, and
coordinate and schedule this work with the work of other trades. Give particular attention to the
location and size of cutouts required to accommodate mechanical, electrical, and other work or
adjoining construction, in accordance with the reviewed shop drawings for such trade.
The marble tile setter shall install all work using lighting conditions that will represent the
proposed lighting required in the areas involved. This requirement will be insisted upon in order
to achieve uniformity in laying out work.
Marble Installation
Marble Floor Installation (Conventional Set)
1)
Setting bed for floors shall be composed of one- part Portland Cement, four parts damp
sand by volume with integral waterproofing admixture in the quantity and manner
recommended by the manufacturer.
2)
The setting bed, when mixed with water, the mortar mix shall be of such consistency or
workability as to promote maximum density, determined by stroking the mortar surface
with a trowel. When of correct consistency, the trowelled surface readily assumes a
smooth slickened appearance. Screed and tamp setting bed firmly.
3)
The setting bed shall be 30mm thick on an appropriate thickness of white sand bed
underlay.
4) Once the setting bed is applied and tamped to a true and even surface, set the marble tile
in place and tamp with a mallet until firmly bedded, then remove. Trowel or brush a thin
layer, 1/32 in. (.8mm) to 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) in thickness, of neat Portland Cement paste
over the back of marble. A thin layer of dry Portland Cement, 1/32 in. (.08 mm) to 1/16 in.
(1.6mm) thick over the setting bed and working lightly with a trowel may be permitted.
These areas (setting bed and cement paste) shall be limited to what can be covered with
tile before the mortar sets. Marble shall be pressed back firmly into the bed tamping with
wood blocks to obtain smooth surface.
5)
All tiles shall be aligned properly with straight closed joints 1/32 in. (.8mm) wide. All edges
of tiles shall be buttered with coloured cement before closing joints, wipe off excess
immediately with sponge and clear water.
6) Tamping shall be completed within one (1) hour after placing tile.
Adjusting work out of line, shall be done within the one (1) hour
period.
7)
All expansion joints shall be left clear of grout to receive sealant.
8)
Lay tiles to pattern as indicated on the drawings.
9)
Thresholds shall be set by marble tile setter.
Sealant Application
1)
Apply approved sealants to joints, expansion joints and other areas where shown on the
drawings.
2)
Where marble terminates at floor drains, or joints, these joints shall be sealed with
approved sealant; coordinate with trades affecting these items.
Cleaning And Protection - Generally
After marble work has thoroughly set, sponge and wash thoroughly. Remove all surface
cement and take care not to damage marble or adjacent materials.
Do not use acid or abrasive cleaners. The type of cleaner shall be approved by the Project
Manager prior to application.
Marble surfaces shall be dried using soft, dry cloths.
Protect marble work as the work proceeds, with non-staining heavy kraft paper or other
approved coverage for both paved or cladded areas.
All pavings including treads shall be properly protected by covering the entire areas with
gypsum at least five (5) centimeters thick on top of the kraft paper. This gypsum protective
layer shall be removed prior to polishing.
Protect nosings of all treads, edges of skirtings liable to damage by protective boarding or other
means.
Protect all facings against the weather or damage and staining by other trades, taking special
precautions against staining by timbers, wet straw, oil, washings from steel work or
scaffoldings, or other injurious substances.
Final Cleaning And Polishing
04455-5
Natural Marble
A.
B.
On completion of all building operations, the Contractor shall remove all kraft paper and
gypsum layer and dispose of the site, thoroughly clean down the completed marble work and
attend to any defects in the finished marble work. All damage shall be made good to the
satisfaction of the Project Manager at the Contractor's own expense.
All surfaces shall be polished with silicone wax polish (either liquid or paste). When the wax has
dried, it shall be polished with a mechanical buffer to a lustrous finish free from tackiness.
END OF SECTION
04455-6
Natural Marble
SECTION 05500
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1
1.01
A.
B.
5)
6)
GENERAL
Work Included
Metal fabrications include items made from aluminum and/or iron and steel shapes, plates,
bars, and strips which are not a part of structural steel or other metal systems specified
elsewhere.
Types of work, in this section include metal fabrications for the following, some of which are
detailed on the structural and/or architectural drawings
1)
Rough Hardware.
2)
Brass Strip.
3)
Steel Gutter and Frame
4) Chimney Stack Cover
Sliding Gates
Vertical steel ladders.
1.02
Related Work
Section 05520 Handrails and Railings.
1.03
A.
Quality Assurances
Field Measurements Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and
fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for timing and fitting where taking
field measurements before fabrication might delay work.
Shop Assembly Preamble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing
and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Clearly mark units for reassemble and coordinated installation.
B.
1.04
References
Applicable Publications. The following publications of the issues listed below, but referred to
thereafter by basic designation only form a part of this Section
1.
Federal Specifications, Naval Publications and Forms Center, 5801 Tabor Avenue,
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19120, USA
FF-W-92B
Washers, Flat (Plain).
RR-G-661E
Grating, Metal, Bar Type (Floor, Except for Naval Vessels).
2.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 1430 Broadway, New York, New York
10018, USA
A14.3-1984
Fixed Ladders, Safety Requirements for.
3.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards, 1916 Race Street,
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19103, USA
A27-83
Specifications for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application.
A36-81a
Specification for Structural Steel.
A47-77
Specification for Malleable Iron Castings.
A53-82
Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated
Welded and Seamless
A123-78
Specification of Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products
Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates,
Bars, and Strip.
A153-82
Specification of Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
A307-83a
Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard
Fasteners.
A386-78
Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on assembled Steel Products.
A569-72(1979) Specification of Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot Rolled
Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality.
F593-82
Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs.
4.
American Welding Society, Inc., (AWS), 2501 N.W. 7thStreet, Miami, Florida 33125, USA
D1.1-85
Structural Welding Code - Steel.
5.
Military Specifications, Naval Publications and Forms Center, 5801 Tabor Avenue,
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19120, USA
MIL-P-21035A
Paint, High Zinc Content, Galvanizing Repair (Metric).
6.
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM), 221N. La Sale,
Chicago, Illinois 60601, USA
05500-1
Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications
Metal Bar Grating Manual - October 1979
1.04
References (cont’d)
7.
Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) ; 440Fifth Avenue, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania
15213, USA
PA1
Shop, Field & Maintenance Painting, November 1.1982.
Paint 20
Zinc-Rich Primers (Type1-Inorganic and Type II - organic), November
1, 1982.
SP3
Power Tool Cleaning, November 1, 1982.
1.05
A.
B.
Submittals
Submit items in accordance with the SPECIAL PROVISIONS.
Product Data Submit Manufacturer's specifications, anchor details and installation instructions
for products used in miscellaneous metal fabrications, including paint products.
Shop Drawings Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of miscellaneous metal
fabrications. Include plan, elevations and details of sections and connections, Show
anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchor and bolt installation in critical
area.
1.
Where materials or fabrications are indicated to comply with certain requirement for
design loading, include structural computations, material properties and other information
needed for structural analysis.
Samples Submit the following samples
1)
Fasteners Threaded ; standard fasteners; or wedged type.
2)
Bolts, nuts and washers Regular Hexagon head type washers, round, carbon steel .
3)
Welding Materials AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
C.
D.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
1)
2)
Materials
Ferrous Metals
Metal Surfaces, General For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work
which will be exposed-to-view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface
blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and
roughness.
2)
Steel Plates, (Shapes) ASTM A36.
3)
Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Studs ASTM F593.
4)
Steel pipe ASTM a53; type and grade and as required for design loading; standards
weight (Schedule 20), unless otherwise indicated.
5)
Brackets, flanges and Anchors Cast or Formed metal of the same type material and
finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
6)
Concrete Inserts Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable
iron, ASTM A47, or cast steel, ASTM A27. provide bolts, washers and shims as required ,
hot -dip galvanized, ASTM A153.
B.
Fasteners
1)
Bolts and Nuts Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A307, Grade A.
Plain Washers Round, Carbon Steel, Federal Specification FF-W092.
C.
Paint
1)
Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal Manufacturer’s or fabricator's standard, fast-curing, leadfree, "Coppers" primer; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for
compatibility with finish paint systems indicated and for capability of obtaining a sound
foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
2)
Galvanizing Repair Paint High zinc dust content paint for re galvanizing welds in
galvanized steel, complying with the Military Specification MIL-P-21035 (Ships) or SSPCPaint 20.
2.02
A.
Fabrication, General
Workmanship
1)
Use materials of size and thickens indicated or, if not indicated, as required to produce
strength and durability in finished product for use intended. Work to dimensions shown or
accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of
materials shown or specified for various components of work.
05500-2
Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications
3)
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and
surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1
mm (1/32 inch), unless otherwise shown. From bent-metal corners to smallest radius
possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
2.02
4)
Fabrication, General (cont’d)
Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS
recommendations. At exposed connections, grind exposed welds smooth and flush to
match and blend with adjoining surfaces. Welding to or on structural steel shall be in
accordance with the Structural Welding Code of the American welding Society.
4)
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type shown or, if not shown,
Phillips flat-head (counter sunk) screws or bolts.
5)
Prepare for anchorage of type indicated, coordinated with supporting structure.
Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use.
6)
Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish
hardware and similar items.
7)
Galvanizing Furnish a zinc coating for those items shown or specified to be galvanized,
as follows
a- ASTM A153
for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.
b- ASTM A123
for galvanizing rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars
and strip 3mm (1/8-ich) thick and heavier.
c- ASTM A386
for galvanizing assembled steel products.
B.
Shop Painting Apply shop primer to surfaces of metal fabrications except those which are
galvanized, stainless steel or as indicated to be embedded in concrete or masonry, unless
other wise indicated, and in compliance with requirements of SSPC-PA1 "Paint Application
Specification No. 1" for shop painting.
C.
Surface Preparation Prepare ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements
indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure
conditions of installed metal fabrications
Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A) SSPC-SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning"
2.03
A.
B.
Rough Hardware
Furnish bent or otherwise custom-fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other
miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for supporting miscellaneous metal.
Fabricate items to sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron washers for
heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers.
2.04
Brass Strip
Install and fix brass strip in position including cut to size and all needed fixing material as
manufacturer’s instructions.
2.05
Steel Gutter and Frames
Steel Gutters shall, unless otherwise indicated, conform to Federal Specification RR-G661.
Edges of gutters shall be banded with bars 3mm (1/8 inch) less in depth than the bearing bars.
Banding bars shall be flush with top of bearing bars. Furnish frames of steel shapes and allwelded construction finished to match gutter. Frames shall be anchored to structural members
with bolts or toggles bolts. Floor grating and frames shall be galvanized.
2.06
A.
Chimney Stack Cover
Furnish all requisite materials, fabricate and install chimney stack over complete
with hood, all as detailed on the detail drawings.
All work shall be carried out in strict accordance with approved shop drawings.
Clean all surfaces which are in direct contact with concrete shall be treated with an anticorrosion paint.
B.
C.
2.07
A.
Balustrade Steel Handrail
Fabricate and install steel balustrade and handrails, for the location shown with
dimensions, spacing, details and anchorage as indicated on the approved shop
05500-3
Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications
B.
B.
2.8
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
PART 3
drawings.
Support each balustrade/hand rail using brackets as details.
Clean all surfaces down to bare metal obtain the Project Manager approval and
apply oil paint comprising primer, under coat and finish coats, touch up paint as
deemed necessary after installation.
Vertical steel ladders
Fabricate and install vertical steel ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacing,
details and anchorages as indicated. Comply with the spacings, details and anchorages as
indicated on the approved Shop Drawings.
Fit rugs in centerline of side rails, plug revit and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
Support each ladder using brackets as detailed.
Fit platforms revised to angle framing below.
Make good to other trades affected by the installation of the aluminium ladders and finish off
to the Project Manager / Employer's representative's approval.
EXECUTION
3.01
A.
C.
Preparation
Field Measurements. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and
fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where
taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work.
Coordinate and furnish anchorage, setting drawings, diagrams, templates,
instructions, and directions for installation of anchorage, such as concrete inserts, sleeves,
anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in
concrete construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.
3.02
Installation
General:
1)
Fastening to In-Place Construction Install anchorage devices and fasteners where
necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction;
including, threaded fasteners for connectors as required.
2)
Cutting, Fitting and Placement:
aPerform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal
fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level,
true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Use temporary
bracing or anchors in form work for items which are to be built into concrete,
masonry or similar construction.
bFit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld
Connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop-welded
because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch-up
shop paint coat.
3)
Field welding Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc
welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding
work.
3.03
A.
Adjust and Clean
Touch-Up Painting Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop
painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry-film thickness of .05 mm (2.0 mils).
For Galvanized Surfaces Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply
two coats of galvanizing repair paint.
B.
END OF SECTION
05500-4
Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications
SECTION 05520
HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
Section Includes
Steel pipe handrails, balusters, and fittings; complete with all requisite accessories.
Powder coated and finish handrailing.
1.02
A.
B.
Related Sections
Section 05500: Attachment plates, hold-down bolts, angles, including anchorage, etc.
Section 09900 - Painting: Paint finish.
1.03
A.
B.
C.
References
ASTM A53 - Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe.
ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanised) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
ASTM A500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round
and Shapes.
ASTM A501 - Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
ASTM B211 - Aluminium-Alloy Bars, Rods, and Wire.
ASTM B221 - Aluminium-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes.
ASTM B241 - Aluminium-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube.
ASTM B483 - Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Drawn Tubes For General Purpose
Applications.
ASTM E935 - Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails
for Buildings.
ASTM E985 - Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings.
SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting Manual.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
1.04
Design Requirements
Railing assembly, steps rails, and attachments to resist lateral force of 35 Kg. at any point
without damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM A935.
1.05
A.
Submittals For Review
Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of
fasteners, and accessories.
Samples: Submit long samples of handrail. Submit samples, of elbow, Tee, wall bracket,
escutcheon and end stop.
B.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager / Employer’s Representative the names of
three manufacturers and their products which will be acceptable under this section. Approval of
the manufacturer or product must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
2.02
A.
Steel Railings And Handrails
Fabricate Steel railings, posts and handrails to design, dimensions, and details indicated.
Furnish railings and handrail members formed of the sized indicated conforming to ASTM A53,
standard weight.
Fabrication : Jointing of post, rail, and corners shall be by one of the following methods
1)
Flush-type rail fittings of commercial standard, welded and ground smooth with railing
splice locks secured with 10mm (3/8 inch) hexagonal-recessed-head setscrews.
2)
Mitred and welded joints made by fitting post to top rail and intermediate rail to post,
mitring corners, groove welding joints, and grinding smooth. Railing splices shall be
butted and reinforced by a tight-fitting interior sleeve not less that 152 mm (6 inches) long.
3)
Railings may be bent at corners in lieu of jointing, provided bends are made in suitable
jigs and that the pipe is not crushed.
4)
Furnish wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails.
5)
Close exposed ends of rails by welding 5mm (3/16-inch) thick steel plate in place or by
use of prefabricated fittings.
B.
05520-1
Handrails and Railing
2.02
Steel Railings And Handrails (cont’d)
6)
Furnish removable railing where indicated.
7)
Railings and handrails shall be capable of withstanding a concentrated load of 91 Kg.
(200 pounds) applied at any point in any direction.
2.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
Steel Railing System
Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade (B) Schedule 20.
Rails and Posts: of sizes as shown on the drawings; posts and/or supports; welded joints.
Fittings: Elbows, T-shapes, wall brackets, escutcheons, and caps; steel.
Mounting: Adjustable brackets and flanges, with steel inserts for casting in concrete; with steel
brackets for embedding in masonry. Prepare backing plate for mounting in floor construction.
Exposed Fasteners: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; consistent with design of railing.
Splice Connectors: Steel welding collars.
Shop Refinishing: Powder coated to color as selected.
E.
F.
G.
2.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
PART 3
Fabrication
Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site.
Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and sleeves to
accommodate site assembly and installation.
Provide anchors, plates and angles, etc.; as required for connecting railings to structure.
Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located;
consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.
Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related
components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted
otherwise.
Exterior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds. Drill condensate
drainage holes at bottom of members at locations that will not encourage water intrusion.
Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds.
Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt
tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
Accurately form components, to each other and to building structure.
Accommodate for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without
damage to connections or members.
EXECUTION
3.1
Examination
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
3.2
A.
B.
Preparation
Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
Supply items required to be cast into concrete and/or embedded in masonry with setting
templates, to appropriate sections.
Installation
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
Anchor railings to structure with anchors, plates, angles, etc. as approved by the Project
Manager.
Field weld anchors as indicated on approved shop drawings. Touch-up welds with primer.
Grind welds smooth.
Conceal bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk
fastenings.
3.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
Erection Tolerances
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 3 mm per storey, non-cumulative.
Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 3 mm.
Maximum Out-of-Position: 3 mm.
3.5
Schedule
Refer to the Drawings and Book of Details for Detail Nos. and locations.
05520-2
Handrails and Railing
END OF SECTION
05520-3
Handrails and Railing
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1
1.01
Work Included
Finish carpentry items, such as wooden counters, complete with required hardware and
attachment accessories.
1.02
Related Work
Section 09900:
1.03
A.
B.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
Painting.
Quality Assurance
Perform finish carpentry work in accordance with recommendations of the Millwork Standards
of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI).
Fire retardant treatment to conform to requirements of underwriters' laboratories (UL).
Reference Standards
MILLWORK STANDARDS
PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.
PS 51 - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
PS 58 - Basic Hardwood.
1.05
Samples
Submit 300 mm X 200mm size sample of each type of hardwood, to receive field applied stain
or natural finish indicating required grade and finish.
1.06
A.
Delivery And Storage
Do not deliver finish carpentry items until, in the opinion of Project Manager, Site conditions are
adequate to receive the work of this Section. Protect materials from weather while in transit.
Store indoors, in ventilated areas with a constant but minimum temperature of 16 deg. C. and
relative humidity of 25 to 55 percent.
B.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and
their products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or
product must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
2.02
Sheet Materials
Hardwood Plywood: PS 51; graded in accordance with AWI; core material of lumber; type of
bond recommended for application.
2.03
Finish Materials
Finish wooden counters as shown on drawings.
2.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
GENERAL
Installation
Perform finish carpentry work to extent indicated in "Schedule of Items" at the end of this
section. Construction joining and prefinishing of assemblies and items: Premium grade, as
established by AWI.
Set and secure materials and components in place, rigid, plumb, and square.
Ensure all mechanical and electrical items affecting this Section of work are properly placed,
complete, and have been inspected by the Project Manager prior to commencement of
installation.
Prime paint contact surfaces of items and assemblies in contact with cementitious
materials.
E.
Install hardware and accessories supplied under other sections for installation.
F.
Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
06200 - 1
Finish Carpentry
G.
Apply clear lacquer paint finishes. Adhere over entire surface. Make joints and corners hairline.
Match patterns. Slightly bevel arrises.
2.05
A.
Preparation For Finishing
Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and
screw indentations and leave ready to receive Site-applied finishes. On items to receive
transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces, and of types
recommended for applied finishes.
Seal, stain and varnish concealed and semi-concealed surfaces. Brush apply only.
Seal surfaces in contact with cementitious materials.
B.
C.
2.06
Schedule
Interior
Finish: As shown on drawing.
END OF SECTION
06200 - 2
Finish Carpentry
SECTION 07111
BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
FOR UNDERGROUND WORKS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
C.
Work Included
Prepare, clean and repair surfaces.
Supply and apply water proofing.
Supply and fix Protective coverings.
1.02
Related Work
Section 03300 : Cast-in-place concrete.
1.03
A.
B.
C.
Shop Drawings And Product Data
Submit manufacturers instructions for the Project Manager's review.
Submit shop drawings indicating water proofing materials, protective covering,
surface preparation and method of application for the Project Manager's review and approval.
Indicated jointing details to large scale.
1.04
A.
B.
PART 2
Warranty
Provide written warranties in the name of the Employer.
Warranty shall provide for making good, within a period of five (5) years, at no cost to
Employer, failures of waterproofing to resist penetration of water, except where such failures
are result of structural failures of building. Hairline cracking due to temperature of shrinkage is
not considered as structural failure. Repair and make good waterproofing membrane and pay
for and repair or replace all affected or damaged materials surfaces at no cost to Employer.
PRODUCTS
2.01
Acceptable Manufacturers
The contractors- shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufactures and
their products which shall be acceptable under this section. Approval of the manufacturer or
product must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
2.02
A.
Materials
Modified bitumen torchable membrane, 4mm thick, reinforced with 180 gm/m2 non-woven
polyester with 50 gm/m2 glass fiber.
Primer compatible with waterproofing and recommended by waterproofing manufacturer and
approved by the Project Manager.
Protective cover, 10cm thick pre-cast hollow concrete blocks.
B.
C.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
Surface Preparation
Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations and the Project Manager's acceptance and approved.
3.02
A.
D.
Application
The names of the application firm shall be approved by both the Project Manager and the
manufacturer prior to proceeding with the works.
All prepared surfaces shall when dry, be painted with a coat of primer at a rate
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. All blinding surfaces must be finished fairfaced or trowel smooth to receive the waterproofing membrane.
B.
Apply the waterproof membrane surface against prepared surfaces, in accordance with
manufacturers recommendations, ensuring that air is excluded from under membrane.
C.
Adjacent rolls of waterproof membrane should be provided with a minimum 100 mm lap and
complete adhesion must be achieved between both layers to ensure complete waterproofing.
All external and internal angles and corners shall be reinforced with an extra strip
of waterproof membrane, minimum 300 mm wide.
07111-1
Bituminous Membrane Waterproofing for Underground W orks
3.02
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
Application (cont’d)
All internal corners should be provided with a 50 mm X 50 mm minimum fillet.
Where waterproof membrane is to be terminated above ground level (150mm from G.L. or as
instructed by the Project Manager) a chase should be provided of minimum dimension 25 mm
x 25 mm. The waterproof membrane should be dressed into the chase and immediately sealed
as per the approved Shop Drawings.
Pipes and other projections through waterproof membrane should be properly treated with
reinforcing strips, collars etc. as per manufacturer's recommendations to ensure complete
waterproofing.
Where waterproof membrane is expected to be left exposed for any length of time the top edge
should be batten-fixed to secure edge. The perimeter should be left with an extended edge for
later continuity and the free edge shall be adequately protected while exposed. The free edge
of the membrane should be carefully cleaned before further laying is commenced.
Before covering, inspect to ensure no damage. Any damaged area should be cleaned and
patched in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to ensure complete
waterproofing.
On horizontal applications where steel reinforcement is to be fixed prior to concreting, the
waterproof membrane should be protected with a minimum of 25 mm concrete topping “C15”
or other approved protection in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations at the
Contractor's own expense.
.
The area of waterproof membrane laid in a working day should not exceed that which can
be protected in the same working day, in order to ensure that membrane is not subjected to site
traffic or damage.
Material having limited shelf life are to be supplied with labels indicating batch number and
dates of manufacture and expiry. Materials not properly stored or which have exceeded their
expiry date will not be permitted to be used in the work and are to be removed from the site.
Submit five years guarantee covering materials and workmanship of waterproofing system. The
guarantee should be substantiated with a certified copy of the material guarantee provided by
the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
07111-2
Bituminous Membrane Waterproofing for Underground W orks
SECTION 07120
FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
Work Included
Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing.
Fluid applied membrane waterproofing.
1.02
Related Work
Division 15: Mechanical items projecting through membrane waterproofing.
1.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
Reference Standards
ASTM C355
ASTM D412
ASTM D624
ASTM D2240
1.04
A.
Product Data
Submit manufacturer's recommendations for surface conditioner compatibility, elastic flashing,
joint cover sheet and joint and crack sealants along with temperature range for application of
waterproofing membrane for review by the Project Manager / Employer Representative .
Water Vapor Transmission of Thick materials.
Rubber Properties in Tension.
Rubber Property - Tear Resistance.
Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness
1.05
A.
C.
Environmental Requirements
Do not apply waterproofing membrane during inclement weather or when air temperature is
below 40 degrees F (5 degrees C).
B.
Do not apply waterproofing membrane to damp, frozen, dirty, dusty, or unsuitable deck
surfaces. Concrete surfaces must be cured for 28 days.
Provide positive ventilation when waterproofing membrane is applied in enclosed
areas, to remove toxic fumes.
1.06
A.
B.
PART 2
Warranty
Provide written warranties in the name of the Employer.
Warranty shall provide for making good, within period of five (5) years, at no cost to Employer,
failures of waterproofing to resist penetration of water, except where such failures are result of
structural failures of building. Hairline cracking due to temperature or shrinkage is not
considered as structural failure. Repair and make good waterproofing membrane and pay for
and repair or replace all affected or damaged materials or surfaces at no cost to Employer.
PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and
their products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or
product must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
2.02
A.
Materials
Water Proofing Membrane: Two component elastomeric compound; cold applied; quick
setting.
Cured Membrane Characteristics:
Properties
Test Method
Tensile Strength
ASTM D412
Elongation (Ultimate)
ASTM D412
Hardness
ASTM D2240
Tear Strength
ASTM D624
Water Absorption
7 days @ 72 degrees F(22 degrees C)
Water Vapor Perm Adhesion
ASTM C355
Surface Conditioner: Type compatible with membrane compound; as recommended by fluid
membrane manufacturer.
Elastic Flashings: 1.19mm thick buty or neoprene as recommended by the waterproofing
membrane manufacturer.
B.
C.
D.
07120-1
Fluid Applied Waterproofing
E.
F.
G.
H.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Joint Cover Sheet: Elastic sheet material designed for and compatible with the membrane
waterproofing.
Joint and Crack Sealant: As recommended by waterproofing membrane manufacturer.
Back-up Material: PVC membrane or butyl rod or other suitable support material.
Tack-free Surfacer: Normal Portland cement or stone dust.
EXECUTION
Inspection Of Surfaces And Cleaning
Ensure that drains, sleeves and curbs which pass through surfaces to receive waterproofing
are properly and rigidly installed.
Ensure surfaces are free of cracks, depressions, waves or projections which may be
detrimental to proper installation of waterproofing membrane. Repair surfaces as required.
Seal cracks and expansion joints with recommended backup material and sealant. Ensure
proper depth-width ratio as recommended by sealant manufacture
Ensure expansion joints are sharply formed, free of broken edges or loose aggregates.
Clean surfaces of dust, dirt and other foreign matter detrimental to proper installation of
waterproofing membrane.
3.02
A.
D.
Preparation
Apply surface conditioner at a rate not exceeding 1 liter per 10 square meters nor less than 1
liter per 5 square meters depending on concrete surface. Protect surface conditioner from rain
or frost until dry.
B.
Apply 300 mm wide strip of joint cover sheet over cracks, non-working joints, and expansion
joints, over 1.6 mm but not exceeding 12.7 mm in width.
C.
At expansion joints from 12.7 mm to 25 mm in width, loop cover sheet down into joint between
1-1/4 and 1-3/4 inch 31.4 and 44.1 mm. Sheet is to extend at least 6 inches 152 mm on either
side of the expansion joint.
Center cover sheet over crack or joints. Roll sheet into 3.2 mm coating of
waterproofing membrane. Apply second coat over sheet extending minimum of 152 mm,
beyond sheet edges.
E
Procedure stated above shall also apply to expansion joints between horizontal and vertical
surfaces.
3.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Application
Apply waterproofing membrane in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Temperature of poured waterproof membrane is to be within minimum and maximum range
recommended by membrane product manufacturer.
Apply and spread membrane to a minimum 3.2 mm thickness and averaging 4.8 mm
thickness.
Continue membrane up vertical surfaces to a minimum of 152 mm unless otherwise noted.
Seal items projecting through membrane.
Install membrane flashings and seal into membrane.
Reinforce membrane over joints, whether they be static or moving.
Immediately after cooling, dust membrane with Portland Cement at rate of approximately 65
kilograms per 10 square meters.
END OF SECTION
07120-2
Fluid Applied Waterproofing
SECTION 07181
ELASTOMERIC WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
Section Includes
Elastomeric waterproofing coating.
1.02
Related Sections
Section 07900 : Sealants.
1.03
A.
B.
Reference
Palestinian General Specifications.
Manufacturers instructions.
1.04
System Description
To component cement acrylic elastomeric waterproofing system.
1.05
A.
B.
Submittals
Submit samples with the Project Manager instructions.
Product Data Provide details of product description, tests performed, limitations to coating,
cautionary procedures required during application, and chemical properties including percentage
of solids.
Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring
special attention.
C.
1.06
Qualifications
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with
minimum three experience.
1.07
A.
B.
Mockup
Provide mockup of surface to be coated as per the Project Manager instructions.
Prepare coated surface 1000 x 1000 mm in size.
1.08
A.
B.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site with the Project Manager Instructions.
Protect coating liquid from freezing.
1.09
Environmental Requirements
Do not apply coating when surface temperature is lower than 15 degrees C or higher than 40
degrees C.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
Manufacturers
“Weathercoat” or approved equal.
2.02
Materials
Acrylic elastomeric waterproofing materials.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
Examination
Verify joint sealants are installed and cured.
Verify surfaces to be coated are dry, clean, and free of efflorescence, oil, or other matter
detrimental to application of coating.
07181-1
Elastomeric Waterproofing System
3.02
A.
B.
Preparation
Ensure that dust, dirt and foreign matter are brushed away, Ridges and form oil must be removed.
If the surface shows signs of flaking or dusting, clean thoroughly and primes with Terrabond A or a
solution of Weathercoat Resin/Water (1:1).
Scrub and rinse surfaces with water and let dry.
3.03
A.
B.
Application
Apply coating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
Weathercoat is supplied as cement powder and acrylic resin, mixed in quantities as the
manufacturer recommendations. Add the powder to the resin. Mix with either a high-speed mixer or
a power agitator until the mix is homogenous (approx. 5-10 min). If spraying, add water until the mix
is of the correct consistency.
Apply first coat using brush, roller or spray. Further coats can be applied allowing 3 hours between
coats to dry.
Mixed Weathercoat must be used within 1 hour of mixing.
3.04
A.
B.
Protection to Finished and Adjacent Work
Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coating.
If applied to unscheduled surfaces, remove immediately by a method instructed by coating
manufacturer.
3.05
Schedules
To floor & walls : As shown on drawings.
END OF SECTION
07181-2
Elastomeric Waterproofing System
SECTION 07212
ROCKWOOL INSULATION
PART 1
1.01
A.
B.
Work included in the Unit Rate
Prepare surfaces to receive insulation.
Rockwool insulation and where applicable as required to provide thermal barrier for building
elements and spaces.
1.02
Reference Standards
Palestinian General Specifications.
1.03
Product Data
Submit manufacturers installation instructions for review by the Project Manager.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and
their products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or
product must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
2.02
Insulation Materials
Rockwool Insulation.
2.03
Accessories
Vapor Barrier: Bituminous paint in two coats.
PART 3
3.01
GENERAL
EXECUTION
Workmanship
A.
Install insulation and vapor barrier to maintain continuous and complete thermal vapor
protection for building spaces and elements.
B.
Ensure surfaces which are to receive insulation are clean, free of deleterious matter and are
sufficiently level to allow proper installation of insulation.
C.
Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Butt edges and ends tight. Fit insulation tight against
mechanical, electrical and other items, which protrude through plane of insulation.
D.
Use insulation free of broken or chipped edges and undamaged integral vapor barrier.
END OF SECTION
07212 - 1
Rockwool Insulation
SECTION 07535
MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING MEMBRANE
PART 1
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
GENERAL
Work Included
Cleaning substrate, preparing and applying light weight concrete including forming rain water
drains and outlets; application of primer coat.
Modified bitumen sheet roofing, installation.
Counter flashing and sealing sheet at termination.
Sealants.
1.02
A.
B.
Related Work
Section 07900
Section 03300
1.03
Reference Standards
Materials shall have the characteristics specified by current international regulations or failing
these shall meet the conditions specified by current standards in countries of origin. Acceptable
Standards of reference are as follows:
1.
UEATC (European Union for Technical Agreement in Construction).
–
General Directives for the Assessment of Roof Waterproofing Systems MOAT 27,
January 83.
–
Special Directives for the Assessment of SBS Elastomer bitumen MOAT31, August
84.
–
UEAtc, c/o BBA, P.O. Box 195, Bucknalls Lane, Watford, WD2 7NG, U.K.
2.
ASTM (American Society for Testing Materials) ASTM C869, ASTM 1227D type 4.
3.
CSTB (Scientific and Technical Center for Construction) 4 Av. du Recteur Poincare
75016 Paris.
–
DTU 20-12- Code of Practice- Concrete roofs to receive waterproofing.
–
DTU 43-1 - Code of Practice - Roofing over concrete deck
–
FIT Classification for roof waterproofing - Sept. 89.
4.
DIN (Deutsche Institute Fur Normung) Unter den Eichen 87 D 1000 Berlin 45 Germany.
–
Sealing and Insulating Roofing materials testing and design Standards.
1.04
A.
Shop Drawings And Product Data:
Submittals :
1.
Shop Drawings
Indicated layout of sheets including side and end laps, mechanical equipment, counter
flashing, drains and penetrations details.
2.
Product Data :
Submit manufacturer's printed specification and installation instructions, including
procedures and materials for terminations, penetrations, flashings compatibility and
bonding. The Contractor shall provide with his submittals all the relevant Standards
documentation.
3.
Samples :
Membranes
: Three 115mm x 75mm samples
Flashing Membrane
: Three 115mm x 78mm samples
Insulation
: Three 600mm x 600mm samples
Metal Flashing
: Three 300mm sample in the required color
Primer
: 1 Liter
Accepted samples will be retained to serve as a basis for checking at the time of delivery
of materials to site. The manufacturer shall furnish, when requested, proof of origin and
quality of the materials that will be used or where it has been applied.. Only materials
specified or approved by the Project Manager will be permitted to be used. The Project
Manager will stipulate acceptance tests and their mode of operation to be carried out on
materials supplied by the contractor. The Contractor will carry out these tests in his own
laboratory under the control of the Project Manager, Rejected materials will be
immediately isolated and labeled to avoid any risk of confusion. They will be removed
from the site by the Contractor within 48 hours following their rejection.
-
Sealants.
Light weight concrete roof screeds.
07535-1
Modified Bitumen Roofing Membrane
1.04
B)
C.
1.05
PART 2
2.01
A.
Shop Drawings And Product Data: (cont’d)
Contractor Certification
The Contractor is required to : Submit manufacturer's certification standing materials ordered and supplied are compatible
with each other, suited for locations and purpose intended and shipped in sufficient quantity to
ensure proper timely installation.
Submit manufacturer's approval of applicator.
Submit a certificate signed by the manufacturer for the materials specified which states
materials installed on the project manufacturer's published performance standards and the
requirements.
Submit Complete details about the contractor's company : company's profile, list of specialized
staff with their respective qualification and experience in the Palestine climatic conditions,
references (minimum 5 years), evidence of their ability to handle projects of a similar volume
and list of equipment.
Manufacturer Approval
1)
For uniformity of the efficiency and future maintenance, all the products proposed for
waterproofing shall be from the same manufacturer or approved by the waterproofing
membrane Manufacturer. Furthermore, a guarantee of 10 years availability of the
approved materials shall be submitted by the manufacturer.
2)
The manufacturer shall have an in house quality control set up complying with UEAtc
directives and/or with latest version of ISO series standards : manufacturer quality control
manual shall be available for the Project Manager / Employer’s Representative checking
at time of submission.
3)
The manufacturer in house quality control shall be periodically audited by an independent
technical control office for compliance with the Q.C. manual and standard
recommendations. Certificates from the technical control office shall be available for The
Project Manager checking.
Warranty
Provide warranty in the name of the Owner for materials and workmanship of water proofing.
This warranty shall clearly include the following:
1.
All materials in the waterproofing systems shall be free from manufacturing defects and
comply with manufacturer's published technical specifications.
2.
All workmanship in waterproofing systems shall be free from any defects and comply with
all respect to the manufacturer's technical instructions and control.
3.
This warranty becomes operative from the date of issue of the preliminary handing over
certificate of the contract and shall be valid for a period of ten (10) calendar years.
*
Within this warranty the Contractor is liable for the cost of :
*
Repair of defected materials or installation of replacement materials or system.
*
Damages to the building and/or the building contents due to such materials.
*
Financial loss and/or physical injury due to such materials.
The text of the warranty shall be to the Project Manager / Employer’s
Representative approval.
PRODUCTS
Materials
Basic Materials:
Waterproofing Membranes: The membranes to be used shall comply with the specification as
detailed below, Test reports shall be made available to the Project Manager / Employer’s
Representative upon request:>130 oC(ASTM D36)
20 -40 (ASTM D5)
-20 oC
(L)900 N/5; cm
<0.2%
50%
>25Kg
>20 Joules
270 N
Softening Point
Penetration at 25 C
Cold Flexibility
Tensile Strength
Dimensional Stability
Elongation At Break
Static Puncture Resistance
Dynamic Puncture Resistance
Tearing Resistance
07535-2
Modified Bitumen Roofing Membrane
B)
Miscellaneous Materials
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
2.02
PART 3
Primer: The primer to be used shall comply with all respect to ASTM D 41 and shall be
applied at a minimum rate of 0.250-0.300 kg/Sq.m. As recommended by the
manufacturer and approved by the Project Manager / Employer’s Representative.
Corner reinforcing strip: A 3mm thick SBS elastomeric bitumen membrane finished on
both sides with a macro perforated torch-off film allowing laying by torch or hot bitumen,
glass-grid reinforced for a tensile strength of at least 900 N/5 cm. The bitumen compound
shall have the same characteristics than the main waterproofing membrane.
Metal Flashing: 1.5mm minimum thick anodized aluminum, color at the Consultant
request.
Mastic Sealant: Plysulphide, silicone or polyurethane rubber sealant.
Drain Water Outlets: They shall consist of a prefabricated flange and a welded pipe,
flange dimension exceeding 120mm from edge of pipe opening. Pipe shall be of a
diameter and a length adapted to the roof condition. Outlets can be metal made (lead,
zinc, copper of similar approved) or bitumen-compatible rubber such as EPDM. All
flanges shall be primed on both faces before insertion in the waterproofing built-up,
Bottom of the pipe shall be sealed to the down pipe entry.
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and
their products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the Manufacturer or the
product must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
EXECUTION
3.01
Inspection
After proper cleaning of the roof area, a complete level survey shall be carried out by the
Contractor, including identification of hollow or debonded areas by tapping with a steel rod
(these areas will produce a hollow sound). The extent of debonding must be clearly marked.
Slope and planeity survey shall be carried out with the following tolerances :
1)
Slope:
*
Minimum slope requirement : 0.75%
*
Water pounding area shall be identified clearly.
2)
Planeity:
*
Tolerances for planeity shall be :
-5mm with a 2 meters straight edge.
-3mm with a 200mm straight edge.
3)
Surface :
The surface shall be smooth, clean, dry and free of dust, grease, oil, foreign chemicals
curing compound. Complete survey report shall be submitted to the Project Manager.
4)
Details :
*
All details shall be finalized before waterproofing works to start :
*
Rainwater drains shall be well located, inn sufficient number and ready to receive
waterproofing membranes.
*
Expansion joints shall be located at highest roof points, on reinforced concrete
curbs chamfered as shown on drawings.
*
All pipes, cables and other penetrations shall be in place. Provision for proper
waterproofing at Chillers and Machinery shall be made.
*
All parapets shall be in place, with provision for groove or counter flashing at and
acceptable height (150mm above finished roof level).
3.02
A.
Preparatory Work
Before commencing installation of the roof waterproofing and insulation system all construction
work and installations above roof level shall be completed as far as possible. Particular care
shall be taken to ensure:
1.
All rainwater, plumbing, air-conditioning and ventilation duct outlets have been fixed in
position and are protected against blockage or accidental damage.
2.
Supports to ductwork, pipework, cable tray and the like have been installed.
07535-3
Modified Bitumen Roofing Membrane
B.
3.02
C.
D.
3.
All curbs to roof lights, access doors, plant and water tanks have been installed.
4.
All chases for Skirtings, etc., have been prepared.
The surface of the substrate shall be clean and dry, free from ridges or indentations, laid to fall
as required and not contaminated with oil or other deleterious matter.
Preparatory Work (cont’d)
No waterproof membrane shall be applied until the substrate has been inspected and
approved by the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall abide by all means to National and International Labor and health
regulations. Safety precautions on Site shall incorporate, but are not limited to :
1)
All ladders and temporary stairs to be well secured at top and bottom.
2)
Sufficient number of fire extinguishers to be available.
3)
Safety helmet for every worker.
4)
All materials shall be stored in dry area, out of direct sunlight and according to
manufacturer's instructions (correct rolls position, maximum load and stacking allowed,..)
5)
It is not permitted to store material on the building in such concentrations as to impose
excessive stress and strain on deck or structural members.
6)
In the event that any materials for use in this section deteriorate and become unusable
due to inadequate and poor storage they shall be removed from site as instructed by the
Consultant / Department and replaced at the contractor's expense.
3.03
A.
B.
Lightweight Concrete Roof Screeds
The roof screeds shall be formed of lightweight foamed concrete as section 03300, clause
2.03, item B herein. The screeds shall be laid in bays, square where possible, of maximum 10
m2. Each bay shall be formed between stop boards of the correct height and cut on each side
to indicate the slope required in the roofing. The screed shall be trowelled with a wood float to
true and accurate falls or cross falls up to the stop boards. A 10mm wide gap shall be left
between each screed bay for the full depth of the screed.
The screeds shall be allowed to cure thoroughly to attain maximum shrinkage.
Any cracks which appear due to shrinkage shall be made good.
C.
The gaps between the screed bays shall be filled as follows:
1)
Brush or blow out joints to remove dirt, dust, etc., and prime the sides of the joints using a
piece of sponge or similar dipped in a mixture, of equal volume of "Flintkote" Type 1 or
Type 3 emulsion and water. Alloy to dry.
2)
Fill up joints slightly poured of the surface using an approved mastic filler. This mastic
shall be thoroughly mixed as necessary until it is a uniform brown colour. Allow to set and
dry. The screed joints shall then be covered with a 200mm wide strip of building paper
not bonded to the screed joint and well lapped at angles and junctions before the
application of the roof covering.
D.
The dry density shall be 450 kg/cu. m, and the characteristics compressive strength as defined
employing a standard cube at age of 28days shall be 1.4 Mpa using an appropriate materiel
mix proportions, all in accordance with manufacturer’s Instructions, Laboratory certified mixes,
and approval of the Project Manager / Employer’s Representative.
Finish surface trowel smooth to receive waterproofing membrane with a protective topping of
20mm minimum thickness of cement sand screed. (1:6) applied on top employing bonding
agent.
3.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Installation
Install materials in accordance with instructions officially issued by the Manufacturer.
Manufacturer's technical representative shall be present as necessary to ensure proper
installation.
As specified leveling/sloping screed for a minimum 1% slope.
100g slipsheet layer loosely laid.
Modified bitumen to torchable membrane, 4mm thick reinforced with 180gm/m2 non-woven
polyester fabric with 50gm/m2 non woven glass fiber, fully bonded to substrate..
100g slipsheet layer loosely laid.
Install sheet roofing in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and the following
requirements : -.
1The waterproofing membrane shall be fully bonded with a rich hot bitumen coating.
2The flame welding process shall not be used unless specifically ordered by the Project
Manager as complementary to the full and proper execution of the works, at the
contractor's own expense.
07535-4
Modified Bitumen Roofing Membrane
GI.
H.
I.
J.
Work out air bubbles, wrinkles, and fishmouths. Roll sheet into place, without stretching.
Seal ends and edges to each other and to adjoining surfaces with uniform fillet bead of sealant.
Seal watertight items projecting through membrane with counter flashing membrane material.
Adjacent rolls of waterproofing membrane should be provided with a minimum
150mm lap and complete adhesion must be achieved between both layers to ensure complete
waterproofing.
3.04
K.
L.
M
N.
O.
3.05
A)
B)
C)
D)
E)
3.06
A.
B.
C.
Installation (cont’d)
All external and internal angles and corners shall be reinforced with an extra strip of
waterproofing membrane minimum 300mm wide.
Where waterproofing membrane is to be terminated at a certain height of the wall, the
waterproofing membrane should be turned and dressed into the recess formed in the concrete
wall and sealed off with an approved sealing compound.
Pipes and other projections through waterproofing membrane should be properly treated with
reinforcing strips, collars etc. as per ,manufacturer's recommendations to ensure complete
waterproofing.
Where waterproof membrane is to be left exposed for any length of time the top edge should
be batter fixed to secure edge. The perimeter should be left and an extended edge of layer
continuity , and the free edge be adequately protected while exposed.
Before laying the protective covers, inspect to ensure no damage. Any damaged areas should
be cleaned and patched in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to ensure
complete waterproofing.
Testing
Flood test 72 hours minimum after completion of the waterproofing works.
Restrict water run-off from membrane area by plugging drains and creating dams or dikes.
Flood restricted area to depth of about 100mm and maintain at this depth for 48 hours.
Repair any leaks which develop and retest
At completion of flood test, drain plugs will be removed.
Water supply will be given main contractor from the existing network at no cost to the
Contractor, the later being responsible for the necessary equipment and labour.
Protective Covering
Where shown on the drawings provide an appropriate layer of approved washed wadi sand
bed underlay, cement or terrazzo tiles on sand cement mortar, to falls and cross falls
Lay approved layer of smooth rounded wadi pepples of size not exceeding 5 cm, on all
exposed untiled flat surfaces.
Adequate protection against damage to the roof water proofing system shall be provided where
further construction work is necessary in the area.
END OF SECTION
07535-5
Modified Bitumen Roofing Membrane
SECTION 07600
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
Work Included
Top of dressed in recess water proofing flashings.
1.02
Related Work
Section 07900:
Sealants.
1.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
Reference Standards
ASTM B209 - Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate.
FS TT-S-00230C - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component.
ASTM A176 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
BS 729 - "Hot - dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel articles".
1.04
A.
B.
Shop Drawings
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Conditions of Contract.
Clearly detail shaping, jointing, length of sections, fastening, and installation details.
1.05
A.
B.
Samples
Submit samples in accordance with Conditions of Contract.
Samples are to clearly indicate all fixing and sealing methods.
1.06
A.
B.
Existing Conditions/Protection
Exercise care when working on or about roof surfaces to avoid damaging or puncturing
membrane or flexible flashings.
Place plywood panels on roof surfaces adjacent to work of this Section and on
access routes. Keep in place until completion of work.
1.07
PART 2
Guarantee/Warranty
Provide Employer with a written guarantee stating that metal flashings will properly shed water
and protect finish from physical damage for a minimum period of 10 years from date of
Completion of Performance of Work, as certified by the Project Manager / Employer’s
Representative, and that damage resulting from failure to provide above stated performances
will be repaired or replaced to satisfaction of Owner at no additional cost.
PRODUCTS
2.01
Sheet Metals
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209; minimum 1.25 mm thick utility sheet of plain finish.
2.02
A.
Accessory Materials And Components
Fasteners: Concealed clip double seal type; of same material as flashings; sized to suit
application.
Solder and Flux: Type recommended for materials being used.
Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type; black color.
Sealant: Two component polysulphide, non-staining; non- bleeding; non-sagging; of color
selected by the Project Manager / Employer’s Representative.
Backing Rod : closed Cell polyethylene foam with a tough non-porous skin. Over size to 50% of
joint size.
B.
C.
D.
E.
07600-1
Flashing and Sheet Metal
2.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
Fabrication
Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects
detrimental to appearance or performance.
Form sections in approved lengths. Make allowances for expansion at joints.
Seams are to be flat lock type except corners. Fabricate corners minimum 455 mm x 455 mm
mitered, soldered or welded, and sealed as one piece.
Wipe and wash clean soldered joints to remove traces of flux immediately after soldering.
Backpaint flashings with bituminous paint where expected to be in contact with cementitious
materials or dissimilar metals.
EXECUTION
Installation
Secure flashings in place using specified type fasteners. Use exposed fastener in locations
approved by the Project Manager / Employer’s Representative. When using exposed fasteners,
they are to be of same finish as flashings.
Fix metal flashings to form tight fit.
Apply sealing compound at junction of metal flashings and concrete and/or plastered surfaces.
Lock seams and end joints. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and
straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles.
END OF SECTION
07600-2
Flashing and Sheet Metal
SECTION 07900
SEALANTS
PART 1
1.01
A.
B.
GENERAL
Work Included
Clean and prepare surfaces to receive sealant materials.
Install sealant and backing materials in exterior concrete and masonry joints around perimeter
of exterior located windows and door frames, exterior and interior joints between dissimilar
materials and expansion joints.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and
their products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or
product must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
2.02
A.
G.
Sealants Materials
Sealant: Polysulphide base, one component, chemical curing; conforming to Shore "A"
hardness of minimum 15 and maximum 50 non-staining and non-bleeding; color selected by
the Project Manager.
B.
Sealant: Polysulfide base, two component, chemical curing; type 1 - self levelling, 2 - nonsagging, conforming to Shore "A" hardness of minimum 15 and maximum 50 non-staining and
color selected by the Project Manager.
C.
Sealant: Polysulphide base, one component, air curing; conforming to Shore "A": hardness of
minimum 15 and maximum 50; non-staining and non-bleeding; color selected by the Project
Manager.
D.
Sealant: Terpolymer base, multi-component, chemical curing; Type 1 - self levelling, Type 2 non-sagging, conforming to Shore "A" hardness of minimum 15 and maximum 50; nonstaining and non-bleeding; colors selected by the Project Manager.
E.
Sealant: Silicone base, one component, solvent curing; conforming to requirements of class A;
indicating an instantaneous Shore "A" hardness of maximum 50; non- staining; color selected
by the Project Manager.
F.
Sealant: Silicone base, one component, chemical curing; conforming to requirements of class
A; indicating an instantaneous Shore "A" hardness of maximum 50; non- staining; color
selected by the Project Manager.
Sealant: Silicone base, two component, chemical curing; conforming to
requirements of class A; indicating an instantaneous Shore "A" hardness of minimum 12 and
maximum 25; non-staining; color selected by the Project Manager.
2.03
Reparatory Materials
A.
Primers: Non-staining types recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit applications.
B.
Joint Cleaners: Non-corrosive types recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with
joint forming materials.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
EXECUTION
Preparation/Installation
Maintain workmanship of the highest quality in accordance with best trade practice. Perform all
work in accordance with General Specifications.
Clean and prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Remove any
loose materials and other foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.
Ensure that joint forming materials are compatible with sealant.
Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. Use joint
filler to achieve required joint depths, to allow sealants to perform properly.
Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Use one part type sealant
for up to 20mm joints. Use two part type sealant for over 20mm joints.
Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant
cannot be applied within recommended temperature ranges.
Form joints concave, free of air pockets, embedded matter, ridges and sags.
07900 - 1
Sealants
END OF SECTION
07900 - 2
Sealants
SECTION 08110
STEEL DOORS
PART 1
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.02
A.
B.
1.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.04
A.
B.
GENERAL
Work Included
Standard steel hollow metal doors and panels and frames, with flush faces.
Standard louvered steel doors and screens.
Hardware for Class "A" labeled doors and panels.
Install hardware and louvers.
Paint.
Related Work
Section 08111:
Standard Steel Frames.
Section 08700:
Hardware.
Reference Standards
SDI-100: Recommended Specifications-Standard Steel Doors and Frames of Steel Door
Institute.
Underwriters' Laboratories Inc.:
(UL) and Factory Manual (FM), as applicable to fire rated
hollow metal doors.
ASTM A525:
Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process,
General Requirements.
ASTM A591:
Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Electrolytic Zinc Coated.
ASTM A366:
Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality.
Shop Drawings And Product Data
Submit shop drawings and product data.
Indicate general construction, configurations, jointing methods, reinforcements, and locations
of cut-outs for louvers.
PART 2
2.01
A.
2.02
PRODUCTS
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and
their products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or
product must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
B.
Substitutions: Items of same function and performance are acceptable..
Hollow Metal Doors [And Panels]
Hollow metal doors shall be purpose made to the profiles and sizes shown on the drawings
and obtained from an approved manufacturer. The doors shall be delivered to site complete
with a factory applied anti-corrosive plastic coating, ties cast on to baks of frames for building in
and rubber silencers on the locking stile.
A.
Materials and Fabrication: SDI-100 except as amended in this Section.
B.
Door Frame:.(150x65x3)mm galvanized steel sheet filled with concrete.
C.
Door Leaf: : 40mm thick hollow galvanized metal steel tube as detailed, with 3mm thick steel
sheet, galvanized profiled stiffener every 25 cm and mineral fiber.
D.
Louvers: Stationary and adjustable as required, and as shown on the approved Shop
Drawings (45x35x2)mm.
2.03
Hardware
A.
for Class "A" labeled doors.
B.
Install butts on Class "A" labeled doors prior to delivery. Install in accordance with UL
requirements.
2.04
Fabrication
A.
Mechanically interlock longitudinal seams of honeycomb core type doors and panels with
mineral fiber insulations. Leave seams invisible, or weld, fill and grind smooth
B.
Reinforce and prepare doors and panels to receive hardware. Refer to Section 08700 for
hardware requirements and schedules.
C.
Fill surface depressions with metallic paste filler and grind to smooth uniform finish.
D.
Touch up areas where coating has been removed due to sanding or handling.
E.
Chemically treat surfaces and apply one coat of primer.
F.
Paint.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
EXECUTION
Installation
Install doors in accordance with SDI-100 except as amended in this Section.
Install hollow metal doors plumb and square, and with maximum diagonal distortion of 2 mm.
Install hardware in accordance with requirements of Section 08700.
END OF SECTION
08110 - 1
Steel Doors
SECTION 08111
STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
Work Included
Standard and fire rated pressed steel hollow metal door frames.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
Related Work
Section 08110:
Section 08210:
Section 08700:
Section 08800:
1.03
A.
Reference Standards
SDI-100: Recommended Specifications-Standard Steel Doors and Frames of Steel Door
Institute.
Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. (UL), and Factory Mutual (FM), as applicable to fire rated
hollow metal door frames.
ASTM A591: Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Electrolyte Zinc Coated.
ASTM A366: Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality.
B.
C.
D.
1.04
A.
B.
PART 2
2.01
A.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
Standard Steel Doors
Wood Doors
Hardware
Glazing
Shop Drawings and Product Data
Submit shop drawings and product data.
Indicate general construction, configurations, jointing
methods, hardware locations and installation details.
methods, reinforcements, anchorage
PRODUCTS
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and
their products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or
product must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
Hollow Metal Frames
Materials and Fabrication: SDI-100 except as amended in this Section.
Types: Knockdown Frames.
Mortar Guard Boxes: minimum 0.76 mm thick welded in place.
Door Bumpers: manufacturer's standard resilient type; removable for replacement.
2.03
A.
D.
Fabrication
Accurately form interlocking joints of knocked down frames to maintain alignment of parts
when field assembled.
B.
Accurately cope and securely weld butt joints of mullions and transoms. Grind welded joints to
smooth uniform finish.
C.
Reinforce head sections where mullions occur.
Reinforce frames wider than 1200 mm with 2.5 mm thick formed steel channels
weld in place, flush with top of frames.
E.
Reinforce and prepare frames to receive hardware. Refer to Section 08700 for hardware
requirements.
F.
Place minimum of 3 single bumpers on single door frames. Space equally along strike jambs.
G. Place minimum of 2 single bumpers on double door frames. Place on frame heads.
H.
Provide jamb anchors: SDI-100. Weld floor jamb anchors in place.
I.
Fill surface depressions of hollow metal frames with metallic paste filler and grind to smooth
finish.
J.
Touch up areas where coating has been removed due to sanding or handling.
K.
Chemically treat surfaces and apply one coat of primer, and two powder coated paint.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
EXECUTION
Installation
Install door frames in accordance with SDI-100 except as amended in this Section.
Install hollow metal frames plumb and square, in correct locations indicated on drawings and
with a maximum diagonal distortion of 2 mm. Ensure frames are securely and rigidly anchored
to adjacent construction.
After installation, touch-up scratched or damaged surfaces. Use type of primer identical to that
used for shop coat.
END OF SECTION
08111 - 1
Standard Steel Frames
SECTION 08210
WOOD DOOR AND FRAMES
PART 1
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
GENERAL
Work Included
Standard, fire rated and “X” ray Protection type wood doors, with flush faces as indicated on the
relevant detailed drawings.
Frames - in Hard Wood (pinewood) as indicated on the drawings.
Metallic sub-frames.
Install door hardware.
Glazing (glass should be 6mm thick laminated glass for medium and heavy duty grades for fire
resisting grades the glass should be 6mm Georgian wired clear glass).
1.02
A.
B.
Related Work
Section 06200 : Finish Carpentry.
Section 08700 : Hardware.
1.03
Reference Standards
AWI Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute.
1.04
A.
B.
Shop Drawings And Product Data
Submit shop drawings and product data.
Indicate general construction, jointing methods and hardware locations.
1.05
A.
B.
Guarantee/Warranty
Provide written guarantee in accordance with "Conditions of Contract".
Guarantee: Provide for replacing (including cost of rechanging and refinishing), at no cost to
Owner, wood doors, frames and architraves exhibiting defects in materials or workmanship
including warp and delamination within minimum period of 5 years from date of substantial
completion of the work. Solid core doors guarantee: extended to life of installation and include
cost of rechanging and refinishing.
All guarantees/warranties to be issued by the Supplier, Manufacturers and Sub-Contractors
shall be countersigned by the Main Contractor and both of them will be liable for repair/replace
the items/works, etc., during the warrantee/guarantee period.
C.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Supervising Project Manager\Owner's Representative the
names of three manufacturers and their products which will be acceptable under this Section.
Approval of the manufacturer or product must be obtained before proceeding with associated
work.
2.02
Door Type
Flush faced, rebated type wood doors of semisolid wood ,veneer, plywood master board, high
density chipboard, stabilizer. Thicknesses and finishes are as per doors schedule of finishings,
details, and wood work general notes.
2.03
Doors
Wood doors shall be purpose made to the profiles and sizes shown on the drawings and
obtained from an approved manufacturer.
08210- 1
Wood Door and Frames
2.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
PART 3
3.01
Fabrication
Fabricate doors, frames and subframes in accordance with requirements of AWI Quality
Standards.
Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories (UL).
Provide doors with minimum 25 mm thick edge strips, of wood species to match face veneers.
Make cut-outs and provide stops for glass.
Bevel strike edge of single acting doors 3 mm in 5 mm.
Prepare doors to receive hardware. Refer to Section 08700 for hardware requirements.
EXECUTION
Installation
Install wood doors, frames plumb and square, and with maximum diagonal distortion of 1.6
mm. Install hardware in accordance with requirements of Section 08700.
END OF SECTION
08210- 2
Wood Door and Frames
SECTION 08305
ACCESS DOORS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
Section Includes
Fire rated and non-rated access door and frame units.
Wall and ceiling locations.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Related Sections
Section 03300:
Cast-in-place concrete
Section 05500:
Miscellaneous Metals.
Section 09310:
Ceramic Tiles.
Section 09900:
Painting.
Section 15910:
Ductwork Accessories: Access doors in ductwork.
Electrical components requiring access.
1.2
References
UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
1.3
Submittals For Review
A.
B.
C.
1.4
A.
B.
PART 2
Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of
adjoining work.
Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of all access door units.
Samples: Submit two samples of access units, (600 x600 mm) in size illustrating frame
configuration, anchors and all accessories.
Regulatory Requirements
Conform to UL REQUIREMENTS code for fire rated access doors.
Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of fire
rated doors.
PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Manufacturers
the contractor shall submit to Project Manager review and approval the names of
three manufacturers and their products which will be acceptable under this section. The
approval of the manufacturer and products must be obtained before proceeding with
associated work..
B.
Section 01630 - substitutions of same functions are acceptable in accordance with this section
2.2
A.
B.
2.3
Fabrication - Wall And Ceiling Units
Fabricate louvered wooden openings comprising 50x35mm pine wood edging 50x30mm soft
wood stile.
Hardware:
1.
Hinge: 175 degree stainless steel piano hinge with removable pin concealed constant
force closure spring type.
2.
Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam lock Cylinder lock with touch latch, chrome
finish two keys for each unit .
Finishes
Finish: as approved by the Project Manager.
08305 - 1
Access Doors
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
Examination
Verification of existing conditions before starting work.
Verify that rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
Installation
Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Install frames plumb and level in opening. Secure rigidly in place.
Position unit to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access.
END OF SECTION
08305 - 2
Access Doors
SECTION 08520
ALUMINUM WINDOWS AND DOORS
PART 1
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
GENERAL
Work Included
Thermal broke extruded aluminum windows, doors, screens & curtain walls complete with
glass and glazing hardware, and fly-screens of aluminum woven mesh in aluminum frame of
same material and color as windows.
Install perimeter sealant.
Install hardware as indicated.
All Aluminum windows, doors, screens & curtain walls shall be powder coated heavy duty of
not less than (50) micron, of color as selected by the Project Manager.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
Related Work
Section 07900:
Section 08800:
Section 08700:
1.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
Reference Standards
ANSIO A134.1
Specifications for Aluminum Windows.
ASTM A36
Structural Steel.
ASTM B209
Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
ASTM B221
Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes.
1.04
A.
B.
Shop Drawings and Product Data
Submit shop drawings and product data.
Indicate pertinent dimensioning, general construction, component connections
and locations, anchorage methods and locations, hardware locations, installation
details.
1.05
Delivery Of Materials
Deliver windows in Manufacturer's packaging complete with installation instructions.
1.06
A.
Samples
full size sample of window corner construction, including opening section, indicating profile,
size and jointing method. Also submit sample of each type of operable hardware, indicated
style and finish.
Submit color samples for color selection, powder coated finish for the Project Manager's
approval.
B.
1.07
A.
B.
C.
PART 2
Joint Sealant.
Glazing.
Supply of finish hardware, other than specified in this Section.
Guarantee/Warranty
Attention is directed to the provisions of the conditions of contract regarding
guarantees/warranties.
Provide written Guarantee in the name of the Employer in accordance with the Conditions of
Contact, covering all materials and workmanship used in the installation of the aluminum
windows, for a period of ten (10) years from the date of final acceptance of this Project.
Manufacturer's shall provide their standard Guarantee for the work under this section.
However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which the
Manufacturer and contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract
Documents.
PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager's the names of three
manufacturers and their products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the
manufacturer or product must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
08520 - 1
Aluminum Windows And Doors
2.02
A.
B.
2.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Windows and Doors
Type: Thermal Braked extruded aluminum; ASTM B221 alloy, with fixed lights and weatherstripping.
Finish: Factory apply powder coating to exposed surfaces of color as selected by the Project
Manager's.
Components And Materials
Frames Sections will be designed to suit the installation with due allowance for wind loads,
heights and location, of minimum 2.50mm thick extruded aluminum.
Operable Frames sized and profiled to suit frames, complete with Manufacturer's standard type
glass stops of size and profile to suit.
Glass Stops
Manufacturer's standard
(fixed lights)screw-applied type, of size and profile to suit frames.
Tempered single or double glazed as indicated on detailed drawings and approved on shop
drawings.
Glazing Materials Manufacturer's standard type, to suit locations and applications.
Bituminous Paint Acid and alkali resistant type, color as approved.
Fabrication
Fabricate window units in conformance with ANSI A134.1.
Fabricate aluminum windows to allow for adequate clearances and shim spacing around
perimeter of assemblies to enable proper installation. Allow for thermal movement within
window construction.
Provide expansion joints where required.
Provide sufficient corrosion resistant anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fit windows in
place.
Accurately and rigidly fit together joints and corners. Match components carefully ensuring
continuity of line and design. Ensure joints and connections are flush, hair line and
weatherproof.
Provide internal reinforcing, with steel members; ASTM A36 galvanized where required to
maintain rigidity.
Provide for moisture entering joints, and condensation occurring within frame construction to
drain to exterior.
Apply coat of bituminous paint on concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with cementitious or
dissimilar materials.
EXECUTION
Installation
Install aluminum windows in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations, to achieve
weather tight installations. Ensure assemblies are plumb, level and free of warp or twist.
Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
Install sufficient corrosion resistant anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fasten windows to
building, without causing detrimental effects to shape or performance.
Set window sills level and uniform. Accurately and rigidly fit together joints. Ensure joints are
flush, hairline and weatherproof.
Place batt insulation in shim spaces around perimeter to maintain continuity of thermal barrier.
Install sealant and related backing materials around perimeter of windows in accordance with
workmanship and installation requirements indicated in Section 07900.
END OF SECTION
08520 - 2
Aluminum Windows And Doors
SECTION 08700
HARDWARE
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
Work Included
Hardware for interior and exterior doors, windows and other items shall be first quality, imported
type.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Related Work
Section 06200:
Section 08110:
Section 08210:
Section 08305:
Section 08520:
1.03
A.
B.
Reference Standards
ANSI A115.1
- Door and Frame Preparation for Mortise Door Locks for 45mm Doors.
ANSI A115.2
- Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or Cylindrical Locks for 45mm
Doors.
ANSI A115.5
- Frame Preparation for 181 & 190 Series Deadlock Strikes.
ANSI A115.7
- Door and Frame Preparation for Floor Closers, or Double Acting.
ANSI A115.8
- Door and Frame Preparation for Floor Closer, Single or Double Acting.
ANSI A156.1
- Butts and Hinges.
ANSI A156.2
- Locks and Lock Trim.
ANSI A156.3
- Exit Devices.
ANSI A156.4
- Door Controls (Closers).
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Finish Carpentry.
Steel Doors.
Wood Doors and Frames.
Access Doors.
Aluminum Windows.
1.04
A.
B.
Samples
Submit samples of each type of hardware required for job.
Indicate style and finish.
1.05
Shop Drawings And Product Data
Submit shop drawings and product data.
1.06
A.
Hardware Schedule
Upon award of the contract the successful Contractor shall submit a hardware schedule for
approval by the Project Manager. Items shall be identified by:
- Manufacturer - Catalogue Number - Size
- Fastening - Finish
Handing of door and window opening shall be as Hardware Schedule.
B.
1.07
A.
B.
Keying
Door locks Master: submit schedule for the Project Manager approval.
Supply 3 keys for each lock.
1.08
Operation and Maintenance Data
Provide the Project Manager with manufacturer's parts list and maintenance instructions for
each type of hardware supplied and necessary wrenches and tools required for proper
maintenance of hardware.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
Hardware
Provide items in accordance with hardware schedule prepared by hardware supplier, complete
to function as intended.
2.02
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and
their products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or
product must be obtained before with associated work.
Substitutions: Items of same function and performance are acceptable
B.
.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
Installation
Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using proper templates.
08700 - 1
Hardware
END OF SECTION
08700 - 2
Hardware
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
Work Included
Glass and glazing for windows and doors.
Mirror for washrooms.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
Related Work
Section 08110 :
Section 08210 :
Section 08520 :
1.03
A.
Reference Standards
FS DD-G-451C
- Glass, Plate, Sheet, Figured (Flat, for Glazing, Mirrors and Other
Uses).
FS TT-S-230A
- Sealing Compound, Synthetic Rubber Base, Single Component,
Chemical Curing For Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Building
Construction.
FS TT-S-001543 - Sealing Compound, Silicon Base (For Caulking and Glazing in
Buildings and Other Structures).
B.
C.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
PART 2
2.01
Steel Doors.
Wood Doors.
Aluminum Windows and Doors.
Guarantee/Warranty
Provide written guarantee in accordance with Conditions of Contract, in the name of the Owner.
Provide Ten (10) years warranty to include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure,
interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same.
Provide Ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for delamination of reflective glass and
replacement of same.
PRODUCTS
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and
their products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or
product must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
2.02
A.
Specifications
All single glazed units, other than those specified to be glazed with tempered glass, shall be
glazed with 6mm clear float glass.
B.
Mirrors: float glass recommended for high humidity use sheet glass with silvered backs; arrised
edges; minimum 6 mm thick.
C. Glass for wood and steel doors: 6mm thick laminated safety glass for medium and heavy-duty
grades.
D.
Leaded glass, X-Ray resistant and clear vision internal double glazing.
E.
Patch fittings for security glass should be stainless steel of approved manufactured.
F.
Mechanical Connections must be provided, designed to integrate the wall assembly. These
must be manufactured from materials wholly compatible with glass and able to cope with and
distribute the constant stress applied.
08800 - 1
Glazing
2.03
A.
B.
C.
Glazing Compounds
Glazing Compound: color to match aluminium framing sections.
Silicon compound for all joints of glass walls. FEB SEAL SILLICON HM or approved equal.
Sealants.
2.04
A.
Glazing Accessories
Setting Blocks: Neoprene; 80-90 Shore A durometer hardness; 9.5 mm long x width of glazing
rabbet space minus 1.5mm x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.
Spacer Shims: Neoprene; 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness; 76 mm long x one half the
height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application.
Glazing Splines: Manufacturer's standard dry glazing splines to suit aluminum extrusions.
Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl type; NAMM #SS-1B-68, with integral spacing devices;
Manufacturer's Standard size and color; 10-15 shore A durometer hardness.
B.
C.
D.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.03
A.
B.
EXECUTION
Exterior Dry Method (Preformed Glazing Channel)
Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
Cut glazing spline to proper length and install on glass pane. Weld joints by butting channel
and dabbing with sealant.
Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 150mm from corners.
Rest glass on setting blocks, and push against stop with sufficient pressure to ensure full
contact and adhesion at perimeter.
Install removable stops, avoid displacement of glazing Spline, exert pressure for full continuous
contact.
Interior Dry Method (Tape and Tape)
Cut glazing tape to length and install against permanent stop, projecting 1.6 mm above sight
line.
Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 150mm from corners.
Rest glass on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit.
Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glass in same manner described above.
Install removable stop, avoid displacement of tape, exert pressure on tape for full continuous
contact.
Knife trim excess or protruding tape.
Glass walls are a specialist item. Installation must be carried out by trained experts in
accordance with approved procedures. The walls must be supplied and installed under one
contract accompanied by a ten year warranty for both material and installation.
Cleaning
After installation mark glass with X by using tape or removable paste.
Immediately remove droppings from finished surfaces. Remove labels after work is completed.
END OF SECTION
08800 - 2
Glazing
SECTION 09220
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
Work Included
Three coat cement plaster with wood float trowel led finish coat.
Two coat cement plaster with rough finish coat to receive wall tiles.
1.02
A.
B.
Related Work
Section 03300: Cast-in-place concrete.
Section 04220: Concrete Masonry Unit .
1.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Reference Standards
ASTM C150 - "Portland Cement".
ASTM C144 - "Sand for Cement Plaster Work".
ASTM C6 - "Normal Finishing Hydrated Lime".
ASTM C206 - "Special Finishing Hydrated Lime".
ASTM C35 - "Inorganic Aggregates for Use In Gypsum Plaster".
UL - "Underwriters' Laboratories Incorporated".
ASTM C631 - "Bonding Compounds for Interior Plastering".
1.04
A.
Sample Panel
Construct 2000 mm wide x 2000 mm high sample panel with finished surface, using materials
and methods specified herein, for review by the Project Manager.
Accepted surface finish of sample establishes minimum standard of quality and workmanship
of cement plaster work on job.
B.
1.05
PART 2
2.01
Environmental Conditions
Provide sufficient heat and ventilation in areas where work of this Section is being performed,
so as to allow cement plaster to properly cure. Take precautionary measures necessary to
ensure that excessive temperature changes do not occur.
PRODUCTS
Materials Generally
A.
The cement and water used for plastering shall be as before
described in Section -Concrete Work and in Section – Block work.
White (Non-stain) cement for tinted plaster shall conform to the requirements of the Standard
Specification for Masonry Cement of the ASTM Designation (C-91) latest edition.
Lime shall be imported and of the hydrated type complying with Class B of BS 890.
Marble chipping shall be irregular in size and roughly cubical in shape. Samples shall be
submitted to the Supervisor for approval. Sizes shall be as required by the Supervisor and as
selected from the following table:
B.S.
Sieve
¾
7
14
25
52
100
Sizes
Approximate mm
Inches
13.00
10.00
5.00
2.40
1.20
0.60
0.30
0.15
1/2
3/8
3/16
0.095
0.047
0.024
0.012
0.006
Percentage Passing
By Weight
95
25
5
0
¾
-
100
60
30
10
Any pigments or coloring materials incorporated in mortar shall comply with B.S. 1014:1961.
Waterproof additives shall be to the approval of the Supervisor. The materials shall be
delivered in containers bearing the name of the manufacturer and the instructions for use.
09220-1
Portland Cement Plaster
2.02
Metal Accessories
A.
Angle Beads, Corner Mesh and Plaster stops: Minimum 0.50mm
thick steel with rust inhibitive coating of longest possible lengths; sized and
profiled to suit application. Angle beads to have bull nosed edges.
B.
Metal lath for use in plaster shall be plain expanded metal type
complying to B.S. 1369, weighing not less than 1 kg/sq.m All metal lathing
shall be zinc coated. Zinc coated chicken wire mesh can also be used with
dia less than (15 mm) and (20 cm) wide.
Metal lath shall be secured to the carcass and block work by means of galvanized steel nails. If
the wire for securing metal lath is to be used it shall be of zinc coated wire not less than 1.2 mm
in diameter.
C.
Expansion Joints: Back to back plaster stops of longest possible
lengths.
D.
Anchorage’s: Nails, staples, or other metal supports, of type and
size to suit application and to rigidly secure metal accessories in place
2.03
Application of Coats
A.
Base-Coat (Rendering)
After the application of the spatterdash “Rasheh” the base coat shall be applied after the
spatterdash coat has set but in no case earlier than 4 days after the application of the
spatterdash coat. Spatterdash coat shall be kept wet moist for 3 days.
When applied to masonry or to concrete surfaces the base coat shall be applied with sufficient
force to prevent air pockets and to secure a good bond.
The base coat shall be lightly scratched in both directions to provide a key for the finishing coat
and shall be kept moist with a fog spray for 3 days and then allowed to dry out. Thickness shall
be between (10-12 mm).
B.
Finishing Coat
Shall not be applied until the rendering or base coat has seasoned for seven days just before
the application of the finish coat, the rendering or base coat shall be wetted evenly with a fog
spray, where cement plaster with a smooth trowelled finish is specified or indicated on the
drawings, the finish coat shall be first floated to a true even surface, then trowelled in a manner
that will force the sand particles down into the plaster and with the final trowelling, leave the
surface finished smooth and free from rough areas, trowel marks, checks or other blemishes.
2.04
A.
Cement Plaster Mixes
Mix and proportion cement plaster as follows: (by volume).
1.
Spatterdash (Rasheh) coat: 1 part ordinary Portland cement 2 parts salt free sand.
2.
Base-coat (Rendering): 1 part ordinary Portland cement 4 parts salt free sand.
3.
Finishing coat: 1 part ordinary Portland cement 4 parts fine sand.
Plastering shall be applied in two (2) coats in addition to the spatterdash coat unless otherwise
specified or indicated on the drawings.
Finishing coat shall have a reasonably uniform thickness of approximately 3-5mm.
Screed shall be laid and rules as necessary to allow for a total thickness of 15 mm for external
and internal plaster and the rendering shall be applied to the required thickness.
Mix only as much plaster as can be used in one hour.
Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water.
Add color pigments in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure uniformity of
mix and coloration.
Protect mixes from frost, dust and evaporation.
Do not retemper mixes after initial set has occurred.
Where hydrated lime is accepted and approved by the Project Manager, the volume of lime
must not exceed 0.5 that of cement volume for the base course, and 1.0 that of cement volume
for the second and third coats.
For two coats plaster use items 1 and 2 of "A" above.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
09220-2
Portland Cement Plaster
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
EXECUTION
Preparation
Prior to application ensure mechanical and electrical services behind surfaces to receive
cement plaster have been tested and approved.
Clean concrete and concrete block surfaces of dust, laitance,
efflorescence, loose particles, grease or other foreign matter. Thoroughly wet
surfaces before using acid solutions, solvents or detergents to perform cleaning.
Thoroughly wash surfaces with clean water immediately following their use. Ensure
mortar joints are flush.
Roughen smooth concrete surfaces so as to allow adequate adhesion. Use method
acceptable to the Project Manager.
Apply a bonding agent on concrete and concrete block surfaces which are to receive cement
plaster. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, ensuring complete
coverage.
Ensure metal lath has been properly installed and rigidly secured.
Wet Concrete and Concrete block surfaces to reduce excessive suction.
Place metal accessories true to lines and levels.
Plastering
Apply cement plaster using two coat system and three coat system respectively.
Evenly dampen each coat, to ensure uniform suction, and apply the following coat. Apply to
thickness sufficient to secure required texture but in no case less than 3 mm. Apply finish coat
subject to requirements.
Maintain surface flatness, with maximum variation of 3.2mm in 3.000 m.
Provide surfaces receiving paint with a steel trowel finish, to match approved sample pane.
Avoid excessive working of surface. Delay trowelling as long as possible to avoid drawing
excess fines to surface.
3.03
Fire Rated Assemblies
Perform cement plaster work for fire rated assemblies in accordance with drawings and as
recommended by Underwriter's Laboratories.
PART 4
WATERPROOFING PLASTER TO ALL EXTERNAL WALLS
Mixing of plaster ingredients and preparation of surfaces to be plastered with waterproofing
plaster shall be as specified above.
Rendering coat shall contain 450 Kg of ordinary Portland Cement per cubic meter of clean
coarse salt free sand and with admixture of waterproofing compound as specified added in
accordance with the printed instructions of the manufacture, shall be applied and the surfaces
shall be trowelled hard smooth and allowed to dry. All surfaces of plastered areas shall be
cured for minimum of 7 days. Proportions of mix is 1:2 for all coats.
PART 5
TYROLEAN PLASTER (FINE GRAIN)
5.01
General
The tyrolean plaster shall be executed to the extent shown on the Drawings and as directed by
the Supervisor.
The Contractor shall provide sample (s) of Tyrolean plaster for the approval of the Supervisor
prior to commencement of Tyrolean work.
5.02
Mixing
Cement and aggregate for each batch shall be accurately measured and mixed dry until evenly
distributed and the mass is uniform in color. All batches shall be of such size that they can be
entirely used within half an hour. Mechanical mixers of an approved type shall be used for
mixing tyreolean plaster, except when hand mixing of small batches is specifically approved by
the Supervisor. Mechanical mixers, mixing boxes and tools shall be cleaned after mixing each
batch and kept free of tyrolean mortar from previous mixes. Water content shall be maintained
at a minimum. Mixing shall be continued until plasticity be maintained at a minimum. Mixing
shall be continued until plasticity is obtained.
09220-3
Portland Cement Plaster
5.03
Proportions
Proportions of materials for tyrolean, by volume shall be as follows: A.
Scratch Coat
1 part Ordinary Portland Cement
3 parts fine aggregate
B.
Finish Coat
1 part of white Portland Cement
3 parts fine selected aggregate (made of fine grinded lime stone)
No lime shall be allowed in either scratch or finishing coat, scratch coat shall be set on
spatterdash.
C.
Application of Tyrolean
1.
Workmanship
Surfaces to receive tyrolean shall be clean, free from dust, dirt, oil, or other particles that
might interfere with a satisfactory bond. Surfaces to receive tyrolean shall be evenly
dampened (not soaked) with a fog spray before tyrolean is applied. If surfaces become
dry in spots, the dry areas shall be dampened again to restore uniform suction. Tyrolean
Coats shall be applied continuously in one general direction without allowing mortar to dry
at edges. Edges to be joined shall be dampened slightly to produce a smooth
confluence. Tyrolean unless otherwise shown or specified shall be two coats work not
less than 20 mm thick (i.e. spatterdash, scratch coat and one tyrolean coat). All exterior
corners of tyrolean shall be slightly rounded. Tyrolean shall be pitched forward to form a
drip.
2.
Scratch Coat
Shall be approximately 14 mm thick and shall be applied under sufficient
pressure to form good keys and shall be brought to a plumb, true even
surface. The scratch coat shall be damp-cured 48 hours before the finish
coat is applied under sufficient pressure to form good coat is applied
under sufficient pressure to form good keys and shall be brought to a
plumb, true even surface.
3.
Finish Coat
Shall be approximately 6 mm, thick. Surfaces of the scratch coat shall be
dampened several hours before the finish coat is to be applied. Additional
dampening at time of application shall be by fog spraying. Dampening by
brush will not be permitted. When measured with a 2 meter long,
straightedge applied in all directions the finish surface shall not vary from
a true plane by more than 1.5 mm. The finishing coat shall be applied by
means of a proper spraying machine and the degree of the finishing coat
shall be determined by the Supervisor. The Contractor shall set up
samples of different degrees of fineness for the Supervisor’s approval.
The Supervisor may choose different degrees of fineness for different
parts of the works and the Contractor shall allow for this in his rates.
END OF SECTION
09220-4
Portland Cement Plaster
SECTION 09260
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
Work Included
A.
Metal Framing required for gypsum board suspended ceilings.
B.
Blocking.
C. Acoustical and sound insulation.
D. Thermal Insulation for z-furring channel installation.
E.
Gypsum Board, fire rated, sound and thermal insulating.
F.
Radiation Protection Gypsum Board.
G. Acoustical Sealant.
H. Taped and sanded joint treatment.
1.02
Related Work
Section 09900: Painting
1.03
Quality Assurance
Perform gypsum board systems work in accordance with ASTM C36.
Or any approved equal.
1.04
A.
Submittals
Submit samples of gypsum board systems and exposed joint covers. Include a sample of each
material, texture, and colour specified.
Submit manufacturer's recommendations for installation of thermal insulation and gypsum
board.
B.
1.05
A.
B.
C.
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
C.
References
GA 216 - Recommended Specifications for installation of thermal insulation and gypsum
board.
Complies with ASTM C-36, 0-630 method C-473.
Complies with ASTM C840.
PRODUCTS
Metal Framing
Provide metal framing materials in accordance with GA 216.
Studs: 60 X 60 cm both directions.
Runners: Match studs.
2.02
Materials
A . Gypsum Boards cladding shall be 15-20 mm thick fire rated.
B. Gypsum board false ceiling shall be 12.5mm thick concealed system similar to Knauf Gypsum
Ceiling System D113.
C.
Gypsum board false ceiling in toilets and kitchenettes' areas shall be moisture
resistant type, 12.50 mm thick, and as item "A" above.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
EXECUTION
Metal Framing Erection - General
Erect metal framing in accordance with ASTM C764.
Install members true to lines and levels to provide surface flatness with maximum variation of
1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.
09260 - 1
Gypsum Board Systems
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
3.04
Ceiling Framing Installation
Coordinate location of hangers with other work.
Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns, and above ceiling work.
Space main carrying channels at maximum 600 mm on center, not more than 150 mm from
perimeter walls. Lap splices minimum 300 mm and secure together 50 mm from each end of
splice.
Place furring channels perpendicular to carrying channels at 600 mm on center not more than
150 mm from perimeter walls. Lap splices minimum 200 mm and secure together 25 mm from
each end of splice.
Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or
furring channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 600 mm past each end
of openings.
Laterally brace entire suspension system where required.
Gypsum Board Installation
Install gypsum board in accordance with recommendations of GA 216, the manufacturer's
recommendations, or both.
Erect single layer standard gypsum board in direction most practical and economical, with ends
and edges occurring over firm bearing.
Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm
bearing.
Erect exterior gypsum sheathing board horizontally, with edges butted
tight and ends occurring over firm bearing.
Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing. Use nails or screws
when fastening gypsum board to wood furring or framing. Staples may only be used when
securing the first layer of double layer applications.
Erect patterned gypsum board horizontally/vertically, complete with exposed batten fastening
system. Erect in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with
sealant.
Place control joints to be consistent with lines of building spaces and in consistent pattern and
as directed by Project Manager.
Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical lengths. Place edge trim where
gypsum board abutts dissimilar materials.
Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, corners, openings and fixings, to produce surface
ready to receive surface finishes.
Remove and re-do defective work.
Warranty/Guarantee
All warranties/guarantees to be issued by the Supplier, Manufacturers and Sub-Contractors
shall be counter- signed by Main Contractor and both of them will be liable for repair/replace
the items/works, etc., during the warrantee/guarantee period.
END OF SECTION
09260 - 2
Gypsum Board Systems
SECTION 09310
CERAMIC TILES
PART 1
A.
B.
C.
D.
GENERAL
1.01
Work Included
Ceramic tiles flooring and skirting, installed using approved adhesive material with epoxy
grouted joints.
Ceramic tiled walls, installed using adhesive, with epoxy grouted joints.
Approved Adhesive Material.
Fixing of ceramic washroom accessories as supplied under Sanitary Ware.
1.02
Related Work
Section 03251 - Expansion and Contraction Joints.
1.03
A.
Reference Standards
ANSI A108.5 - Ceramic Tile installed in the Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar on Latex-Portland
Cement Mortar.
ANSI A118.4 - Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
ANSI A136.1 - Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile.
ANSI A42.4 - Interior Latching & Furring.
Tile Council - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. of America
TCA137.1 - Recommended Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.04
Samples
Submit a 1000mm X 1000mm sample of ceramic wall and floor tile installation, clearly
indicating pattern, coloration and grouted joints.
1.05
Environmental Conditions
Provide sufficient heat and ventilation in areas where work of this section is being performed; so
as to allow ceramic tile to properly set. Take all precautionary measures necessary to ensure
that excessive temperature changes do not occur.
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
PRODUCTS
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the name of three manufacturers and their
Products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the Manufacturer or the
Product must be obtained before proceeding the associated work.
Type:
1)
Type and sizes of tiles shall be as indicated in the BOQs and drawings.
Materials and Components For Floors
Ceramic Floor Tile: Square edges, of approved thickness; smooth surface; unglazed, color
selected by Project Manager.
Setting Bed: Adhesive as approved by the Project Manager and instructed by the manufacturer.
Grout: epoxy type; color selected by the Project Manager; uniform in color and resistant to
shrinking (preparation, mixing and placing should be as instructed by the manufacturer).
Water: Clean, fresh and free of deleterious substances.
09310 - 1
Ceramic Tiles
2.03
A.
B.
C.
PART 3
Materials And Components For Walls
Ceramic Wall Tile: cushioned edges; glazed surfaces, color selected by Project Manager.
Scratch Coat and Mortar Bed: Adhesive material as instructed by the manufacturer.
Grout: epoxy type; color selected by the Project Manager; uniform in color and resistant to
shrinking.
EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
C.
Installation
Prior to installing floor tile, ensure surfaces are level, with maximum surface variation of 6mm in
3.00 meters, and are steel trawled. Ensure surfaces slope to drains.
Prior to installing wall tile, ensure surfaces are level, with maximum surface
variation of 3 mm in 3.00 meters.
Ceramic tiles shall be thoroughly soaked in water for a minimum of twenty four
hours (24), before laying, and all surplus water drained off before bedding.
D.
Rough cement and sand plastering in tow coats shall be laid as base for wall tiling.
Plaster shall be in accordance with Section 09220; PORTLAND CEMENT
PLASTER.
E.
Ensure surfaces are clean and well cured.
F.
Do not commence until surface conditions are within tolerances required for proper
installation.
G.
Neatly cut tile around fixtures and drains. Accurately form corners, base,
intersections and returns.
H.
Ensure tile joints are uniform in width, subject to normal variance in tolerance
allowed in tile size. Ensure joints are watertight, without voids, cracks, excess
mortar or grout.
I.
Form internal wall angles square and external angles rounded.
J.
Sound tile after setting. Remove and replace hollow sounding units.
K.
Keep expansion/contraction control joints free of mortar or grout.
L.
Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.
M. Completed installation to be free of broken, damaged or faulty tile.
END OF SECTION
09310 - 2
Ceramic Tiles
SECTION 09410
PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO
PART 1
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
GENERAL
Work Included
Preparation of concrete substrate.
Terrazzo floor, color as selected by the Project Manager.
Skirting 70 mm X 20mm thick.
Curing, grinding and sealing.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
Reference Standards
BS 882 - Aggregate from natural sources for concrete.
BS 12 - Ordinary Portland Cement
BS 5075 - Concrete Admixtures, Air Entraining for concrete
National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc. (NTMA), Publication:
Terrazzo Design Data Book (1972).
1.03
A.
B.
Product Data & Samples
Product data and samples shall be in accordance with Section 01340.
Prior to delivery of the materials to the site, the following samples shall be submitted for
approval to the Project Manager:
Terrazzo - Two sample panels of each type finish including abrasive, if required, or color
combination. Minimum dimension of tile shall be 200mm thick.
Copies of Manufacturer's Specifications and installation instructions for each type of precast
terrazzo and material shall be submitted to the Project Manager.
C.
1.04
A.
B.
Shop Drawings
Shop drawings shall be in accordance with Section 01340.
Shop drawings showing location, extent, size, shape, and jointing of each type of precast
terrazzo item required. Details of anchorage and other special features required shall be
included.
1.05
Delivery, Storage & Handling
Manufacturer's packaged materials shall be delivered and stored in their original containers
with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Materials shall be protected against the
inclusion of foreign matter and/or water and other damage.
1.06
A.
Environmental Conditions
The substrate and the conditions under which the terrazzo is to be installed shall be carefully
examined. The Contractor shall submit notification to the Project Manager of any unsatisfactory
conditions, which will affect the terrazzo installations. Work shall not proceed until such
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and the surfaces are acceptable.
The ambient surroundings and temperature of cementitious mixtures shall be not less than 10
degrees C. from the time the setting beds are placed until completely cured.
B.
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
PRODUCTS
Materials
Shall conform to the respective specifications and other requirements specified below:
Portland cement: BS 12 Cement shall be obtained from a single source for all work of one
color.
Non-staining white or gray shall be provided as required for terrazzo matrix.
Sand: BS 882, for fine aggregate.
Water shall be clean, free of oil, soluble salts, or other deleterious substances.
Aggregate shall be natural, sound, crushed marble chips without excessive flats or flakes.
Colors and gradation of sizes shall be as required to match approved samples.
Matrix pigments shall be pure mineral or synthetic pigments, resistant to alkalies and nonfading.
Pigments shall be mixed with cement, by weight, to provide colors as required to match
approved samples.
Cleaner shall be liquid, neutral chemical cleaner, formulated for Portland cement
terrazzo, as recommended by the Manufacturer of the sealer.
09410-1
Portland Cement Terrazzo
2.01
G.
H.
I.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Materials (cont’d)
Interior floor sealer shall be colorless, non-slip, stain-resistant penetrating sealer which will not
disturb the color or physical properties of the terrazzo surface.
Exterior sealer shall be a colorless, non-yellowing, penetrating, synthetic resin sealer for
terrazzo.
Air-entraining admixture: BS 5075.
Precasting
NTMA specifications and recommendations for fabrication of precast terrazzo shall be
complied with.
Units shall be cast accurately to size and profile indicated on approved shop drawings.
Type of Portland cement, amount of pigment, if any, and percentages of aggregate shall be in
accordance with approved NTMA color plates.
Exposed edges of precast items shall have 3.2 mm radius unless otherwise indicated.
Tiles are formed of two layers, the wearing (facing) layer and the back layer. The net thickness
of the tiles after polishing shall be as follows:Dimensions
(cm)
20 X 20
25 X 25
30 X 30
40 X 40
F.
G.
H.
I.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Lowest Limit for the Total
Thickness (mm)
25
25
27
30
Lowest Limit of the Facing
(Wearing) Layer (mm)
8
8
12
12
Abrasive aggregate, approximately 15 percent by volume, shall be provided in both the topping
mix aggregate and the aggregate seeded during installation in the non-slip areas shown on the
drawings.
All precast members shall be moist-cured in compliance with NTMA specifications.
Cured terrazzo topping shall be grouted and ground in accordance with NTMA specifications.
Finishing shall be by fine grinding with abrasive grit of the size specified by NTMA, or as
otherwise required to match approved samples.
Terrazzo surfaces to receive rustic finish shall be washed to remove
approximately 1.5mm of uncured matrix, without disturbing the aggregate.
Curing shall be as specified by NTMA. The terrazzo surface shall be saturated
with water and cleaned with a 20 percent solution of muriatic acid (9 parts
water to 1 part commercial acid) then rinsed thoroughly with clean water to
remove and neutralize the acid wash. The terrazzo surface shall match the
approved samples for depth of etch into matrix.
EXECUTION
Installation
Preparation of substrate, proportioning setting bed, and placing, grouting, and finishing shall be
in accordance with NTMA specifications and recommendations unless otherwise shown or
specified.
Setting bed mortar shall be one part Portland cement and three to four parts clean sharp sand.
Only enough water to produce a workable mix shall be added.
Terrazzo installation shall be completed before the application of other items, which might be
damaged by this work.
Marble Bases shall be installed after placing floor tile or other terrazzo floor toppings. Base
shall be set accurately to wall and floor finish lines.
Floor tile shall be laid out to avoid pieces less than one half-tile size.
Field cutting of precast terrazzo, where required, shall be with high-speed diamond or other
abrasive saws.
Joints shall be aligned in floor tile at right angles to each other and straight with walls.
All tiles shall be applied with straight joints each way unless otherwise indicated.
Precast terrazzo shall be installed as shown and in accordance with NTMA
specifications. Units shall be tamped into setting bed to achieve a full bond
without voids, and leveled at joints. Units shall be finish ground at joints if
required to remove any minor discrepancies in level of units. Warped, stained,
damaged, and non-matching units shall be replaced as directed. Joints shall
be grouted, except those shown to receive sealant, with a mixture of Portland
cement, pigment, and water matching the matrix of the units.
09410-2
Portland Cement Terrazzo
3.02
A.
B.
3.03
A.
B.
3.04
Cleaning and Sealing
Terrazzo shall be cleaned after all installation and finishing operations are completed in
accordance with the instructions of the terrazzo sealer Manufacturer.
Sealer shall be applied to cleaned terrazzo surfaces in accordance with Manufacturer's
Instructions. The maximum number of coats of sealer recommended by the Manufacturer shall
be applied.
Final Cleaning and Protection
Terrazzo shall be cleaned as recommended by the Manufacturer of the sealer, and machine
buff if required when buildings are ready for occupancy.
Protection shall be provided for finished terrazzo work until buildings are ready for occupancy.
Testing
A. The Contractor shall test terrazzo tiles whenever so requested by the Supervisor for the
following items:
1. Water absorption to be
8% (BS4131)
2. Transverse strength to be
3Mpa (BS4131)
3.
Wear resistance to be
2mm (DIN52108)
END OF SECTION
09410-3
Portland Cement Terrazzo
SECTION 09510
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
Work Included
Fire rated suspended metal grid system complete with wall and bulkhead trim.
Lay-in ceiling tiles.
Hangers and Inserts.
Cut-out for ceiling appurtenance and/or access panels.
1.02
A.
B.
Related Work
Section Lighting fixtures within ceiling system.
Section Air Diffusers within ceiling system.
1.03
A.
Shop Drawings
Submit shop drawings of acoustical ceilings in accordance with the Project Manager’s
instructions.
Clearly indicate grid layout and all related dimensioning, junctions with other work or ceiling
finishes, inter- relation of mechanical and electrical items related to system.
B.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
Environmental Conditions
Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust
generating activities have terminated and overhead mechanical work is completed, tested and
approved.
Permit wet work to dry prior to commencement of installation.
Maintain uniform temperatures of minimum 16 degrees C. and humidity of 20% to 40% prior to,
during and after installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and
their products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or
product must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
Substitutions: Items of same function and performance are acceptable in conformance with
the Project Manager’s instructions.
2.02
Suspension System
Type and Manufacture: Heavy duty system as instructed by the manufacturer and approved by
the Project Manager.
2.03
Lay-In Panels
Acoustic ANTI PACTERIAL Tiles: (Mineral Fiber Tiles) (600x600)mm
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
Installation
Install acoustical ceiling systems in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to
produce finished ceiling true to lines and levels and free from warped, soiled or damaged grid
or lay-in panels.
Install fire rated ceiling systems in accordance with UL requirements.
Install ceiling systems in a manner capable of supporting all superimposed loads, with
maximum permissible deflection of 1/360 of span and maximum surface deviation of 1/960.
Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other
work. Ensure the layout of hangers and carrying channels are located to accommodate fittings
and units of equipment which are to be placed after the installation of ceiling grid systems.
09510 - 1
Acoustical Ceilings
E.
Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of
hangers, reinforce the nearest adjacent hangers and related carrying channels as
required to span the required distance.
3.01
Installation (cont’d)
F.
Supply hangers or inserts for installation to the respective section in
ample time and with clear instructions for their correct placement. Provide
additional hangers and inserts as required.
G.
Hang independently of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit.
Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of the
longitudinal axis or face plane of adjacent members.
H.
Center ceiling systems on room axis leaving equal border pieces.
I.
Do not support fixtures from or on main runners or cross runners if weight of the fixture causes
the total dead load to exceed the deflection capability. In such cases, support fixture loads by
supplementary hangers located within 150 mm of each corner, or support the fixtures
independently.
J.
Do not install fixtures so that main runners and cross runners will be eccentrically loaded.
Where fixture installation would produce rotation of runners, provide stabilizer bars.
K.
Install edge moldings at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using maximum lengths,
straight, true to line and level. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other
ceiling finishes. Where bullnose concrete block corners occur, provide preformed closers to
match edge molding.
L.
Install lay-in panels level, in uniform plane and free from twist, warp and dents.
M. Install hold-down clips on all lay-in panels to hold such panels tight to grid system where within
6.0 m of exterior doors.
3.02
Adjustments
Adjust any sags or twists, which develop in the ceiling systems and replace any part which is
damaged or defective.
END OF SECTION
09510 - 2
Acoustical Ceilings
SECTION 09513
METAL TILES FALSE CEILING SYSTEM
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
Work Included
Suspended Metal Grid Ceiling Support System
Formed Metal Laid in Ceiling Tiles
Cut-out for Ceiling Appurtenance
Hangers and Inserts
1.02
Performance
Design and construct suspension system to accommodate wind and suction loads and wind
uplift.
1.03
A.
B.
References
ASTM B209 - Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate.
ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc - coated (galvanized) by the hot dip process structural
(physical) quality.
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
C.
PRODUCTS
Acceptable Manufactures
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and
their products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or
product must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
Type:
Type and Size of tiles shall be as indicated in the Bill of Quantities and instructed by
the Manufacturer.
Substitutions: Items of same function and performance are acceptable in accordance with
Section 01630.
2.02
Components
System: Preformed aluminum lay in tiles with plain surface offering sound absorption in the low
frequency range similar to Messers. (OWA or approved equal type). Complete with
galvanized steel suspension system with anchors to structure as recommended by the
manufacturer.
2.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Materials
Suspension Members: Formed steel tees, with adjustment clips, galvanized finish.
Suspension Wire: 8 mm steel wire, annealed, galvanized.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B209.
Splices: of same material, profile, and color as exposed members.
Internal and External Corners: of same material, thickness, and finish as exposed members; of
profile to suit system; shop formed to required angles. Back brace internal corners.
Recessed Closures: Formed aluminum tiles, lay in between exposed members.
Accessories: as required to complement system members, same color and finish.
Expansion Joints: of same material, thickness, and finish as exposed members.
End Caps: formed metal of same color and finish as exposed members.
F.
G.
H.
I.
2.04
Fabrication
Shop fabricate exposed components.
09513-1
Metal Tiles False Ceiling System
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
EXECUTION
Installation
Install ceiling system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Install ceiling system to support superimposed loads.
Install ceiling after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers
and carrying tees with other work.
Install hangers or inserts.
Where ducts or other requirement prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the
nearest adjacent hangers and related carrying tees to span the required distance.
Hang independently of walls, columns, ducts, pipe and conduit.
Design and layout runners and cross runners so that fixtures will not produce eccentric loads.
Install exposed members using maximum lengths.
Install recessed closures between exposed members at interior and exterior locations.
Exercise care when cutting members on site to insure surface finish is not defaced.
Install edge moldings at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces using maximum lengths.
Field miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junction with other ceiling finishes.
Provide expansion joints to accommodate plus or minus movement and maintain visual
closure.
Provide end caps for members exposed to view.
ENG OF SECTION
09513-2
Metal Tiles False Ceiling System
SECTION 09610
STONE FLOORING
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
Work Included in the Unit Rate
Stone floor finish (sizes and type as indicated in the Bill of Quantities).
Mortar bed and joint pointing.
1.02
A.
B.
Related Work
Section 04100 - Mortar
Section 07900 - Sealants.
1.03
References:
The Palestinian General Specifications
1.04
A.
B.
Submittal
General: Shop drawings - Product Data and Samples for submittal provisions and procedures.
Shop Drawings and Product Data:
1.
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with the Project Manager’s
instructions. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate expansion joints' dimensions and
locations.
2.
Indicate Pertinent dimensioning, layout, construction details, method of installation and
adjacent construction.
3.
Indicate all units of stone, their configuration and size.
4.
Submit stone supplier's installation instructions, and field erection drawings.
5.
Submit manufacturer's instructions for use of pointing colour and admixtures.
Samples
1.
Submit two sets of each type of stone, full size units as selected by the Project Manager
to the project site, in sufficient number to indicate the full range of color, texture and each
type of finish. One of each of the duplicate samples approved by the Project Manager will
be retained by him at the project site, the other being returned to the Contractor for his
guidance. Colors and types of stone - dressings are as mentioned under Part 2 Products, paragraph B, "STONE SCHEDULE".
2.
The following physical data on all proposed stone shall be submitted by the stone
supplier:
a.
Analysis of mineral composition.
b.
Analysis of chemical composition.
c.
Thermal coefficient of expansion.
d.
Absorption.
e.
Specific Gravity.
f.
Abrasion Resistance
3.
Submit samples of other materials specified herein upon request by the Project Manager.
Mock Up
1.
Furnish and install a typical stone floor application required for the project at area
designated by the Project Manager. The panel shall be constructed for Project Manager's
approval showing 1.5m x 1.5m for floor installation.
The Contractor shall also be required to install a typical stone stair application, or any
offer which in the opinion of the Project Manager is required.
2.
All work shall include setting and jointing all stone including final cleaning as specified
herein for the actual work and as required for approval. Construct as many mock-ups
until approval by the Project Manager has been obtained.
3.
The approved mock-up shall constitute the quality of work to be expected throughout the
entire project, and shall remain in place for visual inspection until no longer needed as
directed by the Project Manager. The removal and disposition of the mock-ups shall be
done by the Contractor at his expense without additional cost to the Owner.
C.
D.
1.05
A.
Guarantee/Warranty
Attention is directed to the provisions of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT regarding
guarantees/warranties for the Works.
09610-1
Stone Flooring
B.
All warranties/guarantees to be issued by the Supplier, Manufacturers and sub-contractors
shall be counter-signed by Main Contractor and both of them will be liable for repair/replace the
items/works, etc., during the warrantee/guarantee period.
1.06
A.
Qualifications
Supplier/Fabricator: A firm having an adequate supply of the specified types of stone and an
annual rated production capacity to deliver the stone to the project site on schedule within a
time limit established by the Project Manager as required to assure no delay in the progress
and completion of the Work.
Installer: A Firm with a minimum of five years successful experience in the installation of stone
pavers.
B.
1.07
Design Criteria
The method of installation of all stone pavers shown on the Drawings is diagrammatic only and
is not to be used for the purpose of bidding or construction. It shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to guarantee the structural support and the permanent watertight sealing of all stone
pavers. The installation shall be designed to allow for expansion and contraction of supporting
floors of the paved areas.
1.08
A.
Delivery, Storage & Handling
Packing and Loading: Finished stone shall be carefully packed and loaded for shipment using
all reasonable and customary precautions against damage in transit. No material which may
cause staining or discoloration shall be used for blocking or packing.
Site Storage: Upon receipt at the building site or storage yard, the stone shall be stacked on
timber or platforms at least 100 mm above the ground, and extreme care shall be taken to
prevent staining during storage. If storage is to be for a prolonged period, polyethylene or other
suitable plastic film shall be placed between any wood and finished surfaces, and shall be
used also as an overall protective covering.
Salt shall not be used for melting of ice formed on pieces, or for any purpose involving its
contact with the stone.
Defective Stone: Any piece of stone showing flaws, cracks, or imperfections such as vents,
sand and clay holes, shelly bars, shakes, mottle, seams or starts upon receipt at the storage
yard, or at the area to be paved, shall be discarded and removed from the work site, and at the
Contractor's own expense.
B.
C.
1.09
A.
B.
C.
D.
PART 2
Environmental Requirements
The following environmental requirements are applicable to stone set in mortar, and when
caulking stone joints with sealant.
During freezing or near freezing weather provide equipment and cover to maintain a minimum
of 4 degrees C and to protect stone work completed or in progress.
At end of working day, or during rainy weather, cover stone work exposed to weather with
waterproof coverings, securely anchored.
Maintain materials and surrounding air to a minimum 10 degrees C prior to, during and 48
hours after completion of work.
PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
3.
Stone Materials And Fabrication
General
1.
Stone shall be of good quality, sound, free from cracks and defects, seams or starts
which may impair its structural, integrity, durability, appearance or function colour, texture
and finish shall be within the range of samples approved by the Project Manager.
2.
All stone shall be obtained from quarries having adequate capacity and facilities to meet
the specified requirements. Cutting and finishing shall be performed by using approved
equipment to process the material promptly on order and in strict accordance with
specifications. Evidence to this effect shall be provided by the Contractor.
Stone rejected for noncompliance with the submitted samples or the
requirements of this Specification shall be replaced with material acceptable to the
Project Manager. Replacement shall be prompt and at the Contractor's own expense.
Inspection of stone by the Project Manager shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility to perform all work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
09610-2
Stone Flooring
2.01
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Stone Materials And Fabrication (cont’d)
Stone Schedule: Refer to the Drawings for locations, sizes and thicknesses of the various types
of stone specified herein. All stone work shall be carried out in accordance with the
classification of Class "Special" refer to clause 1.06, Item A/1:
Stone Type
Application/Thickness/Finish
1. First Quality (Local Type) Stone
Application:
First quality stone tiles, white and pink stone exterior stone tiling, set in mortar
and sand over reinforced concrete slabs.
Thickness:
As noted on the relevant drawings.
Finish:
As shown on relevant drawings.
2. Stone Application:
Exterior Stairs treads and risers bedded with mortar and anchored as necessary.
Thickness:
as noted on the relevant drawings.
Finish:
As shown on drawings.
All stone work to be executed in accordance with approved shop drawings.
Stone
1.
The finish of exposed to view surfaces of stone shall be as specified above. The
concealed from view surfaces of all stone types shall be sawn, hacked and/or roughened
to allow key for the mortar bed.
2.
End match the texture in the face of stone elements that abut one another to assure
continuity in surface appearance.
Stone Fabrication - General
1.
Fabrication of stone shall be in strict accordance with approved shop drawings for
fabrication, and with this specification.
2.
To the maximum extent possible, fabrication and assembly of stone shall be executed on
site to maintain the approved pattern and to compensate for field conditions.
3.
All work shall be of the highest quality, in accordance with the best trade practices, and
performed by skilled workmen. All materials and workmanship shall conform to the
highest industry standards, including the Palestinian General Specifications.
Recommended Practices for the Use of Natural Stone in Building Construction.
4.
Use no materials, equipment, or practices that may adversely affect the functioning,
appearance, or durability of the stone work or work of other trades.
Dimensions:
Cut all stone work accurately to shape and dimensions shown on the
final approved shop drawings. Exposed plane surfaces shall be true. Bed and joint surfaces
shall be dressed straight and at right angles to the faces, unless otherwise shown. Exposed
arris lines shall be sharp and true. Patching of stone will not be permitted.
Beds & Joints:
Stone beds and joints surfaces shall be cut square from the face for
the entire thickness of stones. Stone shall be bedded and jointed, including the various
expansion joints dimensions as shown on the approved drawings.
Backs of Pieces:
Backs of all pieces of stone, shall be sawn to approximately true
planes with a maximum of 1.5mm in thickness from that indicated on the approved shop
drawings.
2.02
A.
Mortar Materials And Accessories
Cement
1.
Cement for Setting Mortar: Non staining Portland Cement conforming to Palestinian
General Specifications except containing not more than 0.03% water soluble alkali.
2.
Cement for Pointing Mortar: Non staining white Portland Cement conforming to
Palestinian General Specifications.
Gray non staining cement may be used for pointing mortar if the colour of pointing mortar,
as selected by the Project Manager, does not require White Portland Cement.
3.
The specified cement shall fulfill further requirement that it shall exhibit no efflorescence
B.
C.
Water:
Shall be potable, clean and fresh from Public Water System.
Sand:
Well graded non staining masonry sand conforming to Palestinian General
Specifications. Use white Silica sand for pointing mortar. No other sand shall be permitted for
mortar or grout unless otherwise tested and approved by the Project Manager.
Approved brand of plastic hydrated, conforming to Palestinian General
Lime:
Specifications.
Integral Water-proofing: As manufactured by "FEB Master Builders or approved equal..
integral Colour:
As "FEB Master Builders" or approved equal.
Grout for Stone Pavers: Premixed commercial expanding agent as manufactured by FEB
Master Builders or approved equal.
when cast into the form of 51mm X 179mm X 13mm slabs comprising the cement under test.
D.
E.
F.
G.
09610-3
Stone Flooring
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
EXECUTION
Conditions At Site
The Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with the stone installation, examine all surfaces and
parts of the areas to receive stone work, and notify the Contractor in writing of any conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with installation
until such conditions have been corrected and are acceptable to the Project Manager.
Verify all measurements and dimensions, coordinate the installation of this work, and
coordinate and schedule this work with the work of other trades. Give particular attention to the
location and size of cutouts required to accommodate mechanical, electrical, and other work or
adjoining construction, in accordance with the approved shop drawings for such trade.
3.02
A.
B.
4.
Stone Installation
Preparation For Stone Installation:- Clean stone prior to setting, leaving edges and
surfaces free from dirt and foreign material. Do not use wire brushes which mark or damage
exposed surfaces, unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager.
Mortar and Grout Proportioning
1.
General: Mortar grout proportioning shall be prepared and tested by the Contractor, and
in addition the Contractor shall allow for preparing and testing the mortar and grout mixes
included within this section, to meet the Project Manager's satisfaction and approval.
2.
Setting Mortar for Stone:
a.
Portland Cement
- 1 part
b.
Hydrated Lime
- 0-0.25 part
c.
Sand
- 3 parts
d.
Plasticizer
e.
Integral water proofer
3.
Fine Grout: Fine grout shall be mixed in the following proportions by volume all in
accordance with Palestinian General Specifications.
a.
White Portland Cement - 1 part
b.
Sand
- 1.0-1.5 parts (as approved by the Project Manager)
c.
Add color additive to acquire the color of mortar approved by the Project Manager.
4.
NOTE:
Add integral waterproofing admixture to setting and grouting mortar in
the quantity and manner recommended by the manufacturer.
5.
Generally, febmix admix mortar plasticiser shall be used in all mortars, unless otherwise
instructed by the Project Manager.
C.
Mortar and Grout Mixing:
1.
Mortar and grout shall be machine mixed. Cement and hydrated lime may be batched by
the bag. Sand preferably shall be batched by weight, but subject to the approval of the
Project Manager may on certain small operations be batched by volume in suitably
calibrated containers, provided proper allowance is made for weight per cubic foot,
contained moisture, bulking and consolidated. Shovel measurement shall not be used.
2.
Workability or consistency of mortar on the board shall be sufficiently wet to be worked
under the trowel. Water for tempering shall be available at all times. Mortar and grout
which has begun to "set" shall be discarded. Mortar and grout which has stiffened due to
evaporation shall be re tempered to restore its workability. Re tempering of mortar and
grout at the mixer shall not be permitted.
D.
Setting Exterior Stone Pavers: Set stone with mortar setting bed onto concrete substrate in the
following manner.
1.
Place setting bed mix onto a slightly water dampened concrete substrate surface or onto
fluid applied membrane with protection board, as applicable. Setting bed shall be slightly
thicker than the required thickness and parallel to the finish stone surface.
2.
Lay out stone work in pattern shown on approved shop drawings. Perform field cutting of
stone as required to maintain the approved pattern and to compensate for field
conditions.
3.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of stone without
marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of stone abutting trim, finish or built-in
items for straight aligned joints. Fit stone closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and
other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap stone.
Apply a dope coat, consisting of cement and water, to the bottom of
each stone unit and place into freshly installed setting bed. Tap stone unit lightly to a true
09610-4
Stone Flooring
5.
surface. Leveling of stone shall be done as the setting operation proceeds so that it is not
necessary to disturb the stone units previously set. Grouting shall not be done until under
bed sets and hardens for 24 hours or more.
Unless otherwise indicated, stone shall be set with 2mm joints. Refer to
the approved shop drawings for stone joint dimensions.
3.02
6.
Stone Installation (con’t)
Allow stone units to set overnight and then completely fill joints with
pointing mortar. Surfaces of stone shall be cleaned to remove mortar spills from face of
stone.
7.
Remove and replace stone units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise
damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match
adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of
replacement.
8.
Protect stone from discoloration or damage during construction and until acceptance of
the Work.
9.
Allowable Variations in Finished Work: Do not exceed the following deviations from level
locations, slopes and alignments shown:
a.
Floors: Maximum variation from horizontal place of units to adjacent unit: plus or
minus 0.8mm Plus or minus 3mm in 3048mm run, in any direction, at any location.
b.
Joints: plus or minus 1mm variation in alignment of joints, in 1000mm.
E.
Setting Interior Stone Pavers
1.
All work shall be carried out in conformity with Clause "D" of Part 3.02 stone installation,
and the Contractor shall further allow for the following:a.
Neutralize and seal substrates to receive bedding mortar.
b.
Maintain installation practices and minimum temperature limits.
c.
Do not commence grouting for at least 24 hours after placing of stone, unless
otherwise instructed by the Project Manager.
d.
Apply the specified grout in accordance with the Project Manager directions.
e.
The finished grout shall be uniform in colour, smooth and without voids, pin holes,
gaps, strips or low spots.
f.
Upon completion of setting and grouting, sponge and wash stone thoroughly
diagonally across joints.
3.03
Protection
Stone shall at all times be protected from drippings, welding spatter and damage by other
trades during construction. Where necessary or directed, substantial non staining wooden or
other approved covering shall be placed to protect the work. Heavy polyethylene film shall be
used between stone and wood. Maintain all protection until removed to permit final cleaning of
stone work.
3.04
A.
Cleaning
Clean soiled surfaces using non-acidic solution of type which will not harm stone, mortar joint
materials, or adjacent surfaces.
Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
B.
3.05
A.
B.
Final Inspection
Finished surfaces shall show no objectionable visual distinction in jointing, bedding, plane,
colour, texture, pattern, and finish. All units and stones which in the opinion of the Project
Manager do not provide the required uniformity shall be relocated, or removed and replaced
with new stone units to the satisfaction of the Project Manager and at the Contractor's own
expense.
All defective stone shall be replaced with new stone units, except that minor damages may be
repaired when approved by the Project Manager. Repairs, when approved, shall be completed
to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. When the repairs to stone are unsatisfactory to the
Project Manager, the stone shall be replaced with new stone. All repairs and all replacements
of defective and unsatisfactorily repaired stone shall be performed at the Contractor's own
expense.
END OF SECTION
09610-5
Stone Flooring
SECTION 09695
CARPETING WITH UNDERLAY
PART 1
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
GENERAL
Work Included
Prepare surfaces to receive carpeting.
Apply carpeting on floor surfaces where indicated, complete with underlay and required
accessories.
Install edge strips where carpeting terminates at other flooring finishes.
Install nosings on stair treads.
1.02
Reference Standards
FS DDD-C-1023 - Cushion, Carpet and Rug (Hair Felt and Rubber Coated Jute and or Fiber).
1.03
A.
Samples
Submit two samples of each type of carpet to be used, sufficiently sized to clearly indicate
construction. In addition, submit one duplicate sample of each color selected.
Also submit one 150 mm long sample of each type of edge stripping to be used.
C.
1.04
A.
Shop Drawings
Clearly indicate the location of seams, method of joining seams, direction of carpet, type of
adhesive to be used, method of integrating edge strips with carpet and installation procedures.
1.05
A.
Job Environment
Do not commence with carpet installation until painting and finishing work is complete and
ceilings and overhead work has been tested, approved and completed.
Maintain room temperature at minimum 15 degrees C for at least 24 hours prior to installation
and relative humidity at approximately that at which the area is to be maintained.
Provide sufficient lighting.
B.
C.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
Acceptable Manufacturers
The contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufactures and their
products which will be acceptable under this section, approval of the manufacturer or product
must be obtained before proceeding with the associated work.
2.02
A.
Materials
PVC semi conductive 160-410 GUM TECHNIKA or equal. Glued to a copper grid with anti static
glue.
Anti static 107-400 GUM TECHNIKA or equal glued on copper grid with anti static glue.
PVC paving CONDUCTIVE 10.4-530 GUM TECHNIKA or equal.
B.
C.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
EXECUTION
Preparation Of Surfaces
Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster and other substances which would
be detrimental to the proper performance of adhesive and carpet. Allow floors to thoroughly
dry.
Ensure floors are level with maximum surface variation of 1/480, non-cumulative.
Installation Of Underlay
09695-1
Carpeting with Underlay
A.
B.
C.
3.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Install underlay using maximum sized pieces. Securely adhere to sub-floor. Lay out underlay
so that carpet seams will not fall directly over seams.
Butt edges firmly together and tight to edge of carpet gripper. Tape all joints.
Remove air pockets and ridges and slightly stretch. Anchor securely around projections and
contours.
Installation Of Carpet
Lay out rolls of carpet full for the Project Manager's approval.
Check matching of carpet before cutting and ensure there is no visible variation between dye
lots.
Cut carpet, where required, in a manner to allow proper seam and pattern match. Ensure cuts
are straight and true and unfrayed.
Where possible and practical, locate seams in areas of least amount of traffic.
Join seams in recommended manner and so as not to detract from the appearance of the
carpet installation and decrease its life expectancy. Ensure seams are straight, not overlapped
or peaked and free of gaps.
Lay carpet on floors with run of the pile in same direction of anticipated traffic.
Do not change run of pile in any one room or from one room to next.
Cut and fit carpet neatly around projections through floor and to walls and other vertical
surfaces. Where wall bases are scheduled, cut carpet 6.4 mm from walls to allow for possible
re-stretching. Fit carpet snugly to walls or other vertical surface where no base is scheduled,
leaving no gaps.
Do not place heavy objects such as furniture on carpeted surfaces for minimum 24 hours or
until adhesive has set.
Entire carpet installation is to be laid tight and flat to sub-floor, well fastened at edges and
present a uniform pleasing appearance. Ensure monolithic color, pattern and texture match
within any one area.
Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. Use full length pieces
only. Butt tight to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be avoided, butt ends tight and
flush.
END OF SECTION
09695-2
Carpeting with Underlay
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Work Included
Prepare surfaces which are to receive finish.
Supply and apply paint finish in accordance with the finishing schedule.
Spot priming and painting of materials delivered to the site, factory finished.
Stopping and filling where necessary.
Knotting.
Emulsion paint on rendered/plastered and fair-face concrete surfaces, internally
Oil paint and varnish to woodwork.
Gypsum Boards Paint
Exterior grade finishing to external wall panels and other concrete and masonry surfaces.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E
F.
G.
Related Work
Section 05500:
Section 05520:
Section 06200:
Section 08110:
Section 08210:
Section 09220:
Section 09260:
1.03
A.
Mock-Up
Before proceeding with paint application, finish one complete surface of each color scheme
required, clearly indicating selected colors, finish texture, materials and workmanship.
If approved, sample area will serve as a minimum standard for work throughout building.
B.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
1.05
A.
B.
1.06
A.
B.
C.
1.07
B.
C.
Miscellaneous Metals
Hand Rails and railings.
Finish carpentry
Steel Doors & Frames.
Wood Doors and Frames.
Portland Cement Plaster
Gypsum Board System.
Samples
Prepare 500 mm x 100 mm samples of finishes when requested by Project Manager. When
possible, apply finishes on identical type materials to which they will be applied on job.
Identify each sample as to finish, formula, color name and number and sheen name and gloss
units.
Colors to be selected by Project Manager prior to commencement of work.
Maintenance Materials
Leave on Premises, where directed by Project Manager, not less than one can of five liter
container for each color used.
Containers to be tightly sealed and clearly labeled for identification.
Delivery, Storage And Handling
Deliver paint materials in sealed original labeled containers, bearing manufacturer's name, type
of paint, brand name, color designation and instructions for mixing and/or reducing.
Provide adequate storage facilities. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 7
degrees C in well ventilated area.
Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
Environmental Conditions
A.
Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic
moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture contents of surfaces
are below following maximums:
1)
Plastered surfaces: 12%
2)
Masonry, concrete and concrete block: 12%.
Ensure surface temperatures or the surrounding air temperature is above 5 degrees C before
applying finishes. Minimum application temperatures for latex paints for interior work is 7
degrees C and 10 degrees C for exterior work.
Provide adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities to maintain
temperatures above 7 degrees C for 24 hours before, during and 48 hours after application of
finishes.
09900-1
Painting
1.08
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
1.09
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
2.02
A.
B.
Protection
Before painting is commenced floors shall be swept and washed over; surfaces to be painted
shall be cleaned before applying paint as specified, and all precautions taken to keep down
dust whilst work is in progress.
No paint shall be applied to surfaces structurally or superficially damp
and all surfaces must be ascertained to be free from condensation efflorescence,
etc. before the application of each coat.
No painting shall be carried out externally during humid, rainy, damp foggy or freezing
conditions, or conditions where surfaces have attained excessively high temperatures or during
dust storms.
No new, primed or undercoat woodwork and metalwork shall be left in an exposed or
unsuitable situation for an undue period before completing the process.
No dilution of paint materials shall be allowed unless stated otherwise and except strictly as
detailed by the manufacturer's own direction, either on the containers, or their literature, and
with the special permission of the Project Manager. For external work dilution of paints will not
be allowed whatsoever. For internal work, where permitted by the Project Manager, undercoats
may be thinned by the addition of not more than 5% thinners. Gloss finish shall not be thinned
at all.
Metal fittings such as ironmongery, etc., not required to be painted shall first be fitted and then
removed before the preparatory process are commenced. When all painting is completed the
fittings shall be cleaned as necessary and refixed in position.
New concrete shall be allowed to age a minimum of 28 days prior to coating application. The
surface must then be chemically treated or sweep blasted to remove the laitance layer. The PH
of the concrete surface should be within the 6.8 - 8.0 range for safe coating application. If the
surface PH is outside this range, the fresh water rinse should be repeated until PH is within the
required range.
Plaster work shall be prepared by removing all loose friable materials by wire brushing/sanding.
Surfaces are to be cleaned to remove dust, dirt, oil grease, etc.
Adequately protect other surfaces from paint and damage. Repair damage as a result of
inadequate or unsuitable protection.
Furnish sufficient drop cloths, shields and protective equipment to prevent spray or droppings
from fouling surfaces not being painted and in particular, surfaces within storage and
preparation area.
Place cotton waste, cloths and material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal
containers and remove daily from site.
Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings, prior to painting operations.
These items are to be carefully stored, cleaned and replaced on completion of work in each
area. Do not use solvent to clean hardware that may remove permanent lacquer finish.
Guarantee/Warranty
All warranties/guarantees to be issued by the Supplier, Manufacturers and Sub-Contractors
shall be countersigned by Main Contractor and both of them will be liable for repair/replace the
items/works, etc., during the warrantee/guarantee period.
PRODUCTS
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and
their products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or
product must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
Substitutions: Items of the same function and performance are acceptable in accordance with
Section 01630.
Materials
Powder coated paint, Varnish, Stain, Enamel, clear Lacquer, Polyurethane, Dico and Fillers:
Type and brand or equivalent products, approved by Project Manager.
Paint Accessory Materials: (Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine and other materials not specifically
indicated herein but required to achieve the finishes specified) of high quality and approved
manufacturer.
09900-2
Painting
C.
D.
E.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
3.03
A.
Paints: Ready-mixed except field catalysed coatings. Pigments fully ground maintaining a soft
paste consistency, capable of readily and uniformly dispersed to a complete homogeneous
mixture.
Paints to have good flowing and brushing properties and be capable of dry or curing free of
streaks or sags.
Powder coated paint shall be applied as recommended by the manufacturer for metal work.
EXECUTION
Inspection
Thoroughly examine surfaces scheduled to be painted prior to commencement of work. Report
in writing to Project Manager, any condition that may potentially affect proper application. Do
not commence until such defects have been corrected.
Correct defects and deficiencies in surfaces which may adversely
affect work of this section.
No priming coats shall be applied until the surface have been inspected and the preparatory
work has been approved by the Project Manager. No undercoats or finishing coats shall be
applied until the previous coat has been similarly inspected and approved.
Preparation Of Surfaces
Remove mildew, by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with
clean water and allow surface to dry completely.
Remove surface contamination from aluminum surfaces requiring a paint finish by steam, high
pressure water or solvent washing. Apply etching primer or acid etch. Apply paint immediately
after acid etching.
Remove dirt, oil, grease and sand if necessary to provide adhesion key, when asphalt, creosote
or bituminous surfaces require a paint finish. Apply latex based compatible sealer or primer.
Remove dirt, grease and oil from canvas and cotton insulated coverings.
Remove contamination, acid etch and rinse new concrete floors with clear water. Ensure
required acid-alkali balance is achieved. Allow to thoroughly dry.
Remove contamination from copper surfaces requiring paint finish by steam, high pressure
water or solvent washing. Apply vinyl etch primer or acid etch. Apply paint immediately after
acid etching.
Remove surface contamination and oils from galvanized surfaces and wash with solvent. Apply
coat of etching type primer.
Remove surface contamination and oils from zinc coated surfaces and prepare for
priming in accordance with metal manufacturer's recommendations.
Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, powder and other foreign matter from concrete
and concrete block surfaces which are to be painted or to receive a clear seal.
Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate, rinse well and
allow to thoroughly dry.
Remove stains from concrete and concrete block surfaces caused by weathering of corroding
metals with a solution of sodium meta silicate after being thoroughly soaked with water. Allow
to thoroughly dry.
Fill hairline cracks, small holes and imperfections on plaster surfaces with patching plaster.
Smooth off to match adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces where they
occur.
Remove grease, rust, scale, dirt and dust from steel and iron surfaces. Where heavy coatings
of scale are evident, removed by wire brushing, sandblasting or any other necessary method.
Ensure steel surfaces are satisfactory before paint finishing.
Clean unprimed steel surfaces by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid
solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime surfaces to indicate
defects, if any. Paint after defects have been remedied.
Sand and scrape shop primed steel surfaces to remove loose primer and rust. Feather out
edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel
surfaces. Prime steel including shop primed steels.
Wipe off dust and grit from miscellaneous wood items and millwork prior to priming. Spot coat
knots, pitch streaks and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has
dried and sand between coats. Back prime interior and exterior woodwork.
Paint Application
Each coat of paint shall be so applied as to produce a film of uniform thickness. All paint shall
be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Special attention shall be given
to ensure that all surfaces including edges, corners, crevices, welds and rivets receive a film
thickness equivalent to that of adjacent painted. Surfaces paint to plaster is to brush applied.
09900-3
Painting
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.03
F.
G.
H.
1)
2)
3)
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Each coat of paint is to be slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved by
Project Manager.
Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry.
Heated Surfaces :
Heated surfaces such as radiators and pipes shall remain cold until each coat applied is
completely dry
Paint Application (cont’d)
Drying :
All coats shall be thoroughly dried before succeeding coats are applied. Allow a minimum of 24
hours between application on any one surface, unless otherwise specified by the
manufacturer.
Plastered Surfaces :
Plastered surfaces shall be rubbed down smooth and any cracks cut out and filled. The
Contractor shall also apply one coat of Tropaline Putty Filler to the plastered surface prior to
the application of paint to provide an absolutely smooth surface.
Unprimed Woodwork :
Unprimed woodwork scheduled to be painted shall be rubbed
down with abrasive paper and dusted off. Care shall be taken to prevent
'burnishing' of the surface. All knots and resinous areas shall be coated with two
coats of knotting. Pitch on large, open unseasoned knots and all other beads or
streaks of pitch shall be scraped off, or if still soft, shall be removed with white
spirit, before applying the knotting. Apply one coat priming to all surfaces, two
coats grained ends, to all, to be subsequently painted. Backs of all wood frames
in contact with concrete, brickwork, blockwork and metal work or similar
materials shall be primed before fixing. After priming all joints, holes cracks shall
be stopped and filled, rubbed down and dusted off.
The primer for non-resinous wood shall be low lead oil based
primer to B.S 5358 or aluminum wood primer to B.S. 4576.
The primer for resinous wood shall be aluminum wood primer to
B.S. 4576.
Primed Woodwork:
Woodwork delivered primed shall be lightly rubbed down with abrasive paper, and dusted off.
Touch up bare areas with a similar priming including open grained ends. After touch priming all
joints, holes, cracks and open grained ends the woodwork shall be stopped and filled, rubbed
down and dusted off.
Plywood And Blockboard :
Edges of exterior plywood and blockboard shall be sealed with two coats of aluminum primer
and the backs treated with a lead primer.
Clear Finished Woodwork :
All woodwork scheduled to receive a clear finish shall be well sanded with the grain removing
all dirt, etc., to give as smooth a surface as possible. resinous timber shall be swabbed down
with White Spirit and dried thoroughly. Split or end grain shall be filled with suitable filler
recommended by the clear lacquer manufacturer, in accordance with their instructions, and of
the appropriate shade.
Colors :
The colour will be selected by the Employer and/or the Project Manager from the paint
manufacturer's standard colour range.
Protection:
Proper care must be taken to protect surfaces while still wet by the use of screens, and 'wet
paint' signs where necessary.
Damage:
Care must be taken when preparing surfaces, or painting, etc. not to stain or damage other
work. Dust sheets and covers to the satisfaction of the Project Manager shall be used to
protect adjacent work. Any such stains or damage shall be removed and made good at the
Contractor's expense.
Cleanliness:
All brushes, tools, pails kettles and equipment shall be clean and free from foreign matter.
They shall be thoroughly cleaned after use and before being used for different color’s types or
classes or material. Painting shall not be carried out in the vicinity of other operations that may
cause dust. Waste liquids, oil soaked rag, etc., shall be removed from the building each day.
Waste liquids shall not be thrown down any sanitary fittings or drains.
Performance :
09900-4
Painting
1)
2)
3)
3.03
R.
S.
T.
U.
If, while the work is in progress, the paint appears to be faulty, such as consistency of
colour, drying time or quality of finish, the work shall be stopped at once and the
manufacturer consulted.
The manufacturer of the materials shall be given every facility for inspecting the work
during progress in order to ascertain that the materials are being used in accordance to
their directions, and to take samples of their products from the site if they so desire for
tests.
The finishing coats of the various paints or surface finishing shall be free from sags, brush
marks, runs, wrinkling, dust, bare of 'starved' patches, variations in colour and texture, and
other blemishes.
Paint Application (cont’d)
4)
When the work has been completed, the finished surfaces shall not be inferior in quality,
colour and finish to the samples approved by the Project Manager, and imperfections in
manufacture shall not be apparent through these finished surfaces. In the event the
Project Manager is not satisfied with the quality of finish (does not comply with the
required standards and/or the sample panel) the Contractor will be required to repaint at
his own expense, such work to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. in the opinion of
the Project Manager it is necessary to remove completely the unsatisfactory paint work
this shall also be done under the direction of the Project Manager at the expense of the
Contractor.
Q.
Emulsion Paints And Undercoats (Based On the approved
manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations) :
The internal paint finish to rendered walls and for fair face concrete ceilings and/or gypsum
board ceilings shall be as follows and of colour as selected by the Project Manager:1)
Apply two coats of primer coat (vinyl primer sealer) at the rate of 40m2 per gallon.
2)
Spot putty and spot prime
3)
apply two coats of putty filler
4)
Apply 1st coat of emulsion paint at the rate of 35m2 per gallon.
5)
Apply 2nd coat of emulsion paint at the rate of 30-35 m2 per gallon.
6)
Sand down between coats.
The internal partitions finish to gypsum partitions, shall be of “Special” coat paint and shall be
as follows and of color as selected by the Project Manager.
1)
Remove dirt and grease on the surface and the surface should be kept dry.
2)
Apply two coats of primer coat (Special Paint ) at the rate of 11.3 m2/l/coat
3)
Apply two coats of intermediate coats at the rate of 13.2m3/l/coat
4)
Apply one coat of top coat (Special) at the rate of 3.3m2/l/coat.
Wood Surface:
The gloss finish /eggshell finish oil paint shall be as follows:
1)
Primer cost pink wood primer or linseed oil.
2)
Enamel undercoat.
3)
One full coat of oil based putty.
4)
Enamel under coat.
5)
1st coat eggshell or gloss finish.
6)
2nd coat eggshell or gloss finish.
Metal Surfaces Other Than Aluminum :
1)
Primer coat: zinc chromate primer
2)
Enamel under coat.
3)
1st coat eggshell or gloss finish.
4)
2nd coat eggshell or gloss finish.
Lead Based Paints :
The use of lead based paints will not be permitted.
Exterior Concrete Surfaces:
1)
System "A" Smooth Surfaces.
a) Primer coat super cryle paintat the rate of 45 M2 per gallon.
b) 1st coat Acrylic Emulsion at the rate of 35 M2 per gallon.
c) 2nd coat Acrylic Emulsion at the rate of 35 M2 per gallon.
2)
System "B" Textured Surfaces
a) Primer coat super cryle paint at the rate of 35 M2 per gallon.
b) Acrylic Textured coating at the rate of 1 to 1.2 Lt. per square meter, type of paint
shall be approved by the Project Manager before procedding with associated
work..
b)
The surface to be coated shall be deemed to be in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations
09900-5
Painting
and shall be free from agents which may affect the
adhesion of the surface coating.
c)
All fragile or loose matter on surface of concrete is to be
removed prior to coating to provide a hard and stable base. All
cement burrs, efflorescence, cement powder and the like shall
be removed by scraper, sand paper or wire brush.
e) The coating shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturers printed
instructions.
f)
Application of paint shall not be carried out when winds or rain.
g) Thinners shall only be permitted to be used in accordance with the
manufacturers written instructions, and shall be of a type recommended by the
manufacturer.
h)
Sealers, bases and hardeners shall be thoroughly mixed in the exact
proportions as specified by the manufacturer, and shall be mixed in clean
containers specifically for the sole use of the coating.
3.03
Paint Application (cont’d)
V.
Varnish :
1) The varnish shall be obtained from approved manufacturer.
2) The first coat shall be applied by brush to obtain
saturation. Final coats may be applied by brush or by
spray.
W.
Knotting:
Knotting shall comply with B.S 1336.
X.
White Spirit :
The white spirit shall comply with Bs 245.
Y.
Timber Stain :
Timber stain shall be oil based pigment stain.
Z.
Stopping :
The stopping shall be as follows:
1)
Fair faced concrete and plaster work shall be external Grade Koppers Acrylic filler at the
rate of 45M2 per gallon.
2)
Rough faced concrete and blockwork shall be similar material to the background and
finished in a similar texture.
3)
Internal woodwork, plywood and blockboard shall be putty complying with B.S. 544.
4)
External woodwork shall be white lead paste complying with B.S. 2521.
5)
Internal clear wood finishes: the stopping shall be that recommended by the varnish
manufacturer.
6) Fillers :
1.
The fillers for internal joinery shall be the type recommended by
the paint manufacturer for use with his type of paint or lacquer.
2.
Stoppers and fillers shall be tinted to match the undercoat, and
shall be compatible with both undercoats and primers.
3.
All materials shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
7) Brushwork:
1.
Unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer all primers and
undercoats shall be stopped flush and rubbed down to a smooth
surface with an abrasive paper and all dust removed before each
succeeding coat is applied. Care shall be taken to prevent
burnishing of the surface.
2.
The stopping/filling shall be applied by spatula or putty knife.
3.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Mechanical And Electrical Equipment
Refer to mechanical and electrical sections with respect to painting and finishing requirements,
color coding identification banding of equipment, ducting, piping and conduit.
Remove grilles, covers and access panels for mechanical and
electrical systems from location and paint separately.
Finish paint primed equipment to color selected.
Prime and paint insulated and bare pipes, conduits, boxes, insulated and
bare ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except where items are plated or
covered with a pre-finished coating.
Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted over or
spattered.
09900-6
Painting
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.05
A.
B.
C.
Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, convector and baseboard heating
cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint,
to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed immediately behind louvers, grilles,
convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels.
Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas. Color and texture to
match adjacent surfaces.
Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical equipment before installing
backboards and mounting equipment on them.
Color code equipment, piping, conduit and exposed ductwork in accordance with requirements
indicated. Color banding and identification (flow arrows, naming, numbering, etc.)
Cleaning
As work proceeds and upon completion, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed or
spattered.
During progress of work keep premises free from any unnecessary accumulation of tools,
equipment, surplus materials and debris.
Upon completion of work leave premises neat and clean, to the satisfaction of Project
Manager.
END OF SECTION
09900-7
Painting
Bidding Documents for Procurement of:
Contract No. NCB AH-CW01
Issued on: July 2008
NCB No: NCB AH-CW01
Employer: The United Nations Development Program- UNDP
VOLUME II: Technical Specifications
Part B
MECHANICAL
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME II / Part B
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Item
Title
Page
From
Thru
To
DIVISION - 15: MECHANICAL WORKS
15060
Pipe & Pipe Fittings
15060-01
thru
15060-05
15090
Supports, Anchors & Seals
15090-01
thru
15090-04
15100
Valves, Cocks, & Faucets
15100-01
thru
15100-03
15140
Pumps
15140-01
thru
15140-09
15160
Expansion Compensation
15160-01
thru
15160-02
15175
Tanks
15175-01
thru
15175-02
15210
Vibration Isolation
15210-01
thru
15210-03
15250
Piping and Equipment Insulation
15250-01
thru
15250-03
15258
Duct Insulation
15258-01
thru
15258-02
15400
Particular Specification for Drainage and Storm Water
System
15400-01
thru
15400-05
15420
Potable Water System
15420-01
thru
15420-02
15450
Plumbing Fixtures & Trim
15450-01
thru
15450-03
15482
Medical Gas Systems
15482-01
thru
15482-07
15500
Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning
15500-01
thru
15500-05
15530
Fire Fighting System
15530-01
thru
15530-03
15620
Boilers
15620-01
thru
15620-02
15763
Air Handling Units
15763-01
thru
15763-10
15820
Air Distribution Equipment (Fans)
15820-01
thru
15820-03
15840
Ductwork
15840-01
thru
15840-03
15860
Duct Accessories
15860-01
thru
15860-02
15870
Air Outlets
15870-01
thru
15870-03
15880
Air Treatement Equipment (Filters)
15880-01
thru
15880-03
15900
Controls & Instrumentation
15900-01
thru
15900-03
15990
Testing, Adjusting & Balancing of Environmental
15990-01
thru
15990-08
Systems
I
Volume II (B)ToC/ Yr. 2008
SECTION 15060
PIPE & PIPE FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Work Included
Sanitary drainage and vent system piping.
Storm sewer system piping.
Domestic water system piping.
Fire protection system piping.
Refrigeration and air conditioning system piping.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Related Work
Section 15090: Supports, Anchors and Seals
Section 15100: Valves, Cocks and Faucets
Section 15210: Vibration Isolation
Section 15400: Drainage and Storm Water System
Section 15530: Fire Fighting System
Section 15900: Controls and Instrumentation
Section 15990: Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems.
1.3
A.
Quality Assurance
Stand Pipe and Hose System Piping: B.S.5306 Fire Extinguishing installations and equipment on
premises.
Domestic Water, Drainage and Vent Piping: National Plumbing Code.
B.
1.4
A.
1-
2-
3-
45B.
1-
Reference Standards
Steel/Copper Piping:
ANSI - American National Standards Institute:
I.
B16-5-1977
Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ii.
B16.9-1971
Factory made Wrought Steel Butt Welding Fittings
iii.
B16.11-1973
Forge Steel Fittings Socket Welded and Threaded
iv.
B16.22-1972
Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings
v.
B16.23-1975
Cast Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings DMV
vi.
B16.26-1975
Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes
vii.
B31.1-1977
Code for Power Piping
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
i.
A53-72a
Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and
Seamless.
ii.
A120-77
Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses.
iii.
A135-73a
Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe.
iv.
A139-71
Electric-Fusion (Arc-Welded Steel Pipe (size=4" and over)
v.
A333-77
Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe for Low Temperature Service.
vi.
A370-77
Standard Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel
Products
vii.
A524-76
Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for Atmospheric and Lower
Temperatures
viii.
B88.7.6
Seamless Copper Water Tube
ix.
B306-76
Copper Drainage Tube
AWWA American Water Works Association
i.
C200-75
Standard for Steel Water Pipe 6 inches and larger
ii.
C203
Coal tar enamel protective coatings and lining for steel pipelines
enamel and tape hot applied.
AWS American Welding Society: B.3.07, Qualification Procedure.
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
i.
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
Cast Iron Soil Pipe:
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
i.
A74-75
Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
15060 - 1
Pipe & Pipe Fittings
1.4
Reference Standards (cont’d)
ANSI - American National Standards Institute
i.
A21.6-1975
Cast-iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds, for Water or
Other Liquids.
ii.
A21.8-1975
Cast-iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast in Sand-Lined Molds, for
Water or Other Liquids.
iii.
A21.10-1971
Gray-Iron and Ductile-Iron Fittings, 2 in.
iv.
A21.10a-1972
Through 48 in., for Water and Other Liquids.
3ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers: A40.8- 1955 National Plumbing Code
C.
Cast Iron Pressure Pipe (Gray and Ductile):
1ANSI American National Standards Institute
i.
B16.1-75
Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ii.
B31.1-77
Power Piping.
2ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
i.
A377.77
Gray Iron and Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe.
ii.
A674-74
Recommended Practice for Polyethylene Encasement for Gray
and Ductile Cast Iron Pipe for Water or Other Liquids.
3AWWA American Water Works Association
i.
C101-67
Thickness Design of Cast Iron Pipe
ii.
C104-80
Cement-Mortar Lining for Cast-Iron and Ductile-Iron pipe and
Fittings for Water.
iii.
C105-72
Polyethylene Encasement for Gray and Ductile Cast-Iron Piping for
Water and Other Liquids
iv.
C106-75
Cast-Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds, for Water or
Other Liquids.
v.
C110-82
Gray-Ironand and Ductile-Iron Fittings, 3in. through 48in.for Water
and Other Liquids
vi.
C111-80
Rubber-Gasket Joints for Cast-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
vii.
C115-75
Flanged Cast-iron and Ductile-Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges.
viii.
C150-76
Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe.
ix.
C151-81
Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined
Molds, for Water or Other Liquids.
x.
C600-82
Installation of Gray and Ductile Cast-Iron Water Mains and
Appurtenances.
xi.
C606-81
Grooved and Shouldered Type Joints.
D.
Cast Iron (Ductile Iron) Drainage Piping:
1ANSI American Standards Institute
i.
A21.5-1972
Polyethylene Encasement for Gray and Ductile Cast-Iron Piping
for Water and Other Liquids
2ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
i.
A 674-74
Recommended practice for Polyethylene Encasement for Gray and
Ductile Cast Iron Pipe for Water or other Liquids.
ii.
A 716-78
Ductile Iron Culvert Pipe.
iii.
A 746-77
Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe.
3AWWA American Water Works Association: C600-77 Installation
of Gray and Ductile Cast-Iron Water Mains and Appurtenances.
E.
Plastic Pipe:
1ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
i.
D 568-76
Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Flexible
Plastics in a Vertical Position.
ii.
D1004-66
Standard Test Method for Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and
Sheeting.
iii.
D1248-74
Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials.
iv.
D1785-76
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120.
v.
D2104-74
Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40
vi.
D2146-69
Propylene Molding and Extrusion Materials.
vii.
D2241-76
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR)
viii.
D2665-77
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe.
ix.
D2774-72
Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure Piping.
2-
1.5
Submittals
A. Certificate of compliance stating that the material used and construction of pipes and fittings conform
to all requirements of this Specification.
B. Certificates of testing of pipes including test data to show that all tests specified have been performed
and all requirements have been met.
15060 - 2
Pipe & Pipe Fittings
1.5
Submittals (cont’d)
C. Catalogue data for all piping accessories, pipes and fittings showing illustrations and schedule of
parts to facilitate assembly and disassembly.
D. Equipment Manufacturer's recommended spare parts and tools list, operation and maintenance
information.
E. Joint detail drawings and joint assembly procedures.
F. Temperature/pressure ratings of pipings, fittings and piping accessories.
G. Manufacturer recommended specifications for transporting, handling, loading, unloading, stock piling
and storage of materials.
H. Procedures for qualifying field welder's records for field welder qualification and results of field weld
tests.
1.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
H.
Product Handling
All pipe products, fittings and piping accessories shall be delivered in Manufacturers' original
protective packaging.
All products, fittings and piping accessories shall be inspected at time of delivery for damage and for
compliance with specifications.
Any products that are damaged or found not to be in accordance with the Specifications shall be
immediately repaired or replaced.
All products shall be handled and stored as recommended by Manufacturer to prevent damage and
deterioration.
The Contractor shall supply handling equipment such as lifting beams, reinforced canvas slings,
protective padding, struts, cradles, etc., required to install products without damaging hardware or
linings and coatings.
The Contractor shall unload all products singly from trucks or lorries. Unless cranes are used, pipes
shall be unloaded by means of skids and check ropes and no pipe shall be dropped or be allowed to
roll.
Each pipe unit shall be site stored, stacked and handled into its position only in such manner,
and by such means, that affords total protection for it from damage. Site stacking of pipework
shall be such that the pipework will not deform or be damaged in any way through storage or
retrieval. The Manufacturer's recommendations shall be taken as the minimum requirement.
All site storage areas shall be shaded.
Products shall be protected against damage and the ambient conditions both during transport, site
storage and immediately up to the time the products are installed.
Full consideration shall be given to safety aspects when locating, planning and constructing stacking
areas and whilst stacking pipes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
Acceptable Manufacturers
Piping, fittings and accessories shall be the product of a Manufacturer regularly engaged in the
production of these items issuing complete catalog data for same.
Pipes & Fittings
Service
Material
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
Chilled and heating water pipes
Equipment drains overflows pipes.
Internal drainage and vent pipes
Black steel seamless Sch. 40
U.P.V.C.
U.P.V.C.
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.5
External drainage pipes between manholes
Internal rain water drainage pipes
Storm drainage network pipes between
manholes
Fire fighting pipes
Domestic hot /cold water pipes
Fuel pipes
L.P.G pipes
Reservoir drainage and overflow
U.P.V.C.
Cast Iron/ U.P.V.C.
U.P.V.C.
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.2.9
2.2.10
2.2.11
Black steel seamless Sch. 40
Galvanized steel pipes Sch. 40
Black steel seamless Sch-40
Copper to B.S.2871 table Y part 1
Galvanized steel class "C".
15060 - 3
Pipe & Pipe Fittings
2.4
A.
B.
2.5
A.
B.
Unions And Couplings
Size 50mm and under: 1034 kPa malleable iron, bronze to iron ground joint unions for threaded
ferrous piping air tested for gas service, all bronze for copper piping.
Size 65mm and over: 1034 kPa forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping, 1034 kPa bronze
flanges for copper piping. Gaskets 2mm thick performed synthetic rubber bonded.
Flange Adapters
Flange adapters shall be used for joining flanged components directly into grooved pipe system,
engage into groove and bolts directly to flanged component.
Flange adapters shall be casted from ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536 with black enamel
coating with Grade “E” EPDM Gasket.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Preparation
Ream pipes and tubes. Clean off scale and dirt, inside and outside, before assembly. Remove
welding slag or other foreign material from piping.
3.2
A.
Connection
Pipes shall be prepared for each specific product style, and preparation shall vary according to
pipe material, pipe wall thickness, pipe outside diameters.
Roll grooving: Roll grooving shall removes no metal, cold forming a groove by the action of an
upper male roll being forced into pipe as it is rotated by a lower female drive roll, and shall be
applied for standard and light wall pipe.
Cut grooving: cut grooving shall remove less metal to less depth than threading, maintaining the
designed integrity of the pipe and shall be applied for heavy wall metallic, cast gray and ductile
iron or plastic pipe.
B.
C.
3.3
A
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
L.
3.4
Route And Grades
Route piping in orderly manner and maintain proper grades. Install to conserve headroom and
interfere as little as possible with use of space. Run exposed piping parallel to walls. Group
piping whenever practical at common
elevations. Install concealed pipes close to building structure to keep furring to a minimum.
Slope water piping 1/500 and arrange to drain at low points.
On closed systems, equipment low points with 19 mm drain valves and hose nipples. Provide,
at high points, collecting chambers and high capacity float operated automatic air vents.
Make reductions in water pipes with eccentric reducing fittings installed to provide drainage and
venting.
Grade horizontal drainage and vent piping 1/100 minimum.
Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or equipment
connected.
Provide clearance for installation of insulation and for access to valves, air vents, drains and
unions.
Provide protection, i.e. step over access for piping run at low level in plant rooms.
Where hot and cold water ranges run parallel with each other, the cold supply must always be
on the bottom to minimize heat transfer from the hot supply.
The configuration of the circuits should be such that clear zones can be individually served, thus
making it possible to close down areas of the building.
Laying Of Underground Pipes
3.4.1 General
A.
Place all materials in accordance with the Manufacturers recommendations.
B.
Inspect and clean out all piping carefully before laying. Only material of high quality
shall be used. Surface of joints shall be free of cracks or irregularities, which would
weaken them, impede the jointing work or cause leakage.
C.
Report minor damages to pipes or fittings already incorporated in the works to the Engineer,
who will decide if the damage may be repaired or if the pipe
or fittings shall be replaced. Repaired items shall be approved by the Supervising Engineer.
15060 - 4
Pipe & Pipe Fittings
3.4.1 General (cont’d)
D.
Before jointing the pipes make hollows in the trench bottom to provide sufficient space for the
socket and for making the joints.
E.
Place pipes in bedrock or rock fill on beds of sand.
F.
Provide a flexible joint where a stiff pipe or fitting is built in, e.g. fixed in a wall. Check the
implication of the bed before laying the pipes, so that settlement will be avoided as far as
possible.
G.
After jointing, support the pipes adequately along their whole length by hard packed fill under
their lower quadrant.
H.
If work is interrupted, seal the open ends of the pipes properly to prevent the entry of mud or
other materials until work is resumed.
I.
Lay pipes to the lines shown on the drawings with a minimum thickness of cover below the
finished surface level of 0.8 m over the crown of the pipe, unless otherwise indicated on the
drawings.
J.
Jointing of Pipes:
1Clean and dry the surfaces of all joints immediately before jointing.
2Equipment for jointing the pipes shall be suited to the relevant pipe dimensions so that the
surfaces of the joints will not be damaged.
3Carry out the jointing so that all joints will withstand the specified test pressures without
leaking.
3.4.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Pipe Identification And Color Coding
Identify and color code pipe by applying plastic markers.
Markers shall follow the color code established by ASHRAE standard. Display the name of the
material carried by the pipe, and indicate direction of flow.
Place markers within 1.8m of any equipment connections, close to branch connections and
valves in mains, and within 0.91m of wall, floor, roof or ceiling through which pipe passes, do
not space markers more than 15m apart on any pipe.
Identify and color code all pipes except pipes concealed in vertical masonry chases.
In lieu of labels, stenciling and painting of equal quality may be substituted.
3.5
Painting
All painting shall be in conformance with Architectural and Structural Specifications.
3.6
Cleaning
Clean all systems in conformance with Architectural and Structural Specifications.
3.7
Testing And Balancing
Test and balance all systems in conformance with Section 15990.
END OF SECTION
15060 - 5
Pipe & Pipe Fittings
SECTION 15090
SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Work Included
A.
Pipe hangers and supports.
B.
Duct hangers and supports.
C.
Passive Fire Prevention System.
D.
Thermal expansion fixed point system.
E.
Flashing for mechanical equipment.
F.
Sleeving for mechanical equipment.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Related Work
Section 15000 :
Section 15060 :
Air Conditioning and Ventilation HVAC
Pipe and Pipe Fittings
Reference Standards
BSI - British Standards Institution
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.
ANSI - American National Standards Institute
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association:
SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association: SMACNA, Duct
Manuals - DW/142
1.4 Submittals
A.
Mill and shop material test reports.
B.
Certificate for material strength properties.
C.
Detail and fabrication drawings.
D.
All supports, hangers and accessories shall be prepared and submitted for approval before
installation.
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
PRODUCTS
Mechanical Installation System
All Installation material used for supporting and fixing Mechanical Pipe systems should be of a
modern flexible type that gives a tested and reliable supporting solution without the need for
welding, drilling or subsequent galvanizing for corrosion protection.
The system should provide for easy access and disassembly for future maintenance.
The contractor should provide shop drawings and load calculations to verify the suitability of the
system for critical load applications as per the engineers requirement.
The system should consist of the following components:
1. C-channels should be used as the main item for supporting pipe and duct runs and
structures. C-channel should be made in accordance with British Standards of width 41mm,
and height of channel shall be selected according to load calculation, made of cold rolled
steel strip of thickness 2.5mm Steel grade ST32-2 as per DIN 10025. The Steel is
Sendzimir Galvanized to a thickness of 20 microns. The channel inward side should
include fine serration’s that ensure strong friction hold of the assemble nuts and
accessories. The channel inward side should be slotted for greater flexibility and should
include longitudinal swaging to increase rigidity and stiffness. Double channels connected
with tubular rivets shall be used where greater strength and stiffness is required. The
contractor must submit channel loading characteristics provided by the manufacturer.
Supporting distance and calculation of pipe loads for pipe nuts should be verified by
channel design in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
2. C-channel accessories as recommended by the channel manufacturer should be used for
assembly of various channel structures as appropriate for the application.
These
accessories include fixing nuts with serration, angles, brackets and pipe ring saddles.
3. Pipe Ring Clamps: Galvanized, pre-engineered pipe ring clamps should be used for fixing
all pipes to channel system or directly to the concrete structure. The contractor should
verify that the pipe supported weight does not exceed the recommended maximum load of
the clamp as provided by the manufacturer. The clamps should consist of two half rings
suitably connected with welded on connection nut for fixing the clamp to the threaded rod.
Where copper pipes, hot water and chilled water steel pipes are used, the rings should be
provided with a pre-fitted rubber inlay with suitable temperature resistance characteristics
for the application.
15090 - 1
Supports, Anchors and Seals
2.01
Mechanical Installation System (cont’d)
4. Threaded Rods used should be manufactured as per DIN 976 of Steel Grade 4.6,
galvanized and used to support pipe duct ring clamps into the C-channel or directly to
concrete anchors depending on the application. The Threaded rods, nuts and flat washers
used should have a clean thread and flawless galvanized condition.
5. Concrete Anchors: Internally threaded Anchors used for fixing threaded rods and Pipe
clamps should be made from Galvanized steel, anchors should have a flared end for
accurate setting flush with the surface, and should have an intelligent expansion section that
adapts to suit the strength of the base material. Concrete Stud anchors should be used for
fixing C-channels to the concrete suitable for through in-place fattening with reliable
fixing. All Concrete
anchors used should be provided with full load characteristics and usedin accordance
with manufacturer recommendations with regards
to application and setting details.
Concrete Anchors should also be
Fire rated to verify that they can withstand the
required loads within
the fire integrity limits of the supporting building structure.
6. For riser pipes, Anchor Fixed Point Clamps should be used to support the weight of the riser
pipe. Fixed Point Clamps should be used in accordance with manufacturers recommended
loading limits.
2.02
Thermal Expansion Fixed Point System
A.
Where metal chilled/heating pipes are subject to thermal expansion, particular attention should
be given and pipe runs should be studied and designed to compensate for the expansion forces
and reduce the stress on the pipes and the supporting system.
B.
The contractor should provide sufficient shop drawings and load calculations to verify the
suitability of the system for critical thermal applications runs as per the engineers requirement.
Allowance for free thermal expansion distance at pipe bends should be marked.
C.
The following components should be used to control thermal expansion:
1.
Slide Guides: Use slide and Roll Connectors with integrated sliding components on all
pipe runs subject to high thermal movement. The guides should be used in accordance
with manufacturer load limits and movement limits. The slides should be resistant to
operating temperatures of the supported pipes.
2.
Anchor fixed Point Pipe Clamps: Where necessary and according to the thermal
study, use Fixed Point for a flexible and reliable fixing system against axial
thermal expansion forces.
The anchor points should be used strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer recommendations and loading characteristics
and in accordance with the calculated expansion forces provided by the thermal
study.
3.
Expansion compensators: For critical application and if expansion movement cannot be
taken up by free movement of the pipe bends, expansion compensators or bellows of the
axial and/or angular type should be used in conjunction with the fixed anchor points and in
accordance with the thermal study. Expansion compensators should be used in
accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
2.03
Passive Fire Prevention System
A.
All openings through fire rated walls, ceilings and floors due to penetrations of mechanical
installations as well as those due to construction joints, should be sealed with fire rated products
suitable for the specific application as specified hereunder.
B.
The product shall be capable of stopping the passage of fire, air and water through wall, floor
and ceiling penetrations, cladding and expansion joints. The product shall exhibit the
minimum designed fire resistant properties.
C.
The products shall be obtained from an approved, established and proven firm and quantities
shall be applied strictly in accordance with the written instructions of the manufacturer and to
the approval of the Engineer.
D.
The recommended treatments for various applications shall be as follows:
1.
Metal pipe and duct crossings: The annular space around the pipe shall be packed with
fire rated foam backing material and the ends shall be filled and sealed with fire rated
Elastic sealant according to manufacturer data. The size of the circular opening shall be
maintained as the barest minimum as recommended by the mastic manufacturer.
2.
Non-metal pipe and conduit crossings less than 50mm is diameter: The annular space
around the pipe shall be packed with fire rated foam as backing material. The ends
should tbe filled and sealed with intumescent, graphite based, fire rated mastic with
expansion pressure of minimum 6 bar. The circular opening shall be maintained strictly
as the barest minimum recommended by the mastic manufacturer. For pipes/conduits
more than 50mm in diameter, the pipe/conduit shall be wrapped with a fire rated,
15090 - 2
Supports, Anchors and Seals
intumescent, graphite based, fire rated wrap and applied strictly according to the
manufacturer's specifications.
2.04
Flashing
A. Steel Flashing: 26 gauge (0.50 mm) galvanized steel.
B. Lead Flashing: 24.5kg/m2 (5lb/sq.ft.) sheet lead for waterproofing, 5kg/m2 (1lb/sq.ft.) sheet lead to
sound proofing.
C. Safes: 24.5kg/m2 (5lb/sq.ft.) sheet lead or 0.20mm (8mil) thick neoprene.
D. Caps: Steel, 22 gauge (0.80mm) minimum, 16 gauge (1.50mm) at fire resistance structures.
2.05
Sleeves
A.
Pipes through floors: Formed with galvanized steel 18 gauge (1.20mm).
B.
Pipes through beams, walls fire proofing, footings, potentially wet floor. Form with steel pipe 18
gauge (1.20mm).
C.
Rectangular Ducts: Form with galvanized steel.
D.
Size all sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and to provide for
continuous insulation; in order that sleeves shall not be less than 50mm larger in diameter than
the pipe to be installed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
Inserts
A.
Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced
concrete beams wherever practicable.
B.
Set inserts in position in advance of concrete work. Provide reinforcement rod in concrete for
inserts carrying pipe over 100mm or ducts over 1524mm wide.
C.
Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, finish inserts flush with slab surface.
D.
Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide rod with recessed
square steel plate and nut above slab.
3.02
Pipe Hangers And Supports
Support horizontal and vertical chilled/heating black steel seamless sch. 40 piping as follows:
PIPE MATERIAL
STEEL
PIPE SIZE
(mm)
15-25
32
40-50
65-108
125
150
MAX. SUPPORT DISTANCE
HORIZONTAL
VERTICAL PIPES
PIPES (m)
(m)
1.2
1.8
1.5
2.4
1.8
3.0
2.4
3.7
3.0
3.7
3.7
3.7
Support horizontal and vertical UPVC & ABS pipes as follows:
MAX. SUPPORT DISTANCE
PIPE MATERIAL
PIPE SIZE
HORIZONTAL
VERTICAL PIPES
(mm)
PIPES (m)
(m)
20-32
2.4
3.0
50
0.7
1.2
UPVC & ABS
80
0.9
1.8
100
0.9
1.8
3.03
Rectangular Horizontal Duct - Hangers And Supports
MAXIMUM
ROD SIZE
MAXIMUM
DUCT
SIZE (mm)
SPACING
OF
(Longer size)
HANGER
400mm
6
3000mm
600mm
8
3000mm
1000mm
8
2500mm
1500mm
10
2500mm
2000mm
10
2500mm
15090 - 3
Supports, Anchors and Seals
3.04 Rectangular Vertical Duct - Hanger And Support
A.
The design at supports of vertical duct shall be located coincide with the individual floor slabs
subject to a maximum spacing of 4 meters.
B.
Vertical duct should be supported from the stiffening angle or the angle frame.
3.05
Equipment Bases And Supports
A.
Provide for major equipment, reinforced concrete housekeeping bases poured directly on
structural floor slab 100 mm thick minimum, extended 100 mm minimum beyond machinery
bed plates. Provide templates, anchor bolts and accessories required for mounting and
anchoring equipment.
B.
Construct supports of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings. Brace and fasten with
flanges bolted to structure.
3.06
Priming
Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces,
pipes shafts and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed for priming
considerations only.
3.07
Flashing
A.
Flash and counter flash where mechanical equipment passes, through weather or water proofed
walls, floors, and, roofs.
B.
Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 200mm minimum high. Flash and counter flash
with steel, soldered and waterproofed.
C.
Provide lead flashing around ducts and pipes passing from equipment rooms, installed according
to manufacturer's data for sound control.
3.08
Sleeves
A.
Set sleeves in position in advance of concrete work.
B.
Extend sleeves through potentially wet floors 25mm above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves
full depth and provide floor plate.
C.
Where piping or ductwork passes through floor, ceiling or wall closes off space between pipe or
duct and construction with non-combustible insulation. Provide tight fitting metal caps on both
sides and caulk.
D.
Install chrome plated escutcheons where piping passes through finished surfaces.
3.09
Painting
All painting shall be in conformance with architectural and structural specifications.
3.10
Cleaning
All cleaning shall be in conformance with architectural and structural specifications.
END OF SECTION
15090 - 4
Supports, Anchors and Seals
SECTION 15100
VALVES, COCKS AND FAUCETS
PART 1
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
GENERAL
Work Included
Gate Valves.
Check Valves.
Double regulating valve with metering station.
Drain Valves.
Globe valves or angle valves.
Flexible connections.
Strainers.
Automatic Air Vent
Related Work
Section 01710:
Section 01730:
Section 15060:
Section 15140:
Section 15175:
Section 15530:
Section 15990:
Section 15750:
Section 15763:
Cleaning.
Operating & Maintenance Data.
Pipe and Pipe Fittings.
Pumps.
Tanks.
Standpipe and Fire Hose System.
Testing Adjusting & Balancing of Environmental Systems.
Coils.
Air Handling Unit with Coils.
1.03
A.
B.
C.
Reference Standards
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
AWWA - American Water Works Association
AWWA – American Water Works Association
1.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Submittals
Copies of valve ordering schedule for approval before ordering valves.
Detailed shop drawings. Clearly indicate make, model, location, type, size and pressure rating.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
Manufacturer's recommended spare parts and tools list.
Certificate of compliance and operation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and their
products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or product
must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
Units shall be products of a Manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of these units and
issuing complete catalog data for same.
Substitutions: Items of same function and performance are acceptable.
Provide valves of same Manufacturer throughout where possible.
Provide valves with Manufacturer's name and pressure rating clearly marked on outside of body.
Valve Connections
Provide valves suitable to connect to adjoining piping as specified for pipe joints. Use pipe size
valves.
Thread pipe sizes 50 mm and smaller.
Flange pipe sizes 65 mm and larger.
Solder or screw to solder adapters for copper tubing.
Use grooved body valves with mechanical grooved jointed piping.
Provide butterfly valve with tapped lug body when used for isolating service.
2.03
Valves For Isolating Purposes
1.
Gate isolating valves for size 50mm and smaller:
A.
Body shall be made of cast bronze and shall be like all parts designed to withstand high internal
pressures and line strainers and are proportional to assure a high safety factor under
recommended working conditions.
15100 - 1
Valves, Cocks and Faucets
2.03
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Valves For Isolating Purposes (cont’d)
Bonnet shall be made of cast bronze and bonnet gasket shall be manufactured of high grade
compressed non-asbestos fiber.
Disk and stem shall be made from high grade materials especially selected for their purposes.
Stem shall be non-rising type inside screw, double wedge disc.
It shall be of threaded end type with manually handle rated to 850kPa.
It shall be UL/FM approved.
Butterfly isolating valves for size 65mm and larger
Body shall be cast of durable ductile iron with black alkyd enamel.
Disc coating shall be of synthetic elastomers permanently bonded to metal body.
Body coating shall be of polyphenylene sulfide blend.
Dual seal disc shall be two molded in rings assure inner body wiping action.
Drive hub shall be integrally cast with disc to provide accurate disc positioning.
Bracket connections: Integral side wing brackets mounts permit connection.
It shall be of grooved end with manually handle rated to 300 psi (2065 kPa).
It shall be UL/FM approved.
2.04
Valves For Throttling Purposes
1.
Globe throttling valves for size 50mm and smaller:
A.
Body shall be made of cast bronze and shall be liked all parts designed to withstand high internal
pressure and line strains and are proportional to assure a high safty factor under recommended
working conditions.
B.
Bonnet shall be made of cast bronze and shall be provided with ample deep stuffing boxes and
accurately machined threads for the stems.
C.
Disk and stem shall be made from high grade materials especially selected for their purpose, such
as metallic material.
D.
Stem shall be rising.
E.
It shall be threaded and type with manually handle rated to 850 kPa.
F.
It shall be UL/FM approved.
2.
Globe throttling valves for sizes 65mm and larger.
A.
Body shall be cast iron conforming to ASTM-A-126 with black enamel body coating.
B.
Seat shall be welded nickel.
C.
Bonnet and Packing Gland shall be ductile iron and plug shall be ductile iron.
D.
Gasket shall be Grade "E" EPDM.
E.
Upper/lower bearing: Stainless steel backed with special self lubricating.
F.
Bonnet Gasket shall be non-asbestos.
G.
It shall be of grooved end with manually handle rated to 300 psi (2065 kPa).
H.
It shall be UL/FM approved.
2.05
A.
B.
C.
2.06
Check Valves
Bronze body, 850 kPa, ASTM B62 or BS5154 series B, swing type, renewable nitrite rubber disc,
solder or screwed ends for sizes 50mm and smaller.
Iron body, 850 kPa, ASTM A 126 Gr B or BS 5150, bronze trim ASTM B62, swing cast iron,
resilient seated, bronze seat ring disc, flanged ends for sizes 65 mm and larger.
Valves 65 mm or larger shall have an air lock fitted to the bolted cover for air release purposes.
Drain Valves
Drain valves shall be 19 mm, 850 kPa, bronze ASTM B62, globe valves threaded ends, screwed
bonnets with nipple and cap or hose thread.
2.07
Double Regulating Valves With Metering Station
A.
It shall be Y-Pattern style design.
B.
It shall be connected with a portable differential pressure meter and each meter connection shall
have pressure/temperature probes.
C.
Each valve shall be installed in any direction without affecting flow measurement and shall
provide three functions:
1.
Precise flow measurement.
2.
Precise flow balancing.
3.
Positive shut-off with no drip seat.
D.
Each valve shall have one 360° adjustment turn of hand wheel with memory features for use with
positive shut-off, and locking feature for tamper - proof setting.
E.
Variable orifice double regulating valve size up to and including 50mm shall have female
threaded ends, body and all metal parts shall be a copper alloy, including drain connection with
protective cap rated to 300 Psi (2065 kPa).
15100 - 2
Valves, Cocks and Faucets
2.07
F.
Double Regulating Valves With Metering Station (cont’d)
Variable orifice douple regulating value size above 50mm shall have standard out grooved ends,
body shall be cast-iron and all metal parts at non ferrous copper alloy rated to 300 Psi (2065 kPa)
working pressure.
2.08
Automatic Air Vents
Brass body, with leak proof automatic shut off.
2.09
A.
B.
Valve Operators
Provide suitable hand wheels for gate, globe or angle, and drain valves, and inside hose bibbs.
Provide one plug cock wrench for every ten plug cocks sized 50mm and smaller, minimum of
one. Provide each plug cock sized 65 mm and larger with a wrench, with set screw.
For butterfly valves provide gear operators for sizes 200mm and larger. For smaller sizes provide
lever lock handle with toothed plate for shut-off service and infinitely adjustable handle with lock
nut and memory stop for throttling service.
Provide valves located more than 2.1 m from floor in equipment room areas with chain operated
sheaves. Extend chains to about 1.53 m above floor and hook to clips arranged to clear walking
aisles.
C.
D.
2.10
A.
B.
C.
D.
Strainers
Size 50mm and under: Screwed brass or iron body. Y pattern with 0.8mm stainless steel
perforated screen.
Size 65mm to 100mm: Flanged iron body, Y pattern with 1.2mm stainless steel perforated screen
Size 150mm and larger: Flanged iron body, basket pattern with 3.2mm stainless steel perforated
screen.
Screen free area minimum three times area of inlet pipe. Provide valve drain and hose
connection off strainer bottom.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Installations
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
Install gate valves for shut-off and isolating service, to isolate equipment, part of systems or
vertical risers.
Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water booster pumps.
Use plug cocks in water systems for throttling service. Use non-lubricated plug cocks only when
shut-off or isolating valves are also provided.
Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus.
Pressure reducing valves shall maintain a constant downstream pressure regardless of
fluctuations, and shall be provided as indicated on C.W.S. Connections from risers at each floor
level, to limit maximum static pressure at plumbing fixtures.
A strainer shall be installed in piping immediately upstream from each 65 mm or smaller pressure
reducing valve.
Valves,Controls,ETC.,Identification Markers
Tags shall be secured to components by brass bead chain in such manner that such identification
cannot be removed without tools or partial disassembly of the component. Attachment shall not
interfere with normal use, operation, or adjustment of component.
Identification shall be readily observable from normal inspection observation position. On
overhead piping, the center face of the identification label shall be normal to a line of sight
inclined 45 degrees above the horizontal where practical. Labels shall read axially along the
piping.
Markers shall be Brass Tags, 500 mm square, with 6.4 mm radius corners with 5 mm diameter
drilled hole at center of one side, 5.6 mm to centerline.
Stamped letters or numbers shall be 5 mm high, filled in with black paint. Component number
shall appear on upper line and specific category designations shall be stamped below in one to
three lines.
Tags shall be attached to components with 6.4 mm pit brass bead chain with brass connectors or
rings as required. Attachment shall be such that tag and chain cannot be removed from
component without use of tools.
3.03
Cleaning
Clean all systems in conformance with Section 01710.
3.04
Testing And Balancing
15100 - 3
Valves, Cocks and Faucets
Test and balance all systems in conformance with Section 15990.
END OF SECTION
15100 - 4
Valves, Cocks and Faucets
SECTION 15140
PUMPS
PART 1
1.01
A.
GENERAL
Work Included
This section covers the furnishing, installation, testing and placing in satisfactory operating
condition of the pumps in the location and quantities shown on the Drawings and with the duties
indicated in the schedules.
Pump controls shall be self contained or as otherwise indicated.
B.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Related Work
Section 15060: Pipe and Pipe Fittings
Section 15100: Valves, Cocks and Faucets
Section 15210: Vibration Isolation
Section 15250: Piping and Equipment Insulation.
Section 15900: Controls and Instrumentation
Section 15990: Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems
1.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Reference Standards
ANSI - American National Standards Institute:
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials:
ISO - International Organization for Standardization:
AWWA - American Water Works Administration:
HI - Hydraulic Institute:
FM - Factory Mutual System:
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association:
UL - Underwriters Laboratories:
BS-British Standards
1.04
Design Criteria
Contractor shall check the design duties of each pump and produce system
pressure loss calculations for each pumped system for approval by the Supervising
Engineer.
1.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.06
A.
B.
C
D.
Submittals
Shop drawings in accordance with Section 15011.
Certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics including head, capacity,
horsepower, efficiency, and speed with pump and system operating point plotted. Include
NPSH curve where applicable.
Pumps shall not be shipped from Manufacturer's factory prior to review of the performance
curves by the Supervising Engineer.
Copies of Manufacturers technical specifications including detailed installation instruction.
Operation and maintenance manual including spare parts and tool lists.
Catalogue data showing illustrations and schedule of parts to facilitate assembly and
disassembly of the pump.
Pressure loss and system design calculations for each pump.
Product Handling
Deliver all hardware in Manufacturer's original, protective packaging.
Inspect hardware at time of delivery for shipment damage and for compliance with
specifications.
When damaged equipment or hardware that will require repair or replacement, or equipment
that does not comply with specifications is found, immediate action shall be taken to repair or
replace equipment, so that the Project's performance and schedule are not impaired.
Store hardware as recommended by Manufacturer to prevent damage and deterioration.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and their
products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or product
must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
A.
15140-1
Pumps
2.01
B.
2.02
Acceptable Manufacturers (cont’d)
Units shall be the product of a Manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of those units
and preferably having a local agent issuing complete catalogue data for same.
Performance
Provide pumps having the duties indicated in the Pump Schedule in the
Engineering Calculations Data Sheet.
2.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
General
Rotating parts shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
Construction shall permit complete servicing without breaking piping or motor connections.
Pumps shall operate at 1450 RPM or 2900 RPM as shown on schedule of per formance.
Pump connections shall be flanged.
Centrifugal, rotary, and reciprocating pump fabrication, installation, and testing shall be in
conformance with HI – Hydrulic Institute respectively.
The selection of pump type and pump drive shall be based on each specific application
requirements. Wherever possible, vertical pump drive shall be used and shall be installed
above maximum anticipated water level in order to protect it from flooding and to facilitate
maintenance. Pump drivers shall be selected to be non-overloading over the whole range of
the Q-TDH curves, considering temperature variations of the fluid being pumped.
Pump Q-TDH curve shall be progressively dropping from shut-off head to run out. It shall be
such that it provides stable operation for the pump when operating at any point on the curve.
Shut off head shall approximately be 25 to 35 percent above the rated head.
Pumps shall be capable of parallel operation.
Materials
Pumps shall be made of materials meeting specific application requirement, and in accordance
with specifications detailed below.
Pump casing shall be made of one of the following material:
1.
Gray iron casting conforming to ASTM A48 or A 278. Class of castings shall be as
specified in the documents.
2.
Composition bronze conforming to ASTM B 62.
3.
Stainless steel casting conforming to ASTM A 296.
4.
Ferrite ductile iron casting conforming to ASTM A 395.
Pump shaft shall be made of either of the following material:
1.
Steel conforming to ASTM A 108.
2.
Stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 276, Type 316 L.
Impeller and impeller seal rings shall be made of any one of the following material:
1.
Gray iron casting conforming to ASTM A 48 or A278.
2.
Bronze casting conforming to ASTM B 584 or B 148.
3.
Steel casting conforming to ASTM A 297.
Tubing and pipe shall conform to ASTM A 53 or A 120, and in any case, shall be suitable for the
service under consideration.
Base plate shall be made of either of the following material:
1.
Gray iron casting conforming to ASTM A 48.
2.
Structural steel conforming to ASTM A 36.
Commercial pre-lubricated, or water, grease, or oil-lubricating bearings shall be used according
to application requirements.
Mechanical or packing seals suitable for specific application shall be used.
All other pump parts shall be made from material compatible with pump's basic material and
suitable for the liquid being pumped.
Fabrication
All like parts of same type pumps fabricated by the same Manufacturer shall be
interchangeable.
Whenever possible the pumps shall be manufactured such that it shall be possible to
disassemble the rotor assembly with minimum disassembly of other parts such as suction and
discharge nozzles, bearing supports, etc., being left in place.
All castings shall be clean without defect. Casting repairs shall be done only after agreement is
reached between the Project Manager and the Contractor. Where required casting repair
procedures should be available to the Project Manager for review.
All foundry and machine work shall be in accordance with good practice for the class of work
involved.
All parts shall conform to the required dimensions and shall be free from defects that will
prevent proper functioning of the pump.
15140-2
Pumps
E.
2.05
G.
H.
I.
2.06
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.07
Assembly of parts shall be well fitted and smoothly operating.
Fabrication (cont’d)
All internal parts, such as impeller, requiring surface treatment shall be sprayed with PVC epoxy
primer in accordance with pump Manufacturer's standard practice.
Pump sets shall be assembled as completely as possible as a unit including base plate, driver,
couplings and guards, lubrication, seal flush, etc., by the supplier, as the requirement allows.
Seal flush systems shall be equipped with appropriate controls, strainers and filters as
recommended by the Manufacturer.
Pump exterior shall be sprayed with PVC epoxy primer and shall be painted to meet specific
application requirements in accordance with pump Manufacturer's standard practice.
In-Line Circulating Pump
Type: Centrifugal, single stage, close coupled in-line, back pullout design, suitable for
horizontal or vertical operation.
Casing: Bronze cast iron, rated for greater of 862 kPa or 1.5 times actual discharge working
pressure, suction and discharge gauge port, air vent, wear rings, seal flush connection, drain
plug flanged suction and discharge.
Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed to shaft and secured with locknut.
Shaft: Stainless steel and of stainless steel sleeve through seal chamber.
Seals: packing gland with minimum forings Teflon impregnated packing and gland lantern
rings.
Chilled/Hot Water Pump
2.07.1
Fabrication
A.
Type: Centrifugal, direct connected.
B.
Casing: Cast iron, split volume, single or double suction, rated for 1034 kPa or 1.25 times actual
working discharge pressure, renewable bronze wearing rings, flanged suction and discharge.
C.
Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed to shaft.
D.
Shaft: High grade alloy steel, bronze or stainless steel shaft sleeves.
E.
Bearings: Oil lubricated roller or ball bearings with oil reservoirs. Provide oil seal and integral dirt
and water seal at each end of reservoir.
F.
Drive: Flexible coupling with coupling guard.
G.
Seals: Packing gland with minimum four rings Teflon impregnated packing and gland lantern
rings.
H.
Base plate, high grade heat treated cast iron or reinforced heavy steel with integral drain rim grout
base.
2.07.2
General Requirements
A.
Supply and install wherever shown on the drawings identical secondary and primary chilled/hot water
pumps duties as shown on the drawings.
B.
Each chilled/hot water pump and the motor assembly shall be mounted on an inertia base with spring
isolators under each with kinetic floating floor system insulation as specified in Section 15210 only for
pumps above the roof.
C.
Each chilled/hot water pump shall have the following:
2 Nos. flexible connections
2 No. gate valves
1 No. check valve
1 No. Strainer
2 Nos. Pressure gauges, thermometers.
D.
Each secondary chilled water pump set and hot water pump set shall have the
suction and discharge collectors and temp. flow sensor.
E.
The Contractor shall confirm the exact head of the pumps after all the pumps selections and the shop
drawings are approved.
F.
All pumps and motor shall be properly set, leveled, and aligned on bases and foundation pads in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's instruction and their recommended tolerances. This shall be done
before any piping or electrical connections made.
G.
All pumps shall be designed to operate with non-over loading characteristics at manufacturer's specified
RPM.
H.
Performance curve data sheets shall be provided with shop drawings for each type of size of pump
submitted for approval.
I.
The speed of pumps shall not exceed 1750 RPM.
J.
Motor is TEFC induction type, insulated to Class F, and incorporates specially impregnated windings,
suitable for working in hot, damp environments.
15140-3
Pumps
K.
The electric motor shall be of squirrel cage induction type, totally enclosed an specifically supplied for
380/220V, 50Hz, 3 phase and with a horse-power rating of 20% in excess of maximum horsepower
required by the pump.
2.07.3
Control Systems
Control panel: Electric control panel complete with circuit breakers, contactors, earth leakage protection
as required by the authorities and according to electrical specifications, thermal and magnetic releases
together with necessary starting relays and printed circuits, automatic electric alternators indicating light
and selector switches to provide automatic changeover in the event of overload trip and lock out of the
failed pump, panel shall be made of sheet steel of duct and splash proof to minimum IP54 type with
lockable door with interlock isolator panel and door shall be rust proof.
2.10
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Water Pressurization Booster Pumps
Base mounted unit shall be factory prepiped and wired comprising of diaphragm pressure tank,
centrifugal pumps, pipework and valves.
Diaphragm pressure tank fitted to the pump delivery shall be of welded steel construction,
minimum thickness 2mm or as recommended by manufacturer and temperature, which flow
sensor indicating flow and temperature suitable for maximum working pressure of 4-7kgf/cm2G at
70oC and equipped with a pressure switch and pressure gauge.
Main pumps shall be close coupled centrifugal end suction type fitted to operate as duty and stand
by but can operate together if demand dictates.
1.
Casing shall be cast iron.
2.
Impeller shall be bronze.
3.
Shaft shall be stainless steel.
4.
Sealing shall be Butane 'N' self adjusting mechanical type.
Isolating valves shall be fitted to suction and delivery connections with strainer adjacent to pump
suction branch and non-return valves adjacent to pump delivery branch.
Low level electric float switch to protect pump from running dry.
The control panel shall contain the followings:
1.
Automatic rotation of the duty pump.
2.
Omission of floating pump from the rotation cycle.
3.
Adjustable start-time delays.
4.
Adjustable run-on delays.
5.
Low-water cut-out circuiting with sequenced pump restart.
6.
Motor starters either direct on line or star-delta type.
7.
Duty selector switches, pressure switches pre-set.
8.
Pressure gauges indicating operating pressure.
9.
Hand-off auto switches.
10. Power on pilot light, pump running light and pump tripped light.
11. Main isolator interlocked with panel door.
12. MCB and ELCB for each pump.
13. Duty cyclic changeover facility for each start.
14. Low voltage supply (24 VA/C) for float switches.
Pumps shall be complete with electric motors, with T.E.F.C. enclosures all in accordance with
section 16 'ELECTRICAL' of this specification.
PART 3 FIRE FIGHTING PUMP SET
3.01 General Requirement
A.
This specification includes the design, manufacture, shop testing, painting, packing, delivery,
supervision of erection and commissioning of a complete packaged fire pumping installation
incorporating two electric motor driven pump, one jockey pump, alarm panels and a membrane
type pressure tank to minimize the number of pump starts and to maintain the system pressure
as well as withstanding complete loss of pressure, together with all associated motor starters,
controls, etc, for fully automatic operation. All equipment shall be suitable in all respects for the
local climatic conditions.
B.
All pressures and pump duty to be calculated by Contractor and agreed with local Fire Brigade
before placing an order for equip.
C.
Supply and install wherever shown on the drawings, package fire fighting pump set which shall
be comprised as follows:
a.
Two electrically driven pump as (one duty pump and one stand by).
b.
One Jockey Pump.
15140-4
Pumps
c.
d.
e.
Each pump shall have (2) gate valves (O.S. & Y valve), (1) check valve and pump set
shall have suction and discharge header including all pressure gauges and pressure
switches.
Automatic control panel.
Interconnecting pipework.
3.01 General Requirement (cont’d)
f.
Diaphragm pressure vessel with renewable rubber diaphragm which is connected at the
common pump discharge header.
g.
All types of valves, O.S & Y valves and accessories as shown on drawings.
h.
All the above should be mounted on an extra heavy cast iron drip ring base.
D.
Fire set should be provided with low level float switch in the fire re-storage reservoir to be
interconnected with the control panel to prevent pumps from starting in dry run case and give
audio visual alarm to warn of water.
E.
Pumps shall be horizontal split case single stage fire at 2900 RPM, applicable for water fluid at
temp 21°C.
F.
Fire pump set should be provided with test line containing flow meter (Venturie) and other
valves to allow for testing of pumps periodically.
G.
The mains shall be electrically earthed to an earth rod independent of the main electricity
earthing system.
H.
Fire pump fabrication, installation and testing shall be conformance with NFPA 20 and shall be
FM/UL/ULC listed fire pump.
3.02
Electric Fire Pump Set
3.02.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Construction
Casing shall be Cast Iron:
The casing is in two halves, suction and discharge branches being cast integral with the bottom
half casing. The top half casing can be lifted to permit examination of the pump interior parts
without disturbing the suction or discharge pipework.
Case wear rings shall be Bronze:
Renewable so that the fine clearances necessary for high efficiency can be maintained.
Impeller shall be Bronze:
Double suction enclosed type, machined externally and hand finished smooth internally. The
impeller is keyed to the shaft for positive drive.
Shaft shall be High Tensile Steel:
Ground all over. Amply proportioned to transmit the maximum load.
Shaft Sleeves shall be Bronze:
Fitted to protect the shaft against wear, erosion and corrosion. The sleeves extend from the
impeller right through the stuffing boxes and are renewable.
Stuffing Boxes shall be Graphited TFE Packing:
Deep design for proper sealing.
Glands shall be Bronze:
Simplify gland packing maintenance.
Liquid Throwers shall be Rubber:
Designed to protect the bearings from water during pump operation.
Bearings shall be Ball:
Grease lubricated. Mounted in housings spigotted to ensure perfect alignment.
3.02.2 The Following Accessories Shall Be Supplied With Electric Fire Pump set:
A. Automatic Air Release Valve & Ball Drip Valve:
To automatically release air from the pump.
B. Pressure Gauge With Cock Handle:
Connected near the pump discharge branch.
C. Compound Pressure & Vacuum Gauge With Cock Handle:
Connected near the pump suction branch.
D. Casing Relief Valve.
3.02.3 Electric Motor Specification
A.
ELECTRIC MOTOR SPECIFICATION
The motor is suitable for use on an electric supply of 380/415 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz, having
Class 'F' insulation with a maximum temperature rise of 80C degree in an ambient temperature
of 40C degree. 1.15 service factor per NEMA standard.
Six terminals shall be provided to allow either Direct on line or Star Delta starting.
B.
CONSTRUCTION
1. STATOR FRAME:
Cast Iron.
15140-5
Pumps
2. STATOR CORE:
3. STATOR WINDINGS:
4. ROTOR CORE:
5. ROTOR WINDINGS:
High Quality Low Loss Sheet Steel Stampings.
Polyester Enamel covered wire with
insulation of very
high Dielectric and mechanical Strength. Varnish
impregnation provides high resistance
moisture and
chemical contamination.
High Quality Low Loss Sheet Steel Stampings.
Cage of Die Cast Aluminum.
3.02.3 Electric Motor Specification (cont’d)
6. SHAFT
High Grade Steel machined all over to very close limits.
7. BEARINGS:
Ball and Roller grease lubricated.
8. TERMINAL BOX:
Arranged for reception of screwed conduit as standard.
3.02.4 Electric Fire Pump Controllers
A.
The main fire pump controller shall be a factory assembled, wired and tested unit and shall
conform to all the requirements of the latest edition of NFPA 20, Centrifugal Fire Pumps and
NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
B.
The controller shall be listed or approved by all of the following: Underwriters’ Laboratories. Inc,
Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada, New York Board of Standards and Appeals, Factory
Mutual Research Corp, and the Canadian Standards Association. The controller shall bear the
labels of UL, ULC, CSA, FM and NYB of S and A.
C.
The controller shall be of the combined manual and automatic type designed for WYE- Delta
starting (open circuit transition) of the fire pump motor having the horsepower, voltage, phase
and frequency rating shown on the plans and drawings. The controller components shall be
housed in a NEMA Type 2 drip-proof, wall mounted enclosure.
D.
All controller components, including circuit breaker and contactors, shall be front accessible for
maintenance.
E.
The controller shall include a motor rated combination isolating disconnect switch/circuit
breaker, mechanically interlocked and operated with a single, externally mounted handle.
When moving the handle from OFF to ON. the interlocking mechanism shall sequence the
isolating disconnect switch ON first, and then the circuit breaker. When the handle is moved
from ON to OFF, the interlocking mechanism shall sequence the circuit breaker open first, and
then the isolating disconnect switch.
F.
The isolating disconnect switch/circuit breaker shall be mechanically interlocked so that the
enclosure door cannot be opened with the handle in the ON position except by a hidden tool
operated defeater mechanism. The isolating disconnect switch/circuit breaker shall be capable
of being padlocked in the OFF position with up to three padlocks for installation and
maintenance safety, and shall also be capable of being locked in the ON position without
affecting the tripping characteristics of the circuit breaker. The controller door shall have a
locking type handle and three point cam and roller type vault hardware.
G.
The circuit breaker trip curve adjustment shall be factory set, tested and sealed for the full load
amps of the connected motor. However, provisions shall be made for field adjustment by a
qualified personnel to a different full load amp setting. This conversion shall not require the
exchange or replacement of parts in the circuit breaker assembly.
H.
The circuit breaker shall be capable of being field tested to verify actual pick up, locked rotor,
and instantaneous trip points after field installation without disturbing incoming line and load
conductors.
I.
The controller shall have externally mounted, individual, visible indicators for
POWER AVAILABLE, LOW PRESSURE, LOCAL START, REMOTE START,
DELUGE VALVE OPEN, PHASE FAILURE, PHASE REVERSAL, INTERLOCK ON,
PUMP RUNNING and RUN TIMER ON. The controller shall have externally
mounted operators including START pushbutton, STOP pushbutton and
EMERGENCY RUN mechanism. The START pushbutton and EMERGENCY RUN
mechanism shall be separate units and not combined.
J.
The POWER AVAILABLE and PHASE FAILURE indicators shall be wired through contacts on
the phase monitor to give true power ON indication. Loss of power in any phase, loss of the
control circuit transformer or reversal of any phase shall cause the POWER AVAILABLE
indicator to go out.
K.
The controller shall be supplied with a pressure switch with a range of 0-300 psi(0-21 kg/cm2)
and have independent high and low pressure settings. The pressswitch shall be mounted inside
the controller to prevent unauthorized adjustment and/or accidental damage. The pressure
switch shall be directly pipe mounted to a solidly welded bulkhead pipe coupling without any
supporting members. Field connections shall be made externally at the controller coupling to
prevent distortion of the pressure switch element and mechanism.
L.
The adjustment knobs shall be capable of being sealed after final adjustment. The controller
shall have a solid state minimum running period timer set for ten minutes. The minimum run
15140-6
Pumps
timer shall include a flange mounted timer running pilot light to indicate when the run timer is in
the timing mode. Terminals shall be provided to field convert the controller from automatic to
manual shutdown. Terminals shall be provided so that standard duty rated normally open
remote START pushbutton stations can be wired to the controller. Terminals shall be provided
so that a remote deluge valve contact may be wired to the controller to start the unit.
3.02.4 Electric Fire Pump Controllers (cont’d)
M.
The control circuit of the controller shall be wired so that one or more of the following conditions
will not interfere with the ability of the pump to run: loss of control circuit power, wiring or
component failure including relays and timers, or loss of positive interlock or deluge valve
signal.
N.
The motor contactor shall be UL listed and CSA approved for the horsepower, voltage, phase
and frequency of the connected motor. The coil shall incorporate a surge absorber to protect
the contactor against line voltage spikes and a low-voltage compensation feature capable of
withstanding a voltage drop up to 35% (at contact closure).
O.
Individual PHASE OPERATING, PHASE REVERSAL and PUMP OPERATING alarm contacts
shall be wired to terminals. These contacts shall be both normally opened and normally closed
and be electrically isolated for wiring to either remote alarm panels as supplied by the controller
manufacturer, or for use with remote telephone dropout type alarm systems, or with both
systems simultaneously.
P.
A UL, ULC, FM and CSA labeled, factory built-in alarm shall be provided in the fire pump
controller, requiring only 220 volt supervisory power. This alarm shall give an audible alarm for
PUMP OPERATING, PHASE REVERSAL, or PUMP FAILURE and a visible alarm for loss of
SUPERVISORY POWER AVAILABLE. This alarm shall be electrically isolated from the remote
alarm contacts so that 24 VDC or separate 220 VAC remote alarms can be utilized.
Q.
The controller shall be supplied with interlock and shutdown circuits as standard.
R.
No pushbuttons or pilot lights shall be mounted on the enclosure door.
S.
All alarm contacts shall be rated 220 VAC maximum, 10 Ampers pilot duty. They shall also be
suitable for direct switching of low energy alarm circuits 6 VDC minimum, 10 MA, 0.6 VAa
minimum.
T.
The control circuit transformer shall have built-in molded terminals and shall be fuse protected
from external loads. The fuse shall be built into the transformer.
V.
The controller shall include a grounding lug, bonding and spacing required for use as UL listed
service entrance equipment.
W. The manufacturer shall test the entire controller assembly prior to shipment. This test shall
include, but not be restricted to, each function the controller may be required to perform
including remote alarms, remote start, automatic start with manual shutdown, remote deluge
valve start, pressure drop start, manual start-stop.
X.
The manufacturer shall test the circuit breaker at 300% full load, 600% full load, and short
circuit current settings.
Y.
The manufacturer shall perform a high potential, test of the controller power circuits at not less
than two times the rated voltage plus 1000 Volts.
- The manufacturer shall supply power transfer switch for emergency operating.
3.03
Diesel Fire Pump
3.03.1
Construction
A.
The pump shall be horizontal, split case, Class 40, cast iron, bronze fitted, centrifugal fire pump
listed by UL and FM. The unit shall be mounted on a prefabricated steel base, complete with
coupling. OSHA approved, coupling guard, and directly connected to the engine.
B.
The pump casing shall be smooth, free of scale, lumps, cracks, sand holes and defects of any
nature which may make it unfit for the use for which it is intended. The pump bearings shall
have an L-10 rating of not less than 5000 hours based on load ratings and fatigue life.
C.
The shaft shall be sealed with a stuffing box and packing with external water seal piping. The
stuffing box glands shall exert uniform pressure on the packing. Bearings housing supports and
suction and discharge flanges shall be integrally cast with the lower half of the casing. Removal
of the upper part of the casing must allow the rotating element to be removed without
disconnecting the suction and discharge flanges. Replaceable shaft sleeves shall be furnished
and are to be of bronze ASTM A148 material. The shaft sleeves shall be held in position by the
impeller key and locked in position by a separate threaded sleeve nut.
D.
Water slingers of corrosion-resistance material shall be provided to seal the bearings at their
ends.
E.
The pump casing shall be hydrostatically strength tested to a minimum of 250 psi, or not less
than the max. Shut off pressure.
15140-7
Pumps
3.03.2 Engine Driver
A.
The fire pump shall be driven by a diesel engine, UL/FM listed, dual battery, automatic
operation .The engine shall be derated 3% for every 1000 feet above 300 feet ASL elevation,
and, 1% for every 10 degrees above 77 degrees F ( 25 degrees C) ambient temperature.
B.
The engine shall be of adequate horsepower to be non-overloading throughout the pumps
maximum design requirements. The engine shall be equipped with an engine “HOT START”,
battery charger, dual battery contactors capable of mechanical operation to energize the
starting motor in the event of control circuit failure, and an emergency fuel solenoid valve.
3.03.2 Engine Driver (cont’d)
C.
The following engine accessories shall be included and supplied by the pump manufacturer:1.
Heavy duty commercial lead acid batteries for dual operation.
2.
Battery rack
3.
Battery cables and acid
4.
The muffler shall be commercial type
5.
Flexible exhaust connector
6.
Heat exchange piping supplying are from the pump to the engine per NFPA20.
7.
¾”Automatic release valve
8.
Fuel system connecting fittings
9.
Outside hose valve test header (125/250 lb flanged)
10. 2 – ½” hose valves with caps and chains
3.03.3 Diesel Pump Controller
A.
The controller shall be UL/FM approved, automatic engine controller with built in battery
charger, weekly test start, test solenoid, pressure recorder and shall meet the criteria set forth in
this specifications. The controller shall be designed in a modular fashion such that optional
equipment may be field installed with plug-in devices.
B.
Two independent built in battery chargers with separate AC input fuses or circuit breakers, DC
output fuses or circuit breakers, and charging circuits shall be provided. A 7 day spring-wound
pressure recorder with 6 inches chart shall be provided.
C.
All local visual alarms shall be indicated on individual back lit lenses. Engine failure alarms shall
be red, pump room trouble alarms shall be amber, and “AUTO ON” shall be green. The
controller shall provide audible and visual indication as well as individual remote contacts for
following alarm conditions:
1.
Low engine pressure
2.
High engine water temperature
3.
Failure to start
4.
AC or charger failure (no audible)
5.
Battery 1 failure
6.
Battery 2 failure
7.
Over speed shutdown
8.
Low fuel level
9.
Low pump house temp.
10. Relief valve open
11. A large 2 inch operator shall be provided on the main selector switch
12. Two voltmeters and ammeters shall be provided for each battery bank.
13. All relay contacts shall be gold flashed and rated for 10 hp.
14. A vibrating alarm bell with 6 inch gong shall be provided
15. A Y-strainer shall be provided after the pressure switch connection and before the drain
valve solenoid. As a minimum, the controller enclosure shall be constructed in
accordance with NEMA 2 requirements.
16. Other features are included by the controller such as:
Automatic stop, Electric motor lockout, Remote start, Power failure start.
17. Remote failure signals:
Fail to start, low oil pressure, High water temp, over speed, Battery 1 failure, Battery 2
failure, charger failure, Control switch not in auto, Low pump room temp, Low fuel level,
Low water reservoir level.
18. Low fuel level switch
19.
Remote alarm panel (with signal to match the above).
3.04 Jockey Pump
3.04.1 Design Construction
A.
Pump shall have cast iron diffusers and adapter with resisted fits to maintain axial alignment.
15140-8
Pumps
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Pumps shall have bronze enclosed impellers, bronze casing rings, bronze base bearing, steel
clamp type shaft coupling, and stainless steel shaft.
Impellers shall be pinned to shaft to prevent damage due to reverse rotation and to maintain
proper interstage lateral setting.
Suction and discharge connections to be of threaded type.
Pump shall be designed for and equipped with mechanical seal type stuffing box, which shall
be provided with vent tap to relieve entrapped air.
Pump shall be provided with cast iron base with drain plug.
3.04.2 Jockey Pump Controllers
A.
The auxiliary jockey pump controller shall be factory assembled, wired and tested and
specifically designed for this type of service. This controller shall be UL listed, and shall be of
the same manufacturer as the main fire pump controller.
B.
The controller shall incorporate a full voltage magnetic starter, fusible disconnect switch, HANDOFF-AUTOMATIC selector switch and a pressure switch.
C.
The pressure switch shall have a range of 0-300 psi (0-21) kg/cm 2 and have independent high
and low pressure settings. The pressure switch shall be mounted inside the controller to
prevent any unauthorized adjustment and/or accidental damage.
D.
The adjustment knobs shall be capable of being sealed after final adjustment. The pressure
switch shall be directly pipe mounted to a solidly welded bulkhead pipe coupling without any
other supporting members and field connections shall be made externally at the controller
coupling to prevent distortion of the pressure switch element and mechanism.
E.
The controller shall have a running period timer to prevent too frequent automatic starting of the
jockey pump motor. The timer shall be set to keep the motor in operation for at least one
minute and inter-wired with the pressure switch.
F.
The disconnect switch shall be mechanically interlocked so that the enclosure door cannot be
opened with the handle in the ON position except by a hidden tool operated defeater
mechanism. The disconnect switch shall be capable of being padlocked in the OFF position
with up to three padlocks for installation and maintenance safety.
G.
The minimum enclosure rating shall be NEMA Type 2, drip-proof.
H.
All pushbuttons, selector switches, pilot lights shall be NEMA Type 12, oil tight. Pilot lights shall
be transformer type. No pushbuttons or pilot lights shall be mounted on the enclosure door.
I.
The control circuit transformer shall be of the molded winding construction type with built-in
molded terminals and shall be fuse protected. The fuse shall be built into the transformer.
J.
The controller manufacturer, prior to shipment, shall hook up and test the jockey pump
controller as a completed assembly. This test shall include, but not be restricted to, each
function the controller may be required to perform including manual start-stop, automatic startstop and minimum run timing.
K.
The manufacturer shall perform a high potential test of the controller power circuits at not less
than two times the rated voltage plus 1000 Volts.
END OD SECTION
15140-9
Pumps
SECTION 15160
EXPANSION COMPENSATION
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
C.
Work Included
Flexible pipe connections.
Expansion joints and compensators.
Pipe loops, offsets and swing joints.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Related Work
Section 01710: Cleaning
Section 15060: Pipe and Pipe Fittings
Section 15090: Supports, Anchors and Seals
Section 15140: Pumps
Section 15990: Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems
1.03
Design Criteria
Base expansion calculations on 10 degrees C. Installation temperature at 100 degrees C for hot
water heating, plus 30% safety factor.
1.04
A.
B.
Reference Standards
BSI British Standards Institute
Conform to standards to Expansion Joint Manufacturer's Association.
1.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.06
A.
B.
Submittals
Shop drawings in accordance with section 01340.
Flexible pipe connector shop drawing data including maximum allowable temperature and
pressure rating, overall face-to-face length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions
per meter and per assembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid structure and total
number of wires in braid.
Expansion joint shop drawings to include maximum allowable temperature and pressure rating,
and maximum expansion compensation.
Manufacturers installation instructions.
Inspection
Examine piping layout and notify the Project Manager of additional anchors or expansion joints
required to adequately protect system.
Provide inspection services by flexible pipe manufacturer's representative for final installing and
certify installation is in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations and connectors are
performing satisfactorily.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
C.
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and their
products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or product
must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
Units shall be the product of a Manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of these units
and issuing complete catalog data for same.
Items of same function and performance are acceptable in conformance with Section 01630.
2.02
Materials
Materials for bellows shall be stainless steel to BS1449 Gr. 321.S12.
2.03
A.
B.
C.
Flexible Pipe Connections
For steel piping construct with stainless steel inner hose and braided exterior sleeve.
For copper piping construct with bronze inner hose and braided exterior sleeve.
Use connectors suitable for minimum 862 kPa (125 psi) and 232 degrees C (450 degrees F) and
1380 kPa (200 psi) and 121 degrees C (250 degrees F)
Construct spool pieces to exact size for insertion of flexible connection.
D.
15160 - 1
Expansion Compensation
2.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.05
Expansion Joints
Steel piping 75 mm and under: stainless steel bellows type with anti-torque device, limit stops and
internal guide.
Steel piping over 75 mm: External ring controlled type with hydraulically formed stainless steel
bellows.
Copper Piping: Stainless steel bellows, anti-torque device limit stops, internal guides and solder
joint end.
Use joints suitable for minimum 862 kPa (125 psi) and 204 degrees C (400 degrees F).
Connections
Provide flexible pipe connections at expansion joints suitable to connect to adjoining piping as
specified for pipe joints. Use pipe sized units.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
Installation
Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration isolation.
Accomplish structural work and provide equipment required to control expansion and contraction
of piping, loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints and provide corrugated bellows type expansion
joints where required.
Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end immediately adjacent to
isolated equipment and anchor other end.
Rigidly anchor pipe to building structure and where necessary provide pipe guides so that
movement takes place along axis of pipe only.
3.02
Painting
All painting shall be in conformance with Section 09900.
3.03
Cleaning
Clean all systems in conformance with Section 01710.
3.04
Testing And Balancing
Test and balance all systems in conformance with Section 15990.
END OF SECTION
15160 - 2
Expansion Compensation
SECTION 15175
TANKS
PART 1
1.01
A.
B.
C.
GENERAL
Work Included
Expansion tanks.
Basement.
Colour Coding.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Reference Standards
ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
B.S. - British Standards
UL - Underwriters Laboratories
API - American Petroleum Institute
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
1.03
A.
Submittals
Copies of shop drawings for each tank. Drawings shall include all critical dimensions and show
locations of all fittings and accessories, i.e. manways, ladders, hold-down straps, heating coils, etc.
Copies of Manufacturer's literature.
Certification Plate: UL labels shall be affixed to each tank.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
Manufacturer's calibration charts.
Manufacturer's recommended spare parts and tools list.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and their
products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or product must be
obtained before proceeding with associated work.
Units shall be the product of a Manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of these units and
issuing complete catalog data for same.
2.02
Expansion Tank For Chilled/Heating Water System
Pre fabricated vertical diaphragm vessels.
2.03
A.
Water Storage Tanks – Concrete
Reinforced concrete under ground water storage tank for domestic water, soft water and fire
fighting.
Reinforced concrete under ground water storage tanks shall have dimension as shown on the
drawings.
The water tank shall be concrete construction as described under another section of the
specifications.
The tank shall be provided with float valves, having copper ball floats and bronze valves and
rods.
The tanks shall be provided with level indicators and contacts for low level cut our of water pumps
and contacts for low an high level alarms carried to a suitable panel preferably in the pump room
or as instructed by the engineer.
Draw off from tank shall be via strainer.
All tank inspection access door shall be airtight type.
Tank shall be provided with an internal stainless steel access ladder.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
15175 - 1
Tanks
2.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.06
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Roof Water Tanks – Galvanized Steel
Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings and required in the bill of quantities, the roof water
tanks shall be constructed from galvanized steel sheets 2mm thick and mounted on a steel base
50cm height. The steel angles shall be 5x5cm x5mm thick. The base shall be painted with two
coats of primer paint and shall be provided with steel plates of 20x20cm at the bottom of each leg.
The tank shall be provided with the following openings:
1- 450x450mm opening with cover and lock for access.
2- Openings for filling, water supply, drain and over-flow. The openings shall be of the same size
as their corresponding pipe connections shown on the drawings.
The tank shall be reinforced by galvanized steel pipes of 20mm diameter.
Isolating valves shall be provided on filling, water supply and drain pipe connections.
The float valve shall be of the same size as the filling pipe and shall be all bronze construction
with copper float suitable for 10 bar working pressure.
The tank shall be filled with water and allowed to stand for 48 hours to be examined for leaks and
repaired as necessary.
Main Fuel Oil Storage
The contractor shall furnish and install cylindrical fuel oil tanks. The tanks are to be installed on
ground & shall be installed on steel supports and located where indicated on the drawings, tanks
shall meet the International Standards requirements.
The tanks shall be constructed of 6mm thick black steel sheet metal and shall be complete with
necessary cover, metallic gasket and include outlets to accommodate the piping connections for
50mm fill, 50mm vent and 15mm drain.
Tank shall be supplied with fuel oil level indicator to indicate the fuel level in the tanks and
indicator to be installed in the boiler room.
External surfaces of the fuel oil tanks shall receive final painting on site.
Fuel oil supply to daily fuel tank shall be fed by a gear fuel pump, pipes shall be black steel
seamless Sch.40.
Daily Fuel Oil Storage
The contractor shall furnish and install fuel oil tanks. The tanks are to be installed in boiler room
& shall be installed on steel supports and located where indicated on the drawings, tanks shall
meet the International Standards requirements.
The tanks shall be constructed of 3mm thick black steel sheet metal and shall be complete with
necessary cover, 50mm vent. 15mm drain and supply and return pipe to boilers.
Tank shall be supplied with fuel oil level indicator to indicate the fuel level in the tanks.
Tank shall be supplied with electrical oil fuel valve.
External surfaces of the fuel oil tanks shall receive final painting on site.
Fuel oil supply to daily fuel tank shall be fed by a gear fuel pump, pipes shall be black steel
seamless Sch.40.
Fuel oil pipes connected with boilers shall include fuel filter, safety valves with fusible link, relief
valves, automatic shut off valve incase of fire or earthquake.
END OF SECTION
15175 - 2
Tanks
SECTION 15210
VIBRATION ISOLATION
PART 1
1.01
A.
B.
C.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.03
A.
B.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.05
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
GENERAL
Work Included
Inertia bases.
Vibration isolators.
Isolation Pads.
Related Work
Section 15060: Pipe and Pipe Fittings
Section 15140: Pumps
Section 15763: Air Handling Units (With Coils)
Section 15820: Air Distribution Equipment (Fans)
Section 15840: Ductwork
Section 15900: Controls and instrumentation
Section 15990: Testing Adjusting & Balancing of Environmental Systems
Reference Standards
Provide and install mechanical equipment so that Average Noise Criteria Curves, as outlined in
ASHRAE Guide, and as specified in Section 15000, are not exceeded.
Associations and Institutions:
1. AMCA Air Moving & Conditioning Association
2. ANSI American National Standards Institute
3. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
4. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
5. SMACNA Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association
Submittals
Shop drawings in accordance with Section 15011.
Shop drawings shall show isolator locations, load on each isolator, inertia slab dimensions, and
include installation instructions.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
Manufacturer's spare parts and tools list.
Certificate of compliance for materials and operation.
Inspection
Provide inspection services by vibration isolation equipment and materials Manufacturer's
representative for final installation and provide written report that installation is in accordance with
specifications and Manufacturer's recommendations.
PRODUCTS
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and their
products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or product must be
obtained before proceeding with associated work.
Units shall be the product of a Manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of these units and
issuing complete catalog data for same.
General Requirements
All pumps, chillers, motors, fan coil units and air handling units shall be mounted on vibration isolators
suitably designed to eliminate any vibrations to be transferred to the building structure.
The contractor shall be fully responsible for preventing noise and vibration throughout each system in
the environment surrounding the building.
Flexible canvans or otherwise connections shall be used in all connections between ducts and all fans,
air handling units or fan coils units as specified in appropriate section.
The contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer detailed shop drawings showing the complete
details of all foundations including the necessary concrete and steel work, vibration isolation devices
etc.
All floor mounts equipment, pumps, chillers boilers shall be erected on 200mm high concrete pads
(interia base) over the complete floor area of the equipment.
15210 - 1
Vibration Isolation
2.02
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
2.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
V.
General Requirements (cont’d)
All mount system shall be protected with factory applied corrosion resistance. All metal parts of
mountings (except springs and hardware) shall be hot dip galvanized. Springs shall be cadmium
plated and neoprene coated. Nuts and bolts shall be cadmium plated.
Steel spring isolation systems shall be with spring diameter not less than 0.9 of the loaded operating
height of the spring. Each spring isolator shall be designed and installed so that the ends of the spring
remain parallel. The spring deflection before becoming solid shall be at least 50% greater than the
specified minimum deflection.
All chillers, pumps AHU's installed on the roof or wherever specified shall be provided with acoustic
installation sheet (floating floor system).
Spring provided for chillers shall be restrained spring isolator type.
The installation vibration isolation systems for each floor or ceiling support equipment shall have a
minimum lateral stiffness under equipment start up or shut down conditions of 75% of the vertical
stiffeners. Motions in excess- shall be restrained by approved spring type mountings.
Vibration Isolators
Type 1. Neoprene mounts, incorporating completely enclosed metal inserts to permit bolting to the
supported unit and to the foundation. Where the equipment is not integral, or where the overhang is
greater than 25 percent of the bolt span, rigid steel members shall be used to spread the mount
spacing, thus assuring stability.
Type 2. Pre compressed molded fiberglass isolation pads, neoprene jacketed and stabilized during
manufacture. Pads shall be sized for 276 kPa-414 kPa loading. Where the equipment base does not
provide a uniform load surface, steel plates shall be bonded to the top of the pads.
Type 3. Freestanding, unhoused stable spring mounts, incorporating leveling bolts and 6.44 mm thick
neoprene jacketed fiberglass noise isolation pads. To assure stability, the minimum outside spring
diameter shall be as tabulated, and the springs shall have a minimum additional travel of 50 percent
between the design height and the solid height.
Type 4. Combination spring and fiberglass hangers, incorporating 50 mm thick neoprene jacketed
fiberglass inserts in series with springs, all encased in welded steel brackets. The springs shall have a
minimum outside diameter as tabulated, and shall have a minimum additional travel of 50 percent
between the design height and the solid height.
Minimum Spring Outside Diameters (mm)
Rated Capacity KG
Up
34
to
To
33
57
Up
to
340
341
to
1126
1127
to
2727
Spring Deflection (mm)
58
83
109
to
to
and
82.5
108
over
70 dia.
125 dia. 150 dia. 215 dia. 250 dia
100 dia. 125 dia. 175 dia. 215 dia. 250 dia
125 dia. 175 dia. 215 dia. 250 dia. 300 dia
2.04
Isolation Pads
Cellular Polyetherurethane (PUR), mixed cellstructure isolation pads, operating load range: 0 to 0.015
2
2
3
N/mm , permanent static load range: up to 0.010 N/mm and density 150Kg/m .
15210 - 2
Vibration Isolation
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
EXECUTION
Installation
Install vibration isolators for mechanical motor driven equipment.
Generally the following equipment shall be provided with vibration isolators but the Contractor shall
also submit to the Project Manager a list of all equipment items which will be provided with vibration
isolation for his approval and he shall allow for additional items to be isolated as required by the
Supervising Engineer.
Equipment
__________
Type
Designation
Isolator Minimum
Static Deflection, mm
Packaged Air
Cooled Chiller
Type 3
25
Close Coupled Pumps:
Up to 4 kw.
Type 1
Above 4 kw.
Type 3-C
25
8
Up to 4 kw
Type 2-C
8
Above 4 kw
Type 3-C
25
Suspended from above
Type 4
25
Floor mounted
Type 325
Centrifugal fans
Type 3-A
25
Axial fans duct mounted
Type 4
25
Base mounted pumps:
Air Handling Units:
C.
D.
E.
Set steel bases for 25 mm clearance between housekeeping pad and base. Set concrete inertia bases
for 51 mm clearance. Adjust equipment level.
Provide spring isolators on piping connected to isolated equipment as follows: up to 100
mm diameter, first 3 points of support; 125 mm to 200 mm diameter, first 4 points of
support; 250 mm diameter and over, first 6 points of support. Static deflection of first
point shall be twice deflection of isolated equipment.
The Isolator Manufacturer's submittal shall include the complete design for the supplementary bases, a
tabulation of the design data on the isolators, including O.D., free, operating, and solid heights of the
springs, free and operating heights of the neoprene or fiberglass isolators, and isolation efficiency
based on the lowest operating speed of the equipment supported.
END OF SECTION
15210 - 3
Vibration Isolation
SECTION 15250
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
Work Included
A.
Piping insulation.
B.
Equipment insulation.
C.
Adhesive, tie wires, tapes.
D.
Recovering.
1.02
Related Work
Section 15258: Duct Insulation
1.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
Reference Standards
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association:
UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
BS - British Standards:
1.04
A.
B.
Submittals
Shop drawings and samples in accordance with the section 15011.
Shop drawings which indicate complete material data, a list of materials proposed for this project
and indicate thickness of material for individual services.
Samples of proposed insulating materials.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
Certificate of Compliance.
Field Tests.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.05
A.
B.
Job Conditions
Deliver material to job site in original non-broken factory packaging, labeled with Manufacturer's
density and thickness.
Perform work at ambient and equipment temperatures as recommended by the adhesive
manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and their
products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or product
must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
Units shall be the product of a Manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of these units
and issuing complete catalog data for same.
General
Adhesives and Insulation Materials: Composite fire and smoke hazard ratings maximum 25 for
Flame Spread and 50 for Smoke Developed. Adhesives to be waterproof.
Test Ratings shall be determined by ASTM E84, NFPA255 or UL723
Flame proofing treatments subject to deterioration due to the effect of moisture or high humidity
are not acceptable.
Insulation shall be rot proof, odorless, non-hydroscopic, shall not sustain vermin and shall not
contribute to metal corrosion, any finishes (or coverings) used shall not deteriorate with age or the
effects of solar heat, with fine fibrous glass insulation.
2.03 Insulation
A.
All insulating materials required for piping, mechanical equipment, etc. shall be furnished and
installed under this section of this specification. Insulation shall be installed in a smooth, clean
workmanlike manner and joints shall be tight and finished smooth.
B.
All surfaces to be insulated shall be dry and free of dirt, oil or water before the insulation is
applied.
C.
Insulation shall be applied in such a manner that there will be no air circulation within the
insulation or between the insulation and the applied surface.
15250 - 1
Piping and Equipment Insulation
2.03
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Insulation (cont’d)
Surface imperfection in the insulation such as chipped edges, small joints or cracks and small
voids or holes not over 25mm square shall be - filled with like insulation material or with insulating
cement.
Insulation is to be applied where indicated on drawings or called for in the specification.
Insulated piping passing through external walls and partitions to be provided with a PVC sleeve
the length of which extending through the whole thickness of the wall and of not less 50mm from
pipe diameter and shall be filled with adequate sealing compound.
Insulated piping passing through slab to be provided with sleeves as mentioned above but to
extend 25mm higher than the finished floor level.
The following pipes shall not be insulated:
1. Exposed fire protection piping.
2. Exposed cold piping.
3. Chromium plated pipe for plumbing fixture.
Materials And Components
Cold/Hot Piping embedded in wall or underground: cold water pipe immediately after cleaning the
piping shall be insulated using 3 coats of bituminized cloth, and hot water pipes with thermal
polyethylene insulation.
Hot piping: fine fibrous glass insulation with factory applied vapor barrier jacket, molded to
conform to piping “K” value at 24 degrees C maximum .034w/m/degrees, the insulation density is
3
32 kg/m , the insulation shall be finished with 2 coats of mastic foster 30-36 with open weave
glass cloth No. 10E. Landing valves should be installed at a height above floor level between
750mm and 1100mm, should be installed to give the following in between with aluminum cladding
gauge (26) for pipes exposed to weather.
Chilled/Heating pipes concealed in shafts and above false ceiling: Fine fibrous glass insulation,
with factory applied vapor barrier jacket, molded to conform to piping, " K" value at 24 degrees C
maximum .035 W/m degrees C, the insulation density range is (48) kg./m3, also the insulation on
pipe work shall be finished with (2) coats of mastic foster 30-36 with open weave glass cloth No.
10 in between.
Chilled/Heating Pipes exposed to weather and in equipment rooms, and pump rooms: Fine
fibrous glass insulation with factory applied vapour barrier jacket, molded to conform to piping, "K"
value at 24 degrees C maximum .034 W/m/degrees, the insulation density range is (64) kg./m3,
also the insulation on pipe work shall be finished with two coats of mastic foster 30-36 open
weave glass cloth, No. 10 in between with aluminum cladding gauge (26) for pipes exposed to
weather.
Hot Equipment: Rigid fibrous galls insulation, “K” value at 24 degrees C maximum .035
3
W/m/degrees C, the insulation density range is 32 kg/m .
Boxes for valves bodies, flanges, expansion bellows etc., these boxes should be lined with 50mm
thickness of insulation materials with density 64 kg/m3, which should be bonded to them with a
suitable adhesive and arranged in such a manner that they overlap the insulation and cladding on
the adjacent pipe work. Insulation in pipe work adjacent to flanges, etc. will be cut back within the
length of boxes to permit easy removal of bolts, these boxes to be provided with latch lackers for
maintenance purposes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
Preparation
Do not install covering before piping and equipment has been tested and approved.
Ensure surface is clean and dry prior to installation. Ensure insulation is dry before and during
application. Finish with systems at operating conditions.
3.02
A.
Installation
Ensure insulation is continuous through inside walls. Pack around pipes with fire proof selfsupporting insulation material, fully sealed.
Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports and other protrusions.
Locate insulation or cover seams in least visible locations.
Rigid insulation inserts shall be installed as required under outside hangers. Inserts shall be of
equal thickness to the adjoining insulation and shall be provided with vapor barrier seals where
required. Insulation inserts shall not be less than the following lengths:
12 to 65 mm pipe size 250 mm long
75 to 150 mm pipe size 300 mm long
200 to 250 mm pipe size 400 mm long
300 mm and over pipe size 550 mm long
B.
C.
D.
15250 - 2
Piping and Equipment Insulation
3.02
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.03
Installation (cont’d)
Galvanized metal shields shall be applied between hangers or supports and the pipe insulation.
Shields shall be formed to fit the insulation and shall extend up to the center line of the pipe and
the length specified for the insulation hanger inserts less 100 mm to allow for vapor sealing butt
joints on each side of shields.
Drains and Vents: Adhere flexible insulation with adhesive applied in 150mm wide strips on
400mm centers. Provide 16 gauge annealed tie wore tied, spiral wound or half hitched at 400mm
centers for securing insulation until adhesive sets. Butt insulation and seal joints and breaks with
50mm of foil adhered over joint.
Equipment: Apply insulation with edges tightly butted, joints staggered and secured in place by
steel bands. Where necessary weld on suitable anchors. Provide sufficient
Repair separation of joints or cracking of insulation due to thermal movement or poor
workmanship.
Installation Thickness Schedule
PIPE
PIPE SIZE
Domestic hot water pipe-space concealed
or embedded.
Up to and
including 1”
Above 1”
Solar water heating pipes-concealed.
Up to and
including 1”
Above 1”
All sizes
Solar water heating pipes-exposed on roof
or located in boiler room.
Chilled heating water-concealed.
Chilled heating water-exposed or roof or
located in boiler room.
INSULATION
THICKNESS MATERIAL
25 mm
Polyethylene
32 mm
25 mm
Polyethylene
32 mm
32 mm
Polyethylene
Up to and
including 2”
Above 2 ”
All sizes
25 mm
Fibrous glass
40 mm
50 mm
Fibrous glass
END OF SECTION
15250 - 3
Piping and Equipment Insulation
SECTION 15258
DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
Work Included
A. Duct thermal insulation.
B. Duct acoustic insulation.
C. Adhesives, tie wires, tapes.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
Reference Standards
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
UL - Underwriters laboratories Inc
1.03
A.
B.
Submittals
Shop drawings and samples in accordance with Section 15011.
Shop drawings which indicate complete material data, a list of materials proposed for this project
and indicate thickness of material for individual services.
Samples of proposed insulating materials.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
Certificate of compliance.
Field Tests
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.04 Job Conditions
A. Deliver material to job site in original non-broken factory packaging, labeled with Manufacturer's
density and thickness.
B. Perform work at ambient and equivalent temperatures as recommended by the Adhesive
Manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.03
A.
B.
C.
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and their
products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or product
must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
Units shall be the product of a Manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of these units and
issuing complete catalog data for same.
General
Adhesives and Insulation Materials: Composite fire and smoke hazard ratings maximum 25 for
Flame Spread and 50 for Smoke Developed. Adhesives to be waterproof.
Recovering Jackets: (203 g/square meter) canvas attached with a lagging fire retardant adhesive.
Test ratings shall be determined by ASTM E84, NFPA 255 or UL 723.
Flame proofing treatments subject to deterioration due to effect of moisture or high humidity are
not acceptable.
Materials And Components
Exposed Rectangular Ducts: 50mm Rigid fibrous glass insulation,"K" value at 24 degrees C
maximum .035 W/m/degrees K, 64 kg/m3 insulation density with factory applied reinforced
aluminum foil vapor barrier for systems conveying air at less than room temperature with the
insulation on pipework shall be finished with vapor barrier weather proof mastic foster 30-36, the
mastic to be used in a two coat-system with foster open weave glass cloth No. 10 in between with
aluminum cladding cover for all exposed duct to weather conditions of thickness (26 gauge).
Concealed Ducts: 40mm flexible fibrous glass insulation, "K" value at 24 degrees C maximum
.037 W/m/degrees K, 48kg/m3 insulation density with factory applied reinforced aluminum foil
vapor barrier for systems conveying air at less than room temperature. The insulation on ductwork
shall be finished with mastic to be used in a two coat-system with foster open weave glass cloth
No. 10 in between
Acoustic Lining: 25mm rigid fiberglass insulation with "K" value at 24 degrees C maximum .035
W/m/ degrees K. 32 kg/m3 absolute roughness of exposed surface not to exceed 0.0013. Coated
to prevent fiber erosion at air velocities.
15258 - 1
Duct Insulation
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Preparation
A. Do not install covering before ductwork and equipment has been tested and approved.
B. Ensure surface is clean and dry prior to installation. Ensure insulation is dry before and during
application. Finish with system at operating conditions.
3.02 Installation
A. Ensure insulation is continuous through inside walls. Pack around ducts with fire proof selfsupporting insulation material, properly sealed.
B. Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports and other protrusions.
C. Locate insulation or cover seams in least visible locations.
D. Provide recovering jackets on exposed insulation throughout, including equipment room.
Insulation located in crawl space, shafts and suspended ceiling spaces is not a considered
exposed. Use pre-sized paper under recovering at uneven insulated surfaces.
E. Exposed Rectangular Ducts: Secure rigid insulation with 50% coverage of adhesive and 12 gauge
galvanized impale anchor tabs at 400mm centers. Seal joints and breaks in ducts conveying air at
less than room temperature with 102mm wide strips of open mesh glass cloth or tape embedded
between 2 coats of vapor barrier sealant. Point up other joints and breaks with hydraulic setting
cement.
F. Concealed Rectangular Ducts: Adhere flexible insulation to ductwork with adhesive applied in
150mm wide strips at 400mm centers. Provide 16 gauge (1.50mm) annealed tie wire and tied
spiral wound or half hitched at 400mm centers for securing duct insulation until adhesive sets. But
insulation and seal joints and breaks in ducts conveying air at less than room temperature with
50mm lap of foil adhered over joint.
G. Acoustic Lining: Apply to interior of ducts where shown. Secure to ductwork with adhesive using
50% coverage and 12 gauge (2.50)mm impale anchor tabs on 400mm centers. Cut off excess
fastener length and cover with brush coat of mastic. Use 25mm thick insulation unless otherwise
noted. Provide vapor barrier located on the warm side for outside air intakes. Ducts with acoustic
insulation do not require external thermal insulation.
H. Repair separation of joints or cracking of insulation due to thermal movement or poor
workmanship.
3.03
Insulation Thickness Schedule
Duct and Equipment
Exposed rectangular duct
Concealed rectangular duct
Acoustic Lining
Insulation
Thickness mm
50mm
38mm
25mm
END OF SECTION
15258 - 2
Duct Insulation
SECTION 15400
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION
FOR
DRAINAGE AND STORM WATER SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope Of Work
A.
The Contractor shall furnish all labors, materials, tools, equipment, appurtenances, service and
temporary work, the design, supply and installation of the underground, drainage system externally
and internally and rain water system as generally indicated on the drawings and described in the
specification all in perfect working to the satisfaction of the Engineer and according to the relevant
accepted Codes of Practice and Standards, and to the satisfaction of Water Authority in Palestine.
B.
This work shall include but not be limited to the following:
1.
All internal drainage pipe system (the system to be adopted is the one pipe system for soil
and waste), vent pipes including fittings, floor drains, floor cleanouts, access doors and all
accessories as deemed necessary and as shown on the Drawings.
2.
All external drainage system including pipes, fittings, manholes, manhole covers, grease
interceptors, trenches, excavation, backfilling, and all ancillaries as deemed necessary and
as shown on the Drawings.
3.
Rainwater system including all pipes, fittings, rainwater outlets and all ancillaries as deemed
necessary and as shown on the Drawings.
4.
Roof vents caps.
5.
Sanitary fittings connections.
6.
The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all services and install final
connections to main municipality manholes, and he shall obtain and complete all necessary
notices and application for connections to the relevant authorities and pay all fees and
charges in connection with service connection.
7.
Testing of the above systems, equipment's with controls and other devices to demonstrate
that the entire installation is in perfect working order.
8.
Builder's Work as required.
9.
Inspection manholes.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
General Requirements
The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of all services.
Final locations of kitchen units, sinks, sanitary fixtures and floor drains to be finished on workshop
drawings and approved by the Engineer.
All floor drains shall have rodding access.
Pipe Dimensions
1. Shower to FD
2"
2. Basin to FD
2"
3. Sink to FD
2"
4. FD to stack
4"
5. W.C. to stack
4"
6. Drainage pipe
4"
7. Drainage pipes between manholes
6"
8 Rain water stack
4"
All drainage and vent pipes to be extended up to parapet with vent cowls on top.
Final location of Rain Water Outlet on roof to be furnished on workshop drawing and approved by
Engineer.
All stacks shall incorporate accessories rodding eyes in appropriate location above each level to
Engineer approval and in coordination with other trades.
All horizontal drainage piping shall be installed with a slope of not less than one percent (1%)
unless otherwise specified and/or noted on the Drawings.
Changes in direction of piping shall be generally made with long radius fittings.
All floor drains shall be set 3mm. below the normal finished floor, with a gradual pitch extending
away from the drain, unless otherwise noted on Architectural drawings.
Cleanouts shall be placed at all changes in directions, at bends, at ends of drainage pipes and as
shown on drawings with a maximum spacing of 15m. on straight runs inside building.
All work done under this section shall be in accordance with the National Plumbing Code
Handbook and Uniform Plumbing Code unless otherwise specified.
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
15400 - 1
Particular Specification for Drainage Storm Water System
1.2
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.
V.
General Requirements (cont’d)
Any connections for existing systems shall be made with a minimum amount of disturbance to the
existing lines.
Any existing pipe lines or structures which are damaged while making connections shall be
replaced or reconstructed to the satisfaction of the Engineer without cost to the Owner.
All piping shall be examined for defects. Any defective piece discovered after installation and
testing shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner.
System shall be inspected and joints approved before any backfilling is placed over pipes.
All pipes and fittings shall be kept clean until final acceptance of work. The exposed ends of all
incomplete lines shall be closed with wooden or plastic plugs adequately secured at all times when
pipe laying is not actually in progress.
All piping shall be installed on a good foundation and adequate means taken to prevent
settlement.
The Contractor shall trim the bottom of trenches to receive the pipes and shall round out bottoms
so that the pipe will rest firmly on 200mm undisturbed sand at proper line and grade.
All piping laid in trenches shall be provided with a solid uniform bearing throughout the entire
length.
Trenches shall be kept free from water by pumping, use of well points, under drains or other
approved means during pipe laying operations so that all pipe joints are made in dry areas.
Anchoring and supports details for ceiling suspended pipes shall be submitted prior to start the
work specially where the pipes changing directions and take 90o/45o bend.
1.3 Builder’s Work Included
A.
The following builder's work, without thereby implying any limitations shall be considered as part of
this section:
1.
All builders work in connection with fixing of supports, brackets, clips, etc., as required.
2.
Cutting or forming all openings, mortises, chases, etc., in floors, walls and ceilings required
for the installation and making good after.
B.
All the above builders work shall be carried out to the full satisfaction of the Engineer.
PART 2 INTERNAL DRAINAGE
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
General
The internal drainage, vent and rainwater pipe system shall be installed in buried drain
strength UPVC to:
a.
UPVC drainage pipes and fittings at working pressure 10 bar.
Provide all the required fittings to make the drainage systems complete and to comply with the
regulations, including traps, pipes, fittings, hangers, and the like.
Sanitary Drainage: Provide a complete system of sanitary drainage piping for plumbing fixtures,
kitchen wastes, etc., which can be drained to the municipal street connection by gravity.
All branches to vertical drainage pipes shall be made with fittings at the correct angle, the junction
curving in the direction of the flow. Main branches to vertical waste pipes shall be 100mm internal
diameter minimum as far as possible.
2.2 Roof Drains
A.
Cast iron roof drains shall be fixed to ensure that they are set at an elevation, which will prevent
formation of puddles.
B.
Install connections to roof drains in conjunction with the roof waterproofing installation so that the
building is adequately protected during construction from damage by storm water.
2.3
A.
B.
Rain Water System
Provide a complete rainwater system for all roofs, set- back areas and canopies.
Rainwater system shall be as shown on the drawings, as specified herein and in accordance with
the local authorities regulations.
2.4
Floor Drains
Stainless steel floor drain cover strainer.
2.5
Floor Clean Out
Floor clean out shall have stainless steel sealing plate - grid and cover.
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
15400 - 2
Particular Specification for Drainage Storm Water System
2.6
A.
B.
C.
Venting
Supply and install vent caps on all vent stacks at the highest level of the stack and wherever
shown on the drawings.
Each vent cap shall be open slots all around cowl and to be provided for soil, waste and vent
stacks.
Any piping passing through the roof shall be so arranged to be a minimum of 300mm from walls or
other obstructions so as to permit proper watertight flashing.
PART 3 EXTERNAL DRAINAGE
3.1
General
The site drainage shall consist of site sanitary drainage complete with piping, manholes,
connection to existing system.
3.2 External Drainage Pipes
The external drainage pipes shall be UPVC (BS 4660).
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Manholes
Manholes shall have the minimum inside dimensions shown on the drawings.
Manhole walls shall be of prefabricated reinforced concrete. Top section must be cast such as to
suit elevation and accommodate size of manhole frame and cover.
Manhole floor shall be of reinforced concrete and inverts stream lined with cement and mortar into
a semi-circular path with sanitary turns and have their corners filled and sloped towards the water
path to prevent any settlement of solids as detailed on the drawings.
Concrete foundation matts for manholes shall be constructed in accordance with details as shown
on the drawings.
All pipes or castings to be embedded in the manhole walls shall be accurately set, and it so
required, headers shall be laid round the casting so embedded.
All work must be carried out in a manner to ensure watertight work and any leaks shall be caulked,
repaired, or the entire work shall be removed and rebuilt. Attention is particularly called to the
necessity of keeping the water level below all parts of the foundation and walls until the cement
has obtained adequate setting.
The step irons for the manholes shall be galvanized malleable cast iron step complying in all
respects with BS 1247, Clause 3 (a) with tail 110mm long. The step irons shall be built in as the
work proceeds with 300mm horizontal and vertical separation.
Pipes entering manholes shall not project beyond the face of the internal renderings. The invert of
the pipes and the channels shall be continuous.
The Contractor shall remove all silt and foreign matter from drains and manholes and leave the
whole in a clean, workable condition upon completion.
Manhole levels will be coordinated by Contractor with the level of existing manholes.
Manholes diameter shall be as recommended for manholes depth:
Manholes Diameter (cm)
Manholes Depth (cm)
Æ 60
Æ 80
Æ 100
Æ 120
60cm – 80cm
80cm – 120cm
120cm – 200cm
200cm – 250cm
3.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
Manhole Cover And Frame
The Contractor shall furnish and set level and to the proper grade, a cast iron frame and cover of
Æ60cm diameter as shown on drawing. The concrete masonry shall be neatly and accurately
brought to the dimensions of the base of the frame. The frame shall be thoroughly embedded in
mortar. All covers and frames shall be BS 497:1976.
All castings shall be carefully coated inside and out with coal tar based material complying with the
requirements specified in BS 4164. Coating surfaces shall be clean, dry and free from rust before
applying the coatings.
Covers of manholes shall be double seal, gas tight, water tight types.
All internal dimensions of manholes refer to drawings. All manhole covers shall be medium duty,
and heavy duty in areas subject to motor traffic.
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
15400 - 3
Particular Specification for Drainage Storm Water System
E.
Manhole covers situated inside buildings shall be of the recessed double-seal airtight type.
3.5 Excavation And Pipe Filling For Pipe Laying
A.
The laying of pipe underground will require trimming and grading of trench bottoms for pipes and
will require back filling with approved materials and tamping around all pipes to center line of pipes
as the pipe paying progresses to provide protection and stability for the piping. Pipe laying work
shall be conducted so that trenching operations are not advanced too far ahead of pipe laying
operations resulting in excessive lengths of open trenches.
B.
The pipe shall not be laid in water or when the trench or weather conditions are
unsuitable for such work.
C.
The Contractor shall trim the bottom of all trenches to receive pipes and shall provide grade finish
by hand methods. The bottoms of all trenches shall be rounded so that, in so far as practical at
least one-third of the circumference of the pipe will rest firmly on 200mm. of undisturbed sand at
proper line and grade. Bell holes, where required, shall be dug to ensure pipe resting for its entire
length upon the bottom of the trench. Trenches shall not be excavated below grade by machine.
D.
After pipes have been tested and approved, trenches shall be backfilled with approved materials
carefully deposited in layers not to exceed 150mm in thickness on both sides and thoroughly and
carefully tamped. Backfilling and tamping in layers of 150mm shall be continued until a depth of
300mm has been placed over the pipe. Backfill around the pipes to a depth of 150mm over the
pipes shall be clean sand. No backfill shall be placed in a manner such as to cause injury to the
pipe. Where pipe crossings occur, the lower pipe shall be laid first and the backfill thoroughly
compacted to the level of laying the higher pipe.
E.
Care should be taken to provide adequate cover before using power compactors or heavy rollers.
F.
All pipes running under roads and pipes between manholes shall be encased in concrete of
minimum 200mm thickness.
PART 4 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION
4.1
General
Special consideration shall be given to the design and installation of pipework to ensure that
expansion and contraction resulting from extremes of temperature can be accommodated freely
without causing damage to the pipe system or the building.
PART 5 TESTING PRIOR TO FILLING IN
5.1
A.
B.
C.
General
All pipes shall be tested for water tightness after laying is finished. The test shall be carried out by
filling the pipeline with water to the floor level of the lowest fitting at least 1.2m at the high end and
not more than 2.4m bed of water at the low end. The required head shall be maintained for a
period of 10 minutes without additional filling.
All pipes shall be tested for straightens by means of a mirror at one end of the line and lamp at the
other end.
All manholes shall be tested for water tightness by filling with water. After allowance for
absorption the water level shall be made good as required. This water level shall be maintained
for 10 minutes without leaks. Keep faces of all manholes clear for inspection until the manholes
have been approved by the Engineer.
PART 6 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
6.1
A.
B.
General
All rainwater, drainage, ventilation and anti-siphon installations shall be tested as referred to in
part 5 of Code of Practice 304:1968 and to the requirements of the Local Authority.
The Contractor shall include for testing in reasonable sections as the work proceeds to suit the
program but this will not obviate the need for final tests upon completion of the work.
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
15400 - 4
Particular Specification for Drainage Storm Water System
C.
D.
6.1
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Seven days notice in writing shall be given by the Engineer of the date on which inspection or
witnessing of tests is required and only test/inspections carried out in the presence of the Engineer
or his appointed representative shall be considered to be valid.
All sections of the work which are to be concealed shall be inspected and tested prior to
concealment.
General (cont’d)
In addition, any pre-assembled sections shall be tested at the works or place of fabrication and
inspected on delivery to the site. Final tests shall be required after pre-assembled sections are
incorporated in the works.
Prior to the testing all access covers and cleaning eyes shall be removed, greased replaced and
sealed.
Should any section of the installation fail the specified testing requirements then the cause shall be
identified and remedied and the test repeated until a satisfactory result is obtained, all at no cost to
the Contract.
Where plant is manufactured at makers or Contractor's works, tests shall be carried out either to
the relevant British Standard Specifications or to the requirements of the specifications (should the
latter requirements be in excess of the relevant B.S.).
The Contractor shall arrange for the inspection of his work by the Water Authority Sewage
Department and shall ensure that all works comply with requirements of the said Department.
The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer test certificates in triplicate giving full details of each
test carried out. The form that the test certificates shall take will be agreed prior to testing starting
and all such certificates will be forwarded to the Engineer within seven days of completion of test.
Upon completion of the installation the soil and waste pipework shall be subjected to a
simultaneous discharge test in accordance with B.S.C.P. 304, in the presence of the Engineer.
The Engineer and all parties concerned shall be notified when the installation is ready for the final
test to be carried out and sufficient personnel shall be available to carry out the necessary testing
of appliances.
PART 7 - OPERATING SERVICES, MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE
A.
After completion of all installation and required tests, the Contractor shall be responsible
for and shall effectively maintain and uphold in good working condition to the satisfaction
of the Engineer every part of the works for the period of twenty four (24) Calendar
months from the date of issue of the Substantial Completion Certificate for the whole
period.
B.
The Contractor shall at his own cost make good all defects due to faulty design bad workmanship
or the use of defective or improper material which shall occur during the said period, and shall
replace at his own expense such parts or materials which in the opinion of the Engineer found
unsatisfactory. During the said period the Contractor is required to carry on all maintenance work
including cleaning, oiling, greasing, adjusting controls, checking oil levels, replacing defect parts
and pressure etc., and painting at the end of the Maintenance Period.
END OF SECTION
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
15400 - 5
Particular Specification for Drainage Storm Water System
SECTION 15420
POTABLE WATER SYSTEM
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
Scope Of Work
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, appurtenances, services and
temporary work as described in these specifications and schedules and indicated on the
drawings to provide and complete the water services, and sanitary fixtures all in perfect working
order to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the Authority of Water & Electricity. The work shall
include but not be limited to the following:
a. Cold water system.
b. Hot water system.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.3
A.
B.
Cold Water System
Incoming main water supply from Water Authority main to water storage tanks shall include all
pipes, fittings, valves, float valves, supports and all necessary accessories as shown on
drawings.
Water meter(s) at the main water supply shall be inside galvanized steel box 1mm thick (30cm x
60cm x 30cm) complete with cover and handle including isolating valves and all other necessary
accessories as per local authorities.
Vertical centrifugal pressurizing booster pumps shall include all pipes, fittings pressure gauges,
pressure switches, flexible connection, gate valves, check valves, strainers, headers, and all
other necessary accessories, as shown on Drawings.
Water storage tank connection shall include all pipes, fittings, float valves, and all other
necessary accessories as shown on drawings.
Interconnecting pipe work between water storage tank and water pressurizing pumps shall
include all pipes, fittings, valves, supports etc. and all other accessories as shown on Drawings.
Cold water distribution system for all bathrooms, kitchens, toilets shall include all pipes, fittings,
isolating valves, chromium angle valves for each sanitary fixtures, pressure reducing valve
where needed and all other necessary accessories as shown on drawings.
Cold water distribution system for all general services, heating and A/C expansion tank.
Hot Water System
Pressurized hot water distribution system for all, bathrooms, kitchens and toilets shall include all
pipes, fittings isolating valves, chromium angle valve for sanitary fixtures where needed and all
necessary accessories, 60oC/65oC must be maintained by the domestic hot water system at
each outlet.
Sanitary fittings shall be complete with all accessories.
PART 2 - GAS SYSTEM
A.
B.
C.
D.
The contractor shall furnish and install cylindrical gas bottles, the bottles shall be located where
indicated on the drawings and shall meet the International Standard requirements, na local
authoritis.
Low pressure gas: It shall be manufactured of copper according to BS2871 table “Y”, Part 1 and
work shall include chasing, cutting and all necessary work.
The bottles shall be fabricated by a renowned company already experienced in manufacturing
bottles.
The line outlet piping shall have pressure gauges, ball valves, pressure reducing valve, flexible
connections, regulators, solenoid valve and automatic shut off valve incase of fire.
PART 3 EXECUTION OF WORK
3.1
A.
B.
C.
General Requirements
CWS branch supply pipes to all areas (Toilets, kitchens, laundry and bathrooms) will have
isolating valves.
Where no bidet is provided in toilet areas, the Contractor shall install trigger-operated, flexible
hose type ablution station complete with anti-vacuum adjacent to each WC. All such outlets shall
incorporate angle pattern stop cocks as specified.
Unless otherwise indicated all distribution pipework shall be 3/4" for cold water system with
reductions 15mm only at final connections where appropriate.
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
15420 - 1
Potable Water System
3.1
D.
E.
F.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K
L.
General Requirements (cont’d)
The final location of all sanitary fittings, water tanks, water pumps, and any type of equipment's
on all floor levels shall be furnished on the workshop drawings and approved by the Engineer.
All flexible tube connector for all sanitary fittings, shall be chrome plated copper hoses, rigid
type.
The contractor shall obtain and complete all necessary notices and applications for connections
to the relevant authorities and pay all fees and charges in connection with service connection.
Test On Completion Of The Work
When the roughing-in work is completed and before connection of fixtures, the entire system
shall be subjected to thorough flushing and then to a water test by plugging up all openings and
filling all of the lines to the roof level. Any defects shall be corrected, at the expense of the
Contractor.
After all fixtures are connected, the entire system shall be subjected to a smoke test. For UPVC
piping, the correct grade of cartridge should be selected so that it is not harmful to the pipework
or joint materials.
Tests shall be performed in the presence of the parties having jurisdiction and the Engineer and
all results shall be recorded.
Commissioning
The Contractor shall allow for all water distribution services to be balanced and commissioned in
accordance with the relevant commissioning codes published by the Chartered Institution of the
Building Services Engineers.
The Contractor shall supply and install on all water distribution systems all test points required in
order to commission the systems completely.
Testing and commissioning results shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
The Contractor shall install on each circuit and sub- circuit, on either side of each item of plant
on all services, a binder type self sealing instrument, plugs and caps to establish flow rates and
pressures.
The Contractor shall prepare a pre-commissioning program for each system of every service.
All plant shall be schedules with its relevant duty and cross checked with the actual performance
and recorded.
All pipework mains and sub-circuits shall be checked for flow rate and pressure drop.
The above procedure shall be carried out in stages and then checked and demonstrated to the
Engineer. Should any of the demonstrations show irregularities the Contractor shall repeat the
procedure until the systems are proved against the designs.
The Contractor's attention is drawn to the following:
No installation will be accepted until it is proved to be operating in accordance with the true intent
of the design.
The commissioning of the mechanical services shall include the establishment of noise levels of
each item of plant and levels within each system. The Contractor shall carry out the tests and make
any modifications necessary before demonstrating the systems to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall co-ordinate the commissioning of the mechanical services with the electrical
services and other allied services.
PART 4 OPERATING SERVICES, MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE
A.
B.
After completion of all installation and required tests, the Contractor shall be responsible for and
shall effectively maintain and uphold in good working condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer
every part of the works for the period of twenty four (24) Calendar months from the date of issue
of the Substantial Completion Certificate for the whole period.
The Contractor shall at his own cost make good all defects due to faulty design bad workmanship
or the use of defective or improper material which shall occur during the said period, and shall
replace at his own expense such parts or materials which in the opinion of the Engineer found
unsatisfactory. During the said period the Contractor is required to carry on all maintenance
work including cleaning, oiling, greasing, adjusting controls, checking oil levels, replacing defect
parts and pressure etc., and painting at the end of the Maintenance Period.
END OF SECTION
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
15420 - 2
Potable Water System
SECTION 15450
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
Work Included
1.1.1 Plumbing fixtures and trim.
1.2
Related Work
1.2.1 Section 15400: Drainage and Storm System.
1.2.2 Section 15100: Valves, Cocks and Faucets.
1.3
Applicable Codes And Standards
1.3.1 ANSI - American National Standards Institute:
a.
A112.11.1 Drinking Fountains and Self Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated
Drinking water coolers.
b.
A112.18.1 Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
c.
A112.19.2 Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures
1.3.2 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials:
a.
A268-75 Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic Stainless Steel
Tubing for General Service.
b.
A395-74 Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure Retaining Castings
for Use at Elevated Temperatures.
c.
A424-73 Specification for Steel Sheets for Porcelain Enameling.
d.
B117-73 Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing.
1.3.2 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials: (Cont'd)
e.
B135-74 Specification for Seamless Brass Tube
f.
B140-74 Specification for Copper-Zinc-Lead (Leaded Red Brass or Hardware
Bronze) Rods, Bars Hand Shapes.
g.
B 176-70 Specification for Brass Die Castings.
h.
B282-70 Specification for Brass Sintered Metal Powder Structural Parts
i.
iB380-65 Corrosion Testing of Decorative Chromium (1972) Plating by the
Corrodkote Procedure.
j.
B456-71 Specification for Electro deposited Coatings of Nickel Plus
Chromium.
k.
B487-75 Measurement of Metal and Oxide Coating Thicknesses by
Microscopical Examination of a Cross Section.
l.
C554-71 Test for Grazing Resistance of Fired Glazed Ceramic White wares
by a Thermal Stock Method.
m.
C660-70 Recommended Practice for Production and Preparation of Gray Iron
Castings for Porcelain Enameling.
1.3.3 British Standards
a.
BS1125 WC flushing cisterns (including dual flush cisterns and flush pipes).
b.
BS1212 Specification for float operated valves.
c.
BS3402 Quality of vitreous china sanitary appliances.
d.
BS5503 Specification for vitreous china wash down WC pans with horizontal
outlet.
1.4
Submittals
1.4.1 Submit Manufacturer's product data and installation instructions.
1.4.2 Manufacturer's catalogues containing technical specifications for all
fixtures, trim and accessories proposed.
1.4.3 Three colour samples where other than white fixtures are proposed.
1.4.4 Drawings showing proposed method of installation for all fixtures.
1.4.5 Manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.4.6 Certificate of compliance for materials.
1.5
General Requirements
1.5.1 Provide new fixtures, free from flaws and blemishes with finished surfaces clear,
smooth and bright. Fixture colours shall be selected on site to suit Architects
finishes' schedules. Colours selection shall be approved by the Architect.
1.5.2 Provide plumbing fittings. Visible parts of fixture brass and accessories shall be
heavily chrome plated.
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
15450 - 1
Plumbing Fixtures and Trim
1.5
General Requirements (cont’d)
1.5.3 Fixtures shall be product of one Manufacturer. Fittings of same type shall be
product of one manufacturer.
1.5.4 Protect fixtures against use and damage during construction.
1.6
Job Conditions
Check millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and
openings before rough-in and installation.
1.7
Product Handling
1.7.1 Deliver materials in original, unopen protective packaging to prevent damage to
the material and finish.
1.7.2 Store all fixtures in an upright position, aboveground in a dry place. Trim and
accessories shall also be stored above ground in a dry place.
1.8
Colours
1.8.1 Colour of all fittings shall be selected on site coordinating with architectural and
furniture finishes schedules and colour schemes.
1.8.2 Sample colours shall be submitted as indicated and all colour selection
approved by the Supervising Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
Acceptable Manufacturers
2.1.1 Approval of the manufacturer or product must be obtained before proceeding
with associated work.
2.1.2 Units shall be the product of a Manufacturer regularly engaged in the production
of these units issuing complete catalog data for same.
2.1.3 Items of same function and performance are acceptable.
2.1.4 The Contractor shall refer to the fixtures/fittings schedules for exact location of
each sanitary fixture.
2.2
Fixture Supports
All wall hung plumbing fixtures shall be furnished with the fixture Manufacturer's
standard chair carriers or wall hangers furnished with the fixtures. The
Contractor shall furnish all necessary bolts and fittings required for a complete
installation.
All accessories for sanitary fixture to be included in the finishing tender.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Supports
4.1.1 All fixtures and equipment shall be mounted level, sure, rigid and flush with wall
or floor as appropriate.
4.1.2 Drill holes carefully to avoid chipping block or tile.
4.1.3 All supports shall be concealed unless noted otherwise.
4.1.4 Furnish and set all hangers, supports, brackets, etc., for proper installation of all
fixtures and equipment. Supports shall be in accordance with recommendations
of the Fixture Manufacturer, and if built into partitions or walls, shall be set as
wall construction progresses. Contractor shall be responsible for stability of all
fixtures and furnishing all chair carriers or other materials necessary to
accomplish this.
3.2 Fixtures
3.2.1 All fixtures shall be free from imperfections, true as to line, angles, curves and
color, smooth, watertight, complete in every respect.
3.2.2 It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to guarantee proper selection and
coordination of all fittings and parts relating to each fixture.
3.2.3 Make connections to all supply lines and drains. Supplies to all fittings shall be
fitted with angle valve.
3.2.4 Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. At
completion thoroughly clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
15450 - 2
Plumbing Fixtures and Trim
3.2.5
Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with screwdriver
stops, reducers and escutcheons.
3.2 Fixtures (cont’d)
3.2.6 All exposed pipe work shall be chrome plated.
3.2.7 All fixtures shall be left thoroughly clean and free from all marks and foreign
substances.
3.2.8 Contractor shall replace all leaky faucets and valves prior to final inspection.
3.2.9 Adjust all flush valves for quiet operation and period of flush.
3.2.10 All faucets shall have visible indices. All trim shall be permanently stamped with
Manufacturer's identification visible after installation.
3.2.11 Caulk around all fixtures and adjacent surfaces with a white silicon sealant,
fungicidal type.
3.2.12 Install hose and faucets, hose connections and fittings as indicated with vacuum
breakers. They shall be installed as required by ASME A40.8.
3.2.13 No plumbing fixture, device equipment, or pipe connection shall be installed that
will provide a cross connection or interconnection between a potable water
supply and any source of non-potable water, such as a drainage system, a soil
or waste pipe, or a boiler where the water may be chemically treated.
3.3 Fixtures Rough –In Schedule
Rough-in fixture piping connection in accordance with the following table of minimum
sizes or as required for particular fixtures:
Fixture
Connection diameter
Hot
Cold
Waste
Water
Water
Wash Basin
Service Sink
Kitchen Sink
Water Closet (Flush valve)
Water Closet (Tank Type)
Bidet
Shower
Floor Drains
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
1"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
-
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
1"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
-
2"
2"
2"
4"
4"
2"
2"
4"
END OF SECTION
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
15450 - 3
Plumbing Fixtures and Trim
SECTION 15482
MEDICAL GAS SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
Work Included
Medical oxygen gas system.
Medical compressed air system.
Medical vacuum system.
Nitrous oxide system.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Related Work
Section 15090:
Section 15100:
Section 15210:
Section 15900:
Section 15990:
Supports, Anchors and Seals
Valves, Cocks and Faucets
Vibration Isolation
Controls and Instrumentation
Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems.
1.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
Reference Standards
ANSI B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings.
ANSI B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
ANSI B40.1 - Gauges, Pressure and Vacuum, Indicating Dial Type-Elastic Element.
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium - Nickel Steel Plate.
ASTM A269 - Stainless and Welded Austentic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.
ASTM A403 - Wrought Austentic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings.
ASTM B32 - Solder Metal
ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
ASTMB280 Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration field Service.
ASTM D1785 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
ASTM D2466 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
ASTM D2564 - Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.
CGA G-7 - Compressed Air for Human Respiration.
CGA P-2.1 - Medical-Surgical Vacuum Systems in Health Care Facilities.
CGA V-5 - Diameter Index Safety System Non Interchangeable Low Pressure
Connections for Medical Gas Applications.
R.
FM - Factory Mutual System - Approval Guide.
S.
FS TT-P-645 - Primer, Paint, Zinc Chromate, Alkyd Type.
T.
FS W-C-596 - Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle, and Cable Outlet.
U.
FS WW-V-35 - Valve Ball.
V.
FS WW-V-54 - Valve, Gate, Bronze (125, 150 and 200 Pound, Screwed, Flanged, Solder
End, For Land Use).
W. MIL-R-36557 - Regulator, Pressure, Medical Gas Administration Apparatus.
X.
MIL-V-82026 - Valves, Diaphragm, Stop.
Y.
MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture.
Z.
MSS SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
AA. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
AB. NFPA 50 - Bulk Oxygen Systems at Consumer Sites
AC. NFPA 99 - Standard for Health Care Facilities.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
Scope Of Work
The work covered under this section shall include all the supply, installation, testing, commissioning,
maintenance and delivering in good operating conditions of Medical gas systems as described in
these specifications and shown on drawings and bill of quantities.
The Contractor shall provide all the necessary components and accessories as well as materials,
manpower, equipment, tools, scaffolding, painting, testing facilities, supervision and overhead, etc.,
at his own expense to execute a complete operable system.
The Contractor shall obtain the necessary information and instruction for the execution of the works
only from the Engineer and not from third parties.
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
15482 -1
Medical Gas Systems
D.
The Contractor shall program his work such that it will not interfere with other trades and to suit site
requirements.
1.04
E.
Scope Of Work (Cont’d)
Schedules and specifications include but not limited to the following:
1. To check the design and to undertake the responsibility of giving the design conditions in
the occupied areas.
2. To supply, install and commission the medical gas system to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
1.05
A.
Submittals
Shop Drawings: Indicate general assembly of components, mounting and installation details, and
general layout of control and alarm panels. Submit detailed medical wall assembly drawings.
Product Data: Provide manufacturers literature and illustrations for all components indicating size,
dimensions and configuration.
Independent Testing Agency Reports: Indicate systems are complete, zone valves installed, alarm
systems functional, and pressure and cross connections tests performed. Document tests.
Manufacturer's Installation Instruction: Indicate requirements for equipment and systems.
B.
C.
D.
1.06
Project Record Documents
Record actual locations of piping, valves, and outlets.
1.07
A.
Operation And Maintenance Data
Operation Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and
assembly views.
B.
Maintenance Data: Include maintenance and inspection data, replacement part numbers and
availability, and service depot location and telephone.
1.08
A.
B.
Quality Assurance
Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 99 & CGA P2.1
Maintain three copies of each document.
1.09
A.
Qualifications
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with
minimum ten years documented experience.
Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum three years
documented experience.
Testing Laboratory: Company specializing in performing the testing of this Section with minimum
three years documented experience.
B.
C.
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
C.
Pipe And Fittings
Factory Preparation: Wash inside of copper pipe and copper fitting with hot solution of sodium
carbonate or trisodium phosphate mixed on pound to 3 gallons (one kg to 25 L) of water; rinse with
water, and blow dry with oil-free dry nitrogen or compressed air.
Oxygen, Compressed Air, Nitrous Oxide, Nitrogen, Systems, Aboveground:
1. Copper Tube: [ASTM B88, Type K, hard drawn] [ASTM B280, Type ACR-Oxy].
2. Fittings: ANSI B16.18, cast bronze, or ANSI B16.22, wrought copper.
3. Joints: AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze.
Oxygen, Compressed Air, Nitrous Oxide, Nitrogen, Systems, Buried:
1. Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type K, annealed.
2. Fittings: ANSI B16.18, cast bronze, or ANSI B16.22, wrought copper.
3. Joints: AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze.
D. Vacuum and Anesthesia Gas Evacuation Systems, Aboveground:
1. Copper Tube: [ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn] [ASTM B280, Type ACR-Oxy].
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
15482 -2
Medical Gas Systems
2. Fittings: ANSI B16.18, cast bronze, or ANSI B16.22, wrought copper.
3. Joints: AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze [or ANSI/ASTM B32, Solder, Grade 95TA].
2.01
E.
F.
2.02
Pipe And Fittings (cont’d)
Vacuum and Anesthesia Gas Evacuation Systems, Buried:
1. Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type L, Annealed.
2. Fittings: ANSI B16.18, cast bronze, or ANSI B16.22 wrought copper.
3. Joints: AWS A5.8 BCuP silver braze [or ANSI/ASTM B32, Solder, Grade 95 TA].
Oral Evacuation Systems:
1. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 or 1220, Schedule 40.
2. Fittings: ASTM D 2466, PVC long radius or wye type.
3. Joints: ASTM D2564, solvent cement.
Valves
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Factory Preparation: For oxygen service disassemble and wash in hot solution of
sodium carbonate or trisodium phosphate mixed one pound to 3 gallons (one
kg to 25 L) of water, rinse with water, seal, and pack for shipping.
Ball Valves: FS WW-V-35, brass or bronze body, double-seal ball valves with
replaceable neoprene or teflon seat and stem seals, for minimum 300 psi (2070
kPa) working pressure, flange or union mounting, labelled for intended service.
Diaphragm Valves (Oxygen, Nitrous Oxide and Nitrogen): MIL-V-82026, brassbodied, packless, diaphragm type with regrinding or renewable seats and disks,
for minimum 300 psi (2070 kPa) working pressure.
Pressure Regulation Valves (Medical Air): MIL-R-36557.
Gate Valves (Vacuum, Medical Air, and Anaesthesia Gas Evacuation System): FS
WW-V-54, Class A, Type I or Type II, Style 2 or 3, brass or bronze with solder
ends.
Ball Valves (Oral Evacuation Systems Only): PVC body, double-seal ball valves with
replaceable neoprene or teflon seat and stem seals, for minimum 100 psi (690
kPa) working pressure, designed especially for vacuum service.
2.03
Piping
A. Hangers and Supports: MSS SP-58 with types as required by MSS SP-69.
B. Pressure Gages: ANSI B40.1, white dials and black lettering with restrict, Oxygen
and nitrous oxide systems: Manufactured and labeled expressly for intended
service; UL labeled.
C. Vacuum Bottle Brackets: Stainless steel, chrome-plated metal, or aluminum with
finish matching adjacent outlet.
D. Flexible Connectors: Corrugated flexible, single ply, seamless or seam-welded tubing
of stainless steel or bronze or reinforced teflon bellows or hose.
E. Valve Cabinets:
1. [Extruded aluminum] [Stainless steel] [Galvanized sheet steel], flush-mounted and
rigidly assembled to accommodate valves and fittings, punched or drilled sides
to receive tubing, anchors to secure to wall construction.
2. Cover Plates: [Extruded aluminum] [Stainless steel] Galvanized sheet steel], with
replaceable plastic windows with pull ring to remove window.
3. Cabinet Labels: Labeled and color coded for intended service and area served.
4. Valves: Pre-assemble and mount chrome plated valves and tubing extensions.
5.Gages: Provide where indicated and in [O.R.] [intensive care] areas
downstream of isolating valves
F.Piping Identification: Pressure sensitive adhesive tape and decals, color and
labeling to conform with Section 15190.
2.04
Outlets
A.
Outlet Units: [CGA V-5, Diameter - Index Safety System (DISS)] [NFPA 99] noninterchangeable connectors, automatic valves, secondary check valves (except
vacuum and evacuation outlets), and capped 3/8-inch tubing stubs for supply
connections, color coded and labeled for intended service.
B.
Wall Outlets: Flush mount in galvanized steel boxes with stainless steel or chromeplated brass faceplates.
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
15482 -3
Medical Gas Systems
C.
D.
Fixed Column Ceiling Outlets: Mount on fixed columns fabricated of stainless steel
with removable access panels.
Flush Mounted Ceiling Outlets: Mount in galvanized steel boxes with stainless steel or
chrome plated brass faceplates with color coded hoses with connectors at top and
bottom, automatic valve at hose outlet connector.
2.04
Outlets (cont’d)
E. Electrical Convenience Receptacles: Refer to Section 16141.
F.
Recessed Nitrogen Service Cabinet: Line pressure control regulator, two line
pressure gages for monitoring inlet and outlet lines, nitrogen service outlet (DISS) and
supply valve; assembled and rigidly mounted in galvanized steel roughing-in
assembly with stainless steel cover plate imprinted with control identification and
operating instructions.
G.
Retractable Surgical Service Ceiling Column: Manually operated type consisting of
upper section for rigid mounting at ceiling level and counter-balanced telescoping
lower section with fail proof stops.
1. Equip with handle and release lever to lock in any position from fully extended to
fully extracted.
2. Support from heavy mounting castings equipped with gas service connections.
3. Provide flexible gas hose assemblies connecting between service outlets and
roughing-in with DISS connections.
4. Provide access panels to allow inspection of interior column fittings.
5. Equip with flush type safety keyed non-interchangeable quick disconnect type
service outlets mounted on underside telescoping section, consisting of one
oxygen, one nitrous oxide, one air, one nitrogen, two vacuum, three duplex
electrical convenience receptacles, three ground receptacles.
6.
Accessory parts shall be chrome plated or stainless steel.
H.
Rigid Ceiling Column for Recovery and Emergency Areas: Approximately 10
inches (250 mm) square, of stainless steel with chrome plated accessory parts.
1. Provide mounting plate, full length stainless shroud and access panel, ceiling
finishing ring, adjustable inner frame and head assembly.
2. Equip with flush type safety keyed non-interchangeable quick disconnect [DISS]
type service outlets consisting of two oxygen, three vacuum and one air outlet
installed on front and sides, four adjustable height I.V. hooks on two sides of
column and four rotatable adjustable height vacuum equipment slides on each
corner of column, three duplex electrical convenience receptacles, three
ground receptacles, and blank face plate for nurses call station.
I.
Modular Rigid Surgery Column: Stationary rigid type with stainless steel shroud,
full length access panel, modular design.
1. Equip with flush type safety keyed non-interchangeable quick disconnect [DISS]
type service outlets consisting of one oxygen, one nitrous oxide, one vacuum,
one air, one evacuation.
2.05
Nitrous Oxide Manifold
A.
Central Supply of Nitrous Oxide: Duplex automatic manifold consisting of wall
mounted control cabinet and necessary header connections and pigtails for six
cylinders, arranged for three cylinders in service and three cylinders in reserve.
B.
Manifold Delivery: Maximum 220 cu ft/hr (62 cu m/hr) nitrous oxide continuously at
50 psig (345KPa). Provide automatic changeover from primary to secondary bank
and allow replacing depleted cylinders with no change in line pressure.
C.
By-Pass System: Between regulators to service regulator or switch over system
without interrupting supply of gas. Bleed valves piped to vent connector within
cabinet shall allow adjustment of pressure reducing regulators.
D.
Cabinet: House components in lockable cabinet with baked enamel finish.
1. Three front mounted gages indicate bank and hospital line pressures.
2. Green indicator light indicates service bank in use.
3. Red indicator light indicates reserve bank in use.
4. Provide terminal block connections for remote alarms.
2.06
Medical Compressed System
A.
Duplex Air Compressor System:
1. To deliver CGA G-7 compressed air.
2. Rotary Oil Free Liquid Ring Compressors: Equipped with check valve, inlet and
outlet flexible connector, isolation valve, safety relief valve, air by-pass
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
15482 -4
Medical Gas Systems
solenoid valve, water air separator, float trap, strainer, compound gage,
solenoid valve, bypass solenoid valve and metering valve for service liquid,
inlet mufflers, motor coupling with guard.
3. Capacity: 740 L/min at 1000 kPa.
4. Electrical Characteristics:
a.
3 kW.
b.
380 volts, three phase, 50 Hz.
2.06
Medical Compressed Air System
B.
Refrigerated Air Dryer: Non-cycling hermetic type with capacity of 33CM/hr
capable of drying 100 psig (690 kPa) at 100 degrees F (38 degrees C) saturated air
to 35 degrees F (1.6 degrees C) dew point at 100 degrees F (38 degrees C)
ambient, with automatic drain trap, three valve by-pass system, motor and safety
disconnect switch in NEMA 250 Type 1 general purpose enclosure, wired from
compressor controller.
C.
Duplex Controller: Pre-wired in NEMA 250 Type 12 enclosure with fusible
disconnects, magnetic motor starters with overload protection, control circuit
transformers, clock timer, automatic water and air by-pass circuits, pressure
switches, hand-off automatic selector switches mounted in cabinet cover, and
safety disconnect door.
D.
Receiver: horizontal welded steel ASME SEC 8 receiver, prime coated with vinyl
lining, with gage, safety relief valve, and automatic tank drain.
E.
Air Line Filter Regulator: Regulating assembly with line pressure adjusting knob, 2
inch (50 mm) diameter line pressure gage, 1-1/4 inch (40 mm) pipe size
connections, clear polycarbonate collection bowl with 5 micron filter unit and
automatic drain.
2.07
Medical Vacuum System
A.
Duplex Vacuum Pump: Reciprocating Pump, Cast iron construction with rotor
mounted on stainless steel shaft supported by two external grease lubricated ball
bearings enclosed in packed stuffing boxes.
B.
Electrical Controls: Pre-wired in NEMA 250 Type 12 enclosure, with fusible
disconnects, magnetic motor starters, overload protection with manual reset, control
circuit transformers, automatic alternators, vacuum control switches, hand-off
automatic switches in cabinet cover, and safety disconnect door.
C.
Receiver: vertical, welded steel ASME SEC 8 receiver, prime coated with vinyl
lining, with gage, safety relief valve, and automatic tank drain.
2.08
Oxygen Manifol
A.
Duplex Automatic Manifold: Consisting of wall mounted control cabinet and
necessary header connections and pigtails for four liquid cylinders, arranged for two
cylinders in service and two cylinders in reserve.
B.
By-Pass System: Locate between regulators to service regulator or switch over
system without interrupting supply of gas. Pipe bleed valves to vent connector
within cabinet to allow adjustment of pressure reducing regulators.
C.
Cabinet: House components in lockable cabinet with baked enamel finish.
1. Three front mounted gages: Indicate bank and hospital line pressures.
2. Green indicator light: Indicate service bank in use.
3. Red indicator light: Indicate reserve bank in use.
4. Terminal block: Connections for remote alarms.
2.09
Alarm System
A.
High-Low Pressure Alarm Panels: Closed circuit, self- monitoring type, to monitor
oxygen, compressed vacuum, air nitrous oxide, and nitrogen.
1. Green light for systems normal.
2. High or low pressure warning:
a.
Green light extinguishes.
b.
Audible warning device sounds.
c.
Red light energizes.
3. Gage indicates pressure or vacuum.
4. Switch silences warning device.
5. Test switch to test light bulbs and audible warning device.
6. Provide system with internal switches, gages, control unit, and transformer.
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
15482 -5
Medical Gas Systems
B.
2.09
Alarm System (cont’d)
3. Switch silences warning device.
4. Test switch to test light bulbs and audible warning device.
5. Design system such that one, two or more monitors may be connected to a single
pressure switch.
6. Monitor following abnormal conditions.
a.
Oxygen reserve supply in use.
b.
Oxygen line pressure high.
c.
Oxygen line pressure low.
d.
Air line pressure high.
e.
Air line pressure low.
f.
Air lag pump on.
g.
Vacuum line pressure above normal.
h.
Vacuum line pressure below normal.
i.
Vacuum lag pump on
j.
Nitrous oxide reserve supply in use.
k.
Nitrous line pressure high.
l.
Nitrous line pressure low.
m.
Nitrogen reserve supply in use.
n.
Nitrogen line pressure high.
o.
Nitrogen line pressure low.
7.
High-low pressure switch: Dual circuit with two single pole, double throw,
snap action switches.
8.
Vacuum switch.
9.
Nitrogen switches.
PART 3
3.01
Multi-Signal Alarm Panel: Closed circuit, self-monitoring type, to monitor oxygen,
vacuum, compressed air, nitrous oxide, and nitrogen piping systems pressure or
liquid level.
1. Green light for systems normal.
2. For abnormal condition:
a.
Green light extinguishes.
b.
Audible warning device sounds.
c.
Red light energizes.
EXECUTION
Installation
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 99.
B.
Pre-Installation Cleaning: Disassemble positive pressure gas systems pipe,
fittings, valves, and components, except those supplied cleaned and prepared for
intended service, and thoroughly wash in hot solution of sodium carbonate or
trisodium phosphate mixed 1 lb to 3 gal (1 kg to 25 L) of water. After washing, rinse
with water, dry and cap until installation.
C.
Braze joints in pipe and tubing. Avoid leaving excess flux inside of pipe and
fittings. During brazing of pipe connections, purge interior of pipe continuously with
nitrogen.
D.
Effect changes in size with reducing fittings. Make changes in direction of required
turns or offsets with fittings or tubing shaped by bending tools. Make bends free of
flattening, buckling or thinning of tube wall.
E.
Cut pipe and tubing accurately and install without springing or forcing.
F.
Install exposed oxygen piping in wall-mounted sheet steel raceways and junction
boxes.
G.
Encase buried oxygen piping in cast-iron pipe. Provide with FM listed heat trace
with fixed temperature regulation, set for 80 degrees F (27 degrees C) maximum,
and terminating at junction box, mounted near main oxygen supply shut-off valve.
Insulate buried oxygen lines and heat trace with insulation as specified in Section
15260.
H.
Grade piping down in direction of flow.
I.
Provide pipe sleeves where pipes and tubing pass through walls, floors, roofs, and
partitions. Finish flush at both ends. Extend 2 inches above finished floors. Pack
space between pipe or tubing and sleeve, and calk.
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
15482 -6
Medical Gas Systems
J.
K.
L.
3.01
Identify piping with tape and decals. Provide piping identification code and
schematic. Refer to Section 15190. Install labelling on pipe at intervals of not
more than 20 feet (6 meters) and at least once in each room and each story
traversed by pipeline.
Excavate and backfill pipe trenches as specified in Section 02222 and Section
02223. Coordinate provision of utility warning and identification tape with backfill
operation. Provide above all buried lines at a depth of 8 to 12 inches below finish
grade.
Support gas piping with pipe hooks or hangers suitable for size of pipe, spaced:
1. 1/2 inch (13 mm) pipe or tubing: 72 inches (1830 mm).
2. 3/4 inch (20 mm) or one inch (25 mm) pipe or tubing: 96 inches (2440 mm).
3. 1-1/4 inches (30 mm) or larger (horizontal): 120 inches (3050 mm).
4. 1-1/4 inches (30 mm) or larger (vertical): every floor level.
Installation (cont’d)
M.
Install underground piping in trench minimum 42 inches (1070 mm) deep
adequately protected against physical damage and corrosion, or in ducts and
tunnels which are not occupied by fuel oil lines and are vented.
N.
Install isolation valves adjacent to main lines for risers if manual shut off valves
(zone control valves) are more than 15 feet (4.5 meters) from main or riser.
Installed lateral lines feeding shut off valves.
1. Locate immediately adjacent to main or riser.
2. Ensure not accessible to unauthorized personnel.
3. Identify gas and function.
4. Leave in open position with handle removed or sealed.
O.
Except where indicated or in flush wall mounted cabinets, install manual shut off
valves with stem vertical and accessible for operation and maintenance.
P.
Install strainers on inlet side of pressure reducing valves. Provide main gas valves
(pressure reducing or flow control) with by-passes and isolation valves to permit
maintenance without interruption of gas.
Q.
Provide a valved by-pass around receivers.
R.
Vibration and Noise Isolation: Refer to Section 15242.
S.
Medical Air Compressor Systems: Isolate systems including receivers, dryers, and
filters until after completion and approval of purity tests for compressed air system.
Tie-in at flange or union joint.
T.
Provide medical air compressors and vacuum pumps with water supply piped from
potable water system. Provide reduced pressure back flow preventer on water
supply.
U.
Install bulk liquid oxygen system to NFPA 50 and under supervision of
manufacturer. [Size liquid oxygen tank's concrete foundation and tank anchoring
for 3 times fully loaded weight.] Provide bulk liquid oxygen systems with shut-off
valve and connection point with valve for portable emergency oxygen supply.
[Install bulk oxygen to inlet side of oxygen manifold.]
V.
Provide electric motor drive equipment with electrical equipment and wiring. Refer
to Section 16180.
3.03
A.
B.
3.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Piping Systems Cleaning And Pressure Testing
After erection of pipe and tubing but prior to installation of service outlet valves,
blow systems clear of free moisture and foreign matter with nitrogen gas.
Install service outlet valves, subject system to test pressure of 150 psig (1034 kPa)
with nitrogen or dry compressed air. Check with soapy water. Provide 24-hour
standing pressure test.
Cross-Connection Tests
Independent testing agency to certify system is complete, zone valve installed,
alarm systems functional, and test performed. Document tests and submit.
Reduce pressure in piping systems other than system under investigation to
atmospheric.
Test system with dry compressed air or dry nitrogen with test pressure in piping
system at 50 psig (345 kPa).
Check each station outlet of every piping system to determine test gas is dispensed
only from outlet of system under investigation. Measure pressure with gage
attached to specific adaptor. Do not use universal adaptors.
Disconnect test gas and connect proper gas to each system. Purge entire system
to remove test gas. Check with analyzer suitable for gas installed.
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
15482 -7
Medical Gas Systems
END OF SECTION
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
15482 -8
Medical Gas Systems
SECTION 15500
HEATING, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING
HV AC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
Work Included
Internal environmental design conditions and external ambient conditions.
System Design Criteria
1.02
A.
B.
Related Work
Section 15900: Controls and Instrumentation
Section 15990: Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems.
1.03
A.
reference Standards
The air conditioning system has been designed in accordance with the following standards:
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air conditioning Engineers.
SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association Inc.
UMC
Uniform Mechanical Code.
All mechanical equipment used in the air conditioning system shall be in accordance with the
following codes and standards.
A.R.I
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ANSI
American National Standards Institute.
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers.
ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
UL
Underwriters Laboratories.
B.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.05
A.
B.
C.
1.06
A.
B.
C.
Scope Of Works
The work covered under this section shall include all the supply, installation, testing,
commissioning, maintenance and delivering in good operating conditions of complete air
conditioning and ventilation systems as described in these specifications and shown on
drawings and bill of quantities.
The Contractor shall provide all the necessary components and accessories as well as
materials, manpower, equipment, tools, scaffolding, painting, testing facilities, supervision
and overhead, etc., at his own expense to execute a complete operable system.
The Contractor shall obtain the necessary information and instruction for the execution of the
works only from the Engineer and not from third parties.
The Contractor shall program his work such that it will not interfere with other trades and to
suit site requirements.
Schedules and specifications include but not limited to the following:
1.To check the design and to undertake the responsibility of giving the design conditions in
the occupied areas.
2.To supply, install and commission the air-conditioning plant to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
3.To connect air handling units/fan coil units drains to the nearest drain point.
Description Of The Work
The HVAC works shall consist of ventilation, cooling / heating system.
All as per specifications, drawings and bill of quantities.
All Toilets and Kitchens should be ventilated with extract fan, capacities and type as shown
on drawings.
Fire dampers according to Civil Defense requirements.
Design Conditions
General: The installation is based on the following design conditions, capacities and
dimensions given in the specifications and drawings will be considered as the minimum to be
accepted and it is the responsibility of the contractor to select all unspecified equipment to
obtain the required design and guarantee conditions.
External Conditions
1.
Dry Bulb Temperature (summer) 35°C
2.
Wet Bulb Temperature (summer) 21°C
3.
Dry Bulb Temperature (winter)
0°C
Internal Environmental conditions for all spaces summer 23°C, RH 50% and winter 24°C
15500 - 1
Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning H V A C
1.06
D.
1.07
A.
B.
C.
1.08
Design Conditions (cont’d)
Acoustic Treatment
Particular attention shall be paid to alleviation of interior and exterior noise levels through
windows and structure. Noise attenuation shall be achieved by the use of appropriate
materials and techniques. In the design of public areas and guest areas. Special acoustic
treatment shall be provided to alleviate defects within the rooms and noise transmission
outside the rooms.
Maximum indicative noise levels are as follows:
(1) Corridors & Public Areas
30 NC
(2) Offices
30 NC
HVAC Control System
The chilled water design parameters are:
Supply temperature at 7o C
Flow rate – as specified on schedules at Dt 5oK temperature rise AS LWT = 7 oC and EWT
= 12 °C.
The chiller control Panel shall include a sequence panel which will control the sequence of
operation of the chillers in response to cooling demand. The sequence of chillers will be
initiated by temperature sensors which monitor the supply water temperature.
The chilled water pump control Panel shall operate the chilled water pumps whenever low line
pressure condition exists, interlock shall be provided with the chiller control panel to stop the
chillers whenever the chilled water pumps stop.
Chillers
The design, construction, materials and finishes of all units shall be suitable for outdoor use in
the locations, climate and operating conditions indicate in this specification and drawings. The
units shall be started on site by the Manufacturer’s qualified technical staff.
The size of the chiller plant shall be such that it can brought into the position and sufficient
space for access and manufacturers recommendations space for serving shall be maintained
The units shall be packaged and fully factory assembled complete with operating and safety
controls and all customary auxiliaries deemed necessary by the manufacturer for the safe,
controlled automatic operations of the equipment.
The plant shall comply with Bs 4434 “The Safety Code For Refrigerating Systems Utilizing
Chlorofluorocarbons”. It shall operate by using R-22 refrigerant but it shall be fully compatible
to operate with refrigerant R134.a and R407. Manufacturer shall provide efficiency of their
equipment per each refrigerant along with a list showing all requirement needed to replace
the R22 by 134a. or R407.
1.08.1 Compressors
Compressors shall be of screw rotary serviceable construction with forced oil fed system with
filter(s), drier(s), crank case heater(s), suction and discharge valves and all necessary
auxiliaries, copper flexible connector to be fitted at the discharge of the compressor.
1.08.2 Screw Compressors
The Compressor shall have automatic capacity control equipment, which will control at points
between 10% and 100% of fully duty. The compressor shall not be enabled to start unless in
the fully unload condition. The capacity model shall be fully modulating.
The lubrication system shall be arranged with an interlock or other means to ensure adequate
oil pressure at all bearings as the compressor starts. A hand reset pressure or flow switch
shall stop the compressor on a lubrication system failure. The pipe line from a positive
displacement oil pump shall incorporate a pressure regulating valve to relieve excess oil to
the reservoir, a replaceable or cleanable filter shall be positioned in the oil delivery pipes. A
refrigerant cooled thermostatically controlled oil cooling systems shall be controlled electric
heater with arrangement to ensure that the compressor does not start until satisfactory oil
temperature is achieved. Lubrication systems pressurized does not start until satisfactory oil
temperature is achieved.
A device shall be fitted to prevent the pressure differential across the compressor causing
backward rotation at a normal or emergency stop.
15500 - 2
Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning H V A C
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.08.2
Screw Compressors (cont’d)
Each compressor shall be provided with the following ancillary equipment items fully
connected: - Service stop valves on refrigerant suction and drop.
- Suction and discharge refrigerant pressure gas glycerin filled, minimum 50mm
diameter with pressure with pressure and saturation scales in bar and C oil reservoir
level sight glass.
- Oil pressure gage 50mm Diam. With isolating device.
- Low pressure switch or flow switch
- High oil temperature cut-out with electromechanical anti recycle and all other safety
devices necessary for operation in a totally fail safe manner. All devices shall be preset by manufacturer at work.
Compressor units shall be suitable for continuous and automatic operation and be free
of vibration. Noise level restrictions are shown on the Equipment data Sheet. A full
noise spectrum shall be provided.
A. Controls
The operating and safety controls shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following
Motor temperature winding (Inherent motor protector) protection by embedded ambient
insensitive solid state sensor and discharge gas temperature sensor for each motor to open
all three phases in the event of overloading on any one phase.
High and low refrigerant pressure safety devices.
Differential oil pressure safety switch.
Antishort cycling timer.
Crank case heater control.
Chilled water safety thermostat (antifreeze thermostat).
Flow Switch interlock.
A command control micro processor which shall be built-in each chiller and shall control
capacity cycling of the compressor and unloaders to satisfy the dictates of a leaving water
temperature sensor and a return water temperature compensation sensor. All sensors shall be
of the thermistor type providing inputs to the micro processor. The micro processor shall
recycle the capacity control to the unloaded condition following plant shut down. The
microprocessor controller shall simple interface with other control systems such as BMS.
Fan cycling head pressure control.
Electronic expansion valve.
Automatic pump down control on start up and shut down.
Sequence selection switch for compressor operation.
Abnormal conditions alarm lights.
Controlled pull down limits for compressor loading on start up, (Reduced starting load part
winding motor or star delta starting).
Power Demand Limit Control.
Chilled water Temperature Reset.
Hours Run Meter.
Remote Start Stop Control.
Common Alarm Volt Free Control.
Water Flow Switch.
Low Refrigerant Temperature.
Low Oil Pressure.
Low Ambient Temperature Start-up.
A weatherproof and dust tight housing shall be provided with lockable tight sealed door(s) all
factory wired controls and instrumentation. The housing shall also contain pressure and
temperature gauges for refrigerant, together with appropriate operating and warning lights,
field power and control circuit terminal blocks, circuit breakers, motor starter control relays
and disconnect switches.
B. Motor Starting
The motor starting equipment shall limit the starting current of each motor/compressor unit
2½ - 3 times the full load running current.
With multi compressor units each compressor must run up to its full speed before the next
compressor can start.
Compressor starts shall be limited to (6) per hour.
Starters shall incorporate thermal overload devices on each phase with single phase with
single phasing protection.
15500 - 3
Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning H V A C
5.
6.
The units shall be capable of starting under all ambient and water temperature conditions
likely to occur.
Compressors shall be part winding started.
C. Evaporator (cont’d)
The evaporator shall be of the direct expansion shell and tube design with removable heads
and multi refrigerant circuits Constructed to ASME and tested to a pressure of 1030 K.P.A
refrigerant side with a water side fouling factor of 0.00009 m2 dec. C/W.
Construction shall be seamless copper tubes expanded into tube sheets.
The evaporator shell shall be insulated to a minimum thickness of 38 mm: (K=0.28 w/m C)
with closed cell insulation suitably protected against weather and mechanical damage.
Gland type drain valve with hose union connection shall be provided.
D. Air Cooled Condenser
Air cooled condenser coil(s) shall be of non ferrous construction with fins mechanically
bonded to tube to ASME U I standards.
Coils shall be constructed of seamless copper tubes with aluminum fins having a maximum
of 470 fins/meter.
Sub cooling circuits and liquid accumulators shall be provided where required.
Provision for purging non condensable shall be made.
Fans shall be direct or belt driven propeller type, statically and dynamically balanced having
permanently lubricated ball bearings. Fans shall be aluminum or zinc plated steel with zinc
plated steel hubs and the motors shall have inherent over current protection. Belt driven fans
shall have pitch adjustment.
Construction and rating of fans shall comply to A.M.C.A. standards.
Motors shall be weatherproof and protected and all bearings shall be capable of operating in
dust laden atmosphere.
All motors shall be selected with service factor to N.E.M.A. standards.
Fans shall be fitted for low noise levels.
Coil(s) and fans shall be fitted with protective safety guards.
All fan/motor assemblies shall be mounted on vibration isolators.
The condenser and sub cooler shall be factory leak tested under water to 1034 k.p.a
and pressure test to 3100 k.p.a.
E. Casing
The framework shall be constructed from 6 mm. Thickness weld steel sections.
Panels and access doors shall be constructed from 2.5 mm. And 2.0 mm. galvanized sheet
steel, bonderised and given a special tropicalised (epoxy) heat reflecting, corrosion resistant
finish to withstand the climatic temperature, humidity andd atmospheric dust conditions
indicates in this Specification to provide a fully weatherproof enclosure for components.
Side panels, safety guards and where necessary top panels shall be removable for
inspection.
Panels shall be robust in construction and shall not flex or vibrate during operating of fans
and compressors.
Lifting eyes or facilities for lifting tubes in base frames and sling spreaders if necessary shall
be provided to avoid damaging the equipment during Site lifting activities.
F. Noise & Vibration
Appropriate measure shall be taken to control the noise and vibration from the chillers to the
surroundings. The chillers shall be located on the roof and erected on a jacked-up inertia base
to provide extra isolation and sound transmission.
Based on the selected chillers the sound reduction shall be to the following criteria :Frequency (HZ)
Estimated
Chiller
Transmission
Sound Reduction Indices
63
99
125
96
250
97
500
97
1000
95
2000
91
4000
87
8000
81
5
5
7
12
18
21
16
16
To reduce noise levels at source the chillers shall be fitted with low noise, high efficiency fan
and compressors shall be enclosed in acoustic housings. To reduce the noise each chiller
shall be mounted on spring anti vibration mounts selected for a minimum static deflection of
50mm. If individual compressors are also mounted on springs the compatibility of the two
mounting systems shall be verified.
A complete and detailed analysis of the sound and vibration shall be carried out by the
contractor. Taking into consideration the allowable noise power levels inside the building
facilities
15500 - 4
Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning H V A C
G.
Other Features
Each Chiller shall also incorporate the following :§ Oil pressure Gages
§ Refrigerant Pressure Gages
§ Compressors Isolating Valves
§ Condenser Coil Wind Baffles
§ Compressor Muffler
§ Condenser Coil Protection guards
§ Corrosion Resistant Coated Coils
§ Low Noise / High pressure Condenser Fans
§ Compressor Attenuating Enclosures
§ Power supply Isolator “Non fused disconnect switch”
§ Remote Start / Stop
§ Single Point Power Connection
PART 2 COORDINATION WITH STRUCTURE AND THE SERVICES
2.1 General
A.
The Contractor shall ensure that all items of equipment, ductwork and pipework are capable
of being located in their allocated positions, after due consideration to their coordination with
the building structure, ceiling levels and other services, before ordering or manufacturing any
items.
B.
Any modifications necessary on site to ensure full coordination of services shall not in any
way defer from the performance of systems as a whole.
PART 3 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION
3.1 General
A.
Special consideration shall be given to the design and installation of pipework to ensure that
expansion and contraction resulting from extremes of temperature can be accommodated
freely without causing damage to the pipe system or the building.
B.
Where pipes crossing expansion joints, expansion fittings should be used.
PART 4 COMMISSIONING
4.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
General
The Contractor shall allow for all water and air distribution services to be balanced and
commissioned in accordance with the relevant commissioning codes published by the
Chartered Institution of the Building Services Engineers.
The balancing and commissioning of all air-conditioning circuits shall be carried out by the
contractor.
The Contractor shall supply and install on all air distribution systems all test points required in
order to commission the systems completely. Testing and commissioning results shall be
submitted for approval to the engineer.
The Contractor will be particularly required to show, in distribution systems, that the correct
design static pressure will be available at the most remote diffusers.
END OF SECTION
15500 - 5
Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning H V A C
SECTION 15530
FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope Of Work
A.
The work shall be designed, erected and commissioned by specialist Fire Protection Engineers
and Contractors, conversant with modern conception of First Aid fire protection effective and
dependable in an emergency; the requirements of the local authorities on fire prevention shall
be incorporated. The tenderer shall obtain the necessary approval to the system design and
working drawings and the required acceptance certificates, if so required, under local rules,
from such authorities.
B.
The system proposed is purely an auxiliary protection system with a static fire reserve, fire
pumps, hose reels and landing valve facilities at strategic locations in the building as indicated.
C.
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials equipment, appurtenances, tools, services all
temporary work to provide and install the system comprising:
a.
Breaching inlets for fire bridges use.
b.
Landing valves.
c.
Hose reel with cabinets.
d.
Fire fighting pump set.
e.
Test line with flow meter to test the pumps.
f.
Piping and valves for wet risers network.
g.
Piping and valves for dry risers network.
h.
Automatic air release valves.
i
Portable fire extinguishers
j.
All builder's works as required.
k.
Fire Dampers.
l.
All electrical work associated with fire protection system.
m.
Floor alarm control assembly.
n.
Painting.
o.
Installing, testing and commissioning.
1.2 General Requirements
A.
Piping shall be pitched to permit complete draining of the system.
B.
Fire reserve shall not be used in any way to provide water for other purposes and shall be
sufficient for minimum of 1 1/2 hour continuous operation of fire pump at full load.
C.
All valves shall be readily accessible and risers shall be securely supported at each floor.
D.
All valves shall be located where readily accessible, secured from use of unauthorized
personnel.
E.
No item shall be installed delaying any of the existing Local Fire Department regulations. In all
cases, however, installation shall comply with NFPA.
1.3 Builder’s Work
A.
All Builder's work in connection with supports, brackets, Clamps, walkways, closing of shafts,
pump foundations, anchors, concrete bedding isolation of anti-vibration pads as necessary, all
mechanical and electrical supports, electrical control panel, pressure switches, storage batteries
shall be carried out to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
B.
Cutting openings, constructing fire hose and extinguisher cabinets with frames of appropriate
materials and size, chases and making good shall be carried out to the entire satisfaction of the
Engineer.
1.4 Painting
A.
All steelworks in connection with supports for pipes and equipment exposed to the elements
shall be painted with two coats of an approved rust preventative paint.
B.
All exposed surfaces or equipment, machinery, motors, pipework, hangers, brackets, valves,
etc., shall be painted with two undercoats and two finishing coats of enamel paint to approved
color.
1.5 Tests
A.
Fire line piping shall be tested at 200 psi (1380 Kpa) hydrostatic pressure. Pressure test shall
be maintained for two hours without any perceptible drop in pressure.
B.
Test shall be performed in the presence of, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
C.
The Engineer or his appointed Agent will require to witness the work tests of the pumping
station when completed as packaged unit. The testing shall be carried out prior to leaving the
manufacturer's works and shall include as a minimum hydrostatic, mechanical, electrical and
functional tests to determine compliance with the Specification requirements.
15530 - 1
Fire Fighting System
PART 2
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
2.1 Piping System
Refer to Section 15060 pipe, pipe fittings.
2.2 Hangers Supports , Anchors & Guides
Refer to Section 15090 supports, anchors and seals.
2.3 Fire Inlet Breaching Piece
Horizontal mounting, 2-way breaching constructed to meet the requirements of BS 5041 Part 3
and boxes with BS 5041 parts. These units shall have spring loaded non-return valves at the
inlet ports and shall be fitted with 25mm drain valve and drain cock. Blank caps are supplied as
standard.
2.4 Inlet Box
A.
Recessed wall box being the Siamese connection with Georgian wired glass door marked in red
from inside: "FIRE BRIGADE CONNECTION" in both English and Arabic.
B.
The door should be as follows:
1.
Fastened only be means of a spring cylinder lock which can also be operated from inside
without the aid of a key after the glass has been broken.
2.
Made large enough for hose to be connected to inlets even if the door cannot be opened
and the only means of access is by breaking the glass.
C.
The box should be constructed from Zinc coated steel sheet and primer weatherproof painted.
2.5
Fire Hose Cabinet (FHC)
A. Fire Hose Cabinet (FHC)
The fire hose cabinet shall be automatic swinging recessed type.
Hose reels shall be in accordance with BS 5274. The hose reel shall have a 30 meters long of 25
mm. Internal diameter reinforced non-kinkable rubber hose capable of withstanding a working
pressure of 16 bar. The hose shall be wound on a fabricated steel drum with circular side plates.
The hose reel shall turn on automatically when 1.5 – 1.8 meters of hose is withdraw from the real.
The hose reel shall be equipped with shut-off valve and pressure reducing valve for connecting with
pipework.
The hose nozzle shall be of chrome plated brass, JET/SPRAY/SHUT/OFF nozzle, and shall have
6mm orifice.
The cabinet shall be heavy steel construction finished with red color paint labeled “FIRE HOSE
REEL” and in Arabic.
The fire hose cabinet shall include a dry chemical fire extinguisher of the ABC type as specified
hereafter.
The fire hose cabinet shall be of dimensions sufficient to include the hose reel, the shut-off
valve and the fire extinguisher and to fit with the available space as shown on the drawings.
B.
Fire Hose Rack (FHR)
The fire hose rack shall consist of:
a. Cabinet: Cabinet and door leaf shall be made of 1.5 mm steel sheet with all around folded
edges, door leafs hinged flush mounted or door frame.
Cabinet shall be equipped with vertical wired glass windows on front door. The cabinet shall be
painted red with electrostatic powder paint and labeled fire hose rack.
The door shall be recessed type base with aluminum turn handle chrome plated.
b. fire hose, synthetic of 65mm diameter and 40 mm long equipped with brass male coupling for
the connection with the landing valve, and with the aluminum alloy nozzle to Civil Defense
approval. The fire hose rack shall be located at 1000 mm above finish floor level.
2.6
Landing Valves
A.
Landing valves shall be installed on the set risers for the use of Fire Brigade inside buildings as
shown on the Drawings.
B.
Landing valve shall be gunmetal globe valves, high pressure to BS. 5041 with 65 mm. dia. Bore
fitted with 65 mm. Instantaneous female coupling to conform to BS 336 and a brass blank cap
secured by a suitable length of chain. The landing valve shall have 65 mm. dia flanged inlet for
attachment to the dry riser.
C.
The valve shall equipped with spindle not less than 22.2 m dia. and fitted with a gunmetal hand
wheel of about 150 mm. dia. marked with OPEN and CLOSED directions. Opening shall be
anti-clockwise.
D.
The whole valve fittings shall be sound construction and hydraulically tested to a pressure of
20.7 bar before being connected to the dry riser.
E.
The valve shall be installed about 760 mm. above finished floor level. The valve shall be
finished with red color paint.
2.7 Siamese Connection Assembly
A.
Siamese connection assembly shall be installed for use of Fire Brigade, as shown on Drawings.
15530 - 2
Fire Fighting System
B.
The Siamese connection assembly shall be gunmetal with two inlets. Each shall consist of a 65
mm. dia instantaneous male coupling and a non-return valve and protected with a cap secured
by a suitable length of chain.
2.7 Siamese Connection Assembly (cont’d)
C.
The coupling shall conform to B.S. 336.
D.
The Siamese connection assembly shall have 100mm. dia flanged outlet for attachment to the
dry riser or wet main.
E.
The Siamese connection assembly shall be finished with red color paint, and enclosed inside
stainless flush mounted box with a labeled wired glass door.
F.
The Siamese connection assembly shall be located 1000 mm. above ground level.
2.8
Pedestal Fire Hydrant
A.
Pedestal fire hydrant shall be constructed of cast iron castings to BS. 1452 complete with 100
mm dia. Flange inlet and two 65 mm dia. valves with instantaneous outlets to BS. 336 and with
brass male couplings protected with cap secured by a suitable length of chain.
B.
The fire hydrant shall be sound construction and hydraulically tested to a pressure of 20.7 bar
before being connected to the fire fighting network.
C.
The fire hydrant shall be installed about 760 mm above ground level and finished with red color
paint.
D.
The fire hydrant shall be provided with an isolating valve installed underground complete with
extension tube, operating key and cover.
E.
A fire hose unit shall be installed to serve each fire hydrant, it shall comprise 65 mm. dia textile
fire hose 40m long with male and female couplings, nozzle jet and spray with male coupling,
and cabinet.
2.9 Air Release Valves
A.
It shall be fitted at the top of riser to release air when the riser is charged with water or admit air
when draining off.
B.
When fitted the automatic air release valve ensures complete charging and draining of the riser
column.
C.
It shall be screwed 25mm BSP male.
2.10 Portable Fire Extinguishers
A.
It shall be UL listed and FM approved.
B.
Supply and install wherever shown on the drawings portable fire extinguishers of the capacities
and ratings indicated on the drawings.
C.
Each unit shall be complete with a frame for hanging, hose, discharge valve and pressure
gauge.
D.
Extinguisher types:
1.
Carbon dioxide self-expelling type 6 Kg. capacity for use in all flammable liquid services
and electrical hazard spaces. Body shall be of red enamel galvanized steel body, flexible
hose and horn discharge, squeeze lever, carrying handle, pressure gauge and mounting
brackets. Extinguisher of this type is suitable for indoor use. Extinguishers serving guest
rooms corridors shall be inside cabinet made of 1.5mm steel electrostatic powder painted
to the approval of the architect.
E.
Extinguishers shall be of the approved type by fire brigade authorities.
PART 3 GENERAL
3.1 Operating And Maintenance Instructions
A.
Three sets of operating and maintenance instructions, on cloth, covering completely the
operation and maintenance of fire fighting system, and automatic control shall be furnished to
the Owner. In addition, one set of operating and maintenance instructions for each article shall
be neatly framed behind glass and hung where directed.
B.
The Contractor shall upon completion of the Contract, furnish a list of names of local
manufacturers representatives, with telephone numbers in order to expedite the future ordering
of replacement parts.
3.2
Operating Services , Maintenance And Guarantee
A.
After completion of all installation and required tests, the Contractor shall be responsible for
and shall effectively maintain and uphold in good working condition to the satisfaction of the
Engineer every part of the works for the period of twenty four (24) Calendar months from the
date of issue of the Substantial Completion Certificate for the whole period.
B.
The Contractor shall at his own cost make good all defects due to faulty design bad
workmanship or the use of defective or improper material which shall occur during the said
period, and shall replace at his own expense such parts or materials which in the opinion of the
Engineer found unsatisfactory. During the said period the Contractor is required to carry on all
maintenance work including cleaning, oiling, greasing, adjusting controls, checking oil levels,
replacing defect parts and pressure etc., and painting at the end of the Maintenance Period.
15530 - 3
Fire Fighting System
END OF SECTION
15530 - 4
Fire Fighting System
SECTION 15620
BOILERS
1.0
Hot Water Heating Boiler
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
1.05
A.
B.
Standards And Codes
Applicable components shall be designed and constructed in accordance with these codes with
addition as required by this specification.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Section 1,
Power Boiler.
American Boiler Manufacturers Association (ABMA) Manual of Industry Standard.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
UL 795. Commercial-Industrial Gas-Fired Heating
Equipment.
National Fire Protection-Association (NFPA). Prevention of Furnace Explosions in Fuel Oil and
Natural Gas, Fired Single Burner Boiler Furnaces.
Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).
National Electric Code (NEC).
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
Type And Design
Boiler shall be of the packaged automatic type for hot water service.
Boiler shall be of cast iron elements of 8 bar working pressure and shall be subject to hydraulic
pressure test of not less than one and half times the design working pressure for 24 hours min.
Boiler shall be self-contained units composed of a boiler and a burner specifically adjusted for
each installation.
All exposed metal parts of boilers shall be degreased, painted with a 2 coats of primer and
finished with a high glass spray paint suitable for temperature up to 80°C.
2
The boiler shall be externally insulated with 50mm thickness of 48 kg/m density with air tight
jacket.
Construction
Boiler shall be cast iron with high mechanical resistance pressurization procure maximum heat
transfer.
The exchange surfaces on the fire tube shall be designed to yield optimum efficiency as
indicated.
The fire tube shall have large convection surfaces.
Boiler shall be are to be completely factory assembled and tested ready for immediate attachment
of supply and return lines, drain lines, plus fuel electrical and vent connections.
Boiler shell shall be constructed in accordance with EN303 European specification and must
receive authorized boiler inspection prior to shipment.
Hot water outlet connections shall be located on the top center line of the boiler. The boiler shall
be designated to rapidly mix the return water with the boiler water.
Boiler shell shall be furnished with adequate manholes to facilitate boiler inspection and cleaning.
Boiler shall have a minimum overall operating thermal efficiency at full load of not less than 93%.
Boiler shall be mounted on a mild steel base frame and concrete base of 15 cm.
Control And Regulation Are Performed By a Pre-Wired Control Unit Comprising:
o
A boiler water temperature limit regulating thermostat, to regulate LWT at 80 C and EWT at 70°C
with a maximum flow temperature 110°C.
Two switches (main ON/OFF).
Control switches, relays and transformers shall be mounted and wired in a totally enclosed steel
cabinet by the manufacturer.
Electrical Connections
The electrical installation and earthling must comply with applicable standards, although an
ON/OFF switch is provided on the control unit a regulation circuit breaker must be fitted. The
boiler supply must be capable to withstand at 5A/220V.
All the burner cable and other necessary connections on the terminal board of the control unit
shall be connected in accordance with manufacturer wiring diagram.
15620 - 1
Boilers
1.06
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.07
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Burner And Controls
The burner shall have controls for full modulation with low fire start.
The burner and its auxiliaries are to be mounted on the boiler front as an integral unit easily
removed when desired.
Burners shall be of the fully automatic mechanical pressure atomizing type, factory assembled
and fire tested.
Burners shall be so constructed to enable easy dismantling and maintenance of the different parts
and shall be suitable for burning fuel No.2 commercial (light oil) quietly and automatically with an
overall efficiency not less than 80%. It shall be complete with the following components and
accessories:
1.
Oil burning nozzles.
2.
Ignition transformers and ignition electrodes.
3.
Blower.
4.
Blower motor and auto starter (2900RPM 50 cycles).
5.
A burning safety warning light.
6.
Flame monitoring site glass.
Each burner shall be automatically controlled by an aquastat actuated by the outgoing boiler water
temperature.
Each burner shall be fully modulating and shall have primary and secondary air inlet modulating
damper.
In addition to the aquastat the burner shall be controlled by the following safety devices.
1.
High limit thermostat, for protection against high water temperature.
2.
Photocell to provide for a shut-down of the burner in the event that combustion does not take
place.
3.
Fire cut off switch to shut down fuel in case of fire.
4.
A burning safety warning light.
Chimney And Boiler Flues
Prefabricated double wall, 1mm thick stainless steel inner wall and 0.7mm aluminized steel outer
case with 25mm rock wool insulation of density 96 kg/m3 in between.
Boiler shall be connected with branching from main chimney flue, flue shall extend through main
shaft up to terminate 1.5m above the building.
Chimney shall be sized by the contractor to suit the characteristics of his boiler.
All joints shall be sealed to prevent leakage of flue gases.
chimney should be insulated for hole height complete with sliding inspection door, cleaning
opening and top cap.
END OF SECTION
15620 - 2
Boilers
SECTION 15763
AIR HANDLING UNIT
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
Work Included
This section covers the furnishing, installing, testing and placing in satisfactory operating condition
of the air handling units, accessories, controls and related work as shown on the drawings,
described in the schedules and as specified here in.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Related Work
Section 15060:
Section 15210:
Section 15160:
Section 15258:
Section 15750:
Section 15820:
Section 15840:
Section 15880:
Section 15900:
1.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Reference Standards
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
Air Conditioning and Refrigerating Institute (ARI)
Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA)
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
Under Writers Laboratories (UL)
1.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Submittals
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 15011.
Submit fan curves showing fan performance with system operating point plotted on curves.
Submit Manufacturer's installation instructions.
Manufacturer's recommended spare parts and tools list.
Certificate of compliance for materials and operation.
Field tests.
1.05
A.
B.
Quality Assurance
Provide fans bearing AMCA certified rating seal.
Provide filter media with UL Class I or Class II ratings as specified.
PART 2
2.01
Pipe and Pipe Fittings
Vibration Isolation
Expansion Compensation
Duct Insulation
Coils
Air Distribution Equipment (Fans)
Ductwork
Air Treatment Equipment (Filters)
Controls and Instrumentation
PRODUCTS
Air Handling Units
2.01.1 General
1.
A name plate shall be permanently affixed to every unit listing air volume, fan static pressure, coil
duties and heat recovery equipment ratings.
2.
The automatic control equipment required shall be supplied by the controls manufacturer and fitted
by the equipment manufacturer, unless otherwise instructed.
3.
Lifting rings shall be provided on all individual components of 35 kg mass and above for
maintenance removal.
4.
All bearings shall be supplied fully lubricated.
5.
Spare drive belts shall be provided, in sets where applicable, for each drive in the assembly to a
total of one complete change per drive.
6.
Air handling units shall not exceed the overall maximum dimensions specified by = 15%.
7.
Where serpentine averaging thermostat sensors are required, a full support system shall be
provided.
8.
All access doors shall be insulated to the same standard as the unit casing, and they shall open
towards the high pressure side.
9.
All construction and applications shall comply with the requirements of BS8313 with respect of fire
precautions against fire.
10. All components shall be inherently non flammable or be made permanently so by suitable
treatment.
11. Any viscous liquid used shall have a flash point in excess of 177C.
12. All components shall be tested in accordance with the appropriated BS, ARI or type test certificates
as described in this specification.
15763 - 1
Air Handling Unit
2.01.1 General (cont’d)
13. All electrical items of equipment cabling, wiring, and works shall comply with the latest edition of
IEE wiring regulations & electricity at work regulations 1989 or to equivalent UL requirement.
14. Test points shall be provided to enable comprehensive air side and water side tests to be made on
each air handling unit.
15. Multizone air handling units casing shall be constructed to accommodate both the cooling coil and
heating coils above each other with the maximum flow face velocity for each coil as per the
specifications.
16. The unit casings shall be made of insulated double panels built into a post frame.
17. Each section of unit shall have a post framework constructed of multi angle formed members
measuring 100 mm. X 100 mm. With 25 mm. deep return edge and 25 mm. seating flange
fabricated from 3 mm. thick mild steel for units, handling 9 m3/s to 20 m3/s, 2 mm. thick mild steel
on units 2.2 to 9 m3/s and 1.2 mm. thick mild steel on units “0” to 2.2 m3/s. Corners shall be formed
from mitered joints welded to form a rigid strong joint cleaned off smooth.
18. Frame posts and cross members shall be constructed to incorporate 50 mm. nominal thickness
thermal insulation which shall be sealed in position with an additional angle member riveted or spot
welded in place.
19. All framework shall be painted for protection against corrosion after manufacture lifting eye bolts
shall be provided on the corners of the sections and shall be reomoved after installation, the holes
being plugged off with suitably sized flush fitting brass plugs.
20. Insulation materials shall be tested to and shall comply with BS4765 part 7 and achieve class 1
ratings.
21. Insulation shall have a thermal conductivity not greater than 0.04W/mk and have a minimum
thickness of 50mm.
22. Insulation incorporating CFCs in their manufacture, woodwools slabs, polystyrene and urea
formaldehyde shall not be used.
23. If mineral fibers material is used the density shall not be less than 80 kg/m3 and provisions shall be
made to ensure that no settling in materials occurs.
24. Panels shall be formed two sheets of 1.2mm thick electronic plated steel having 25mm. returned
edges riveted or spot welded together.
25. The insulated top and bottom panels of the units shall be designed to withstand the weight of a man
and the necessary equipment for maintenance purpose, by forming the inner metal surface in a
number of tray pieces which fit inside the complete outer panel section .
26. Panels shall be adequately stiffened and braced to prevent flexing and drumming and as necessary
to maintain rigidity.
27. All panels shall be of the bolted in removable type: panels fitting flush into frames and corner posts
to give smooth external faces.
28. Joints between panels and framework shall be sealed air tight with non hardening plastic ribbon seal
seating strip.
29. The completed air handling unit casings shall be designed and installed to reduce the fans sound
power level radiated into the plant room, or roof level, by the amounts as specified in schedule
S3.01. The density and type of thermal and acoustic insulation to be sandwiched within the panels
shall be selected to achieve the panel attenuation specified in Schedule S3.01.
Schedule S3.01
Frequency
Power Loss
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
HZ
dB
63
22.5
125
28
250
27
500
30
1K
35
2K
27.5
4k
29
Framework and panels shall be constructed so that bare metal bridges linking inside to outside will
not occur. The units shall be designed to prevent condensation from occurring from any cool
surface of the unit.
Individual panel sizes shall not be greater than 3.5m by 1.75m. Where sections are dimensionally
larger, more than one panel shall be used.
All panels and section framework shall be of manageable proportions for transportation and
shipment.
The air handing plants shall be painted at the manufacture’s works before dispatch and shipment
internally with a complete corrosion resistant paint finish.
The handing plants shall be decoratively painted externally in accordance with the painting and
decorating Clause of the Building Specifications.
Air handing units which are installed externally shall be provided with rainwater hood completely
extended above the air handing unit. The unit shall be decoratively painted with final two coats
15763 - 2
Air Handling Unit
suitable for the weather conditions that prevail in ramallah (see clause 1.02 of this specification). All
unit intake and exhaust shall be provided with rain water hood as well as birds screen.
2.01.1 General (cont’d)
35. Doors in access (empty) sections and fan sections shall be suitably sized for man access into and
for easy maintenance of the equipment. Each door shall be of double skin construction with an in
fill of thermal and acoustic insulation to provide acoustic properties equivalent to the unit panels.
Doors shall be designed to be an airtight fit and match the unit panels. The doors shall be doubles
hinged to ensure a good seal onto the gaskets and shall include chromium plated handles, seals and
fasteners to hold the neoprene seals in compression. All doors shall be openable from outside or
inside the section and shall be provided with door locks, which can be locked from outside the unit
but which can still be opened from the inside. Access doors shall be provided on both sides of each
unit in access sections and fan sections.
2.01.2 Acceptable Manufacturers
A.
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and their
products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or product must
be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
B.
Units shall be the product of a Manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of these units
issuing complete catalog data for same.
2.01.3 Type And Performance
Provide the air handling units suitable for installation indoor or outdoor, including
accessories having the performances and duties as indicated in the Equipment Schedules
as shown on the drawing.
2.01.4 Bag Filters
Where indicated in the Equipment Schedules, bag filter sections shall be incorporated.
These can comprise a composite section of the air handing unit which shall be arranged to
enable side withdrawal of the filter media from the unit.
Holding frames shall be constructed from galvanized sheet steel with suitable seals
provided to prevent air bypass around the filters.
The filter media shall consist of high density glass micro fibre media with individual dust
holding compartments, reinforced with a backing to form a lofted filter blanket. The filter
media shall have an average arrestance efficiency of not less than 98% and atmospheric
dust spot efficiency
80-90 % on ASHRAE test Standard 52-76 or to EU grade (EU-7).
The configuration of the dust holding compartments shall be controlled by means of
progressive link stitching. The stitching shall be such that it forms a supported compartment
resulting in uniform velocities in the passages of the air exit side of the filter.
The dust holding compartments shall be equipped with a minimum of 516 support points per
square meter of the filter media.
All stitching points shall be sealed with a hot melt adhesive.
Each filter bank shall be fitted with an inclined tube manometer connected at the works by
the manufacturers.
2.01.5 Hepa Filters
Where indicated in the Equipment Schedules, HEPA (high efficiency particulate filters) with
efficiency up to 99.999%.
2.01.6 Panel Filters (Prefilters)
The filter media shall be natural, synthetic or glass fiber or fabric fibrous material shall be
covered with a final scrim backing. They shall be replaceable filter elements in either mat
or pad form, suitable for attachment to the upstream face of the bag filter banks.
They shall be fixed in permanent holding frames, and clips to ensure quick and easy
removal of pre filters. The arrangement of the prefilters shall not impair access to and
serviceability of the bag filters. All frames and clips shall be galvanized steel or other
acceptable corrosion resistant material.
All filter elements shall be bedded firmly into permanent frame seals and pressed firmly
continually onto face of bag filter frame by a cam operated mechanism or a series of
accessible clips for front withdrawal type to prevent air by passing.
Panel filter assemblies shall be 50 mm. Thick unless otherwise specified and have
efficiencies of not less than those given below for various types of media when tested, to BS
2831 Test Dust No.2, or ASHRAE 52-76 test.
Typical performance requirements:
Nominal
Initial
Media
Face Velocity
PD
Efficiency
at
Design
15763 - 3
Air Handling Unit
Volume
Type
1
2
M/s
pa
BS2831
2.0
2.0
70
80
92
96
-
Ashrae 52-76
83
86
2.01.6 Panel Filters (Prefilters) (cont’d)
Media
No.
Typical Construction
1.
Laminated two stage glass filament media.
2.
As type 1. Followed with a synthetic scrim.
The filter media shall provide a normal servicing frequency of 4 months with a rise in
pressure drop from clean to dirty of not more than twice the initial pressure drop.
Each filter bank shall be fitted with an inclined tube manometer connected at the works by
the manufacturer.
2.01.7 Dampers
All air regulating dampers shall be installed as indicated on the drawings and as specified
herein.
Air regulating dampers in air handing plant sections shall be assembled from individual
dampers bolted together to form a multiple unit. The dampers shall be of the multi leaf
opposed bade type. The assembled unit shall be bolted to angle and channel galvanized
iron frame work built in to the unit casings.
The multiple damper unit shall be sized for the full air handling unit area, without balnking
plates. The face velocities shall be not greater than 5.08 m/sec. (1000 f. p. m.). Closed
blade leakage should be <10 m3/h.m2 with a 100 pa pressure differential.
Complete damper assemblies shall be operated in vertical banks across the width of the
unit. For the adjustment of vertical banks damper regulators with locking quadrants shall be
installed inside the unit casing integral with the vertical bank.
Damper regulators shall be marked to indicate the damper position.
Damper shall be designed, selected and installed such that they do not whistle, whine or
produce any recognizable pure tone. The regenerated noise from dampers shall not exceed
the induct sound power level at that point of the ductwork system, also the regenerated
noise when combined with the induct sound power level at that point must not exceed which
is subsequently served by that ductwork system.
Damper frames shall be fabricated from mild steel channel with all four corners of the frame
braced, and shall be electro galvanized after manufacture.
Damper blades shall not be greater than 250 mm. In width. Blades made from aluminum
extruded sections. The blades shall have interlocking edges and cross connecting brackets.
Each blade shall have neoprene edging inserted along its length to ensure an airtight seal
and whistle free operation.
Damper sections shall be built to size using the lowest practicable number of equal width
blades inter-connected on every other blade. Any resulting small air gap top and bottom
between blades and channel frame shall be blanked off. Damper blade side stops shall be
overlapped and designed to contact blade edges and reach the blade axles.
Damper blade axles and push rods shall be manufactures in stainless steel. Axle bearings
shall be of the blind end type with the bearings mounted flush with the inside face of the
damper frame. The bearing shall be pre packed with grease and the open end sealed with a
rubber ‘0’ ring seal to prevent air leakage. The opposed blades action only, via gears, made
from special anti-static plastic (ABC), temperature resistant to 100 C. Bearing seal
achieved using a plastic elastomer on rear of gears between case and gear. Material:
perbunan.
2.01.8 Combine Air Cooling / Heating Coil.
Air cooler / heater batteries contained within air handling plants shall be sectionalized. The
whole battery shall be made up of individual batteries having an overall area not greater
than 2.0 square meters.
The batteries shall be bolted onto a steel channel and angel iron framework built inside, and
bolted to the unit. The framework shall be protected against corrosion and all nuts bolts
shall be cadmium plated.
Airtight blanking plates shall be provided to seal the remaining portions of the cross
sectional are of the unit. Sufficient space shall be left between the battery assembly and the
top and bottom of the units for bolting the individual batteries in position in situ.
Each battery flow and return connection shall be extended through the unit side casings with
puddle type black steel extension flanges ending to match flange pipe joints within the units.
Where two battery sections are mounted end to end across the width of the units. The
primary flow and return connections shall be handed so that the coil can be connected to the
service mains at each side of the unit.
15763 - 4
Air Handling Unit
Each battery shall be manufactured in accordance with the following Specification.
Cooling/heating battery coils shall be constructed from 16 mm. 0/D slid drawn cooper tube
mechanically expanded into collar spaced ribbed and punched aluminum fins of maximum
density 320 fin/meter (8 fin / inch). The fin and tube matrix shall be treated after
manufacturing with corrosion protective layers such as acrylic coating or other approved
materials. Coils in all AHU's should not contain more than five rows.
2.01.8 Combine Air Cooling / Heating Coil.(cont’d)
Each battery shall be provided with a galvanized steel drip tray at the base of each section
of the battery. Each drip tray shall be tanked and sealed into the assembly. Each drip tray
shall fitted with air deflectors and 25 mm. Pipe drain. Each intermediate drain pan shall be
connected with a drain pipe feeding into the main air handling unit drain pan. Drain pans
shall be designed to minimize the risk legioella.The air velocity across the battery's coil shall
not exceed 205 m/sec.
2.01.9 Wetted Media Humidifiers
Supply humidifires as shown on drawings, wetted media type shall be used, this type spray
water over the pad area, air is humidified and cooled while passing through the wetted pad
media.
2.01.10 Air Handling Units Fans
Supply air fans and recirculation air fans mounted within air handling unit sections shall be
centrifugal casing type designed and manufactured as specified herein.
Fans shall be double inlet, double width centrifugal back ward curved, with aerofoil section
blades to provide non overloading operating characteristics with high efficiency.
Fans shall be suitable for indirect drive by matched vee belts and pulleys. Where the
system allows low flow, multi vane forward curved bladed fans may be used.
Fans shall be selected for slow speed running low sound level and high efficiency. All shall
be selected to be capable of being operated by at least 10% in capacity over the design
volume specified.
Fan casings and scrolls shall be fabricated from heavy gauge mild steel plate adequately
stiffened and supported. Fan casings shall be rigid and completely free from vibration and
drumming and capable of with standing the pressures involved without leakage or distortion.
Fan casings shall be continuously welded construction split as required to pass through
available unit access doors.
Fan casings shall be bolted construction for ease of installation, the number of sections
being dependent upon the size of the fan and access available for future removal and
replacement.
Bearing blocks shall be carried on opposite sides of the fan casing on bearer bars forming a
part of a rigid fabricated steel structure integral with he casing.
Ceiling hung fans shall be supported on spring hangers to eliminate vibration to the building
structure.
2.01.11 Fan Drives And Guards
Fan drives for centrifugal fans shall be multiple vee belts and variable pitch pulleys.
Pulleys of the taper lock type may be used for drives up to 30 KW output. The pulleys shall
be keyed to the shafts after commissioning.
Alternatively and where drives are above 30 KW out-put, the pulleys shall be secured to the
fan and motor shafts by fitting into machined keyways. Keys shall be easily accessible so
that they can be withdrawn or tightened and shall be accurately fitted so that the gib head
does not protrude beyond the end of the shaft.
Each fan set shall be supplied with two sets of pulleys, and drives to give the duties as
designed.
Fans with standby motors if require shall be provided with tow sets of pulleys, one on each
side of the fan.
Vee belt drives shall comply with BS.3790 and shall be capable of transmitting not less than
the rated wattage output of the motor with one belt removed.
All fan casings shall be fitted with bolted on air-tight inspection door and a drain plug.
Fan casing shall be fitted with flanged outlets for duct connections and shall have rigid
spigot inlets truly circular and free from dents.
Inlet cones shall be manufactured to close tolerance to avoid turbulence at the air entry to
the impeller. All internal and external exposed casing surface shall be zinc sprayed for
protection against corrosion.
The fan impeller wheel and blades shall be robustly constructed from mild steel sheet with
fabricated steel or cast iron boss with back plate when required. The boss shall be board
and keywayed for the shaft be zinc sprayed against corrosion.
15763 - 5
Air Handling Unit
Impellers shall be rigidly braced to ensure concentricity and eliminate vibration and shall be
certified as being statically and dynamically balanced on their shafts at the manufactures
works.
Fan driving shafts, of ample section for the loading, shall be of high tensile mild steel,
precision turned, ground and polished.
Keyways shall be provided for securing the impeller and driving pulley.
All fans shall fitted with grease lubricated ball or roller bearings mounted in cast iron plumer
blocks.
2.01.11 Fan Drives And Guards (cont’d)
No fan drive shall be fitted with less than two belts.
All vee belts shall be of the anti static type suitable for operation in temperatures likely to
prevail in the plant rooms.
Guards shall be provided for all open unprotected air inlets to centrifugal fans, for vee belt
drivers and pulleys whether within unit casings or not.
For vee belt drivers the guards shall be of galvanized steel wire not less than 2.5 mm.
diameter formed into a mesh not greater than 25 mm. attached to a rigid galvanized steel
framework of rods not less than 10 mm. diameter.
Drive and pulley guards shall be made to be readily removable to permit belts to be
changed.
Adequate access panels shall be provided in the guard to allow tachometer readings of the
shafts to be taken and the belt tension to be tested.
Allowance shall be made in the dimensions of the guards and the size and position of
access panels for the adjustment of the motor on its side rails. Fans with standby motors
shall be provided with two guards one on each side of the fan.
2.01.12 Fan Drives And Guards
Electric motors shall be continuously rated of metric frame construction and shall compy
with BS.5000 and BS.2048.
Each motor shall be rated at 130 percent (%) of the fan’s rating when running at the duties
as designed. Fan motors shall be squirrel cage, total enclosed, fan cooled type wound for
400 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 hertz electrical supply. Motors of 5.6 KW and above shall be
arranged for star delta starting. Motor insulation shall be to Class F.
Thermistor type overheating cuts outs shall be provided in the motor windings.
All motors shall be suitable for horizontal foot mounting and be complete with slide rails and
belt adjusting bolts.
Each fan and motor assembly including standby motors shall be mounted on a fabricated
and welded rolled steel channel iron base frame, suitably drilled for mounting upon
antivibration mountings within the air handling unit fan section casing.
2.01.13 Bulkhead Lights
100 watt side entry bulkhead lights shall be provided in each section of the unit where
access is available. The lights shall be wired back to surface mounted light switches
located externally adjacent to the appropriate access door.
Bulkhead light fittings shall have a body in corrosion resistant aluminum alloy and a
prismatic diffuser held firm in position by a hinged glazing ring, the rings seating onto a
neoprene gasket. The interior of the fitting shall be painted white.
The bulkhead lights shall be drilled at their lowest point to prevent build of condensation.
Single pole 15 ampere 140 volt light switches shall be galvanized weatherproof assemblies
with two position semi rotating switch.
Switches shall be mounted on back entry galvanized steel boxes, surface mounted onto the
unit. All conduits shall be welded mild steel heavy gauge to BS4568 galvanized after
manufacture and jointed with galvanized solid screwed couplings.
Conduits shall be fixed at intervals not greater than 1300 mm. conduit system shall be
electrically and mechanically continuous and watertight after installation. All conduit system
shall be arranged wherever possible to be self draining to switch boxes and conduit outlet
points for light fittings.
Each air handling compartment containing drive motors shall be fitted with a cable entry
terminal box sized for the type and size for the cables as specified in Schedule of cable
sizes indicated in the Electrical Drawings. Each box shall be complete with gland plate and
educate space shall be provided within the box to easily permit cable cores to be spread
and terminated.
2.01.14 Tests And Performance Certificates
The contractor shall submit for approval before placing his order for the AHU’s the following
information:
15763 - 6
Air Handling Unit
A.
B.
A description of the actual test procedures used by the fan manufactures.
A laboratory test sheet showing results of a test for fans typical of the types that will
be ordered.
C.
A fully documented list of total sound power levels in each of the second octave
bands between the frequencies of 63 Hz and 4 KHz for each fan.
The contractor shall provide the engineer with fan performance certificates for each fan
tested in accordance with the requirements of B.S.848, Parts I & II.
The characteristics of each fan’s performance shall include curve relationships of volume,
pressure, efficiency and power absorbed at constant speed.
2.01.14 Tests And Performance Certificates (cont’d)
The induct sound power levels shall be determined in accordance with the requirements of
B.S.848, Part II.
The contractor shall provide the engineer of approval with performance certificates showing
the induct sound power level in the seven octave bands as specified above for each fan
before placing his order with the manufacture.
2.01.15 Test Holes
Tapped holes for testing purposes and for permanent instrumentation shall be provided as
indicated on the drawings and schedule. Suitably sized holes shall be formed in the inner
and outer panel skins and steel hank bushes welded onto the inner faces.
Recesses hexagon brass plugs, threaded 15 mm. male shall be supplied and fitted into the
female thread of the instrument ferrule.
The panel insulation shall be suitably cut to give a clear way for the instrument ferrule.
2.01.16 Drain Pans
Drain pans shall be fitted bellow all cooling coils as a continous unit constructed from 2 mm
thick galvanized steel sheet. A 50 mm galvanized drain complete with trap and clean out
plug shall be provided. The drain shall be taken from the pan to terminate external to the
unit to a glass trap for extension via a tundish to the nearest floor drain gully.
Secondary drain pans shall be installed under valves and strainers serving FCU’s and under
all valve stations.
They shall be same as drain pans of AHU’s and shall extend via a tundish to the nearest
floor drain gully.
2.01.17 Silencer (Sound Attenuates)
The degree of silencing for any fan and ductwork system is determined by the amount of
silencing required to obtain the specified noise levels given as N.C. levels.
Silencers installed on the supply ductwork system side of fans shall include for the effects of
regenerated noise, duct breakout noise, noise emanating from diffusers and noise from any
other ventilation system serving the area.
Silencers installed on the atmosphere connection side of fans and air handling equipment
shall include for the effects of regenerated noise in the silencer and noise from other fans
drawing or exhausting air to or from the atmosphere.
Silencer shall be of the splitter type, protected by perforated galvanized sheet metal, to
ensure that erosion of the attenuating element does not occur. The materials and
construction shall prevent carryover or migration of the material into the air conditioning
distribution system.
The regenerated noise of all silencers shall be predicted and shall not increase the induct
sound power level at any point (i.e. shall be more than 10dB below the induct sound power
level). The regenerated noise, when combined with the induct sound power level at that
point, shall not exceed the criterion in any room over which the duct subsequently passes,
or in a room which is served by that ductwork system.
Prefabricated unit silencers shall be constructed with the silencer splitters inserted into unit
casings secured by cadmium plated bolts through retaining angles.
Main air handling unit silencers shall be constructed with the silencer splitters in galvanized
sheet steel casings constructed with a profiled galvanized steel frame bolted to angles
frames with in the air handling unit casings. All retaining angles and framework shall be
adequately protected against corrosion.
Noise levels within the conditioned space shall be no greater than those set out in section
15500 – Design Conditions Article.
In his final assessment of conditioned space noise levels the Contractor shall make due
allowance for the additive effect of all point sources of noise.
2.01.18 Air Handling System In Fire Mode
All air handling systems shall be constructed and arranged to enable operator and fire
tenant to assist on smoke clearance purposes.
15763 - 7
Air Handling Unit
In the event of the energization of a fire alarm within the building all recirculation air plant
dampers shall be closed; full fresh air and full exhaust air.
Smoke detectors shall be fitted in to the common extract ducts of individual recirculation air
plants and shall shut of the supply fan and the recirculation damper while maintaining the
exhaust fan on full operation.
Combined smoke and fire dampers shall be installed in all supply and extract ducts which
shall be closed by the fire alarm system to prevent spread of smoke in to the escape routs.
The system shall be arranged that smoke dampers can be reset remotely.
2.01.19 Casing
A.
Mount equipment and support exterior steel panels from structural steel frame. Reinforce panels.
B.
Provide hinged access doors or removable panels for access to sections and components requiring
servicing. Minimum size 450mm x 450mm. Provide fasteners and gasket seals.
C.
Casing shall be fabricated from heavy gauge pre-galvanized sheet steel with baked enamel paint,
with rigid supporting frame.
D.
Fabricate drain pans from piece of single galvanized steel with welded corners and shall project
under the entire length and width of coil including the headers and return bends. The pans shall be
adequately treated against corrosion, insulated and pitched for positive drainage with the unit
installed level.
E.
The air handling units shall be double - skinned.
2.01.20 Insulation
A.
Insulate unit panels with 25mm thick neoprene coated glass fiber insulation, with density 32 kg/m3
"K" value at 42 degrees C maximum 0.037 Watts/meter degree K.
B.
Insulate the fan section, filter section, mixing section and coil sections.
2.01.21 Mixing Box
A.
Casing box with two sets of opposed blade steel motorized dampers mounted on steel shafts
supported in nylon bearing. Arrange dampers for mixing of air stream with damper blades
positioned across the short air opening dimension.
B.
Damper blades shall be of airfoil section with seals at interlocking. Blades and case shall be of
galvanized sheet unpainted.
2.01.22 Anti-Vibration Treatment
All equipment containing moving parts generating noise or vibration shall be mounted or placed
upon specially designed isolators. All connections to such equipment shall fitted with flexible
connectors to prevent transmission of such noise and vibration to the structure or to other areas of
the building or to other pieces of equipment.
Each centrifugal fan and motor channel base frame shall be mounted on anti vibration mountings as
specified herein.
The resilient material of the anti vibration mounting shall be rubber or neoprene for static deflections
of less than 12 mm. and steel for deflection of greater than 12mm.
Steel springs shall contain a series of rubber of neoprene pads to contain and isolate the structural
borne noise component. Anti vibration mounting shall be adjustable in height to level the machine
foundation except where the static deflection of the mount is less than 6mm.
Where practicable, anti vibration mountings shall be removed for shipment. Where impracticable
anti vibration mountings must be provided with transit bolts and nuts to hold them rigid to the frame
of the machine.
Flexible joints shall be provided on fan inlet and outlet connections as required.
Flexible joints and material shall be of, or be protected by, material having a fire penetration time of
not less than fifteen minutes when tested in accordance with BS476, Part 1, Section 3.00. The
material shall be of the glass fibre cloth type and waterproof. Canvas material will not be permitted.
The width of the joints from metal edge to metal edge shall not be less than 100mm.
And not greater than 250mm.
All flexible joints shall be between flanged ends. The flexible material flange shall be backed by an
angle or flat iron flange and the flexible material held securely between the metal faces of the steel
section.
All electrical conduits and connections in contact with fans, bases, motors or supports shall be fitted
with flexible sections to avoid nullification of the anti-vibration treatment provided.
Flexible conduit shall be watertight, PVS sheathed, metal type. The conduit shall be terminated at
boxes and equipment with compression glands. An additional PVS insulated stranded tinned copper
earthing conductor not less than 6 mm. diameter shall be drawn into flexible conduits and
connected to the earth terminals at each end of the flexible run.
15763 - 8
Air Handling Unit
2.01.23
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Each Air Handling Units Cooling And Heating Coils Connections Shall Have The
Following
3-way motorized control valve.
Isolating valves (2 Nos.).
Globe valve.
Flexible connections.
Test points.
Drain cocks.
Thermometers.
AAV.
Double regulating vlave with metering station.
2.02 Fan Coil Units
2.02.1 General
The design construction, materials and finishes of all units shall be suitable for the locations and
operating conditions indicated in these Specifications and Drawings.
A customary auxiliaries deemed necessary, shall be provided by the manufacturer for the safe
controlled automatic operation of the equipment which shall be pre-wired and tested.
Units shall be of the room cabinet or basic chassis type, suitable for floor or ceiling location as
shown on Drawings.
All units shall be provided with easy access to fans, controls, filters, coils, vents, drain and valve
connections.
Discharge grills shall be provided with hinged section for access to controls on wall or floor mounted
furred in or cabinet type units.
Units shall be selected with sound levels at least 3bd below required room specified sound levels at
design speed.
All units shall be complete with the following basic components:
Air filters
Flexible rubber connectors
Electrical junction box
Fan assembly
Coil section
The chassis shall be fabricated from at 1.6mm thick galvanized sheet steel to from a rigid unit fully
sealed to eliminate extraneous air leakage free from sharp edges and complete with fixing lugs.
Thermal insulation of 12mm. Minimum thickness shall be applied to all sides of coil section, and
beneath all cooling coil drip pans.
All insulation must be non flammable, nontoxic, and possess minimum smoke propagation qualities.
Acoustic treatment shall be supplied to casings as required to meet the room specified sound levels.
Reinforced sheet steel enclosures shall be provided for room mounted units to form a rigid cabinet
that will not flex or vibrate during unit operation, There shall be space within each cabinet for piping
connections and valves.
Panels shall be bonded plastic coating or be treated with corrosion resistant baked on primer and
stove enameled or equal finish.
Access shall be provided in cabinets to fans, coils, filters and electric. Access to control switches
and coil connections shall be through hinged flaps on the top panel discharge grill. Front panels
shall be secured with positive locking tamper proof fasteners, hinged for horizontal units.
All flow grills shall have adjustable discharge.
The design of the enclosures shall enable air filters to be serviced without having to remove ant of
the unit paneling.
When specified or shown on drawings, return air plenums shall be provided to suit particular
manufacturer’s standard model type.
Resiliently mounted, direct driven centrifugal double width, double inlet fans, shall be used with
impellers and scroll made in shockproof material to guarantee maximum stability during transport
and installation.
Impellers shall be statically and dynamically balanced for quiet operation.
The fan and motor assembly shall removable on a slide out arrangement. For changeover system,
the motor shall be positioned below the unit coil to eliminate damages due to excessive heat and air
temperature.
Maximum motor speeds shall no to exceed 24 rps.
All fan coil unit shall have two pipes coil.
Coils shall be of copper construction with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper
tube coils all joints brazed arranged for On Site handling>
15763 - 9
Air Handling Unit
Each coil water and electrical connections shall be handed to suit Site requirements, but
connections shall be adaptable for Site reversal.
Units shall be complete with a one piece drip pan, extending beyond the cooling coil sections to cover return
bends and shall have a second deep flanged drain pan fitted outside of unit chassis having 22mm. OD outlet
to cover where necessary random condense from valves, fittings and coil drip pan outlet.
Drip and drain pans shall be zinc coated and treated both sides with a protective coating of mastic.
Both pans shall be reversible for left or right hand location. The outer surface of all condensate drain
pans shall be adequately treated/insulated to prevent secondary condensation occurring.
All drip and drain pans shall be designed to reduce to the absolute minimum the formation of
legionella by careful detailing of both pans and pipe work connections.
The protective mastic coating shall be suitable for the frequent application of disinfectant when
maintenance engineers flush through drip/drain pans and fan coil drainage pipe work.
Cooling coil face velocities shall be sufficiently low to prevent moisture carry over beyond the
condensate drip tray, and to limit noise generation.
All coils shall be complete with manual air vent and drain cock.
All unit shall have air filters on the inlet side prior to coil and fan sections.
2.02.1 General (cont’d)
Filters shall be of throw a way type readily accessible for inspection, removal and replacement.
The media shall be vermin and rot proof and shall not break up in the air stream.
Filter media shall be non flammable and shall not produce smoke or large volumes of noxious
products when exposed to fire.
Bonding agents shall have a flash point of not less than 163C.
The Contractor shall ensure all control valves can open and close against the maximum system
differential operating pressures.
All units shall be provided with manual isolating and commissioning set (double regulating and
testing valves, in addition to the proportion three way valves strainers, drain tap, and manual vent
and other fitting as shown on the drawings or mentioned in the specs or the BOQ, and required.
Concealed units shall be selected for operation with sufficient fan and motor power to provide the
required air flow rates at the operating resistance of the air distribution system.
Fans and motors shall be resiliently mounted.
Final electrical connections to the units shall be flexible.
The contractor shall provide flexible sleeves, between unit spigots and connected ductwork of heavy
quality glass fiber reinforced caves having a minimum length of 150mm. Securely fixed and sealed
to minimized air leakage. Maximum flame spread rating 25.
Support rails and vibration isolators shall be provided for horizontal units.
The contractors shall select units to ensure that the room sound levels in Specifications are not
exceeded.
2.02.2 Room Thermostat
The fan coil unit shall be controlled by a wall mounted sensor with recessed housing and over
lapping cover plate. The housing shall have conduit entry provision and shall be handed to the
electrical Sub Contractor with instructions for fixing at the time that conduits are installed.
Interconnecting cables shall terminate at a fixed terminal strip within the housing and connections to
the components mounted on the fascia.
Facilities on the Thermostat shall include:
Fan high, medium and low speed selector.
ON/OFF switch
Temperature set point
Temperature digital readout
Power ‘ON’ indicator
PART
3.01
A.
B.
3 - EXECUTION
Assembly
Assemble low and medium pressure units by bolting sections together to make single unit.
Assemble high pressure units by bolting sections together except for fan section. Isolate fan section
with flexible duct connections.
3.02
A.
B.
D.
Installation
Install unit on vibration isolators.
Install items in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
Replace all filters used during testing and balancing. Provide one complete set of spare filters.
3.03
Testing And Balancing
Testing, and balancing shall conform to Section 15990.
Painting
Painting shall be in accordance with architectural and structural specification.
3.04
15763 - 10
Air Handling Unit
3.05
Cleaning
Cleaning shall be in accordance with architecture and structural specification.
3.06
Operating And Maintenance Data
Operating and maintenance data shall be supplied in conformance with relevant specification.
END OF SECTION
15763 - 11
Air Handling Unit
SECTION 15820
AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT (FANS)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.03
Work Included
Centrifugal fans
Roof mounted fans
Duct mounted fans
Wall / window mounted fans
False ceiling mounted exhaust fans.
Related Work
Section 15210 :
Section 15763 :
Section 15840 :
Section 15860 :
Section 15880 :
Section 15900 :
Section 15990 :
Vibration Isolation
Air Handling Units with Coils
Ductwork
Duct Accessories
Air Treatment Equipment (Filters)
Controls and Instrumentation
Testing Adjusting & Balancing of Environmental Systems
Quality Assurance
Conform to AMCA Bulletins regarding construction and testing. Fans shall bear AMCA certified
rating seal.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E
1.05
Reference Standards
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
Air Moving and Conditioning Association AMCA).
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
Design Criteria
Contractor shall check the design duties of each fan and produce detailed system pressure design
calculations for each fan system for approval by the Supervising Engineer, where the noise level
shall not exceed 45 DB.
1.06
A.
B.
C.
D.
Submittals
Shop drawings in accordance with the appropriate specifications section 15011.
Operating point plotted on curves.
Manufacturers' installation instructions.
Manufacturers' recommended spare parts and tools list. Operating and maintenance data in
accordance with the appropriate specifications section.
Certification of compliance for materials and operation.
Field tests.
E.
F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
Acceptable Manufacturers
A.
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and their
products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or product
must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
B.
Units shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of these units
issuing complete catalog data for same.
C.
Items of same function and performance are acceptable in conformance with the appropriate
specifications section.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
E.
General
The contractor shall supply and install where shown on the drawings, fans as described
hereinafter and of capacities indicated on the drawings.
The fan motors and starters shall be in accordance with the electrical division of these
specifications.
All Fans units shall comply with the maximum sound power levels laid.
All externally located fan units shall be of a completely weatherproofed type.
All fan units to be connected to the fire alarm station system shall have electric control panel in
accordance with the electrical divisions of the specifications, also it shall interface with building
management system.
Equivalent fan selections shall not decrease motor horsepower (wattage), increase noise level,
increase top speed by more than 10%, or increase inlet air velocity by more than 20%, from that
specified.
15820 - 1
Air Distribution Equipment (Fans)
2.02
G.
H.
I.
General (cont’d)
Fan performance based on sea level conditions.
Control unit with on-off switch for all fans provides manual/automatic selection and test purpose.
Fans isolator for maintenance purposes shall be installed inside the fan housing.
2.03
A.
B.
Selection And Balancing
Provide fans capable of accommodating static pressure variations of plus or minus 10%.
Provide balanced variable sheaves for motors to provide not less than 20 percent speed
variation.
Statically and dynamically balanced fans to eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied
areas of the building.
Provide belt guards on belt driven fans.
Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.
C.
D.
E.
2.04
A.
B.
2.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
2.06
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Painting
All painting shall be in accordance with the relevant specifications section and the following:
Prime coat fan wheels and housing at factory inside and outside. Prime coating on aluminum
parts is not required.
All ferrous parts to have one coat of chlorinated rubber primer, followed by two top coats of
weather resistant baked enamel.
AHUs Supply Centrifugal Fans
Centrifugal type with forward curved blades for pressures up to 1.5 kPa or backward
inclined blades for pressures up to 2.0 kPa, double width, double inlet, with multi-blade
wheel statically and dynamically balanced.
Air foil fan wheels shall be fabricated from aluminum with the fan blades continuously welded to
the back plate and end rim.
Provide self-aligning ball bearings. Extend lubrication fittings to exterior of fan casing.
Provide variable sheaves for motors to give plus (+) or minus (-) 10% rated performance.
Impeller wheels shall have backward inclined or backward curved blades of the non-overloading
type, except wheels 300mm in diameter or smaller may have forward curved blades.
Impeller wheels shall be rigidly constructed accurately balanced both statically and dynamically,
and free from objectionable vibration or noise.
Impeller wheels shall be mounted in steel housing reinforced as necessary.
Complete fan housing shall be resiliently mounted.
Except for packaged air units, belted vent sets, and as otherwise noted centrifugal fans over (432
mm) diameter shall have die formed air foil blades welded to side and back plate.
Provide V-belt drives with fan and motor mounted on reinforced, rigid steel base with adjustable
motor mount.
Provide heavy duty, self-aligning, anti-friction bearings with external lubrication.
Fan shafts shall be steel, accurately finished, and shall be provided with key and key seats for
impeller hubs and fan pulleys.
Fan outlet shall be designed for the attachment of angles and bolts for attaching flexible
connections.
Provide where indicated variable inlet vanes.
Provide access door and drain connection to scroll.
Motor shall have a drip proof enclosure with across-the- line starter. Motor speed shall not be
greater than 1800 R.P.M.
Roof Extract Unit – Vertical Discharge
It shall employ a compact, direct driven centrifugal fan with a guaranteed performance for extract
systems with a significant static pressure requirement.
The wind shield and base shall be molded in fire retardant glass fiber reinforced resin which
provides excellent resistance to atmospheric corrosion.
It shall be of curb of purling mounting.
It shall have isolators bird guards, burglar bars, motorized dampers, pre-fabricated curbs and
soaker sheets.
Motors shall be rated or continuous running in ambient temperature of up to 50oC (122oF).
The weather cap and base moulded in ultra violet stabilized polyester resin, glass reinforced,
rendered fire retardant.
The material shall be strong, light in weight, gives excellent resistance to atmospheric corrosion
and shall be suitable for operational use in a wide range of climatic conditions.
Aluminum anti-backdraught shutters shall be fitted as standard, being opened by air movement
and closed by stainless steel springs and synthetic rubber buffers shall be provided to ensure
quiet operation.
15820 - 2
Air Distribution Equipment (Fans)
I.
J.
2.06
K.
L.
M.
2.08
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.09
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.10
A.
B.
C.
Impellers shall be high efficiency, backward curved centrifugal.
Mountings: Fan support arms shall be of mild steel, resiliently mounted to the base.
Roof Extract Unit – Vertical Discharge (cont’d)
Motor specation:
1. Totally enclosed motors, three phase, metric sized, ball bearing, squirrel cage induction type,
for direct on line starting. All have class F insulation. Ratings comply generally with BS 5000:
Pt 99 and IEC 34-1, with degree of protection IP 55 to IEC 34-5.
2. Flameproof Motors: Units supplied with flameproof motors.
Lubrication: Motor bearings shall be prelubricated with high quality grease. In ambient
o
temperatures up to 50 C.
It shall have the following accessories:
1. Inlet and Bird Guards.
2. Prefabricated Metal Upstand.
3. Acoustic Curb.
Wall Mounted Fans
Plates shall be manufactured from mild steel with powder coat finish, and fan shall be with motor
side guard.
Impeller: manufactured of high pressure die cast aluminum to offer him airfoil section for low
generation of noise level.
Motor: It shall be totally enclosed air stream rated class” F” insulation, constructed from
aluminum as standard with special “T” slot fixing suitable for horizontal through to vertical shaft
operation, motor protection, motor protection IP65.
The fan shall be supplied with cowl/louver shutter, impeller side guard, bell month inlet and speed
controller, sound attenuator.
o
It shall be able to operate at temp. up to 50 C.
False Ceiling Mounted Exhaust Fans
Fans shall be 100mm single speed, axial extract fan suitable for short runs of ducting.
Lubricated for life motors and fitted with a thermal cut out providing protection against accidental.
Shall be complete package with mounting kit ready for easy installation in false ceiling.
Package shall include in-line duct fan, mounting brackets, in-line back draught shutter, flexible
ducting with suitable long and 2 fixed louvered grilles.
Shall be provided with standard and integral timer models.
Motors And Motor Starters
Provide fan motors. Motors shall be squirrel cage induction type, totally enclosed with maximum
speed of 1800 R.P.M. unless otherwise stated.
Motor starters shall be provided under electrical section and installed in relevant motor control
center.
Refer to relevant electrical specification.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
C.
Installation
Supply and install sheaves as necessary for final air balancing.
Provide acoustic insulation on duct to below roof line and on fan inlet plenum, and drip pan for
collecting condensation.
Provide sound Attenuators or sound attenuating roof curb, as indicated and to prevent noise break
in to occupied spaces. Noise criteria in occupied spaces shall not exceed specified design levels.
3.02
A.
B.
Electrical Connections
Connect all fans to a motor control center and as indicated in wiring diagrams.
All control, instrumentation and power wiring shall be part of electrical works and shall be in
accordance with the relevant electrical specifications.
3.03
A.
B.
Cleaning
All cleaning shall conform to architectural and structural specification.
Do not operate fans for any purpose, temporary or permanent until all duct work is clean, filters in
place, bearing lubricated and fan has been run under observation.
3.04
Testing And Balancing
All field testing and balancing shall conform to Section 15990.
3.05
Operating And Maintenance Data
15820 - 3
Air Distribution Equipment (Fans)
Operating and maintenance data shall be supplied in conformance with the appropriated
specification.
END OF SECTION
15820 - 4
Air Distribution Equipment (Fans)
SECTION 15840
DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
Work Included
A.
Ductwork and plenums.
B.
Fasteners
C.
Sealants
D.
Duct cleaning
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Related Work
Section 15090
Section 15750
Section 15763
Section 15820
Section 15860
Section 15870
Section 15880
1.03
A.
Applicable Codes And Standards
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA).
High pressure duct construction standard.
Low pressure duct construction standard.
Duct liner application standard.
Fire Damper Guide.
American Society Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
Heating and ventilating contractor’s association.
Specification for sheet metal ductwork DW/142.
(Low, medium and high pressure / velocity air systems).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.05
A.
B.
C.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Supports, Anchors and Seals
Coils
Air Handling Units with Coils
Air Distribution Equipment (Fans).
Duct Accessories
Air Outlets
Air Treatment Equipment (Filters).
Definitions
Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For acoustically lined or internally insulated ducts, maintain
sizes inside lining or insulation.
Low Pressure: Static pressure in duct less than 500 Pa and velocities less than 10
meters/second.
Medium Pressure: Static pressure in duct less than 1000 Pa and velocities less than 20
meters/second.
High Pressure: Static pressure over 2000 Pa and less than 2500 Pa and velocities less than 40
meters/second.
Submittals
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15011.
Shop drawings and samples of duct fittings, including particulars such as gage sizes, welds, and
configurations prior to start of work.
Certificate of compliance with SMACNA standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
Acceptable Manufacturers
Ductwork shall be product of a Manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of this material.
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for his approval the names of three
Manufacturers and their products which will be acceptable under this section.
15840 - 1
Duct Work
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
2.04
2.05
A.
B.
C.
Materials
Ducts: Galvanized steel lock forming quality, having zinc coating of 275 g/square meter for both
side according to SMACNA standards.
Fasteners: Use rivets and bolts throughout; sheet metal screws accepted on low pressure ducts.
Sealant: Water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials.
Flexible Duct: Pre-insulated, corrugated aluminum or fabric supported by helically wound steel
wire or flat steel strips.
Fabrication
Complete metal ducts within themselves with no single partition between ducts. Where width of
duct exceeds 457mm, cross break for rigidity. Open corners are not acceptable.
Lap metal ducts in direction of air flow. Hammer down edges and slips to leave smooth duct
interior.
Construct tees, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on center
line. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows used, provide air foil type turning vanes.
Where acoustical lining is required, provide turning vanes of perforated metal type with fiberglass
inside.
Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees (0.26 rad) divergence wherever possible.
Maximum divergence upstream of equipment to be 30 degrees (0.52 rad) and 45 degrees (0.78
rad) convergence downstream.
Rigidly construct metal ducts with joints mechanically tight, substantially airtight, braced and
stiffened so as not to breathe, rattle, vibrate, or sag. Caulk duct joints and connections with
sealant as ducts are being assembled.
Provide easements where low pressure duct work conflicts with piping and structure. Where
easements exceed 10% duct area, split into two ducts maintaining original duct area.
Provide necessary baffling in mixed air plenums to ensure good mixed air temperature with
variations of not more than plus or minus 15 degrees C under operating conditions.
Construct plenums of galvanized panels joined by standing seams on outside of casing riveted or
bolted on approximately 300mm centers. Reinforce with steel angles and provide diagonal
bracing. Tightly fit at apparatus and seal with sealant.
Provide 76mm high reinforced concrete curb for plenum walls and floor mounted casings. At
floor, rivet panels on 200mm centers to angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, provide
liner of 18 gage (1.20mm) galvanized expanded metal mesh, turned up 305mm at sides with
sheet metal shields.
Reinforce door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum supporting angles.
Install hinged access doors where shown, specified, or required for access to equipment for
cleaning and inspection.
Low Pressure Duct Gages
Rectangular Ducts:Maximum Width
Mm
Up to 750
760 to 1500
1510 to 2250
Minimum
US Gauge (mm)
24 (0.70)
22 (0.9)
20 (1.00)
Plenum Gauges
Fabricate fan plenums and plenums downstream of fan in accordance with duct gauge.
Fabricate plenums upstream of fan between apparatus of 16 gauge
(1.50 mm).
Fabricate plenums upstream of filters of 18 gauge (1.2mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
Installation
Provide openings in duct work where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers.
Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with
spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated
duct work, install insulation material inside a metal ring.
15840 - 2
Duct Work
3.01
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
Installation (cont’d)
Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To
obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by
excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning.
Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment which may be harmed
by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into duct work
for cleaning purposes.
Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance
activities.
Set plenum doors 150 mm to 300 mm above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static
pressure holds door in closed position.
Connect terminal units to medium or high pressure ducts with 300 mm maximum length of flexible
duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction.
Connect diffusers or troffer boots to low pressure ducts with 1.5 mm maximum length of flexible
duct. Hold in place with strap or clamp.
At each point where ducts pass through partitions, seal joints around duct with non-combustible
material.
Splitter or volume dampers shall be provided where shown on the drawings and at all locations
where branches are taken off by splitter or radius top connections in the main.
Air handling duct systems shall meet the requirement of NFPA standard 90A.
Fire and smoke dampers shall be constructed, located, and installed in accordance with the
requirements of NFPA Standard 90A-1975, except that all systems, regardless of size, which
serve more than one smoke or fire zone, shall be equipped with smoke detectors to shut down
fans automatically and access for maintenance shall be provided at all dampers.
Switching for restart of fans may be conveniently located for fire department use to assist in
evacuation of smoke after the fire is controlled, provided that provisions are made to avoid
possible damage to the system because of closed dampers.
Supply and exhaust ducts which pass through a smoke separation of required compartmentation
and through which smoke can be transferred to another area shall be provided with dampers at
the separation controlled to close automatically to prevent flow of air or smoke when the fan,
which moves the air through the duct, stops.
Return air duct which pass through a smoke separation of required compartmentation shall be
provided with a damper at the separation actuated by smoke of products of combustion (other
than heat) detectors. These dampers shall be operated by the detectors located to sense smoke
in the return air duct from the smoke zone. On high velocity system, a time delay is required so
that fan will be stopped prior to damper closing Engineered smoke exhaust systems closing may
be considered for approval as described by NFPA on a case by case basis.
If the air changes required do not provide sufficient air for use by hoods and safety cabinets, the
required makeup air shall be provided as necessary to maintain required room pressure
relationship.
3.02
A.
B.
Riser And Runs Duct Identification Markers
Tags and identification labels shall be provided every 3m showing the service of extend duct.
Identification shall be readily observable from normal inspection.
3.03
Painting
Painting shall be in accordance with architectural and structural specification:
The inside of all duct work where visible through registers and grilles shall be painted with one
coat of dull black fiber-resistant paint.
Uninsulated duct work exposed to vision-on coat of zinc chromate primer, 1.5 mils thick.
All metal surfaces such as fresh air dampers located within or directly adjacent to fresh air intake
louvers: two coats of gray galvanized steel primer, 1.5 mils thick.
Discharge dampers: two coats of gray galvanized steel primer 1.5 mils thick.
All iron work within the building such as supports and hangers etc. Shall be prime painted with
one coat of red lead.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.04
Cleaning
All cleaning shall conform to architectural and structural specification.
3.05
Testing & Balancing
All field testing and balancing shall conform to Section 15990.
END OF SECTION
15840 - 3
Duct Work
SECTION 15860
DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Work Included
Access Doors.
Fire Dampers.
Balancing Dampers.
Back draft Dampers.
Flexible Connections.
Turning Vanes.
Relater Work
Section 15763
Section 15820
Section 15880
Section 15990
Section 15210
Section 15840
:
:
:
:
:
:
Air Handling Units with Coils
Air Distribution Equipment (Fans)
Air Treatment Equipment (Filters)
Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems
Vibration Isolation
Ductwork.
Reference Standards
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA).
American Society Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
Air Diffusion Council (ADC).
Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA).
Submittals
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15011.
Shop drawings of factory fabricated assemblies.
Samples of shop fabricated assemblies as requested.
Manufacturers' printed installation instructions.
Certified test data for Attenuators of Dynamic Insertion Loss, Self-Noise Power Levels, and
Aerodynamic Performance for Reverse and Forward Flow Test conditions.
Certificate of compliance with SMACNA standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
2.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Acceptable Manufacturers
Items shall be the product of a Manufacturers regularly engaged in production of these units,
issuing complete catalog data for same.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval the names of three Manufacturers
and their products which will be acceptable under this section.
Access Doors
Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick
fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum 25 mm thick insulation with
sheet metal cover.
Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 457 mm square, two hinges and two
compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 610 mm x 1220 mm.
Provide an additional hinge for larger sizes.
Access Doors shall be UL listed.
Fire Dampers
Fire dampers shall be UL listed and in accordance with UL 555.
Fabricate of galvanized steel or prime coated black steel weighted to close and lock in closed
position when released by fusible link.
Fire dampers in low pressure ductwork shall be multi-blade, or curtain type.
Fabricate combination fire and balancing dampers with linkage readily adjustable with damper in
open position.
Fusible links shall be in accordance with UL 33 and set or selected for 72 degrees C release.
15860 - 1
Duct Accessories
2.03
F.
G.
Fire Dampers (cont’d)
Fire dampers shall have fire ratings to match the fire rating of walls through which duct is passing.
Fire damper to be mounted on each duct passing through fire rated wall.
2.04
A.
Dampers
Fabricate of galvanized steel, minimum 16 gage (1.5 mm), and provide with quadrants or
adjustment rod and lock screw.
Fabricate splitter dampers of double thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, properly stiffened
to avoid vibration. Size on basis of straight air volume proportioning.
Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 241 mm x 762 mm.
Construct damper blades for medium and high pressure systems to block a maximum of 70% of
the air passage. Supply locking type handles.
Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced back draft dampers with blades a
maximum of 152 mm width having felt or flexible vinyl sealing edges, linked together in rattle-free
manner and with adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.05
Flexible Connections
Fabricated of neoprene coated flameproof fabric approximately 50 mm wide tightly crimped into
metal edging strip and attach to ducting and equipment by screws or bolts at 150 mm intervals.
2.06
A.
Turning Vanes
Turning vanes to be airfoil section, factory fabricated and factory or field assembled units
consisting of curved turning vanes or louver blades.
Where vanes are inaccessible they shall be fitted with reams for adjustment external to the duct.
Vanes to be constructed of the gage 16 (1.5 mm) minimum.
Fabricate to streamline shape, properly stiffened to avoid vibration.
B.
C.
D.
2.07
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Application
Provide access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic
dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Review locations prior to fabrication.
Provide min. 100 x 100 mm quick opening access doors for inspection at balancing dampers.
Provide fire dampers where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where
required by authorities having jurisdiction. Fire dampers shall be complete with required
perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs,
bearings, bushings, and hinges.
Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems where
branches are taken from larger ducts and as required for air balancing.
Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and
equipment subject to forced vibration.
Provide turning vanes in all square elbows, duct mounted supply outlets, take off or extension
collars to supply outlets and tap-in branch take-off connectors.
Provide sound Attenuators on supply air handling units, air exhaust fans, and ducts as required to
maintain design noise levels and as indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
Installation
Install items in accordance with Manufacturer's printed instructions.
Attenuators shall be selected to match the sound performance of the equipment they serve and
provide the required sound levels.
Painting
Painting shall be in accordance with architectural and structural specification.
All metal surfaces such as fresh air dampers located within or directly adjacent to fresh air intake
louvers: two coats of gray galvanized steel primer, 1.5 mils thick.
Discharge dampers: two coats of gray galvanized steel primer 1.5 mils thick.
3.03
Cleaning
All cleaning shall conform to architectural and structural specification.
3.04
Testing & Balancing
All field testing and balancing shall conform to Section 15990.
3.05
Operating And Maintenance Data
Operating and maintenance data shall be supplied in conformance with relevant specification.
END OF SECTION
15860 - 2
Duct Accessories
SECTION 15870
AIR OUTLETS
PART 1
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
GENERAL
Work Included
Sidewall Register
Linear Diffusers
Square Diffusers
Grills
Door grilles
Outside Louvers
Roof hoods
Goosenecks
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
Related Work
Section 15840
Section 15860
Section 15990
Section 15880
1.03
A.
Quality Assurance
Make air flow tests and sound level measurements in accordance with applicable Air Diffusion
Council equipment test codes and ASHRAE standards.
Manufacturer shall certify catalogue performance and ensure correct application of air outlet
types.
B.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
: Ductwork
: Duct Accessories
: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems
: Filters
Reference Standards
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
Air-conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI).
Air Diffusion Council (ADC).
Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA).
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
Associated Air Balance Council (AABC).
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc.(SMACNA).
1.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
Submittals
Submit Manufacturer's installation instructions.
Manufacturers recommended spare parts and tools list, operating and maintenance data.
Certificate of compliance for materials and operation.
Field tests.
1.06
A.
Job Conditions
Review requirements of outlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submitting shop
drawings and schedules of outlets.
Check location of outlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with
architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
B.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and their
products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or product
must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
Units shall be product of a Manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of these units issuing
complete catalog data of same.
15870 - 1
Air Outlets
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
2.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.04
Application
Before being ordered, selection of all supply outlets shall be checked by the manufacturer for
throw pressure, drop and sound noise level and mounting height, face velocity indicated on the
drawings, all outlets shall be specially selected for their particular application and designed for
quiet operation, selections to be approved by the Architect.
All air outlet shall be constructed from extruded aluminum sections, and shall have a powder
coated finish to match the false ceiling, colour of finish shall be to the approval of the Architect.
Rate Units in accordance with Air Diffusion Council standards.
Base air outlet application on room noise level as indicated in design conditions and Section
15000.
Provide supply aluminum outlets with sponge rubber seal around edge.
Provide baffles to direct air away from walls, columns, or other obstructions within radius of
diffuser operation.
Provide plaster frame for diffusers located in plaster surfaces.
Provide anti-smudge frames or plaques on diffusers located in rough textured surfaces such as an
acoustical plaster.
Distribute specified quantity of air evenly without drafts, air movement faster than 0.25 m/s or
dead zones. Mix room air with primary by induction to provide equalization of room temperature
without stratification.
Side Wall Registers (Supply , Return And Exhaust)
For sidewall registers provide streamlined and individually adjustable blades, depth of which
exceeds 19mm maximum spacing. Provide spring tension or other device to set blades.
Heavy gauge, extruded aluminum, anodized finish construction frame, with rigid corner clips
fasteners to ensure greater strength and higher rigid smooth fitting corner
Provide supply registers with integral, gang-operated opposed blade dampers with removable key
operator, operable from face, and shall be of the double deflection type, having vertical front bars
and horizontal back bars.
Provide return exhaust register as supply register but with single deflection type.
Linear Diffusers (supply And Return) (If Needed)
A.
Provide linear supply diffusers of adjustable pattern slot type with fully adjustable deflection
blades, number of slots as indicated on drawings.
B.
Diffuser face shall be free of fasteners of screws.
C.
Diffusers shall be provided with factory assembled plenum boxes with opposed blade dumpers.
D.
Fabricate of aluminum extrusions with powder coated finish to match with the false ceiling colour.
E.
One multi-slot units the air pattern from each slot shall be adjusted individually from the face of
the diffuser.
F.
Diffusers located in plaster ceilings shall be provided with separate plaster stop mounting frame.
G.
Alignment clips shall be provided so that continuous sections shall appear to be one piece.
2.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Square Ceiling Diffusers (Supply And Return)
Provide square rectangular, adjustable or fixed flow pattern, stamped, multi-core type diffuser to
discharge air in 360 degrees pattern with sectorizing baffles where indicated or required.
Diffusers shall have surface mount or snap-in or inverted T-bar or spline type frame to suit ceiling.
Fabricate of aluminum extrusions with powder coated finish to match with the false ceiling colour.
Provide radial opposed blade damper and multi-louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable
from diffuser face for supply diffuser only.
Diffuser mounting system shall be compatible with the ceiling system provided.
Volume controls supply diffuser outlets shall be accessible through the outlets from below the
ceiling and shall maintain their setting when adjusted.
15870 - 2
Air Outlets
2.06
Supply Grilles
Extruded aluminum construction of double deflection type with opposed blade dampers, front
blades vertical and rear blades horizontal and fitted with key operated opposed blade dampers
gaskets to be fitted.
2.07
Return Grilles And Exhaust Air Grilles
Same as supply air grilles but of single deflection type with opposed blade damper.
2.07
Fresh Air Grilles With Filter And Damper
The Same as supply air grilles but of single deflection type with opposed blade damper 25mm
thickness.
2.08
Door/Transfer Grilles
A.
B.
C.
2.09
A.
B.
C.
2.10
A.
B.
Fabricate of V-shaped louvers of 20 gauge (0.90mm) steel, 25mm deep on 12mm centers.
Provide 20 gauge (0.90mm) steel frame with auxiliary frame to give finished appearance on both
sides of door.
Factory prime coat with anodized finish coloured to suit door finish.
Outside Louvers
Louvers 100mm deep with blades on 45 degrees slope heavy channel frame, birdscreen with
12mm square mesh for exhaust and 19mm for intake. Intake must be provided with sand trap
louver, refer to Section 15880.
Fabricate of 12 gauge (2.50mm) extruded aluminum and provide welded assembly.
Finish in factory color anodized finish.
Goosenecks
Fabricate goosenecks of minimum 18 gage (1.20mm) galvanized steel.
Mount on minimum 305mm high curb base where size exceeds 229mm x 229mm.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
Installation
Install items in accordance with Manufacturers' printed instructions.
Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets Matt black.
3.02
Cleaning
All cleaning shall conform to architectural and structural specification.
3.03
Testing & Balancing
All field testing and balancing shall conform to Section 15990.
3.04
Operating And Maintenance Data
Operating and Maintenance data shall be supplied in conformance with architectural and
structural specification.
END OF SECTION
15870 - 3
Air Outlets
SECTION 15880
AIR TREATMENT EQUIPMENT (FILTERS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
Work Included
A.
Grease filters
B.
Panel filters
C.
High efficiency bag filters
D.
Sand Trap Louvers
1.02
A.
Related Work
Section 15870: Air Outlets
B.
Section 15840: Ductwork
C.
Section 15763: Air Handling Units with Coils
1.03
A.
Reference Standards
American Society Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineer (ASHRAE).
B.
Underwriter Laboratories (UL).
C.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
1.04
A.
Submittals
Shop drawings of factory fabricated assemblies, and product data in accordance with Section
15011.
B.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
C.
Manufacturer's recommended spare parts and tools list.
D.
Certificate of compliance for materials and operation.
E.
Field Tests.
1.05
Quality Assurance
Select filter media that is UL or equivalent tested, Class I or Class II as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01:
Acceptable Manufacturers
A.
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and their
products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or product
must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
B.
Units shall be the product of a Manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of these units
issuing complete catalog data for same.
C.
Supply all filters as product of one Manufacturer.
D.
Assemble filter components to form filter banks from products of one Manufacturer.
E.
Size, media face area, NBS test efficiency, initial and final air resistance of alternative
Manufacturers shall be same as types specified.
F.
Substitutions: Items of the same function and performance are acceptable in conformance with
Section 01630.
15880 - 1
Air Treatment Equipment (Filters)
2.02
Frames
A.
Fabricate filter frames and supporting structures of galvanized steel with necessary gasketing
between frames and walls. Provide holding frames of 16 gauge (1.50 mm), T-section
construction.
B.
Provide standard size frames to provide interchange-eability of filter media of other
Manufacturers.
2.03
A.
Manometers
Provide inclined manometers on all filters of 0.94 cu.m./s capacity or greater.
B.
Manometers scale shall be at least 100 mm long.
C.
Supply with spirit level, over-pressure safety traps and two (2) three-way vent valves for checking
zero setting.
2.04
A.
Panel Filters
Filter media shall be 50mm thick fibrous glass blanket, factory sprayed with flame proof, non-drip,
non volatile adhesive.
B.
The filter media shall have an average dust spot efficiency of not less than 25% and a mean
weight arrestance of not less than 85% on ASHRAE Test Standard 52- 68. Filter shall be listed by
UL as Class 2.
C.
The media support shall be a welded wire grid with an effective open area of not less than 96%.
The welded wire grid shall be bonded to the filter media to eliminate the possibility of media
oscillation and media pull away. The media support grid shall be formed in such a manner that it
effects a radial pleat design.
D.
The enclosing frame shall be constructed of a rigid, heavy-duty, chipboard with diagonal support
members bonded to the air entering and air exit side of each pleat. The inside periphery of the
enclosing frame shall be bonded to the filter pack.
E.
Holding frames shall be factory fabricated of 16 gauge galvanized steel and shall be equipped
with gaskets and four spring type positive sealing fasteners. Fasteners shall be capable of being
attached or removed without the use of tools.
2.05
A.
Bag Filters
Media reinforced glass fibre performed into series of pockets and bonded to header. Provide
approximately 4.6 square meter of media per 0.472 cu.m/s. capacity.
B.
Holding Fame’s: 16 gage (1.50 mm) galvanized steel with sealing grooves and gaskets, locking
clips, and provision for front mounted panel prefilter and front or rear removal of filter media.
C.
The filter media shall have an average dust spot efficiency of 80 - 85% and a mean weight
arrestance of 95 - 98% on ASHRAE Test Standard 52 - 68.
2.06
2.07
Hepa Filters
Where indicated in the Equipment Schedules, HEPA (high efficiency particulate filters) with
efficiency up to 99.999%.
Sand Trap Louvers
A.
Louvers shall be vertical fixed blade type with blades arranged to provide tortuous air flow path
and thus trap sand.
B.
Louver shall have self emptying drain holes.
C.
Louvers shall be constructed of aluminum to ASTM B209 & ANSI A134.1. Blades shall be 1.5mm
thick and casing 2.0mm thick.
15880 - 2
Air Treatment Equipment (Filters)
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
A.
Installation
Construct and install filters to prevent passage of unfiltered air. Provide felt, rubber, or neoprene
gaskets as necessary.
B.
Do not operate fan system connected to filter banks until filters (temporary or permanent) are in
place. Provide new filters at substantial completion. Replace filters used during construction.
Provide one complete spare sets of filters, and hand same over to Owner.
C.
Appropriate precautions should be observed to prevent wetting of the filter media by free moisture
from humidities and where only one filter bed is indicated it should be located upstream of the air
conditioning equipment.
D.
All filters should be installed to prevent leakage between the filter segments and between the filter
bed and its supporting frame. A small leak that permits any contaminated air to escape through
the filter can destroy the usefulness of the best air cleaner.
E.
A manometer should be installed in the filter system to provide a reading of the pressure drop
across each filter bank. This precaution furnishes a more accurate means of knowing when filters
should be replaced than by relying on visual observation.
F.
High efficiency filters should be installed in the system with adequate facilities provided for
maintenance without introducing contamination into the delivery system or the area served.
G.
During construction, openings in ductwork and diffusers should be sealed to prevent intrusion of
dust, dirt, and hazardous materials. Such contamination if often permanent and provides a
medium for the growth of infectious agents. Existing or new filters may rapidly become
contaminate by construction dust.
H.
All filter efficiencies shall be average atmospheric dust spot efficiencies tested in accordance with
ASHRAE standard.
I.
It is essential that filters are on the positive pressure side at the fan, to prevent air being drawn
into the system and by-passing the filter.
J.
Appropriate precaution should be observed to prevent wetting of the filter media by free moisture
from humidities.
3.02
Painting
Painting shall be in accordance with architectural and structural specification.
3.03
Cleaning
Cleaning shall conform to architectural and structural specification.
3.04
Testing & Balancing
Testing & balancing shall conform to Section 15990.
3.05
Operating & Maintenance Data
Provide operating and maintenance data in conformance with relevant specification.
END OF SECTION
15880 - 3
Air Treatment Equipment (Filters)
SECTION 15900
CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
Work Included
A.
Complete System of Automatic Controls.
B.
Electronic Control System.
C.
Control Devices, Components, Wiring and Material.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
Related Work
Section 15140
Section 15763
Section 15820
Section 15860
1.03
A.
Submittals
Damper shop drawings which show data such as arrangement, velocities and static pressure drops for
each system.
Complete operating data, system drawings, wiring diagrams, and written detailed operational
description of sequences, and description and engineering data on each control system component.
Include sizing as requested.
At completion of work, submit report of check-out of automatic control system.
Control diagrams for each system, framed under glass for wall mounting.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
B.
C.
D.
E.
:
:
:
:
Pumps.
Air Handling Unit with Coils.
Air Distribution Equipment(Fans).
Duct Accessories.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
Acceptable Manufacturares
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and their
products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or product must
be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
Units shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in productions of these items, issuing
complete catalog data for same.
System Requirements
Provide control systems consisting of thermostats, control valves, dampers, operators, indicating
devices, interface equipment, and other apparatus required to operate mechanical system and to
perform functions specified.
Provide necessary materials and field work necessary to connect control components factory supplied
as part of equipment controlled, unless specified otherwise. Generally, self-contained valves, filter
gauges, liquid level controllers and similar instruments, are not to be installed under this section.
Temperature control systems shall be of the electronic or electric type or combinations of these types
at the option of the Contractor. Control diagrams indicated on the drawings showing one type of
system are not intended to show a preference for that type system.
Unless specified otherwise, provide fully proportional components.
15900 - 1
Air Controls and Instrumentation
2.03
A.
B.
2.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
2.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Thermostates
Provide room thermostats with Celsius scale, single temperature, gradual-acting, adjustable
sensitivity. Provide covers with concealed set point adjustment, set point indication and without
thermometer. Provide guards for thermostats in unsupervised or public areas. Differential not to
exceed 1.5 C° with minimum 6.5 C° set point adjustment.
Duct thermostats (controllers) used for temperature control shall be remote sensing element type with
controller mounted on Control Panel or as indicated on the drawings.
3-Way Motorized Automatic Control Valves
Provide position indicators on valves and pilot positioners on sequenced valves.
Select valves to fail safe in normally open or closed position as dictated by freeze, humidity, fire, or
temperature protection.
Select two-way valves for liquids to have equal percentage characteristics. Size valve operators to
modulate valves against pump shut off head. Size for maximum 3 psi (20.7 kPa) drop.
Electric, modulating, single-sealed globe pattern with equal percentage contoured or V-ported plugs
and shall have a rangeability of 30 to 1.
Seats shall be brass, replaceable. Steam stainless steel. Plug shall be brass.
Complete with reversible, spring-return, proportional electric motor and its linkage.
Valve shall be suitable for a working pressure of 125 psi. (860 Kpa) and a water temperature range
40-300 deg. F (149 deg. C).
Valve shall be sized to produce a flow pressure drop approximately 1.5 times the full flow pressure
drop of the unit by-passed unless otherwise noted.
All control valves shall be capable at operating in sequence with other valves and dampers when
required by sequence of operation.
Automatic Motorized Volume Dampers
Damper construction shall be in accordance with Section 15860.
Operating links (connecting rods) transmitting motion from damper motors to dampers shall withstand
a
load
equal
to
at
least
twice
the
maximum
damper
operating force without deflection. Lengths shall be adjustable. Links shall be brass, bronze or steel.
Steel links shall be zinc-coated or cadmium plated. Working parts of joints, e.g. pins, Celsius, and
ball-and-socket joints, shall be brass, bronze, or stainless steel.
All parts of steel dampers shall be factory finished with two coats of rust inhibitive paint or shall be
zinc- coated.
Dampers when closed shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer not to leak in excess of 0.1 cubic
meter per second per square meter at 100 mm. water gage pressure. Dampers shall be installed with
operators having sufficient power to limit leakage to the rate specified.
Dampers shall be selected to provide correct flow control characteristics, as required by each
individual application.
Damper operators shall be quiet in operation. In the event of power failure operation shall be provided
with spring return so that they will "fail safe" in either the normally open or normally closed position as
required for freeze, moisture, smoke, or fire protection.
Stroke of motors shall be controlled by adjustable stops, or by adjustment of crank arm, to control the
open and closed positions of dampers.
Damper operators shall be quiet in operation. When operated at rated voltage, each damper operator
shall be capable of delivering the torque required for continuous uniform movement of the damper,
and shall withstand, without damage, continuous stalling. Operators shall function properly with a 10
percent plus or minus change in line voltage feeding the equipment.
Operators shall be of geared type. All gears shall be of steel or bronze. All gears shall be machine
cut, with face widths of not less than 3 mm. Shafts shall
be hardened steel, running in sleeve bearings of bronze, hardened steel, nylon or other suitable
materials, or ball bearings.
Operators and gear trains shall be totally enclosed in dustproof housings of pressed steel or metal
castings with rigid conduit connections. Gear trains shall be oil immersed.
Two-position operators shall be of the single direction spring return ("Stall) or reversing type.
Reversing operators shall have limit switches to limit the lever in either direction unless operator is
stall type.
15900 - 2
Air Controls and Instrumentation
2.06 Thermometers
A.
Dial type, not less than 75 mm chromium-plated case, remote or direct-type bulb. Dual scale
indication in both Fahrenheit and Celsius Scale graduated in 1 degree Celsius increments with plus or
minus 1 degree accuracy.
B.
Provide thermometers in casing equipment or piping as indicated. Install so as to be easily read from
operating floor.
C.
Provide thermometers on water lines entering and leaving each chiller and heat exchanger, on
controlled side of the supply and return lines to chilled water cooling coils.
D.
Provide at the sensing element of automatic temperature control devices where a thermometer is not
an integral part of the device.
E.
Thermometer well shall be grooved to allow connection of bulb thermometers without building.
2.07
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Pressure Gauges
Gages to be 100 mm in diameter with plastic or metal case, indication scale in both Metric and
English units. Dials to be all white with black numerals and black pointer. Range to suit application,
accuracy to within plus/minus 1% over entire range. English units used shall be psi and metric units
shall be kPa.
Install pressure gages at pump inlet and discharge, and in chilled water heating and water service
lines.
Gauge cocks to be provided on supply and return water lines to all heat exchange equipment and on
each side of control valves.
Gauges shall be accessible and easily read. Connect gauges with brass pipe and fittings with shut-off
cocks.
A one nut,, strapless outlet for gauges, meters, shall be provided without welding.
2.08
Humidistats
For humidity controllers use direct or reverse acting type differential not exceeding 5%
relative humidity and minimum 60% set point adjustment.
2. 09
Sequence Of Control
The sequence of control of all air conditioning and mechanical systems and equipment shall be as
indicated in the mechanical equipment schedules for each facility under sequence of control and or as
indicated by the control schematics.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Installation
Check and verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with plans and room
details before installation. Locate thermostats with centerline 1500 mm above floor and as indicated
on drawings. If not shown locate where they will respond to average conditions in space.
Each room thermostat shall be attached to a subbase mounted on the wall or other building surface.
Thermostats and controllers shall not be mounted on outside walls if other locations are possible;
where mounted on outside walls shall be provided with insulating subbase. If remote sensing
elements are provided, they shall be installed in air zone served.
Temperature scales shall be right side up and located where they can be read by a man standing on
the floor; remote temperature indicators shall be provided where necessary to accomplish this.
Where the thermostat (controller) monitored is of the remote sensing type, the indicating element of
the temperature indicator shall be located near the operating and adjusting mechanism of the
thermostat (controller).
Interlock alarms with starter switching to by-pass alarm when equipment is manually disconnected.
END OF SECTION
15900 - 3
Air Controls and Instrumentation
SECTION 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
1.02
A.
B.
1.03
1.04
A.
B.
C.
Requirements Included
Testing, adjusting, balancing and commissioning of plumbing and HVAC systems and
other works provided under Division 15 of this Specification.
All mechanical systems whether hydraulic piping or HVAC shall be calibrated, tested and
balanced as per given design loads by a qualified and certified specialist in accordance
with international standards. The testing agency, shall be a member of a well known and
recognized testing and balancing body in USA or Europe - Contractor to nominal the
agency name and submit qualification documents with the required certification and
personal qualification Cvs for consultant/owner approval. The contractor shall request the
testing and balancing agency to submit final result in a form of certification upon
completion of the above requirements and shall remain responsible for the proper
operation of the system.
Related Requirements
Supplementary Conditions: Retain age to be withheld against installing contractor until
final completion of testing, adjusting and balancing for one season. 1.03
DESCRIPTION
Testing, balancing and commissioning the following systems/installations:
1.
Plumbing
Sanitary Drainage
Water Services
2.
Air Conditioning
3.
Ventilation
4.
Fire fighting
Work Includes, but is not limited to:
1.
Pressure testing of pipework and ductwork.
2.
Performance testing of air conditioning units, fans, pumps and other plant items.
3.
Setting and balancing of air and water flow quantities.
4.
Setting and calibration of system controls and instrumentation
Description
1.
Measuring and recording temperature and humidity conditions and
sound levels throughout the building.
2.
Preparing and submitting reports.
3.
Provide instrument required for testing, adjusting and balancing
operations.
4.
Make instruments available to Project Manager to facilitate spot
checks during testing.
5.
Retain possession of instruments, remove from site at completion
of services.
Quality Assurance
The organization which performs the service shall be a current member in good
standing, certified to perform services required for the Project, of either:
1.
Associated Air Balance Council (AABC).
2.
National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), or equal criteria acceptable to
the Supervising Engineer
Within 30 days after award of contract, transmit to the Project Managerthe name of the
organization proposed to perform the services.
If the name of an acceptable agency is not submitted within the specified time the
Project Managermay select a firm to accomplish the work and this selection shall be
binding on the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
Comply with applicable procedures and standards of the certification sponsoring
association; either:
1.
"National Standards for Field Measurements and Instrumentation, Total Systems
Balance, Air Distribution-Hydraulics Systems" by AABC.
2.
"Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental
Systems", by NEBB.
3.
Perform services under direction of the supervisor who is designated and qualified
under certification requirements of sponsoring association.
15990 - 1
Testing; Adjusting & Balancing of Environmental Systems
1.04
Quality Assurance (cont’d)
4.
Calibration and maintenance of instruments shall be in accord with requirements
of the standards, and calibration histories for each instrument shall be available
for examination.
5.
Accuracy of measurements shall comply with requirements of the
standards.
1.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Reference Standards
Associated Air Balance Council (AABC):
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE):
American National Standards Institute Publications (ANSI):
National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB):
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1.06
A.
Submittals
Preliminary:
At least 30 days after commencement of related work on site.
1.
Submit three copies of documentation to confirm compliance with Quality
Assurance provisions:
2.
Submit three copies of test procedures proposed, to include details of test
methods, points of measurements and calculation methods and latest copies of
relevant applicable AABC or NEEB standards (one only).
3.
Schedule for work in bar chart format showing significant interdependencies.
a. Organization supervisor and personnel training and qualifications.
b. Specimen copy of each of the report forms proposed for use.
Second:
At least fifteen days prior to starting field work, submit three copies of:
1.
A set of report forms filled out as to the design flow values and the installed
equipment pressure drops, and the required air quantity for air terminals.
2.
A complete list of instruments proposed to be used, organized in appropriate
categories, with data sheets for each.show:
a. Manufacturer and model number.
b. Description and use when needed to further identify the instrument.
c. Size or capacity range.
d. Latest calibration date.
3.
The Project Managerwill review submittals for compliance with Contract
Documents, and will return one set marked to indicate:
a. Discrepancies noted between data shown and Contract Documents.
b. Additional, or more accurate, instruments required.
c. Requestsforre-calibration of specific instruments.
Third: At least fifteen days prior to Contractor's request for final inspection, submit three
copies of final reports, on applicable reporting forms, for review.
1.
Schedule testing and balancing of parts of the systems which is delayed due to
seasonal, climatic, occupancy, other conditions beyond control of the Contractor,
as early as the proper conditions will allow, after consultation with the Supervising
Engineer.
2.
Submit reports of delayed testing promptly after execution of those services.
3.
Form of Final Reports:
a. Each individual final reporting form must bear the signature of the person who
recorded data and that of the TAB supervisor of the reporting organization.
b. When more than one certified organization performs TAB services, the firm
having managerial responsibility shall make the submittals.
4. Identify instruments of all types which were used and last date
of calibration of each.
B.
C.
1.07
A.
B.
Job Conditions
Prior to start of testing, adjusting and balancing verify that required "Job Conditions" are
met:
1.
Systems installation is complete and in full operation.
2.
Outside conditions are within a reasonable range relative to design conditions.
3.
Lights are turned "on" when lighting is included in the cooling load.
4.
Special equipment such as computers, laboratory equipment, and electronic
equipment are in full operation.
Verify that requirements for preparation for testing and balancing have been met
for elements of each of the systems which require testing.
15990 - 2
Testing; Adjusting & Balancing of Environmental Systems
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
Testing, Adjusting And Balancing Equipment
Equipment used shall be the product of a Manufacturer regularly engaged in production
of these units, issuing complete catalog update of same.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the names of three Manufacturers and their
products which will be acceptable under this section.
Instruments
All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate, and calibration histories for
each instrument available for examination. Each test instrument calibrated by an
approved laboratory or by the Manufacturer. The Project Managerhas the right to
request
instrument
re
calibration,
or
the
use
of
other
instruments and test methodology, where in his opinion the accuracy of readings is
questionable.
All instruments applied shall be in accordance with Manufacturer's certified instructions.
Accuracy of all thermometers shall be plus or minus graduation at the temperatures to
be measured. Graduations shall conform to the following schedule:
Design Temperature
Maximum Graduation
Medium Differential
Degrees C
Degrees C
Air
6 or less
0.25
Air
over 6
0.5
Water
6 or less
1/10
Water
6-12
0.25
Water
over 12
0.5
The Project Managermay carry out checks on the test results obtained. The Contractor
shall make available to the Project Managerall test instrument and equipment and such
assistant labor as is necessary to carry out these checks.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
General
During erection and before putting into operation, the whole plant shall be properly
cleaned in accordance with architectural and structural specification.
Inspection and testing will be carried out under the supervision of the Project
Managerowner.
The following tests, mentioned here in amplification but not byway of limitation to the
provisions of Conditions of Contract and under each subdivision of the Specification
shall be carried out.
The Contractor shall provide to the testing and balancing firm, one copy of the HVAC
plans, specifications and approved equipment submittals. Install all balancing devices
in a manner that will leave them accessible and readily adjustable and put the HVAC
equipment into full operation during the testing and balancing.
All labor, instruments, and appliances required shall be furnished by the Contractor.
Permanently installed instruments used for the tests (e.g., gages, thermometers) shall
not be installed until just prior to the tests to avoid damage and changes in calibration.
In general, pressure tests shall be applied to piping only, before connection of
equipment and appliances. In no case shall piping, equipment or appliances be
subjected to pressures exceeding their rating.
Any damages resulting from tests shall be repaired and/or damaged materials replaced,
all to the satisfaction of the Project Managerand the owner.
In the event of any repair or any adjustment having to be made other than normal
running adjustment, the tests shall be void and shall be recommenced, after the
adjustment or repairs have been completed.
Equipment and systems which normally operate during certain seasons shall be tested
during the appropriate season. Tests shall be performed on individual equipment,
systems and their controls. Where the equipment or systems and control for proper
operation, functioning and performance, the latter shall be operated simultaneously
with the equipment or system during tests.
15990 - 3
Testing; Adjusting & Balancing of Environmental Systems
3.01
General (cont’d)
J.
On all electric motors the running amps on each phase shall be recorded when the
motor is initially run and also when the motor is run during testing and balancing.
K. During tests of equipment and systems, the Owner's operation department shall
be fully instructed as to the operation and maintenance of the equipment and
systems.
L. On completion, all systems will be properly balanced and left in working order and the trial
of the whole plant shall take place during the appropriate season when design conditions
are met or approximated. The trail of the plant shall last for a period of one calendar
month under normal conditions of operation without any further adjustments, or balancing.
If any major defects or deviations occur in the reading by the Contractor and a further
month's tests shall be carried out.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
E.
G.
H.
I.
Pressure Tests - Plumbing Systems
All piping for sanitary systems shall be tested by filling same with water to two feet
above the highest plumbing fixtures before connection of fixtures for a period of 24
hours and proved tight at this pressure. Any leaks which may develop shall be repaired
to a watertight condition.
All piping for the storm water system shall be tested by filling the risers to the roof or to a
minimum of 10 feet of head on the portion being tested and leaks repaired to watertight
condition. No piping shall be buried or concealed without an approved test.
After all fixtures are connected the entire system shall be subjected to a smoke test by
pumping smoke into the installation with the aid of a smoke machine. When the smoke
emerges from the top of the ventilating pipe, a plug inserted at this points and sealed
with a small quantity of water.
All hot, recalculating and cold water piping shall be hydrostatically tested at 1000 kPa or
1.5 times working pressure, whichever is the greater, for a period of 24 hours and
proved tight at this pressure. Where a portion of the water piping system is to be
concealed before completion, this portion shall be tested separately in the same manner
as specified for the entire system.
If inspection, or test for supply, waster, vent, or soil piping shows defects, such defective
work, or material, shall be replaced and inspection and tests repeated. Repairs to piping
shall be made with new material.
Pressure Tests – Piping Systems
Test all piping systems including valves, fittings, and joints under a hydrostatic pressure
of one and one-half times the operating pressure or 1000 kPa.(whichever is larger)
unless otherwise specified.
Block off or remove all elements such as traps, instruments, automatic valves,
diaphragm valves, relief valves, pumps or any other equipment which may be damaged
by test pressure. Open, but do not back seat all valves.
Fill the system with water and vent the system at high points to remove air.
Maintain test pressure for a sufficient length of time to enable complete inspection to be
made of all joints and connection and for a minimum of two hours.
Systems will not be accepted if pressure loss within test period exceeds 7 kPa.
Repair all leaks and defects uncovered by test and retest the system.
After tests, drain the system, blow out and clean of all dust and foreign matter. Clean all
strainers, valves and fittings of all dirt, fillings and debris.
Do not insulate or conceal piping until after tests have been completed and results
approved.
All fire protection piping shall be tested in accordance with NFPA requirements.
3.04
Pressure Tests – Ductwork
After completion of the duct systems and before insulation is installed, the entire system
shall be tested under operating conditions for performance and leakage. Maximum
allowable leakage shall not exceed one percent (1%).
3.05
A.
Certified Reports
Submittal: Three copies of the reports described herein, covering air and water system
performance, air motion in m/s, and sound pressure levels, shall be submitted to the
Project Managerprior to final tests and inspection.
Instrument records: Types, serial numbers, and dates of calibration of all instruments
shall be included.
B.
15990 - 4
Testing; Adjusting & Balancing of Environmental Systems
3.05
Certified Reports (cont’d)
Reports shall identify conspicuously, items not conforming to contract requirements, or
obvious mal- operation and design deficiencies.
D. Certification: The reports shall be certified by an independent Registered Professional
Engineer who is versed in the field of air and water balancing and who is not affiliated with
any firm involved in the design or construction phases of the project. Certification shall
include checking of adherence to agenda, of calculations, of procedures, and evaluation of
final summaries.
C.
3.06
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
K.
3.07
A.
B.
C.
Water System – Balancing Procedures
Adjustment: All heating and cooling water systems shall be adjusted to provide required
quantity to or through each component.
Metering: Water quantities and pressures shall be measured with calibrated meters.
1.
Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metering fittings and pressure gages shall be used
to measure water flow rates and balance systems.
2.
Systems shall be adjusted to provide the approved pressure drops through the
heat transfer equipment (coils except room units, converters etc.) prior to the
capacity testing.
3.
Where flow metering fittings are not installed, flow balance shall be determined by
measuring temperature differential across the heat transfer equipment.
Measurement of temperature differential shall be performed with the air system,
adjusted as described herein, in operation.
Automatic control valves shall be positioned for full flow through the heat transfer
equipment of the system during tests.
Flow through by-pass circuits at two-way valves shall be adjusted to balance that
through the supply circuit.
Distribution: Adjustment of distribution shall be effected by means of balancing devices
(cocks, valves, and fittings) and automatic flow control valves as provided; service
valves shall not be used.
Where automatic flow control valves are utilized in lieu of Venturi tubes, only pressure
differential need be recorded, provided that the pressure is at least the minimum
applicable to the tag rating.
Special procedures: Where available pump capacity (as designed) is less than total flow
requirements of individual heat transfer units of system served, full flow may be simulated
by the temporary restriction of flow to portions of the system; specific procedures shall be
delineated in the agenda.
Water System Data
The certified report for each water system shall include the data listed below.
Pumps
1.
Installation Data:
a.
Manufacture and model
b.
Size
c.
Type drive
Motor hp (kw), voltage, phase, and full load amps.
2.
Design Data:
a.
Flow rate L/S.
b.
Head M, kPa,
3.
Design Data: (con’t)
c.
r.p.m.
d.
bhp (kw) and amps.
4.
Recorded Data:
a.
Discharge pressures (full-flow and no-flow)
b.
Suction pressures (full-flow and no-flow)
c.
Operating head
d.
Operating flow rate (L/S)-from pump curves if metering is not provided.
e.
No-load amps
f.
Full-flow amps.
g.
No-flow amps.
h.
Overload settings.
Air Heating and Cooling Equipment:
1.
Design Data:
a.
Load in kw.
b.
Water flow rate, L/S.
c.
Entering and leaving water temperature.
15990 - 5
Testing; Adjusting & Balancing of Environmental Systems
3.07
Water System Data (cont’d)
d.
Entering and leaving air conditions (db andwb).
e.
Air flow, cu.m/sec.
f.
Water pressure drop.
C.
Air Heating and Cooling Equipment: (cont’d)
2.
Recorded Data:
a.
Type of equipment and identification (location or number designation).
b.
Entering and leaving air conditions (db and wb).
c.
Entering and leaving water temperatures.
d
Water flow rate (L/S) if metered.
e.
Water pressure drop.
D.
Air Cooled Water Chilling Units
1.
Installation Data:
a.
Manufacturer, model, type.
b.
Size and output (kw).
c.
Motor hp (kw) voltage, cycles, phase, full &
part load amps for fans and compressors.
d.
Outside design conditions (db and wb).
e.
Chilled water flow rate L/S.
f.
Chilled water pressure drop.
g.
Entering and leaving water temperatures.
2.
Recorded data
a.
Water flow rate L/S.
b.
Water pressure drop.
c.
Entering and leaving water temperatures.
d.
Full and part load amps, and overload settings.
e.
Entering and leaving air temperatures.
E.
Refrigeration Machine
Suction and discharge refrigerant pressures, oil pressure and water pressure drop across
coils and chillers.
3.08
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Air System Balancing Procedures
Adjustments: Adjust all air handling systems to provide the required design air quantity
to, or through, each component. Adjustingand balancing of all systems shall be
conducted during periods of the year approximating maximum seasonal operation. All
other ancillary systems shall be in simultaneous operation.
Air volumes shall be within 10 percent of the design values.
Equalizers: Equalizing devices shall be adjusted to provide uniform velocity
across the inlets (duct side for supply) of terminals prior to measuring flow rates.
Balance: Flow adjusting (volume control) devices shall be used to balance air quantities
only (i.e., proportion flow between various terminals comprising system) and only to the
extent that their adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound (i.e. excess
of specified limits).
1.
Balancing between runs (submains), branch mains, and branches) shall be
accomplished by flow regulating devices at, or in, the divided-flow fitting.
2.
Restriction imposed by flow regulating devices in or at terminals shall be
minimal. Final measurements 2.Restriction imposed by flow regulating devices in
of air quality shall be made after the air terminal has been adjusted to provide the
optimum air patterns of diffusion.
Fan adjustment: Total air system quantities, shall be varied by adjustment of fan speeds
or axial-flow fan wheel blade pitch. Damper restriction of a system's total flow may be
used only for systems with direct- connected fans (without adjustable pitch blades),
provided system pressure is less than 13 mm wg and sound level criteria is met.
Air Measurement:
1.
Except as specifically indicated herein, pitot tube traverses shall be made of each
duct to measure air flow therein. Pitot tubes, associated instruments, traverses,
and techniques shall conform to the ASHRAE Handbook & Product Directory,
Fundamentals.
2.
Except for ducts serving modular office areas with movable partitions, which are
subject to change, pitot tube traverses may be omitted provided the duct serves
only a single room or space and its design volume is less than 1 m3/s.In lieu of
pitot tube traverses, air flow in the duct shall be determined by totaling volume of
individual terminals served, measured as described herein.
15990 - 6
Testing; Adjusting & Balancing of Environmental Systems
3.
Where duct's design velocity and air quantity are both less than 5 m/s and 0.5
m3/s. respectively, air quantity may be determined by measurements at terminals
served.
3.08
Air System Balancing Procedures (cont’d)
F.
Tests holes: Shall be in a straight duct, as far as possible downstream from elbows,
bends, take-off, and other turbulence generating devices, to optimize reliability of flow
measurements.
3.08
H.
I.
3.09
A.
B.
C.
C.
3.10
A.
B.
Air System Balancing Procedures (cont’d)
Air terminal balancing: Generally, measurement of flow rates by means of velocity
meters applied to individual terminals, with or without cones or other adapters, shall be
used only for balancing. Measurement of air quantities at
each type of air terminal (inlet and outlet) shall be determined by the method approved
for the balancing agenda. Laboratory tests shall be conducted to prove accuracy of
methodology when so directed. Such tests shall be conducted in conformance with
ASHVE Research Report No.1162 and shall be made at no cost to the Owner.
Air motion and distribution shall be as specified and indicated on drawings. The Contractor
at no additional cost to the Owner shall, in addition to air motion measurements, make
smoke tests when directed to demonstrate the air distribution from air terminals.
Air System Data
Report: The certified report shall include for each air handling system the data
listed below.
Equipment:
1.
Installation data
a.
Manufacturer and model
b.
Size
c.
Arrangement, discharge, and class
d.
Motor hp, voltage, phase, cycles, and full load amps
e.
Location and local identification data
2.
Design data
a.
Data listed in schedules on drawings and specifications
3.
Fan recorded (test) data
a.
cu.m/s
b.
Static pressure
c.
rpm
d.
Motor operating amps
e.
motor operating bhp
f.
Motor overload settings
Duct systems:
1.
Duct air quantities (maximum and minimum)-main, submains, branches, outdoor
(outside) air, total air, and exhaust:
a.
Duct size(s)
b.
Number of pitot tube (pressure) measurements
c.
Sum of velocity measurements (Note: Do not add pressure measurements)
d.
Average velocity
e.
Recorded (test) cu.m/s
f.
Design cu.m/s
Duct systems: (cont’d)
2.
Individual air terminals
a.
Terminal identification(supply or exhaust location and number designation).
b.
Type size, Manufacturer and catalog identification.
c.
Applicable factor for application, velocity, area, etc., and designated area.
d.
Design and recorded velocities- m/s (state "core", "inlet", etc., as
applicable).
e.
Design and recorded quantities - cu.m/sec.
f.
Deflector vans or diffusion cone settings.
Sound Test Procedure
Scope: Tests to demonstrate compliance with sound requirements shall be made at
each selection point included in the agenda:
Timing: Sound level measurements shall be taken at times when the building is
unoccupied, or when activity in surrounding areas and background noise levels in areas
tested are at aminimum and relatively free from sudden changes in noise levels.
15990 - 7
Testing; Adjusting & Balancing of Environmental Systems
C.
D.
Measurements shall be taken with all equipment secured, except that being tested.
The required sound levels shall be measured at any point within a room not less than 2
meters from an air terminal or room unit, and not closer than 1 meter from any floor,
wall, or ceiling surface.
3.10
E.
Sound Test Procedure (cont’d)
Meters: Sound levels shall be measured with a sound meter complying with ANSI S1.4.
The "A" scale shall be used to measure overall sound levels. To determine the
specified octave band levels, the above sound level meter, set on "C" scale, shall be
supplemented by an Octave Band and for complying with ANSI S1.11.
Equipment components of room sound (noise) levels shall be determined for each (of
eight) octave bands as follows:
Measure room sound pressure level "LP-b" with equipment to be tested shut off.
Measure room sound pressure level "LP-t" with equipment to be tested turned on.
Calculate (LP-t)-(LP-b)*, if this value is less than 1, applicable test must be rerun
with lower background level (LP-b) unless (LP-t)* is within sound pressure level
specified for equipment. Determine "C" from the table below:
(LP-t) - (LP-b) (db)
1 2 3 4-41/2 5-51/2 6-71/2 8-12
12 & over
C
db
7 4 3
2
1-1/2
1
1/2
0
F.
1.
2.
3.
3.11
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.12
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
G.
Sound Level Data
Report: The certified report shall record data on sound levels, taken at each selected
location, as follows:
Source of sound and location: Diagram or description of relationship of sound source to
measuring instrument.
"A" scale readings:
1.
Equipment being tested turned off (ambient).
2.
Equipment being tested turned on (operating condition).
Reading at each specified octave band frequency:
1.
Equipment being tested turned off (ambient).
2.
Equipment being tested turned on (operating condition).
"Equipment components" of sound (noise) levels with applicable calculations per "sound
test procedure".
Graph showing relationship between pressure levels specified and recorded readings.
Retest: Subsequent to any correctional construction work, such as acoustic corrections,
measurement shall be made to verify that associated air and water quantities, as
previously measured, have not been disrupted.
Certified report shall record all sound data, and their locations, after final adjustments of
air and water systems involved.
Final Tests, Inspection And Acceptance
Scope: Test shall be made to demonstrate that capacities and general performance of
air and water systems comply with contract requirements.
At the time of final inspection, the Contractor shall recheck, in the presence of the Project
Manager random selections of data (water and air quantities, air motion, and sound levels)
recorded in the Certified Report, .In addition, all but not limited to courtrooms, auditoriums,
and conference rooms shall be rechecked.
Points and areas for recheck shall be selected by the Supervising Engineer.
Measurement and test procedures shall be the same as approved for work forming basis
of Certified Report.
Selections for recheck (specific plus random) in general, will not exceed 25 percent of
the total number tabulated in the report, except that special air systems may require a
complete recheck for safety reasons.
Retests: If random tests elicit a measured flow deviation or 10 percent or more
from, or a sound level of 2 db or moregreater than, that recorded in the
Certified Report listings, at 10 percent or more of the rechecked selections,
the report shall be automatically rejected. In the event the report is rejected,
all systems shall be readjusted and tested, new data recorded, new Certified
Reports submitted, and new inspection tests made, all at no additional cost to
the Owner.
END OF SECTION
15990 - 8
Testing; Adjusting & Balancing of Environmental Systems
Bidding Documents for Procurement of:
Contract No. NCB AH-CW01
Issued on: July 2008
NCB No: NCB AH-CW01
Employer: The United Nations Development Program- UNDP
VOLUME II: Technical Specifications
Part C
ELECTRICAL
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME II / Part C
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Item
Title
Page
From
Thru
To
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
thru
16111-03
DIVISION - 16: ELECTRICAL WORKS
16111
Conduit
16111-01
16114
Cable Tray
16114-01
16120
Wiring
16120-01
16121
Structured Cabling
16121-01
16122
600 Volt Cable
16122-01
16131
Pull & Junction Boxes
16131-01
16133
Cabinets
16133-01
16134
Outlet Boxes
16134-01
16141
Wall Switches
16141-01
16145
Receptacles
16145-01
16147
Plate Covers
16147-01
16150
Motors
16150-01
16155
Motor Starters
16155-01
16160
Panelboards
16160-01
16161
Grounding and Bonding
16161-01
16170
Low Voltage Disconnect Switches
16170-01
16182
Low Voltage Circuit Breakers
16182-01
16190
Supporting Devices
16190-01
16199
Equipment Identification
16199-01
16211
Low Voltage Diesel Generators
16211-01
16215
Automatic Transfer Switch
16215-01
16480
Low Voltage Switchboards
16480-01
16511
Lighting Fixtures
16511-01
16603
Lightning Protection System
16603-01
16611
Static Un-interruptable Power System (UPS)
16611-01
16623
Kitchen Equipment Wiring
16623-01
16721
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System
16721-01
16740
Telephone System
16740-01
16760
Intercom System
16760-01
16771
Public Address System
16771-01
16780
CCTV System
16780-01
16781
Community Antenna Television System
16781-01
16875
Electrical Hand Dryers
16875-01
16920
Motor Control Center
16920-01
I
16114-01
16120-02
16121-02
16122-03
16131-01
16133-01
16134-01
16141-01
16145-02
16147-01
16150-01
16155-02
16160-02
16161-03
16170-01
16182-02
16190-01
16199-02
16211-07
16215-02
16480-04
16511-10
16603-02
16611-06
16623-01
16721-19
16740-09
16760-01
16771-04
16780-02
16781-05
16875-01
16920-02
Volume II (C)ToC/ Yr. 2008
SECTION 16111
CONDUITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
Work Included
Rigid steel conduit.
Flexible conduit.
Plastic conduit.
Conduit fittings.
Related Work
Section 16190: Supporting Devices
Section 16134: Outlet Boxes
Section 16199: Equipment Identification
1.03
A.
B.
C.
Reference Standards
IEC
BS
VDE
1.04
A.
B.
Submittals
Submit manufacturer's literature and product data.
Submit certificate of compliance with reference standards.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
Rigid Steel Conduit
Steel conduit, couplings and elbows shall be hot-dip galvanized, rigid mild steel, in accordance with
the Code.
2.02
Plastic Conduit
Plastic conduit, if permitted to be used shall be Schedule 40, suitable for use with 90oC. wiring,
high impact, polyvinyl chloride and shall be used with plastic conduit fittings. Each length of
conduit shall be furnished with one standard coupling. Joints shall be made with solvent cement. All
additional conduit couplings, factory bends, plastic-to- steel conduit adapters, solvent cement, and
special fittings for the complete conduit system shall be included. Couplings shall have a center
stop to ensure proper seating.
2.03
Couplings and Thread Protectors
Each length of threaded conduit shall be complete with a coupling on one end and a thread
protector on the other. The thread protector shall have sufficient mechanical strength to protect the
threads during normal handling and storage.
2.04
Flexible Conduit
All flexible conduits shall be in accordance with IEC, shall be galvanized steel cored, spiral wound.
Use liquid tight in wet areas.
2.05
Metal Conduit Fittings
All metal conduit fittings shall be compatible with conduit. Galvanized iron or galvanized steel
fittings shall be used with steel conduit.
2.06
Flexible Conduit Fittings
All flexible conduit fittings shall be galvanized steel, and compatible with conduit liquid tight-fittings
shall be used in liquid tight conduits.
2.07
Special Fittings
Conduit sealing, rustproof, and other types of special fittings shall be provided as required by the
drawings and these specifications and shall be consistent with the area and equipment with which
they are associated. Fittings installed outdoors or in damp locations shall be sealed and gasketed.
Outdoor fittings shall be of heavy cast construction. Hazardous area fittings and conduit sealing
shall conform with the code requirements for the area classification.
16111 - 1
Conduit
2.08
Bushings
Bushings shall be provided for the termination of all conduits not terminated in hubs and couplings.
Grounding type insulated bushings with insulating inserts in metal housing shall be provided for
conduit 32mm and larger. Standard bushings shall be galvanized.
2.09
Locknuts
One interior and one exterior locknut shall be provided for all conduit terminations not provided with
threaded hubs and couplings. Locknuts shall be designed to securely bond the conduit to the box
when tightened. Locknuts shall be so constructed that they will not be loosened by vibration.
2.10
Raintight Conduit Hubs
Raintight conduit terminating hubs shall be furnished where indicated on the drawings or required
by these specifications. Malleable iron hubs shall be used for steel conduit.
2.11
Conduti Supports
Conduit supports shall be furnished and installed in accordance with Section 16190.
2.12
Conduit Expansion Couplings
Couplings shall have factory installed pressure pins and packing ring to prevent entrance of
moisture. Couplings shall be equipped with grounding ring or grounding conductor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
Application
Within the building, rigid steel conduit shall be used for all Eelectrical Installations so as to
prevent electrical interference between power and low current systems.
3.02
A.
Rigid Steel Conduit
Except as otherwise specified all conduit shall be installed in concealed runs parallel or
perpendicular to dominant surfaces with right angle turns made of symmetrical bends or fittings.
Conduit shall be located at least 150 mm. from hot water pipes, medical gas piping (if any), and
from other hot surfaces.
Moisture pockets shall be eliminated from conduits. If water cannot drain to the natural opening in
the conduit system, a hole shall be drilled in the bottom of a pull box or a "C-type" conduit fitting
provided in the low point of the conduit run.
Metal conduit shall be joined by threaded conduit couplings with the conduit ends butted. The use
of running threads will not be permitted.
Where metal conduit cannot be joined by standard threaded couplings, conduit unions or split
couplings may be used if both material and location are acceptable to the Project Manager. Only
ground seat type watertight unions shall be used where the union may be submerged.
Where unions which do not have ground seats are used in vertical or inclined conduit runs, the
coupling nut shall be installed uppermost to prevent the entrance of water into the union.
A run of conduit shall not contain more than the equivalent of four quarter bends, including those
immediately at outlets or fittings. Bends in conduit shall be made without reducing the internal
diameter of the conduit. The use of a pipe tee or vise for bending conduit will not be permitted.
The inside radius of conduit bends shall be not less than six times the inside diameter of the
conduit. Conduits deformed or crushed in any way shall be removed from the work site.
The plane of all conduit ends shall be square with the center line. Where threads are required, they
shall be cut and cleaned prior to conduit reaming. The ends of all conduit shall be reamed to
remove all rough edges and burrs.
A cutting lubricant shall be used in threading operations; the dies shall be kept sharp, and
provisions shall be made for chip clearance.
All steel conduit, after threading, shall be regalvanized. The Contractor shall supply this protective
material and shall apply it in the field.
Conduit shall be securely fastened to all boxes and cabinets. Threads on metallic conduit shall
project through the wall of the box to allow the bushing to butt against the end of the conduit. The
locknuts both inside and outside shall then be tightened sufficiently to bond the conduit securely to
the box.
All conduits entering enclosures outdoors or in wet areas shall enter through watertight hubs or
threaded openings.
Precautions shall be taken to prevent the accumulation of water, dirt, or concrete in the conduit.
Conduit in which water or other foreign materials have been permitted to accumulate shall be
thoroughly cleaned or, where such accumulation cannot be removed by methods acceptable to the
Project Manager, the conduit shall be replaced.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
16111 - 2
Conduit
3.03 Flexible Conduit
A.
Flexible conduit inserts shall not be greater than 760mm in length.
B.
Flexible conduit inserts shall be installed in all conduit runs which are supported by both building
steel and by structures subject to vibration or thermal expansion.
C.
Flexible conduit shall be installed in conduit runs with cross expansion joints or which connect to
building supported independent structures.
D.
The necessity for flexible conduit inserts should be considered in all long conduit runs where
differential expansion problems may be expected.
E.
Flexible conduit shall be installed adjacent to all equipment and devices which move in relation to
the supply conduit due to vibration, normal operation of the mechanism, or thermal expansion.
F.
The supply conduit shall be connected to pressure switches, thermocouples, solenoids, and similar
devices with flexible conduit. Flexible conduit shall be installed adjacent to the motor terminal
housing for motors requiring 100mm and smaller conduit. Provision for vibration and thermal
expansion at motors requiring larger than 100mm conduit shall be accomplished by use of pendant
hangers, flexible conduit other than at the motor termination, or other means acceptable to the
Project Manager.
3.04
Plastic Conduit
A.
Except as specified in the following paragraphs, plastic conduits shall be installed in accordance
with the installation requirements previously specified for rigid steel conduit. Expansion joints for
exposed conduit or buried conduit which will be exposed to temperature variations during
installation shall be provided as recommended by the manufacturer.
B.
Joints shall be unthreaded solvent cement type as recommended by the conduit
manufacturer. The contact surfaces of the conduit and fitting socket shall be cleaned with solvent,
methyl ketone, or acetone, liberally coated with solvent cement, promptly and fully engaged, and
either conduit or fitting rotated approximately 1/4 turn to dispel air and evenly distribute solvent
cement over contact surfaces. For proper connection, total elapsed time between the start of the
cement application to the surfaces being joined and final assembly of the joint should not exceed
60 seconds. The initial strength of the joint will permit continuous conduit installation; however,
additional stress at the joint shall be avoided for at least 24 hours after joining.
C.
Bends shall be made from straight conduit lengths or shall be factory fabricated. Bend radius shall
be in accordance with standards and regulations.
D.
The conduit length for field bending shall be heated to approximately 135 degrees C by radiant
heat, hot air, or hot liquid immersion. Open flame heating will not be permitted. Special mandrels
or forms shall be used to provide a smooth bend without reduction of the conduit diameter. Conduit
discolored by prolonged heating will not be acceptable. The material must be inflammable and/or
self-extinguishing.
3.05
Conduit Supports
Support conduits in accordance with Section 16190
3.06
Color Coding
Provide color bands for conduits in accordance with Section 16199.
3.07
Conduti Capacity
The number of wires in an individual conduit shall be as per code.
END OF SECTION
16111 - 3
Conduit
SECTION 16114
CABLE TRAYS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
Work Included
Perforated heavy duty galvanized steel cable tray
1.02
A.
B.
Related Work
Section 16190: Supporting Devices
Section 16161: Grounding and Bonding
1.03
A.
B.
Reference Standars
BS
IEC
1.04
A.
B.
Submittals
Submit shop drawings and product data.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
Cable Tray
Cable tray shall be of the perforated type with minimum 40mm high sides with return flanges for
added rigidity and shall be manufactured from hot dip galvanized sheet steel. Minimum metal
thickness shall be as follows:
1. 1.5 mm for cable tray up to 300mm wide.
2. 2.0 mm for cable tray above 300mm wide.
Each length of cable tray shall be provided with heavy duty galvanized steel joint pieces and joint
cover plates.
Vertical runs of cable tray in electrical switchrooms shall be provided with clip-on type galvanized
sheet steel covers.
Provide cable tray complete with all necessary bends, tees, and risers, manufactured from hot dip
galvanized sheet steel.
All exposed cable trays shall be covered.
B.
C.
D.
2.02
Tray Supports
Provide tray supports in accordance with Section 16190.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
Co-ordination
Co-ordinate layout of cable tray with other services to ensure that there is no conflict.
Relocate cable tray as necessary to avoid building obstruction or other services.
3.02
A.
Installation
Cable trays shall be run in straight lines, at right angles to or parallel with the building walls, joists,
beams, columns, etc. and routed to avoid all interference. A minimum of 150 mm separation
shall be maintained between trays and all steam and hot water pipes and heating ducts. Standard
length straight sections shall be used throughout the system in so far as possible with short field
cut sections used only where absolutely necessary. Approved expansion joint fittings shall be
provided where the ladders or trays cross the building expansion joints. Covers shall be provided
to shade cables out of doors and to protect cable where required.
The cable tray sections shall be joined together with approved bolts, nuts and washers. The bolted
connections shall be tightened with a torque wrench to the recommended torque. The ladder and
tray systems shall be rigidly supported from the building structure with rods, brackets, etc. at
maximum intervals of 1.5 meters. The deflection of a loaded tray shall not exceed 12mm at any
point along the system. Anti-sway brackets or frames shall be provided at column lines and at the
mid-point of the bay through which the tray is routed except that the minimum interval between
sway braces shall be 6 metres. Supports for the tray sections and fittings shall be located in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and installed in accordance with Section
16190.
Paint all cut ends with rust inhibiting aluminium paint prior to installation.
B.
C.
3.03
A.
B.
Grounding
Provide a separate ground wire on all runs of cable tray bonded to the appropriate switchgear,
cabinets, and electrical equipment in accordance with Section 16161.
Provide 10 sq. mm copper bonding jumpers across all joints.
Test complete system for ground continuity.
END OF SECTION
16114 - 1
Cable Tray
SECTION 16120
WIRING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
C.
Work Included
Single core and multicore 600 volt wiring, 10mm2 and smaller.
Fixture Wiring.
Signaling Systems Wiring.
1.02
A.
B.
Related Work
Section 16199 :
Section 16161 :
1.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
Reference Standards
IEC 227 : PVC insulated flexible cables and cords.
IEC 228 :
IEC 502 :
IEC 287 :
1.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
Submittasl
Submit product data and manufacturers literature.
Submit blank commissioning test sheets.
Submit proposals for colour coding of insulation.
Submit completed test sheets.
Equipment Identification.
Grounding and Bonding.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Materials
Building Wiring: Concentric lay, uncoated copper with a normal maximum operating temperature of 85
degrees C, 600V, PVC insulation.
Power and Control Wiring: Concentric lay, uncoated copper with a normal maximum operating
temperature of 70 degrees C. Insulation to be 600V PVC with black PVC jacket. Provide white
conductor insulation with indelible black numerals at 25mm intervals on control cables. Maximum
conductor size to be 10 sq. mm.
Flame Retardant Power and Control Wiring: Multi Strand, concentric lay coated copper with a normal
maximum operating temperature of 90 degrees C and 600V flame retardant cross linked polyethylene
insulation and overall cable jackets of chlorosulfonated polyethylene, all in accordance with Standards
and Codes. Cable jacket to be applied over tape wrapped cable cores.
Flame Retardant Alarm and instrument Cable: Multi strand concentric lay, coated copper with a normal
maximum operating temperature of 90 degrees C and 600V flame retardant cross linked polyethylene
insulation, cable assembly shield of combination aluminium/mylar tape and 7 strand 0.6 sq.mm
minimum coated copper drain wire applied to achieve 100% cover over insulated conductors and
chlorosulfonated polyethylene cable jacket. Twisted pair cables with 60mm to 90mm lay staggered.
Each pair to be numbered.
Fixture Wire: Stranded round coated copper with an operating temperature of 200 degrees C with 600V
silicone rubber insulated and braided glass jacket, all in accordance with Standards and Codes.
Telephone Cable: Single or multi-pair as required. Bare copper wire minimum 0.8mm
diameter, 0.2mm thick PVC insulation, wires twisted to pairs with a cable core wrapping of insulating
foil, additional 0.4mm diameter (up to 10 pairs) or 0.6mm diameter (above 10 pairs) ground wire, with
aluminium foil wrapping, insulating foil wrapping and PVC cable assembly jacket. All telephone
installations shall conform to Itisalat Regulations and Approvals
Fire Alarm Signal Cable: shall be Fire resistant multicore cable to conform with Civil Defense
Regulations.
Lighting/Power Cable: Multicore copper conductors 600V grade PVC Insulation (minimum size 2.5 sq.
mm).
Loudspeaker Cable: Single pair with solid copper conductor (1.25mm diameter) in flat configuration
with polythene insulation and PVC jacket. Conductors to have a maximum DC loop resistance at 20
degrees C of 28 ohms per kilometer and a nominal capacitance of 91 picrofarads per meter.
Microphone Cable: Single pair screened with stranded copper conductors (13/0.2mm) with PVC
insulation lapped copper screen and PVC jacket. Conductors to have a maximum DC loop resistance
of 45.7 ohms per kilometer and a nominal capacitance of 430 picrofarads per meter.
Attendant Call Cable: Minimum 2.5 sq. mm cable as described in Part 2.01A above.
16120 -1-
Wiring
2.01
L.
M.
N.
Materials (cont’d)
Control Cable: Multicore 2.5 sq. mm cable as described in Part 2.01A above.
Data Cables : As required by the system supplier.
TV Cables : Coaxial 75 ohm impedance.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.02
A.
B.
Installation
Ensure conductor lengths for parallel feeders are equal.
Lace or clip conductor groups at switchgear panels, pullboxes, wireways, etc.
Provide grounding conductors and straps in accordance with Section 16161.
Wiring in conduit only to be installed after concrete, masonry and plastering work is complete and all
conduit has been cleaned out and dried.
Splice cables at accessible junction or outlet boxes only.
Colour code all wiring insulation as per Section 16199.
Terminate cables in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
Colour Codes: 230 V System
Phases : Red, yellow, blue
Neutral: Black
Ground : Green/yellow in combination
Tests
All power circuits shall be tested with the circuit complete except for connections to equipment.
Test all wiring for continuity, polarity and insulation resistance after installation and before connection.
END OF SECTION
16120 -2-
Wiring
SECTION 16121
STRUCTURED CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Work Included
Premises Distribution System (PDS)
Level 5 Cables
Patch Panels
Patch Cords
Information Outlets
1.02
A.
B.
C.
Related Work
Section 16111 Conduit
Section 16161 Grounding Bonding
Section 16199 Equipment Identification
1.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
Reference Standards
EIA/TIA-568
ISO/IEC JTC1/SC25/WG3
IEEE 802.3 10 base - T and 802.5
ANSI Standards
1.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
Submittals
Submit product data and manufacturers literature.
Submit blank commissioning test sheets.
Submit proposals for colour coding.
Submit completed test sheets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
The structured cabling system shall be modular, flexible building network that connects
voice, data, video and low voltage devices for cost effective building control.
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
Cable
High level 5 cables shall be 4 pair 100 ohm high performance cables, composed of 24
gauge bare solid copper conductors.
The transmission characteristics shall be at least equal to or better than those
specified in EIA/TIA 568.
Cables shall meet the proposed ANSI X3T9.5 requirements for UTP (unshielded
twisted pair) at a 100 Mbps (TP-PMD) transmission rate for lengths up to 100 meters.
Electrical Transmission Characteristics.
Mutual Capacitance - Nominal :
14 pF/ft.
Characteristics Impedance
:
100ohm at 100MHz
DC Resistance - Maximum
:
28.6Ohm/1000 ft.
Worst Pair to Pair Near End
Crosstalk
:
1
MHZ 90
4
MHZ 78
8
MHZ 72
10
MHZ 70
20
MHZ 63
25
MHZ 61
62.5
MHZ 50
100
MHZ 42
2.02
A.
C.
Patch Panels
Patch panel system shall be a reliable, sophisticated connector system that has been
made simple and accessible to the end user.
B.
Patch panel shall be rugged enough to withstand the most demanding patching
environment.
Patch panel system must cost effectively support true high-end applications such as
real-time interactive graphics and multimedia over UTP.
16121 - 1
Structured Cabling
2.03
A.
B.
Patch Cord
All cords shall be manufactured with round cordage which consists of 24 gauge tinned
copper, stranded conductors insulated with a solid polyolfin, tightly twisted into
individual pairs and jacketed with flame retardant PVC. This cordage shall be
terminated with suitable patch cord plugs that mate with the front of the connecting
block and feature built-in exclusions to prevent accidental polarity reversals and split
pairs.
The patch cords shall incorporate a "cross-over lead" concept which employs
crosstalk cancellation techniques to provide superior near-end crosstalk performance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
C.
Installation
Coordinate with conduits works
Wiring in conduit only to be installed after concrete, masonry and plastering work is
complete and all conduit has been cleaned out and dried.
Pull and terminate cables in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
END OF SECTION
16121 - 2
Structured Cabling
SECTION 16122
600 VOLT CABLE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
Work Included
Single and multi core insulated power conductors rated 600 volts or less, sized 10 sq. mm and greater.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
Related Work
Section 16161: Grounding and Bonding
Section 16120: Wiring
Section 16199: Equipment Identification
1.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Reference Standards
IEC 502
IEC 228
IEC 287
NFPA 70:
National Electric Code
ASTM B3 : Soft or annealed copper wire
1.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Submittasl
Provide Product Data and manufacturers literature.
Provide Operation and Maintenance Data.
Submit blank test sheets for approval.
Submit completed factory and field test sheets.
Sample of cable pulling lubricant
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.02
A.
General
Cables shall be one, three or four core consisting of 99% conductivity, bare annealed stranded copper
conductors rated at a normal maximum operating temperature of 90 degrees C.
Insulation for cables 10 mm2 and greater shall be of extruded semi-conducting cross-linked
polyethylene, meeting standards requirements. A semi-conducting tape may be used under the
polyethylene.
Provide a PVC overall jacket on all cables, with a durable marking on the surface of the jacket at
intervals not exceeding 610mm. Marking shall include manufacturers name, conductor size and voltage
class of cable.
Cable ampacity and electrical characteristics shall conform with specified codes and standards.
Provide a ground wire with each circuit sized in accordance with Section 16161. Ground wire shall be
bare, concentric lay copper.
Where armoring is required, it shall be aluminium strip armour on single core cables and galvanized steel
or tape armour on multicore cables.
Suitable cable glands to each type of cable shall be used everywhere.
B.
C.
Splices and Terminations
Cable splices and terminations shall be furnished in kit form and shall conform to the recommendations of
the cable manufacturer. All material shall be furnished in factory sealed packages and shall not be
opened until required for use.
Splices shall be suitable for installation in manholes.
Terminal connectors shall be pressure, bolted clamp type or compression type.
2.03
A.
B.
Cable and Cable Markers
Lacing material for field installed cable shall be non-releasing nylon ties.
Tie-on cable markers shall be provided in accordance with Section 16199.
2.04
Wiring
Single core 600 volt cable of size 10 mm2 and less is specified in Section 16120.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
.
C.
Internal Cable Installation
Support internal horizontal and vertical runs on cable tray using non-ferrous clamps at 1 meter intervals.
Arrange multicore cables to run parallel on tray with a lateral spacing of the diameter of the largest cable.
Arrange single core cables with phases in trefoil formation providing one cable diameter space between
trefoil groups.
D.
Where cables are routed through walls or floors, the opening between the cables and the structure shall
be sealed such that the fire resistance of the sealing barrier is at least as great as the surrounding
structure.
16122 - 1
600 Volt Cable
3.02
A.
G.
M.
External Cable Installation
Immediately prior to the placement of each cable or cable group, the raceway route to be followed shall
be inspected and ascertained to be complete in installation and free of all materials detrimental to the
cable or its placement. All cables assigned to a particular duct or conduit shall be grouped and pulled in
simultaneously, using cable grips or pulling eyes and acceptable lubricants.
All cables shall be carefully checked both as to size and length before being pulled into conduits or ducts.
Cable pulled into the wrong conduit or duct or cut too short to rack, train, and splice as specified herein,
shall be removed and replaced.
B.
Cable in Shafts etc.: Cable shall be supported at all times without short bends or excessive sags and shall
not be permitted to lie on the manhole floor. Cable ends must not be submerged. Cable racks, saddle
supports or trays shall be provided for permanent support. Temporary support required during placement
shall be with rope slings, timbers, or alternate method acceptable to the Project Manager.
Cable shall be located in manholes to provide minimum interference with other cables to be installed or
installation of future cables in spare conduits.
C.
Cable Pulling: Pulling shall be done with nylon or rope recommended by cable manufacturer.
D.
Cable Grips: Factory installed pulling eyes shall be used for pulling cable where they are available.
Woven wire cable grips shall be used to pull all single conductor cable, 70mm2 and larger, where pulling
eyes are not available, and all multiconductor cable. Pulling loops shall be used to pull single conductor
cable smaller than 70 mm2. When a cable grip or pulling eye is used for pulling, the area of the cable
covered by the grip or seal plus 150 mm shall be cut off and discarded when the pull is completed.
As soon as the cable is pulled into place, the pulling eyes, cable grips, or pulling loops shall be removed
and any cable which was sealed shall be resealed.
E.
Swivels: A reliable nonfreezing type of swivel, or swivel connection, shall be inserted between the pulling
eye, grip, or loop to prevent cable twisting under strain.
F.
Feeding Tubes: A 100mm or larger flexible feeding tube, with a removable nozzle sized to fit the ducts,
shall be used in pulling all underground cable. The feeding tube shall be long enough to extend from the
duct entrance to the outside of the manhole and shall be so arranged that it will be impossible for the
cable to drag across the edge of the manhole ring or any other damaging surface.
Lubricant: Only lubricants recommended by the cable manufacturer and acceptable to the Supvervising
Engineer shall be used.
H.
Inspection: The outside of each cable reel shall be carefully inspected and protruding nails, fastenings, or
other objects which might damage the cable shall be removed. A thorough visual inspection for flaws,
breaks, or abrasions in the cable sheath shall be made as the cable leaves the reel, and the pulling speed
shall be slow enough to permit this inspection. Damage to the sheath or finish of the cable shall be
sufficient cause for rejecting the cable. Cable damage in any way during installation shall be replaced.
I.
Pulling Tension: The pulling tension of any cable shall not exceed the maximum tension recommended
by the cable manufacturer. Pulling mechanisms of both the manual and power types used by the
Contractor shall have the rated capacity in tones clearly marked on the mechanism. Whenever the
capacity of the pulling mechanism exceeds the recommended pulling tension of the cable as given by the
cable manufacturer, a dynamometers shall be used to show the tension on the cable and the indicator
shall be constantly watched. If any excessive strain develops, the pulling operation shall be stopped at
once and the difficulty determined and corrected.
J.
Sidewall Pressure: To avoid insulation damage from excessive sidewall pressure at bends in duct and
conduit runs, the pulling tension in kilograms at a bend shall not exceed 445 times the radius of the bend
in metres.
K.
Cable Bends: Extreme care shall be exercised during the placement of all cable to prevent tension and
bending conditions in excess of the manufacturer's recommendations. The permanent radius of bend
after cable installation shall be in accordance with the cable manufacturer's recommendations.
L.
Supports: All cable supports and securing devices shall have bearing surfaces located parallel to the
surfaces of the cable sheath and shall be installed to provide adequate support without deformation of the
cable jackets or insulation.
Adequte cable end lengths shall be provided and properly placed in manholes to avoid longitudinal strains
and distorting pressures on the cable at conduit bushings and duct end bells.
Final inspection shall be made after all cables are in place and, where supports, bushings, and end bells
deform the cable jacket, additional supports shall be provided. Additional cable protection such as a
wrapping of light rubber belting, friction tape, or similar material shall be provided when required. Cable in
vertical runs shall be supported by woven wire grips in accordance with the Code requirements.
Cable Racks: Cable racks shall be furnished and installed in manholes as required to provide the proper
cable support. Cable racks shall be installed on spacings of not greater than 1 meter and shall be bolt secured to
permanent wall surfaces with self-drilling anchors or continuous slot concrete inserts.
N.
Cable Identification: The Contractor shall identify all cables in the locations specified in Section 16199.
Each marker shall be so attached that it is readily visible for circuit identification.
16122 - 2
600 Volt Cable
O.
3.02
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.
3.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
Moisture Seals: Each cable shall be kept sealed except when termination and splicing work is
being performed.
External Cable Installation (cont’d)
The ends of all cables shall be sealed with heat shrinkable caps. Cap sizes shall be as
recommended by the cap manufacturer for the cable outside diameter and insulation. Caps shall
contain sufficient adhesive that shrinkage of the cap during application results, information of a
positive watertight seal capable of withstanding complete immersion or total exposure without
permitting the entrance of moisture.
Before and after pulling, the leading end seal of each length of cable shall be examined and
repaired if necessary. All cut cable ends shall be promptly sealed after cutting except those to be
spliced or terminated immediately.
Cable Arcproofing: All cable joints shall be arcproofed where it occupies an enclosure such as a manhole,
building basement or a room in a building.
Arcproofing in a manhole shall extend in one helically wound half lapped layer from one duct end in the
manhole over the cable to the other duct end. The arcproofing shall be secured in position with glass
tape random wrapped according to the instructions of the arcproofing tape manufacturer.
Splices: Power cable circuits may be spliced only by methods and at locations specified, or as
acceptable to the Project Manager.
Splices shall not be made to utilize short lengths of cable nor shall they be made to provide correct
lengths on cable initially cut too short for particular circuits.
Splices, joints, and connections in cable shall be made only in manholes and shall be made in
accordance with the instructions of the cable and splice manufacturer.
Crimping Tools: Crimping tools used to secure conductors in compression type connectors or terminal
lugs shall be those made for that purpose and for the conductor sizes involved. The crimping tools shall
accurately crimp the conductor insulation support sleeve where provided. Crimping tools shall be
provided with guides to position connectors in the crimping, and shall be of a type which prevents the
tools from opening until the crimp action is completed. Crimping tools shall be a product approved by the
connector manufacturer. The Contractor shall establish and maintain a tool certification program to
ensure that crimping tools are kept in accurate operating condition.
Terminations: Cable shall be terminated in accordance with the following requirements.
Train cable in place and cut squarely to required length. Avoid sharp bends.
Install terminals or terminal connectors as required, ensuring a firm metal-to-metal contact.
Insulate each connection of cable to an insulated conductor (whether cable, bus, or equipment
bushing). The insulation shall cover all exposed surfaces of the conductors; the insulation voltage
level of the completed termination shall be not less than the insulation voltage level of the
connected conductors. Insulation of terminations shall be as specified in the following paragraphs.
Insulation of Terminations in 600 Volt Cable: Terminations which require insulation in cable rated 600
volts or less shall be insulated in accordance with the following requirements:
All exposed conductor and connector surfaces shall be covered with a minimum of three half-lapped
layers of self-vulcanizing rubber insulating tape.
A minimum of three half-lapped layers of polyvinyl chloride electrical tape shall be applied over the
rubber tape. The polyvinyl chloride tape shall extend a minimum of two cable diameters over the
cable jacket and a similar distance over other conductor insulation or connector requiring insulation.
Cable Testing
General: All insulated conductors shall be electrically tested after placement.
All circuits shall be tested with the circuit complete except for connections to equipment. All splices,
stress cones on shielded cable, and terminal connector attachments shall be complete prior to testing.
Any circuit failing to test satisfactorily shall be replaced or repaired and then retested.
All equipment and labor required for testing shall be provided by the Contractor.
Continuity, Identification, and Short Circuit Tests: All insulated conductors shall be tested for continuity
and conductor identification. In addition, all insulated conductors of multiconductor cable shall be tested
for short circuits. The Contractor shall furnish portable, battery powered, ring testers, and other test
equipment as required to conduct these tests.
Continuity tests shall include all tests necessary to confirm that the conductor being investigated
originates and terminates at the locations designated on the drawings.
Short circuit tests shall include all tests necessary to confirm that no conductor of a multiconductor cable
is short circuited to another conductor in that cable.
Insulation Tests: Resistance from ground provided by the insulation on all field installed insulated
conductors shall be measured. Measurement shall be accomplished as follows.
All 600 volt insulated conductors shall be tested with a 1,000 volt calibrated megger or an equivalent
testing device. Insulation resistance measurements shall be made between each conductor and ground
and between each conductor and all other conductors of the same circuit. Minimum acceptable
resistance values shall be approximately infinite.
16122 - 3
600 Volt Cable
E.
Comprehensive insulation test reports have to be submitted and approved by the Project Manager before
energizing.
END OF SECTION
16122 - 4
600 Volt Cable
SECTION 16131
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
Work Included
Pullboxes.
Junction boxes.
1.02
Related Work
Section 16111a :
Conduit
1.03
A.
B.
References Standards
IEC
NFPA - 70
1.04
A.
B.
Submittals
Submit manufacturer's literature.
Submit product sample.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
Materials
Pullboxes and Junction Boxes: Steel or malleable iron, galvanized construction, with screw-on or
hinged cover, code gauge and size to carry conduit bushes and wires.
Flush Mounted Pullboxes: Provide overlapping covers with flush-head cover retaining screws, prime
coated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
Installation: Locate pullboxes and junction boxes above removable ceilings or in electrical rooms,
utility rooms, or storage areas at maximum 15m on centers.
END OF SECTION
16131 - 1
Pull and Junction Boxes
SECTION 16133
CABINETS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
C.
Work Included
Electrical cabinets.
Communications cabinets.
Control cabinets.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
Related Work
Section 16161:
Section 16199:
Section 16721:
Section 16740:
1.03
A.
B.
Reference Standards
BS
IEC 144: Degrees of protection of enclosures
1.04
Submittals
Submit Dimensioned Shop Drawings
1.05
Painting
Equipment shall be given anti-corrosive primer coats followed by a high gloss ANSI 61 gray
finish. The interior surfaces of enclosures after preparation, priming and painting in the normal
manner, shall be given one further coat of anti-condensation paint to a light or white colour.
Metallic flake paint shall not be used on any equipment.
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Grounding and Bonding.
Equipment Identification.
Fire Alarm and Detection System.
Telephone System.
PRODUCTS
Cabinets
In internal dry locations cabinets shall be manufactured from 1.5 mm sheet steel finished stove
enamel after cleaning, decreasing, and rust proofing, and shall be equipped with locking door,
concealed flush hinges, and flush stainless steel or brass lock and catch assembly. All locks
shall be keyed alike. The complete unit shall have a minimum protection class of 1P54 in
accordance with IEC 144.
In external or damp internal locations they shall be manufactured from glass fiber reinforced
polyester and shall be equipped with opaque hinged lids with concealed hinges and special
locking device. The complete unit shall have a minimum protection class of IP55 in accordance
with IEC 144.
Provide 20mm thick hardwood backboards painted mat black in each cabinet.
Terminal Strips for Cabinets shall be as follows:
1.
Below 50 volts; screw terminal type.
2.
Above 50 volts: 600 volt screw terminal type with barriers between each set of terminals
and individual terminal points for each conductor.
Identification:
Identify terminal strips with permanent numbers. Identify cabinets with label on outside of
cabinet door in accordance with Section 16199.
Wiring Diagrams:
Provide wiring diagram in a proper holder on inside of each cabinet door showing units and
conductors connected to cabinet.
EXECUTION
Installation
Install cabinets surface mounted on walls or recessed as shown on drawings.
Terminate conduits in cabinet with lock nut and bushing or lock nut and grounding bushing.
Terminate wiring on terminal blocks or strips.
Vacuum clean cabinet on completion of installation.
Ground cabinet in accordance with Section 16161.
END OF SECTION
16133 - 1
Cabinets
SECTION 16134
OUTLET BOXES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
Work Included
Outlet Boxes.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
Related Work
Section 16141:
Section 16145:
Section 16147:
1.03
A.
B.
Reference Standards
BS
IEC.
1.04
A.
B.
Submittals
Product Data.
Product Samples - one of each type.
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
PART 3
Wall Switches.
Receptacles.
Plate Covers.
PRODUCTS
Materials
Boxes:
Hot dip galvanized, code gauge, shall be of style and type to accept device specified. Use
gang boxes where more than one device is used.
1)
Flush Boxes:
Pressed sheet steel, for conduit, knock-out type.
2)
Knock-outs which have been opened but not used shall be closed with snap-in knock-out
closers.
Exterior and Surface Boxes:
Cast, type with sealing gaskets in exterior locations.
For Ceiling:
100 mm. octagonal, circular, or loop boxes for receiving three or less 25 mm conduits.
For Flush Mounting in Walls:
Boxes with stainless steel cover for single or two gang outlets. For larger boxes use solid type
or special units. In masonry use deep boxes.
Boxes shall be selected after selection of the wiring devices so that compatibility problem will
not rise.
EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
C.
F.
Installation
Mount outlet boxes flush in areas other than mechanical rooms and electrical rooms.
Adjust position of outlets in finished masonry walls to suit masonry course lines.
Do not install boxes back-to-back in same wall. Coordinate cutting of masonry walls to achieve
neat openings for boxes. Use rotary cutting equipment to cut masonry work for installation of
electrical fittings.
D.
Locate boxes in masonry walls so that only a corner need be cut from masonry units.
E.
For boxes mounted in exterior walls make sure that there is insulation behind outlet boxes to
prevent condensation in boxes.
For outlets mounted above counters, benches and splashbacks coordinate location
and mounting heights with built-in units. Adjust outlet mounting height to agree with required
location for equipment served.
END OF SECTION
16134 - 1
Outlet Boxes
SECTION 16141
WALL SWITCHES
PART 1
1.01
B.
A.
GENERAL
Work Included
Wall Switches.
1.02
Related Work
A.
Section 16134:
Outlet Boxes.
Section 16147:
Plate Covers.
C.
Section 16199:
Equipment Identification.
1.03
Submittals
Submit Product Data.
B.
Submit Product Sample.
1.04
A.
B.
PART 2
Reference Standards
BS.
IEC.
PRODUCTS
2.01
Switch Construction
A.
Body and base shall be fully enclosed type, fire resistant, non-absorptive
thermosetting phenolic compound or approved equal.
B.
Contact material shall be silver alloy.
C.
Mounting yoke shall be corrosion resistant metal with plaster ears.
D.
Switches shall be flush mounted and wired with terminals of screw or screw clamp
type. Wiring terminals shall be suitable for holding two 4 sq.mm wires.
E.
Colour:
Colour of switches and their cover plates shall be subject to the approval of the
Project Manager. They should be of the best quality available.
F.
Unless otherwise specified, rating shall be 10 Amps at 127 Volts, 60 Hz. Lighting
panel grid switches shall be 20 Amps at 127 Volts, 60 Hz.
2.02
PART 3
A.
B.
C.
Lighting Switches
Lighting switches shall be snap type, in accordance with code, heavy duty, general use type,
single pole, double pole, 2 way, 3 way, 4 way, as shown on the drawings.
EXECUTION
3.01
Installation
Mount switches 1400mm above finished floor level, to centre of switch or switch assembly.
Coordinate switch mounting location with architectural detail.
Engrave all multigang switch arrays with names of loads served in accordance with Section
16199.
END OF SECTION
16141 - 1
Wall Switches
SECTION 16145
RECEPTACLES
PART 1
1.01
C.
GENERAL
Work Included
Receptacles.
1.02
Related Work
A.
Section 16147:
Plate Covers.
B.
Section 16161:
Grounding and Bonding.
Section 16199:
Equipment Identification.
D.
Section 16120:
Wiring.
1.03
A.
B.
Reference Standards
BS.
IEC.
1.04
A.
B.
Submittals
Submit product data.
Submit product samples.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
Receptacles
Receptacles shall be provided in accordance with the code.
One or more of the following receptacle types shall be provided as shown on the drawings.
1.
General purpose, single and duplex, rated 230 volts, 13 or 16 amps, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding
as shown on the drawings.
2.
Color: White unless otherwise noted or as approved by
the Project Manager.
Mounting yokes shall be corrosion resistant metal.
A.
B.
C.
2.02
Shaver Receptacle
Single receptacle complete with double wound isolating transformer with thermal overload
protection, on/off switch and neon indicator. Receptacle to accept shaver plug tops to British,
American and European Standards.
2.03
Plate Covers
Provide plate covers in accordance with Section 16147.
2.04
Outlet Boxes
Provide outlet boxes in accordance with Section 16134.
2.05
A.
Labeling
Provide labeling for receptacles, other than general purpose duplex, in accordance with Section
16199, indicating voltage, phase and amperes.
Engrave shaver Receptacle: "Shaver only".
B.
16145-1
Receptacles
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
EXECUTION
Installation
Wall receptacles shall be flush mounted unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Wall
receptacles shall be single or duplex as shown on the drawings and mounted in single-gang
spacing. Receptacles shall be rigidly attached to outlet boxes by means of two screws.
For exterior or damp interior locations, receptacles shall be mounted in watertight,
flush, cast type outlet boxes with threaded hubs and equipped with gasketed covers and
captive caps of the screw or twist type.
Mount receptacles in floor boxes in accordance with the Specifications.
Mount receptacles at the following heights unless otherwise specified. Heights given are to center of
the receptacle cover plate.
1.
Single and Duplex Receptacles: 300mm above bench level in kitchen areas, tea rooms, and
300mm above finished floor level elsewhere unless otherwise instructed by the Project
Manager.
2.
Shaver Receptacles: 1350mm above finished floor level.
All receptacles installed outdoors shall be provided with Ground fault circuit interruption.
Receptacles shall conform to code. Sensitivity shall be 30 milliamps.
Co-ordinate mounting of receptacles in tiled areas with tile layouts.
Provide weather-proof receptacles in damp or wet locations.
END OF SECTION
16145-2
Receptacles
SECTION 16147
PLATE COVERS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
Work Included
Plate Covers.
1.02
A.
B.
Related Work
Section 16141:
Section 16145:
1.03
A.
B.
Submittals
Submit Product Data.
Submit Product Samples.
1.04
A.
B.
Reference Standards
IEC.
BS.
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
PART 3
3.01
Wall Switches.
Receptacles.
PRODUCTS
Materials
Brushed Stainless Steel:
Type 302, 1mm thick, accurately die cut, protected with release paper.
Cast metal:
Die cast profile, ribbed for strength, flash removed, primed with grey enamel,
furnished complete with four mounting screws.
Gaskets: Resilient rubber or closed cell foam rethane.
Bakelite:
Completely smooth, colour to match device.
Plates
Flush Mounting Plates:
Bevelled type with smooth rolled outer edge, stainless steel throughout.
Surface Box Plates:
Bevelled, brushed stainless steel, pressure formed for smooth edge to fit box.
Weatherproof Plates:
Cast metal, gasketed; For receptacles, provide spring loaded gasketed doors.
Where two-gang boxes are required for single gang devices, provide special plates with device
opening in one gang and second gang blank.
Where special outlet boxes are specified provide special brass finely-cast, range of switches,
sockets, grid switches and coverplates, dimmer switches, telephone outlets and ancillary items
as noted on the drawings.
EXECUTION
Installation
Install coverplates on wiring devices.
END OF SECTION
16147 - 1
Plate Covers
SECTION 16150
MOTORS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
Work Included
Electric Motors associated with Mechanical Plant.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
Related Work
Division 15
Section 16155
Section 16161
Section 16199
1.03
A.
B.
C.
Reference Standards
BS.
IEC.
Similar Codes and Standards.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
Submittals
Provide Product Data and Shop Drawings.
Provide Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.
Provide Certificate of Shop Tests.
Provide Operation and Maintenance Data.
PART 2
:
:
:
:
Mechanical.
Motor Starters.
Grounding and Bonding.
Equipment Identification.
PRODUCTS
2.01
Motors
A. All motors shall be open drip-proof type except for water pumps, when the motors
shall
be totally enclosed fan cooled type. All motors shall comply with the code
requirements.
B.
Generally Class F insulation shall be utilized.
C.
Motors 1.0 kW and smaller can be suitable for operation at 230volts, single phase, 50 Hz
supply. All other motors, shall be suitable for operation at 400/230 Volts, three phase, 50 Hz
supply. This general rule of selection may be varied to suit particular applications. Motor
deratings to be considered properly, i.e. the demand load shall not be less than 80% of the
nominated load.
D.
Each motor shall have sufficient capacity to start and operate the machine it drives without
exceeding the motor nameplate rating at the speed specified or at any speed and load which
may be obtained by the drive actually furnished.
E.
Maximum motor speed shall be 1500 r.p.m.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.02
EXECUTION
Installation
Confirm loads, locations and final connections of motors prior to installation.
Install motor in accordance with Codes and Standards and manufacturer's instructions.
Provide nameplate in accordance with Section 16199 with additional information indicating that
the motor has a 10 degrees C below normal temperature rise.
Ground motor frame per Section 16161.
Provide motor starters in accordance with Section 16155.
Motors shall be furnished, attached and installed by the mechanical equipment manufacturer.
Field Tests
After installation, check and test equipment. Submit test results.
END OF SECTION
16150 - 1
Motors
SECTION 16155
MOTOR STARTERS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
Work Included
Motor Starters for all Electric Motor Driven Equipment.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
Related Work
Division 15
Section 16150:
Section 16199:
Section 16920:
1.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
Reference Standards
BS.
IEC.
ASTM - A47: Malleable Iron Castings.
ASTM - A525: Galvanized Sheet Steel.
1.04
A.
B.
Submittals
Shop Drawings and Product Data for each component.
Operation and Maintenance Data.
List of Manufacturers.
C.
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.02
:
Mechanical.
Motors.
Equipment Identification.
Motor Control Centers.
PRODUCTS
General
Motor starters shall be rated for continuous current suitable for the associated motor in
accordance with the standards and shall be A.C. general purpose. Ratings and combination
configuration of motor starters shall be as specified and as shown on the drawings.
Up to 1.0 kW Motor - Manual starters can be operable on 230 volts, single phase, 50 Hz supply.
Above 1.0kW-Across-the-line or star-delta magnetic starters as shown on the schedules,
operable on 400/230V Volts, three phase, 50 Hz supply as shown on the schedules.
Unless otherwise noted, above 7.5 kW motor shall have star delta magnetic starter.
Enclosure
For dry and dust free indoor location:
For damp and dusty indoor location:
For outdoor location:
For hazardous locations:
IP53
IP45
IP55
IP65
2.03
Manual Starters
Starters shall have a quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanism, trip-free manual reset thermal
overload relay, position indicator showing "On" "Off" or "Tripped" position and a red indicating
light showing the closed position. The overload relay shall have a field adjustment allowing up
to +10% variance in ratings of the nominal heater value.
2.04
A.
B.
Across The Line Magnetic Starter
Non-reversing with Start-Stop oil-tight push buttons mounted on the front.
B-Size: according to IEC
230 volts control voltage with fuse in one line and the other line grounded.
Trip free manual reset thermal overload relay, one per phase. Overload shall have +15%
adjustment from nominal heater rating to compensate for ambient conditions or to provide
closer overload protection upon installation. Thermal relay shall prevent single phasing of
motor.
Two NO contacts with provision for the addition of two NO or NC contacts as required for
interlocking.
C.
D.
E.
16155 - 1
Motor Starters
2.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.06
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.07
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
PART 3
Star-Delta Magnetic Starter
Open-transition, non-reversing type with Start-Stop oil-tight push buttons mounted on the door.
B Size: according to IEC
240 volts control voltage with fuse in one line and the other line grounded.
Adjustable timer, 5 - 15 seconds, for Star-Delta run-up period. The timer to be energised only
during the run-up period.
Star and Delta contactors to be mechanically and electrically interlocked.
Trip free manual reset thermal overload relay, one per phase. Overload shall have + 15%
adjustment from nominal heater rating to compensate for ambient conditions or to provide
closer overload protection upon installation. Thermal relay shall prevent single phasing of
motor.
Two NO contacts with provision for the addition of two NO or NC contacts as required for
interlocking.
Combination Starter
Rated for 400 Volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz supply.
Motor starter: Across-the-line or star-delta magnetic starter as specified above.
Non-fusible switch, fusible switch or motor circuit protector and current limiting fuses as
required.
Externally mounted operating handle with position indicator showing "On", "Off" or "Tripped"
condition of the circuit breaker or disconnect switch as applicable. Operating handle interlocked
to prevent opening and closing of the door when the circuit breaker or disconnect switch is in
the "On" position. Defeater provided to bypass the interlock.
Accessories
Provide the following accessories:Extra interlocking and alarm contacts as required for plant control and indication.
Pilot lights for 'on', 'off' and 'overload trip' indication, coloured green, red and orange
respectively.
Hand-Off-Auto (H-O-A) switch on the starter or in the field as shown on the drawings.
For motors starters rated for 5 KW motors or greater shall be provided with winding protection
temperature sensors, which disconnect the motor, if overheated.
EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
C.
Installation
Mount motor starters in appropriate motor control centers or equipment control panels.
Set overload devices to suit motors provided.
Label components in accordance with Section 16199.
3.02
Tests
Carry out functional and insulation tests.
END OF SECTION
16155 - 2
Motor Starters
SECTION 16160
PANEL BOARDS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
Work Included
Lighting and Power Branch Circuit Panel boards.
Distribution Panel boards.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
Related Work
Section 16161 : Grounding and Bonding
Section 16182 : Low Voltage Circuit Breakers
Section 16170 : Low Voltage Disconnect Switches
1.03
A.
B.
C.
References Standards
BS
IEC
ASTM B187: Copper Bus Bar
1.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
Submittals
Submit manufacturer's product data and technical literature.
Submit manufacturer's layout drawings.
Submit manufacturer's installation and maintenance instructions and repair data.
Submit completed factory and field test results.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
General
Lighting, Power Branch Circuit and Distribution panel boards, shall conform to code. The complete
Technical Specification providing bus size, size and number of branch circuit breakers, branch circuit
loads and wiring is provided for each panel board in the contract electrical schedules.
Enclosure: Fabricated from galvanized steel, recessed mounted unless otherwise shown on the
drawings and tamperproof.
Interior components shall be mounted on back plate of reinforced steel for rigid support and accurate
alignment.
One flat key tumbler cylinder type nickel plated door lock with two keys per lock shall be provided.
Provide for enclosure grounding in accordance with Section 16161.
Bus bar: ASTM B187, 98 percent conductivity copper, with silver plated contact surface and the
following additional requirements.
Finish: Metallic surface thoroughly cleaned, decreased, primed with zinc primer and then finished with
gray paint.
Provide circuit breakers in accordance with Section 16182.
Neutral and Ground buses shall be of the same rating as the phase bus.
Nameplate: One 25 mm wide laminated plastic, attached by means of stainless steel rivets or
permanent adhesive, showing panel board number in 13 mm white cut-in letters on black background.
A directory holder with clear plastic or glass plate and metal frame shall be mounted on the inside of
each door.
Protection degree shall be according to IEC.
Lighting and Power Panel Boards
The panel boards shall be of dead front type with bolt-on circuit breakers in the mains, if indicated, and
branches. The panel boards shall be designed for 400/230 Volts, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50 Hz application.
The lighting and power panel boards shall be equipped with bolt-on circuit breakers. Circuit breaker
ratings shall be as shown in the panel board schedules. Plug on type circuit breakers are not
acceptable.
Continuous current rating of busbars shall be as shown on panel board schedules.
Where a main protective device is not shown, disconnect switches shall be provided. Bus bar and
branch devices shall be of the sequence-phase type connections.
The neutral and grounding bars shall be mounted at the opposite end of the structure from the mains
and shall have numbered terminals for connection of neutral and grounding wires.
16160 - 1
Panel Boards
2.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.04
A.
Distribution Panel Boards
Distribution panel boards shall be of the dead front type and shall be designed for 400/230 volts,3phase, 4-wire, 50Hz applications. Each distribution panel shall be enclosed in a sheet metal cabinet with
front doors, catches, locks, etc. Locks shall be fitted for the same key as locks on other lighting and
power branch circuit panel boards. All distribution panel boards shall meet pertinent standards.
The distribution panel boards shall be equipped with bolt-on moulded case circuit breakers. Circuit
breaker ratings shall be as shown on the distribution board schedules.
Where a main protective device is not shown disconnect switches shall be provided. Current-carrying
connections to bus shall be of the bolted type, factory assembled. Bus bars shall be of the sequencephase type connections and arranged for 3-phase, 4-wire mains or lugs.
The Neutral Bar shall be mounted at the opposite end of the structure from the mains and shall have
numbered terminals for connection of neutral wires.
Each distribution Board shall be equipped with three ampere meters, volt meter and a selector switch.
B.
Nameplates
Each panel board shall have an affixed engraved nameplate. The nameplate shall indicate a facsimile
of the switchboard bussing and switch device arrangement, both in English and Arabic.
Each distribution panel board switch shall be equipped with a nameplate which indicates the name of
the equipment (motor, panel board, etc.,) to which the feeder conductors are connected. Where more
than one piece of equipment or panel board is connected to the circuit this fact shall also appear on the
nameplate. Feeder numbers used on the drawings shall be applied on the switch nameplates.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
A.
Installation
Mount panels on walls, or flush in walls as shown on drawings. Wall-mounted panels shall be securely
fastened to the wall utilizing expansion bolts or mounting channels. The panels shall be mounted
square to the building lines. The mounting height of the centerline of the top protective device shall be
no greater than 1800 mm above finished floor.
Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Provide mounting brackets, busbar drillings and filler pieces for unused spaces.
B.
C.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Tests
Perform the following tests and submit a certified report for review by the Project Manager.
Test circuits for connections in accordance with wiring diagram.
Test that insulation resistance to ground of non- grounded conductors is a minimum of 10 megohms.
Test switchgear enclosure for continuity to the grounding system.
Test operation of circuits and controls. When testing operate each control a minimum of 10 times and
each circuit continuously for a minimum of 1/2 hour.
END OF SECTION
16160 - 2
Panel Boards
SECTION 16161
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
Work Included
Equipment Grounding.
A.C. System Grounding.
Foundation Ground.
Other Earthing Systems.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
Reference Standards
IEC 364-3, 364-4-41.
BS.
Refer to “IEEE” standard “142”, entitled "Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and
Commercial Power Systems" for clarification, intent and guidance in executing the work.
1.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Related Work
Section 16122:
Section 16150:
Section 16160:
Section 16402:
Section 16511:
Section 16601:
Section 16145:
Section 16875:
1.04
A.
B.
Submittals
Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's Literature on all components of the Grounding System.
Submit three copies of certified test report stating that equipment grounding system's resistance
measures a maximum of (1.0) ohms to ground.
PART 2
600 Volt Cable.
Motors.
Panelboards.
Underground Electric Service.
Lighting Fixtures.
Lightning Protection System.
Receptacles.
Electric Hand Dryers.
PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
General
A complete grounding system shall be provided as shown on the drawings and as specified.
The system shall satisfy all related codes and requirements.
B.
Equipment Ground:
The equipment grounding systems shall be designed so all metallic structures, enclosures,
raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, door frames, portable
equipment and other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits operate
continuously at ground potential and provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault
currents.
The equipment ground resistance shall not exceed 2 ohms. If the resistance value of 2 ohms
cannot be obtained by driven ground rods the Contractor will submit alternate methods to
achieve the required result for review by the Project Manager.
C.
The system ground and the equipment ground shall be connected to the
common ground bus.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
Foundation Earthing
Each building shall be provided with a foundation earthing system in accordance with the
following requirements:
Material
Galvanized flat steel 30 x 3mm or galvanized round steel 16mm diameter shall be used as
earthing conductor.
Arrangement
The earthing conductor shall be installed as a closed loop in the exterior wall foundations of the
building underneath the moisture insulation. Expansion joints shall be made inside the building
but outside of the concrete.
Connection Flags
Connection Flags shall be of the same material as the earthing conductor in the foundation.
One flag of the earthing conductor shall be laid out to the location of the service entrance of the
power system. Further connection flags shall be provided for the lighting protection system to
the outside of the building.
16161 - 1
Grounding and Bonding
2.02
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
2.03
Foundation Earthing (cont’d)
Joints
High conductivity joints shall be made by means of screwed or welded connections.
Potential Equalization Bus Bar (P.E.B.)
The foundation earthing conductor shall be directly connected to the P.E.B. by a connection
flag. The P.E.B. shall be located at the point of service entrance directly above the entrance of
the connection flag form the foundation earth. The following parts and installations shall be
connected to the P.E.B.
Foundation earthing system
AC protective earth conductor
Metallic water lines
Metallic sewer lines
Central HVAC-System
Internal gas lines
Earthing conductor of antenna
Earthing conductor of communication systems
Earthing conductors of continuous metal structures. (i.e. elevator rails building structures, etc.)
Responsibility
The building contractor will commission laying of the foundation grounding electrode. This will
be carried out by construction workers during the carcass stage. The potential equalizer should
be fitted by an electrical fitter.
Earthing Rods
Earthing Rods shall be galvanized (38mm) heavy gauge pipe, galvanized solid steel (18mm)
diameter, or (X) type (50mm) galvanized profile steel or of copper welded steel rods approx.
(18mm) diameter. Rods shall be equipped with a connection flange for the connection of
galvanized flat steel (30 x 3mm), or solid round conductors of galvanized steel up to (10mm)
diameter, or a copper conductor up to (95mm2). Minimum length of rods shall be (1.5) to (3m).
If more than one rod is required for one earthing system, the distance between two rods shall be
at least twice the length of one rod.
Ground rods shall be installed if required by augering 3 inch daimeter
Earthing Copper Plates
Earthing copper plates shall be approximately 5mm thick, 1000mm high and 500mm wide or
equal area. Plates shall be placed vertical, upper corner of the plate shall be at least 1m below
ground level. If more than one copper plate is being installed for one system, the distance
between two plates shall be at least 3m.
Earthing Service Disconnection Pits
If an earthing system included only one earthing rod or plate, this rod or plate shall be provided
with a service disconnection pit. If an earthing system includes more than one earthing rod or
plate, these rods or plates shall be connected to one main central earthing rod or plate which
shall be provided with a service disconnection pit.
The service manhole shall be constructed of a concrete or clay pipe of a minimum diameter of
600mm, or shall be made of cast in place concrete with a minimum internal size of 300 x
200mm, with a wall thickness of approx. 100 - 150mm. The service pit shall reach from approx.
150mm below the connection terminals of the rod
or plate to the finish ground level and shall be covered with a concrete or galvanized steel or
cast iron plate for a traffic load as specified in the Project Documents. The plate shall have
provisions for easy removal by means of recess-type lifting eyes or equivalent devices.
Size Of Grounding Electrode Conductor For Ac Systems
Size of Largest Service Size of Grounding
Conductor or Equivalent
Electrode Conductor
Parallel Conductors
Copper
Copper
2
2
25 mm or smaller
16 mm
50 mm 2
25 mm 2
70 mm 2
35 mm 2
2
2
150 mm
70 mm
2
2
240 mm
120 mm
2
2
300 mm
150 mm
2
Over 300 mm
150 mm 2
16161 - 2
Grounding and Bonding
2.04
Minimum Size Of Grounding Conductors For Grounding Raceway And Equipment.
Rating or Setting of Automatic
Size
Overcurrent Devices in Circuit
Copper Wire in mm2
Ahead of Equipment (Amperes)
15
20
30
40
60
100
200
400
600
800
1,000
1,200
1,600
2,000
2,500
2.05
2.5
4
6
6
6
10
16
25
35
50
70
95
120
150
185
Ground-Fault Protection Of Equipment
Ground-fault protection of equipment shall be provided for solidly grounded star electrical
services of more than 150 volts to ground, but not exceeding 600 volts phase-to-phase for each
service disconnecting means.
2.06
Ground-Fault Circuit Protection
Refer to Section 16145 for ground fault circuit interruption requirements on outdoor receptacles.
For earth leakage C.B’s refer to panel board schedules.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
General
Ground all items as described in this specification and in the drawings and required by codes
and standards.
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
Test
The completed equipment grounding system shall be subjected to a meggered test at each
service disconnect enclosure ground bar to insure that the ground resistance, without chemical
treatment or other artificial means, does not exceed three (3) ohms. Certified test reports of the
ground resistance shall be submitted for review by the Project Manager.
The ground-fault protection system shall be performance tested. A written record of this test
shall be made and submitted to the Project Manager.
END OF SECTION
16161 - 3
Grounding and Bonding
SECTION 16170
LOW VOLTAGE DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
Work Included
Motor Disconnect Switches.
Circuit Disconnect Switches.
1.02
A.
B.
Related Work
Section 16155:
Section 16160:
1.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Reference Standards
BS.
ASTM 47: Malleable Iron Castings.
ASTM 525: Galvanized Sheet Steel.
NFPA - 70.
IEC.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
Submittals
Shop drawings and manufacturers technical literature.
Certificate of compliance with the codes.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
Motor Starters.
Panelboards.
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
PRODUCTS
General
Voltage rating of switches shall be 600 Volts.
All disconnect switches shall comply with IEC and shall have a label permanently affixed
confirming compliance.
2.02
A.
Construction
Safety type disconnecting switches shall meet the requirements of these specifications and shall
be of the quick-make, quick-break, load break type. All parts shall be mounted on insulating
bases to permit replacement of any part from the front of the switch. All current carrying parts
shall be of high conductivity copper, designed to carry rated load without excessive heating.
Switch contacts shall be silver tungsten type or plated to prevent corrosion, pitting and oxidation
and to assure suitable conductivity.
The switch operating mechanism shall be designed to retain its effectiveness with continuous
use at rated capacity without the use of auxiliary springs in the current path.
Provision for "lock-out" in the "open" switch position shall be provided.
Disconnect switches shall be either fused or non-fused as indicated on the drawings. Switches
shall be capable of withstanding the available fault current or let-through current before the fuse
operates without damage or change in rating.
B.
C.
D.
2.03
MATERIALS
Zinc coated steel sheet: ASTM A525, coating designation G90.
Malleable iron:
ASTM A47.
2.04
FINISH
Metallic surface thoroughly cleaned, degreased, primed with zinc primer and then finished with
ANSI 61 gray paint after fabrication.
2.05
ENCLOSURES
For dry and dust free indoor locations:
For damp and sultry indoor locations:
For outdoor locations:
For hazardous locations:
PART 3
3.01
IP42
IP54
IP55
IP58
EXECUTION
Installation
Install disconnect switches in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
END OF SECTION
16170 - 1
Low Voltage Disconnect Switches
SECTION 16182
LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
Work Included:
Air circuit breakers rated at less than or equal to 1500 A of the following types:Power Circuit Breakers.
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB).
Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB).
Non-Automatic Circuit Breakers.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Related Work
Section 16155:
Section 16160:
Section 16199:
Section 16480:
Section 16010:
1.03
A.
B.
Reference Standards
BS
IEC. 157: Low-Voltage switchgear and control gear.
1.04
A.
B.
Submittals.
Submit manufacturer's product data, technical literature and wiring diagrams.
Submit type test certificates from an approved international testing organization to prove that
the equipment complies with the relevant standards.
Submit characteristic curves for all circuit breakers.
Submit detailed maintenance data for equipment.
A.
B.
C.
D.
C.
D.
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
drawings
Motor Starters.
Panelboards.
Equipment identification.
Low Voltage Switchboards.
General Provisions for Electrical Work.
PRODUCTS
General
Circuit breakers shall be air-break and rated for continuous duty.
Circuit breakers shall be rated for a P2 interrupting capacity to IEC.157: Part 1.
Each circuit breaker shall have an independent closing mechanism i.e. the closing and opening
operation of the main contacts shall be independent of the speed of the operating source,
manual or power driven.
Each circuit breaker with integral overcurrent and/or short circuit releases shall be ambienttemperature compensated to 50 degrees C, allowing the breaker to carry full rated current with
a uniform tripping characteristic throughout the temperature range from 25 degrees C to 50
degrees C.
Each circuit breaker shall be rated for the site service conditions, as detailed in Section 16010.
Each automatic circuit breaker shall have a trip-free mechanism.
Each circuit breaker shall have the following parameters as indicated on the schedules and
drawings.
1.
Related voltage.
2.
Number of poles
3.
Frame size
4.
Trip setting
Automatic circuit breakers shall have interrupting capacities as indicated on the
but with a minimum interrupting capacity of 10,000 amperes symmetrical at 400 Volts.
2.02
Miniature Circuit Breakers
Miniature circuit breakers shall be of the bolt-on type, with thermal-magnetic type overload and
short circuit trip devices. The thermal release shall provide inverse time overload tripping and
the magnetic release shall provide instantaneous tripping for short-circuit conditions.
2.03
A.
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Circuit breakers shall be of the moulded case pattern designed not to be maintained in
accordance with IEC.157: Part 1.
Each circuit breaker shall have integral thermal- magnetic type
overload and short-circuit trip devices. The thermal release shall provide inverse
time overload tripping and the magnetic release shall provide instantaneous tripping
or short-time delay tripping where necessary to achieve discrimination with
downstream protective devices during short circuit conditions.
B.
16182 - 1
Low Voltage Circuit Breakers
2.03
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.04
A.
B.
C
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (cont’d)
Each circuit breaker intended for panel board mounting with a frame rating of 100 Amperes or
less shall have non-adjustable thermal-magnetic trip devices.
Each multiple circuit breaker intended for installation in switchboards or motor control centres
shall have an adjustable thermal overload release and an adjustable magnetic short-circuit
release. The short-circuit release shall have sufficient range of adjustment to allow for motor
starting etc.
Each multiple circuit breaker shall have the facility for the fitting of accessories such as motor
operating, mechanical interlocking, padlocking in the off position, under-voltage release, shunt
release, normally open and normally closed auxiliary contacts as required for the control
functions specified.
Circuit breakers shall be of fixed pattern or withdrawable pattern as specified in the relevant
section or as indicated on the drawings.
Each circuit breaker of withdrawable pattern shall be mechanically interlocked to prevent the
circuit breaker from being racked into or out off the service position while it is in "on" position.
Circuit breakers for installation in panel boards shall be of the bolt-on type.
Power Circuit Breakers
Each power circuit breaker shall be of the withdrawable pattern, with interlocking to prevent the
circuit breaker from being racked into or out off the service position while the circuit breaker is
in the "on" position.
Each circuit breaker shall be designed to be maintained with removable arc chutes, replaceable
main contacts and arcing tips etc.
Each circuit breaker shall be a stored energy operating mechanism with manual or electrical
charging as indicated on the drawings. The closing and opening manual operations shall be
initiated by push-buttons on the circuit breaker.
Each circuit breaker shall be furnished with integral current transformer operated, solid state
protection, comprising:
1. An inverse-time (long time) release, with an adjustable pickup from 50 percent to 100
percent of the circuit breaker frame rating.
2. A short-circuit (short-time) release, with an adjustable pickup from 150 percent to 1000
percent of the circuit breaker frame rating, an adjustable short-time setting to ensure
discrimination under typical short circuit conditions and high-set instantaneous setting to
cater for severe short circuits close to the circuit breaker.
3. A ground fault sensor with an adjustable pickup setting and adjustable short-time setting to
achieve discrimination with downstream and upstream protective devices.
4. Local indication of the trip condition with provision for remote indication and local
electromagnetic lockout type manual reset push buttons.
Provide surge diverters on all current transformer secondary circuits.
Each circuit breaker shall be furnished with accessories such as motor
operation, interlocking, shunt trip, under voltage release, normally open/normally
closed contacts as required for the control functions specified.
Fused circuit breakers shall be utilized where very high prospective fault currents are
anticipated. Each fused circuit breaker shall have replaceable HRC fuse elements and shall be
equipped with an open fuse lockout device that is visible from the front of the circuit breaker
and capable of indicating which fuses are blown, tripping all three phases of the breaker upon
the fuse blowing and preventing the circuit breaker from being reclosed on a single phase
condition.
Each circuit breaker shall be fitted with a key operated electro-mechanical interlock mechanism
which can only be removed with the circuit breaker in the off position. A proprietary key interlock
shall be provided between circuit breakers supplied from different sources, as indicated on
drawings.
EXECUTION
Installation
Install the circuit breakers in accordance with the schedules and drawing and in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
Label all circuit breakers as specified in Section 16199.
Tests
Test the operation of each circuit breaker including local and remote tripping, interlocking and
indicating devices in all operational modes.
Inspect the main contacts and arc chutes of each power circuit breaker to ensure that they are
free of foreign matter.
Test complete assemblies in accordance with the relevant sections of the Specification.
16182 - 2
Low Voltage Circuit Breakers
END OF SECTION
16182 - 3
Low Voltage Circuit Breakers
SECTION 16190
SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
C.
Work Included
Conduit Supports.
Cable Tray Supports.
Trunking Supports.
A.
B.
C.
Related Work
Section 16111:
Section 16114:
Section 16110:
1.02
1.03
Conduit.
Cable Tray.
Trunking.
Submittals
Submit Manufacturer's Literature, dimensioned Drawings and Installation Instructions.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
Conduit Supports
Single Runs: Surface:
Galvanized spacer saddles or ring bolt type hangers with special spring clips.
Flush:
Galvanized pipe hooks or similar for masonry walls and saddles for partition walls.
Do not use plumbers perforated straps.
Multiple Runs:
Horizontal: Conduit rack with 25 percent spare capacity.
Vertical Runs:
Channel support with conduit fittings and 25 percent spare capacity.
A.
B.
C.
2.02
Cable Tray and Trunking Supports
Trapeze style hangers 41 x 41 mm galvanized steel channels, supported by 10 mm galvanized
steel threaded rod from preset threaded concrete inserts or galvanized cantilever brackets on
H section support frames, 38mm X 38 mm, 12 gauge, or heavier capable of supporting
weights of assembly plus 20 kg.
2.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Anchor Methods
Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts or spider type expansion anchors.
Solid Masonry : Lead expansion anchors or preset inserts.
Metal Surfaces: Machine screws, bolts, or welded studs.
Wood Surfaces : Wood screws.
Concrete Surfaces: Self-drilling anchors or power-driven studs.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
EXECUTION
Installation
Layout to maintain headroom, neat mechanical appearance, consistent with the architectural
treatment in the location.
Install cable tray and trunking supports at 2.5 m on centers and at bends and tee fittings.
Ensure there is no conflict with other services.
Conduit or cable straps shall not be welded to steel structures.
Each conduit shall be supported within 300mm of junction boxes and fittings. Conduit support
shall be entirely independent of these boxes and fittings.
Maximum spacing of conduit supports shall be 1.5m for conduit sizes of 16mm to 32m and
3.0m for conduit sizes of 40mm and larger.
Only good quality anchors of sufficient length and diameter (min.
12mm) should be used and must only be used after the approval of Project
Manager.
END OF SECTION
16190 - 1
Supporting Devices
SECTION 16199
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Work Included
Equipment Labeling.
Circuit Identification Charts.
Colour Coding.
Cable Identification Tags.
Equipment Warning Signs.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Related Work
Section 16155:
Section 16182:
Section 16150:
Section 16133:
Section 16721:
Section 16110:
Section 16122:
Section 16111:
Section 16740:
1.03
Submittals
Submit samples of labels, cable markers, warning signs and circuit charts prior to commencing
work.
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.02
A.
B.
2.03
A.
B.
C.
2.04
A.
B.
Motor Starters.
Low Voltage Circuit Breakers.
Motors.
Cabinets.
Fire Alarm and Detection Systems.
Trunking.
600 Volt Cable.
Conduit.
Telephone System.
PRODUCTS
LABELS
Labels shall be constructed from 3-Ply 2 mm Traffolyte or equal and approved and shall be
securely screwed or bolted to the chamber housing. Stick-on labels shall not be used.
Lettering shall be block capitals standing 6 mm high and labels shall be at least 20 mm high.
No abbreviations shall be used.
All lettering shall be black, on a light red background for warning labels and a black background
with white letters for descriptive labels.
Warning labels engraved 'Danger 400 Volts' along with the internationally recognized danger
sign shall be provided for all chambers or enclosures housing busbars, terminals and elsewhere
where there is the risk of coming in contact with 400 volts.
Circuit Identification Charts
Individual circuit identification charts shall be provided for all panel boards and distribution
boards.
Charts shall be typed on A4 or quarto size sheets. they shall be enclosed in a clear plastic
envelope and shall be securely fixed to the inside cover of the unit. Additional copies of the
charts shall be included in the Instruction and Maintenance manuals.
Colour Coding
Provide colour bands 75 mm wide for all trunking runs, applied at panel and junction box
locations and at 15 m centers within an area.
Provide colour bands 25 mm wide for conduits up to 50 mm in
diameter and one-half the conduit diameter for larger conduits, applied at panel and
pullbox locations, within each room, and 15 m on centers within an area.
Colour banding:
1.
400/230 Volt:
Gray.
2.
Fire alarm:
Red.
3.
Telephone:
Blue.
4.
Intercommunication and Sound:
Yellow.
5.
Clocks:
Purple.
6.
Television:
Rust.
7.
Grounding System:
Green.
Fence Danger Signs
Electrical facility fences should be clearly marked at several locations with warning signs.
The danger sign shall be fabricated from 16 gauge steel and shall be 510 by 710 mm with 10
mm diameter fixing holes. The danger sign shall have a porcelain enamel finish designed for
permanent outdoor use.
16199 - 1
Equipment Identification
2.05
A.
B.
C.
2.06
A.
B.
2.07
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
Equipment Danger Signs
For external use, pressure sensitive danger signs shall be used. Dimensions shall be 510mm
by 710mm. The signs shall be heavy-duty vinyl with a self-adhesive backing which can be
applied to curve or irregular surfaces. Danger signs shall be weather-resistant and shall not
discolour or deteriorate with age.
Danger signs shall be inscribed with the equipment voltage level along with an internationally
recognized danger sign.
All signs shall be in English and Arabic.
Cable Identification Tags
All cables which exit from manholes, vaults, handholds, and transformer or switch enclosures
shall be properly tagged or labeled. Tags shall be permanent, noncorrodible and clearly
readable. Tags should include the information listed below for the various circuit categories:
Feeder Name
Voltage
Phase (single conductor cables)
For buried cables use warning tapes.
Cable Identification for wire and cable circuits shall be of an opaque nylon material arranged to
include a marker plate, non releasing nylon ties, and cable fastening tail. One side shall be
roughened to hold black nylon permanent marking ink. Identification shall be permanent and
waterproof. The holding device shall be designed to allow the fastening tail to pass around the
cable through the holding device, and prevent the removal of the tail without cutting it loose
from the marker. Cable Identification shall be inscribed in Arabic and English.
Language:
The Arabic and English language shall be used for all labeling and charts.
EXECUTION
Inscriptions
All items of switchgear and control gear including all electrical components shall be provided
with labels giving the following information:
1.
Manufacturers name.
2.
Country of origin.
3.
Type, number or code.
4.
Rated voltage and frequency.
5.
Rated current if applicable.
6.
The short circuit breaking capacity and the appropriate time.
7.
Name of the international standard with which the
equipment complies.
Circuit identification charts in panel boards and distribution boards shall give the following
information:1.
Circuit Number
2.
Phase
3.
Load Name
4.
Connected Load
5.
Outgoing Terminal Numbers
6.
Size and Type of Protective Device
3.02
Pad Mounted Equipment
The danger sign and identification number shall be affixed to the front access doors of all pad
mounted transformers and switches. For equipment with two doors the danger sign shall be
mounted on the left door with the identification number mounted on the right door. Both the
danger sign and the identification number shall be centered 300 mm below the top edge of the
doors and on the vertical centerline of each door. On equipment with only one access door
the danger sign and the identification number shall be centered on the vertical centerline of the
door, with the horizontal centerline of the danger sign 300 mm below the top edge of the door
and the horizontal centerline of the identification number 250mm below the danger sign
centerline.
3.03
A.
Installation
Install warning and descriptive labels as follows:1)
Metallic surfaces using stainless steel or chromium plated bolts and/or self tapping
screws.
2)
Concrete surfaces or masonry walls using raw plugs and brass wood screws.
3)
Timber surfaces using minimum 6mm countersunk brass screws.
4)
All insulated enclosures using an approved plastic welding adhesive.
5)
For all burried cables and conduits.
16199 - 2
Equipment Identification
END OF SECTION
16199 - 3
Equipment Identification
SECTION 16211
LOW VOLTAGE DIESEL GENERATORS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
Work Included
Diesel generators and auxiliaries rates less than or to equal to 600 volts.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Related Work
Section 15060 : Pipe & Pipe Fittings
Section 15175 : Tanks
Section 16133 : Cabinets
Section 16161 : Grounding and Bonding
Section 16182 : Low Voltage Circuit Breakers
Section 16199 : Equipment Identification
Section 16480 : Low Voltage Switchboards.
1.03
A.
Reference Standards
Diesel Engine Manufacturers Association (DEMA) Standard. Standard Practices for Low and
Medium Speed, Stationary Diesel and Gas Engines.
IEC 34
ISO 3046
VDE 0530
BS 5000 5514 4999
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
L.
M.
N.
O.
Submittals
Listing of all component manufacturers.
A detailed technical specification of all equipment and system.
Shop drawings of the complete unit showing the size and location of each item of equipment, pipes
and cables.
Schematic diagram of fuel system.
Schematic diagram of lubricating oil system.
Schematic diagram(s) of electrical systems including automatic voltage regulators.
Results and text data sheets of load tests, giving recording of all relevant mechanical and electrical
parameters.
Results of piping pneumatic testing.
Results of insulation resistance tests with test voltages and resistance figures for all electrical
apparatus.
Copies of operation and maintenance manuals, with spare parts list and detailed description of
locally available service facilities. Full details shall be given of the capabilities of the local service
organization.
If the product the manufacturer is offering deviates from the requirement of this specification, he
shall submit a schedule detailing the specification section and the nature of the deviation.
Reliability data for all control components and systems.
Manufacturers installation instructions.
Derating calculation for 50 degrees C ambient temperature.
Fuel consumption per KWH, lubeoil consumption and overall efficiency.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and their
products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or product must
be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
Items of same function and performance are acceptable in conformance with the Specifications.
Preference shall be made for products similar to the existing generators.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
B.
C.
2.02
General
The generator set furnished under this specification shall essentially consist of a close coupled
engine and alternator with fuel, air intake, lubrication, cooling, exhaust, starting safety systems and all
interconnecting wiring and piping.
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
16211 - 1
Low Voltage Diesel Generators
2.02
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
General (cont’d)
A generating unit shall include only one engine as the source of power.
The diesel electric generator shall be the standard product of the manufacturer and shall not be
supplied by any assemblers not engaged in the manufacturing of diesel electric generators.
The manufacturer shall have at least 20 years of proven experience in the production of industrial
diesel electric generators.
The diesel electric generator offered by the Manufacturer shall have a proven record of reliability.
The diesel electric generator shall provide standby power and shall be designed for standby duty in
accordance with IEC.
The diesel electric generator shall be electrically self contained, in that it shall be capable of
starting, running on load for the required period and stopping without any electrical connections to
external power supplies except for battery charging and heaters during the stopped condition.
Electrical Power Requirements
The diesel electric generator set shall consist of a direct close coupled diesel engine driven
alternator mounted on a rigid all-welded fabricated base.
The base shall be mounted on a skid with adjustable spring type anti-vibration mountings.
The skid shall be provided with holes for bolting to a concrete slab.
All pipe and cable connections to equipment mounted on the subframe shall be terminated by
means of flexible connections to prevent bypassing the anti-vibration mountings.
Diesel Engine
The prime mover shall be a single high speed diesel fueled engine of inline or vee formation, water
cooled, two or four-stroke, fuel-injection type and suitable for stationary applications. It shall be of
current manufacture and of a type that is usually in service for power generation.
The engine shall have trunk pistons, not less than four (4 No) nor more than sixteen (16 No)
cylinders.
The engine may have an exhaust driven super-charger or may be naturally aspirated.
The engine shall have performed satisfactorily, in an independent stationary power plant for a
minimum of 8000 hours of actual operation under typical base load conditions over a period of two
years or less. Changes in the number of cylinders, bore, stroke, or model are considered
substantial and shall not be acceptable. Changes in auxiliaries and attachments on the engine such
as governors, pumps and filters will be acceptable provided such devices meet the detailed
requirements of the relevant sections of this Specification.
The engine shall be complete with the following accessories:
1. Jacket-water cooling system.
2. Fuel pump and replaceable filters.
3. Safety controls.
4. Replaceable oil bath air intake filter.
5. Exhaust system with mufflers.
6. Instrumentation and control panels all as described below.
The engine shall be suitable for driving the generator specified herein, shall be rated
for standby service and shall be capable of a continuous one hour overload of ten percent (but not
to exceed a total of two hour out of any 12 consecutive hours of operation) at the site specified
herein.
The engine shall operate under such service without excessive smoke, overheating or suffering
mechanical damage when driving the generator under the specified conditions.
The engine shall develop the required horsepower when operating on DF-2 diesel fuel conforming
to ASTM-D-975 or equivalent European code, and with lubricating oil of the type and grade
recommended by the engine manufacturer.
2.05
Flywheel
The flywheel shall be dynamically balanced and shall be capable of being rotated at 125% and 95%
of rated speed during normal running.
2.06
A.
Governor
The engine shall incorporate an adjustable isochronous electronic or hydraulic governor.
B.
The governor shall be controlled manually at the engine control panel, from the associated
generator Switchgear equipment by the governor control switch or automatically.
The governor shall provide adjustable speed settings from 48 to 52 Hz, adjustable speed regulation
from zero to 5%, adjustable load limit from zero to 125% of unit rating.
The governor shall be capable of maintaining the frequency constant within plus or minus 0.25% for
any constant load between 1/4 and 4/4 generator rating. After any sudden load change of not more
C.
D.
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
16211 - 2
Low Voltage Diesel Generators
than 25 percent of rated load, the governor shall re-establish stable operating conditions in not less
than 4 seconds. Surging period shall not exceed 3.6 Hz.
2.07
Overspeed Covernor
The main overspeed governor shall be the engine manufacturer's standard mechanical speed
tripping device. The device shall be separate from the speed central governor and shall be
arranged to stop the engine by cutting off the fuel. Manual reset of this governor shall be required
at the engine before any further engine operation is possible.
2.08
A.
Generator
The generator and ancillary equipment shall be properly co-ordinated with the set to ensure a preengineered complete system of optimum performance.
The generator shall be capable of delivering the kilowattage noted on the drawings with a lagging
power factor of 0.8, at site service conditions. Output shall be at the voltage shown on the drawings
3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz. Speed shall be 1500 RPM.
The generator set shall be furnished with devices to prevent electromagnetic interference with
communication systems in accordance with IEC standards.
The generator shall be a single bearing, self ventilated, drip-proof unit with brushless excitation,
shaft mounted fused diode assembly, shaft mounted surge supressors and shaft mounted
ventilating fan.
The generator shall be furnished with an amortisseur winding.
The generator insulation shall conform to IEC Class H insulation.
The motor shall be dynamically balanced and the degree of dynamic imbalance shall be minimal in
any plane of correction to provide minimum vibration. The motor shall be electrically and
mechanically balanced up to 125 percent of rated speed.
The generator phase rotation shall be RST (ABC).
The generator shall be capable of carrying a 50 percent overload current with the field set for
normal rated excitation for one minute, and a 10 percent overload for two hours at rated power
factor without being subjected to damage. Overall package performance shall be, however, as
governed by the turbine performance characteristics.
The generator shall be tested to IEC standards.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
2.09
A.
B.
2.10
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Exciter
The exciter shall be a brushless type using a rotating, fused rectifier bridge circuit. The three
phase, full wave, rectifying unit shall be mounted on the generator motor shaft. The exciter shall be
capable of supplying the field excitation current requirements for the generator and delivering 150
percent of its rated current for one minute without being subject to damage. The complete exciter
shall be enclosed and protected by a removable cover.
A diode failure detector shall form part of the exciter circuit.
Voltage Regulator
The automatic voltage regulator (AVR) shall be of completely solid state design.
A maximum voltage drop of 3 percent of rated voltage will be allowed for 0 to 110 percent of rated
load, but shall be a minimum consistent with the requirements for satisfactory parallel operation.
The voltage at any constant load from 0 to 100 percent load shall be within a band of 1 percent of
rated voltage.
Transient voltage dip after a sudden 25 percent load stop-change increase and transient voltage
rise after a sudden 25 percent load decrease shall not exceed 5 percent of nominal voltage. For
this requirement, the initial load shall be taken to be within the range of 50 to 85 percent of actual
operating capacity.
The voltage shall recover to within 1 percent steady- state band specified above, within 1/2 second
after initiation of the load changes specified above.
The AVR shall be equipped with cross-current compensation.
The exciter shall be complete with all components necessary to provide the excitation, and shall be
designed without the use of electronic tubes or electrolytic capacitors.
The exciter shall utilize a multiphase, amplifier controlled silicon rectifier and a three phase exciter
power transformer for receiving the power from the generator output.
Provision shall be made for relay-operated pilot excitation or field flashing that receives its power
from the storage battery, or from permanent magnets.
Special provision shall be made to ensure that the silicon rectifiers are not subject to peak inverse
voltages in excess of their rating under any condition of system operations, including transient
conditions.
The system shall be designed to sustain 300 percent of rated current for 10 seconds when a
symmetrical short circuit is applied at the generator terminals.
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
16211 - 3
Low Voltage Diesel Generators
K.
The AVR shall have a plus or minus 10 percent voltage adjustment range capable of being
controlled automatically or by remotely mounted adjusting devices.
The AVR shall be equipped with a switch selectable (or link) rheostat for field current
limiting with an
adjustable setting. A time delay shall be included in the circuit so that there is
no interference with normal field forcing.
L.
2.10
M.
N.
Voltage Regulator (cont’d)
To prevent over fluxing of the machine at low speeds, a frequency fall of circuit shall be included in
the AVR to progressively reduce the generator when the frequency falls below 90 percent of the
nominal. This facility shall be selected by a link on the AVR.
An electronic manual voltage regulator, with potentiometer control on the main control panel, shall
be provided. A manual/automatic selector switch shall be provided on the main control panel.
2.11
Neutral Grounding
The neutral point of the generator shall be grounded using at least three grounding rods. Special
care shall be paid for the reliability of this operation.
2.12
A.
Lubrication System
The engine lubricating system shall conform to NFPA 30 & 37 and operate under a predetermined
and constant pressure.
The primary lubricating oil pump shall be an engine- driven, positive displacement pump.
An electric DC motor driven prestart lubricating oil pump shall be installed as an integral part of the
genset. The control logic shall be designed to stop the electric lubricating oil pumps when the
genset attains sufficient speed to maintain adequate oil pressure through the engine driven
mechanical pump.
A sump pump, relief valves and by pass valves shall be installed if required for proper operation.
One shell and tube type oil cooler arranged for utilizing engine cooling water as the
cooling medium shall be furnished. The cooler may be separately mounted or mounted on the
engine. The capacity and construction shall be as recommended by the engine manufacturer.
One full flow strainer and one full flow strainer and filter shall be provided in the lube oil line on the
discharge side of the lube oil pumps. The strainer shall be of the metal edge or screen type with a
maximum spacing of 0.007 inch (80 mesh). The filter shall be of the multiple cleaning and
replaceable element type and the filter case shall be compatible with the filter element. A pressure
relief valve shall be provided to relieve excess pressure to the crankcase sump when the filter
becomes clogged. An alarm condition shall be annunicated when the relief valve is in the open
position. The strainer and filter shall be mounted in accessible locations without disconnecting the
piping or other engine equipment when changing the strainer and filter element. Indicating pressure
gauges shall be provided to measure the pressure drop across the strainer and filter.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.13
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
2.14
Fuel System
The fuel system shall comply with NFPA 30 and NFPA 37.
The engine shall be operated on Df-2 fuel.
The fuel system shall be complete and shall consist of a 2000 l. bulk fuel storage tank.
The fuel storage tank shall be a standard size tank with accessories as required and as specified.
One full flow strainer and one duplex filter shall be provided between the tank and the engine. The
strainer shall be of the metal edge or creeen type with a maximum spacing of 0.007 inch (80 mech).
The filter case shall be compatible with the filter element. The strainer and filter shall be mounted
in accessible locations without disconnecting the piping or other engine equipment when changing
the strainer and filter element. Indicating pressure gauges shall be provided to measure the
pressure drop across the strainer and filter.
The engine fuel pump shall be a positive displacement, engine-driven type, and shall be capable of
supply an adequate quantity of fuel under all conditions of operation. A relief valve shall be
provided to prevent the build-up of excessive pressure if the discharge line becomes blocked.
Provide rigid fuel pipework and fittings in accordance with Section 15060. Flexible connections
shall be provided at the interface between the engine and the fixed pipework.
Provide high and low switches in the bulk fuel storage tank and high, and low level switches in the
tank with overflow acoustic alarm.
Provide an electrically operated valve on the engine mounted day tank to dump the fuel oil and
shut-down the engine when a signal is received from an external fire alarm panel.
Provide control logic to shut-down fuel transfer pump when a signal is received from an external
fire alarm panel. This control circuit shall be independent from the day tank valve control circuit.
Air Intake System
The engine air-intake shall be equipped with an effective, easily cleaned combustion oil bath air
filter. The filter unit shall be designed for ease of filter cleaning.
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
16211 - 4
Low Voltage Diesel Generators
2.15
A.
B.
2.15
C.
2.16
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.17
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.18
A.
B.
Exhaust System
All pipework shall have flanged or welded fittings. All bends shall be long-radius type. All exhaust
line shall be graded away from the engine.
Expansion joints shall be unguided-bellows type with flanged connection. Expansion
elements shall be stainless steel designed for diesel engine exhaust gas at 480 degrees C.
Exhaust System (cont’d)
Expansion joints shall be suitable for relieving stress caused by thermal expansion and shall
be suitable for vibration-isolation service.
Exhaust mufflers shall be of the chamber type constructed of welded steel and shall be designed for
indoor service The muffler shall be provided with eyebolts, lugs, flanges, or other items as
necessary for supporting in the location and position indicated.
Cooling System
The engine shall be provided with a complete jacket- water closed cooling system. The water shall
be treated to prevent corrosion and to minimize the formation of scale deposits within the engine.
The cooling system shall comprise an engine driven jacket-water circulating pump, a fin and tube
type radiator and an engine driven shroud enclosed fan. Operation of the cooling system shall be
full automatic while the engine is running.
The radiator shall be constructed and tested in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code. The radiator shall be fitted with a drainage cock.
The cooling system shall be provided with thermostats to maintain an optimum coolant temperature
during engine operation and shall include a high temperature automatic cut-off.
A flexible canvas coupling shall be provided between the engine radiator and the cooling air outlet
louver.
An electrical preheating system for the cooling water system up to 50 degrees C has to be provided
for the standby mode.
Starting System
The starting system shall be arranged for both manual and fully automatic starting upon the failure
of any phase of the normal supply. The starting system shall be battery powered.
Storage battery shall be a 24 volt, lead-acid, sealed-in- plastic type or an equivalent nickelcadmium type, complete with battery rack and intercell connectors. The battery shall be of
sufficient capacity, at an ambient temperature of 0 -50 degrees C to provide 10 cranking periods of
twenty seconds each, with two minutes rest between cranks.
A current limiting 24 volt battery charger shall be furnished to automatically recharge the batteries.
The charger shall be capable of a high charge rate for recharging depleted batteries and a low
charge rate of trickle charging.
The time interval between blackout or disturbance of the main supply and taking the emergency
load shall not be more than 15 seconds after restoration of the normal power supply the system
shall continue running with load for 5 - 15 minutes (adjustable) delay before the 5 - 10 minutes
(adjustable) cool down period starts.
Safety System
The generator set shall be equipped with automatic safety devices which shut down the generator
set and open the generator circuit breaker in the event of low lubricating oil pressure, high coolant
temperature, engine overspeed, high lubricating oil temperature, over load and as specified
elsewhere. The stop switch on the engine instrument board may be connected in the circuit if so
recommended by the manufacturer.
The safety system shall be equipped with visual and audible devices that become operational
before engine shutdown.
2.19
Engine Instrumentation And Alarms
An engine instrument panel shall be provided that displays gauges and indicators for proper engine
control, surveillance and maintenance. The panel shall be mounted on a bracket welded to the
skid. All connections to the engine shall be flexible types providing anti-vibration isolation. All
instruments and gauges to be analog and in metric units, where applicable.
2.20
Nameplates
Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, and style, type
or catalog number on a place securely attached to the item of equipment.
2.21
Noise Attenuation
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
16211 - 5
Low Voltage Diesel Generators
The diesel electric generator installation shall be provided with sound attenuation on the cooling air
inlet and outlet and the exhaust outlet to reduce the noise level to a value of 60dB at a distance of
three metre from the cooling air outlet louver.
2.22
A.
2.22
Transfer Switch
Transfer switch shall be automatic type, a single handle unit with the same transfer mechanism,
main contacts and mechanical interlocking as the automatic and basic switches. The unit shall not
be manually operated.
Transfer Switch (cont’d)
Manual transfer switches shall be as required (i.e. lifts, etc.). Rating shall be as shown on the
drawings.
Contact assembly must be of the self wiping fully enclosed silver-tungsten contact assembles of the
De-ion arc quenching type. Contact assemblies shall be designed to be maintenance free but front
removable type. The transfer mechanism shall interlock the contacts so only one set can be closed
at one time.
2.23
A.
B.
C.
Above Ground Fuel Oil Storage Tank
Aboveground tank shall meet the requirements of NFPA 30. Tank shall be welded mild steel type
designed and built in accordance with API 650.
Tank capacity and dimensions shall be as indicated on the drawings. Steel quality and thickness
shall be in accordance with API 650.
Interior protective treatment on base, shell and roof plates shall comprise of removal of all
paint with temporary protection given with coating of oil.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
General
Install generator and auxiliaries in accordance with manufacturers instruction and in accordance
with the drawings and specifications.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
Fuel Piping Installation
Piping shall be installed to permit contraction and expansion without damage.
During installation, piping shall be capped to inhibit ingress of foreign matter.
Pipework through walls and floors shall be installed in steel sleeves. The internal diameter of the
sleeves shall be at least 12mm wider than the outside diameter of the piping.
Pipe connections to the engine from the fixed piping system shall be made through flexible
connectors. Connectors shall be provided with screw type union terminals to permit ready
disconnection.
Thoroughly clean and flush all piping before final connections.
D.
E.
3.03
Piping Tests
Field erected fuel piping shall be tested with air pressure and proven right at 150 percent of the
working pressure for a period of two hours.
3.04
A.
B.
C.
Shop Tests
Shop tests shall be performed in accordance with the following requirements.
Unless otherwise directed, all tests shall be performed in the presence of the Project Manager.
Each assembled engine and generator shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer's
customary practice.
All components shall be checked and adjusted and all observed water, fuel and lube-oil leaks shall
be remedied.
D.
3.05
A.
B.
Field Tests
Following the complete installation of the generating unit and its associated equipment, field tests
shall be conducted. The Contractor shall provide all instruments and supplies required for the tests.
Fuel instruments and instrumentation procedures to be followed shall be appropriate for the tests to
be performed. Prior to the startup of any generating units, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the
satisfaction of the contracting officer that all piping systems have been cleaned.
Sequence of Field Tests:
1.
Check all engine and driven unit mounting bolts.
2.
Check alignment of engine and generator by dial indication.
3.
Check generator motor air gap.
4.
Check generator and exciter insulation resistance with an insulation resistance tester.
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
16211 - 6
Low Voltage Diesel Generators
5.
6.
7.
3.05
C.
D.
E
Perform engine manufacturer's recommended prestarting checks. This shall include a test of
the prestart lube-oil pump to determine if adequate oil pressure is provided.
Start engine and make engine manufacturer's after starting checks during a reasonable run-in
or warm-up period.
Operate generator for 8 hours at each of 75% and 100% rated load. Record data hourly,
including electrical and temperature information. If necessary, a dummy load has to be
provided by the contractor.
Field Tests (cont’d)
8.
Increase engine speed by means of the governor.
Check speed at which overspeed device trips.
9.
Check functioning of high coolant temperature trip by restricting air into the radiator.
10. Shut down engine and record pressure at which low oil pressure device trips.
Checks to be made during field testing:
1.
During the tests, all operations of which the controls on the panel and at the switchboard are
capable shall be performed to assure that all controls are functioning in a satisfactory manner.
2.
At several points during the tests, each instrument in the switchboard and engine panel shall be
observed to assure that all instruments and gauges are functioning properly.
3.
During the tests, all auxiliary and accessory equipment, all valves including pilot valves, and the
injection pumps shall be checked to assure proper operation.
4. During the 100 percent load test, pyrometer reading of each cylinder of each engine shall be taken
and recorded at 1/2 hour intervals.
Inspection of Field Testing:
1.
After completion of the tests, a general inspection shall be made for:
a. Leaks in the engine, piping systems, tanks,
etc.
b. Blow-by
c. Crankcase contamination
d. Crankshaft misalignment
e. Generator misalignment and damage to generator
bearings.
Radio Interference:
Tests for radio interference shall be conducted by the diesel electric generator manufacturer, after
the installation is complete, over a frequency range of 0.55 to 1000 MHz. Any supressors or bonds
that may be required to suppers interference within this range shall be provided by the
manufacturer.
3.06
Instruction Of Owners Staff
The manufacturer shall include for the instruction of the owners staff in the operation and
maintenance of the equipment.
3.07
Operation And Maintenance Programme
The manufacturer shall provide four copies of a comprehensive operation and maintenance
manual. Two copies shall be in the English language and two in the Arabic language. In addition to
operation and maintenance instructions, the manual shall include an illustrated parts list, detailed
system description, and appropriate diagrams and drawings. The programme shall include an
inspection and maintenance schedule and details of tasks to be performed. The manuals shall be
submitted to the Project Manager for approval prior to their acceptance by the Client.
END OF SECTION
PETRAMIMAR Task 7106
16211 - 7
Low Voltage Diesel Generators
SECTION 16215
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
Work Included
Automatic Transfer Switch rated not less than or equal to 600 Volts, both types; coventional and
motorized.
1.02
Related Work
Section 16211 :
Low Voltage Diesel Generators.
1.03
A.
B.
Reference Standards
IEC
BS
1.04
A.
B.
Submittasl
Shop Drawings.
Certified Laboratory Test Reports. Test reports shall verify that the switch has met the requirements of
the code.
Manufacturers Installation Instructions.
C.
1.05
Painting
Equipment shall be given anti-corrosive primer coats followed by a high gloss gray finish. The interior
surfaces of enclosures after preparation, priming and painting in the normal manner, shall be given
one further coat of anti-condensation paint to a light or white color. Metallic flake paint shall not be used on
any equipment.
1.06
Instruction Cards
Plastic
encapsulated instruction and
operating procedures, complete with schematic wiring
diagram, shall be permanently attached in a conspicuous place on the automatic transfer switch enclosure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
2.03
A.
Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Supervising Engineer the names of three manufacturers and their
products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or product must be
obtained before proceeding with associated work.
Items of same function and performance are acceptable in conformance with the specification.
Application
The automatic transfer switch shall be furnished and installed to transfer the electric load from the
normal source of electric power to a standby source of power as required by the contract drawings. The
transfer switch shall automatically transfer the electrical load circuits upon an interruption or a
decrease in the voltage of the normal source of power.
The transfer switch shall be furnished with relays and control circuits and without integral overcurrent
protection. The switch shall be electrically operated but mechanically held in both the normal and
emergency positions and shall not include a neutral position. The operator shall be energized from the
source to which the load is being transferred. All main and arcing contacts and control elements shall be
renewable from the front of the switch without removing the switch from its enclosure and without
removing the main power cables. Neutral conductor lugs shall be provided. The automatic transfer switch
shall be designed so that the load circuits cannot be connected to more than one source of power at the
same time.
The automatic transfer switch shall be rated for continuous duty and shall conform to the applicable
requirements of the code for emergency total system load except as modified herein. The automatic
transfer switch shall be 4 pole, voltage rating as shown on the drawings, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz.
Operation
Engine Start:
A sustained voltage decrease at the transfer switch, in one or more phases of the normal power source to
less than 80 percent + 20% adjustable of normal shall start the engine generator unit after a time-delay
of 1 to 10 seconds (field adjustable).
16215 - 1
Automatic Transfer Switch
2.03
B.
C.
2.04
A.
B.
C.
Operation (cont’d)
Transfer to Standby:
Transfer switch shall transfer its load to the standby source, provided voltage and frequency of that
source are at least 90% + 5% adjustable of rated value. Total delayed transfer time of all equipment
system switches shall not exceed 15 seconds. Time-delay relays shall be field adjustable to 30 seconds.
Retransfer to Normal:
Transfer switch shall retransfer to normal source upon restoration of normal supply in all phases to 90
percent or more of normal voltage and after a time-delay. Time-delays shall be field adjustable from
0.2 to 15 minutes (present for 15 minutes). The engine generator set shall run unloaded for 5 minutes
before it shuts down and repositions the controls for the next start. If the emergency power source
should fail during the delay period prior to return to normal source, the time-delay shall be bypassed and
the switch shall return immediately to the normal source.
Controls
A test switch shall be provided to simulate failure of the normal power source and to test the operation of
the transfer switch.
A fused amber indicating light identified with a nameplate entitled "emergency power" shall be provided to
indicate operation on emergency power and a fused white indicating light identified with a nameplate
entitled "normal power" shall be provided to indicate operation on normal power.
An over ride switch shall be provided to bypass the automatic transfer controls so that the
transferred switch will remain indefinitely connected to the emergency power source.
2.05
Non Welding of Contacts
The automatic transfer switches shall be rated for non-welding of contacts when used with the feeder
overcurrent devices indicated on the drawings and with the available fault current of the circuit. This
rating information shall be included on the shop drawings submitted for approval.
2.06
Withstand and Closing
The transfer switch shall be rated for continuous operation (8 hours), and shall be 4 pole for phase and
neutral.
2.07
Voltage Sensing
The automatic transfer switch shall be furnished with adjustable voltage sensing relays for each
phase. Connection of these relays shall be made to the normal power bus, behind the protective
devices.
2.08
Accessories
Auxiliary contacts, 2 normally open and 2 normally closed, shall be provided on the automatic transfer
switch. Provide engine start contacts in the switch.
2.09
Enclosure
The automatic transfer switch shall be installed in a IP42 steel enclosure and conforming to the code.
2.10
Terminals
Main terminals requiring field wiring connections shall be suitable for copper wiring.
2.11
Service Conditions
The parts used in the fabrication of the automatic transfer switch shall be suitable for satisfactory
performance when installed for operation in the service conditions obtaining on site.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
Installation
Install where shown on the drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Test completed installation.
END OF SECTION
16215 - 2
Automatic Transfer Switch
SECTION 16480
LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
Work Included
Low voltage distribution switchboards rated less than 600 Volts.
1.02
A.
B.
Related Work
Section 16182:
Section 16161:
1.03
A.
B.
C.
Reference Standards
NFPA 70
BS
IEC 439
1.04
A.
B.
Quality Control
Tests to meet IEC requirements.
Design Tests:
Rated continuous current test.
Short circuit current test.
Enclosure test.
Dielectric test.
Production Tests: Perform following tests on completed switchboard assembly:
Dielectric tests.
Mechanical operation tests.
Grounding tests.
Control wiring tests.
Electrical operation tests.
C.
1.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.06
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
Low Voltage Circuit Breakers.
Grounding and Bonding.
Submittals
Shop Drawings:
Layouts, showing concrete pad dimensions, conduit entrance and available space, bus duct
connections, electrical ratings, nameplate nomenclature and single-line diagrams, indicating
connections and controls.
Current transformer compartment dimensions, bus bar size, arrangement and spacing, doors
and ceiling provisions.
Product Data:
Manufacturers' written recommendations for storage and protection, installation instructions and
field test requirements.
Test Reports:
Reports of production and field tests.
Operations and Maintenance Data:
Manufacturer's instructions for tightening bus connections, performing cleaning, operating and
maintaining switchboard and recommended list of spare parts.
Product, Storage and Handling:
Lift switchboard using eyes, yokes and skids provided by manufacturer.
Store indoor switchboard protected from weather.
Physically protect switchboard against damage from work of other trades.
Cover switchboard with suitable material to avoid damage to finish.
Provide supports for vertical switchboards to prevent overturning.
PRODUCTS
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and their
products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or product
must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
Items of same function and performance are acceptable in conformance with the Specifications.
16480 - 1
Low Voltage Switchboards
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.03
A.
B.
2.04
Construction
The switchboard shall be a completely assembled, self-supporting, steel enclosed, dead front
type construction with current ratings as shown on the Drawings. The sides, top and rear shall
be covered with removable screw-on code gauge steel plates. The switchboard shall include all
protective devices and equipment with necessary inter-connections, instrumentation and control
wiring.
The construction shall consist of a structural or formed steel frame, carefully braced and welded
into a rigid structure which shall maintain its alignment and not be damaged in shipment or
erection or by stresses resulting from short circuits. Bolted housing construction with tack
welded joints will also be acceptable.
The frame shall be completely enclosed on the front, rear, bottom, (except cable compartment),
top and sides with 2.5 mm thick sheet steel covers, doors and panels, accessible from the
rear, and equipped with interior barriers. The removable rear access panels shall be of the
concealed hinged type, or screw-on type. The front shall be completely enclosed with hinged
panels covering each breaker, metering, or blank compartment. The hinged covers shall be
provided with concealed hinges, latches, and cut-outs where necessary for ventilation, operating
mechanism, mechanical trip, and position indication.
Adequate ventilating louvers shall be provided only in the hinged panels where required to limit
the temperature rise of current-carrying-parts, including contacts, to values specified in standard
rules for enclosed equipment. All openings shall be protected against entrance of falling dirt,
water or other foreign matter. Filters are not required for indoor assemblies.
Each switchboard shall be anchored to two 100 mm min. channel iron sills or by bolting. Sills
shall be furnished by the Contractor to suit the switchboard and shall be leveled and grouted
flush into the concrete pad by the Contractor. Where space for future is indicated, all necessary
buses and straps shall be provided.
Each compartment such as circuit breakers, metering current transformer, bus, cable
compartment, etc., of the total assembly shall be completely and totally isolated on top and
bottom, except cable compartments, and sides from all other compartments by suitable metal
barriers without openings. Approved barriers shall be placed between adjacent sections of the
switchboard and all openings in the barriers for busbars shall be closed with snug fitting,
approved non-hygroscopic, arc-resistent material. All openings in barriers for cables shall be
closed with snug fitting, approved arc-resistent material.
Bus bars shall be uniformly arranged to provide A-B-C sequence left to right (from front), front
to rear and top to bottom. All bus bars shall be of 98 percent conductivity copper with silver
plated contact surfaces. In no case shall dimensions be such that at rated load, the current
density in any copper bus bar exceeds 1,000 amperes per 625 mm2 of cross-section.
Bus bars shall be so mounted on the switchboard that no current carrying part (bus bar, nuts,
bolts, connectors, switch parts, etc.), is less than 25 mm from grounded parts of the
switchboard. A ground bus shall be provided running the full length of the switchboard, bolted to
each vertical section. The internal ground bus of the service bus duct or the ground conductor
of the service power cable servicing the switchboard shall be bonded to the above grounding
bus in a manner meeting all code requirements.
Switchboards serving essential loads shall be Class 3 Compartment type to the requirements of
SSA 3159/1985 and IEC 439.
Nameplates
Each switchboard shall have an affixed engraved nameplate. The nameplate shall indicate a
facsimile of the switchboard bussing and switch device arrangement, both in English and
Arabic.
Each switch shall be equipped with a nameplate which indicates the name of the equipment
(motor, panelboard, etc.,) to which the feeder conductors are connected. Where more than
one piece of equipment or panelboard is connected to the circuit this fact shall also appear on
the nameplate. Feeder numbers used on the drawings shall be applied on the switch
nameplates.
Instruments
Instrument compartment panels shall be equipped with flush-mounted voltmeters, frequency,
counters, timers or hour counter, ammeters and their associated selector switches when
appropriate.
16480 - 2
Low Voltage Switchboards
2.05
A.
B.
C
D.
E.
F.
G.
Service Conditions
Supply switchboards designed to comply with IEC Requirements.
Switchboard ratings:
400/230 Volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz.
Continuous current rating: 3,000 amps.
Maximum short circuit rating: 65,000 amps RMS symmetrical with short delay trip.
Full capacity neutral.
.Switchboard construction:
Switchboard shall bear the Listing Mark of the applicable standard.
Switchboard Finish:
Materials: Manufacturer's Standard.
Application:
Apply phosphatizing treatment to steel surfaces prior to internal surfaces.
Apply minimum of one coat of corrosion-resisting paint to internal surfaces.
Paint external surfaces with minimum of one coat of corrosion-resisting paint. Indoor Light
Gray.
Apply corrosion-protective undercoating to under surfaces.
Bussing and terminations:
Bus bars: 98 percent conductivity copper with silver plated contact surface. Size suitable for
current rating as shown with current density not to exceed 1000 amperes 625 mm2.
Bus connections accessible from the rear.
Adaptable for extension of bus bars, including ground bus, to future switchboard sections.
Bus bars, connections and insulating materials designed for 50 degrees C ambient temperature.
Line and load terminations suitable for the size, number of conductors, and conductor material.
Terminations accessible from rear of switchboard
Mounts for devices:
Main section: Individually mounted and compartmented.
Distribution section: Individually mounted and compartmented.
Auxiliary section: Individually mounted and compartmented.
Accessories:
Switchboard manufacturer's standard eyes, yokes, and skids for transporting switchboard.
2.06
Main Circuit Breaker
The switchboard shall be equipped with a main air circuit breaker, manually operated, drawout
type with a shunt trip. The breaker shall be rated at 400 volts as shown on drawings, 50Hz, 3
poles, with frame size as shown on the drawings. The continuous current trip setting of the
breaker shall be as shown on the drawings. The breaker shall be equipped with adjustable long
time, short time and instantaneous trip elements. The breaker shall employ a spring-operated,
stored-energy mechanism that assures high-speed closing of the breaker contacts, independant
of the operating force.
2.07
Branch Circuit Breakers:
The branch circuit breakers shall be as specified in Section 16182 and shall be of the same type
as the main circuit breaker except that frame and over-current trip ratings shall be as shown on
the drawings.
16480 - 3
Low Voltage Switchboards
2.08
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.09
A.
B.
C.
2.10
A.
B.
C.
PART 3
Ground Fault Protection
The switchboard main circuit breaker shall be equipped with a ground
fault protection system. The system shall be a "Ground Break" system consisting of
a sensor, relay and monitor panel.
The sensor shall be responsive to the ground current transformer and shall include a test
winding. Sensor shall have sufficient window size to enclose all conductors.
The relay shall be solid state, and shall provide direct operation of the
shunt trip device of the switchboard main circuit breaker where shown on the
drawing. The relay shall be continuously adjustable from 5 to 60 amperes and shall
have a time delay range of instantaneous 0.30 to 1.0 sec. Once settings have
been selected, adjusting knobs shall be capable of being clamped into position by
means of a clamping bar on face of relay. Relays shall be set at 26 amperes with a
0.2 time delay, unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
The monitor panel shall be a flush mounted unit. The panel shall allow
testing of the system with or without tripping the main circuit breaker. A ground
fault signal light shall indicate immediately the faulted circuit. A pilot light shall be
provided to indicate presence of control power. The panel shall be provided with
two push buttons. The red push button shall be marked "Test" and the yellow push
button shall be marked "Reset". The ground fault lamp (red) shall light to show that
the Ground Break relay has operated to trip the main breaker. The reset button
must be pushed to reset the relay after the fault has been located before the
breaker can be closed. Instructions for performing tests shall be printed on the face
of the monitor panel. A control transformer shall be provided with a 120 volt
secondary at the main breaker for ground fault control power.
Voltmeters
Voltmeters shall conform to IEC, and shall be of iron vane, panel mounted, heavy duty type,
suitable to operate on a potential transformer with phase selector switch and the following
additional requirements:
Dial: Approximately 114 mm square graduated from zero to 600 volts with black figures on
white background.
Accuracy class: 2%.
Potential Transformers
The potential transformers shall conform to IEC and shall be wound type with polarity markers
suitable for operating meters and relays, with the following additional requirements:
Voltage rating: 600 volts with basic impulse insulation level of 10KV full wave.
Maximum allowable temperature rise under continuous full load above an average ambient
temperature of 40 degrees C shall be as follows:.
By winding resistance:
30 degrees C.
By hottest spot in winding:
40 degrees C.
EXECUTION
3.01
General
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
Field Quality Control
Perform the following tests and submit a certified report for review by the Project Manager.
Test circuits for connections in accordance with wiring diagram.
Test that insulation resistance to ground of non- groundedd conductors is a minimum of 10
megohms.
Test switchgear enclosure for continuity to the grounding system.
Test operation of circuits and controls. When testing operate each
control a minimum of 10 times and each circuit continuously for a minimum of 1/2
hour.
.
D.
E.
16480 - 4
Low Voltage Switchboards
END OF SECTION
16480 - 5
Low Voltage Switchboards
SECTION 16511
LIGHTING FIXTURES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
Work Included
Internal and External Lighting Fixtures.
1.02
A.
B.
Related Work
Section 16161:
Section 16120:
1.03
Quality Assurance
All fixtures and lamps shall be new. Components of the same type, size, rating, functional
characteristics and make are to be interchangeable.
1.04
Reference Standards
The following codes and standards are intended to provide an acceptable level of quality for
materials and products. The Contractor may propose alternative codes and standards provided
they are of equal or better quality than the referenced codes and standards and are submitted
for Project Manager review and approval.
IEC
BS
Illuminating Engineering Society: IES Lighting Handbooks.
VDE
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.06
A.
B.
C.
1.07
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Grounding and Bonding.
Wiring.
Submittals
Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's Literature:
List of Manufacturers.
Catalogue Cuts and Photometric Curves for each Fixture Type.
Colour, watts, volts, etc., for each fixture type.
Submit one product sample of each fixture type except chandeliers where crystal samples (if
any) and colour photographs shall be submitted.
Submit dimensioned shop drawings of each fixture type.
Submit manufacturer's technical data, including rated life, circuit watts and power factor for
each type.
Product Storage and Handling
Provide on each fixture and its components a recognized mark of the testing authority.
Ship each unit securely wrapped, packaged and labelled for safe handling in shipment and to
avoid damage or distortion.
Store lighting fixture and dimmers in a secure and dry storage facility.
General Requirements
All luminaries shall be manufactured to BS 45333 : Part 101 and the relevant section of part
102 (IEC 598-1 and 598-2)
Fixtures shall be installed at mounting heights as detailed on the drawings or as instructed by
the Project Manager.
Fixtures and/or fixture outlet boxes shall be provided with hangers to adequately support the
complete weight of the fixture. Design of hangers and method of fastening other than shown on
the drawings or herein specified shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
Fixtures mounted on outlet boxes shall be rigidly secured to a fixture stud in the outlet box.
Hickeys or extension pieces shall be installed where required to facilitate proper installation.
Pendant fixtures within the same room of area shall be installed plumb
and at a uniform height from the finished floor. Adjustment of height shall be made
during installation.
Flush mounted recessed fixtures shall be installed so as to completely eliminate light leakage
within the fixture and between the fixture and adjacent finished surface.
Fixtures located on the exterior shall be installed with non-ferrous metal screws finished to
match the fixtures.
Certain fixtures as shown in provisional position, they shall be exactly located as soon as the
final layout of the equipment is known.
Lighting fixtures shall comply with all applicable requirement as
herein outlined unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings. Fixtures
shall bear manufacturer's name and the factory inspection label.
16511 - 1
Lighting Fixtures
1.07
J.
K.
L.
PART 2
2.01
A.
B.
General Requirements (cont’d)
Luminaries fitted with high frequency or electronic control gear shall be disconnected before the
circuit is tested for insulation resistance.
Unless otherwise stated all luminaires designed for internal use shall be constructed to IP 20
and be Class 1. For IP-Rating refer to lighting fixture schedule in contract drawings.
Luminaries intended for use as emergency lighting either as self-contained or slave type shall
be F marked when used in or on surfaces of flammable.
PRODUCTS
Acceptable Manufacturers
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the names of three manufacturers and their
products which will be acceptable under this Section. Approval of the manufacturer or product
must be obtained before proceeding with associated work.
Items of same function and performance are acceptable in conformance with the specification.
2.2
Fixtures Construction
2.2.1
A.
Metal
Metal used in lighting fixtures shall be Grande GR 3/4 to BS 1030/1031/10051 cold rolled mild
steel and not less than 0.7 mm or heavier when required to comply with the specification or
standards.
Sheet steel reflector shall have a thickness of not less than 0.75 mm.
Aluminum reflectors shall have a thickness of not less than 1.6 mm, and coating of minimum
thickness 2.5 mm.
The grande of the aluminum used shall be similar to
BS 1470 Cat. A Type 1200
BS 1490 (Alloys) LM6, LM24 or LM25
All lighting fixture joints shall be mitered, welded and ground smooth with body tolerance of + 1
mm and miters tolerance of + 0.5 mm.
The metal parts of the fixture shall be completely free from burrs and
tool marks. Solder shall not be used as a mechanical fastening device on any part
of the fixture.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.2.4
Finish
Ferrous metal shall be bonderised, given a corrosion-resistant phosphate treatment or other
approved rust-inhibiting prime coat to provide a rustproof base before application of finish.
Light reflecting surfaces shall be either in aluminum sheet with a purity of 99.9% and the
aluminum shall be of grande 1080A to BS 1470, or finished in a baked white enamel having a
reflection factor of not less than 80% all to the drawings and approval of the Engineer.
All parts of reflector shall be completely covered by finish and free from irregularities.
After finish has been applied and cured, it shall be capable of withstanding a 1 cm radius bend
without showing signs of cracking, peeling or loosening from the base metal.
Non-reflecting surfaces such as fixtures frames and trims shall be finished in a baked enamel
paint. The colour of the paint shall be in accordance with manufacturer's standard finish unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer.
Lenses and Diffusers
The diffuser shall be manufactured from Plexiglas/polycarbonate/acrylic as required.
Diffusers shall not be manufactured from polystyrene or other styrene based materials.
Diffusers shall be formed by injection moulding, with a finish as specified.
OR
Diffusers shall be formed by extrusion moulding, with a finish as specified, subject to the
Engineer's approval.
Fixtures with hinged diffuser doors shall be provided with spring clips or other retaining devices
to prevent the diffuser from moving.
All fixtures shall be provided with the required accessories and hardware for complete
installation.
Fixture Schedules
The Contractor's attention is drawn to selected lighting luminaires shown in the contract
documents.
The name of manufacturers stated in the above mentioned document are considered as
representing the minimum level of standard and the Contractor must adhere to it. Alternatives
may be submitted for consideration and approval of the Engineer whose decision is deemed to
be binding on the Contractor and final and no claim shall be considered by the Employer for
16511 - 2
Lighting Fixtures
reasons such as rejection of alternatives proposed by the Contractor.
2.3
Incandescent Lamp Luminaires
2.3.1
A.
General
Luminaries for incandescent light sources shall be designed to accommodate the specified
lamp.
Lampholders for tungsten halogen lamps shall be of the best quality with ceramic bases suitable
for the currents and temperatures achieved during constant use.
Springs and other metal parts in the lampholder assembly shall not deteriorate during use such
that poor contact arcing, welding of slackness can occur.
B.
C.
2.3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
2.3.3
A.
B.
C.
Elv Luminaires
Unless otherwise stated luminaires using low voltage tungsten halogen lamps shall be supplied
complete with their own transformer.
Wire wound transformers shall be rated as shown in the luminaires specification sheets and
comply with IEC 742, Class I/Class II and be insulated to Class H of BS 2757.
Electronic transformers shall be designed to IEC 742 and 34C/Comex (PK) 8 and 14 with RFI
suppression to a minimum standard of BS 800 and VDE: 0875.
Transformers shall be located away from high temperature parts of the lamp and luminaires or
any other heat radiating surface.
When installed in ceiling voids, transformers shall be separately supported, mounted to avoid
noise transmission and be capable of subsequent removal, either through the fitting aperture or
through an access panel.
Transformers not containing primary fuse protection shall be provided with accessible local
protection.
The size of wiring between the transformer and the luminaires shall be such that the voltage
drop is not more than 10%.
Final connections to luminaires shall be carried out using silicon rubber sheathed cables.
Transformers including electronic types shall incorporate internal protection against overload
and short-circuit.
Where multipoint transformers are specified voltage regulation shall be
a maximum of 6% and each luminaires shall be separately connected to the
transformer.
Electronic transformers shall contain a soft start circuit and be self-regulating.
Where low voltage tungsten halogen lamps are to be dimmed, the
dimmer shall be of the hard fired type suitable specifically for this type of lamp.
Electronic transformers used in dimmable circuits shall be suitable for dimming. The dimmer
shall be compatible with the transformer and be recommended by the transformer
manufacturer.
Transformers used in dimmable circuits shall be down rated as recommended by the
manufacturer.
where dimmers are specified they shall be of the hard firing type suitable specifically for
operating low voltage tungsten halogen lamps.
Lampholders in dichroic or capsule luminaires shall be easily accessible for relamping.
Dichroic And Sealed Elv Tungsten Halogen Lamps
where sealed extra low voltage lamps are used the luminaires shall be designed for the heat
dissipation requirements.
Where dichroic lamps are used the internal wiring and luminaire shall cope with the
temperature.
All dichroic and sealed lamps shall be of the captive type and supplied with a GU 5.3 base or
similar.
2.3.4
A.
B.
C.
Capsule Elv Lamps
Capsule lamps shall be installed using bare hands.
The envelope of capsule lamps shall be made of quartz glass.
Where capsule lamps are used a protective glass shall be incorporated into the luminaire
design.
2.3.5
Mains Voltage Tungsten Halogen Lamps
Luminaires designed to accommodate double-ended mains voltage halogen lamps shall be
o
designed to ensure that a minimum bulb wall temperature of 250 C and a maximum pinch point
o
temperature of 350 C are achieved.
16511 - 3
Lighting Fixtures
2.4
Fluorescent Luminaires (Low Pressure)
2.4.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
2.4.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
General
Fluorescent lamps shall comply with the requirements of BS 1853.
All cables shall be secured within the luminaires body to prevent loose
lengths from touching hot surfaces or becoming trapped beneath cover plates.
Cable clips or cleats shall be captive and if secured by adhesive, shall not loosen
with age.
Unless otherwise specified all fluorescent luminaires shall be supplied with low loss gear and
single pulse electronic starters.
Unless otherwise specified control gear shall have power factor correction to achieve a
minimum p.f. of 0.9 lagging.
The control gear enclosure shall be so designed to limit the maximum temperature of ballast to
its stated rated temperature (TW) and in all cases to less then 65oC.
Where high frequency control gear is specified, the lamp supplied shall be compatible.
All high frequency gear shall be "burnt-in" for a minimum period of 24 hours before being
installed in a luminaire.
Aluminum reflectors and louvers shall be made from high purity aluminum (99.9% minimum)
with low or very low iridescence. Anoxic film shall have a minimum thickness of 2.5 microns.
Louvers and reflectors shall be packed separately from the luminaire body and protected
against damage.
Aluminum louvers shall not be installed until after the building has been
thoroughly cleaned.
Louvers shall not be installed using bare hands. Any louvers found with finger, palm marks or
builders dirt and dust shall be removed and cleaned using a high pressure hose with Kodak 600
dirt emulsifier or a similar method approved by the louver manufacturer. Louvers shall not be
wiped clean .
Diffusers shall be made from UV stabilized polycarbonate, injection moulded.
The diffusers shall not support combustion and shall be self-extinguishing.
Compact Fluorescent Lamps
Luminaires containing compact fluorescent lamps shall be designed to ensure the correct
working conditions for the lamp.
All compact fluorescent lamp luminaires shall be supplied with low loss control gear, single
pulse electronic starters and H.F. Ballasts.
Compact fluorescent lamps shall be 4-pin type to BS 6982.
Compact fluorescent lamps used for emergency lighting use shall be of the 4-pin type (2G7,
G24q or G11 bases), or 2-pin type with integral starters (G24d-1, 2 or 3, or G23).
E. Where the lamps are used horizontally, they shall be adequately supported along their length.
2.4.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.4.4
A.
Cold Cathode Lamps
High voltage sub-circuits shall be wired on lead sheathed cable or silicone rubber insulted cable
rated at 15kV.
All high voltage installations shall have an isolating fireman's switch.
All installations shall be power factor corrected to a minimum power factor of 0.90 lagging.
Bulk power factor correction for up to 5 sub-circuits will be permitted.
Remote mounted ballasts shall where possible be grouped together with bulk power factor
correction to give a minimum power factor of 0.09 lagging. The ballast shall be capable of being
mounted up to 100 m away from the lamps.
Power factor correction capacitors for dimmed high voltage circuits
shall be located on the dimmer panel on the incoming side of the dimmers.
Lamp Caps And Holders
All lamp caps and holders shall be to BS 5101 and BS 5042. Lamp holders shall be suitable for
the lamp cap or base used.
1.
Fluorescent Lamps
38 mm T12 and 26 mm T8 fluorescent lamps shall be supplied with bi-pin G13 end caps.
Bi-pin fluorescent tube lamp holders shall be to BS 1875. Lamp holders shall be moulded
polycarbonate, urea, GRP or equivalent, with integral cable terminals capable of clamping
conductors of maximum size 1.5 mm2. The lampholders shall be provided with means of
16511 - 4
Lighting Fixtures
2.
accommodating lamp length tolerances. The lamp holders shall be either grippin/springgrip/center twist rotary contact type.
Compact Fluorescent Lamps
Compact fluorescent lamp(s) type TC-12D shall be supplied with bases incorporating an
integral starter-switch.
Lamp holders shall be moulded polycarbonate, urea, GRP or equivalent, with integral cable
terminals capable or clamping conductors of maximum size 1.5 mm2. The lampholders shall be
provided with means for positive fixing to luminaire and be of the 2G11 type.
2.4.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
Dimming Control
Each luminaire connected to a dimmer shall include dimmable control
gear. The dimmable control gear shall be fed directly from the mains and an
additional conductor shall be supplied from the dimmer to the luminaire to vary the
output.
Where dimmable high frequency electronic control gear is specified, the control gear shall be
controlled via a separate 0-10 V d.c. circuit or similar.
Lamps of different types or ratings shall be controlled from separate
dimmers.
Lamps of dimming circuits shall be of the same colour temperature and
colour appearance. To maintain a constant appearance all lamps on dimming
circuits shall be changed at the same time.
2.5
Emergency Lighting
2.5.1
A.
General
The emergency lighting installation shall fully comply with BS 5266 and emergency luminaires
shall comply with BS 4533 : Part 101 and Part 102.22.
All equipment used shall be ICEL approved and certified. Copies of certificates for all or any
equipment supplied shall be obtained, as appropriate.
Where lamps are to be used for emergency lighting, emergency battery packs shall be supplied
by the manufacturer of the luminaires,
On satisfactory completion of the installation the emergency lighting system shall be operated
for its rated duration. The system shall then be allowed to recharge for 24 hours and` tested
again.
Illuminance checks at sufficient points to prove compliance with BS 5266 shall be carried out at
the start and finish of the first discharge and after the full recharge period. These tests shall be
witnessed.
Illuminances, and battery voltage of central systems, at the start and end and after recharge
shall be noted and included with the final test certificates.
A cosine corrected light meter shall be used with a scale range of 0.001 - 100 lux with a
sensitivity of 0.001 lux. All measurements shall be taken after excluding all other light.
Locations for test points must include the following:
1.
Half way between luminaires in corridors and open plan offices and stairs,
2.
Critical task areas such as control panels and switchboards; fire fighting points; rotating
machinery, operating tables,
3.
Area under highest mounted luminaires ,
4.
Area where widest spacing occurs,
5.
Changes of direction,
6.
Thresholds of doorways, forming part of the exit route.
Where the system is designed for 3 hour duration, the measurements shall be taken during the
last hour of this period unless the installation is large when the time taken for the measurements
should determine the starting time.
On acceptance of the installation a completion certificate of the type suggested in BS 5266
(Appendix B) shall be issued.
Where remote batteries, chargers or invertors are mounted at distance greater than 0.5 m away
from the luminaire, the interconnecting wiring shall comply with BS 5226, Category 1.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
k.
2.5.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
Self-Contained Luminaires
Each luminaire shall contain the charger/sensor until, battery pack and invertor. Where these
units are supplied separately they shall not be mounted more than 0.5 m away unless the
connecting wiring complies with BS 5266.
All luminaires shall be clearly marked giving rated voltage, method of operation, lamp type,
wattage, and battery voltage, type and average life.
Lampholders for combined units shall be clearly identified.
A visible warning label shall be provided indicating that the luminaire may be live although no
lamps are operating.
16511 - 5
Lighting Fixtures
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
2.5.3
A.
B.
C.
2.5.4
A.
B.
C.
2.5.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.5.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
2.5.7
A.
B.
Each luminaire shall have a clearly visible coloured LED ( minimum life expectancy of 20,000
hours) indicating battery under charge.
Luminaires installed in defined escape routes shall have an outer casing which shall comply
with the 850oC glow wire test of IEC 695-2-1.
Each luminaire shall contain a protective fuse in the main circuit.
Batteries shall be protected against polarity reversal and complete discharge. Batteries shall be
prevented from discharging when the cell voltage 1.5V (lead acid) or 0.9 V (nickel candmium)
The batteries shall have a minimum life of 4 years and the date of manufacture (month and
year) shall be stamped on the casing.
Photometric data shall be obtained, as appropriate.
Slave Luminaires
All luminaires shall be clearly marked, giving rated voltage method of operation and lamp
wattage.
Where one lamp way in a multiway luminaire is used for both normal and emergency use the
lampholders shall be separately identified.
Where fluorescent tubes are fed from a DC or AC/DC emergency source the luminaires shall
contain appropriate invertors.
Illuminated Emergency Exit Signs
Exit signs shall be manufactured to meet the appropriate requirements of BS 4533, BS 2560
and BS 5266.
Each sign shall be internally illuminated by two separate systems of lighting.
The housing shall be designed to maintain an internal ambient temperature below that of the
lowest temperature rating of any piece of equipment installed therein.
General Battery Systems
Batteries used shall consist of a number of cells of the:
*
Lead acid planate type to BS 6290:
Part 4.
The charger shall be capable of restoring 100% of capacity within 24 hours and 80% of capacity
within 18 hours.
The changeover contactor shall be manufactured to BS 5424 and BS 764.
Changeover relays shall be mounted in a purpose-built enclosure andjacent to the appropriate
sub-distribution board.
Emergency Lighting Modification Unit (Conversion Kit)
The addition of conversion kits to luminaires if specified shall only be carried out in the factory
of either the original luminaire manufacturer or the suppliers of the conversion kit. In either case
the supplier of the conversion kit shall inspect and approve the modification work.
The luminaires incorporating conversion kits shall comply with all tests in BS 4533 and carry the
"F" mark when used in or on surfaces consisting of flammable material.
Where only one lamp in a multilamp luminaire is used for emergency
lighting of where an additional lamp is included in the luminaire, the luminaire shall
be photometered under emergency conditions.
Where high frequency electronic ballasts are used for the normal lighting, the conversion unit
shall incorporate additional devices to ensure that the ballast resets itself after testing and turns
on the lamp.
Self-contained conversion kit shall contain an emergency lighting module and battery pack.
The module shall contain a battery charger with charge indicator, inverter, low battery voltage
disconnect circuit and changeover relay.
An LED charge indicator shall be visible from below. Allowance shall be mande to extend the
LED circuit and incorporate it into the luminaire body or into the ceiling adjacent to the luminaire
using a purpose mande ceiling plate.
The internal temperature of the luminaire shall not exceed the battery manufacturers
recommended ambient temperature for their batteries.
Where the ambient temperature of the luminaire exceeds that recommended for the batteries,
then the batteries shall be mounted externally in a ventilated sheet steel enclosure with a
minimum rating of IP 20.
Where remote conversion kits and/or batteries are mounted more then 0.5 m from the
luminaire, they shall be interconnected using wiring complying with BS 5266.
Conversion kits deriving their emergency supply from a central battery, shall contain an inverter
ballast and changeover relay.
Testing
A central means of testing shall be provided in the cubicle for all central battery systems.
Operation of the test switch shall simulate a mains failure extinguishing the normal lighting and
energizing the emergency lighting.
Where the system is maintained up to the local distribution board and non-maintained thereafter
16511 - 6
Lighting Fixtures
C.
2.6
2.6.1
A.
B.
2.6.1
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.6.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.6.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
using zonal or sub-circuit monitoring then local test points shall be provided.
The inclusion of test modules into emergency luminaires shall be approved by manufacturer of
these modules.
Lamp Control Gear
General
The lamp control gear shall be of the correct type and rating for the lamp specified.
Electromagnetic interference generated by the lamp control gear
propagating through the mains supply wiring shall be suppressed at the source to
within the requirements of EN 55015, BS 800, BS 5394. Electromagnetic
interference components shall be to BS 613.
General (cont’d)
Harmonic currents generated by the lamp control gear in the mains supply wiring shall be
limited to the requirements of IEC 82.
The acoustic noise level from the lamp control gear shall not exceed NC 25.
The lamp control gear shall be ventilated to ensure that under normal
operating conditions the maximum continuous rated operated temperature of any
control gear component is not exceeded.
The control gear shall be power factor corrected through Power Factor corrector.
Electronic equipment shall be subjected to a test "burn-in" phase of a minimum 24 hours to
ensure the supplied equipment has a minimal failure during operational life.
Removable Gear Trays
The lamp control gear shall be assembled on pre-wired gear trays, The gear shall be supplied
complete, containing all components.
The gear trays shall be constructed and finished to the same standard as the luminaire body.
Luminaire gear tray connections shall be via fused plug-in terminal blocks.
The lamp control gear shall be pre-wired and assembled in the luminaire.
Electrical Performance Electronic Starter-Switch Circuits
Each lamp control gear circuit shall comprise the following:
1.
Electronic starter
2.
Current limiting ballast
The electronic starter shall be to BS 3772 : Section1.
The electronic starter shall operate 38 mm (T12) Argon filled lamps, 26 mm (T8) Krypton filled
lamps and compact fluorescent lamps. The electronic starter shall incorporate means for
identifying the lamp type connected and applying the correct starting conditions.
When starting the lamp, the electronic starter shall pre-heat the lamp electrodes to the full
emission temperature described in BS 5717, before applying a single starting voltage pulse.
The electrode pre-heat period shall conserve lamp life. The electronic starter shall be certified
to provide 10,000 starts on a switching cycle as defined in BS 3772.
The period between initiation of starting and lamp ignition, shall not exceed 2.5 seconds for nondefective lamps.
The electronic starter shall incorporate a means for detecting a failed lamp and for preventing
starting attempts on failed lamps.
The electronic starter shall be contained in a 2-pin polycarbonate canister to BS 3772. The
electronic starter shall be mounted in a starter-switch socket complying with BS 6702.
2.6.4
Ballasts
Current limiting inductive ballasts shall be to BS 2818. The ballast core shall be of sufficiently
large cross-section to avoid high flux densities and overheating. The ballasts shall be of the "low
loss"/"super low loss" type.
The maximum permitted losses are as follows:
Krypton
Standard
Low Loss
Super Low Loss
H.F.
26 mm
(watts)
(watts)
(watt)
(watt)
18 W
9-10.5
6.5
4.0-4.5
2-3
36 W
9-10.5
6.0-6.5
4.0-4.5
3-4
58 W
11-13
8.0-8.5
5.2-5.5
4.5
70 W
13
8.5
5.5-6.0
The manufacturer shall state ballast losses for the proposed control gear in the appropriate
schedule.
2.6.5
Capacitors
High Power factor corrector shall be supplied within the fixture.
Radio interference suppression capacitors shall be dry type ceramic or equivalent, complying
16511 - 7
Lighting Fixtures
with BS 4017. They shall be rated at 800 V, 50/60 Hz.
2.6.6.
A.
B.
C.
2.6.7.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
2.7
B.
C.
2.8
Electronic High Frequency Ballasts
(Where Required and Specified In The Lighting Fixture Schedules)
Lamp control shall be effected by electronic control gear operating the controlled lamp at
frequencies higher than 20kHz, and including means for the limitations of lamp current.
The electronic control gear shall be capable of operating both 26 mm (T8) Krypton filled lamps
and 26 mm Argon filled lamps.
The control gear shall incorporate means for automatically identifying
the lamp type connected and applying the appropriate starting and running
conditions.
Electronic High Frequency Ballast’s (cont’d)
The control gear shall be supplied complete, with all components in a
fully enclosed housing. The control gear shall comply with BS 5717. The control
gear housing shall be provided with means for fixing to the mounting, and allowing
easy removal for replacement. The control gear housing shall incorporate all the
cable terminals.
The manufacturer shall state, for continuos normal operation, the values of :
1.
power consumption
2.
current
3.
earth leakage current
4.
power factor.
The manufacturer shall state the maximum current demand during lamp start-up.
The control gear shall pre-heat the lamp electrodes under conditions complying with BS 5717,
before applying a voltage across the lamp sufficient to cause ignition. The electrode pre-heat
period shall be sufficiently long to conserve electrode life. The period between initiation of
starting and lamp ignition shall not exceed 2 seconds. The control gear shall be certified to
provide 10,000 starts on a switching cycle as defined in BS 3772.
The control gear shall incorporate means for detecting and automatically isolating a failed or
defective lamp. After lamp replacement the control shall automatically start the non-defective
lamp.
The control gear shall be designed and manufactured to ensure mains frequency, or multiples
of mains frequency, is not perceptibly modulated onto the lamp output.
The control gear shall be capable of operation from a suitable standby d.c. electrical power
supply and shall be provided with all the necessary cable terminals. The manufacturer shall
define the requirements of a suitable d.c. source of their luminaire.
The control gear shall have a "burn-in" period of at least 24 hours and then retested before
being used in the luminaire.
The final circuit shall have a power factor of no less than 0.95 lagging.
Where dimming is called for, the control gear shall be of the type suitable for dimming smoothly
from 100% - 10% light output.
Diffusers
A.
Diffusers shall be manufactured from one piece virgin acrylic,
clear acrylic, or polycarbonate plastic having the following requirements:
Interior diffusing type with smooth exterior surface.
Self-extinguishing type.
No material colour change when used with 4500 degrees K fluorescent lamp.
No apparent yellowing after 500 hours exposure to fluorescent lamp source under
conditions similar to those existing in the lighting fixture.
No altering of the optical properties of the fixture when finished diffuser treated with antistatic wax.
Diffusers shall be formed by carefully controlled processes so that the finished piece retains it's
design contours and dimensions without any change at normal operating temperature.
Diffusers shall be resistant to shrinking, warping, crazing, cracking, or discoloring, either in
service or when stored in normal conditions in the manufacturer's standard shipping containers.
Globes
Globes shall be manufactured from clear seamless butyrate polycarbonate, or high impact heat
resistant glass, with the following additional requirements.
Minimum thickness 3.20mm surface free from visible mold seam.
Reduction in strength: Not more than 10 percent after five years.
Maximum haze: Two percent.
Minimum light transmittance: 88 percent.
16511 - 8
Lighting Fixtures
2.9
A.
B.
C.
2.10
Lenses
Plastic lenses:
Clear butyrate or polycarbonate, minimum thickness 1.52mm.
Glass lenses:
Tempered glass, laminated glass, or double strength clear glass.
Refractory lenses:
Spherical in shape not exceeding 152mm min. diameter, heat resistant annealed clear
borosilicate glass.
Fixtures Wire
Refer to Section 16120.
2.11 Gaskets
A.
Keyed Gasket:
One piece extruded solid neoprene having Type A durometer hardness of 30 plus or minus five
when tested in accordance with the code.
B.
Self-retaining Gasket:
One piece closed cell sponge neoprene, soft or medium density, with the following additional
requirements.
Resistant to aging , heat, ultra-violet light, water, oil, weathering and setting as determined
by the code.
Cemented to components with resilient neoprene sealing compound compatible with the
finish.
Adhesive not applied to the diffuser.
2.12 Chandeliers (if any)
A.
Unless otherwise noted chandeliers shall consist of cut glass crystal with a minimum of 30%
lead oxide content, free of flows. Where metalling supports are used and are visible solid brass
shall be used.
B.
Supporting rod shall be constructed of stainless steel. At steel/crystal interfaces plastic washers
shall be utilized.
C.
Adhesive glue shall consist of an acrylic resin bonded by means of ultra-violet radiation. Glue
shall be of low toxicity, have a minimum shelf life of 1 year, capable of operating at
temperatures up to 90 degrees C and with a minimum tensile strength of 100 kg/cm2.
D.
Fixture wiring shall be code approved, comprising flexible cord with copper-conductors.
2.13
A.
B.
2.14
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.15
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Lighting Fixtures
Lighting fixtures are described in the "Lighting Fixture Schedule". The fixtures shall be furnished
and installed complete with all necessary parts and lamps as specified herein and as shown on
the drawings.
Voltage rating of fixtures shall be as shown on the drawings and schedules.
Recessed Luminaires
Recessed incandescent luminaires: Prewired type with junction box forming an integral part of
the assembly.
Supply recessed luminaire complete with trim type required for ceiling system installed. Before
ordering confirm ceiling construction details and architectural finish for each area.
Maximum depth of recessed fluorescent luminaires shall be 150mm including mounting yokes
or bridges. Minimum distance from backface of luminaire or lens to center of lamp shall be
60mm.
Select reflector and lamp positions to provide high efficiency and even brightness to eliminate
lamp lines.
Provide integral encapsulated ballasts for recessed high intensity discharge luminaires.
Dimming Rack (Dr)
Where a dimming rack is required in the contract documents, the following shall apply :
The rack shall be a standard size several channel prewired dimmer cabinet incorporating a
range of universal dimmer modules and SCENESET control processor.
The rack shall be of a force ventilated version.
Each dimmer channel shall be protected by a single pole miniature circuit breaker (MCB).
To ensure isolation of a dimmer module the two MCB's to a double module shall be
mechanically linked.
The cabinet construction shall be of sheet metal with rigid top and bottom faces with cable entry
16511 - 9
Lighting Fixtures
F.
G.
H.
I.
2.15
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
plates. The two side faces shall be detachable for additional installation access. The overall
lockable door shall be hinged, but reversible on site. All airflow shall be through door grilles.
The internal construction of every cabinet shall include a unique stacker assembly which shall
house the dimmer modules and SCENESET control processor.
All power wiring shall be terminated on one side of the cabinet while the control wiring shall be
separated on the other hand side.
All components of the rack and the dimming system as a whole shall be manufactured to fully
comply with EN standards for Emission, Immunity and safety,
The system shall be capable of accepting a SCENMAKER programmer
and SCENE COMMANDER control panels.
Dimming Rack (Dr) (cont’d)
The breakout unit for termination of control wiring shall be the
termination point for all external digital control communications. These include SCOM external for up to 10 SCENE COMMANDER control panels. An S-COM
internal shall be used only to link multiple SCENESET control processors at
different locations and an S-DIM for connection of the SCENESET to slave dimmer
cabinets.
Internal Power Wiring : Tri-rated to/from module terminals with grouped load, neutral and earth
screwless terminals for external load wiring up to 4mm2.
Control Distribution
1.
Digital from the Breakout unit.
2.
Analogue : 4 terminal pins in dimmer module.
SCENEMAKER programmer (if any)
The SCENEMAKER programmer shall be of the hand held type with large LCD backlit display,
that simply plugs into SCENE COMMANDER control panels to allow easy fine tuning of
intensity levels and fade times or alternatively access to full programming capability of the
system.
SCENE COMMANDER control panel
The SCENE COMMANDER control panel shall have the following features :
1.
Stylish designed and suitable for both large and small installations.
2.
Fits standard BS twin gang socket boxes.
3.
Programme stored in integral memory (no separate memory unit required).
4.
Built in infra-red receiver.
5.
Up to 24 channel control.
6.
simple programming directly from the panel.
7.
4 SCENES version as minimum.
EXECUTION
Installation
Furnish, assemble, install and wire up complete, all lighting fixtures. Fixtures shall be complete
with lamps, lamp holders and all necessary accessories. All fixtures shall be wired in
accordance with temperature limitations.
Fixtures shall be rigidly mounted by approved means. Pendant-hung fixtures shall be equipped
with approved ball type aligners.
Provide adequate protection for fixtures during construction. At completion of work all fixtures
shall be clean and free from foreign material.
Support fluorescent luminaires directly from building structure by rod hangers and inserts or
metal angle headers supported from framing structure of ceiling suspension system.
Support luminaires more than 600mm wide by a minimum of four hangers per luminaire,
independent of ceiling structure or tee bars.
Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below, to gain access to outlet or premiered
fixture box.
Connect recessed luminaire to boxes with flexible conduit and fixture wire.
Support recessed luminaires mounted in suspended ceilings with exposed tee bar grid system
from the ceiling tee bar grid structure and secure thereto.
Cables shall loop in and out of bases of columns and bollards without joints. Cables shall
terminate in a crimped cable socket.
16511 - 10
Lighting Fixtures
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
Tests
Test all circuits in accordance with the codes.
Test proper operation of lighting fixtures and controls.
Lighting levels in rooms shall be tested using a cosine and color corrected light meter to the
requirements of IES. For illumination level refer to lighting layouts and lighting calculations.
Submit test results.
END OF SECTION
16511 - 11
Lighting Fixtures
SECTION 16603
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
Work Included
Atmospheric high pulse voltage lightning protection system.
1.02
Related Work
Section 16161: Grounding and Bonding
1.03
A.
B.
Refernce Standards
IEC
:
International Electro technical Commission
NEC
:
National Electrical Code (U.S.A.)
1.04
A.
B.
Submittals
Submit shop drawings and manufacturer's literature.
Submit installation instructions.
1.05
A.
B.
Lightning Protection Concept
Capture the lightning strike on purpose-designed air terminals at preferred points.
Conduct the strike to ground safety via a purpose-designed down conductor.
Dissipate the lightning energy into the earth with minimal rise in ground potential.
Eliminate earth loops and differentials by creating a low impedance, equipotential earth system.
Protect equipment from surges and transients on incoming power lines to prevent equipment damage
and costly operational downtime.
Protect equipment from surges and transients on incoming telecommunications and signal lines to
prevent equipment damage and costly operational downtime.
C.
D.
E.
F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Materials
Air Terminal.
Dynasphere Terminal.
Support mast.
Inline coupling.
Metallic lower mast including brackets.
Triax down conductor including metal saddles.
Lightning event counter.
Earthing rods.
2.01.1 Air Terminal
The role of the air termination is to launch an upward streamer to meet lightning stroke. The ability of
the air termination to launch a successful streamer before any other part of the structure determines its
effectiveness.
2.01.2 Early Streamer Emission Terminals - Dynasphere/Interceptor (ESE)
The ESE terminal shall intercept lightning protection through the formation of corona and space charge
effects around ground points. It shall have a passive floating sphere construction that produces minimal
corona, until lightning from a down leader approaches, when it becomes active. The ESE terminal shall
trigger on upward intercepting discharge to attract or capture the lightning energy. Way ward lightning
can then be drawn to the Dynasphere to enable safe control of its energy to earth.
2.01.3 Down Conductor
The down conductor shall be a purpose-designed surge conductor that conveys impulses to ground
whilst minimizing the dangers of side flashing. It shall have the ability to confine a discharge current.
The down conductor shall comprise carefully selected dielectric materials which create capacitive
balance and ensure insulation integrity under light impulse conditions. It should have a conductive outer
sheath that allows electrostatic bounding of the cable to the building with the aid of conductive cable
saddles. Refer to the typical detail of the down conductor as shown on the drawing.
16603 - 1
Lightiing Protection System
2.01.4 Earthing
For the efficient performance of a lightning protection system, it is essential that a low impedance earth
be provided to facilitate the dissipation of the lightning energy into the earth as quickly as possible.
For earthing materials refer to section 16161 Grounding and Bounding of the specification.
Earth system should comprise earthing electrodes, connectors, tapes and where necessary earth
chasing compounds. For difficult sites, where the earth resistance is high, the use of an earth enhancing
compound shall be used to drastically lower the earth impedance.
2.01.5 Earth Potential Equalization
Creating an equipotential earth plane under transient conditions is essential for equipment and personnel
safety. Potential differences between earth may allow transients to enter buildings to destroy equipment
and create a danger for personnel in the event of lightning. Transit earth clamp should be used to
equalize earth differences under transient conditions.
The transient earth clamp (T.E.C.) should fulfill the following:
Automatic reset after operation.
Suitable for use in hazardous environment.
Robust housing for extended outdoor use.
100 kA 8/20 micro sec. surge rating.
Surge sparkover voltage 1 kV/us
< 1000 V
Arc voltage
< 20 V
10
Insulation resistance
> 10 OHM
Capacitance
> 10 pF
Rated impulse discharge 8/20 us
100 kA
2.01.6 Lightning Warning System (if stated in the B.O.Q)
The lightning warning system should have the following features:
Senses the development of a thunderstorm.
Have graphic display panel with auto alarms (warning alarm, alert alarm and all clear signal when
conditions have cleared).
Have auto test facility.
2.01.7 Point of Entry Protection Shunt
The shunt surge diverters should fulfill the following:
Low let-through voltages.
High single shot capability.
Multipulse capability.
Surge diverting capability continuously monitored on 5 segment LED panel.
Heat and shock absorbent encapsulant.
Integral alarm contacts.
Long service life.
5 year warranty.
2.01.8 Telecommunications Protection
The telecommunications protectors should be integrated with power filters to provide an integral
protection communication scheme for PABX and Radio Communications. Subscriber line protection
(SLP) and high speed digital protection (HSP) should provide protection both line to line and line to
ground and for circuits operating at upto 8 Mbits/sec. or 12 MHz.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
General
The lightning protection system shall be installed in accordance with IEC, NFPA & ANVAR.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.03
Installation
Exothermally weld lightning protection conductors cables to all metallic equipment and projections on the
roof.
Clamp lightning protection conductors together at junctions using bronze two-bolt clamps.
Install down tapes mounted on external face of columns in wall cavity between column face and external
concrete panels and cladding.
Provide PVC conduits cast into concrete beams or walls, to allow straight run of down tape between air
terminal and ground where necessary.
Provide stainless steel frame and removable lid 600mm above ground level for access to test clamps.
Clamp lightning protection system to ground system using bronze two-bolt clamps.
Tests
The ohmic resistance of the system to ground shall be measured and shall not exceed 2 ohms.
Additional ground rods shall be installed as necessary to obtain this value.
END OF SECTION
16603 - 2
Lightiing Protection System
SECTION 16611
STATIC UNININTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY
(UPS)
1.01
Works Included
UPS system installation comprise the following:
Complete rectifier/ charger-battery-inverter system with automatic static switch and
maintenance by-pass circuit.
Monitoring panel.
Plant power and control cabling.
Connection of normal a.c. power from assigned terminals/ switch- circuit breaker, as shown on
the drawings.
Earthing system.
1.02
Standards
Installation is to comply with relevant IEC, BS. EIA, NEMA and IEEE or equal standards.
Materials and components are to be manufacturer’s latest design, and standards used are to be
approved prior to manufacture. Radio frequency interference (RFI) suppression is to be in
accordance with CISPR recommendations.
Noise level of complete assembly is not to exceed 65 Db (A scale) at 1.0 m distance anywhere
within the UPS room.
Temperature limits within which equipment is to be designed to operate are zero to + 45 deg. C
at 100% rated output. Equipment is to be capable of operating under up to 55 deg. C ambient
conditions with derating factor of 1.25% per deg. C over 45 deg. C.
1.03
Submittals
Equipment data: submit full technical data of equipment for approval including, but not limited
to the following:
Manufacturer’s catalogues, detailed description, compliance with the standards, dimensions
and weights, system operation, operating characteristics, methods of operation, protective and
control provisions, heat losses, ambient conditions and limitation on electronic components
etc., beyond which such components may suffer partial or permanent damage.
Test certificates submit type test and routine test certificates, system is to undergo a functional
and load test program approved by the engineer, and is to undergo a minimum 72 hours “burnin” test, under site simulated conditions, prior to shipment.
Shop and construction drawings: submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to the
following:
Plans and front and side elevations, with indication of built-on control and indicating devices
and instruments, exact dimensions and weights, cabling etc. one diagram with ratings of each
piece of equipment, cabling, grounding, etc
Control and elementary diagrams, wiring diagrams and like.
Installation and mounting details.
Spare parts: provide manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for 1000 hours operation of
UPS system. Provide list of manufacturer’s spare parts for 2000 hour operation together with
current pieces.
Tools and instruments: provide tools and instruments required for normal routing inspection,
testing, operation and general maintenance, as recommended by the manufacturer.
1.04
Approved Manufacturers
Best Power (U.S.A)
Merlin-Gerin (France)
Siemens (Germany)
1.05
Warranty
Provide two years warranty for equipment specified in this section.
1.06
Local Representative
Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer has a locally established and
authorized organization which can be called upon for professional advice and maintenance as
may be required, and which can immediately supply spare parts to support day to day and
emergency maintenance requirements. Failure to satisfy this may disqualify a manufacturer.
16611 - 1
UPS
1.07
Maintenance Contract
Obtain and undertaking by the equipment manufacturer and this authorized local
representative to provide an annual maintenance contract, available after substantial
completion of the work, covering routine service and emergency services by trained
employees, and to ensure supply of necessary standard spare parts.
1.08
UPS System
System Description
General system is to be interposed between a. c. power supply and critical load, to secure a
minimum period of continuity of no-break battery back-up for the required time in case of
failure of normal a. c. supply and maintain output voltage, frequency and phase deviation
within specified tolerances.
System is to be non-redundant, maintained (continuously supplying load through the inverter
with automatic no-break transfer to or re-transfer from alternate source (bypass) in case of
failure or overload on rectifier battery-inverter system.
Normal A. C. power supply will be available from one protected sources fed form essential
power source (standby diesed generator) as shown on the drawings. Characteristics of output
of generator set (when provided) and UPS system are to be coordinated for best results.
Standby and advise on special requirements of generator characteristic output and stability.
System overall efficiency is not to be less than 90%.
System Operation
Under normal conditions inverter(s) are to be synchronized and phase locked to normal a. c.
supply. Upon loss of normal a. c. supply, battery is to continue supply of no break power to
inverters, which then free-run on self generated UPS frequency reference. Upon restoration of
normal a. c. supply, inverters are to re-synchronize to a. c. line, gradually (at slew rate), if
frequency and voltage deviation of normal a. c. supply is within preset limits specified.
Automatic transfer to bypass: static transfer switch is to automatically transfer critical (100%)
load from inverter to by-pass source (which is normal a. c. supply) if:
Inverter output voltage characteristics fall outside specified limits.
Critical load exceeds overload rating of UPS.
Over-temperature is sensed.
Manual (push button) command is given.
Transfer to by-pass mode is to be inhibited, and an alarm initiated if voltage, frequency and/ or
phase shift of by-pass power is outside acceptable tolerances.
Re-transfer to inverter: re-transfer of critical load from auto by pass source to inverter (UPS
mode) is only to be possible under the following conditions:
Inverter output voltage characteristics return to within specified tolerances.
Original load current reduces to within rated full load capacity of UPS.
Re-transfer selector switch is in automatic position.
Lock-Out feature is to inhibit re-transfer if by-pass source conditions are outside preset
tolerances or if UPS output and by-pass are not synchronized and phase locked or if UPS
output is not restored to normal conditions.
Normal power restored: when normal power is restored following an outage, rectifier/ charger is
to initially draw no power except for transformer in-rush current. After approximately 15
seconds (walk-in time), input power requirements are to rise to power level to drive critical load
and recharge battery.
System Characteristics
Rectifier/ charger input:
Nominal input voltage
230.50 Hz
Voltage input variation
+10% - 15% from nominal
Frequency
+/-5% from nominal
Transformer exciting current in rush
Less than 600% nominal current
Power factor
0.8 lagging at full load and nominal input voltage
Total harmonic feedback
Maximum 10% (total)
Current limiting
115% max. of that required to operate inverters
and charge battery at full rated load, adjustment
possible between 100% and 125%
Walk-in current in rush
25% to 100% ELC in 15 seconds
1.
2.
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
a.
b.
c.
4.
5.
Rectifier/ charger output:
Float and equalize operation
Regulation
Ripple
Adjustable, automatic, compatible between battery
+/-1% max. form 0-100% load
+/-2% ms. (0 to 100% resistive load)
16611 - 2
UPS
1.08
UPS System (cont’d)
Static inverters:
Net system power output rating, nominal
Nominal output voltage
Output voltage regulation
* balanced load
* unbalanced load (3-phase output system
only)
Phase displacement (for 3-phase output
system only)
Output voltage wave form
Frequency stability
Dynamic output voltage tolerance sudden
full load application or removal
Over-load rating
Automatic static transfer switch:
Transfer time
Total sensing and transfer/ re-transfer time
Retransfer mode
Retransfer delay
Transfer point
Retransfer point
Transfer inhibit point
1.
2.
3.
4.
As shown on drawings in KVA with load power
factor ranging 0.7-lag to 0.9-lead.
380/220 V a.c., 50 Hz, 3 phase, 4 wire/ 1 phase
– 2 wire, adjustable +/-5% of nominal (as
applicable)
+/-2% (0-100% load)
+/-10% at (100% unbalance)
120 deg. (+/- deg.) at 100% load unbalance
5% max. total harmonic
3% max. single harmonic
Normally synchronized to input line frequency
over +/-2% adjustable range: free running at +/0.5% over full battery voltage variation load
and p.f range; slew rate not to exceed 0.1 Hz/
Sec.
+/- 10% max. recovering to within 1% in less
than 100 milliseconds
125% for 10 minutes
150% for 60 seconds
1000% for 5 cycles
105% continuous
150 micro – second (overlapping) maximum
2 milliseconds, maximum
Automatic/ inhibit (select – able)
2 – 32 sec. In auto-mode (selectable)
+/- 10% of nominal output voltage (adjustable)
+/- 5% of nominal output voltage (adjustable)
+/- 20% of nominal output voltage (adjustable)
Components and Accessories
Materials and parts: electronic devices are to be solid state, hermetically sealed. Indicator
lights are to be twin LED type, those denoting blown fuse conditions are to be seen by operator
without removing panels or opening cabinet doors. Power connections and remote alarm and
control wiring are to be accessible at terminal boards, power semi-conductors are to be fused
metal surfaces including copper and aluminum heat sinks and busbars are to treated with
permanent protective coating electromechanical power devices and relays are to be vacuum
impregnated, insulated for maximum operating voltage conditions, and enclosed I dust-tight
enclosures. Cables are to be fire resistant high temperature grade.
Housing: equipment is to be housed in a free-standing, well ventilated, totally enclosed
modular assemble with front accessible lockable doors, giving easy access for maintenance,
inspection and adjustments, and with provisions for handling and lifting during and after
installation. Enclosures are to be suitable for industrial, tropical environments, protection IP 20
to IEC 144, of galvanized sheet steel construction treated against corrosion and with light gray
RAL 7032 baked paint or epoxy finish to approved standard.
Sub-assemblies and components are to be mounted on pull-out and/ or swing-out trays where
possible. Cables connecting to trays are to be sufficient long and flexible to allow easy access
to all components. Where it is not possible to mount components in pull-out trays, they are to
be easily accessible inside the enclosure.
Ventilation: for units rated 5 KVA, an integral, forced – air, cooling system is to be provided in
each UPS module to remove dissipated heat efficiency, and ensure components operate within
environment ratings. Air is to enter bottom of cabinet through replaceable filters, and exhaust
through the top. At least two fans are to be provided for ventilating each enclosure. No
degradation of performance is to occur in the event of a single fan failure temperature sensors,
mounted on semi-conductor heat sinks, are to initiate alarm if maximum working temperature
is exceeded.
16611 - 3
UPS
1.08
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
UPS System (cont’d)
Rectifier/ charger unit is to have mainline circuit breaker and two-winding dry-type, class H
insulated regulation transformer and is to be automatic with soft start-up (walk-in) feature,
using silicon controlled rectifiers (thyristors) with control logic circuitry to control firing angels to
thyristors to suit power surges, lighting transients, under-voltage and over-voltage conditions.
Output is to be passed through LC filters to d.c. buts. In addition to supplying power to inverter
load, rectifier/ charger is to be capable of charging battery from discharge condition to 95%
charge within ten times discharge period, and maintain full charge at floating voltage until next
operation. Charger current is to be voltage regulated and current limited. Where three-phase
supply is involved, rectifier is to be at least six-pulse type.
Inverter is to employ single-phase bridge circuit for single-phase output or single-phase units
connected in 3-phase bridges, using transistor or thyristor circuits, fourth-generation technology
(logic controlled pulse-width modulation), and complete with output transformer and filters.
Inverter start-up is to be automatic, to reach full voltage within milliseconds and deliver power
to the load within 2 seconds. Inverter is to start at any load including short-circuit.
Inverter oscillator is to operate and maintain output frequency of inverter within specified
tolerances, and be capable of synchronization and phase looking to normal power supply
frequency when inverter is phase-locked to normal power supply, and latter fails, oscillator is to
automatically revert to free running state (quartz oscillator) and maintain specified limits.
Automatic static transfer switch is to be continuously rated (100% FL), hybrid type (makebefore-break), solid state transfer device with logic thyristor assembly isolated or completely
with-drawable for maintenance, when signal to close switch is initiated, thyristors are to
instantaneously conduct power to prevent deviations and breaks in load voltage outside
specified tolerances.
Maintenance by-pass switching manual (make-before-break) by-pass switch is to allow load to
be transferred to by-pass source without interruption of output, and provide isolation of UPS
and static switch during maintenance. Test position is to permint testing of static switch while
load is being fed from bypass power circuit. Transfer inhibited warning circuit is to be provided
to give an alarm indication in case by-pass supply is beyond acceptable tolerances.
Protection: UPS modules are to have built-in or inherent electronic current-limiting protection
against permanent self damage effective down to short-circuits. Fast acting, current limiting
devices are to protect against failure of any solid state component. Internal failure in any UPS
module is to cause immediate isolation from input and output by operation of static interrupters
or causing shut down of faulty module. Protection is to be provided against, but is not limited to
the following:
Input over and under voltage and power line surges.
Output over voltage and voltage surges.
Sudden abnormal changes in output load conditions.
Short-circuits at output terminals.
Inverter and rectifier overcurrent.
Auxiliary control circuit overcurrent.
Battery: high rate discharge, heavy duty, industrial, high impact resistant, clear plastic encased,
sealed lead acid (gas recombination) type cells with automatically reclosing explosion proof
safety vents. Electrolyte specific gravity is not to exceed 1.25 when fully charged at 25 deg. C.
ampere-hour rating is to be sufficient for emergency period specified with all inverters
operating at full rated output, to a discharge limit of not less than 1.65 V per cell. Cells are to
be normally maintained at 2.25 V per cell. Guaranteed life is not to be less than 10 years, with
a capacity drop down to not less than 80% under normal expected service.
Battery racks: steel construction, with plastic insulating rails at points of contact with battery
cases. Racks are to be painted with electrolyte resistant paint, are to be of appropriate design
for space in which installed, and directly accessible for maintenance. Cables are to be rubber
insulated electrolyte resistant type.
Mimic panel: UPS assembly is to include a mimic diagram with digital and LED displays,
indicating instruments and control devices, in true relative positions.
Local panel instruments are to include at least the following:
Inverter input voltmeter, measuring d. c. bus volts.
Battery ammeter, zero center type, measuring charge/ discharge current.
A. C. voltmeter with selector switch to measure inverter output voltage, normal supply
voltage, normal supply voltage or system output.
UPS output ammeter and frequency meter.
16611 - 4
UPS
1.08
15.
16.
17.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
UPS System (cont’d)
Local panel indicators are to include at least the following:
System on battery supply.
Inverter phase locked to verify synchronization between inverter output and normal
a.c. supply input.
Static switch on normal a.c. supply (bypass mode).
Static switch inhibited.
Over-temperature, indicating excessive temperature in heat sinks for transformers,
rectifier/ charger and inverter (alarm to automatically transfer load to by-pass circuit).
Inverter output overload, indicating inverter output beyond specified rating.
Failure of any stage, d. c. bus earth fault, inverter output earth fault.
Local built-in controls are to include at least the following:
inverter on/ off.
Battery input circuit breaker.
Auto/ manual reset-test switch.
Manual reset switch.
Hybrid switch transfer test push-button.
Re-transfer auto/ inhibit selector switch to allow automatic re-transfer of load to inverter
after timed interval of normal operation and inhibit re-transfer of load to inverter until hybrid
switch in auto-mode.
Battery automatic/ equalize recharge timer, 0-30 hours adjustable, with automatic/
boots/ equalize switch (accessible to maintenance personnel only and to be used only with
manufacturer’s recommendation for type of battery specified).
Voltage and frequency adjustment controls with locking devices (accessible to
maintenance personnel only).
Indicator test/ reset switch.
Control power supply isolator (accessible to maintenance personnel only).
Alarm test accept reset.
Local built-in alarms causing horn to sound, with tripping command if required, are to included
at least the following:
Fan failure: alarm only.
Over temperature: alarm with automatic transfer of load to by-pass after a safe preset
period.
D. C. volts out of limits: alarm with indication.
Fuse failure: alarm.
Battery on load/ disconnected: alarm only.
Overheads: alarm only with a trip command if prolonged, for each rectifier/ inverter
unit.
Normal a.c. supply failure: alarm only.
Hybrid switch operation to by-pass mode: alarm only.
Low and high out voltage: alarm only.
Installation
Equipment bases: ensure that concrete bases and foundation provided for installation of
equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings and
equipment manufacturer’s drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and provisions for passage
of cables etc. are provided as required.
Built-in items: ensure that equipment supports, fixing and the like, and sleeves for passage of
feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundation, bases or building structure
are provided as and when required and that they are properly installed.
Tools: use only tools recommended by equipment manufacturers for installations, particularly
in making connections and adjustments.
Earthing: provide direct interference free earthing circuit in accordance with section – 5.
Supervision: carry out equipment installation under the direct supervision of a qualified
technician, licensed by and trained at the factory. Final adjustments and putting into
satisfactory operation are to be made by a specialist delegated by the factory.
16611 - 5
UPS
1.08
UPS System (cont’d)
Tests on Site
Power supply output disturbance: provide microprocessor based instruments, and monitor and
record power supply output disturbance of voltage and frequency. Instrument details are to
submit for approval.
Test periods are to be prolonged (over 24 hours) and as requested by the engineer, to verify
and obtain realistic voltage and frequency profile under any loading and switching conditions
within the criteria specified.
Data logging is to include height and low average voltage, sage, and surges, spikes, and spike
bursts drop-outs, high and low frequencies etc. with print-out and storage on cassette tape for
subsequent re-entry into instrument’s memory for display or print-out.
Tests are to include loads at various power factors from low to overload condition, and
measurements of temperature, heat losses, output voltage, wave shape, harmonic content and
frequency stability.
END OF SECTION
16611 - 6
UPS
SECTION 16623
KITCHEN EQUIPMENT WIRING
2.
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
Work Included
Kitchen equipment wiring
1.02
A
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Related Work
Section 11460 :
Section 16111 :
Section 16120 :
Section 16134 :
Section 16145 :
Section 16170 :
Unit Kitchen
Conduit
Wiring
Outlet Boxes
Receptacles
Low Voltage Disconnect Switches
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
Materials
A.
Wiring
1.
Refer to Section 16120.
2.
Where heating elements are involved in the equipment supplied, provide wire having
suitable temperature rating for service conditions.
B.
Outlet Boxes
1.
Refer to Section 16134.
2.
In making connections to equipment where moist conditions are encountered, provide
exterior type boxes, covers and fittings.
C.
Conduit
1.
Refer to Section 16111.
Provide flexible conduit connections to equipment that must be
removed for repair or maintenance.
D.
Plate Covers
1. Refer to Section 16147
2. Provide brushed stainless steel plates for receptacles and motor or circuit disconnects.
E.
Disconnect Switches
1.
Refer to section 16170
2.
Provide flush mounted disconnects for all permanently connected equipment.
3.
Provide brushed stainless steel cover plates for all disconnects.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
Coordination
A.
Location of connection points are to be considered as typical only. Determine exact connection
points from equipment supplier and/or revised layout.
B.
Confirm rating of each item of equipment with the equipment supplier before installing breakers
and wiring.
3.02
3.03
Installation
Food Service Equipment to be supplied and set in place by other trades, complete with all
motors, heating elements and automatic controls. Except where otherwise noted, motor
protection switches and control stations shall be supplied as part of the equipment. Provide and
install wiring and electrical connections to kitchen equipment. connect the panel or junction of
the prewired equipment.
Exhaust Hoods
Exhaust hoods to be supplied and set in place by other trades.
3.04
Emergency Lock Stop Push-Button
Arrange wiring of emergency lock stop push-button such that operation of switch disconnects all
essential power to the kitchen area.
3.05
Tests
Check correct operation of all components.
END OF SECTION
16623 - 1
Kitchen Equipment Wiring
SECTION 16721
FIRE ALARM/ LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
Section Includes
This specification provides the functional requirements for the installation, programming,
configuration, warranty and maintenance of a complete Addressable Intelligent Fire Alarm/Life Safety
System Network. The system shall include, but not be limited to:
A.
Fire Alarm Control Panel(s), and Network Node Panels.
B.
Emergency microphone set interfaced with public address rack cabinet with priority
of override all signal in case of fire.
C.
Firefighter’s Telephone Communications System/Subsystem
D.
Automatic and Manually activated Alarm Initiating and Monitoring Devices
E.
Notification Peripheral and Appliances
F.
Standby Power Supplies
G. Programming, Commissioning and Training of Operators, and
H.
Conduit, wire and accessories required to furnish a complete and Operational Life
Safety System.
1.02
Related Sections
Section 15000 - Mechanical
Section 16000 - Electrical
1.03
Alternates
Alternatives to any of the product or substitution of any work specified in this document with nonspecified product or services will be allowed only if the substitution is recognized by the various
listing agencies as compatible. Equipment by other manufacturers will be considered only if written
request accompanied by supporting documentation establishing equivalent levels of performance is
submitted to the Project Manager 10 working days prior to the date of bid opening. By submission of
equipment by an alternate manufacture for consideration, the submitter accedes that the final
decision of the Project Manager as to whether the alternate equipment is of equivalent performance
will be final and binding on all parties.
1.04
Equipment References
The equipment and installation shall comply with the current provisions of the following standards and
codes:
National Fire Protection Association Standards:
NFPA 70
National Electric Code
NFPA 72
National Fire Alarm Code
NFPA 90A
Air Conditioning Systems
NFPA 92A
Smoke-Control Systems
NFPA 92 B
Smoke Management Systems in Malls, Atria, and Large Areas
NFPA 101
Life Safety Code
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Standards
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for use in fire protective signaling systems shall list the system and all
components. The UL Label shall be considered as evidence of compliance with this requirement. The
equipment shall be listed by UL under the following standards as applicable:
UL 864/UOJZ, APOU
Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 1076/APOU
Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems.
UL 268
Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling
UL 268A
Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications Systems.
UL 217
Smoke Detectors Single Station.
UL 521
Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 228
Door Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 464
Audible Signaling Appliances.
UL 1638
Visual Signaling Appliances.
UL 38
Manually Activated Signaling Boxes.
UL 346
Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 1971
Visual Signaling Appliances.
UL 1481
Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 1711
Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
16721-1
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System
1.04
Equipment References (cont’d)
Any equipment not bearing a UL Label shall be removed and replaced with UL labeled equipment at
the contractors’ expense.
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
In the case of any discrepancy between these specifications, the project drawings, and any applicable
local codes, the installed Fire Alarm / Life Safety System shall comply with the most stringent
requirement.
1.05
Qualifications of the Fire Alarm Contractor
The Fire Alarm Contractor shall be an experienced firm regularly engaged in the layout and the
installation of automatic computer-based Fire Alarm Systems. Prior to the bid date, the contractor
must be able to show evidence that he has successfully completed projects of similar size and
scope in the last 12 months.
1.06
System Overview and Description
The Fire Alarm/Life Safety System supplied under this specification shall be a microprocessorbased direct wired peer-to-peer networked system. The system shall utilize independently
addressed, microprocessor-based smoke detectors, heat detectors, and modules, as described in
this specification.
All Fire Alarm/Life Safety equipment shall be arranged and programmed to provide an integrated
system for the early detection of fire, the notification of building occupants, the automatic
summoning of the local Fire Department, the override of the HVAC system operation, and the
activation of other auxiliary systems to inhibit the spread of smoke and fire and to facilitate the safe
evacuation of building occupants
The fire alarm equipment shall be installed in the locations shown on the project drawings.
The fire alarm system shall be fully supervised for the detection and reporting of the derangement
of any component or circuit on the system. Signaling Line Circuits shall provide the level of
performance designated as Style 7 by UL and the NFPA. Notification circuits shall provide the level
of performance designated as Style Y by UL and the NFPA.
The fire alarm system shall be microprocessor driven with stored program controllers. Each panel
(node) on the network shall use a multiple microprocessor design so that the failure of single
microprocessor will not result in a local failure. Fire alarm systems that utilize only one
microprocessor for system (node) and SLC control will not be accepted.
The fire alarm system shall operate from direct current having a nominal potential of 24 volts. The
direct current shall be provided by a solid-state power supply connected to the building electrical
system by a dedicated branch circuit in strict compliance with Articles 725 and 760 of the NEC, and
these specifications.
A standby power supply shall automatically supply electrical energy to the system whenever the
primary power supply fails to provide the minimum voltage required for proper system operation.
The standby power supply shall be an electrical battery with capacity to operate the system under
maximum supervisory load for 24 Hours in Standby and then be capable of operating the system for
5 Minutes in the alarm mode at 100% load. The fire alarm system shall include a charging circuit to
automatically maintain the electrical charge of the battery. The fire alarm system shall include the
alarm initiating and
notification appliances and devices shown on the project drawings.
The Fire Alarm/Life Safety System shall be designed to allow the Fire Alarm Contractor to phase-in
the commissioning of the installed system to coincide with the construction schedule for the project.
When phased-in commissioning of a system is required, each phase shall be treated as a separate
project, and the Fire Alarm Contractor shall use the system program functionality to print out and
fully document the progress of each phase. No Fire Alarm or Life Safety functions shall be
compromised as the system is phased into service.
All Control Panel Assemblies and the connected Automatic and Manual Alarm and Notification
Appliances shall be designed and manufactured by the same company, shall be tested and crosslisted as compatible (to category UOJZ) to ensure that a fully functioning Life Safety System is
designed and provided.
1.07
Submittals
No equipment shall be purchased by the contractor for the Fire Alarm / Life Safety System specified
herein until the Professional Project Manager has approved the Project Submittals in their entirety
and has returned them to the contractor. It is the responsibility of the contractor to meet the entire
intent and functional performance detailed in these specifications. Approved submittals shall only
allow the contractor to proceed with the installation and shall not be construed to mean that the
contractor has satisfied the requirements of these specifications.
16721-2
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System
1.07.1
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
Project Submittal
The contractor shall submit (3) complete sets of Project Submittal documentation in order to
be considered for this project. This Project Submittal documentation shall include:
A)
Product Data: Complete data sheets bearing the printed logo or trademark of the Fire
Alarm Control Network manufacturer for the following pieces of equipment:
System Control Panel(s)
System Power Supply(s)
Standby Power Supply(s)
Each type of intelligent automatic Smoke and Heat Detector to be
connected to the Fire Alarm Control Panel Network.
Addressable Manual Alarm Initiating Stations
Synchronized Audible/Visual Notification Appliances
Fire Suppression Systems Monitoring Circuits and Devices
Graphic Annunciation Work Station
Remote or Central Station Reporting Circuits
Door Holders
Speakers
Firefighter’s Telephones
Audio amplifiers
Any other items of Fire Alarm Equipment required by the Project
Drawings.
Indicated in the documentation will be the type, size, rating, style, catalog number, and
manufacturer’s name for all items proposed to meet the Fire Alarm/Life Safety System
performance detailed in this specifications. The proposed equipment shall be subject to the
approval of the Project Manager and no equipment shall be ordered or installed on the
premises without that approval. All Fire Alarm Equipment will be from the same
manufacturer, and shall be UL Listed under UOJZ.
All Fire Alarm Equipment shall be the products of a single manufacturer. System appliances
and devices not manufactured by the control panel manufacturer shall be products regularly
distributed by the control panel manufacturer and cross-listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories
for compatibility with the system control panel.
The Contractor shall provide the following with the submittal:
A)
Hourly, Non-Standard, Holiday, and Overtime Service Rates.
B)
Semi-Annual inspection rates.
These services are to be performed by factory trained and certified personnel, for this installed
Life Safety System. These hourly service rates shall be guaranteed for a three year period
unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall also provide Annual Inspection Rates for
System Testing in compliance with NFPA 72 requirements for three years of system operation.
Proof of the level of factory training and authorization of the servicing CONTRACTOR shall be
included in the submittal.
C)
Evidence of listing by Underwriters’ Laboratories for all proposed equipment for use as Fire
Alarm equipment. (Ref.: Underwriters’ Laboratories, Section UOJZ).
D)
A Single Line System Block Diagram and written System Operational Overview.
E)
Complete calculations showing the electrical load on the following system components:
Each system Power Supply
Each standby Power Supply (batteries)
Each Notification Appliance Circuit.
Each auxiliary control circuit that draws power from any system power supply.
F)
Field Connection Drawings: A complete set of drawings, one for each
Fire Alarm Control Panel module which has any external (field) wiring connected
to it, and one for each system detector, module or signaling appliance, shall be
supplied. The Field Connection Drawings shall be provided in paper (hard-copy)
format.
G)
A copy of the Contractors Training Certification, issued by the manufacturer of the Fire Alarm
Control Equipment, shall be provided. These qualification credentials shall not be more than
two years old, to ensure up-to-date product and application knowledge on the part of the
installing CONTRACTOR.
H)
Warranty Statement from the manufacturer shall be provided as part of the submittal package.
This warranty statement will state the period of warranty for all of the products proposed for the
project, and shall include the name and address of the authorized manufacturers’ agent who
will honor any and all warranty claims.
16721-3
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System
I)
Samples: Two samples of each field-connected device (smoke
detectors, intelligent modules, horn, strobes, and/or speakers) shall be
provided with the submittal package to be given to the Project Manager and
the Contractors’ Representative for their familiarization.
1.07.1
Project Submittal (cont’d)
J)
Written Certification by the Fire Alarm Contractor that no power supply or circuit in the system
has an electrical load greater than 80% of its rated capacity.
K)
A scaled plan of each building showing the placement of each individual item of fire alarm
equipment as well as raceway size and routing, junction boxes, and conductor size, quantity,
and color in each raceway.
L)
Proof shall be furnished that the manufacturer of the Fire Alarm System Components is
certified as an ISO 9001 company in each of the following disciplines:
· Design Engineering
· Manufacturing
· Technical Support
· Documentation
· Training
· Marketing
In lieu of such proof, the manufacturer must be able to show that the method that they employ
in those disciplines is equivalent to ISO 9001 requirements.
1.08
A)
B)
Warranty and Maintenance
The Manufacturer shall supply a 3-year warranty from date of manufacture for all Control System
and Field Devices and appliances. The contractor shall warrant the installed fire alarm system to be
free from any defects of material and installation for a period of 2 years from acceptance by the
professional engineer. Any deficiencies shall be immediately corrected at no additional cost to the
owner. The contractor shall maintain a service organization with adequate spare parts stock within
150 miles of the installation. Any defects that render the system inoperative shall be repaired within
24 hours of the owner notifying the contractor. Other defects shall be repaired within 48 hours of the
owner notifying the contractor.
The Factory Trained and Authorized Contractor who Designed and Installed this system shall
provide a separate maintenance contract for a period of (2) Years from the date of system Final
Handing over. As part of the systems maintenance, the installing CONTRACTOR will provide
printed out reports which detail the sensitivity of each smoke detector installed in the system, and
the date of the report.
The Fire Alarm/Life Safety System supplied shall include a store of spare system sub-assemblies
and field devices for use as emergency service stock. As a minimum, the spares stock shall include
2% of each different type of field connected device and 1 each (minimum) of each internal system
component assembly.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
This Fire Alarm/Life Safety System Specification must be conformed to in its entirety to ensure that
the installed and programmed Life Safety System will function as designed, and will accommodate
the future requirements and operations required by the building owner. All specified operational
features will be met without exception.
General Equipment and Material Requirements
All equipment furnished for this project shall be new and unused. All components and systems shall
be designed for uninterrupted duty at 100% load. All equipment, materials, accessories, devices,
and other facilities covered by this specification or noted on contract drawings and installation
specifications shall be the best suited for the intended use and shall be provided by a single
manufacturer.
The manufacturer’s representative and a Record of Completion presented upon completion shall
verify system installation and operations. The manufacturer’s representative shall be responsible
for an on-site demonstration of the operation of the system and initial staff training as defined by
this specification.
The system shall include a manner to display addressable field device topology.
In addition, “As-Built” riser and wiring diagrams reflecting all T-Taps, each programmed device
characteristic including detector type, base type, serial number, sensitivity setting and wire
configurations will be provided to the Project Manager, based on the information gathered during
the verification process described above.
It shall be possible for authorized service personnel to change the personality/function of the
connected intelligent devices to meet changes in building layout or environment.
16721-4
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System
2.01
Manufacturers
Equipment and materials shall be provided by EST- Regional Office/Agent who will ensure proper
Specification Adherence, final connection, test, turnover, warranty compliance, and service.
Service availability: The supplier shall have sufficient stock on hand and have a fully equipped
service organization capable of guaranteeing response time within 8 hours, 24 hours a day, 7 days a
week to service the system.
The Regional Office/Agent who distributes and does the application engineering and programming
of the Fire Alarm / Life Safety Equipment specified herein shall provide a copy of their certificate of
successful completion of an authorized Training Course given by the Manufacturer of the Fire Alarm
/ Life Safety Equipment.
The manufacturer of the Fire Alarm system components shall conform to the International
Standards Organization (ISO) standards, as listed below, and provide suitable proof of ISO
certification to these standards:
ISO-9000
ISO-9001, in the disciplines of:
Design Engineering
Manufacturing
Technical Support
Documentation
Training
Marketing
Equipment by other manufacturers will be considered only if a written request accompanied by
supporting documentation establishing equivalent levels of performance is submitted to the Project
Manager. By submitting of equipment by an alternate manufacturer for consideration, the submitter
accedes that the final decision of the Project Manager, as to whether the alternate equipment is of
equivalent performance, will be final and binding on all parties.
2.02
System Overview
The Fire Alarm/Life Safety System shall be a Multi-Processor Based Network System designed
specifically for Fire, Audio Evacuation and Security applications. The Life Safety System shall be
UL listed under Standards 864 (Control Units for Fire-Protective Signaling Systems) under
categories UOJZ and APOU. The specified modules shall also be listed under UL 1076 (Proprietary
Burglar Alarm Units and Systems) under category APOU.
The Life Safety System shall include all required hardware and system programming to provide a
complete and operational system, capable of providing the protected premises with the following
functions and operations:
A)
Audio Paging and Emergency Evacuation subsystem with fully digitized audio. A minimum of
2 minutes (expandable to 32 minutes) of pre-recorded audio is transmittable over one of 8
audio channels over a single pair of wires. All 8 channels shall be capable of simultaneous
operation with different audio content.
B)
All System operational software is to be stored in non-volatile memory. Systems that utilize
dynamic RAM or static RAM or battery backed up RAM for program storage are considered
unreliable and will not be accepted.
C)
Control Panel disassembly, and replacement of electronic components of any kind will not be
required in order to upgrade the operations of the installed system to conform to future
application code and operating system changes.
D)
System response to any alarm condition must occur within 3 seconds, regardless of the size
and the complexity of the installed system.
E)
One amplifier shall be supplied per speaker circuit to enhance system survivability in an
Emergency Situation.
F)
All initial system programming, as well as all any changes made to the system programming
during the start-up and system acceptance phase, shall be made electronically, and will not
require the use of diode matrices or other hardware destructive means. All changes shall be
fully documented as part of the as-built documentation package. Systems which store initial
programming or field programming changes in battery backed memory will not be accepted as an
equal.
G)
The system shall allow the testing of the entire installed system (Walk Test) dependent only
on the needs of the testing agency, and of the occupancy requirements of the building. The
testing of the installed system will not be defined or limited by the physical layout of the Fire
Alarm System, or its application to the protected premises.
16721-5
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System
H)
I)
2.02
The Fire Alarm/Life Safety System shall utilize Surface Mount Technology in its internal
elements to increase reliability of each system component, and the system as a whole.
Ground Faults shall be localized to the network node
System Overview (cont’d)
J)
If ground faults occur on the field wiring of the system, then the
electrical location of those field wiring faults shall be identified and annunciated
to the network node, electronic loop controller, or the field device wiring where
the fault has occurred.
K)
All of the operational hardware needed to allow the system to function, as a network shall be
included with the base Fire Alarm System. The addition of a communications interface shall
be all that is required for the system to communicate with other panels and function as a true
peer-to-peer network.
L)
The Control of any or all of the System Common Control Functions shall be automatically
routed, through the system operational program, to any node of the installed system as an
automatic function of the time of day and/or date.
Functional Operation of the Fire Alarm/ Life Safety System – Alarm Detection
When a fire alarm condition is detected by one of the system initiating devices, the following
functions shall immediately occur:
A)
The System alarm indicator shall flash continuously.
B)
A local sounding device in the panel shall be activated.
C)
The control panel display shall indicate all pertinent information associated with the alarm and
its location in the alarm message queue.
D)
The display shall always show the first and most recent alarm events.
E)
The appropriate status change message shall be displayed on all printers so programmed.
F)
All automatic programs assigned to the alarm point shall be executed and the associated
notification appliance circuits and control relays addressed and activated.
System Trouble Detection
When a trouble condition is detected by one of the system initiating devices, the following functions
shall immediately occur:
A)
The System Trouble indicator shall flash.
B)
A local sounding device in the panel shall be activated.
C)
The control panel display shall indicate all pertinent information associated with the trouble
condition and its location.
D)
Unacknowledged alarm messages shall have priority over trouble messages, and if such an
alarm must also be displayed, the trouble message will not be displayed until the operator has
acknowledged all alarm messages.
E)
The appropriate trouble message shall be displayed on all printers so programmed.
Short Circuit Fault Isolation
The system shall contain a method of isolating wire-to-wire short circuits on an SLC loop in order to
limit the number of detectors or elements that are incapacitated by the short circuit fault. If a wire-towire short occurs, the system shall automatically disconnect a downstream segment of the SLC that
contains the short circuit fault. When the short is corrected, the isolated section of the SLC loop
shall automatically be reconnected to the SLC and full communication between the control panel
and all affected devices restored.
Control Switch & Led Indicator Operation
The system control panel shall provide at least the following switches for system control:
Acknowledge Switch
Activation of the control panel Acknowledge switch in response to a single new trouble or
alarm condition shall silence the panel sounding device and change the System Alarm or
Trouble LEDs from flashing to steady-ON. If additional new alarm or trouble conditions exist
in the system, activation of this switch shall scroll the display to any queued subsequent
alarm or trouble conditions that exist, and will not silence the local audible device or change
the LEDs to steady until all queued conditions have been so acknowledged. New alarm
conditions shall always be displayed before new trouble conditions. Activation of the
Acknowledge switch shall also cause a corresponding message to be displayed on System
displays and printers, as programmed. Occurrence of a new alarm or trouble condition shall
16721-6
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System
cause the panel to resound and the sequence described in “System Alarm Detection” or
“System Trouble Detection” of these specifications shall be repeated.
2.02
System Overview (cont’d)
Signal Silence Switch
Activation of the Signal Silence Switch shall cause all appropriate notification appliance
circuits and relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm condition. The selection
of notification appliance circuits silenced by this switch shall be fully programmable from the
system control panel. The system shall also include a means through system programming
to allow for signal silence inhibit time. Activating the Signal Silence Switch a second time
will resound all silenced notification appliance circuits.
System Reset Switch
Activation of the System Reset Switch shall cause all initiating devices, notification
appliance circuits, and associated output devices to return to the normal condition. If alarm
conditions exist in the system after the System Reset Switch activation, the system shall
then repeat the alarm sequence.
Lamp Test Function
Activation of the Lamp Test function shall turn on all LED indicators, system graphic
display, and then return all indicators to the previous condition.
Service/ Testing Aids
Automatic Detector Test
The system shall include a Resident Automatic Detector Sensitivity Test, which satisfies the
NFPA and UL requirements for detector sensitivity test. No additional calibrated tests shall
be required if the system indicates the smoke detectors are with in the normal sensitivity
range.
Watch-Dog Circuits
The system shall include multiple, independent "Watch-Dog" circuits to detect and report
failure of any microprocessor circuit, memory, or software. The CPU Fail LED shall light
when a failure is detected.
Field Programming
The system shall be totally programmable, configurable and expandable via programming.
Systems which require PROM programmers, or replacement of software media to effect
permanent applications program changes will not be accepted. All programs shall be stored
in non-volatile memory. The applications programming function shall be protected by a
password, which shall be automatically entered when applications programming changes
are downloaded.
·
·
·
2.02.A
Panel Mounted System Components
2.02.A.1
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System Operators’ Interface
The System Display
The graphical display shall provide the means to inform the System Operator with detailed
information about the off-normal status of the installed Fire Alarm/Life Safety System. The
graphical display shall automatically respond to the status of the system, and shall display that
status in 168-character front panel display.
Automatic Functions
The following status functions shall be annunciated by the Graphical Display:
When the Fire Alarm / Life Safety System is in the “Normal” Mode, the panel displays:
The current Date and Time.
A Custom System Title (minimum 2 lines X 21 characters).
A summary total of system events.
With the Fire Alarm Life Safety System in the “Alarm” Mode, the display shall automatically
reconfigure into four logical windows.
1)
Systems Status Window
16721-7
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System
2)
2.02.A.1
3)
4)
The DISPLAY shall show the system time and the number of active points and disabled
points in the system in this section of the Display.
Current Event Window
The DISPLAY shall show the first active event of the highest priority in reverse text to
highlight the condition to the Emergency Operator. The top line of the reversed text shall
show the sequence number in which the displayed event was received, as well as its event
type. The second and third lines of reversed text shall display an identification message
related to the displayed event.
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System Operators’ Interface (cont’d)
Last Event Window
The DISPLAY shall show the most recent, highest priority event received by the system.
Type Status Window
The DISPLAY shall show the total number of active events in the system, by event type.
There shall be four different System Event Types which shall be displayed, “Alarm Events”,
“Supervisory Events”, “Active Trouble Events”, and “Active Monitor Events”.
2.02.A.2
System Printers
The system shall include printers in locations as shown on the plans. The serial cable
connecting the any Fire Alarm Control Panel Node to the Printer shall be supervised. It
shall be possible to define which system event types, (alarm, supervisory, trouble, monitor,
and/or service groups),are sent to each of the of the system printer(s).
The printer shall be powered from single phase power outlet and shall include a UPS for
emergency operation.
2.02.A.3
Life Safety System Protected Premises Circuit Interface
An Electronic Loop Controller shall be provided in each Fire Alarm Control Panel (where
needed), to interface between the panel and the Analytical Microprocessor-based Detectors and
modules.
The communications format used by this controller shall be 100% digital. Communications
between the Fire Alarm Control Panel and the Analytical Microprocessor-based Detectors and
modules shall incorporate both BROADCAST POLLING and DIRECT ADDRESS SEARCH
(serial polling communication) methods for increased integrity and decreased system response
time.
The Electronic Loop Controller shall communicate to the connected detectors and modules
utilising any wiring material or method complying with Chapter 3 of the National Electrical Code
(ANSI/NFPA 70-1996). The Electronic Loop Controller will not require special cables or home run
connections to operate. “T” Tapping and parallel wiring shall be permitted on those Signalling
Line Circuits designated as Style 4.
It shall be possible to connect the electronic loop controller to the Analytical Microprocessorbased Detectors and modules as Class A (Style 6 or Style 7) or Class B (Style 4) circuits without
the use of special shielding, twisted wire, or conduits. It must be possible to wire branch circuits
(T-Taps) from Class B Circuits (Style 4). Each Electronic Protection Loop shall be configurable
to operate as a Style 7 loop without the need for additional hardware modules.
The electronic controller, through the system program, shall provide the ability to set the
sensitivity and alarm verification time of each of the individual Analytical Microprocessorbased Detectors on the circuit. It shall be possible to automatically set the sensitivity of each of
the individual intelligent detector for day and night periods.
All system programming and history shall be permanently stored in non-volatile memory to
ensure that no programming or history is lost. Systems which store initial programming or field
programming changes in battery backed memory will not be accepted.
The Electronic Loop Controller shall be capable of setting the address of all Analytical
Microprocessor-based Detectors and modules connected to it electronically, without the need to
set switches at any of the individual devices.
The Electronic Loop Controller shall provide a minimum of 6 levels of supervision for each
smoke detector on the circuit:
· Device Location
· Unexpected Device Add/Delete
· Missing Device Address
· Changes in the Physical Wiring of the Circuit
· Changes in Device Personalities
· Device Maintenance Alert
The Electronic Loop Controller shall detect the electrical location of each connected detector and
module. The location and type of each connected device shall be mapped and stored in memory
in the loop controller. It shall be possible to access and display this map at any time.
16721-8
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System
It shall be possible to obtain a mapping report of all devices connected to the Electronic Loop
Controller for confirmation of “as-built” wiring. The mapping report shall show physical wiring of
all connected devices, including T-Taps, device types, and the panel addresses of devices on the
circuit. The Electronic Loop Controller shall be capable of reporting any additional device
addresses, which may have been added to the circuit, and/or changes that may have been made
to the wiring in the data circuit. A specific trouble shall be reported for any and all off-normal nonalarm condition.
The Electronic Loop Controller shall notify the System Operator when any connected smoke
detector reports a “Routine Maintenance Required” signal to the system.
2.02.A.3
Life Safety System Protected Premises Circuit Interface (cont’d)
If an Electronic Loop Controller should fail to communicate with field devices, the circuit shall
automatically switch into the stand alone alarm mode. In the stand-alone alarm mode, the circuit
shall be capable of producing a loop alarm if any of the connected alarm type intelligent devices
go into alarm.
To enhance the survivability of the entire installed Fire Alarm / Life Safety System, all
Electronic Loop controllers shall be located no more than 1 floor away from the area which
they are applied to protect.
A)
Hard Wired NAC Circuits
Provide where required supervised hard-wired Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) for the control
of 24Vdc signaling appliances. Each NAC shall operate as a Class B (Style Y) circuit, and shall be
capable of controlling up to 3.5 amps of signaling power.
Provide where required supervised hard-wired Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) for the control
of 70.7Vrms Audio Signaling Appliances. Each NAC shall operate as a Class B (Style Y) circuit,
and shall control up to 30 Watts of signaling power.
Provide where required supervised hard-wired Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) for the control
of 25Vrms Audio Signaling Appliances. Each NAC shall operate as a Class B (Style Y), and shall
control up to 50 Watts of power to the circuit.
NACs shall be power limited to 3.5A at 24Vdc and 4.1A at 20.4Vdc to support higher current
demand by visible appliances at lower battery voltages.
B)
Hard Wired (2-Wire) Smoke Detector Circuits
Provide where required supervised, hard-wired, two wire initiating device circuits (IDC) capable of
supporting up to 50 ionization-type or 30 photoelectric smoke detectors. It shall be possible to
configure IDCs for alarm verification with programmable verification times within UL guidelines.
C)
Hard Wired Initiating Device Circuits
Provide where required supervised hard-wired initiating device circuits. It shall be possible to
configure IDCs for alarm, supervisory, or monitor operation.
D)
Life Safety System Programmable Operations
System Message Processing and Display Operations:
The routing of all network annunciation and control parameters shall be configurable to any or all
nodes in the network manually, or automatically as a function of the time of day or date.
All of the system Printer ports can be configured to display any combination or all of the following
functions:
Alarm
Supervisory
Trouble
Monitor
Service Group
Each Display located anywhere in the system shall be configurable to show the status of any
combination or all of the following functions pertaining to any point anywhere in the entire network
system:
Alarm
Supervisory
Trouble
Monitor
The system shall provide the capability to label each point in the system with a 256 character of
custom message. The first 42 characters of this custom message shall be directed to the system
DISPLAY(s), while the entire message shall be directed to the system printer(s).
The system shall have the capability to provide up to 128 logical “Counting AND” Groups. Each
group shall have a programmable ‘activation’ number. Whenever the number of active devices in
an AND Group reaches the activation number, the AND Groups’ rules will execute. It shall be
possible to ‘overlap’ AND groups by having devices appear in more than one AND group.
The system shall provide a means to monitor the well being of any or all of the occupants of the
protected premises by means of a “Check-In Group” feature. The Check-In Group shall display an
emergency alarm whenever any member of a check-in group fails to check-in during the
programmable check-in period. Subsequent check-in activations during the check-in period or
16721-9
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System
activations outside of the check-in period shall also activate an emergency response. It shall be
possible to have a maximum of 128 check-in groups. All event messages for the Check-In feature
shall be able to be directed to any system monitor or printer.
The system shall have the ability to define a minimum of 64 Guard Patrols, each with up to 10
different tours. For each tour, it shall be possible to program a minimum-maximum time period
between patrol stations. Each guard patrol can have up to 50 stations. Guard patrol can be started
from the control panel or by operation of the first station in a tour. Guard patrol delinquencies occur
when a guard is early to a station, late to a station and out of sequence. Delinquencies shall display
at the control panel, perform programmable system responses, and may be directed to any printer.
2.02.A.3
Life Safety System Protected Premises Circuit Interface (cont’d)
The system shall have the ability to define a minimum of 128 “Matrix Groups” with up to 250 points
in each group. For each matrix, it shall be possible to define a ‘radius’ and an ‘activation’ number.
The radius number defines the proximity between detector locations. When two detectors activate
at or within the value of the ‘radius’ or whenever the number of active devices reaches the
activation number the Matrix Group activates. It shall be possible to ‘overlap’ Matrix groups by
having devices appear in more than one group.
The system shall have the ability to define up to 100 Service Groups. Service groups can consist of
any addressable field device will not be defined or limited by the physical layout of the Fire Alarm
System, or its application to the protected premises. The system shall include the ability to define an
alternate set of device commands which may be used in combination with the system test command
and service groups for the testing of the connected Intelligent Smoke Detectors.
This function shall disable the normal alarm command for each of the members of the group, so
that the testing process will not result in an activation of the building evacuation signals, auxiliary
relays or central station connections.
The system shall include Time Control functions which will have the ability to control any system
output or function, or initiate any system operational sequence as a function of the Month, Day of
Week, Date, Hour, Minute, or Holiday.
The system shall include up to 600 software defined Logical Zone Groups which may group any
input from any Initiating Device Circuit, in order to control a system output or function, or initiate any
system operational sequence. A device or IDC may be a member of one Logical Zone Group.
Each of these zones shall have an associated message of up to 555 Characters, which will be
treated by the system as any other system point message.
The system shall provide the ability to download data from the intelligent systems Detectors to a
P.C. while the system is on-line and operational in the protected premises. The downloaded data
may then be analyzed in a diagnostic program supplied by the system manufacturer.
2.02.A.4
Fire Fighters’ Telephone System
A)
General
Emergency Microphone set interfaced with public address system having the priority to override all
signals incase of fire.
B)
Fire Fighters’ Telephone System
The Fire Alarm/Life Safety System shall provide a fully integrated Fire Fighters’ Emergency
Telephone and Communications System. A Master Telephone handset shall be provided which will
provide a totally independent 2-way communication between the Fire Alarm Control Panel and any
of the Fire Fighters’ Telephone Stations or jack Telephones located as indicated on the plans for the
building.
The Fire Alarm/Life Safety System shall include an alpha-numeric user display and controls for the
Fire Fighters’ Telephone system. Any time a portable Fire Fighters Telephone is plugged in to a wall
jack, or a permanently mounted Fire Fighters Telephone is picked up off hook, a call-in signal is
generated at the control panel, and the location of the remote call-in is shown on the alpha-numeric
display.
To enhance the safety and effectiveness of the emergency response team, the Fire Fighters phone
system shall be capable of connecting to, and communicating with, a remote phone call-in in less
than 1 second, and shall provide clear feedback to the Emergency Operator that the selection of the
phone has occurred. The master handset will not require the use of a “push to talk” button in order
to operate.
The call-in signal can be selected for communications by the fire fighter with the depression of a
single button. All subsequent telephone call in signals shall be graphically displayed in full text. The
system shall report all call-in signals, all connected phone(s), as well as the total number of each,
and their exact location in the premises through the alpha-numeric display to the fire fighter
operating the system.
The system shall be configured so that page messages may be issued from any firefighter’s
telephone connected to the system, as directed by the emergency operator.
16721-10
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System
Trouble conditions within the Fire Fighters’ Telephone will be annunciated on the alpha-numeric
display.
2.03
Field Mounted System Components
2.03.A Analytical Microprocessor-based Detectors - General Operation
The System shall use Analytical Microprocessor-based Detectors that are capable of full digital
communications with the Fire Alarm/Life Safety System using both broadcast and polling
communications protocols. Each detector shall be capable of performing independent advanced
fire detection algorithms. The fire detection algorithm shall measure sensor signal dimensions, time
patterns and combines different fire parameters to increase reliability and distinguish real fire
conditions from unwanted nuisance alarms caused by environmental events. Signal patterns that
are not typical of fires shall be eliminated by digital filters and will not cause a system alarm
condition. Devices not capable of combining different fire parameters or employing digital filters will
not be acceptable.
Each smoke detector shall have an integral microprocessor capable of making alarm decisions
based on fire parameter information stored in the detectors’ memory. Detectors not capable of
making independent alarm decisions will not be acceptable. Maximum total loop response time for
detectors changing state (alarm or trouble) shall be 0.5 seconds.
Each smoke detector shall have a separate means of locally displaying system communication and
detector alarm status. A green indicator shall flash to confirm communication with the system
through the electronic loop controller. A red indicator shall flash to indicate that the detector is in
alarm. If communications between the detector and the electronic loop controller is lost, both LED’s
will illuminate steady to indicate an alarm in the “standalone mode”. Both indicators shall be visible
through a full 360 degree viewing angle.
Each smoke detector shall be capable of identifying diagnostic codes to be used for system
maintenance. All diagnostic codes shall be stored in the detector. Each smoke detector shall be
capable of transmitting pre-alarm, alarm, and maintenance signals to the Fire Alarm Control Panel
via the Electronic Loop Controller. Each smoke detector may be individually programmed to
operate at any one of five (5) sensitivity settings.
Each smoke detector microprocessor shall contain an environmental compensation algorithm,
which identifies and sets ambient “Environmental Thresholds” continually and periodically. In this
manner, the environmental impact of temperature, humidity, environmental contaminates as well as
detector aging shall be automatically monitored. This process shall employ digital compensation
techniques to adapt the detector to both long term and short term changes in the environment in
which they are installed. The microprocessor shall monitor this environmental compensation value
and alert the system operator when the detector approaches 80% and 100% of the allowable
environmental compensation value. Differential sensing algorithms shall maintain a constant
differential between selected detector sensitivity and the derived base line sensitivity that the
detector has sensed in its environment. The base line sensitivity information shall be automatically
and periodically updated and permanently stored in the detector.
The Analytical Microprocessor-based Detectors together with the Electronic Loop Controller shall
provide increased system reliability and inherent survivability through intelligent standalone
conventional alarm operation. The detectors shall automatically change to standalone conventional
device operation in the event of an electronic loop controller communications failure. In the
standalone conventional detector mode, the micro-processor-based detector shall continue to
operate using sensitivity and environmental compensation information stored in its microprocessor
at the time of the communications failure. The electronic loop controller shall continue to monitor
the communications loop and activate a loop alarm if any of the connected analytical
microprocessor based detectors reach their stored alarm sensitivity threshold.
Each detector shall be capable of automatic electronic addressing and/or custom addressing without
the use of DIP or rotary switches, and shall mount on a common base to allow the simple
replacement of one detector type with another detector type. The addressing of the detectors will
not depend on the electrical position of the detector on the circuit.
The Analytical Microprocessor-based devices shall be able to report the following information on a per
addressable device basis:
16721-11
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Device Serial Number
Device Address
Device Type and Personality Code
Current Detector Sensitivity Values
Extent of Detector Environmental Compensation.
Specific trouble codes to diagnose device / wiring faults.
Date of Manufacture of the Device.
Cumulative Hours in Service for the Device.
Cumulative Number of Alarms and Troubles.
Date of Last Alarm.
Date of Last Maintenance for the Device.
Job Number.
2.03.A.1 Analytical Microprocessor-Based Detectors-Fixed Temperature Heat Detector
The intelligent heat detector shall have a solid-state heat sensor, and shall transmit an alarm at a
fixed temperature of 135° F (57°C). The detector shall continually monitor the temperature of the
air in its surroundings to minimize thermal lag to the time required to process an alarm. The integral
microprocessor shall determine if an alarm condition exists and initiate an alarm based on its’
analysis of the area of installation. The heat detector shall be rated for ceiling installation at 70 ft
(21.3m) centers and be suitable for wall mount applications.
Systems using central processing methods to monitor the inputs from a circuit of analog sensors to
detect a fire will not be accepted.
2.03.A.2 Analytical Microprocessor-Based Detectors-Fixed Temperature/Rate of Rise Heat Detector
The Analytical Microprocessor based Heat Detector shall have a solid state heat sensor, and shall
transmit an alarm at a fixed temperature of 135° F (57°C) or due to a temperature Rate of Rise of
15°F/minute (9°C/minute). The detector shall continually monitor the temperature of the air in its
surroundings to minimize thermal lag to the time required to process an alarm. The integral
microprocessor shall determine if an alarm condition exists and initiate an alarm based on the
analysis of the area of installation.
The heat detector shall be rated for ceiling installation at 70 ft (21.3m) centers and be suitable for
wall mount applications.
Systems using central processing methods to monitor the inputs from a circuit of analog sensors to
detect a fire will not be accepted as equal.
2.03.A.3 Analytical Microprocessor-based Detectors - Ionization Smoke Detector
The Analytical Microprocessor-based ionization detector shall utilize a unipolar ionization smoke
sensor to detect high-energy particulates produced by combustion.
The integral microprocessor shall dynamically examine values from the sensor and initiate an alarm
based on its’ analysis of the area of installation. The detector shall continually monitor itself for
changes in its sensitivity due to the environmental affects of dirt, smoke, temperature, aging and
humidity. The environmental effect data shall be stored in the integral microprocessor and can be
transferred to the electronic loop controller for retrieval using a laptop PC or the Intelligent
Program/Service Tool. The ionization-type detector shall be rated for ceiling installation at a
minimum of 30 ft (9.1m) centers and be suitable for wall mount applications. The ionization-type
smoke detector shall be rated for operation in constant air velocities from 0 to 75 ft/min (0-0.38
m/sec) and with intermittent air gusts up to 300 ft/min (1.52m/sec) for up to 1 hour.
Systems using central intelligence for alarm decisions will not be acceptable.
The alarm set point shall be field selectable to any of five sensitivity settings ranging from 0.7% to
1.6% smoke obstruction per foot. The ionization-type detector shall be suitable for installation and
operation in the following environment:
o
o
o
o
· Temperature: 32 F to 120 F (0 C to 49 C)
· Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing
· Elevation: Up to 6,000 ft. (1828 m)
In the event of a loss of communications of the smoke detector with the Electronic Loop Controller,
the smoke detector will automatically revert to the “Standalone Conventional” operation, and Fire
Alarm/Life Safety system functions will not be compromised.
2.03.A.4 Analytical Microprocessor-based Detectors-Photoelectric Smoke Detector
The Analytical Microprocessor-based photoelectric detector shall utilize a light scattering type
photoelectric smoke sensor to detect visible particulates produced by combustion. The integral
microprocessor shall dynamically examine values from the sensor and initiate a system alarm
based on the analysis of data. Systems using central intelligence for alarm decisions will not be
acceptable. The detector shall continually monitor any changes in sensitivity due to the
environmental affects of dirt, smoke, temperature, aging and humidity. The information shall be
stored in the detectors’ memory and shall be transferred to the electronic loop controller for retrieval
16721-12
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System
using a laptop PC or the Intelligent Detector Program/Service Tool designed by the manufacturer
specifically for the purpose. The photoelectric smoke detector shall be rated for area applications
when installed at a minimum of 30 ft (9.1m) centers and shall be suitable for wall mount applications
up to 12 in from the ceiling. The photoelectric smoke detector shall be suitable for direct insertion
into air ducts up to 3 ft (0.91m) high and 3 ft (0.91m) wide with air velocities up to 5,000 ft/min (025.39 m/sec) without requiring specific duct detector housings or sampling tubes.
The alarm set point shall be field selectable to any of five sensitivity settings ranging from 1.0% to
3.5% smoke obstruction per foot. The photo detector shall be suitable for operation in the following
environment:
o
o
o
o
· Temperature: 32 F to 120 F (0 C to 49 C)
· Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing
· Elevation: no limit
2.03.A.4 Analytical Microprocessor-based Detectors-Photoelectric Smoke Detector (cont’d)
In the event of a loss of communications of the smoke detector with the Electronic Loop Controller,
the smoke detector will automatically revert to the “Standalone Conventional” operation, and Fire
Alarm / Life Safety system functions will not be compromised.
2.03.A.5 Analytical Microprocessor-based Detectors - Mounting Bases
All Analytical Microprocessor-based Detector mounting bases shall provide a means to mount the
detector to a [North American 1-gang, 3½” or 4” octagon box and 4” square box] [European BESA
or 1-gang]. The mounting base will not contain any electronics, shall support all Microprocessorbased Smoke detector types detailed in this specification, and have the following minimum
requirements:
· Removal of the respective detector will not affect electronic loop
communications with other detectors on that loop.
· Field Wiring Connections shall be made to the room side of the base, so
that wiring connections can be made or disconnected by the contractor
without the need to remove the mounting base from the electrical box.
· The base shall be capable of supporting remote alarm annunciation.
2.03.A.6 Analytical Microprocessor-based Detectors - Relay Bases
All Analytical Microprocessor-based Detector mounting bases shall provide a means to mount the
detector to a [North American 1-gang, 3½” or 4” octagon box and 4” square box] [European BESA
or 1-gang]. The mounting base shall contain an alarm-operated relay, and shall support all detector
types detailed in this specification, and have the following minimum requirements:
· The relay shall be a bi-stable (latching) type, and shall provide normally
open and normally closed contact operation.
· The position of the contact shall be by the system.
· The detector processor upon power up shall exercise the relay operation.
· The relay shall automatically de-energize when its associated detector is
physically removed from the base.
· Its associated detector processor shall control the operation of the relay
in the mounting base. Detectors, which are operating in the standalone
mode (caused by loss of communications with the electronic loop
controller), shall operate the relay whenever they detect an alarm condition.
Form “C” Relay contacts shall have minimum rating of 1 amp @ 30 Vdc to be listed for “pilot duty”.
Removal of the respective detector will not affect communications with other detectors.
Field Wiring Connections shall be made to the room side of the base, so that wiring connections can
be made or disconnected by the contractor without the need to remove the mounting base from the
electrical box.
2.03.A.7 Analytical Microprocessor-based Detectors - Isolator Detector Bases
All Analytical Microprocessor-based Detector mounting bases shall provide a means to mount the
detector to a [North American 1-gang, 3½” or 4” octagon box and 4” square box] [European BESA
or 1-gang]. The operation of the isolator base shall be controlled by its respective detector
microprocessor. Isolators which are not controlled by the microprocessor will not be acceptable.
Following a short circuit condition, each isolator/detector shall be capable of performing an internal
self-test procedure to re-establish normal operation. The isolator base shall support all Detector
types supplied under this specification and have the following minimum requirements:
· The isolator shall operate within a minimum of 23 msec. of a short circuit
condition on the communication line.
· When connected in Class A configuration the interface electronics shall
identify an isolated circuit condition and provide communications to all
non isolated Analog devices.
16721-13
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System
· Field Wiring Connections shall be made to the room side of the base, so
that wiring connections can be made or disconnected by the contractor
without the need to remove the mounting base from the electrical box.
2.03.A.8 Analytical Microprocessor-based Detectors - Duct Smoke Detection Applications
The Analytical Microprocessor-based photoelectronic and Multi-Sensor smoke detectors shall be
readily adaptable for use directly in air duct smoke detection applications, in ducts 3 ft (0.91m) high
and 3 ft (0.91m) wide. When used for duct smoke detection, the smoke detectors will not forfeit any
of the system functionality which they have when used as area smoke detectors.
2.03.A.9 Duct Detector Housing
The Analytical Microprocessor-based photoelectronic and Multi-Sensor smoke detectors shall be
readily adaptable for use in air duct smoke detection applications, using a housing that mounts to
the outside of the duct. When used for duct smoke detection, the smoke detectors will not forfeit
any of the system functionality which they have when used as area smoke detectors.
2.03.A.9 Duct Detector Housing (cont’d)
The duct smoke detection housing shall allow the detector to sample and compensate for, variations
in duct air velocity between 300 and 4000 feet per minute (300 to 1000 for ion-photo-heat detector).
Remote alarm LEDs and Remote Test Stations shall be supported by the duct smoke detector.
All detectors used in duct applications shall be located in accordance with NFPA 72E
recommendations.
2.03.A.10 Analytical Microprocessor-based Detectors - Remote Alarm LED
Provide, where indicated on the plans, a Remote LED Alarm Indicator for each smoke detector.
LED shall have a 180-degree viewing angle and mount on a standard 1-gang box.
2.03.B Microprocessor-based Intelligent Modules
Microprocessor-based Addressable Modules - General:
The Fire Alarm/Life Safety System shall incorporate microprocessor-based addressable modules for
the monitoring and control of system Input and Output functions over a 2 wire electronic
communications loop, using both broadcast and serial polling protocols.
All modules shall display communications and alarm status.
The function of each connected module shall be determined by the module type, and shall be
defined in the system software through the application of a personality code. Simply changing the
associated personality code may change module operation at any time.
All addressing of the Microprocessor-based Addressable Modules shall be done electronically, and
the electrical location of each module shall be automatically reported to the Fire Alarm Control
Panel, where it may be downloaded into a PC, or printed out. The addressing of the modules will not
be dependent on their electrical location on the circuit.
All Microprocessor-based Addressable Modules shall have a visual means to confirm
communications with the FACP, and a visual means to confirm the alarm status of the modules.
All field wiring to the Microprocessor-based Addressable Modules shall be supervised for open and
ground faults. All ground faults shall be location annunciated to the module of incidence.
Diagnostic circuitry, and their associated indicators, with reviewable Trouble Codes, shall be integral
to the Microprocessor-based Addressable Modules to assist in troubleshooting system faults.
The module shall be suitable for operation in the following environment:
· Temperature: 32oF to 120oF (0oC to 49oC)
· Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing
2.03.B.1 Single Input Module
Microprocessor-based Addressable Modules shall be used to provide one (1) supervised Class B
(style B) input circuit capable of latching operation for use with contact devices. The Initiating
Device Circuit connected to the module shall be fully supervised for open circuit and ground faults.
Microprocessor-based Addressable Module Single Input Modules shall be used to provide one (1)
supervised Class B (style B) input circuit capable of operation with non-damped Waterflow
Switches. The modules shall have an automatic delay of 15 seconds before reporting the Waterflow
alarm condition to the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
The Initiating Device Circuit connected to the module shall be fully supervised for open circuit and
ground faults.
Microprocessor-based Addressable Single Input Modules shall be used to provide one (1)
supervised Class B input circuit capable of non-latching monitoring contact devices. The module
shall automatically report the monitoring function to the Fire Alarm Control Panel each time the
associated dry contact closes. The Initiating Device Circuit connected to the module shall be fully
supervised for open circuit and ground faults.
Microprocessor-based Addressable Single input Modules shall be used to provide one (1)
supervised Class B (style B) input circuit capable of operating with non-latching supervisory
sprinkler switches. The module shall automatically report the supervisory function to the Fire Alarm
16721-14
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System
Control Panel each time the associated dry contact the Initiating Device Circuit connected to the
module shall be fully supervised for opens circuit and ground faults.
2.03.B.2 Dual Input Module
Microprocessor-based Addressable Modules shall be used to provide two (2) independent
supervised Class B (style B) input circuits capable of operating with two (2) contact devices. Both of
the input circuits shall be terminated to, and operated from, the same microprocessor-based
addressable module. The Initiating Device Circuit connected to the module shall be fully supervised
for open circuits and ground faults.
Microprocessor-based Addressable Modules shall be used to provide two (2) independent
supervised Class B (style B) input circuits capable of reporting the operation of Waterflow Switches.
The modules shall have an automatic delay of 15 seconds before reporting the Waterflow alarm
condition to the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Both of the input circuits shall be terminated to, and
operated from, the same microprocessor-based addressable module.
2.03.B.2 Dual Input Module (Cont’d)
The Initiating Device Circuit connected to the module shall be fully supervised for open circuit and
ground faults.
Microprocessor-based Addressable Module shall be used to provide two (2) independent supervised
Class B (style B) input circuits capable of monitoring contact devices. The module shall
automatically report the monitoring function to the Fire Alarm Control Panel each time the
associated dry contact closes. Both of the input circuits shall be terminated to, and operated from,
the same microprocessor-based addressable module. The Initiating Device Circuit connected to the
module shall be fully supervised for open circuits and ground faults.
Microprocessor-based Addressable Module shall be used to provide two (2) independent supervised
Class B input circuits capable of operating with sprinkler supervisory switches. The module shall
automatically report the supervisory function to the Fire Alarm Control Panel each time the
associated dry contact closes. Both of the input circuits shall be terminated to, and operated from,
the same microprocessor-based addressable module. The Initiating Device Circuit connected to the
module shall be fully supervised for open circuit and ground faults.
2.03.B.3 Monitor Module
The Microprocessor-based Addressable Monitor Module shall be factory set to support one (1)
supervised Class B Normally-Open Active Non-Latching Monitor circuit. The module shall
automatically report the monitor function to the Fire Alarm Control Panel each time the associated
dry contact closes.
2.03.B.4 Waterflow/Tamper Module
The Microprocessor-based Addressable Waterflow/Tamper Module shall be factory set to support
two (2) supervised Class B (style B) input circuits. Channel A shall support a Normally-Open Alarm
Delayed Latching Waterflow Switch circuit. Channel B shall support a Normally-Open Active
Latching Sprinkler Supervisory Switch. Both of the input circuits shall be terminated to, and
operated from, the same microprocessor-based addressable module.
2.03.B.5 Single Riser Signal Module
The Microprocessor-based Addressable Single Input Signal Module shall provide one (1) supervised
Class B (style Y) Notification Appliance Circuit capable of a controlling 2A of polarized 24 VDC
Notification Appliances, 50W speaker circuit power @ 25V RMS, or 35W speaker circuit power @
70VRMS.
The Microprocessor-based Addressable Single Riser Signal Module shall provide one (1)
supervised Class B Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) for the connection of a telephone call-in
circuit. The module shall have the capability of generating its own “ring tone” to insure that the Fire
Fighter knows that they are connected to the telephone call-in circuit.
2.03.B.6 Dual Riser Input Signal Module
The Microprocessor-based Addressable Dual Riser Signal Module shall provide inputs for two (2)
independent supervised Class B (style B) Notification Appliance Circuits. The module shall be
capable of switching either of the two input circuits to the output circuit. The output circuit shall be
rated at 2A for polarized 24 VDC Notification Appliances; 50W @ 25VRMS, or 35W @ 70V RMS for
speaker circuit applications.
2.03.B.7 Control Relay Module
Microprocessor-based Addressable Control Relay Modules shall provide one form “C” dry relay
contact rated at 2 amps @ 24 Vdc or 0.5 amps at 120 VAC to, control external appliances or
equipment processes. Control relay module shall be rated for pilot duty applications and releasing
systems service. The position of the relay contact shall be confirmed by the system firmware.
2.03.B.8 Universal Class A/B Module
16721-15
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System
The Microprocessor-based Addressable Module Universal Class A/B Module shall be capable of a
minimum of fifteen (15) distinct operations. The universal class A/B module shall support the
following circuit types:
· Two (2) supervised Class B (style B) Normally-Open Alarm Latching.
· Two (2) supervised Class B (style B) Normally-Open Alarm Delayed
Latching.
· Two (2) supervised Class B (style B) Normally-Open Active NonLatching.
· Two (2) supervised Class B (style B) Normally-Open Active Latching.
· One (1) form “C” dry relay contact rated at 2 amps @ 24 Vdc.
· One (1) supervised Class A (style D) Normally-Open Alarm Latching.
· One (1) supervised Class A (style D) Normally-Open Alarm Delayed
Latching.
· One (1) supervised Class A (style D) Normally-Open Active NonLatching.
· One (1) supervised Class A (style D) Normally-Open Active Latching.
2.03.B.8 Universal Class A/B Module (cont’d)
· One (1) supervised Class A (style D) 2-wire Smoke Alarm Non-Verified.
· One (1) supervised Class B (style B) 2-wire Smoke Alarm Non-Verified.
· One (1) supervised Class A (style D) 2-wire Smoke Alarm Verified
· One (1) supervised Class B (style B) 2-wire Smoke Alarm Verified
· One (1) supervised Class A (style Z) Signal Circuit, 24Vdc @ 2A.
· One (1) supervised Class B (style D) Signal Circuit, 24Vdc @ 2A.
2.03.C Microprocessor-based Addressable Manual Pull Stations - General
The Fire Alarm/Life Safety System shall incorporate microprocessor-based addressable Manual Pull
Stations connected over a 2 wire electronic communications loop, using both broadcast and serial
polling protocols. All Manual Pull Stations shall display communications and alarm status.
All addressing of the Microprocessor-based Addressable Manual Pull Stations shall be done
electronically, and the electrical location of each station shall be automatically reported to the Fire
Alarm Control Panel, where it may be downloaded into a PC, or printed out. The addressing of the
Manual Pull Station will not be dependent on their electrical location on the circuit.
All Microprocessor-based Addressable Manual Pull Stations shall have a visual means to confirm
communications with the FACP, and a visual means to confirm the alarm status of the modules.
All field wiring to the Microprocessor-based Addressable Manual Pull Stations shall be supervised
for opens and ground faults. All ground faults shall be location annunciated to the module of
incidence.
Diagnostic circuitry, and their associated indicators, with reviewable Trouble Codes, shall be integral
to the Microprocessor-based Addressable Manual Pull Stations to assist in troubleshooting system
faults, including ground faults on the device.
All Manual Fire Alarm station shall be suitable for operation in the following environment:
· Temperature: 32oF to 120oF (0oC to 49oC)
· Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing
2.03.C.1 Microprocessor-based Addressable Fire Alarm Station
The Microprocessor-based Addressable Fire Alarm Stations shall be single action fire alarm
stations. Provide a locked test feature. Finish the station in red with silver “PULL IN CASE OF
FIRE” lettering.
2.03.C.2 Microprocessor-based Addressable Double Action Fire Alarm Station
The Microprocessor-based Addressable Fire Alarm Stations shall be double action fire alarm
stations. Provide a key locked test feature. Finish the station in red with white “PULL IN CASE OF
FIRE” lettering.
2.03.D Fire Alarm Notification Appliances
Fire Alarm Notification Appliances - General Requirements
All appliances which are supplied for the requirements of this specification shall be U.L. Listed for
Fire Protective Service, and shall be capable of providing the “Equivalent Facilitation” which is
allowed under the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessabilities Guidelines (ADA(AG)), and shall
be UL 1971, and ULC S526 Listed. All appliances shall be of same manufacturer as the Fire Alarm
Control Panel specified to insure absolute compatibility between appliances and control panels, and
to insure that the application of appliances are done in accordance with the single manufacturers’
instructions. Any appliances that do not meet the above requirements, and are submitted for use
must show written proof of their compatibility for the purposes intended. Such proof shall be in the
form of documentation from all manufacturers, which clearly states that their equipment (as
submitted) is 100% compatible with each other for the purposes intended. All strobes shall be
provided with lens markings oriented for wall mounting. It shall be possible to replace the lens of
16721-16
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System
any installed strobe in order to facilitate replacement of a broken lens, or to change the orientation
of the lens markings. Ceiling mounted strobes shall have lens markings with correctly oriented
lettering. Removal of an installed strobe to facilitate changing of a lens will not be acceptable.
2.03.D.1 Self - Synchronized Strobes
Strobes shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the Fire Alarm Control Equipment. In-Out
screw terminals shall be provided for wiring. The Strobes shall have a red or white plastic
faceplate. They shall provide the proper candela output for the project and synchronized flash
outputs. The strobe shall have lens markings oriented for wall mounting.
The same manufacturer as the Fire Alarm Control Equipment shall manufacture the strobes. In Out screw terminals shall be provided for wiring. The Strobes shall have a <red> <white> metal
face plate. They shall provide <15 cd> <15/75 cd>, <30 cd>, <60cd>, <110 cd> synchronized flash
outputs.
2.03.D.2 Bell/Strobe Adapter Plates
The Bell/Strobes plates shall by the same manufacturer as the Fire Alarm Control Equipment. InOut polarized wire leads shall be provided for wiring. The Bell/Strobe plates shall have a red metal
face plate. It shall be possible to adapt dc powered Fire Alarm Bells to the plate. Strobes shall
provide <15 cd> <15/75 cd>, <30 cd>,<110 cd> synchronized flash outputs.
2.03.D.3 Horns and Horn/Strobes - Electronic Type
Horns shall by the same manufacturer as the Fire Alarm Control Equipment. In - Out screw
terminals shall be provided for wiring. The Horn shall have a <red> <white> plastic housing. Horns
shall be suitable for indoor or outdoor use. A sound output level of 103 dBA Peak shall be provided.
It must not be necessary to completely remove the screws to facilitate mounting.
Horn/Strobes shall by the same manufacturer as the Fire Alarm Control Equipment. The
Horn/Strobes shall have a <red> <white> plastic housing. The strobe shall provide <15 cd> <15/75
cd>, <30 cd>, <110 cd> synchronized flash outputs. <Ceiling mounted strobes shall have lens
markings with correctly oriented lettering.> Removal of a installed Horn/Strobe to change the lens
markings will not be acceptable. Horns shall provide a 100 dBA Peak sound output. It must not be
necessary to completely remove the screws to facilitate mounting.
2.03.D.4 Cone Speakers and Speaker/Strobes
(1)
Speakers shall be Mylar cone type by the same manufacturer as the Fire Alarm Control Equipment.
The rear of the speaker shall be completely sealed protecting the cone during installation. In - Out
screw terminals shall be provided for wiring. Speaker housings shall be <red> <white>. Speakers
shall be provided for use with <25V>, <70V> systems. Speakers shall provide power taps at 1/4w,
1/2w, 1w, and 2w. Speakers shall provide 90 dBA Peak sound output at 2w.
(2)
Speakers/Strobes shall by the same manufacturer as the Fire Alarm Control Equipment.
Speaker/Strobes shall have a <red> <white> housing. Speakers shall be Mylar cone type. Paper
type cones are not acceptable. The Speakers shall be for use with <25V>, <70V> systems.
Speakers shall provide power taps at 1/4w, 1/2w, 1w, and 2w. Speakers shall provide 87dBA Peak
sound output at 2w. Strobes shall provide <15 cd> <15/75 cd>, <30 cd>, <110 cd> synchronized
flash outputs.
2.03.D.5 Re-entrant Speakers and Speaker/Strobes
Speakers shall be a Re-entrant type supplied by the same manufacturer as the Fire Alarm Control
Equipment. Speakers shall have a <red> <white> housing. Speakers shall be provided for use with
<25V>, <70V> systems. The Speakers shall be suitable for indoor or outdoor use. Power taps shall
be provided at 2w, 4w, 8w, and 15w. Speakers shall provide 102 dBA Peak sound output at 15w. A
metal compression driver shall be inherent to the Re-entrant speaker. Cone type drivers are not
acceptable.
Speakers/Strobes shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the Fire Alarm Control Equipment.
Speaker/Strobes shall have a <red> <white> housing. Speakers shall be Re-entrant type and shall
be for use with <25V>, <70V> systems. The Speakers/Strobes shall be suitable for indoor or
outdoor use. Power taps shall be provided at 2w, 4w, 8w, and 15w. Speakers shall provide 98 dBA
Peak sound output at 15w. Strobes shall provide <15/75 cd>, <30 cd>, <110 cd> synchronized
flash outputs. Removal of a installed Speaker/Strobe to change the lens markings will not be
acceptable.
2.03.D.6 Chimes and Chime/Strobes - Electronic Type
Chimes shall by the same manufacturer as the Fire Alarm Control Equipment, and shall be UL listed
for Private Mode operation. In - Out Screw terminals shall be provided for wiring. Chimes shall
have a <red>, <white> plastic housing. A pleasing mellow tone of 91 dBA Peak sound output level
shall be provided. It must be possible to adjust the volume on individual chimes by use of a
concealed volume control.
16721-17
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System
Chime/Strobes shall by the same manufacturer as the Fire Alarm Control Equipment.
Chime/Strobes shall be UL listed for Private Mode operations. In - Out Screw terminals shall be
provided for wiring. Chimes/Strobes shall have a <red>, <white> plastic housing. A pleasing
mellow tone of 88 dBA Peak sound output level shall be provided. It must be possible to adjust the
volume on individual chimes by use of a concealed volume control. Strobes shall provide <15 cd>
<15/75 cd>, <30 cd>, <110 cd> synchronized flash outputs. The strobe shall come with lens
markings oriented for wall mounting.
PART 3 EXECUTION
The entire system shall be installed in a workmanlike manner in accordance with approved
manufacturers manuals and wiring diagrams. The contractor shall furnish all conduit, wiring, outlet
boxes, junction boxes, cabinets and similar devices necessary for the complete installation. All
wiring shall be of the type recommended by the NEC, approved by local authorities having
jurisdiction for the purpose, and shall be installed in dedicated conduit throughout.
PART 3 EXECUTION (cont’d)
All penetration of floor slabs and fire walls shall be fire stopped in accordance with all local fire
codes. End of Line Resistors: Shall be furnished as required for mounting as directed by the
manufacturer.
All wiring shall be installed according to NEC standards per the drawings submitted by the
authorized Engineered Systems Distributor, unless otherwise noted.
Field Quality Control: The system shall be installed and fully tested under the supervision of trained
manufacturer's representative. System shall be demonstrated to perform all functions as specified.
3.01 Acceptable Installers
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System specified herein shall be installed by a Factory Trained and
Authorized Fire Alarm Contractor, specializing in Multiplex Fire Alarm Systems. The installing
contractor shall provide proof of their qualifications of Factory Training and Factory Authorization for
the product(s) specified herein. These qualification credentials will not be more than two years old,
to ensure up-to-date product and application knowledge on the part of installing Fire Alarm
Contractor. Field Connected Devices may be installed and wired, licensed contractors under direct
supervision of a Factory Trained and Authorized Fire Alarm Contractor may wire primary power.
3.02
Installation of Control Panel
INSTALLATION OF CONTROL PANEL AND RELATED EQUIPMENT
Installation of all Fire Alarm / Life Safety Control Equipment and Field Mounted Devices and
Appliances shall be in strict compliance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
Connection of the fire alarm system power supply (supplies) to the electrical system shall be by a
dedicated branch electrical circuit. The means to disconnect this circuit shall be accessible only to
authorized personnel, shall be capable of being locked in the "on" position, and shall be clearly
marked "FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT CONTROL" in accordance with NFPA standards.
Batteries shall only be installed in the control panel enclosure when they are of the gelled-electrolyte
type and where the control panel manufacturer recommends such installation.
The Control Equipment will not be installed until all field wiring to the field mounted devices and
appliances have been installed and the wiring on those circuits have been checked for faults and
shorts, and any faults and shorts found have been corrected.
The Fire Alarm Contractor shall neatly lace all field wiring conductors in the gutter spaces of the
control panels and secure the wiring away from all circuit boards and control equipment
components. All field-wiring circuits shall be neatly and legibly labeled in the control panel. No
wiring except home runs from fire alarm system circuits and system power supply circuits shall be
permitted in the control panel enclosure. Additionally, no wiring splices will be permitted in the
control panel enclosure.
3.03
System Test and Certification/Demonstration
The completely installed fire alarm system will be fully tested in compliance with Testing Procedures
for Signaling Systems (ANSI/NFPA 72). The Fire Alarm Contractor shall test:
· Every alarm initiating device for proper response and program execution.
· Every notification appliance for proper operation and audible/visual
output
· All auxiliary control functions such as elevator capture, smoke door and
damper release, and functional override of HVAC, ventilation, and
pressurization controls.
16721-18
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System
The Project Manager shall be notified at least 10 working days prior to the scheduled testing so that
he may be present for such testing.
After the system has been completely tested to the satisfaction of the Project Manager, his
consulting engineer, and the building owner; the Fire Alarm Contractor shall complete the Fire
Alarm System Certification of Completion form published by the NFPA (Figure 1-7.2.1 in the
National Fire Alarm Code). In compliance with published NFPA standards, parts 1, 2, and 4 through
10 shall be completed after the system is installed and the wiring has been checked. Part 3 shall be
completed after the operational acceptance tests have been completed. The completed form signed
by a principal of the Fire Alarm System contractor shall be delivered to the architect with the other
system documentation required by these specifications.
3.04
System Commissioning
Commissioning of the Installed System
· The system shall be commissioned in accordance with the needs of the
occupants of the protected building. Both “Complete System
Commissioning” and “Phased System Commissioning” shall be possible
with the specified system, and the execution of either method of
commissioning shall be treated as stand-alone projects, and shall be
documented as such, including the need for a complete contract close
out submittal package for each Project Phase.
Complete System Commissioning
· The Factory Trained and Authorized Fire Alarm Contractor in the
presence of the Local AHJ, the Building Owners’ Representative, and a
Representative of the General Contractor shall perform commissioning of
the entire installed system, if deemed appropriate.
3.04
System Commissioning (cont’d)
· A complete system documentation package, as detailed in this
specification shall be provided to the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction
and the Building Owners’ Representative at the time of commissioning.
Phased System Commissioning
· Commissioning of each Phase of the system shall be performed by the
Factory Trained and Authorized Fire Alarm Contractor in the presence of
the Local AHJ, the Building Owners’ Representative, and a
representative of the General Contractor, if deemed appropriate.
· A complete system documentation package, specifically prepared for the
phase of the project being completed, and as detailed in this
specification, shall be provided to the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction
and the Building Owners’ Representative at the time of commissioning.
3.04.A Delivery of System Documentation Package
The Fire Alarm contractor shall deliver two sets of the System Documentation Package to the
Building Owners Representative and the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Final payment of the
contractor will not be authorized until the complete documentation specified herein is delivered to
the professional engineer. The System Documentation Package shall consist of the following
documents, to be provided after the <fire alarm system><phase of the fire alarm system> has been
completely installed and tested:
1)
Operations and Maintenance Manuals which detail the operation and maintenance of the
installed Life Safety System.
2)
An As-Built copy of the scaled plan of each building showing the
actual installed location of each piece of fire alarm equipment as well as the
installed raceway sizes and routing, conductor sizes and quantities in each
raceway, and the exact location of each junction box.
3)
Point to Point diagrams of the entire Life Safety System <Phase of the Life Safety System>as
installed and tested. Point to Point Diagrams shall include all connected Smoke and Heat
Detectors and addressable Field Modules. In addition, “As-Built” riser and wiring diagrams
reflecting all T-Taps, each programmed device characteristic including detector type, base
type, serial number, sensitivity setting and wire configurations will be provided to the Project
Manager, based on the information gathered during the system final testing process.
4)
The application program (database) listing for the system as installed at the time of acceptance
by the building owner and/or Local AHJ (Disk and Hard copy printout).
5)
A Time and date stamped report which lists every Fire Alarm / Life Safety System Cabinet
within the system. This report shall include date regarding each cabinet in the system, the
hardware modules mounted in each cabinet, and physical mounting location of each module.
6)
A Time and Date stamped report, which lists every detector, module, switch and output circuit
within the system. This report shall include addressing, custom labeling, device type, and
physical location for each device.
16721-19
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System
7)
A letter certifying that the installation is in strict compliance with all applicable codes and in
strict compliance with the requirements of these specifications. The letter shall also clearly
explain any discrepancies between the originally submitted system drawings and the as-built
system drawings.
8)
Two originals of the NFPA document titled “Fire Alarm System Certification and Description”
completely filled-in and signed as required.
9)
Name, address and telephone of the authorized factory representative.
10) Written certification by the fire alarm contractor that no power supply audio amplifier or circuit
on the system has an electrical load greater than 80% of its rated capacity.
11) A copy of the manufacturers’ warranty on the installed system.
System Startup:
A Factory Trained and Authorized Engineered Systems Distributor shall perform system Startup. A
contractor under the direction of the Factory Trained and Authorized Engineered Systems
Distributor may perform certain functions of the Systems Startup Procedure.
3.05
Instruction of Owner
The Fire Alarm Contractor shall schedule and execute an instruction class for the Building owner,
which details the proper operation of the installed fire alarm system. The instruction shall also cover
the schedule of maintenance required by NFPA 72 and any additional maintenance recommended
by the system manufacturer. This instruction shall also be separately furnished to the Local
Municipal Fire Department if so requested by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. The
instruction shall be presented in an organized and professional manner by a person factory trained
in the operation and maintenance of the equipment and who is also thoroughly familiar with the
installation. The Fire Alarm Contractor shall provide operations manuals or any other curricula that
may enhance the instruction of the Building Owners or Local Municipal Fire Department in the
operation and maintenance of the system.
END OF SECTION
16721-20
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System
SECTION 16740
TELEPHONE SYSTEM
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Description
PABX Switching Equipment
Operator's Console
Main Distribution Frame (MDF)
Test Equipment
Telephone Instruments
Special Tools
All Interconnecting Wiring
Outside Plant (cable, splices, cross connection and distribution pedestals)
1.02
A.
B.
Related Work
Section 16120: Wiring
Section 16161: Grounding and Bonding
1.03
Manufacturer’s Guarantee
Manufacturer’s guarantee transferable to the Project Manager shall be furnished for the following:
1.
The Power Plant Batteries shall be designed for a 25 years life and must carry a guarantee for a
minimum of ten years from date of acceptance.
2.
All other equipment (except expendable supplies) shall carry a Manufacturer's Guarantee for a
minimum period of two (2) years from date of acceptance.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
1.05
A.
B.
1.06
A.
B.
Applicable Codes and Standards
The work shall be carried out in accordance with this specification, the associated drawings and the
standards listed hereunder or other standards approved by the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of all purchased materials and manufacturer items
and shall develop and submit where applicable proposals for shop inspection and testing.
The following is a summary of International standards. The latest issues of applicable publications
shall be observed. Alternative international standards may be used provided they give equivalent
guidance and are submitted for Project Manager's review and approval in advance of their use.
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
British Standards (BS)
International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee (CCITT).
Enviromental Conditions
The equipment shall be suitable for the environment in that working conditions are up to 50 degrees C.
and 98% humidity. While the equipment will normally operate within a controlled environment, it shall
be capable of operating for a minimum of two busy hours within the following limits:
1.
0 degrees to 46 degrees C.
2.
10% to 70% humidity
The equipment shall be capable of being stored or transported in a switched off condition in the
range of -10 degrees C to +50 degrees C with 70% humidity without damage.
Requirements of Regulatory Agnecies
Installation subject to approval, inspection and test of local utility company.
Provide equipment compatible with utility company telephone system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
General Requirements
All telephone sockets to be terminated to the existing PABX.
PART 3
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
EXECUTION
Installation
All cables shall be harnessed and properly dressed.
All exposed surfaces and access openings shall be free from sharp edges, open V slots or pointed ends.
Separation of telecommunication circuits from the building electrical ystem and electrical equipment shall
onform to the latest issue of the international codes.
An earth or ground shall be provided and be extended to the termination box and connected to each
tation protector. The earth or ground shall be installed and bonded in accordance with Section 16161.
16740 - 1
Telephone System
PART 4 Electronic Private Automatic Branch Exchange
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Contents
GENERAL
SYSTEM CAPACITY
SYSTEM BUILD-UP
TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS
STATION CHARACTERISTICS
TRUNK CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS
TONE AND RING SIGNALS
NUMBERING PLAN
SYSTEM AND EXTENSION FACILITIES
EPABX-OPERATOR EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES
TRAFFIC REQUIREMENTS AND MEASUREMENTS
POWER EQUIPMENT AND CONSUMPTION
SYSTEM OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
COMPONENTS
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Page
5
5
6
6
7
8
10
10
11
17
18
19
19
21
21
1.0
General
This specification states the requirements and conditions regarding the tender for the furnishing,
installation and maintenance of a private automatic branch exchange.
The tenderer shall quote a digital electronic private automatic branch exchange, hereafter called
EPABX utilizing stored program control, SPC, technology.
Contractor shall coordinate with PTT for all approvals and interfacing required. The EPABX shall:
- Cover its capacity range with a minimum of system parts. The number of different types of
printed circuit board is to be stated.
- Facilitate expansion from 600 to 800 modularly without the need to replace existing equipment.
- Be flexible and capable of including new features if required.
- Be digital and adhere to CCITT recommendations for A-law PCM (2.048 MBPS).
- The analogue/digital conversion shall be on an individual channel basis.
- Be delivered in tested, easily administered modules.
The tenderer shall specify and tender recommended quantities and types of spare parts to be held in
stock. Spare parts shall be readily available on demand for a period of at least 10 years.
2.0
System Capacity
The EPABX shall have an initial capacity of (the maximum size is shown in brackets):
....( 600)
Main station lines
....( 3 )
EPABX-operator positions
....( 60 )
Both-way public trunk circuits (exchange lines) programmable to be incoming and
outgoing as required by the client
3.0
System Build-Up
3.1
The system shall have a modular design (with plug-in printed circuit boards, PCBs) for
simple installation, maintenance and expansion.
3.2
The PCB's shall be contained in slide-in shelves.
3.3
The shelves shall be placed in cabinet(s) with lockable doors.
3.4
The maximum cabinet height must not exceed 1800 mm.
3.5
The tenderer shall specify the floor space required for the equipment.
3.6
The noise level created by the EPABX shall not exceed 40 dBA measured at a distance of 1
m from the equipment.
3.7
All interconnection between different units in the EPABX shall be by means of prefabricated
front connected plug-in cables. This is to eliminate the need to reach the rear side of the
cabinets.
3.8
The telephone system should have capability to interface with ISDN (Integrated Services
Digital Network).
3.9
The tenderer shall specify the type(s) of memory and memory back-up used within the
system.
The connections between the EPABX, trunk lines and stations shall be
achieved by means of a main distribution frame, MDF. The MDF shall be
a separate unit connected to the exchange by cables using multipoint
plugs. It shall be capable of terminating 50% more lines from the line side
than from the exchange side. The MDF shall provide mounting of over-
3.10
16740 - 2
Telephone System
voltage protectors with connection to proper earthing (grounding) facilities
for 30 Central office lines (Trunk) lines plus all direct lines.
4.0
4.1.
Transmission Characteristics
General
The values given below refer to connections between 2-wire analogue parts measured at the MDF,
based on the assumption that the unused return channel in the 4-wire part of a connection is disabled
during measurement.
The specification is based on the CCITT recommendations for A-law PCM systems (G712 and G45).
4.2
Nominal Transmission Loss
The nominal EPABX transmission loss for connections involving external lines shall be chosen as low
as possible but stability (singing margin) considerations will put a lower limit on the transmission loss.
The local line impedance (station loop loss) shall not exceed 3bBa.
4.3
Attenuation/Frequency Distortion
The following limits for the variation of attenuation with frequency (referred to the attenuation at 800
Hz) are required.
Within the range 300 Hz to 600 Hz -0.5 to +1.0 dB
Within the range 600 Hz to 3000 Hz -0.5 to +0.5 dB
at 3400 Hz
0 to +3 dB
4.4
Return Loss
The return loss measured against the nominal input impedance shall not be less than:
15 dB in the frequency range 300 Hz to 600 Hz
20 dB in the frequency range 600 Hz to 3400 Hz
4.5
Impedance Unbalance to Earth
The impedance unbalance to earth measured according to the method described in CCITT
recommendation Q45 shall not exceed:
40 dB in the band 300 Hz to 600 Hz
46 dB in the band 600 Hz to 3400 Hz
4.6
Crosstalk
When a sine-wave signal in the frequency range 700-1100 Hz (excluding submultiples of 8 kHz) and a
level of O dBmO is applied to an input port of a connection through the exchange, the crosstalk level
received in any other connection shall be -65 dBmO or better.
4.7
Transmission Plan
The transmission levels chosen internally in the exchange shall permit direct connection of PCM-links
from public digital sources.
5.0
5.1
Station Characteristics
It shall be possible to connect any combination of dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) pushbutton and
rotary dial telephones to the EPABX. Additionally, it shall be possible to connect digital telephones to
the EPABX.
It shall be possible to connect either a rotary dial or a DTMF telephone to the same line without any
changes within the EPABX. It shall also be possible to connect rotary dial and DTMF telephone
concurrently to the same line.
With dial telephones connected to the EPABX, the following prerequisite must be met:
a) Dial frequency
min 7Hz
max 18 Hz
b) Pulse ratio
30/70 - 50/50 make/break
c) Interdigital pause
min 300 ms
max 8 s
With DTMF pushbutton telephones connected to the EPABX, the signalling shall comply with CCITT
and CEPT recommendations.
The line current feed shall be via 2 x 400 ohms at the operating voltage of 48 V with voltage
variance of 44 -56V.
The EPABX shall be able to operate with station line
loop resistance of up to 1500 ohms including telephones.
The EPABX shall operate with the minimum leakage resistance
a) 40 kohms between A-wire and B-wire
b) 40 kohms between A-wire and earth
c) 40 kohms between B-wire and earth
The exchange shall be able to detect enquiry signals with the following characteristics:
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
16740 - 3
Telephone System
a) For DTMF telephones a register recall button performing a timed break pulse of 30-100 ms or an
earthing of one speech-wire giving an unbalance of maximum 200 ohms to earth.
b) For rotary dial telephones a register recall button as in (a) or one dial pulse.
6. 0
6.1
Trunk-Circuit Characteristics
The EPABX shall permit the connection of:
a) Direct outgoing trunk circuits to public exchange (DCD)
b) Incoming trunk circuits to EPABX-operator
c) DID trunk circuits from public exchange
d) Both-way trunk circuits
e) Private trunk circuits
f) Both-way 30/32 PCM links to the public exchange and/or to other EPABXs
with channel associated signalling.
6.2
The exchange must be able to function correctly when connected to trunk circuits with a loop
resistance of up to 2000 ohms.
6.3
The DID trunks shall have the possibility for (CCITT MFC R2 register signalling or decadic signalling).
6.4
Digit transmission to other exchanges shall use decadic or DTMF-signalling.
6.5
Decadic pulses towards other exchanges (public or private) from the EPABX shall have a speed of 10
+ 1 Hz. The make/break ratio shall be 40/60 + 1.
6.6
During a pulse train, the trunk circuit shall offer less than 1 ohm's resistance for the make and more
than 60 kohms for the break.
6.7
The interdigital pause shall be minimum 300 milliseconds and maximum 8 seconds.
6.8
Incoming pulsing from other EPABXs on private trunk circuits shall be 7-18 Hz and with a pulse
ratio of 30/70 - 50/50 or preferably, with DTMF-signalling.
6.9
When idle, the trunk circuits shall have a resistance between the a and b-branches of minimum 60
kohms.
6.10
During ringing state the impedance shall be minimum 7 kohms. A call shall be registered after a 200
milli second ring signal (25 Hz). Ring bursts less than 150 milli seconds shall not be registered.
6.11
Private trunk circuits shall be available for loop and E & M signalling. The E&M circuits shall be
strappable for 2 and 4 wire operation. The minimum number of routes shall be 32.
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
8.0
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
9.0
9.1
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.2.1
9.1.2.2
Tone and Ring Signals
The EPABX shall provide tone signals at 425 Hz + 5%.
There shall be different ring signals, all repetitive.
a) Internal ring signal
1000/4000
b) External ring signal
330/330/330/4000
c) Call-back ring signal
200/200/200/200/ 200/4000
The ring signal shall be 75V +20% and the frequency 25 Hz +10% measured at the MDF.
First ring signal shall always be sent within 0.5 second after a call has been established.
It shall be possible to change the tone levels in steps of 3 dB within +6dB by programming.
Numbering Plan
The EPABX shall have a flexible numbering plan i.e. it shall be possible to allocate any code to any
function (including station numbers).
It shall be possible to use 1 to 5 digit codes concurrently for the functions within the PABX, e.g.mix 3
and 4 digit extension numbers.
The allocation of station numbers to multiple positions shall be variable by programming.
Group hunting numbers must not be related to the extension numbers for the individuals in a group.
It shall be clearly stated by the tenderer whether any facilities require use of DTMF or special type
telephones.
When a line facility is utilized by stations with rotary dial as well as with DTMF telephones the station
call origination and terminating procedure must be the same (independent of the type of telephone
instrument).
System And Extension Facilities
Basic Facilities
General
The basic system shall include at least the following features. The tenderer shall state clearly any
deviations/omissions from this list of facilities.
The tenderer shall provide a concise description of each tendered facility stating deviations if any.
Incoming Traffic
Incoming public network traffic via direct indialling trunk circuits.
It shall be possible for incoming calls from the public network to be routed directly to stations via
direct indialling lines without the participation of
a EPABX-operator.
Incoming private network traffic via direct indialling tieline trunk circuits.
16740 - 4
Telephone System
9.1.2.3
9.1
9.1.2.4
9.1.3
9.1.3.1
9.1.3.2
9.1.3.3
9.1.3.4
9.1.4
9.1.5
9.1.6
9.1.7
9.1.7.1
9.1.7.2
9.1.7.3
9.1.8
9.1.8.1
9.1.8.2
9.1.8.3
9.1.8.4
It shall be possible for incoming calls from a private network to be routed directly to stations via direct
indialling lines without the participation of a EPABX-operator.
Incoming public network traffic via EPABX- operators.
All incoming calls that are not dialled directly to stations shall be answered by a EPABX-operator.
Basic Facilities (cont’d)
Incoming private network traffic via EPABX-operators.
All incoming calls from a private network to stations that are not dialled directly, shall be answered by
a EPABX-operator.
Outgoing Traffic
Outgoing calls to the public network direct.
It shall be possible for extensions to establish calls to public network subscribers without the
participation of an EPABX-operator.
Outgoing calls to a private network direct.
It shall be possible for extensions to establish calls to stations in a private network without the
participation of a EPABX-operator.
Outgoing calls to the public network via EPABX- operators.
It shall be possible for extensions to make assistance calls to EPABX-operators to request an external
call to a public network subscriber. The EPABX-operator shall be able to extend the public trunk line
with dial tone or with part or all of the subscriber's number dialled. It shall be possible for the stations
to wait with raised handset (off-hook condition).
Outgoing calls to a private network via EPABX- operators.
It shall be possible for extensions to make calls to EPABX-operators to request assistance by placing
a calls to a station in a private network. The EPABX-operator shall be able to extend the private
trunk line with dial tone or with part or all of the station's number dialled. It shall be possible for the
station to wait with raised handset.
Internal Calls
It shall be possible for extensions to establish internal calls directly or via a EPABX-operator.
Abbreviated Dialling
By dialling/keying large digit codes stations shall be able to obtain access to a number of previously
stored numbers. These may be internal numbers or local, national and international numbers or
private network numbers, up to 16 digits long.
The repertory shall be divided into a common repertory available from all extensions with appropriate
class of service and an individual repertory where extensions with DTMF-pushbutton telephones each
have access to their own individual numbers.
Alternative Routing
If all lines in an outgoing or both-way route are busy the system shall be capable of automatically
rerouting the call to the required destination via another route. The system shall also be capable of
adding and deleting digits to and from the number, appropriate to the chosen route.
Automatic Call-back
Automatic call-back - Busy extension.
Station calling another station and encountering busy tone, by dialling/keying a suffix digit, shall be
recalled immediately the station becomes free.
Automatic call-back - on No reply.
A station on receiving no reply to a call to another station by dialling/keying suffix digit (code) shall be
able to place a call-back order on the absent station. The request shall be activated when the called
station raises the handset. The request then operates as a normal call-back to a busy extension.
Automatic call-back - Busy trunk route.
It shall be possible for station calling a public or private trunk route in which all trunk lines are busy, by
dialling/keying a suffix code and the wanted number, to be automatically recalled and subsequently
automatically redial the wanted number as soon as the required route becomes free.
Call Diversion
It shall be possible to initiate and revoke call diversion from the EPABX-operator console and from
extensions with DTMF-telephones by keying a predetermined code.
Call Diversion - Common.
By keying a code, an extension with appropriate class of service shall be able to divert incoming
external or internal calls to a common divertee (answer) position.
Call Diversion - On No Reply.
It shall be possible to divert calls that encounter ring back tone but no reply to a nominated answering
position after a specified number of rings.
Call Diversion - On busy.
It shall be possible to divert incoming calls to a busy station to a predetermined, nominated answering
position.
Call Diversion - Direct.
It shall be possible to divert all calls to a nominated answering position.
16740 - 5
Telephone System
9.1.8.5
Call Diversion - Bypass.
EPABX-operators and stations with appropriate class of service shall be able to call a station in the
call diverted state by keying a predetermined bypass code. The nominated divertee (answer) position
shall automatically bypass the diversion when calling the diverted extension.
9.1
9.1.8.6
Basic Facilities (cont’d)
Call Diversion - "Follow-me".
By keying a code and station number, a station shall be able to divert all incoming calls to that station.
9.1.9
Call Pickup.
9.1.9.1
Call Pickup - Individual.
A station shall be able to pickup a call ringing at another station by dialling/keying the required station
number and a suffix digit.
9.1.9.2
Call Pickup - On Call to another Group Member.
An extension in a defined group shall be able to pickup a call ringing at another station by
dialling/keying a single digit.
9.1.9.3
Call Pickup - Common Signal Devices.
Incoming calls to a defined group of station are signalled on a common signal device e.g. a bell. Any
extension within the group shall be able to connect to an incoming call by dialling/keying an access
digit. Incoming calls shall be queued in order of arrival.
9.1.10
Call Waiting Indication.
Internal Calls.
A station with appropriate class of service when calling a busy station by dialling/keying a suffix digit,
shall cause a call waiting indication to the busy station.
The busy station shall either dial/key an acceptance digit and speak privately with the intruding party,
or replace the handset and be rerung and connected to the intruding party. If the station does not
replace the handset the called station can alternate between the other two parties any number of
times.
By dialling/keying a suffix digit it shall be possible to establish a three party conference.
External Calls
A busy extension called by a public or private trunk circuit either directly or via a EPABX-operator will
hear call waiting tone, provided the call trunk and station have the appropriate class of service.
The busy extension gains connection to the public/private trunk using the procedures described above
for "call waiting indication on internal calls".
9.1.11
Executive Intrusion
By dialling/keying a suffix digit an extension with an appropriate class of service shall be able to
intrude on an established connection. Warning tone shall be issued to all three parties.
9.1.12
Extension Group Hunting.
A number of station lines can be grouped together to form a hunting group with a common station
number. Incoming calls are connected to free station in the group. The order of search for a free
station can be sequential or based on an even load principle. Group members shall also have
individual station numbers. A group member shall be able to obtain temporary exclusion from the
group by using a simple exclusive procedure.
9.1.13
Inquiry and Call Transfer Facilities.
9.1.13.1 Call Transfer.
A station line with the appropriate class of service shall be able to transfer a call to another station by
initiating an inquiry call and then replacing the handset.
Call transfer via operator.
An extension shall be able to transfer a call by calling and requesting the EPABX-operator to transfer
the call.
9.1.13.2 Inquiry.
An extension connected to another extension or to an external party may hold the line at any time in
order to consult another extension, EPABX-operator or external party.
9.1.13.3 Alternating.
An extension who makes an inquiry call as described above shall be able to return to the original call
by dialling/keying one digit, while placing the inquiry call on hold. The extension shall be able to
alternate between the two parties any number of times provided the enquiree is an extension in the
same EPABX.
9.1.13.4 Three-party Conference.
An extension already engaged on a call shall be able to initiate an inquiry call and when it is
established include the called party in a three party conference with the original call partner by either
depressing a recall button or dialling/keying one digit.
9.3.4 Name Selection
The digital telephone shall be provided with programmable buttons for name selection.
9.3.5 Radial Chosen Number
16740 - 6
Telephone System
An extension shall be able to store a chosen number and radial it any number of times.
9.1
9.3.6
10.0
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
Basic Facilities (cont’d)
Data Communication Facilities
The system shall be prepared to provide data communication facilities in conjunction with the digital
telephone using the same single pair of wires.
It shall be possible to establish, maintain and disconnect data and voice calls without mutual
reference or restrictions.
Data and voice communications shall be possible concurrently via the same wire pair.
A data terminal connected via a digital telephone shall be possible to connect over a modem pool to
an external analogue line.
It shall be possible to connect data terminals with a data rate of up to 9.6 kbit/s asynchronous.
The system shall be prepared to provide for digital voice and data communications facilities in
conjunction with the forthcoming Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN).
Epabx-Operator Equipment and Facilities
It shall be possible to connect the EPABX-operator console and power it via not more than 3 pairs of
wires at distances of up to 500 meters from the switching equipment.
The EPABX-operator console shall be equipped with a visual display unit, VDU, showing the progress
of calls through the EPABX and information relevant to these calls.
The visual display shall be Light Emitting Diode (LED) or Liquid Crystal Display, (LCD) type, with the
control functions located in keyboard.
The design shall take due consideration to ergonomic aspects thereby contributing to "stress free"
operation.
It shall be possible to equip the EPABX-operator console with either a normal
handset and/or lightweight headset, connected to either side of the keyboard
by a plug and jack.
The following facilities and functions at least shall be at the disposal of the
EPABX-operator.
A SEPARATE VDU (LED OR LCD TYPE) THAT CAN SHOW:
10.6.1 Call type
10.6.2 Called and calling extension numbers
10.6.3 Trunk line number and route number
10.6.4
Extension
state,
i.e.
whether
free,
busy,
busy
with call
camped-on,
number unassigned and barred from initiating external calls
10.6.5
For
diverted
calls,
the
number
of
the diverted extension
and the
divertee extension
10.6.6 Identification of party connected to a called extension
10.6.7 Data relevant to a metered call
10.6.8 Quantity of calls queuing
10.6.9 Alarm indication
A SEPARATE KEYBOARD WITH THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:
10.6.10
On/off duty switching
10.6.11
Possibility
to
program
the
PABX-extensions
and individual night service
10.6.12
Call acceptance and extending, automatic and manual
10.6.13
Call holding with monitoring function
10.6.14
Call parking
10.6.15
Call signalling, acoustic, continuous or single tone burst
for
universal,
common
A SEPARATE KEYBOARD WITH THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS: (cont’d)
10.6.16
Call splitting
10.6.17
Camp-on busy
10.6.18
Trunk offering (also combined with camp-on busy)
10.6.19
Forced release
A SEPARATE KEYBOARD WITH THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:
10.6.20 Individual trunk line selection with intrusion on busy lines
16740 - 7
Telephone System
10.6.21
10.6.22
10.6.23
10.6.24
10.6.25
10.6.26
10.6.27
Automatic call back - busy trunk
Intrusion with warn tone
Independent disconnection/reconnection of connected parties
Establishment of conference calls with up to 8 participants
Manual initiation of ring signal to extension
Abbreviated dialling, common repertory
Serial calls
11.0
11.1
Traffic Requirements and Measurements
The EPABX shall be able to carry a traffic of at least 0.19 erlang/station in any configuration.
This shall be based on an internal traffic of 20-40% and a total grade of service of 0.01.
11.2 By commands issued via the I/0-terminal and without extra hardware being required the following
shall be possible.
11.2.1 Route measurements including:
- number of calls, all types
- number of blocked calls
- traffic in erlangs
- number of calls dialed to EPABX-operator on DID-trunks
- number of calls diverted to EPABX-operator on DID-trunks
11.2.2 PABX-operator measurements including:
- number of answered new calls
- number of calls initiated by the EPABX-operator
- number of answered recalls
- number of abandoned calls
- number of abandoned recalls
- accumulation of delay due to EPABX-operator response time
- accumulation of handling time for new calls
- accumulation of handling time for recalls
- accumulation of manned time
11.2.3 Dial tone delay measurements including:
- number of calls with a delay greater than 1 second
- number of calls with a delay greater than 3 seconds
- accumulated dial tone delay for calls with a dial tone delay greater than 1 second
12. 0
12.1
Power Equipment and Consumption
The D.C. power supplied to the system shall be 48V, but the system shall function satisfactorily
between 44 and 56V.
12.2
Other voltages used in the system shall be converted from the 48 volt supply in separate DC/DC
converters.
12.3
The EPABX shall be provided with a rectifier and batteries performing on 220/130V, 60 Hz) with
permissible variations of -10 to +10% for the mains voltage.
12.4
Battery back-up for at least (8) hours service with maximum traffic shall be included.
12.5
The permissible variation range for the rectifier is 49-51V during normal working conditions and 54V
during battery recharging.
12.6
The maximum permitted power consumption for the total EPABX shall not exceed 2.5 watts per
line.
12.7
The AC noise voltage measured with sophomore filter (as per CCITT Rec. P53A) must not exceed
2mV.
12.8 The battery rectifiers shall be sized to provide recharging of fully discharged batteries to full charge
within 24 hours while carrying the normal EPABX load.
13.0
13.1
13.1.1
13.1.2
13.1.3
13.1.4
13.1.5
13.1.6
Operation and Maintenance
General
The following principles shall be employed:
Remote operation and maintenance shall be possible.
All common equipment shall be continuously surveilled by a built-in supervisory system.
If faults occur, measures to limit the effects shall be undertaken automatically.
There shall be no need for preventive maintenance and manual testing during
operation of the system.
Fault localization down to printed circuit board level shall normally be made
automatically with the built-in supervisory system.
Atleast 16 external alarms from e.g. battery and transmission equipment shall
be supervised.
At least four different classes of alarm issued by supervisory
functions shall
be indicated in the exchange room
and on the EPABX16740 - 8
Telephone System
operator
consoles.
Detailed
information
shall
be
available
from
I/0-terminal.
13.1.7
It shall be possible to add, alter or expand facilities.
13.1.8
Software system shall be built up in function- oriented modules.
13.1.9
Disturbances in one module must not spread to other modules in the system.
13.1.10 It shall be possible to provide programs and certain data with write protection.
13.1.11
The programs shall be stored in electrically changeable memories and
tenderer shall state what type of memory backup will be provided.
the
the
13.1
General (cont’d)
13.2
I/O Functions
13.2.1
It shall be possible to connect up to 6 input/output (I/O) - units of standard type
(printer or display terminals) concurrently to the system via standard CCITT
V.24 interfaces, directy or remotely via standard modems.
13.2.2
An I/O unit shall be used for:
- handling of system and customer data
- fault reports
- fault locating
- traffic recording
13.2.3
The Man-machine language shall be simple to use.
It shall be possible to allocate any command to one of four authorization
classes and a changeable password shall be associated with each class (e.g.
for installation, administration, operation and maintenance).
13.3
Fault Localization
It shall be possible to locate faults by means of alarm information, program
controlled tests and or test connections.
With these methods it shall be possible to locate at least 85% of the faults
down to printed circuit
board level and 10% of the faults down to one out of 4
PCBs as a statistical average.
Tests shall not disturb the normal operation of the system.
14.0
Components
Solid-state Low –power type system components shall be used. The integrated circuits shall have ceramic
capsules. All components shall be mounted on printed circuit boards.
15.0
15.1
Environmental Conditions
General
The EPABX shall be designed to withstand troopical climates and an ambient temperature during
operation of +5 degrees C to +35 degrees C at a relative humidity of 20-60% without degrading the
service and up to 55 degrees C without damage.
The EPABX shall not require external fans for cooling the equipment.
15.2
Over-Voltages Caused By Lightning
The switching equipment must withstand the over voltage stated below without degrdation of any
component.
This requirement shall also be fulfilled if one of the wires in the exchange is
connected to earth. The over- voltage may be positive or negative.
Peak voltage
1000 V
Rise time
10 us
Time to half value
1000 us
15.3
Ringing Current
Accidental
connection
between the ringing source and the electronic
the extension line circuits and trunk line circuits shall not destory any components.
15.4
devices
in
Electrical Network
Over-voltages, caused by direct connection of an extension line to power lines,
240V, 50Hz, shall not destory more than the individual line equipment and shall not
cause fire.
END OF SECTION
16740 - 9
Telephone System
SECTION 16760
INTERCOM SYSTEM
1.01
General Description
The work in question is to be executed in the hospital building (Operation Theatre), and is to
include the supply and installation of a complete Intercom system, with all parts and accessories
therefore, in accordance with the instructions of the specifications, the drawings and the Bills of
Quantities.
1.02
General Directives for Execution
A. Installation of Accessories
1. All equipment items shall be installed in their proper locations in accordance with the
drawings. Most equipment items shall be installed under the plastering, and in
accordance with the instructions included in the drawings.
2. The contractor must obtain the supervisor and planner's approval for the precise location
of each accessory prior to execution. He should also obtain their approval for the
reinforcing and installation methods he intends to use.
B.
Wiring
1. All wiring shall be carried out using multiple-wire cables, as specified in the wiring
diagrams, the supply schematics, and in accordance with the instructions issued by the
equipment suppliers.
2. Cables shall be routed through the piping and communication ducts installed during the
construction stage, in accordance with the drawings.
C.
Marking and Identification
1. Identification and instruction signs shall be installed next to all system accessories, in
accordance with the requirements of the specifications and drawings.
2. All signs shall be "sandwich" type.
3. The costs of all signs shall be included in the regular unit prices, and will merit no
separate payment.
D.
System Testing and commissioning
The system shall be tested and operated for a trial run, and will only be delivered to the client
after it has been operated, tested and completed to the clients fullest satisfaction.
Upon delivery, the contractor must supply 3 sets of manuals which are to cover the equipment
items installed and supplied (catalogues, etc.), as well as an "As-Made wiring diagram for the
system.
E.
Equipment and Accessories
1. All system parts, such as the Intercom units installed in the operation room and near
entrance doors, electrical locks, power-supply units, switching relays, etc., must be of the
highest quality and must also conform to applicable standards.
2. The equipment suppliers must be capable of supplying spare parts and repair services for
a minimum period of 10 years from the date of installation.
3. The types and specifications of all equipment items, including brochures and samples
must be submitted to the client and planner's approval prior to installation.
4.
The Intercom system and accessories shall be as manufactured by
AIPHONE.
END OF SECTION
16760 - 1
INTERCOM SYSTEM
SECTION 16771
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
Description Of Work
A. This section applies to the public address system.
B. The quantity and location of apparatus comprising a complete system as shown on drawings.
1.02
System Description
Equipment shall be shown with microphones and loudspeaker units positioned where indicated
on the drawings to provide the maximum flexibility and coverage for broadcasting.
1.03
Quality Assurance
Equipment shall be purchased only from single manufacturer established and specializing in
these types of products.
1.04
Submittals
A. Manufacturers shall submit drawings and illustrated leaflets of the various types of apparatus
offered.
B. For speakers submit the following:
1. Characteristic curves for defined methods of mounting on ceilings.
2. Suitability for continuous full output power handling.
3. Types recommendations by manufacturer with application and environment considerations.
Suitable cabinets for internal loudspeakers to be flushed to ceilings.
1.05
A.
B.
C.
PART 2
Delivery and Handling
Pack to protect all apparatus during transportation and storage.
Store in dry location.
Do not install equipment until it can be protected from damage during construction.
PRODUCTS
2.01
Equipment
A. To provide high quality reproduction and natural sounding speech/music from a good amplitude
modulated amplifier.
B. Supply:
1. Central rack including all necessary equipment such as Amplifiers, power supply, Radio
tuner AM/FM, double deck cassette recorder, CD player, Zone selections,...etc. as shown
on drawings and B.O.Q.
2. Microphone call stations
3. Column loudspeakers indoor type wall mounted type 24W each complete with tap
transformer .
4. Horn type loudspeaker indoor and outdoor type shall be as shown on the drawings.
5. 6W round type recessed ceiling mounted loudspeakers with tap transformers.
6. Selector switches (if any).
C. Level of Sound Output: The system shall be designed so that it is capable of providing without
the undue distortion the maximum loudness likely to be required taking into account such
factors as audience absorption and the maximum ambient noise level.
D. For internal output a mean sound intensity level of 60dB relative to 5 - 8W/cm2) shall be
provided and 20 dB below maximum available from the amplifier and speakers and not after
allowance for the loudest passages so as not to create distortion in output quality. The rated
power of the amplifier shall not be less than 12.5 m per 13000 m3.
2.02
Microphones
Suitable for amino directional response. Smooth response over range of frequencies for the
system. Move coil, ribbon or piezo electric as most suitable for the amplifier.
16771-1
Public Address System
2.03
Amplifiers
A. To operate continuously on the environmental conditions stated earlier.
B. Low voltage to speakers not in excess of 100V. Inputs to the amplifier shall be high enough to
produce full power output stated earlier.
C. Frequency response: With filter inoperative, tone control set for desired response the frequency
response shall not vary more than 2 dB over:
100 Hz to 15 KHz at rated output
2.04
Distortion
With same conditions of frequency response the total harmonic content at rated power should
not exceed:
2% (-34 dB) at 100 Hz
2.05
Loudspeakers
A. Loudspeakers shall provide close frequency response. Loss of higher frequencies shall not
exceed 10 dB at the highest frequency.
B. Line transformers shall also be fitted to loudspeakers where individual outputs require to be
adjusted.
2.06
Radio Tuner
rack mounted tuner shall be provided. The tuner shall provide for-set selection of 16 FM
stations to program individually in the frequency range of 87.5 ~108.0 MHz. Automatically and
manual station searching mode. LCD and LED display.
The tuner shall provide the following minimum performance:
Input Sensitivity
:
1.5
THD
:
0.5%
If Bandwidth
:
250 Khz
Antenna Input
:
75
Output Signal
:
0 - 500 mV adjustable
Poser Supply
:
24 VDC
2.07
Cassette Player
Rack mounted cassette player units of the industrial quality shall be provided for replay of
background music.
Each player shall beef fully controlled electronically by press of a button, and shall accept standard
compact cassettes sand shall provide at least 3 hours continuous replay with out repeat.
The Cassette Player shall provide the following minimum performance:
WOW and Flutter
:
<0.15% (DIN)
Signal - to - noise ratio
:
> 52 dB (DIN)
Frequency response
:
60 …. 18000 Hz
Output voltage (mono)
:
Max. 0 dB, adjustable
Output Voltage (Stereo)
:
2 x 400mV
Mechanical Features
Tape Speed
:
4.75 cm/sec
rewind time
:
120 seconds for C 60 Cassettes
motor
:
2+1 motors with revolving sound.
head and no slip clutches
Tape monitoring
:
Electronic with air cushioned
compartment and auto - reverse
function.
Material
:
sendust sound head
Cassette Head Cleaner:
An non - abrasive cassette unit head cleaning cassette shall be obtained within the system manual.
2.08
Compact Disk Player
A rack mounted compact disc (CD) player shall be provided.
The CD Player shall provide the following minimum performance:
A.
One control Load and Play
B.
Continuous repeat of a pre-programmed track selection.
C.
Latching pause control.
D.
Visible display of track number and of total playing time in the inserted disc.
The CD player shall include a cartridge for pre-loading of 5 or 6 compact discs, with random track
selection facilities.
16771-2
Public Address System
2.08
Compact Disk Player (cont’d)
The CD player shall provide the following minim performance:
A.
Frequency response 40 Hz - 20 kHz ± 0.5 dB.
B.
Signal - to - noise ration (S/N) > 100 dB (A).
C.
Channel separation > 85 dB
D.
Harmonic distortion < 0.01 % @ 1 KHz
2.09
Test Input
An industry standard socket with gain control (female XLR-3 or standard ¼” jack) shall be obtained
for the rack for the insertion of external test sources.
A latching switch shall be provided on the rack for continuos broadcast of test message.
2.10
Loudspeakers
A.
Distribution Cone Loudspeakers
Distribution ceiling mounted cone loudspeaker shall be provided in all areas within the suspended
ceiling. Loudspeakers shall be round, white with metal grid.
Distribution loudspeaker shall be high quality core unit sand shall be fitted wit bayonet in the
mounting ring for rapped and easy fitting.
Ceiling loudspeaker shall be fitted with suitable acoustic enclosure and shall have a built in
matching transformer with taps for 100 V @ 6, 3, 1.5 and 0.75 watts.
Distributed cone loudspeaker shall provide the following minim performance:
1. Power
: 6/9 watts
2. Frequency range (-3dB)
: 80 …15000 Hz
3. Sound pressure (1w/1m)
: 90 dB
4. Impedance
: 4
B.
Horn Loudspeakers
Re-Entrant horn loudspeakers shall be provided in plant and high noise level areas.
The loudspeaker horn and river unit shall be of rugged, impact resistant construction and shall meet
the following minimum performance:
1.
Handling power
: 15 watts
2.
frequency range ) -3db)
: 250 …. 8000 Hz
3.
acoustic pressure (1w/1m)
: 118 dB
4.
basic impedance
: 8
5.
matching transformer $@ 100 V
: 15, 7.5, and 3.8 watts
the horn loudspeakers shall be provided with rugged brackets which shall permit a minimum of + 45 o c (horizontal), site adjustment in one plane only shall not be acceptable.
Miniature re-entrant horn loudspeakers installed within diecast or plastic rectangular assemblies,
shall be installed in quiet plant areas (> 75dB (A)) and in service corridors. The assemblies shall be
temperature rated (aluminum range - 10 o C to + 65 o C).
Loudspeakers horn shall be suitable for the environment in which they are installed.
2.11
A.
Column Loudspeakers
The column loudspeaker shall be a rugged design in metal of indoor and outdoor rain
protected mounting, with expanded metal from cover.
Simple installation shall be accomplished with supplied mounting brackets.
The column loudspeaker shall be for professional application with high reproduction quality for
music and speech.
The column loudspeaker shall be for professional application with high reproduction quality for
music and a speech.
The column loudspeaker shall meet the following minimum performance:
1.
Handling power
:
20 watts
2.
Frequency range
:
140 …. 145000 Hz
3.
Acoustic pressure (1w/1m)
:
95 dB
4.
Matching transformer @ 50 / 100 V
:
20,12.5, .6.2 and 3 watts
2.12
Cabling
A. All cables for the sound system are to be white PVC sheathed - PVC insulated copper cables,
not less than 2.5mm2.
B. Microphone cables shall be twisted pairs screened with tinned copper closely lapped or braided.
The screening shall be sheathed overall with PVC insulation.
C. Flexible cables shall be hard service cord high temperature thermoplastic insulated.
16771-3
Public Address System
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
Inspection
A. The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which the system is to be
installed and function.
B. Correct any unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the
Supervising Engineer.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Installation
Power supply to be provided adjacent to the amplifier.
All equipment metal enclosures to be grounded.
A separate un insulated grounding system for connection to cable screens.
Room where amplifier is installed shall be adequately ventilated.
Public address system cable shall not be placed in any raceway or cable trays with conductors
for lighting or power cables or cable carrying voltages higher than 100V.
Power supply shall be durably marked to indicate the class of supply.
All non-current carrying metal parts of equipment shall be grounded.
All fixed cabling shall be carried out as a fixed wiring system.
Joints shall not be permitted.
Boxes shall be fitted in dry locations where possible. Boxes fitted in damp locations shall be
waterproof pattern.
Wires forming a pair shall not be split. Distribution boxes shall provide separate terminals for all
incoming and outgoing wires with cross connection facilities.
One terminal shall contain one wire only. Spare wires shall be left long enough to reach any
terminal.
A schedule shall be fixed to the inside face of the box cover showing all connections and giving
details of the wiring.
Cables shall not be run externally.
Adequate protection shall be provided for all accidental damage or unauthorized interference.
P/A System shall be connected and interfaced with other sound systems in the project.
3.03
Field Quality Control
A. The completed installation shall be inspected to ensure the work has been carried out in a
satisfactory manner and that the methods, materials and components shall comply with the
specification, drawings and manufacturer's recommendation.
B. A functional test of the installation shall be made to ensure the installation will give satisfactory
service under all conditions likely to be experienced.
C. Earthing connections shall be checked and tested.
END OF SECITON
16771-4
Public Address System
SECTION 16780
TELEVISION AND VIDEO DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
Work Included
Furnish, install, connect and test a complete facility television distribution system, terminated to the
existing T.V. and satellite systems.
1.02
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
A.
Section 16111 : Conduit
B.
Section 16161 : Grounding and Bonding
C.
Section 16134 : Outlet Boxes
D.
Section 16781 : Community Antenna System
1.03
Reference Standards
Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker (VDE) Association of German Electrical Engineers)
A.
VDE 0887:Radio frequency cable, coaxial, Z = 75 ohm, for television
antenna systems.
1.04
Submittals
Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's Literature for:
A.
All passive components.
B.
Television outlets.
C.
Coaxial cable.
D. Amplifiers.
1.05
A.
B.
C.
Description of System
The system shall receive a signal from a roof mounted antenna, or from a
community aerial television (CATV) system or from a closed circuit TV system via
co-axial cable.
The system shall provide for reception of colour TV transmission at every outlet,
as shown on the drawings. The signal level measured at the outlet socket shall be
between 65 dBuV and 77dBuV.
All equipment shall be designed and rated for 230 volts, single phase, 50Hz
AC operation and shall be rated for 24 hours continuous operation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
General
Equipment furnished shall be the standard product of one manufacturer. All items of equipment
including cable shall be designed by the manufacturers to operate as a complete system and shall be
accompanied by manufacturers complete service notes and drawing detailing all interconnectors.
2.02
Passive Components
All passive components, i.e. splitters, directional couplers, matching networks and matching
transformers shall be 75 ohm back matched variety with band pass capacity of 5 to 300 MHz with
flatness of plus or minus 0.5 db or better over the entire frequency range of each unit measured. Input
and output return loss is to be 20 db or greater for each component over the complete frequency
range.
2.03
Tap-Off Units
Tap-off units shall be all channel devices (2-860MHz). They shall be 75 ohm "back matched", "flat
loss" units. Isolation and insertion loss shall be chosen for each location to enable the total system to
perform as required. Tap-off units shall be capable of mounting in standard size wall boxes and shall
be equipped with crimp-on bushings to accept the cable.
2.04
Terminating Resistors
Terminating resistors shall be used to terminate the ends of all branches of the system and shall be
devices specifically designed for the purpose of terminating coaxial lines. They shall be of a physical
configuration that shall allow mechanical integration of terminators into the system as needed.
16780 - 1
Television & Vidio Distribution SystemT
2.05
Coaxial Cable
Co-Axial cable shall have 75-ohm impedance and shall be marked with the manufacturer's name. It
shall be sweep tested by the manufacturer and certification shall be available on request. No
discontinuity shall exist on the cable within the television frequency bands, 5 to 890 MHZ. The
attenuation of distribution cable between the TV sockets should be less than 18 dB /100m and the
attenuation of riser cable should be less than 9 dB / 100m.
2.06
Wiring
Wiring shall consist of television coaxial cable in PVC conduits.
2.07
Channelised Ampifiers
Using frequency converters via intermediate frequency.
Frequency Converters Via Intermediate Frequency
The frequency converter shall have the following features:
- To convert a CCIR TV channel, standard B/G or standard I or an ORIT TV channel standard D/K.
- Conversion from the VHF1, LSC VHF3, USC or UHF bands to any chosen VHF or UHF channel
via the standard intermediate frequency.
- Consisting of two single components, an input converter ... and an output converter.
Input Converters
The input converter shall have the following features:
- Convert